Documentação Completa - Payper

TIMAC AGRO
CANDEIAS
4510.00/15
INST. TOP LOAD PM

PAYPER, S.A.
Pol. Ind. El Segre, par. 115 - 25191 LLEIDA
Apdo. Correos 380 - 25080 LLEIDA (SPAIN)
Tel. +34.973.216.040 Fax. +34.973.205.893
e-mail. payper@payper.com
http://www.payper.com
Queira receber as nossas mais sinceras felicitações pela aquisição de um dos

nossos produtos. A PAYPER, S.A. agradece a confiança demonstrada com a
escolha da nossa marca.
A eficácia comprovada desta máquina resulta de mais de trinta anos dedicados ao

setor da pesagem e ensacamento, à qualidade de todos os seus elementos e ao
controlo exaustivo durante todo o processo de fabrico.
Todos os dispositivos de segurança estão integrados na máquina, fazendo parte da

mesma. A modificação de qualquer elemento da máquina pelo utilizador eleva o
risco de acidentes resultantes da utilização da máquina e representa uma infração
da Diretiva de Máquinas 2006/42/CE e das Diretivas 2006/95/CE e 2004/108/CEE
e das normas de harmonização: EN-12100:2010, EN-13857:2008, EN-60204-
1:2006, EN-13850:2008, EN-13855:2010 e EN-415-1:2000+A1:2009, de
segurança e saúde para a utilização dos equipamentos de trabalho.
Preste a máxima atenção às instruções disponibilizadas para uma correta instalação

e utilização da máquina, pois disso irá depender a máxima duração e o perfeito
comportamento da mesma. Se, depois de ler o manual, desejar alguma informação
complementar, não hesite em contactar-nos.
A PAYPER, S.A., na sua qualidade de fabricante, reserva-se o direito de modificar

ou melhorar os seus produtos sem aviso prévio e sem qualquer obrigação de
incorporar as referidas modificações ou melhorias nos produtos que já tenham sido
comercializados.
Subscrevemo-nos reiterando o nosso agradecimento.
Atentamente.
PAYPER, S.A.
EMPRESA:
TIMAC AGRO
CANDEIAS
MÓDELO: INST. TOP LOAD PM
INST. Nº: 4510.00/15
e-mail: payper@payper.com
PAYPER, S.A.
Pol. Ind. El Segre, par. 115 - 25191 LLEIDA
Apdo. Correos 380 - 25080 LLEIDA (SPAIN)
Tel. +34.973.216.040 Fax. +34.973.205.893
e-mail. payper@payper.com
SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.

• Para realizar uma montagem, uma colocação em funcionamento ou uma reparação.
Contactar o Sr.
Juan Manuel Sanz +34 973 216 213 - (*) Ext. 359
JuanManuel.Sanz@payper.com
Ruben Ferrer Amorós +34 973 162 15 –(*) Ext. 307-327
Ruben.Ferrer@payper.com
SERVIÇO DE PEÇAS SOBRESSELENTES.
• Para solicitar qualquer peça da instalação.
Contactar o Sr.
Angel González +34 973 216 209 - (*) Ext. 313
Angel.Gonzalez@payper.com
GABINETE TÉCNICO
• Para consultar qualquer dado técnico referente à instalação.
Contactar o Sr.
Joan Arjó +34 973 216 218 - (*) Ext. 355
Joan.Arjo@payper.com
DEPARTAMENTO COMERCIAL
• Para realizar uma ampliação na instalação ou consultar inovações dos nossos produtos.
Contactar o Sr.
Xavier Vilimelis +34 973 216 200 - (*) Ext. 304
Xavier.Vilimelis@payper.com
Também é possível contactar os nossos departamentos através de:
(*) +34 973 216 040 Telefone central.

Fax +34 973 205 893
Certificado CE
CE Declaración de Conformidad
EC Declaration of Conformity
CE Déclaration de Conformité
EG Konformitätserklärung
PAYPER S.A.
Pol. Ind. El Segre, par. 115
25191 LLEIDA (SPAIN)
: +34.973.216.040
Fax: +34.973.205.893
http: //www.payper.com
Con esta declaración de With this conformity declaration, Par cette déclaration de conformité, Com esta declaração de
conformidad, declaramos que las we hereby declare that the nous certifions que les machines, conformidade, declaramos que as
máquinas según se describe en la machines described in the attached suivant la description de la máquinas descritas na
documentación adjunta, están documentation, are manufactured documentation ci-jointe, son documentação anexa são
fabricadas de acuerdo a la according to the Machines fabriquées selon la directive des fabricadas de acordo com a
Directiva de Máquinas Directive 2006/42/CE and machines 2006/42/CE et les Diretiva de Máquinas 2006/42/CE
2006/42/CE y las Directivas Directives 95/2006/CE and directives 95/2006/CE et e as Diretivas 95/2006/CE e
95/2006/CE y 2004/108/CEE y a 2004/108/CEE and the Directive 2004/108/CEE et le directive sur les 2004/108/CEE e a Diretiva de
la Directiva de instrumentos de on measuring instruments instruments de mesure 2004/22/CE. Instrumentos de Medição
medida 2004/22/CE y a las normas 2004/22/CE and harmonization Suivant les normes d’harmonisation: 2004/22/CE e as normas de
de armonización: EN-12100:2010, norms: EN-12100:2010, EN EN-12100:2010, EN 13857:2008, harmonização: EN-12100:2010,
EN 13857:2008, EN 60204- 13857:2008, EN 60204-1:2006, EN 60204-1:2006, EN 13850:2008, EN-13857:2008, EN-60204-
1:2006, EN 13850:2008, EN EN 13850:2008, EN 13855:2010 EN 13855:2010 et EN 415- 1:2006, EN-13850:2008, EN-
13855:2010 y EN 415- and EN 415-1:2000+A1:2009. 1:2000+A1:2009. 13855:2010 e EN-415-
1:2000+A1:2009. 1:2000+A1:2009.
Tipo: Modelo: Nº Serie: Año de fabricación:

Type: Model: Serial no: Year of manufacture:
Type: Model: No. de machine: Année de construction:
Tipo: Modelo: N.º de Série: Ano de fabrico:
PALETIZADOR TOP LOAD PM 608045100001 2015
LLEIDA, a 20 de Agosto de 2015.
Angel Rossell Roig

Director general
General manager
Directeur général
Generaldirektor
TIMAC AGRO CANDEIAS 4510.00/15
CE Declaración de Conformidad
EC Declaration of Conformity
CE Déclaration de Conformité
EG Konformitätserklärung
PAYPER S.A.
Pol. Ind. El Segre, par. 115
25191 LLEIDA (SPAIN)
✆: +34.973.216.040
Fax: +34.973.205.893
http: //www.payper.com
Con esta declaración de With this conformity declaration, Par cette déclaration de conformité, Mit dieser Konformitätserklärung,
conformidad, declaramos que las we hereby declare that the nous certifions que les machines, erklären wir, dass die Maschine
máquinas según se describe en la machines described in the attached suivant la description de la wie sie in der beiligenden
documentación adjunta, están documentation, are manufactured documentation ci-jointe, son Dokumentation beschrieben ist,
fabricadas de acuerdo a la according to the Machines fabriquées selon la directive des Laut der Richtline für Maschinen
Directiva de Máquinas Directive 2006/42/CE and machines 2006/42/CE et les 2006/42/CE und Richtline
2006/42/CE y las Directivas Directives 95/2006/CE and directives 95/2006/CE et 95/2006/CE und 2004/108/CEE
95/2006/CE y 2004/108/CEE y a 2004/108/CEE and harmonization 2004/108/CEE. Suivant les normes und nach der harmonisierten
las normas de armonización: EN- norms: EN-12100:2010, EN d’harmonisation: EN-12100:2010, Norme: EN-12100:2010, EN
12100:2010, EN 13857:2008, EN 13857:2008, EN 60204-1:2006, EN 13857:2008, EN 60204-1:2006, 13857:2008, EN 60204-1:2006,
60204-1:2006, EN 13850:2008, EN 13850:2008, EN 13855:2010 EN 13850:2008, EN 13855:2010 et EN 13850:2008, EN 13855:2010
EN 13855:2010 y EN 415- and EN 415-1:2000+A1:2009. EN 415-1:2000+A1:2009. und EN 415-1:2000+A1:2009.
1:2000+A1:2009.
Tipo: Nº de pedido: Según plano de implantación Nº: Año de fabricación:

Type: Order No: According implementation plan No Year of manufacture:
Type: Nº commande: Comme le plan d’encombrement Nº: Année de construction:
Tipo: Ordem nãoo: Implante no plano No.e: Ano de fabrico:
INSTALACIÓN 1007912
TOP LOAD PM 4510.00/15 Versión A1 2015
1.1.1.a.1.a.1.a
LLEIDA, a 20 de Agosto de 2015. 1.1.1.a.1.a.1.b
Angel Rossell Roig

Director general
General manager
Directeur général
Generaldirektor
TIMAC AGRO CANDEIAS 4510.00/15

Placa de características da máquina
Limitação de responsabilidades
Em princípio, prevalecem as condições de venda e fornecimento da PAYPER S.A. Estas
permanecem válidas até ao termo do contrato em causa. Os direitos de garantia e a
responsabilidade de pessoas e coisas serão dados por terminados quando ocorrerem um ou mais
dos seguintes motivos:
• Não aplicação no uso previsto da instalação.

• Montagem, colocação em funcionamento, utilização e manutenção da instalação
inadequadas por parte do utilizador.
• Defeitos de programação ou utilização por parte do utilizador.
• Remoção de dispositivos de protecção.
• Utilização da instalação com defeitos perceptíveis para o operário nos dispositivos de
protecção ou sem o funcionamento correcto dos dispositivos de segurança e protecção.
• Não cumprimento das indicações das instruções de utilização relativas à montagem,
colocação em serviço, utilização, manutenção e preparação.
• Modificações construtivas arbitrárias da instalação.
• Reparação levada a cabo inadequadamente.
• Modificações eléctricas inadequadas levadas a cabo pelo cliente.
• Desgaste e deterioração natural da instalação.
• Avaria catastrófica pela influência de um corpo estranho ou força maior.
TABLA DE CONTENIDOS
1. Descrição
1.1 Advertencias generales
1.2. Limitações das prestações gerais
1.2 Câmara distribuidora:
1.3 Caminho de rolos:
1.4 Acumulador de rolos:
1.5 Tapete de rolos:
1.6 Alisador de rolos:
1.7 Tapete do rotador:
1.8 Flap de rotação:
1.9 Tapete de chapa:
1.10 Estrutura de suporte para tapetes:
1.11 Passarela de manutenção:
1.12 Conjunto raspador:
1.13 Conjunto de três compactadores:
1.14 Conjunto falsa pá:
1.15 Mesa de elevação:
1.16 Corpo superior do paletizador:
1.17 Corpo inferior:
1.19 Aplicador de folhas:
2. Instalação e ligação da máquina
2.1. Considerações gerais
2.2. Descarga e armazenagem
2.4. Localização e montagem
2.5. Ligações de energia e fluidos
2.5.1. Ligação eléctrica
2.5.2. Ligação pneumática
2.6. Plano de Instalação
3. Instruções de segurança
3.1. Normas de segurança
3.2. Indicações nas instruções de funcionamento a respeitar
3.3. Explicação dos símbolos e indicações
3.4. Símbolos de segurança utilizados na máquina
3.5. Deveres da empresa
3.6. Deveres do pessoal
3.7. Perigo na utilização da máquina
3.8. Utilização prevista
3.9. Medidas organizativas
3.10. Dispositivos de protecção
3.11. Informação sobre as medidas de segurança
3.12. Formação do pessoal
3.13. Medidas de segurança em funcionamento normal
3.14. Perigo por corrente eléctrica
3.15. Assistência, manutenção e reparação de avarias
3.16. Perigo por gás, pó e fumo
3.17. Perigo por energia hidráulica
3.18. Perigo por energia pneumática
3.19. Perigo por ruído
3.20. Perigo por óleos, gorduras e outras substâncias químicas
3.21. Situações especiais de perigo
3.22. Alterações de construção na instalação
3.23. Limpeza da instalação
3.24. Limpeza do armário eléctrico
3.32 Tapete:
4 Manual de Operação
4.1 Funcionamento geral
4.2 Descrição de elementos/estações
4.2.1 Tapete ascendente
4.2.2 Acumulador de rolos livres
4.2.3 Alisador
4.2.4 Rotador ou mecanismo de orientação
4.2.5 Tapete de agrupamento
4.2.6 Impulsor
4.2.7 Compactadores
4.2.8 Comporta
4.2.9 Plataforma de elevação
4.3 Particularidades dos diferentes modelos
4.3.1 TOP-LOAD P S
4.3.2 TOP-LOAD P M
4.3.3 TOP-LOAD P L
4.4 Operação
4.4.1 Funcionamento básico
4.4.2 Opções de funcionamento
4.5 Descrição dos painéis de controlo
4.5.1 Armário principal
4.5.2 Painel de comandos
4.5.3 Botoneira da porta de acesso inferior
4.6 Terminal tátil
4.6.1 Funcionamento geral
4.6.2 Receitas
4.6.3 Manutenção
4.6.4 Seletores
4.6.5 Produção
4.6.6 Alarmes
4.6.7 Idioma
5 Esquemas Eléctricos
6 Programa
7 Esquemas Pneumáticos
8 Planos e Listas
9. Manutenção
9.1. Aspetos gerais da manutenção:
9.1.1. MANUTENÇÃO ELÉTRICA (armário elétrico)
9.1.2. MANUTENÇÃO PNEUMÁTICA
9.1.3. CONTROLO DOS CILINDROS E VÁLVULAS
9.1.4. LUBRIFICAÇÃO
9.3 Transportador de rolos:
9.17 MÉTODO PARA COMPROVAR A ESTANQUEIDADE NUM CILINDRO PNEUMÁTICO
9.17. LIMPEZA OU EVACUAÇÃO DE RESTOS DE PRODUTO
9.18. LUBRIFICAÇÃO
9.19. Plano de manutenção
10 Componentes Especiais
10.1 Motorreductores
10.2 Variadores de frecuencia
Descrição
1. Descrição
1.1 Advertencias generales
O presente manual constitui parte integrante e essencial do produto. Aconselhamos uma leitura
atenta das instruções aqui apresentadas, já que contêm indicações importantes sobre a
segurança, a utilização e a manutenção da máquina.
Qualquer incumprimento das indicações descritas neste manual, da legislação de segurança e

higiene no trabalho e das normas gerais do senso comum PODEM OCASIONAR danos
pessoais nos operários.
• A máquina DEVE SER UTILIZADA por pessoal devidamente qualificado, que leu
atentamente o presente manual, que foi formado e que conhece perfeitamente o
funcionamento da máquina.
• Esta máquina deverá ser destinada exclusivamente à utilização para a qual foi
concebida. Qualquer outra aplicação é considerada imprópria e, portanto, perigosa. O
fabricante declina toda e qualquer responsabilidade por eventuais danos causados por
uma utilização incorrecta, errónea ou irracional.
• A PAYPER, S.A. considera-se responsável pela máquina unicamente na sua
configuração original.
• Qualquer modificação que altere a estrutura ou o modo de funcionamento deve ser
realizada ou autorizada pelo departamento técnico da PAYPER, S.A.
• NÃO REMOVER nenhum dispositivo de segurança NEM MODIFICAR OU
MANIPULAR nenhum elemento eléctrico ou mecânico da máquina. NÃO INSTALAR
elementos estranhos à máquina.
• NÃO UTILIZAR a máquina se for notado algum ruído ou odor anormal ou com alguma
peça defeituosa.
• Contactar com o Serviço Técnico em caso de qualquer dúvida, anomalia ou problema
que surja.
• A PAYPER, S.A. não será responsável por consequências resultantes da utilização de
peças não originais.
• A PAYPER, S.A. reserva-se o direito de realizar modificações técnicas ao presente
manual e à máquina, sem obrigação de aviso prévio. No caso de haver erros tipográficos
ou de outro tipo, as correcções serão incluídas nas novas versões do manual.
Para a sua própria segurança e da instalação, deve ler e compreender as instruções incluídas
neste documento antes de trabalhar com a máquina.
Guarde as instruções num local acessível a todas as pessoas que trabalham com a máquina para
que estas as possam consultar.
Unicamente o pessoal autorizado e qualificado deve trabalhar na instalação.

O FABRICANTE DECLINA TODA E QUALQUER RESPONSABILIDADE EM CASO
DE NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DAS INSTRUÇÕES DESTE MANUAL.
1.2. Limitações das prestações gerais
As prestações da máquina, o campo de aplicação, a descrição técnica, etc., apresentados neste

manual são indicativos. Irão depender principalmente de:
• O acordo contratual;
• Do produto;
• Do conjunto da instalação;
• Dos testes realizados pela PAYPER, S.A.
Em qualquer caso prevalecerão os dados, os valores e as indicações que existam no plano da

instalação e/ou no contrato assinado pelas partes envolvidas.
Dispositivo com uma pilha de paletes que, quando uma é necessária, levanta todas as que estão
sobre a primeira com umas puas. Depois o caminho de rolos, acionado por um motorredutor,
transporta a palete para a estação seguinte.
Transportador das paletes vazias com um motorredutor.

A sua função é absorver a acumulação de sacos produzida durante o funcionamento normal do

paletizador em casos como a mudança de palete ou em manobras mais demoradas e que não
permitem manter a frequência de passagem dos sacos pelos diferentes mecanismos da zona
superior do paletizador.
Elemento de transporte durante o processo de alisamento de sacos.

Mecanismo que permite alisar e comprimir o saco para evacuar o ar que possa conter e conferir
uma consistência e forma definidas antes de ser paletizado.
É utilizado para cadenciar os sacos na entrada do mecanismo de orientação.
Elemento de transporte durante o processo de rotação dos sacos.

Grupo principal do sistema de rotação do saco.

Elemento transportador de sacos de chapa e acionado com motorredutor, para a preparação da

camada.
1.10 Estrutura de suporte para tapetes:
Estrutura de suporte para os tapetes superiores.

1.11 Passarela de manutenção:
Plataforma para facilitar o acesso do operador para tarefas de manutenção.

Impulsor para o posicionamento e formação de cada camada de sacos.

Elementos que compactam os sacos e preparam a camada para ficar apta a colocar sobre a
palete.
Comportas para a entrega de camada de sacos sobre a palete.

Elemento que eleva a palete até à comporta para colocar as camadas de sacos. Contém um
elemento que não permite que a palete avance pela mesa e outro para imobilizar e centrar a
palete.
Corpo de motorização do sistema de elevação da palete.

1.17 Corpo inferior:
Elemento base que constitui o corpo inferior do grupo de elevação. Inclui armários elétricos
para facilitar a montagem e a colocação em funcionamento.
Transportador das paletes cheias com um motorredutor.

Mecanismo que coloca folhas de cartão sobre a palete vazia.

Instalação e ligação da máquina
2. Instalação e ligação da máquina
2.1. Considerações gerais
Antes de qualquer operação de instalação e/ou ligação da máquina, esta secção bem como a das
Instruções de segur devem ser completamente compreendidas.
2.2. Descarga e armazenagem
As operações de descarga e armazenagem deverão ser realizadas por pessoal altamente

qualificado e experiente.
O instrumento de elevação e transporte deve ser capaz de suportar o peso da máquina. Não
devem ser usados empilhadores nestas operações.
Manusear a máquina com cuidado durante as operações. Não provocar impactos.
Normalmente a máquina é acondicionada numa embalagem de plástico não resistente a

impactos. A pedido expresso do cliente, a máquina pode ser acondicionada em embalagens que
proporcionem uma maior protecção.
A máquina deverá ser guardada num local plano e estável, em posição correcta e na sua
embalagem original.
Na armazenagem não situar a máquina em zonas de passagem ou locais onde possam ocorrer
acidentes e/ou a máquina possa sofrer danos. A legislação em vigor de prevenção de riscos
profissionais e de segurança no trabalho deverá ser cumprida.
A máquina deverá estar protegida contra os fenómenos meteorológicos, humidade, pó, gases,
impactos e outros incidentes que possam ocorrer. Deverá ser mantida num intervalo de
temperaturas de –10 ºC a +40 ºC.
A elevação e o transporte da máquina serão realizados seguindo o indicado na Ilustración 1.

Nesta pode ver-se que a elevação da máquina é realizada através de correias unidas a um
guindaste e às 4 argolas situadas na parte superior da máquina.
O guindaste deve ser adequado para suportar as cargas da máquina e deve ser manipulado por
pessoal qualificado.
As correias devem conseguir suportar no mínimo 2000 kg cada uma e o ângulo formado entre
duas correias opostas diagonalmente deve ser, no máximo, 90º
Ilustración 1: Esquema aproximado del método de elevación de la máquina.
2.4. Localização e montagem
Na localização e montagem da máquina serão tidas em conta as indicações do ponto 2.2.
Com o aparelho de elevação apropriado para essa função, a máquina será colocada no local
previamente estudado no plano da instalação. Serão tomadas as medidas de protecção
adequadas para evitar danos pessoais, na máquina e na instalação.
Certificar-se de que o piso está nivelado antes de pousar completamente a máquina. A

colocação da máquina será realizada de acordo com o plano de instalação.
2.5. Ligações de energia e fluidos
Os dados do plano de implementação em cada projecto específico são os que prevalecerão no

caso de entrarem em conflito com os apresentados aqui.
2.5.1. Ligação eléctrica

O cliente instalará a linha de fornecimento eléctrico até ao interior do armário da máquina e a
sua ligação deverá ser autorizada pela PAYPER, S.A. Não poderá ser fornecida tensão ao
armário de ligações sem o consentimento da PAYPER, S.A.
Características técnicas:
• Tensão: 3N ~ 60 Hz 380 V.
• Absorção de potência: 32 kW.
• Variação de tensão admissível: ±5%.
Ligação à terra e protecções:

• Esquema de terra TT.
• Recomenda-se ter os dispositivos de protecção diferenciais industriais imune a fuga de
alta freqüência.
Ilustración 2: Foto de la acometida eléctrica en el armario de la máquina (L1, L2, L3, PE).
2.5.2. Ligação pneumática
Recomenda-se a instalação de um filtro de linha para eliminar as impurezas, o óleo e a água

procedentes do compressor.
Características técnicas:
• Fornecimento de ar comprimido: 6 bar.
• Intervalo de pressão de ar admissível: 6 – 10 bar.
• Características do ar fornecido:
o Grau de filtração de partículas sólidas/pó: 5 –10 µm;
o Humidade. Ponto de orvalho de pressão: ≤ 3 ºC;
o Teor total de óleo: ≤ 5 mg/m3;
• Diâmetro do tubo de ligação: G 3/8”.
• Consumo instantâneo: 3 Nm3/hora
2.6. Plano de Instalação

Instruções de segurança
3. Instruções de segurança
3.1. Normas de segurança
• Deve ser definida claramente a responsabilidade das actividades que forem realizadas na
instalação e deve ser respeitada rigorosamente.
• Não podem ser realizadas actividades na instalação sem que as responsabilidades
estejam claramente definidas, pois tal poderia pôr em perigo a segurança dos
trabalhadores.
• O manuseamento da máquina só deve ser realizado por pessoal especializado.
• Devem ser respeitadas as indicações do fabricante para a manutenção da máquina e a
utilização dos materiais.
• O pessoal encarregado do manuseamento deve usar os dispositivos de segurança
indicados pela empresa.
• Os dispositivos de segurança da máquina não podem ser removidos nem modificados.
• Nenhuma pessoa pode permanecer no interior da máquina durante o seu funcionamento.
• Os dispositivos de segurança devem ser verificados no início do turno de trabalho.
• O sistema de paletização TOP LOAD PM da PAYPER S.A. foi desenvolvido,
fabricado, verificado e documentado respeitando as normas de segurança pertinentes. Se
as indicações e instruções aqui descritas forem respeitadas, em condições normais não
deve surgir nenhum perigo originado pela máquina.
3.2. Indicações nas instruções de funcionamento a respeitar
• A base para umas condições de segurança e funcionamento da máquina correctas é um

conhecimento indispensável das indicações e recomendações de segurança.
• Estas instruções de utilização contêm as indicações mais importantes para o
funcionamento seguro da máquina.
• Estas instruções de utilização e, especialmente, as indicações de segurança, devem ser
postas em prática por todas as pessoas que trabalham com a máquina.
• Também serão tidas em conta as normas de utilização em vigor e as disposições de
prevenção de riscos profissionais.
• Além das instruções de funcionamento, serão tidas em conta e aplicadas as normas
comuns e legais de protecção ambiental.
3.3. Explicação dos símbolos e indicações
As indicações de segurança do manual de instruções estão identificadas com os seguintes

símbolos:
PERIGO
O não cumprimento deste aviso provoca feridas graves, incluindo a

morte, tanto nos operários da máquina e/ou nas pessoas que se encontram
na sua proximidade como nas pessoas encarregadas de realizar a
manutenção e verificação do equipamento.
ADVERTÊNCIA
O não cumprimento deste aviso pode provocar feridas graves, incluindo a

morte, tanto nos operários da máquina e/ou nas pessoas que se encontram
na sua proximidade como nas pessoas encarregadas de realizar a
manutenção e verificação do equipamento.
ATENÇÃO
O sinal ATENÇÃO alerta sobre medidas especiais de precaução que têm

de ser adoptadas para evitar danos na máquina ou na instalação.
INDICAÇÃO
Uma INDICAÇÃO contém informação importante que simplifica ou torna mais compreensível a
utilização da máquina.
3.4. Símbolos de segurança utilizados na máquina
As indicações de segurança na máquina estão identificadas com os seguintes símbolos:
Este sinal indica perigo de queimaduras pela existência de superfícies a

alta temperatura.
Este sinal indica perigo de corte pela existência de superfícies cortantes.
Este sinal indica perigo de prendimento ou de corte com

alguma parte ou elemento da instalação.
Este sinal indica perigo por passagem de corrente

eléctrica por contacto com elemento ou cabo eléctrico com
tensão.
3.5. Deveres da empresa
A empresa compromete-se a deixar manusear a máquina as pessoas que cumpram com os

seguintes requisitos:
• Estarem familiarizadas com as instruções básicas sobre a segurança no trabalho e a

prevenção de riscos profissionais.
• Terem experiência no manuseamento da instalação.
• Os conhecimentos de segurança e perigo no trabalho do pessoal deverão ser revistos
regularmente.
3.6. Deveres do pessoal
PERIGO
Todas as pessoas autorizadas a manusear a máquina estão obrigadas antes de começar a

trabalhar a:
• Ter em conta as instruções básicas sobre segurança no trabalho e prevenção de riscos.
• Ter em conta as indicações de segurança e os avisos destas instruções de
funcionamento. Estas medidas particulares também são válidas para o pessoal activo
ocasional, por exemplo, para preparar ou realizar a manutenção da instalação.
3.7. Perigo na utilização da máquina
PERIGO
A máquina foi construída de acordo com padrões técnicos e regras técnicas de segurança. Não
obstante, podem surgir perigos para a integridade física e a vida dos utilizadores ou terceiros,
além de danos na instalação ou nos equipamentos, devido a uma utilização inapropriada. A
máquina só pode ser utilizada:
• Para o uso previsto.

• Em situação tecnicamente segura.
As avarias que possam pôr em causa a segurança serão solucionadas de imediato.
3.8. Utilização prevista
PERIGO
A instalação apenas pode ser usada com os dados técnicos indicados no Capítulo 1.
Também estão compreendidas na utilização prevista da instalação:
• o cumprimento de todas as indicações das instruções de funcionamento e

• o cumprimento dos trabalhos de inspecção e manutenção.
O fabricante não é responsável pelos danos resultantes da não utilização da instalação de acordo
com a utilização prevista. Em caso de uma utilização não prevista, o risco e a responsabilidade
recaem exclusivamente sobre o utilizador.
3.9. Medidas organizativas

Os equipamentos de protecção pessoal necessários devem ser postos à disposição dos operários.
Todos os dispositivos de segurança existentes devem ser examinados regularmente.
Todas as pessoas que trabalhem num ambiente de perigo da instalação devem usar o
equipamento de protecção. Neste estão incluídos, em especial, o capacete e as botas de
segurança, os óculos de protecção e a roupa apertada e justa. Além disso, também serão tidas
em conta as disposições de prevenção dos riscos profissionais.
Não é permitido comer ou beber na zona da máquina. Tampouco fumar por razões de saúde.
3.10. Dispositivos de protecção
PERIGO
Tomar medidas para que a máquina seja utilizada em condições de segurança e de correcto
funcionamento.
Todos os dispositivos de protecção e medidas de segurança devem estar disponíveis e prontos a

funcionar. Por exemplo:
• Dispositivos de protecções amovíveis;

• Dispositivos de emergência;
• Limites do espaço de trabalho;
• Insonorização;
• Dispositivos de aspiração.
Os dispositivos de protecção só podem ser retirados depois da paragem da instalação e da

activação do respectivo bloqueio contra uma nova colocação em funcionamento.
No caso de haver mudanças significativas no desempenho da máquina ou no seu sistema de

segurança, parar imediatamente a instalação e informar a ocorrência ao cargo ou pessoa
responsável.
Antes de colocar em funcionamento a máquina, é necessário testar o correcto funcionamento e

integridade de todos os dispositivos de segurança, interruptores e outras medidas de protecção.
Será levado a cabo periodicamente um controlo de corpos estranhos existentes em todas as
partes da máquina.
Se for necessário desmontar os dispositivos de segurança na preparação, manutenção ou

reparação da máquina, deverá ser realizada uma verificação de todos os dispositivos de
segurança imediatamente após a conclusão dos trabalhos de remontagem.
3.11. Informação sobre as medidas de segurança

As instruções de funcionamento devem ser guardadas de forma acessível no local de
funcionamento da máquina.
Complementarmente às instruções de funcionamento, serão colocadas à disposição e tidas em

conta as normas gerais adequadas bem como as próprias da empresa para a prevenção de
acidentes de trabalho e de protecção ambiental.
Todas as indicações de segurança e perigo na máquina devem estar acessíveis para a sua leitura.
3.12. Formação do pessoal
ADVERTÊNCIA
Unicamente colocar na instalação pessoal formado e conhecedor dos perigos comuns.
As responsabilidades do pessoal para a montagem, colocação em funcionamento, utilização,

preparação, manutenção e reparação devem estar claramente definidas.
A actividade de pessoal em formação, principiante ou inserido numa formação geral deve ser
permitida unicamente com a supervisão permanente de pessoas experientes.
Definir a responsabilidade do chefe da instalação.
Qualquer trabalhador tem o direito de rejeitar instruções que sejam contrárias à segurança.
3.13. Medidas de segurança em funcionamento normal
PERIGO
A máquina só poderá ser colocada em funcionamento quando todos os dispositivos de

protecção estiverem completamente operacionais.
Antes de colocar a máquina em funcionamento, certificar-se de que nenhuma pessoa ou

operário pode estar em perigo.
Comunicar imediatamente as alterações ocorridas ao respectivo cargo ou pessoa responsável.
Em caso de mau funcionamento da máquina, desligá-la imediatamente e procurar assegurar a

reparação das avarias.
No caso de ser necessário aceder ao interior da máquina, tal será feito através das portas de
segurança para este efeito. O dispositivo de protecção das portas de segurança nunca deve ser
desactivado.
Pelo menos uma vez por dia, verificar se há danos exteriores perceptíveis na máquina e/ou
incapacidade operacional dos dispositivos de segurança.
No processo de mudança de rolo, os operários deverão usar calçado de segurança para

minimizar os ferimentos causados pela eventual queda do rolo ou do eixo porta-rolos sobre as
mãos dos operários.
No caso de ser preciso entrar em contacto directo com as barras de soldadura, usar luvas de
protecção e aguardar até que a temperatura das barras seja inferior a 50 ºC.
Quando for necessário entrar em contacto directo com a lâmina de corte dos sacos, usar luvas
de protecção.
A regulação da altura do tapete de extracção de sacos, bem como a sua descida para a
movimentação da instalação, serão realizados por pessoal qualificado por meio da régua situada
ao lado do tapete, no interior do chassis. Os operários deverão manter as mãos afastadas do
tapete de extracção e realizar uma inspecção visual permanente para se certificarem de que
nenhuma outra pessoa se encontra no interior da zona de perigo.
3.14. Perigo por corrente eléctrica
PERIGO
Os trabalhos sobre o abastecimento eléctrico devem ser levados a cabo por pessoal electricista
qualificado.
Antes da colocação em funcionamento, a placa de características deve ser verificada para

garantir que a tensão nominal coincide com a tensão de alimentação local.
O armário de controlo deve ser mantido sempre fechado. O acesso só é permitido a pessoal
autorizado com o uso de chaves ou ferramentas.
Em qualquer armário eléctrico, mesmo com o interruptor principal desligado, pode haver
componentes sob tensão.
Os trabalhos de instalação eléctrica e reparação no armário devem ser realizados por pessoal
qualificado, desligando o interruptor principal da máquina e bloqueando-o para evitar o
restabelecimento involuntário de tensão do mesmo.
A realização de alterações na instalação eléctrica bem como a adição de elementos ou aparelhos

devem ser realizadas com o consentimento e autorização do fabricante da máquina. Mesmo
assim, será declinada toda e qualquer responsabilidade por estas modificações levadas a cabo
pelo utilizador.
Em caso de defeitos perceptíveis, avarias na cablagem bem como funções incorrectas, deve ser
realizada a desconexão imediata do aparelho e o serviço técnico informado imediatamente. É
proibido continuar com o seu funcionamento, caso contrário, não poderão ser assumidas
quaisquer responsabilidades por este facto em caso de avaria.
Examinar regularmente o equipamento eléctrico da máquina. As ligações soltas e os cabos
danificados devem ser reparados imediatamente.
Em trabalhos realizados com corrente eléctrica é imprescindível contar com uma segunda
pessoa parae, em caso de acidente, desligar o interruptor principal. Adicionalmente, deve ser
tidas em conta todas as medidas de segurança adequadas ao local de trabalho. Utilizar apenas
ferramentas isoladoras.
3.15. Assistência, manutenção e reparação de avarias
ADVERTÊNCIA
Os trabalhos de assistência, manutenção e inspecção serão levados a cabo nos períodos

estipulados. Esta actividade deverá ser realizada por pessoal especializado.
Utilizar unicamente peças sobresselentes originais.
Informar o pessoal de trabalho antes de iniciar os trabalhos de conservação ou manutenção.
Toda a instalação será protegida antes e depois da montagem de peças contra a colocação em
funcionamento involuntária.
Desligar a corrente da máquina e bloquear o interruptor principal contra a reconexão em todos

os trabalhos de manutenção, inspecção e reparação.
Utilizar, fixar e amarrar cuidadosamente nos dispositivos de elevação e manutenção as partes

grandes da máquina para a sua substituição. Não permanecer ou trabalhar debaixo de cargas
suspensas. Os operários deverão usar capacetes de segurança.
Os operários deverão usar calçado de segurança para montar ou desmontar peças da máquina.
Na movimentação de grandes componentes da máquina considerar a possibilidade de a posição

do seu centro de gravidade ser deslocada ou de que se poderem soltar outras peças. Fixar ou
amarrar as partes pertinentes da máquina com os dispositivos permitidos para essa finalidade.
Utilizar as medidas de segurança previstas e legais para a subida e a permanência em alturas nas
tarefas de montagem em pontos elevados da instalação. Não utilizar elementos da instalação
como apoio na subida. Utilizar o equipamento de protecção contra quedas nos trabalhos em
altura.
Manter sem sujidade todos os degraus, áreas, patamares, plataformas, escadas de mão e, em
geral, a zona onde se encontra a instalação e os elementos contíguos.
Para processos que utilizam materiais perigosos para a saúde como:

• Óleo mineral,
• Gorduras
deve ser realizada a respectiva limpeza da sujidade. Devem ser tidas em conta as indicações das
respectivas fichas de segurança durante o manuseamento destes materiais.
Depois do procedimento de limpeza, inspeccionar todos os circuitos pneumáticos procurando

ajustes incorrectos, uniões frouxas e avarias. Reparar imediatamente os defeitos localizados.
Certificar-se de que as uniões roscadas estão firmemente apertadas.
O acesso ao interior da máquina para trabalhos de reparação e manutenção será feito através das
portas de segurança para essa finalidade.
Caso seja necessário entrar em contacto directo com as barras de soldadura da máquina, calçar
as luvas de protecção e aguardar até que a temperatura das barras seja inferior a 50 ºC.
Ter o cuidado de a eliminação dos resíduos produzidos pelo próprio funcionamento da

máquina, inclusive os produzidos por actividades auxiliares relacionadas (manutenção, limpeza,
etc.) em trabalhos de manutenção ou de actividades complementares para o funcionamento da
instalação, respeitar o ambiente.
Supervisionar o funcionamento da instalação depois da conclusão de trabalhos de manutenção e

de reparações de segurança.
3.16. Perigo por gás, pó e fumo
Apenas levar a cabo trabalhos de corte e soldadura quando estes forem expressamente
permitidos.
Antes de realizar trabalhos de corte e soldadura em componentes da instalação, esta e o seu

ambiente devem ser limpos de pó e de material perigoso e uma ventilação suficiente deve ser
assegurada (perigo de explosão).
Ter o cuidado de, durante os trabalhos com nuvens de pó, o armário de ligações permanecer
fechado.
3.17. Perigo por energia hidráulica
Os trabalhos de reparação hidráulica devem ser levados a cabo por pessoal qualificado com
conhecimentos específicos em hidráulica. Deverão ser usados óculos de protecção contra a
eventual projecção de líquidos sob pressão.
Depois de a instalação ter sido desligada, será tida em conta a ainda existente energia residual
armazenada. Nos trabalhos de reparação ter cuidado com a descarga da pressão residual.
Inspeccionar regularmente todos os cabos, tubos e parafusos procurando uniões incorrectas e

avarias externas. Reparar imediatamente os danos.
Substituir os tubos hidráulicos flexíveis em intervalos de tempo adequados mesmo quando não
for observado qualquer defeito significativo.
3.18. Perigo por energia pneumática

Os trabalhos de reparação pneumática serão levados a cabo por pessoal qualificado com
conhecimentos específicos em pneumática.
Inspeccionar regularmente todos os cabos, tubos e parafusos procurando uniões incorrectas e

avarias externas. Reparar imediatamente os danos.
Substituir os tubos pneumáticos em intervalos de tempo adequados mesmo quando não for
observado qualquer defeito relevante.
3.19. Perigo por ruído
Apesar de a máquina, durante o funcionamento normal, não ultrapassar o limiar dos 70 dB(A),
quando for apreciado de forma continuada no recinto da instalação um nível de ruído superior a
70 dB(A), deverão ser usadas protecções para os ouvidos na zona de trabalho.
3.20. Perigo por óleos, gorduras e outras substâncias químicas
Nos trabalhos com óleos, gorduras e outras substâncias químicas serão tidas em conta as
instruções de segurança em vigor para estes produtos.
3.21. Situações especiais de perigo
PERIGO
Todas as pessoas devem ser alertadas da iminente colocação em funcionamento da instalação.
Se diversas pessoas trabalharem numa zona em situação de perigo, estas devem manter um
contacto visual permanente entre si.
3.22. Alterações de construção na instalação
Está proibido realizar alterações, adicionar ou reconstruir a instalação sem a autorização do

fabricante.
Os componentes da máquina que não estiverem em bom estado serão substituídos

imediatamente.
Utilizar unicamente peças sobresselentes originais em perfeito estado.
3.23. Limpeza da instalação

Uma limpeza regular da instalação contribui para um funcionamento sem incidentes e mais
seguro.
Na instalação devem ser limpos principalmente o pó, os resíduos de produção, as massas e os

óleos de lubrificação. É importante que não se produzam danos por uma limpeza inadequada.
A limpeza de componentes da instalação com ar comprimido está restringida pelas normas de

segurança, nunca sendo permitida a sua utilização sem óculos de protecção.
PERIGO
No uso de material de limpeza combustível, será prestada atenção para que, depois da
conclusão do trabalho, não fique qualquer resíduo do material no local da instalação que
posteriormente possa originar uma combustão.
Manusear com cuidado os materiais de limpeza usados, os panos de limpeza, os elementos da

instalação não aproveitáveis e o respectivo material auxiliar da instalação.
O acesso do operário ao interior da máquina para a limpeza do produto espalhado deve ser feito
através das portas de segurança e devem ser usadas luvas de segurança para o trabalho nas
superfícies quentes da máquina.
A limpeza do produto fundido depositado sobre as barras de soldadura deve ser realizada com
luvas de segurança, desligando a máquina e aguardando até que a temperatura das barras de
soldadura seja inferior a 50 ºC.
Para uma limpeza que exija uma aproximação à lâmina de corte dos sacos, o operário deve
calçar as luvas de protecção adequadas.
Em caso de limpeza com ar comprimido, devem ser usadas os óculos de protecção.
3.24. Limpeza do armário eléctrico
Manter sempre fechado o armário eléctrico. Limpar regularmente a parte interior do armário
com um aspirador para remover o pó depositado.
PERIGO
A limpeza deve ser realizada sem tensão eléctrica!

Perigo de entalamento com alguma peça ou elemento da

instalação.
Perigo de entalamento das mãos nos rolamentos das calhas de deslocação da câmara
distribuidora.

instalação.
Perigo de entalamento das mãos com um componente do dispositivo de rolos.

instalação.


instalação.
Antes de qualquer manipulação no tapete, é necessário cortar a alimentação elétrica da máquina

para evitar qualquer perigo. Não cruzar o tapete transportador nem deixar ferramentas e outros
objetos sobre o mesmo.

instalação.
Perigo de entalamento ou lesões causado pelo movimento síncrono dos dois tapetes paralelos.

instalação.


instalação.
Perigo de entalamento ou impacto com um elemento provocado pelo movimento do mecanismo

virou o saco.
3.32 Tapete:

instalação.


instalação.
Perigo de entalamento ou impacto com um elemento provocado pelo movimento do carro

impulsor e pelo movimento da pá.

instalação.
Perigo de entalamento ou impacto com um elemento do dispositivo compactador de sacos.

instalação.
Perigo de entalamento ou lesões causadas pelo movimento dos portões.

instalação.
Perigo de entalamento ou lesões com um elemento do corpo superior do paletizador.


instalação.
Perigo de entalamento ou impacto com uma peça do dispositivo de rolos ou pelos mecanismos
bloqueadores da palete.

instalação.

instalação.
Perigo de entalamento ou impacto provocado pelo movimento do mecanismo aplicador de

folhas.
Manual de Operação
4 Manual de Operação
4.1 Funcionamento geral
O TOP-LOAD P é um paletizador de elevada qualidade da PAYPER para a formação de
camadas por impulso.
A máquina é formada por uma série de mecanismos e dispositivos que permitem dispor os
sacos para formar uma camada e depositá-la na parte superior da palete.
O tapete ascendente transporta os sacos até à parte superior do paletizador, onde estão os
dispositivos de alisamento (opcional), orientação ou rotação, agrupamento ou formação de
fileira e impulso. Estes dispositivos formam a camada no topo de acordo com a receita
selecionada.
As fileiras são impulsionadas para a zona da comporta. Quando os sacos na comporta formam
uma camada completa, os compactadores laterais ajustam-se ao seu perímetro e a camada pode
ser depositada na palete.
As paletes, quer sejam fornecidas por um dispensador de paletes, quer sejam fornecidas por
uma instalação dedicada para o efeito, são centradas na plataforma de elevação e elevadas até à
posição que permite depositar a camada preparada sobre a comporta de forma suave e segura.
Com a comporta aberta, a plataforma desce até uma altura que permite fechá-la e formar uma
nova camada. A plataforma realiza os movimentos necessários para compactar a camada
(configurável) e ficar disponível para a descarga de uma camada nova.
Quando a palete tiver o número de camadas pretendido, a plataforma desce para a posição
inferior e a palete é evacuada. A operação é repetida.
4.2 Descrição de elementos/estações

A máquina foi dividida em oito estações para descrever pormenorizadamente o funcionamento
com todos os seus elementos.
As estações que formam um paletizador TOP-LOAD P são: tapete ascendente, acumulador de
rolos livres, alisador, rotador ou mecanismo de orientação, tapete de agrupamento, impulsor,
compactadores, comporta e plataforma de elevação.
4.2.1 Tapete ascendente

O tapete ascendente é o mecanismo de alimentação de sacos para o paletizador. Os sacos são
recolhidos e transportados, transpondo a diferença de altura entra a zona de ensacamento e a
parte superior do paletizador. O tapete foi concebido para transportar os sacos apesar da
inclinação necessária.
4.2.2 Acumulador de rolos livres

Esta estação é opcional e apenas está disponível nos modelos de produção média e elevada
(TOP-LOAD P M e TOP-LOAD P L). Tem como função absorver a acumulação de sacos
durante o funcionamento normal do paletizador em casos como a mudança de palete ou
manobras que precisam de mais tempo e que não permitem manter a frequência de passagem
dos sacos pelos diferentes mecanismos da zona superior do paletizador.
4.2.3 Alisador
Mecanismo formado por dois tapetes, um inferior e outro superior, que permite alisar e
comprimir o saco para evacuar o ar que possa conter e conferir a consistência e a forma
definidas antes de ser paletizado.
É utilizado para cadenciar os sacos na entrada do mecanismo de orientação.
4.2.4 Rotador ou mecanismo de orientação

Estação formada por um tapete transportador e um mecanismo superior do tipo grampo que
permite rodar o saco sobre o tapete. Sempre de acordo com as necessidades do formato ou da
receita de paletização, o saco é disposto nesta estação como conveniente antes de entrar no
tapete de agrupamento.
A rotação é realizada com um motor servocontrolado para uma orientação fiável no intervalo
completo de 360º.
4.2.5 Tapete de agrupamento

O tapete de agrupamento permite acumular os sacos conforme necessário para formar as filas
que formarão, depois do impulso, a camada inteira que deve ser depositada na palete.
Em função das necessidades de produção, este tapete está integrado no grupo do impulsor
(modelos TOP-LOAD PS e TOP-LOAD PM) ou será um tapete adicional, independente do
impulsor (modelo TOP-LOAD PL).
Quando os sacos estão dispostos corretamente nesta zona, são transferidos corretamente para o
impulsor.
4.2.6 Impulsor
Mecanismo que permite empurrar, por arrasto, os sacos entregues pelo tapete de agrupamento
para a zona de formação de camada. Os paletizadores TOP-LOAD P dispõem habitualmente de
uma estação de espera entre a zona de impulso e a zona de preparação da camada.
Este mecanismo é acionado por um motor servocontrolado, o que oferece uma grande
versatilidade para realizar os formatos necessários.
4.2.7 Compactadores
Os compactadores são mecanismos dispostos em redor da zona de preparação da camada para
formar os lados da camada antes de esta ser depositada na palete. Os compactadores são
dispositivos motorizados que estão em posição de repouso ou aberto, enquanto o impulsor
deposita as fileiras sobre a comporta; quando todos os sacos estão dispostos nesta zona, e antes
da abertura da comporta para o depósito na palete, avançam até uma posição definida por
receita para assegurar que a formação das camadas na palete é igual e a descarga para a palete é
uniforme em todas elas.
4.2.8 Comporta
Formada por duas plataformas móveis em sentido perpendicular ao do avanço do impulsor e
paralelo ao sentido do avanço das paletes, a comporta é o mecanismo encarregado de albergar a
camada de sacos antes de ser depositada na palete. Também é o dispositivo que ao abrir
deposita a camada de sacos formada.
Com a camada descarregada sobre as já dispostas na palete, e depois de a plataforma de
elevação descer abaixo do nível de fecho, a comporta fecha-se. Se a configuração da receita
exigir, é utilizada como obstáculo para comprimir a camada depositada na palete; pois a
plataforma de elevação sobe até que esta pressione contra a comporta.
4.2.9 Plataforma de elevação

A plataforma de elevação consiste num transportador de rolos motorizados solidário com um
sistema de elevação motorizado e guiado.
Equipado com um sistema de centragem de palete, a plataforma recebe e prepara paletes vazias
para o depósito das camadas. Depois de atingir o número de camadas definida, a plataforma
desce para entregar a palete completa ao sistema de transporte de paletes cheias.
É importante destacar que a plataforma dispõe de elementos de segurança (gatilhos) que, em
caso de paragem de emergência e/ou abertura da porta de acesso ao corpo central do paletizador
pela parte inferior, asseguram que a plataforma não se liberta, nem mesmo com a rutura das
correntes de tração e fixação.
4.3 Particularidades dos diferentes modelos
4.3.1 TOP-LOAD P S
Configuração básica para produções até 1200 sacos/hora. Como elementos habituais dispõe de
tapete ascendente, conjunto alisador, mecanismo de orientação, tapete de agrupamento,
impulsor, compactadores laterais, comporta e sistema de elevação da palete.
4.3.2 TOP-LOAD P M
Ao contrário do modelo P S, o modelo M é adequado para produções até 1800 s/h. Integra um
acumulador de rolos livres e um sistema de paragem da palete na plataforma de elevação que
permite mudar a palete mais rapidamente.
4.3.3 TOP-LOAD P L
Adicionalmente ao modelo P M, o modelo P L inclui mais um tapete de agrupamento. Atinge
velocidades até 2200 sacos/hora.
4.4 Operação
Por estar muito automatizada, a utilização da máquina não exige a presença contínua de um
operador. Se for necessário, o ponto de trabalho mais comum será em frente do terminal tátil
que permite controlar a maioria dos movimentos da máquina.
4.4.1 Funcionamento básico
4.4.1.a Colocação em funcionamento

Depois de ligar a máquina, deve verificar se todas as portas estão fechadas e se os botões de
emergência estão desativados (botão para fora).
Para rearmar a máquina tem de carregar durante 2 s no botão REARME (situado no quadro de
comandos). Ao libertar o botão, a luz azul desliga-se, o que indica que o rearme foi realizado
corretamente. Se todas as condições estiverem corretas, a máquina estará em paragem e
preparada para arrancar.
Para ligar a máquina, comprove que o indicador vermelho dos botões de PARAGEM estão
acesos de forma fixa (a máquina está no estado operacional de paragem) e carregue em
FUNCIONAMENTO. A máquina arrancará e a luz indicará o estado de funcionamento,
brilhando de forma permanente. Qualquer elemento móvel que não esteja na posição correta
será posicionado automaticamente e a máquina iniciará o seu ciclo de funcionamento.
Quando carregar em PARAGEM com a máquina em funcionamento (indicador verde aceso de

forma constante), o indicador verde apaga-se e acende-se o vermelho. A máquina para
imediatamente.
Ao carregar em PEDIDO ENTRADA com a máquina a trabalhar (indicador verde de

Funcionamento/Paragem acesa de forma constante), o indicador branco brilhará de forma
intermitente com uma cadência de cerca de 1 s até a máquina terminar o ciclo de
funcionamento. Quando a máquina parar totalmente, o indicador apaga-se e o indicador
vermelho acende-se.
Quando ocorre um alarme (o indicador vermelho brilha de forma intermitente), a máquina para
e mostra no ecrã um aviso e uma descrição do problema. Se o operador considerar que a
máquina pode continuar a funcionar normalmente, pode carregar em Validar Alarme. Se as
condições da máquina forem as ótimas, regressará a um estado de funcionamento normal.
Os ALARMES CRÍTICOS param e bloqueiam imediatamente o funcionamento da máquina.
4.4.1.b Formatos/Receitas
No funcionamento da máquina há um conjunto de parâmetros que têm de ser configurados para
que o processo de paletização seja realizado corretamente. Depois de configurados, estes
parâmetros têm de ser guardados para o caso de voltarem a ser necessários. Assim ocorre nos
formatos de paletização para os diferentes tipos de produto/saco.
Uma receita é um conjunto de parâmetros que define o funcionamento da máquina. E guarda os

valores dos parâmetros de funcionamento da máquina. Uma máquina pode ter várias receitas,
variando o seu comportamento conforme o produto a paletizar, o tamanho do saco, etc.
O manuseamento destas receitas será realizado através do ecrã tátil. Ao carregar em

FORMATOS na zona de seleção do ecrã principal, pode aceder ao ecrã de utilização de receitas
(ver 4.6.2).
Ilustração 3: Zona de seleção do ecrã principal.
Para mais informação consulte a secção 4.6.2 Receitas.

4.4.2 Opções de funcionamento
Para o funcionamento normal da máquina não é necessário que o utilizador intervenha no
processo, além de fornecer a matéria-prima e os consumíveis necessários como paletes vazias,
cola, adesivo, cartão, etc.
A intervenção do operador vai ser necessária para casos de anomalia no funcionamento que
possam surgir.
4.5 Descrição dos painéis de controlo
4.5.1 Armário principal

Os botões e indicadores do armário principal são os seguintes:
• Botão de cogumelo EMERGÊNCIA: Carregar neste botão efetua uma paragem de

emergência na máquina.
• Indicador SOB TENSÃO: Indica que há tensão no armário elétrico.
Ilustração 4: Botões e indicadores do armário principal
4.5.2 Painel de comandos

O painel de comandos está situado na parte superior do paletizador, ao lado da porta de acesso à
zona de manutenção dos elementos de manipulação de sacos e formação das camadas.
• Botão / Indicador REARME: Este botão serve para ativar o circuito de potência e o
circuito pneumático depois de uma paragem de emergência. A luz acesa indica que o
circuito de emergência está desarmado e, portanto, que a máquina pode funcionar. Uma
luz intermitente indica que há um alarme ativo. Para reiniciar os alarmes é necessário
carregar no botão de rearme.
• Basicamente serve para ligar ou desligar a máquina. A luz intermitente indica que a
máquina está a arrancar / parar ou que algum alarme está ativo. A luz acesa de forma
permanente indica que a máquina está a funcionar. A luz apagada indica que a máquina
está parada.
• Botão / Indicador FUNCIONAMENTO: Basicamente serve para ligar a máquina. A luz
intermitente indica que a máquina está a arrancar / parar ou em modo manual. A luz
acesa de forma permanente indica que a máquina está a funcionar.
• Botão / Indicador PARAGEM: Serve para desligar a máquina imediatamente. O
indicador iluminado de forma constante indica que a máquina está no modo de paragem.
Uma luz intermitente indica que há um alarme ativo.
• Botão / Indicador PEDIDO ENTRADA: Utilizado para realizar um pedido de paragem.
A máquina vai parar quando todos os elementos estiverem em situação de repouso ou
inicial. O indicador acende quando houver um pedido de entrada/paragem, mas a
máquina ainda não estiver em condições de parar.
Ilustração 5: Botões e indicadores do painel de comandos.

4.5.3 Botoneira da porta de acesso inferior
Esta botoneira encontra-se na parte inferior, ao lado da porta de acesso à zona interior do bloco
central do paletizador.
• Botão / Indicador REARME: Este botão serve para ativar o circuito de potência e o
circuito pneumático na sequência de uma paragem de emergência depois de carregar no
botão da botoneira, de abrir a porta ou de ter saltado a barreira de segurança de saída das
paletes. A luz acesa indica que o circuito de emergência está desarmado e, portanto, que
a máquina pode funcionar. Uma luz intermitente indica que há um alarme ativo. Para
reiniciar os alarmes é necessário carregar no botão de rearme.
• Botão / Indicador FUNCIONAMENTO: Basicamente serve para ligar a máquina. A luz
intermitente indica que a máquina está a arrancar / parar ou em modo manual. A luz
acesa de forma permanente indica que a máquina está a funcionar.
• Botão / Indicador PEDIDO ENTRADA: Utilizado para realizar um pedido de paragem.
A máquina vai parar quando todos os elementos estiverem em situação de repouso ou
inicial. O indicador acende quando houver um pedido de entrada/paragem, mas a
máquina ainda não estiver em condições de parar.
Ilustração 6: Botões e indicadores da botoneira da porta de acesso inferior.
4.6 Terminal tátil
4.6.1 Funcionamento geral

O Terminal Tátil é um dispositivo que permite controlar e/ou monitorizar o processo produtivo
da máquina de uma forma simples. É possível enviar ordens e modificações no funcionamento
da máquina através das configurações realizadas pelo utilizador. Também permite visualizar
informações sobre o estado da máquina, os alarmes ocorridos, as mensagens de informação, etc.
O uso de diferentes tipos e tamanhos de saco e de distintos produtos obriga a um determinado

controlo da máquina pelo operador. As alterações efetuadas podem ser guardadas na memória e
ser ativadas em qualquer momento: são as denominadas Receitas ou Formatos, que serão
descritas em detalhe na secção 4.6.2.
A seguir pretende-se familiarizar o operador com a utilização do Terminal Tátil, otimizando os

recursos e o funcionamento da máquina.
De uma forma geral, os ecrãs estão divididos em três zonas: zona principal, zona de seleção e
zona de estado da máquina (ver Ilustração 7)
• Zona de informação: Na parte superior esquerda, proporciona indicações de hora, data,
número de máquina e valores de contadores de produção.
• Zona principal: Ocupa a maior parte do ecrã. Apresenta as características específicas de
cada ecrã que podem ou não ser modificadas.
• Zona de seleção: Está situada na parte central-inferior do ecrã. Nesta zona serão
efetuadas as seleções das restantes aplicações do ecrã tátil.
• Zona de estado: Está situada na parte inferior do ecrã. Nesta zona aparecem mensagens
sobre os distintos estados da máquina: máquina em paragem, máquina em
funcionamento, máquina em emergência, etc.
• Zona de estado dos periféricos: Situada na parte superior direita, mostra informação
sobre o estado de funcionamento dos periféricos a instalação como o transporte e a
distribuição das paletes vazias, das paletes cheias e da entrada de produto.
ZONA DE ESTADO
ZONA DE INFORMAÇÃO
DE PERIFÉRICOS
ZONA PRINCIPAL
ZONA DE SELEÇÃO
ZONA DE ESTADO
Ilustração 7: Esquema das zonas do ecrã principal.
A Ilustração 8 mostra o ecrã principal com a informação de produção e os parâmetros de

funcionamento, bem como as seleções de outros ecrãs na zona de seleção.
Ilustração 8: Ecrã Principal.
4.6.1.a Informação de produção

Este bloco mostra o número de paletes completas realizadas, o número de sacos manipulados e
a produção instantânea (ver Ilustração 9). É um bloco informativo, os parâmetros não podem
ser modificados.
Ilustração 9: Informação e contadores na página principal.
• Número de paletes completas: está expresso em unidades e indica o valor desde a última
reinicialização.
• Sacos Produzidos: Mostra o número de sacos produzidos.
• Produção Instantânea: Mostra a produção da máquina com o tempo de produção do
último saco. Expressa em sacos / hora.
4.6.1.b Informação de estado dos periféricos

Em função de cada instalação é possível dividir a instalação em diferentes partes com um
estado ou modo de funcionamento diferente no mesmo momento. Esta zona mostra o seu
estado.
Ilustração 10: Informação do estado de elementos auxiliares da máquina.
4.6.1.c Informação dos parâmetros de funcionamento

Este bloco (verIlustração 11) apresenta o formato que está a ser executado (configurado pelo
utilizador na secção de Formatos). Os parâmetros são os seguintes e, neste caso, a maioria deles
apenas são informativos e servem para identificar o produto em questão:
Ilustração 11: Dados do formato em produção na página principal.
• Peso: indica o peso do saco associado ao formato atual de paletização.

• Comprimento: indica o comprimento do saco associado ao formato atual de paletização.
• Largura: indica a largura do saco associado ao formato atual de paletização.
• Grossura: indica a grossura do saco associado ao formato atual de paletização.
• Sacos por camada: indica o número de sacos por camada do formato atual de
paletização.
Todos estes parâmetros são editáveis pelo utilizador na secção de Receitas. (Ver secção 4.6.2)
Os dois parâmetros seguintes são modificáveis neste ecrã principal e permitem definir variáveis
gerais do programa de paletização:
• Camadas: é o número de camadas para formar as paletes. Este valor pode ser alterado
em qualquer altura do funcionamento da máquina. Esta variável está limitada em função
das capacidades da máquina. Pode ser limitado pela capacidade de altura paletizável
(tem influência a grossura do saco) ou pela capacidade de peso da plataforma elevadora
(tem influência o peso do saco).
• Centragem palete: valor variável que permite ajustar o posicionamento da palete na

plataforma de elevação para ficar centrada na mesma. É o valor do tempo de atraso na
paragem do avanço da nova palete depois da deteção da fotocélula.
Finalmente, nesta zona também existem três botões que podem ser necessários durante o
funcionamento habitual do paletizador (Ilustração 12)
Ilustração 12: Botões para várias funções na zona de informação de parâmetros de produção.
• Evacuar: carregar neste botão permite dar como finalizada uma palete que não está
completa. Esta função é útil porque permite evacuar uma palete sem estar completa em
qualquer altura, por exemplo, mudar a produção ou quando deteta uma formação
incorreta da palete que aconselha não continuar a paletização.
Ilustração 13: Ecrã de confirmação de evacuação de palete.
Deve ativar esta função com a máquina PARADA e depois de ter retirado os sacos de
todos os dispositivos da parte superior e de os colocar em frente do empurrador. Ao
retomar o modo AUTOMÁTICO, este fará um varrimento para retirar todos os sacos da
zona superior para a comporta e depositá-los na palete. A palete será extraída do bloco
central do paletizador depois destas manobras.
• Reset sequência: depois de uma manipulação manual, a máquina provavelmente não

pode prosseguir o funcionamento habitual, pois o estado dos diferentes acionamentos
pode ter sido alterado. O funcionamento automático deve ser reiniciado no modo de
repouso. Da mesma forma pode ser necessário REINICIAR os valores de memória que
afetam o funcionamento das diferentes ações; portanto, deve realizar um RESET
SEQUÊNCIA do dispositivo que o requerer.
O botão provoca um avanço para uma página de reinício da sequência dos diferentes
dispositivos do paletizador. Ver Ilustração 14.
Ilustração 14: Ecrã com botões para realizar o RESET SEQUÊNCIA de diferentes
dispositivos e peças da máquina.
A opção de RESET TOTAL, executável apenas quando a máquina não está a funcionar,
reinicia a sequência de todos os dispositivos e provoca um reinício de todos os
contadores da máquina. O utilizador deve assegurar-se de que a máquina fica na
condição inicial para reiniciar o funcionamento. Deve inspecionar os valores dos
contadores.
Deve confirmar o reset total quando aparece a mensagem de advertência seguinte:
Ilustração 15: Ecrã de confirmação de RESET TOTAL.

• Contadores: quando surge uma ocorrência no funcionamento do paletizador pode ser
necessário verificar o estado dos sacos, bem como reposicioná-los ou retirá-los dos
diferentes mecanismos montados para a manipulação.
O funcionamento do paletizador baseia-se numa série de ações realizadas em sacos
concretos, sendo o resultado final o formato de paletização. Isto requer uma contagem
em distintas zonas da máquina e é possível que estes contadores tenham de ser
reajustados depois de uma manipulação dos sacos conforme o descrito.
Com este botão pode aceder a um ecrã para verificar o valor dos contadores e, com
apenas dois valores introduzidos, reiniciar os diferentes contadores de funcionamento.
Ver (Ilustração 16)
Ilustração 16: Ecrã de atualização de valores dos contadores.
Os dados necessários para permitir que a máquina realize uma regulação dos contadores
são:
• CAMADAS PALETE: número de camadas completas a depositar na palete.
• SACOS EM FRENTE IMPULSOR: número de sacos existente em frente do
empurrador, inclusivamente sacos já dispostos na comporta e/ou estação
intermédia.
Com estes dados são calculados automaticamente os valores que aparecem no ecrã
como Valores Calculados. Ao carregar no botão VALIDAR, os valores calculados são
atribuídos aos contadores reais (Valores Atuais) da máquina, que já pode continuar a
funcionar normalmente.
4.6.2 Receitas
Dependendo de cada produto e de cada tipo e tamanho de saco a paletizar, o funcionamento da
máquina varia consideravelmente; a disposição dos sacos na palete varia e com isso as ações a
realizar sobre cada saco e o modo de funcionamento para cada elemento da máquina. Portanto,
é preciso controlar um conjunto de parâmetros de funcionamento que serão guardados nas
denominadas RECEITAS ou FORMATOS (ver Ilustração 17).
Ilustração 17: Ecrã de receitas.
As receitas são constituídas pelos três principais grupos de parâmetros:

• Dados gerais do formato (detalhes na secção 4.6.2.a)
• Parâmetros de configuração de elementos ou dispositivos (detalhes na secção 4.6.2.b)
• Parâmetros de configuração de formato ou disposição dos sacos (detalhes na secção
4.6.2.c)
4.6.2.a Dados gerais do formato
• Nome: é o campo que identifica o formato. Deve ser único. Neste ecrã é um parâmetro
de leitura, atribuído quando se executa o guardado de parâmetros.
• Comprimento: comprimento do saco em milímetros. Dado exclusivamente informativo.
• Largura: largura do saco em milímetros. Dado exclusivamente informativo.
• Grossura: grossura do saco em milímetros. Dado utilizado para limitar o número de
alturas máximas a paletizar. Deve estar o mais ajustado possível à realidade.
• Peso: peso do saco em kg. Dado utilizado para limitar o número máximo de alturas a
paletizar em função do peso suportado pelo sistema de elevação. Deve estar o mais
ajustado possível à realidade.
• Sacos por camada: quantidade de sacos a colocar numa camada da palete. Este dado é
utilizado para configurar posteriormente os parâmetros de cada um dos sacos do
formato.
• Camadas: número de camadas a paletizar por defeito. Este valor, ao ativar uma receita,
aparecerá como as camadas a paletizar no ecrã principal (Ilustração 11). No mesmo é
possível alterá-lo.
• Correção da altura: valor que permite ajustar uma variação de altura da carga paletizada
em função das camadas dispostas na palete. Um valor negativo significa que a altura
diminui de forma proporcional em função da quantidade de camadas; um valor positivo
significa que a altura aumenta adicionalmente à medida que as camadas vão sendo
depositadas na palete. Este valor é considerado para a manobra de compactação das
camadas da palete contra a comporta.
• Compressão de camadas: permite selecionar que camadas serão ou não compactadas,
depois da deposição na palete.
4.6.2.b Configuração de elementos ou dispositivos

Com o botão CONFIGURAR ELEMENTOS pode aceder ao ecrã que permite ajustar os
parâmetros relativos ao funcionamento dos distintos dispositivos que manipulam os sacos e as
paletes e que serão particulares para o formato em configuração.
Seguidamente são descritos os parâmetros configuráveis dos distintos elementos:
Rotador
Os parâmetros configuráveis para o funcionamento do mecanismo de rotação ou orientação são:
• Velocidade: percentagem da velocidade máxima por defeito do mecanismo.
• Aceleração (opcional): percentagem da aceleração máxima por defeito do mecanismo.
• Desaceleração (opcional): percentagem da desaceleração máxima por defeito do
mecanismo.
• Tempo passagem saco: tempo estimado de passagem do saco na entrada do rotador. Este
tempo deve ser ajustado ao máximo possível, pois é a variável utilizada para separar
dois sacos que vêm seguidos.
• Tempo adicional centragem: parâmetro utilizado para fazer uma regulação fina da
centragem dos sacos no rotador. Embora o próprio dispositivo disponha da
funcionalidade de centrar o saco automaticamente, a centragem pode ser regulada com
este parâmetro. O parâmetro pode ter valor positivo ou negativo, com o conseguinte
avanço ou retrocesso do saco em relação à posição teórica calculada automaticamente
para a centragem.
Ilustração 18: Ecrã de configuração do rotador.
Pode assinalar a diferenciação dos tempos de acordo com os TIPOS. Isto é válido para todos os
parâmetros de tempo classificados do mesmo modo. Cada TIPO DE TEMPO tem um valor
associado. Este valor pode ser modificado e está associado ao respetivo TIPO. Mais adiante na
configuração do formato (secção 4.6.2.c) é detalhado como associar um TIPO de tempo a uma
determinada ação em cada saco. Isto é, para a configuração do formato não são definidos os
tempos das ações, mas as mesmas são associadas a um determinado TIPO. Isto permite agilizar
as alterações nos formatos, já que, para uma mesma ação (neste caso a centragem no rotador) a
efetuar nos dois sacos distintos, será suficiente modificar o valor associado ao TIPO (igual para
os dois sacos) e não será necessário modificar o valor para todos os sacos que devam
comportar-se do mesmo modo. Mais detalhes na secção citada.
Tapete de agrupamento
Os parâmetros configuráveis mostrados na Ilustração 19 são relativos ao posicionamento do
saco proveniente do mecanismo de rotação.
• Tempo avanço adicional: é o tempo que o saco avança depois de libertar a fotocélula de
entrada localizada no início do tapete de agrupamento. Um avanço maior implica uma
maior separação entre o saco atual e o seguinte; pelo contrário, um avanço menor
implicará uma separação menor.
• Tempo atraso tapete: tempo que o tapete demora a funcionar quando chega um saco à
fotocélula de entrada do tapete de agrupamento. Um tempo maior provoca um atraso no
arranque do tapete e, por conseguinte, uma separação menor (ou compressão maior )
entre os sacos já dispostos no tapete de agrupamento e o saco novo.
Ilustração 19: Ecrã de configuração do tapete de agrupamento.
Os tempos também estão classificados por TIPOS.
Impulsor fileira
A ilustração Ilustração 20 mostra as variáveis configuráveis para o dispositivo de impulso de
fileiras para a comporta. Os parâmetros são descritos a seguir:
• Velocidade: percentagem da velocidade máxima por defeito do mecanismo.
• Aceleração (opcional): percentagem da aceleração máxima por defeito do mecanismo.
• Desaceleração (opcional): percentagem da desaceleração máxima por defeito do
mecanismo.
• Aguardar abertura comporta antes retrocesso (opcional): é definido se o impulsor de
fileira tiver de permanecer na posição de impulso para efetuar uma compactação da
camada até que a comporta abra para depositar a camada na palete. Esta configuração
não está disponível para modelos de impulsor que não permitem esta manobra.
• Tempo espera compactação antes retrocesso: valor de tempo em décimas de segundo
que o compactador permanece em posição de impulso antes de iniciar a manobra de
retrocesso.
Ilustração 20: Ecrã de configuração do impulsor de fileira.

Compactadores
Todos os compactadores motorizados existentes no paletizador podem ser ajustados nos
seguintes parâmetros.
• Ativar compactador: define se o compactador atua ou não. Se a opção não estiver
marcada, o compactador não realizará nenhuma ação.
• Descomprimir antes abertura comporta (opcional): opção que permite definir se o
compactador deve abrir (descomprimir) antes de a comporta realizar a descarga da
camada na palete.
• Valor compactação: valor a que o compactador avança para compactar a camada.
• Valor descompressão: valor de retrocesso ou repouso do compactador enquanto a
camada estiver a ser formada sobre a comporta.
Ilustração 21: Ecrã de configuração do compactador direita.

14.6.2.b Transporte elevação
Os parâmetros relativos ao transporte de paletes da plataforma de elevação mostrados na
Ilustração 22 têm o seguinte significado:
• Tempo centragem palete: tempo adicional de centragem da palete depois de ser detetada
pela fotocélula da plataforma de elevação. Este é o tempo por defeito do formato. Se for
necessário, pode ser modificado no ecrã principal, embora o valor por defeito definido
neste parâmetro não seja afetado e, por conseguinte, para as produções seguintes será
considerado o valor da configuração descrita.
• Tempo compactação depois descarga: valor que define o tempo de movimento de
elevação para obter uma compactação da camada superior da palete contra a comporta.
Ilustração 22: Ecrã configuração transporte plataforma elevação.
4.6.2.c Configuração do formato ou disposição dos sacos

Por último, depois de definidos os dados gerais do formato e configurados os dispositivos que
devem manipular e atuar sobre os sacos, é necessário definir as ações a realizar em cada saco
para formar as camadas pretendidas.
A definição de um formato de paletização é dada pela disposição dos sacos nas duas primeiras
camadas. Na maioria dos casos, a primeira e a segunda camada têm um formato diferente para
que a própria disposição dos sacos entrelace uma camada com outra e proporcione estabilidade
à carga.
Para isso existe um ecrã para cada um dos sacos do formato. Deve configurar as ações a realizar
para todos os sacos das duas primeiras camadas a paletizar.
Depois de definir o número de sacos/camada (Ilustração 17) nos dados gerais do formato, pode
aceder à configuração do formato com o botão CONFIGURAR FORMATO.
Ilustração 23: Ecrã de configuração do formato. Configuração saco.
As variáveis configuráveis para cada saco podem diferir em função da natureza do paletizador e
do produto a manipular. A imagem mostra diferentes variáveis. Variáveis definidoras de
realização ou não da ação como as caixas de verificação e variáveis definidoras de
parâmetros/regulações da ação como os valores adjacentes.
Em função das autorizações respetivas, o utilizador da máquina apenas poderá manipular
algumas das variáveis que definem regulações, mas não aquelas que definem a realização ou
não das ações. Por conseguinte, o utilizador sem autorizações apenas poderá modificar
regulações e não a forma como a realização dos formatos é definida.
De uma forma geral, estarão disponíveis as seguintes configurações.

• Rotação: define se o saco em questão deve ser rodado. Neste caso, define a rotação que
a realizar e também se pode definir a velocidade particular de rotação. Se não for
definido nenhum valor é considerada a velocidade geral do mecanismo de rotação,
definida na configuração do dispositivo (Ilustração 18).
• Offset centragem rotador: permite definir se o saco em particular deve ter uma
centragem diferente da definida como básica na configuração do dispositivo rotador.
Com a caixa de verificação ativada, é possível definir o TIPO de offset a aplicar. O tipo,
como descreve a secção 0, tem um tempo associado.
• Avanço tapete agrupamento: define o comportamento do saco quando entra para o
tapete de agrupamento. O saco em questão é associado a um tipo de avanço que
permitirá posicioná-lo mais ou menos separado em relação ao seguinte.
• Atraso tapete agrupamento: define se o tapete de agrupamento atrasa o funcionamento
depois da chegada do saco à fotocélula inicial. Um aumento deste valor implica uma
maior compactação do saco com o manipulado anteriormente.
• Final formação fila: indica se o saco é o último da fila formada e que deve ser
empurrado para a comporta ou a estação intermédia. Se for necessário realizar um
impulso, deve definir a distância que o impulsor deve empurrar a fileira. Também pode
configurar a percentagem de velocidade do impulsor para realizar o movimento. Se não
indicar nenhum valor, a velocidade será a definida na configuração do elemento.
• Final de camada: indica se o saco é o último da camada; por conseguinte, depois do
impulso e da realização das ações correspondentes, a comporta vai depositá-lo na palete.
• Final dupla camada: caixa que identifica o saco como o último da segunda camada do
esquema de disposição de sacos na palete. Depois e como as seguintes camadas a
depositar na palete devem ser idênticas às duas primeiras (de forma alternativa), os
contadores de funcionamento na máquina são reiniciados.
Para mais informação sobre como realizar e configurar formatos de paletização, consulte a
documentação específica.
4.6.2.d Manuseamento e gestão de receitas

Os ecrãs das receitas apresentam constantemente uma zona com uma série de funcionalidades
para o seu manuseamento e gestão. As diferentes ações executáveis com as receitas são
descritas a seguir.
Ilustração 24: Zona de seleção do ecrã de receitas/formatos.
Nova receita
Para criar uma nova receita bastará:
• Carregar em GUARDAR no menu do ecrã de formatos (Ilustração 24)
• Introduzir um código de receita novo e os parâmetros da máquina.
• Carregar no botão de validação para guardar a receita.
Ilustração 25: Janela para a introdução do nome da receita a guardar.
A receita será identificada pelo nome de receita. O nome da receita é definido ao guardar.
Portanto, a partir de uma receita, é possível aproveitar os parâmetros introduzidos e apenas
modificar os pretendidos.
Editar a receita atual da máquina

Para editar uma receita bastará:
• Editar os parâmetros do ecrã de receitas.
• Carregar em ATIVAR para aplicar as alterações efetuadas.
• Carregar em GUARDAR para guardar as alterações efetuadas. Se sair do ecrã sem
guardar as alterações, estas podem perder-se.
Editar uma receita guardada

É possível editar uma receita guardada enquanto outra estiver em funcionamento. Para tal
bastará:
• Carregar em SELEC. RECEITA
• Selecionar a receita desejada.
• Modificar os parâmetros desejados.
• Carregar em GUARDAR para guardar as alterações efetuadas. Se sair do ecrã sem
guardar as alterações, estas podem perder-se.
Mudar de receita
Para mudar a receita de funcionamento:
• Carregar em ATIVAR para aplicar a nova receita.
Ilustração 26: Janela para a seleção de receita.
Depois da seleção da receita, os parâmetros associados serão os que aparecem nos campos de
edição e configuração, tanto dos elementos, como do formato de disposição dos sacos.
Apagar receita
Para apagar uma receita da memória:
• Carregar em APAGAR.
• Confirmar o processo de apagamento.
Ilustração 27: Janela para a confirmação de apagamento de receita.
Em caso de apagamento da receita de funcionamento atual, a máquina continuará com a

configuração atual até ser ativada outra receita.
4.6.3 Manutenção
Neste ecrã (ver Ilustração 28), com acesso a partir do menu principal, pode consultar o valor
das temporizações de sistema, configurações da máquina e outras funções descritas a seguir:
Ilustração 28: Ecrã do menu Supervisor.
4.6.3.a Presets
Nesta página (ver Ilustração 29) são indicadas as constantes das temporizações, expressas em
décimas de segundo.
Ilustração 29: Ecrã de Temporizadores de Máquina.
Cada zona tem as temporizações agrupadas respetivas que só podem ser modificadas por ecrã.
É necessário introduzir uma palavra-chave para as modificar.
4.6.3.b Seletores Supervisor
É possível aceder a este ecrã a partir do menu supervisor. A Ilustração 30 mostra os seletores de
utilização pouco frequente, visto que são do tipo supervisor. Apenas têm de ser manipulados
pelo supervisor da máquina ou encarregado. A funcionalidade dos botões / seletores é a
seguinte:
• Alarmes ecrã principal: Em ON desativa a visualização dos alarmes no ecrã principal.

Ao carregar na zona de estado sobre o nome do alarme pode aceder ao ecrã de
visualização de alarmes.
• Anul. ecrã alarme: Quando estiver ativado não permite o aparecimento dos ecrãs de
alarmes quando ocorrem.
• Dados máquina: acessível apenas para pessoal autorizado.
• EXIT: Sai do programa, acedendo ao Windows.
Ilustração 30: Ecrã de seletores.
4.6.4 Seletores
É possível aceder a este ecrã (ver Ilustração 32) a partir do menu principal.
Ilustração 31: Botões da zona de seleção Menu principal.

A funcionalidade dos seletores/botões pode ser diferente em função da natureza da máquina e
da instalação.
No ecrã principal de Seletores aparecem diferenciadas várias zonas. A zona do

PALETIZADOR e a zona de PERIFÉRICOS.
Ilustração 32: Ecrã de seletores.
Os seletores na Ilustração 32 são utilizados para selecionar o MODO DE FUNCIONAMENTO

de cada uma das respetivas zonas associadas.
• Manual paletizador: indica e permite selecionar o funcionamento do paletizador em
modo manual.
• Entrada produto (opcional): indica e permite pré-selecionar o modo AUTOMÁTICO de
funcionamento dos mecanismos definidos como transporte de entrada de sacos/produto
para o paletizador. Com a pré-seleção de automático, de cada vez que a máquina
começa a funcionar, esta zona também começa neste modo. Se a pré-seleção de modo
automático não estiver ativa, esta zona permite realizar movimentos manuais aos quais é
possível aceder com os botões verdes anexos.
• Paletes vazias (opcional): indica e permite pré-selecionar o modo AUTOMÁTICO de
funcionamento para a instalação periférica de manuseamento e o fornecimento de
paletes vazias para o paletizador. Com a pré-seleção de automático, de cada vez que a
máquina começa a funcionar, esta zona também começa neste modo. Se a pré-seleção
de modo automático não estiver ativa, esta zona permite realizar movimentos manuais
aos quais é possível aceder com os botões verdes anexos.
• Paletes cheias (opcional): indica e permite pré-selecionar o modo AUTOMÁTICO de
funcionamento da instalação periférica de manuseamento e transporte de paletes
completas processadas pelo paletizador. Com a pré-seleção do automático, de cada vez
que a máquina começa a funcionar, esta zona também começa neste modo. Se a pré-
seleção de modo automático não estiver ativa, esta zona permite realizar movimentos
manuais aos quais é possível aceder com os botões verdes anexos.
Nesta mesma ilustração os botões negros ao lado do seletor de Manual paletizador são
utilizados para realizar um avanço para a página na qual pode ativar manualmente cada uma das
zonas definidas (consultar as secções seguintes).
4.6.4.a Movimentos manuais de mecanismo de orientação/rotador

Manualmente é possível realizar as seguintes ações para o mecanismo de orientação. São
mostradas na Ilustração 33.
• Avançar/Retroceder: com o modo manual de funcionamento ativado, com estes botões
pode iniciar o movimento do mecanismo de rotação num sentido ou outro.
• Avanço tapete: coloca em funcionamento, enquanto o botão estiver ativado, o tapete de
transporte do dispositivo de rotação.
• Procurar referência: permite realizar um homing ou referenciação da posição 0 do
rotador.
• Posicionar: útil para fazer um movimento de posicionamento no modo manual. O
rotador realiza um rotação incremental em relação à posição atual pelo valor introduzido
no campo de entrada (fundo branco).
• Reset sequência: este botão apaga por completo qualquer memória associada ao
funcionamento automático do dispositivo. Depois da ativação deste botão, vai ser
necessário posicionar o rotador na posição inicial (procurar referência) e limpar os
objetos do tapete transportador. Se for necessário, verifique os contadores.
Ilustração 33: Ecrã de ações manuais do rotador.
4.6.4.b Movimentos manuais alisador
As ações que podem ser realizadas de forma manual para o alisador são as relacionadas com a
ativação do avanço dos tapetes. É realizada mantendo premido o botão específico.
4.6.4.c Movimentos manuais impulsor

As ações que podem ser realizadas sobre o mecanismo de impulso de fileiras são:
• Avançar/Retroceder: com o modo manual de funcionamento ativado, com estes botões
pode iniciar o movimento do mecanismo de impulso num sentido ou outro.
• Subir/descer: possibilita a realização de um movimento de subida ou descida da pá de
impulso solidária ao carro de translação do impulsor.
• Avanço tapete: coloca em funcionamento, enquanto o botão estiver ativado, o tapete de
transporte.
• Procurar referência: permite realizar um homing ou referenciação da posição 0 do
impulsor.
• Posicionar: útil para fazer um movimento de posicionamento no modo manual. O
impulsor realiza um deslocamento absoluto para a posição introduzida no campo de
entrada ao lado do botão (fundo branco).
• Reset sequência: este botão apaga por completo qualquer memória associada ao
funcionamento automático do dispositivo. Depois da ativação deste botão, vai ser
necessário posicionar o impulsor na posição inicial (procurar referência) e limpar os
objetos do tapete transportador. Se for necessário, verifique os contadores.
Ilustração 34: Ecrã de ações manuais do impulsor.

4.6.4.d Movimentos manuais compactadores
O ecrã da Ilustração 35 mostra os botões que permitem realizar movimentos dos compactadores
laterais de formação da camada.
Ilustração 35: Ecrã de ações manuais dos compactadores.
Em função de cada máquina ou instalação, os compactadores podem variar em quantidade e

disposição. A associação do compactador físico com a numeração do ecrã pode variar e não tem
de coincidir com a mostrada na imagem.
Para cada um dos compactadores existem botões que permitem realizar um movimento de
Avanço/Retrocesso. Os indicadores numéricos anexos indicam a posição atual do mecanismo
(superior) e a posição que limita o movimento (inferior). A limitação de movimento coincide
com a configuração associada ao dispositivo para o formato de paletização que estiver ativo. É
um valor modificável pelo utilizador.
Adicionalmente existem dois botões que atuam sobre todos os compactadores simultaneamente;
e do botão de RESET SEQUÊNCIA, com funcionalidade similar aos anteriores casos descritos.
4.6.4.e Movimentos manuais elementos elevação

A seguinte ilustração mostra a disposição dos botões disponíveis para atuar manualmente sobre
o sistema de elevação e a plataforma de rolos unida ao mesmo.
Ilustração 36: Ecrã de ações manuais dos elementos da plataforma de elevação.
• Subir/descer: movimento manual de subida e descida. Os detetores de posição máxima,

mínima e de desaceleração são monitorizados continuamente para evitar danos.
• Ativar/Desativar centragem: atua sobre o dispositivo de centragem de palete na
plataforma.
• Ativar/desativar batente (opcional): para as plataformas que dispõem de mecanismo de
batente frontal para as paletes, estes botões permitem ativar e desativar esse dispositivo.
• Avanço/Retrocesso rolos: ativa o movimento de avanço ou retrocesso dos rolos
motorizados da plataforma.
• Reset sequência: como em casos anteriores.
4.6.4.f Movimentos manuais comporta
A Ilustração 37 mostra os botões que permitem realizar ações manuais sobre a comporta de
descarga de camadas para a palete.
Ilustração 37: Ecrã de ações manuais da comporta.
• Abrir/Fechar: mantendo estes botões premidos, a comporta abre ou fecha parcialmente.

• Ciclo Abertura/Fecho: premindo estes botões, a comporta realiza um movimento de
abertura ou fecho total.
• Reset sequência: como em casos anteriores.
4.6.5 Produção
Com o botão PRODUÇÃO da zona de seleção do ecrã principal acede ao ecrã que mostra os
dados de produção da instalação.
Ilustração 38: Dados de produção.
4.6.5.a Valores totais

Estes valores mostram dados da máquina ao longo da sua vida útil. São valores que vão
acumulando e que nunca são reiniciados.
• Tempo produção dias/horas: tempo total em dias e horas de funcionamento da máquina
em modo automático.
• Sacos produzidos: número total de sacos que passaram pelo paletizador.
• Paletes produzidos: número total de paletes completas que foram produzidas.
4.6.5.b Contadores parciais

Os contadores parciais são aqueles que o utilizador pode reiniciar quando quiser e podem ser
utilizados para, por exemplo, analisar as produções por intervalos de tempo, por produções de
lotes, etc.
Ilustração 39: Contadores parciais de produção.
Os valores mostrados são:

• Número de sacos: sacos processados a partir do último reinício do contador.
• Número de paletes completas: paletes completas realizadas desde o último reinício do
contador.
• Tempo funcionamento: tempo acumulado de funcionamento em modo automático a
partir do último reinício do contador.
• Média velocidade: mostra o valor médio em sacos/hora com os valores de tempo e
produção parciais.
4.6.5.c Velocidades
Conforme mostra a seguinte imagem os contadores de velocidades são três:
Ilustração 40: Contadores de velocidade de produção.
• Velocidade instantânea: velocidade calculada a partir do tempo entre os dois últimos

sacos na entrada do mecanismo ou dispositivo de orientação.
• Média velocidade 10 últimos: velocidade média dos dez últimos sacos processados.
• Velocidade máxima: valor máximo de velocidade atingido pela máquina.
4.6.6 Alarmes
Cada alarme ocorrido na máquina é visualizado imediatamente no terminal tátil.
Se o alarme for grave para o processo de funcionamento normal, a máquina passa
automaticamente para o modo PARAGEM.
No ecrã principal aparece, na zona principal, uma lista com os alarmes ativos. Pode validar os
alarmes de duas formas diferentes:
• Com o botão Validar do ecrã de alarme valida o ciclo respetivo. Não serão validados
alarmes de outros ciclos.
• Com o botão REARME do armário elétrico valida todos os alarmes.
Depois de solucionar e validar um alarme, deve colocar a máquina de novo em automático

premindo um dos botões de funcionamento.
ZONA PRINCIPAL COM LISTA
DE ALARMES ATIVOS
Ilustração 41: Ecrã principal com indicador de alarmes ativos.
Na zona de seleção do menu principal também pode aceder a um ecrã dedicado exclusivamente
às mensagens de alarme. Também pode aceder ao ecrã de alarmes carregando na barra de
informação geral:
Ilustração 42: Barra informativa de estado da máquina.
O ecrã de alarmes (ver Ilustração 43) inclui o botão que permite visualizar um histórico dos
alarmes ocorridos na máquina e outro botão que permite validar, um a um, o alarme que estiver
selecionado.
Ilustração 43: Ecrã de alarmes.
4.6.7 Idioma
O ecrã pode ser visualizado em vários idiomas. Na zona de seleção do ecrã principal,
concretamente com o botão IDIOMA, pode aceder a um ecrã de seleção de idioma para os
textos do terminal de operador:
Ilustração 44: Menu seleção idioma.

4.7
Esquemas Eléctricos
5 Esquemas Eléctricos
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Locais de montagem AA
A A
B B
Tensão de alimentação : 380 V III

C C
Tensão de operação : 220 VAC
Tensão de controle : 24 VDC
Norma : IEC
D D
PLC : SIEMENS
Cliente : TIMAC AGRO BRASIL

Instalação : TOP-LOAD P M
Número de desenho : 20204510005100
E E
F F
ESTE DOCUMENTO É PROPRIEDADE DA PAYPER S.A. E É

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Hoja de título / portada Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
COMO PRIVADAS E CONFIDENCIAIS E NÃO PODEM SER Data 21/07/2015 Cliente TIMAC AGRO BRASIL
COPIADOS OU TRANSMITIDOS A TERCEIROS SEM O Escala
CONSENTIMENTO DA EMPRESA.
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 1 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Índice F06_002
A A
Instalação Local de montagem Página Descrição da página Campo suplementar de páginas Data Editor
20204510005100 AA 1 Hoja de título / portada 28/08/2015 LMM
AA 2 Indice de páginas : =20204510005100+AA/1 - =20204510005100+AR1/25 28/08/2015 LMM
AA 2.a Indice de páginas : =20204510005100+AR1/26 - =20204510005100+AR1/80 28/08/2015 LMM
AA 2.b Indice de páginas : =20204510005100+AR1/81 - =20204510005100+DOC&PLC/1.1 28/08/2015 LMM

Indice de páginas : =20204510005100+DOC&PLC/2 -
AA 2.c 28/08/2015 LMM
B =20204510005100+DOC&TER/13 B
Indice de páginas : =20204510005100+DOC&TER/16 -

AA 2.d 28/08/2015 LMM
=20204510005100+DOC&CAB/25
Indice de páginas : =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/26 -
AA 2.e 28/08/2015 LMM
=20204510005100+DOC&CAB/70
AA 2.f 28/08/2015 LMM
=20204510005100+DOC&CAB/98
AA 2.g 28/08/2015 LMM
=20204510005100+DOC&CAB/130
AA 2.h 28/08/2015 LMM
=20204510005100+DOC&CAB1/12
Indice de páginas : =20204510005100+DOC&CAB1/13 -
AA 2.i 28/08/2015 LMM
=20204510005100+DOC&BOM1/1.q
C C
AA 3 Resumen de identificación de estructuras 28/08/2015 LMM
AR1 1 DISTRIBUIÇÃO LINHAS 30/07/2015 Ricard
AR1 2 DISTRIBUIÇÃO LINHAS 30/07/2015 Ricard
AR1 3 DISTRIBUIÇÃO LINHAS 28/08/2015 LMM
AR1 11 TAPETE AGRUPAMENTO 30/07/2015 Ricard
AR1 12 IMPULSOR 30/07/2015 Ricard

D D
AR1 13 IMPULSOR 28/08/2015 LMM
AR1 14 ELEVAÇÃO PÁ IMPULSOR 30/07/2015 Ricard
AR1 16 COMPRESSOR LATERAL 1 30/07/2015 Ricard
AR1 17 COMPRESSOR LATERAL 2 30/07/2015 Ricard
AR1 18 COMPRESSOR FRONTAL 30/07/2015 Ricard
AR1 19 COMPORTA 28/08/2015 LMM
E AR1 21 ELEVADOR PALETE 28/08/2015 LMM E
AR1 22 ROLOS ELEVADOR 28/08/2015 LMM
AR1 23 ROTADOR 31/07/2015 Ricard
AR1 24 ROTADOR 28/08/2015 LMM
AR1 25 TAPETE ROTADOR 30/07/2015 Ricard
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Indice de páginas : =20204510005100+AA/1 - Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
COMO PRIVADAS E CONFIDENCIAIS E NÃO PODEM SER
Data 21/07/2015 =20204510005100+AR1/25 Cliente TIMAC AGRO BRASIL
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Índice F06_002
A A
20204510005100 AR1 26 ALISADOR 30/07/2015 Ricard
AR1 27 DISPENSADOR PALETES 30/07/2015 Ricard
AR1 27.b ROLOS DISPENSADOR 28/08/2015 LMM
AR1 28 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS 30/07/2015 Ricard
B
AR1 30 ROLOS SAÍDA SECÇÃO 1 30/07/2015 Ricard B
AR1 34 TAPETE INCLINADO 30/07/2015 Ricard
AR1 40 SEGURANÇA 30/07/2015 Ricard
AR1 40.a SEGURANÇA 30/07/2015 Ricard
AR1 40.b SEGURANÇA 30/07/2015 Ricard
AR1 40.c SEGURANÇA 30/07/2015 Ricard

C C
AR1 48.a SEGURANÇA 30/07/2015 Ricard

D D
AR1 50 MANOBRA 30/07/2015 Ricard
AR1 51 MANOBRA 31/07/2015 Ricard
AR1 60 PAINEL OPERADOR 30/07/2015 Ricard
AR1 63 PROFINET INTERRUPTOR 28/08/2015 LMM
AR1 64 INTERRUPTOR ETHERNET 28/08/2015 LMM
AR1 65 CONFIGURAÇÃO PLC 30/07/2015 Ricard
E AR1 66 CONFIGURAÇÃO PLC 30/07/2015 Ricard E
AR1 68 ESCRAVO CX1 - CONFIG 28/08/2015 LMM
AR1 69 ESCRAVO CX2 - CONFIG 28/08/2015 LMM
AR1 70 ESCRAVO CX3 - CONFIG 30/07/2015 Ricard
AR1 80 ESCRAVO AR1 - ENTRADAS 30/07/2015 Ricard
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Indice de páginas : =20204510005100+AR1/26 - Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
Data 21/07/2015 =20204510005100+AR1/80 Cliente TIMAC AGRO BRASIL
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 2.a 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Índice F06_002
A A
20204510005100 AR1 81 ESCRAVO AR1 - ENTRADAS 31/07/2015 Ricard
AR1 83a ESCRAVO AR1 - ENTRADAS 30/07/2015 Ricard
B
AR1 84 ESCRAVO AR1 - ENTRADAS 31/07/2015 Ricard B
AR1 90 ESCRAVO AR1 - SAÍDAS 28/08/2015 LMM
AR1 93 ESCRAVO AR1 - SAÍDAS 30/07/2015 Ricard

C C
AR1 100 ESCRAVO CX1 - ENTRADAS 28/08/2015 LMM
AR1 101 ESCRAVO CX1 - ENTRADAS 30/07/2015 Ricard

D D
AR1 200 ESCRAVO CX1 - SAÍDAS 30/07/2015 Ricard
E AR1 210 ESCRAVO CX2 - SAÍDAS 30/07/2015 Ricard E
AR1 220 ESCRAVO CX3 - SAÍDAS 28/08/2015 LMM
AR1 300 COMUNICAÇÃO 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 1 PLC ENTRADAS DIGITAIS 30/07/2015 Ricard
DOC 1.1 PLC ENTRADAS DIGITAIS 30/07/2015 Ricard
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Indice de páginas : =20204510005100+AR1/81 - Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
Data 21/07/2015 =20204510005100+DOC&PLC/1.1 Cliente TIMAC AGRO BRASIL
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 2.b 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Índice F06_002
A A
20204510005100 DOC 2 PLC ENTRADAS DIGITAIS 30/07/2015 Ricard
DOC 3 PLC ENTRADAS DIGITAIS 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 4 PLC ENTRADAS DIGITAIS 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 5 PLC ENTRADAS DIGITAIS 30/07/2015 Ricard
B
DOC 5.1 PLC ENTRADAS DIGITAIS 30/07/2015 Ricard B
DOC 6 PLC SAÍDAS DIGITAIS 30/07/2015 Ricard
DOC 6.1 PLC SAÍDAS DIGITAIS 30/07/2015 Ricard
DOC 7 PLC SAÍDAS DIGITAIS 30/07/2015 Ricard
DOC 2 Plano de bornes =20204510005100+AR1-X1 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 3.a Plano de bornes =20204510005100+AR1-X2 28/08/2015 LMM

C C
DOC 3.b Plano de bornes =20204510005100+AR1-X2 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 4.b Plano de bornes =20204510005100+AR1-X3 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 4.c Plano de bornes =20204510005100+AR1-X3 28/08/2015 LMM

D D
DOC 6 Plano de bornes =20204510005100+AR1-X4B 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 6.a Plano de bornes =20204510005100+AR1-X4B 28/08/2015 LMM
E DOC 10 Plano de bornes =20204510005100+AR1-X23 28/08/2015 LMM E
DOC 11 Plano de bornes =20204510005100+AR2-XAR2 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 12 Plano de bornes =20204510005100+CX4-X40 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 12.a Plano de bornes =20204510005100+CX4-X40 28/08/2015 LMM
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Indice de páginas : =20204510005100+DOC&PLC/2 - Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
Data 21/07/2015 =20204510005100+DOC&TER/13 Cliente TIMAC AGRO BRASIL
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 2.c 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Índice F06_002
A A
20204510005100 DOC 16 Plano de bornes =20204510005100+CX100-XCin 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 18.a Plano de bornes =20204510005100+CX30-X300 28/08/2015 LMM
B
DOC 19 Plano de bornes =20204510005100+EX3-X 28/08/2015 LMM B
DOC 1 Plano de cables =20204510005100+AR1-3W1 28/08/2015 LMM

C C

D D
DOC 18 Plano de cables =20204510005100+AR1-51WB1 28/08/2015 LMM
E DOC 21 Plano de cables =20204510005100+AR1-13WCTnet1 28/08/2015 LMM E
DOC 22 Plano de cables =20204510005100+AR1-11WM1 28/08/2015 LMM
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Indice de páginas : =20204510005100+DOC&TER/16 - Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
Data 21/07/2015 =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/25 Cliente TIMAC AGRO BRASIL
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 2.d 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Índice F06_002
A A
20204510005100 DOC 26 Plano de cables =20204510005100+AR1-17WM1 28/08/2015 LMM
B
DOC 30 Plano de cables =20204510005100+AR1-22WM1 28/08/2015 LMM B

C C
DOC 53 Plano de cables =20204510005100+AR1-43WYV1 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 54 Plano de cables =20204510005100+AR1-43WYV2 28/08/2015 LMM

D D
DOC 60 Plano de cables =20204510005100+CX100-300W1 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 61 Plano de cables =20204510005100+CXEV4-95WYV6 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 62 Plano de cables =20204510005100+CXEV4-95WYV7 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 63 Plano de cables =20204510005100+EX1-81WB1 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 64 Plano de cables =20204510005100+EX1-81WB2 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 65 Plano de cables =20204510005100+EX2-300W2 28/08/2015 LMM
E DOC 66 Plano de cables =20204510005100+EX3-300W3 28/08/2015 LMM E
DOC 67 Plano de cables =20204510005100+EX-47W1 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 70 Plano de cables =20204510005100+EX-12WB1 28/08/2015 LMM
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Indice de páginas : =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/26 - Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 2.e 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Índice F06_002
A A
20204510005100 DOC 71 Plano de cables =20204510005100+EX-12WB2 28/08/2015 LMM
B
DOC 75 Plano de cables =20204510005100+EX-48WB2 28/08/2015 LMM B

C C
DOC 84 Plano de cables =20204510005100+EX-83WB5.1 28/08/2015 LMM

D D
E DOC 94 Plano de cables =20204510005100+EX-100WB4 28/08/2015 LMM E
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 2.f 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Índice F06_002
A A
B

C C

D D
E DOC 126 Plano de cables =20204510005100+EX-120WB1 28/08/2015 LMM E
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 2.g 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Índice F06_002
A A
B
DOC 140 Plano de cables =20204510005100+EX-200WYV1 28/08/2015 LMM

C C
DOC 1 AR1 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 1.a AR1 28/08/2015 LMM

D D
DOC 2 AR2 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 3 CX1 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 4 CX2 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 5 CX3 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 6 CX4 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 7 CX10 28/08/2015 LMM
E DOC 8 CX11 28/08/2015 LMM E
DOC 9 CX30 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 10 CX100 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 11 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 12 28/08/2015 LMM
F F

Data 21/07/2015 =20204510005100+DOC&CAB1/12 Cliente TIMAC AGRO BRASIL
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 2.h 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Índice F06_002
A A
20204510005100 DOC 13 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 1 Lista de suma de artículos : SIE.5SY4350-8 - MOE.M22-DL-W 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 1.a Lista de suma de artículos : MOE.M22-LED-W - SIE.5SL4204-7 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 1.b Lista de suma de artículos : SIE.5SL4106-8 - WEI.1600480000 28/08/2015 LMM
B
DOC 1 Lista de artículos : SE.NSYSM1816402DP - PAY.MAN6X2,5N 28/08/2015 LMM B
DOC 1.a Lista de artículos : SIE.3RT2015-1VB41 - SIE.3RV2901-1E 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 1.b Lista de artículos : SIE.3RV2011-1DA10 - PAY.MAN8X0,5N 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 1.c Lista de artículos : PAY.MAN2X0,5 - WEI.1122770000 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 1.d Lista de artículos : SE.NSYCRN46250P - ASEM.ASHMI600A12160 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 1.e Lista de artículos : SE.NSYTBS292412 - PYP.MAN_ETH_(4x2x0,22mm²)_SH 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 1.f Lista de artículos : SE.NSYTBS292412 - WAGO.750-600 28/08/2015 LMM

C C
DOC 1.g Lista de artículos : SE.NSYTBS292412 - WAGO.750-600 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 1.h Lista de artículos : PAY.MAN16X1N - PAY.MAN16X1N 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 1.i Lista de artículos : MOE.M22-I4 - MOE.M22S-ST-X 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 1.j Lista de artículos : MOE.M22-PV - MOE.M22S-ST-X 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 1.k Lista de artículos : MOE.M22-PV - MOE.M22-IY1 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 1.l Lista de artículos : IFM.OGS301 - IFM.E20869 28/08/2015 LMM

D D
DOC 1.m Lista de artículos : PAY.MAN12X0,5N - PAY.MAN12X0,5N 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 1.n Lista de artículos : PAY.MAN12X0,5N - PAY.MAN12X0,5N 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 1.o Lista de artículos : IFM.IV5004 - IFM.IF5933 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 1.p Lista de artículos : IFM.IF5933 - IFM.E20452 28/08/2015 LMM
DOC 1.q Lista de artículos : IFM.E20869 - IFM.EVC145 28/08/2015 LMM
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Indice de páginas : =20204510005100+DOC&CAB1/13 - Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
Data 21/07/2015 =20204510005100+DOC&BOM1/1.q Cliente TIMAC AGRO BRASIL
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 2.i 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Visão geral dos identificadores de estrutura F24_001

A A
Designação completa Etiquetas Descrição da estrutura Designação completa Etiquetas Descrição da estrutura
=20204510005100 Instalación INSTALAÇÃO
+AA Lugar de montaje CAPAS
+AR1 Lugar de montaje ARMÁRIO PRINCIPAL
+AR2 Lugar de montaje QUADRO COMANDO
+CX1 Lugar de montaje C. PRÉ-FORMA 1
+CX2 Lugar de montaje C. PRÉ-FORMA 2

B B
+CX3 Lugar de montaje C. DISPENSADOR
+CX4 Lugar de montaje C. PLATAFORMA ELEVAÇÃO
+CX10 Lugar de montaje C. COMPORTA 1
+CX11 Lugar de montaje C. IMPULSOR
+CX100 Lugar de montaje C. TAPETE INCLINADO
+CX23 Lugar de montaje C. ROTADOR
+CX30 Lugar de montaje APLICADOR FOLHAS

C C
+CXEV4 Lugar de montaje C. EV P. ELEVAÇÃO
+P10 Lugar de montaje BOTONEIRA 1
+EX1 Lugar de montaje ENTRADA PRODUTO
+EX2 Lugar de montaje ENTRADA PALETES
+EX3 Lugar de montaje SAÍDA PALETES

D D
+EX Lugar de montaje MÁQUINA
+CLIENT Lugar de montaje DERIVAÇÃO
+DOC Lugar de montaje DOCUMENTAÇÃO
+CX21 Lugar de montaje
+CX31 Lugar de montaje
&PLC Tipo de documento Resumo PLC
&LYT Tipo de documento Layout

E E
&TER Tipo de documento Bornes
&CAB Tipo de documento Cabo
&CAB1 Tipo de documento Lista de cabos
&BOM Tipo de documento Lista de peças totalizadas
&BOM1 Tipo de documento Lista de peças
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Resumen de identificación de estructuras Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Locais de montagem AR1
A
L11 L11 L11 L11 / 2.A1 A
L21 L21 L21 L21 / 2.A1
L31 L31 L31 L31 / 2.A1
16 mm²
16 mm²
1 3 1 3 5
1 3 5
-1Q1 -1F1 -1F2
63A 2 4 6 10A C 6A C
00101
00102
2 4 2 4 6
00103
00104
00105
B 380V 0V B
-1TV1
1000VA
220V 0V
00106
00107
AC AC AC AC AC AC
-1G1 -1G2
24VDC
3 24VDC
3
1 N
10A 5A
-1Q2
25A
30mA
IΔ
2 N.
00109
00110
2L-
C C
L1
L2
L3
00115
1 3
-1F3
4A C
2 4
00111 00111 00111

00108
00108
11 13
-1B1 -1B2 1 1 1
/80.C4 TERMÓSTATO
12 14
16 mm²
MICRO PORTA
-1F4 -1F5 -1F6
00111
6A D 6A D 4A D
00113
00114
D 2 2 2 D
-PE 1L- 1L+ 2L- 2L+ 3L- 3L+

00111
00112
L1
x1 -1U1
-X1 1 2 3 230V x1
-PE
-1HL1 -1HL2
230V WHITE x2
230V 1L- 1L+ 2L- 2L+ 3L- 3L+
x2
-1W1
N
00112
00112
00112
E E
-X
1L-
1L+
2L-
2L+
3L-
3L+
1 2 3 PE
12.F4 /
3.A1 /
23.A1 /
12.F4 /
3.A1 /
23.A1 /
1 PE 2
DERIVAÇÃO
-1XP1
+CLIENT ALIMENTAÇÃO ALIMENTAÇÃO ALIMENTAÇÃO

24VCC ARMÁRIO 24VCC EXTERIOR 24VCC FREIOS
3F~ 380V 60Hz /TT TOMADA CORRENTE ILUMINAÇÃO VENTILAÇÃO EM TENSÃO ELÉTRICO
32 kW
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM DISTRIBUIÇÃO LINHAS Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 1 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A 1.A8 / L11 L11 L11 A
1.A8 / L21
L21 L21
1.A8 / L31
L31 L31
16 mm²
16 mm²
1 3 5 1 3 5
-2F1 -2F2
50A D 16A D
B 2 4 6 2 4 6 B
00201
00202
00203
00204
00205
00206
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 1 3 5
-42KM1 -42KM3
/42.E6 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 /42.E7 2 4 6
00207
00208
00209
C 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 C
-42KM2
/42.E6 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
D D
1L1
1L2
1L3
2L1
2L2
2L3
1L1
1L2
1L3
2L1
2L2
2L3
11.A1 /
11.A1 /
11.A1 /
27.A1 /
27.A1 /
27.A1 /
E E
CIRCUITO POTÊNCIA CIRCUITO POTÊNCIA

PALETIZADOR PALETES VAZIAS
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 2 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
1.E7 / 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ / 12.F7

1.E7 / 2L-
2L- 2L- 2L- 2L- 2L- / 51.A1
B B
-PE
-X5 3 4 PE -X5 3 4 PE -X5 3 4 PE

-3W1 -3W2 -3W3
3G1 3G1 3G1
ALIM. CAIXA C1 BN BU GNYE ALIM. CAIXA C2 BN BU GNYE ALIM. CAIXA C3 BN BU GNYE
C C
2L+
2L-
2L+
2L-
2L+
2L-
DISPENSADOR
C. PRÉ-FORMA
C. PRÉ-FORMA
68.A1 /
69.A1 /
70.A1 /
68.A1 /
69.A1 /
70.A1 /
-PE -PE -PE
C.
1
+CX1 +CX2 +CX3
D D
E E
DISTRIBUIÇÃO 24VCC
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 3 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2.D2 / 1L1 1L1 1L1 1L1 / 12.A1

2.D2 / 1L2 1L2 1L2 1L2 / 12.A1
A 2.D2 / 1L3
1L3 1L3 1L3 / 12.A1 A
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21

-11QM1
2,2...3,2A 14 22
/50.B2
I> I> I>
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
B B
01101
01102
01103
C C
1 3 5 13
-11KM1
/90.D2 2 4 6 14
01104
01105
11W1
11U1
11V1
D D
-PE
1 2 3 PE 1 2 3 PE
-X3 1 1 1 1 -X3 2 2 2 2
-11WM1 11U1 11V1 11W1

6G2,5 1 2 3 GNYE 4 5
E E
U1 V1 W1 T1
RD WH
M
-11M1
1,1kW 3 BL
1 2 3 4 5
2,55A RETIFICADOR
SEW
MÁQUINA
-11RF1
+EX TAPETE AGRUPAMENTO

F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM TAPETE AGRUPAMENTO Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 11 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
11.A8 / 1L1 1L1 1L1 1L1 / 14.A1

11.A8 / 1L2 1L2 1L2 1L2 / 14.A1
A 11.A8 / 1L3
1L3 1L3 1L3 / 14.A1 A
1 3 5
01201
-12F1 -PE
16A C
2 4 6
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21
01202
01203
01204
-12QM1
0,14..0,2A 14 22
/50.B3
I> I> I>
-12Z1
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 -RS485 1 3 2
01201
FILTRO L1 L2 L3 GND
B
-12R1 B
600W
L1' L2' L3' 80Ω
x1 x2
-12WRTU1
01218
01219
DET IMPULSOR POS DET IMPULSOR POS
4x2x0,22
01205
01206
01208
01209
01210
OG WH/GN WH/BN
MÁXIMA MÍNIMA
2 3 7
-10X1
-12GF1 -RJ45
400V L1 L2 L3 PE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 48V DC- DC+ BR
2,2kW
120
RX-TX
0V
+24V
0V
ACT TX
/RX-/TX
*
SP1404
CONTROL TECHNIQUES
2 4 2 4
ALIMENTAÇÃO
VARIADOR DE FREQUÊNCIA -12B1 -12B2
IV5004 + - IV5004 + -
C 1 3 5 RS-485 C
1 3 1 3
-12KM1
/12.E6 2 4 6
MARCHA ADELANTE
IN/AN2 VEL.7FREC.
VELOCIDAD LENTA
ENTRADA DIGITAL
SALIDA VEL CERO
DRIVE HEALTHY
MARCHA ATRAS
NO INVERTIDA
24V EXTERIOR
24V EXTERIOR
STATUS RELAY
SEL. AN1/AN2
INVERTIDA
REINICIO
OUT/AN1
OUT/AN2
0V COM
0V COM
0V COM
0V COM
0V COM
0V COM
IN/AN3
01211
01212
-12WB1 -12WB2
+10V
4X0,34 WH BN BU 4X0,34 WH BN BU
MOTOR
MÁQUINA
U V W PE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 41 42
D +EX D
1L-
08005
01214
1L+ 08005
-X12 1 2
1L- 19.D8
+ - + -
-PE
-X4B 1 1 1 -X4B 2 2 2
+ - + -
01215
01216
01217
-12WM1
/12.E1 12U1 12V1 12W1
E
(4G2,5+2x1,5)C SH 1 2 BK BN GY GNYE PE
E
A1 12 14 A1
-12K1 -12KM1 01216 01217
13.C8 13.C8
A2 11 /12.C1 A2
U1 V1 W1 T1
WH RD 3.A8 / 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ / 23.F7
M 2L-
-12M1 12.F8 / 2L- 2L- / 12.F7
1 2 3 4 5
BL 2,2kW 3 1.E6 / 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ / 19.F4
MÁQUINA
RETIFICADOR
4,85A 1L- 1L- 1L-
SEW 87Hz 1.E6 / 1L- 1L- / 13.D7
-12RF1 05102 05102
0,168A LIGAÇÃO TRIÂNGULO 400V / 19.F4
+EX RETIFICADOR FREIO IMPULSOR IMPULSOR
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM IMPULSOR Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 12 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
-12GF1.2 -12GF1.3
SLOT 2 SM-APPLICATIONS SLOT 3
CONTROL TECHNIQUES
SM-Profinet
CONTROL TECHNIQUES
192.168.1.228
RJ-45 RJ-45
CTnet Shield
CTnet A
CTnet B
0V SC
1 2 3
DO0
DO1
RJ-45 RJ-45
DI0
DI1
/RX
/TX
RX
TX
0V
B B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
01216
PFNET2 -13WCTnet1
63.C3
/24.C7
-63A1:X1:LAN2
/13.C7
01217
/24.C7
2x0,25 WHITE BLUE SH
C C
-12GF1.4
CONECTOR ENCODER UNIVERSAL
CONTROL TECHNIQUES
CTnetA.2 CTnetB.2 01217 01216

CANAL -B
CANAL -A
CANAL -Z
-Aout /-U
-Bout /-V
CANAL A
CANAL B
CANAL Z
Aout /U
Bout /V
24.C7 24.C7 12.E8 12.E7

MALLA
+V
TH
-W
0V
W
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
12.F7 / 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- / 19.F4

D D
-PE
-13W1
/13.D3
ENCODER
8x0,25 YE GN VIO BU RD OG BN BK SH IMPULSOR
-13PC1
MALLA
1 GND
2 Us
8 Z-
SLOT 1
7 Z
6 B-
SLOT 2
E 4 B E
5 A-
SLOT 3
3 A SLOTS DISTRIBUIÇÃO DRIVER SP
MÁQUINA
+EX
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM IMPULSOR Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 13 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12.A8 / 1L1 1L1 1L1 1L1 / 16.A1

12.A8 / 1L2 1L2 1L2 1L2 / 16.A1
A 12.A8 / 1L3
1L3 1L3 1L3 / 16.A1 A
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21

-14QM1
1,8..2,5A 14 22
/50.B3
I> I> I>
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
B B
01401
01402
01403
C C
1 3 5 13
-14KM1
/93.D6 2 4 6 14
01404
01405
14W1
14U1
14V1
D D
-PE
1 2 3 PE 1 2 3 PE
-X3 3 3 3 3 -X3 4 4 4 4
-PE
-14WM1
/14.E2 14U1 14V1 14W1
((4G2,5+2x1,5)C SH BK BN GY GNYE PE 1 2
E E
U1 V1 W1 T1
RD WH
M
-14M1
0,75kW 3 BL
1 2 3 4 5
1,75A RETIFICADOR
SEW
MÁQUINA
-14RF1
ELEVAÇÃO PÁ IMPULSOR
+EX
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM ELEVAÇÃO PÁ IMPULSOR Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 14 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
14.A8 / 1L1 1L1 1L1 1L1 / 17.A1

14.A8 / 1L2 1L2 1L2 1L2 / 17.A1
A 14.A8 / 1L3
1L3 1L3 1L3 / 17.A1 A
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21

-16QM1
0,9...1,25A 14 22
/50.B3
I> I> I>
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
B B
01601
01602
01603
01604
C C
1 3 5 13 1 3 5 13
-16KM1A -16KM1B
/90.D3 2 4 6 14 /90.D3 2 4 6 14
16W1
16V1
16U1
01605
01605
01604
16W1
16U1
16V1
D D
-PE
1 2 3 PE 1 2 3 PE
-X3 5 5 5 5 -X3 6 6 6 6
-16WM1 16U1 16V1 16W1

6G2,5 mm² 1 2 3 GNYE 4 5
E E
U1 V1 W1
RD WH
M
-16M1
0,37kW 1,23A 3 1 2 3 4 5
MÁQUINA
BL
RETIFICADOR
SEW
COMPRESSOR LATERAL 1 -16RF1
+EX DIREITA
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM COMPRESSOR LATERAL 1 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 16 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
16.A8 / 1L1 1L1 1L1 1L1 / 18.A1

16.A8 / 1L2 1L2 1L2 1L2 / 18.A1
A 16.A8 / 1L3
1L3 1L3 1L3 / 18.A1 A
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21

-17QM1
0,9...1,25A 14 22
/50.B4
I> I> I>
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
B B
01701
01702
01703
01704
C C
1 3 5 13 1 3 5 13
-17KM1A -17KM1B
/90.D4 2 4 6 14 /90.D5 2 4 6 14
17W1
17V1
17U1
01705
01705
01704
17W1
17U1
17V1
D D
-PE
1 2 3 PE 1 2 3 PE
-X3 7 7 7 7 -X3 8 8 8 8
-17WM1 17U1 17V1 17W1

6G2,5 mm² 1 2 3 GNYE 4 5
E E
U1 V1 W1
RD WH
M
-17M1
0,37kW 1,23A 3 1 2 3 4 5
MÁQUINA
BL
RETIFICADOR
SEW
COMPRESSOR LATERAL 2 -17RF1
+EX ESQUERDA
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM COMPRESSOR LATERAL 2 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 17 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
17.A8 / 1L1 1L1 1L1 1L1 / 19.A1

17.A8 / 1L2 1L2 1L2 1L2 / 19.A1
A 17.A8 / 1L3
1L3 1L3 1L3 / 19.A1 A
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21

-18QM1
0,9...1,25A 14 22
/50.B4
I> I> I>
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
B B
01801
01802
01803
01804
C C
1 3 5 13 1 3 5 13
-18KM1A -18KM1B
/90.D6 2 4 6 14 /90.D6 2 4 6 14
18W1
18V1
18U1
01805
01805
01804
18W1
18U1
18V1
D D
-PE
1 2 3 PE 1 2 3 PE
-X3 9 9 9 9 -X3 10 10 10 10
-18WM1 18U1 18V1 18W1

6G2,5 mm² 1 2 3 GNYE 4 5
E E
U1 V1 W1
RD WH
M
-18M1
0,37kW 1,23A 3 1 2 3 4 5
MÁQUINA
BL
RETIFICADOR
SEW
-18RF1
+EX COMPRESSOR FRONTAL
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM COMPRESSOR FRONTAL Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 18 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
18.A8 / 1L1 1L1 1L1 1L1 1L1 / 21.A1

18.A8 / 1L2 1L2 1L2 1L2 / 21.A1
A 18.A8 / 1L3
1L3 1L3 1L3 1L3 / 21.A1 A
01901
1 3 5
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21
-19QM1 -19F1
0,14..0,2A 14 22 10A C
2 4 6
/50.B5
I> I> I>
2/T1 4/T2 01901 6/T3 -RS485 1 3 2
-PE
01902
01903
01904
B B
-19WRTU1
4x2x0,22 OG WH/GN WH/BN
2 3 7
-19X1
-19GF1 -RJ45
400V
CONTROL TECHNIQUES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L1 L2 L3 - + PE
1,5kW
01905
01906
01907
120
RX-TX
0V
+24V
0V
ACT TX
/RX-/TX
*
VARIADOR DE FREQUÊNCIA
FONTE ALIMENTAÇÃO
Internal
SKB340150 EMC Filter
C 1 3 5 RS-485 C
-19KM1 RESISTÊNCIA FRENAGEM

/19.E6 2 4 6
01908
01909
01910
01907
MOTOR
U V W PE B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 .T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
D D
09008
09101
09102
08005
09008
09101
09102
08005 08005
01911
1 2 1 2
12.D7 21.D8
-X3 11 11 12 12
90.C7 /
91.C2 /
91.C3 /
-PE5
-19WM1
-19W1 /19.E3 19U1 19V1 19W1
4G2,5 BN GY BK GNYE 4G2,5 BK BN GY GNYE
01912
01912
E E
A1 12 14 A1
-19K1 -19K1 -19KM1
/19.E5 A2 /19.E5 11 /19.C2 A2
U1 V1 W1 T1
WH RD
M
-19M1
1 2 3 4 5
BL 1,1kW 3
MÁQUINA
RETIFICADOR
2,4A 1L+ 1L+ 1L+
SEW 87Hz 12.F7 / 1L+ 1L+ / 21.F4
-19RF1 13.D8 / 1L-
1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- / 21.F4
0,168A LIGAÇÃO TRIÂNGULO 400V
12.F8 / 05102
05102 05102 05102 / 21.F4
+EX RETIFICADOR FREIO COMPORTA COMPORTA
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM COMPORTA Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 19 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
19.A8 / 1L1 1L1 1L1 1L1 1L1 / 22.A1

19.A8 / 1L2 1L2 1L2 1L2 / 22.A1
A 19.A8 / 1L3
1L3 1L3 1L3 1L3 / 22.A1 A
02101
1 3 5
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21
-21QM1 -21F1 -21R1
0,28..0,4A 14 22 50A C
2 4 6
x1
/50.B5
I> I> I>
2/T1 4/T2 02101 6/T3 -RS485 1 3 2 -R1
02106
2000W -PE
02102
02103
02104
B 20Ω x2 B
-FR1
/81.B2
-21WRTU1
02105
2 3 7
-21X1
-21GF1 -RJ45
400V
L1 L2 L3 DC1 DC2 BR PE
22kW
02107
02108
02109
120
RX-TX
0V
+24V
0V
ACT TX
/RX-/TX
*
FONTE ALIMENTAÇÃO
Internal
SK3402 EMC Filter
C 1 3 5 RS-485 C

/21.E6 2 4 6
02110
02111
02112
02109
MOTOR
D D
09105
09106
09107
02115
08005
09105
09106
09107
08005 08005
02113
1 2 1 2
19.D8 22.D8
-X3 13 13 14 14
91.C5 /
91.C6 /
91.C6 /
-PE
-21WM1
-21W2 /21.E3 21U1 21V1 21W1
4G2,5 BN GY BK GNYE 4G6 BK BN GY GNYE
02114
02114
E E
A1 12 14 A1 12 14
-21K1 -21K1 -21KM1 -91K8
/21.E5 A2 /21.E5 11 /21.C2 A2 /91.D7 11
U1 V1 W1 T1
WH RD
M
-21M1
1 2 3 4 5
BL 11kW 3
MÁQUINA
RETIFICADOR
21,5A 1L+ 1L+ 1L+
SEW 87Hz 19.F8 / 1L+ 1L+ / 22.F4
-21RF1 19.F8 / 1L-
1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- / 22.F4
0,168A LIGAÇÃO TRIÂNGULO 400V
19.F8 / 05102
05102 05102 05102 / 30.F3
+EX RETIFICADOR FREIO ELEVADOR PALETE ELEVADOR PALETE
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM ELEVADOR PALETE Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 21 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
21.A8 / 1L1 1L1 1L1 1L1 / 23.A1

21.A8 / 1L2 1L2 1L2 1L2 / 23.A1
A 21.A8 / 1L3
1L3 1L3 1L3 / 23.A1 A
1 3 5
-22F1
10A C
2 4 6
-RS485 1 3 2
02202
02203
02204
B B
-PE
-22WRTU1
2 3 7
-22X1
-22GF1 -RJ45
400V
L1 L2 L3 - + PE
1,5kW
120
RX-TX
0V
+24V
0V
ACT TX
/RX-/TX
*
FONTE ALIMENTAÇÃO
Internal
C C
RS-485
RESISTÊNCIA FRENAGEM
MOTOR
D D
09103
09104
08005
09103
09104
08005 08005
21.D8 23.D6
91.C3 /
91.C4 /
-PE
-22WM1
/27.b.E3 22U1 22V1 22W1
E
(4G2,5+2x1,5)C BK BN GY GNYE PE
E
U1 V1 W1 T1
M
-22M1
1,1kW 2,45A 3
1L+ 1L+
MÁQUINA
21.F8 / 1L+ 1L+ / 23.F4

21.F8 / 1L-
1L- 1L- 1L- / 23.F4
23.F4 / 05102
05102 05102 05102 / 23.F8
+EX ROLOS ELEVADOR PALETE
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM ROLOS ELEVADOR Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 22 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
22.A8 / 1L1 1L1 1L1 1L1 / 25.A1

22.A8 / 1L2 1L2 1L2 1L2 / 25.A1
A 22.A8 / 1L3
1L3 1L3 1L3 / 25.A1 A
1.E8 / 3L+
1.E8 / 3L-
-PE
1 3 5
-23F1
16A C
2 4 6
02303
02304
02305
-RS485 1 3 2
B
-23Z1 -23R1 B
3L+ 3L- 600W
FILTRO L1 L2 L3 GND
80Ω
x1 x2
L1' L2' L3' -23WRTU1
02313
02314
DET ROTADOR POS DET ROTADOR POS
02306
MÁXIMA MÍNIMA
02307
02308
2 3 7
-23X1
-23GF1 -RJ45
400V L1 L2 L3 PE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 48V - + BR
5,5/4kW
120
RX-TX
0V
+24V
0V
ACT TX
/RX-/TX
*
SP1406
CONTROL TECHNIQUES
1 3 5 ALIMENTAÇÃO
-23KM1 VARIADOR DE FREQUÊNCIA -23B1 -23B2
C /23.E6 2 4 6 IG5899 IG5899 C
RS-485
02321
02322
02323
MARCHA ADELANTE
-23U1
IN/AN2 VEL.7FREC.
VELOCIDAD LENTA
ENTRADA DIGITAL
SALIDA VEL CERO
DRIVE HEALTHY
FILTRO EMC
MARCHA ATRAS
NO INVERTIDA
24V EXTERIOR
24V EXTERIOR
STATUS RELAY
U
SEL. AN1/AN2
VARÍSTOR
INVERTIDA
REINICIO
OUT/AN1
OUT/AN2
U
0V COM
0V COM
0V COM
0V COM
0V COM
0V COM
IN/AN3
-23WB1 -23WB2
+10V
2x0,34 BK BK 2x0,34 BK BK
MOTOR
MÁQUINA
T1 T2 T3
U V W PE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 41 42
D +EX D
08005
1L-
1L-
C. ROTADOR
-X230 3 1 2 4 1 2
02301
02302
1L+
08005 08005
02309
22.D8 50.B2
+CX23
-X23 1 2
-23W1
6G0,5 3 1 2 4
-PE + - + -
-X4B 3 3 3 -X4B 4 4 4
-23WM1 23U1 23V1 23W1
+ - + -
02311
02312
6G2,5 4 5 1 2 3 GNYE
02310
02310
E E
A1 12 14 A1
-23K1 -23KM1 02311 02312
24.C8 24.C8
A2 11 /23.C1 A2
12.F8 / 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ / 43.B4

M 2L-
-23M1 23.F8 / 2L- 2L- / 23.F7
5,5kW 3
MÁQUINA
22.F8 /1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ / 27.b.F4

22.F8 / 1L-
1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L-
1L- / 24.D7
05102 05102
22.F4 / 05102 05102 / 22.F8
+EX FREIO ROTADOR ROTADOR
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM ROTADOR Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 23 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
-23GF1.1 -23GF1.3
SLOT 1 SM-APPLICATIONS SLOT 3
CONTROL TECHNIQUES
SM-ETHERNET
CONTROL TECHNIQUES
192.168.1.229
RJ-45 RJ-45
CTnet Shield
CTnet A
CTnet B
0V SC
1 2 3
DO0
DO1
RJ-45 RJ-45
DI0
DI1
/RX
/TX
RX
TX
0V
B B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
ETH3
64.C4
02311
02312
-64A1:X1:LAN3
-13WCTnet1
/13.C7
2x0,25 WHITE BLUE SH
C C
-23GF1.4 SM-Resolver
SLOT 2
CONTROL TECHNIQUES
LIGAÇÕES SAÍDA
SIMULAÇÃO ENCODER LIGAÇÕES DE RESOLVER
02311 02312
23.E7 23.E8
0V common
0V common
0V common
0V common
0V common
CTnetA.2 CTnetB.2
COS HIGH
REF HIGH
SIN HIGH
COS LOW
REF LOW
SIN LOW
13.C7 13.C7
A\
B\
Z\
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
23.F8 / 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- / 27.b.F4
D D
-24W1
/24.D3
RESOLVER
8x0,25 RD BU PK GY YE GR WH BN SH ROTADOR
-24PC1
-24XPC1
10
10 TF/TH
9
9 TF/TH
8 n.c.
SLOT 1
7 n.c.
6
6 Sin-
5 SLOT 2
E 5 Sin+ E
4
4 Cos-
3 SLOT 3
3 Cos+ SLOTS DISTRIBUIÇÃO DRIVER SP
2
2 Ref-
1
1 Ref+
MÁQUINA
+EX
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM ROTADOR Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 24 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
23.A8 / 1L1 1L1 1L1 1L1 / 26.A1

23.A8 / 1L2 1L2 1L2 1L2 / 26.A1
A 23.A8 / 1L3
1L3 1L3 1L3 / 26.A1 A
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21

-25QM1
2,2...3,2A 14 22
/50.B5
I> I> I>
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
B B
02501
02502
02503
C C
1 3 5 13
-25KM1
/92.D2 2 4 6 14
02504
02505
25W1
25U1
25V1
D D
-PE
1 2 3 PE 1 2 3 PE
-X3 15 15 15 15 -X3 16 16 16 16
-25WM1 25U1 25V1 25W1

6G2,5 1 2 3 GNYE 4 5
E E
U1 V1 W1 T1
RD WH
M
-25M1
1,1kW 3 BL
1 2 3 4 5
2,55A RETIFICADOR
SEW
MÁQUINA
-25RF1
TAPETE ROTADOR
+EX
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM TAPETE ROTADOR Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 25 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
25.A8 / 1L1 1L1 1L1 1L1 1L1 / 30.A1

25.A8 / 1L2 1L2 1L2 1L2 1L2 / 30.A1
A 25.A8 / 1L3
1L3 1L3 1L3 1L3 / 30.A1 A
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21

-26QM1 -26QM2 -26QM3
2,2...3,2A 14 22 2,2...3,2A 14 22 0,9...1,25A 14 22
/50.E2
/50.E3
/50.E3
I> I> I> I> I> I> I> I> I>
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
B B
02601
02602
02603
02604
02605
02606
02607
02608
02609
C C
1 3 5 13 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
-26KM1 -26KM2 -26KM3A -26KM3B
/92.D5 2 4 6 14 /92.D5 2 4 6 /92.D3 2 4 6 /92.D4 2 4 6
26W3
26U3
26V3
26W3
26V3
26U3
02610
02611
26W1
26W2
26W3
26U1
26U2
26U3
26V1
26V2
26V3
D D
-PE -PE -PE
1 2 3 PE 1 2 3 PE 1 2 3 PE 1 2 3 PE
-X3 17 17 17 17 -X3 18 18 18 18 -X3 19 19 19 19 -X3 20 20 20 20
-26WM1 26U1 26V1 26W1

-26WM2 26U2 26V2 26W2
-26WM3 26U3 26V3 26W3
6G2,5 1 2 3 GNYE 4 5 4G2,5 BK BN GY GNYE 4G2,5 BK BN GY GNYE
E E
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
RD WH
M M M
-26M1 -26M2 -26M3 RD WH
1,1kW 3 BL
1 2 3 4 5 1,1kW 3 0,37kW 3
2,55A RETIFICADOR
2,55A 1,23A 1 2 3 4 5
SEW BL
MÁQUINA
-26RF1 RETIFICADOR
SEW
ALISADOR TAPETE ALISADOR TAPETE -26RF2
INFERIOR SUPERIOR REGULAÇÃO ALISADOR
+EX
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM ALISADOR Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 26 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2.D3 / 2L1 2L1 2L1 2L1 / 27.b.A1

2.D3 / 2L2 2L2 2L2 2L2 / 27.b.A1
A
2.D3 / 2L3
2L3 2L3 2L3 / 27.b.A1
A
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21

-27QM1 -27QM2
1,8..2,5A 14 22 0,7..1A 14 22
/50.C2
/50.C3
I> I> I> I> I> I>
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
B B
02701
02702
02703
02704
02705
02706
02710
C C
1 3 5 13 1 3 5 13 1 3 5 1 3 5
-27KM1A -27KM1B -27KM2A -27KM2B
/92.D6 2 4 6 14 /92.D6 2 4 6 14 /93.D3 2 4 6 /93.D4 2 4 6
27W1 27W2
27V1 27V2
27U1 27U2
02711
D D
02711
02710
27W1
27W2
27U1
27U2
27V1
27V2
-PE -PE
1 2 3 PE 1 2 3 PE 1 2 3 PE
-X3 21 21 21 21 -X3 22 22 22 22 -X3 23 23 23 23
-27WM1 27U1 27V1 27W1

-27WM2 27U2 27V2 27W2
6G2,5 mm² 1 2 3 GNYE 4 5 4G2,5 mm² BK BN GY GNYE
E E
U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2
RD WH RD WH
M M
-27M1 -27M2
0,75kW 3 1 2 3 4 5 0,25kW 3 1 2 3 4 5
MÁQUINA
BL BL
1,75A RETIFICADOR
0,73A RETIFICADOR
SEW SEW
ELEVAÇÃO DISPENSADOR DE -27RF1 -27RF2
+EX PALETES FORQUILHAS DISPENSADOR
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM DISPENSADOR PALETES Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1,05
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 27 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
27.A7 / 2L1 2L1 2L1 2L1 / 28.A1

27.A7 / 2L2 2L2 2L2 2L2 / 28.A1
A 27.A7 / 2L3
2L3 2L3 2L3 / 28.A1 A
02707
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 1 3 5
-27QM3 -27F3
0,14..0,2A 14 22 10A C
2 4 6
/50.C3
I> I> I>
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 -RS485 1 3 2
02707
-PE
02712
02713
02714
B B
-27WRTU1
3 1 2
-27X1
-27GF3 -RJ45
400V
L1 L2 L3 - + PE
1,5kW
02708
02709
120
RX-TX
0V
+24V
0V
ACT TX
/RX-/TX
*
FONTE ALIMENTAÇÃO
Internal
C 1 3 5 RS-485 C

/27.b.E6 2 4 6
02710
02711
MOTOR
D D
05103
09208
09308
08006
05103
09208
09308
08006
02717
1 2
50.C2
-X3 24 24
51.D6 /
92.C7 /
93.C7 /
-PE
-27W3 -27WM3 27U3 27V3 27W3

4G2,5 BN GY 4G2,5 SH BK BN GY GNYE
02718
02718
E E
A1 12 14 A1
-27K1 -27K1 -27KM4
/27.b.E5 A2 /27.b.E5 11 /27.b.C2 A2
WH RD U3 V3 W3
1 2 3 4 5 M
BL -27M3
MÁQUINA
RETIFICADOR 0,55kW 1,55A 3 23.F8 / 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ / 30.F3
SEW
-27RF3 24.D8 / 1L-
1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- / 30.F3
RETIFICADOR FREIO ROLOS LIGAÇÃO ESTRELA 400V
+EX DISPENSADOR ROLOS DISPENSADOR
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM ROLOS DISPENSADOR Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 27.b 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
27.b.A8 / 2L1 2L1

27.b.A8 / 2L2 2L2
A
27.b.A8 / 2L3
2L3 A
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21

-28QM1
0,7..1A 14 22
/50.C3
I> I> I>
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
B B
02801
02802
02803
02804 02804
C C
1 3 5 13 1 3 5 13
-28KM1A -28KM1B
/93.D5 2 4 6 14 /93.D6 2 4 6 14
28U1
28V1
28W1
02805
D D
02805
02804
28W1
28U1
28V1
-PE
1 2 3 PE 1 2 3 PE
-X3 25 25 25 25 -X3 26 26 26 26
-28WM1 28U1 28V1 28W1

6G2,5 mm² 1 2 3 GNYE 4 5
E E
U1 V1 W1
RD WH
M
-28M1
0,55kW 3 1 2 3 4 5
MÁQUINA
BL
RETIFICADOR
SEW
-28RF1
+EX DISPENSADOR FOLHAS
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM DISPENSADOR FOLHAS Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1,05
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 28 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
26.A8 / 1L1 1L1

26.A8 / 1L2 1L2
A 26.A8 / 1L3
1L3 A
1 3 5
-30F1
10A C
2 4 6
-30R1
-RS485 1 3 2 1300W
150Ω
x1 x2
03001
03002
03003
B B
-PE12
03004
03005
-30WRTU1
3 1 2
-30X1
-30GF1 -RJ45
400V
L1 L2 L3 - + PE
1,5kW
120
RX-TX
0V
+24V
0V
ACT TX
/RX-/TX
*
FONTE ALIMENTAÇÃO
Internal
C C
RS-485
RESISTÊNCIA FRENAGEM
MOTOR
D D
09301
09302 08007
09301
09302
08007
50.D2
93.C2 /
93.C3 /
-PE11
-30WM1
/30.E2 30U1 30V1 30W1
4G2,5 BK BN GY GNYE
E E
U1 V1 W1 T1
M
-30M1
1,1W 3
MÁQUINA
2,45A
27.b.F8 / 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ / 40.E1
27.b.F8 / 1L-
1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- / 40.E1
SECÇÃO 1 SAÍDA
+EX 21.F8 / 05102
05102 05102 05102 / 51.D6
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM ROLOS SAÍDA SECÇÃO 1 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 30 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM TAPETE INCLINADO Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 34 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
-40KF4 -40KF5
-40KF1 -40KF3 /42.A2 /43.A2
SICK.1043700 /41.A3 /42.E2 /43.E2
SICK.1043783 /41.E3 /42.A6 /43.A6
FX3-CPU000000 -40KF2 /40.a.B1 /40.b.B1 /40.c.B1
B 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC B
SICK.1044074 SICK.1044124 SICK.1044125 SICK.1044125
FX0-GPNT00000 FX3-XTDI80002 FX3-XTIO84002 FX3-XTIO84002
BA_HW-FLEXIsoft BA_FX-GW BA_HW-FLEXIsoft BA_HW-FLEXIsoft BA_HW-FLEXIsoft

24 VDC
A1 A2 X1 X2 X3 X4 X1 X2 A1 A2 X1 X2 A1 A2
PORT 1
I1 I2 I3 I4 I1 I2 I3 I4 I1 I2 I3 I4
MS MS MS MS
PWR
C C
CV LINK/ACT 1
LINK/ACT 2
FLEXI soft FLEXI soft FLEXI soft FLEXI soft
CPU0 XTDI XTIO XTIO
STATUS
FLEXI soft
PROFINET IO I5 I6 I7 I8 I5 I6 I7 I8 I5 I6 I7 I8
PORT 2
X5 X6 X7 X8 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
D D
192.168.1.227
/40.b.B2/40.b.B2 /40.c.B2/40.c.B2
A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2
+ - + - + -
PORT 1 PORT 2
E E
30.F6 / 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ / 47.E1

30.F6 / 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- / 42.E6
PFNET3
63.C4
-63A1:X1:LAN3
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM SEGURANÇA Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 40 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
-40KF3 FX3-XTDI
/40.B3
X1
/41.B3
X2
/41.B3
B X3 B
/41.B4
X4
/41.B4
I1
I1 /41.E3 -41SB1:.2 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA ARMÁRIO GERAL (CH1)
I2
I2 /41.E3 -41SB1:.2 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA ARMÁRIO GERAL (CH2)
I3
I3 /41.E4 +AR2-41SB2:.2 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA ARMÁRIO COMANDO (CH1)
I4
I4 /41.E4 +AR2-41SB2:.2 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA ARMÁRIO COMANDO (CH2)
I5
C I5 /41.E5 +P30-41SB3:.2 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS (CH1) C
I6
I6 /41.E5 +P30-41SB3:.2 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS (CH2)
I7
I7 /41.E6 +EX-47A1-XS:3 BARREIRA SEGURANÇA DISPENSADOR PALETES (CH1)
I8
I8 /41.E6 +EX-47A1-XS:4 BARREIRA SEGURANÇA DISPENSADOR PALETES (CH2)
X5
/41.B5
X6
/41.B5
X7
/41.B6
D D
X8
/41.B6
SICK.1044124
E E
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 40.a 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
-40KF4 FX3-XTIO
/40.B3
X1
/42.B2
X2
/42.B2
B A1 B
/40.E3
A2
/40.E3
I1
I1 /42.E2 +EX-48A1-XS:3 BARREIRA SEGURANÇA SAÍDA PALETES MUTTING (CH1)
I2
I2 /42.E2 +EX-48A1-XS:4 BARREIRA SEGURANÇA SAÍDA PALETES MUTTING (CH2)
I3
I3 /42.E3 -49U1:2 MÓDULO SERIADOR PORTAS (CH1)
I4
I4 /42.E3 -49U1:4 MÓDULO SERIADOR PORTAS (CH2)
I5
C I5 /42.E4 +P10-42SB1:.2 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA INFERIOR (CH1) C
I6
I6 /42.E4 +P10-42SB1:.2 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA INFERIOR (CH2)
I7
I7 /42.E5 -43K3:Y2 EDM CONTACTOS SEGURANÇA EXTERNOS
I8
I8 /42.E5 -X2:42 LIVRE
Q1
Q1 /42.B6 -42KM1:A1(+) CONTACTOR POTÊNCIA PALETIZADOR (1)
Q2
Q2 /42.B6 -42KM2:A1(+) CONTACTOR POTÊNCIA PALETIZADOR (2)
Q3
D
Q3 /42.B7 -42KM3:A1 CONTACTOR POTÊNCIA PALETES VAZIAS D
Q4
Q4 /42.B7 -X2:31 LIVRE
SICK.1044125
E E
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 40.b 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
-40KF5 FX3-XTIO
/40.B3
X1
/43.B2
X2
/43.B2
B A1 B
/40.E4
A2
/40.E4
I1
I1 /43.E2 -42KM2:.2 EDM CONTACTORES GERAIS POTÊNCIA
I2
I2 /43.E2 -42KM3:.2 EDM CONTACTORES GERAIS PALETES VAZIAS
I3
I3 /43.E3 +CLIENT-43K1:22 SEGURANÇA EXTERNA CLIENTE (CH1)
I4
I4 /43.E3 +CLIENT-43K2:22 SEGURANÇA EXTERNA CLIENTE (CH2)
I5
C I5 /43.E4 +P20-43SB1:.2 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA DISPENSADOR PALETES C
I6
I6 /43.E4 +AR2-43SB1:.2 REARME QUADRO COMANDO
I7
I7 /43.E5 +P20-43SB2:.2 REARME DISPENSADOR PALETES
I8
I8 /43.E5 +P10-43SB3:.2 REARME BOTONEIRA INFERIOR
Q1
Q1 /43.B6 +EX-43YV1:x1 EV GERAL PALETIZADOR
Q2
Q2 /43.B6 -X2:48 EV GERAL VAZIOS (RESERVA)
Q3
D
Q3 /43.B7 -43K3:B1 RELÉ SEGURANÇA EXTERNA 1 D
Q4
Q4 /43.B7 -43K3:B2 RELÉ SEGURANÇA EXTERNA 2
SICK.1044125
E E
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 40.c 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
-40KF3
/40.B3
/40.a.B2 /40.a.B2 /40.a.B2 /40.a.B2 /40.a.D2 /40.a.D2 /40.a.D2 /40.a.D2
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8
04101
04102
04103
04104
04105
04106
B B
-X2 3 5 37 39
C. TAPETE INCLINADO
-300W1
/81.B2
12G1 9 10
-81W1 XCin 9 10
/81.C7 3 5 +CX100
-41W1
QUADRO COMANDO /41.D5
6G0,5 1 2
-XAR2 3 5
C BOTONEIRA 3 47.D2 47.D2 C
.1 .1 .1 .1 04117 04118
.1 .1
-41SB1
BOTÃO .2 .2 .2 .2
EMERGÊNCIA -41SB2 .2 .2
BOTÃO -41SB3
EMERGÊNCIA BOTÃO
EMERGÊNCIA
-XAR2 4 6
+P30
+AR2
-41W1
/41.C5 3 4
C. TAPETE INCLINADO
-81W1
/81.C7 4 6 XCin 11 12
-300W1
D
/81.B2 D
12G1 11 12
+CX100
-X2 4 6 38 40
04111
04112
04113
04114
04115
04116
04117
04118
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8
-40KF3
/40.B3
/40.a.B2 /40.a.C2 /40.a.C2 /40.a.C2 /40.a.C2 /40.a.C2 /40.a.C2 /40.a.D2
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8
E E
BOTÃO BOTÃO BOTÃO BOTÃO BOTÃO BOTÃO BARREIRA BARREIRA

EMERGÊNCIA EMERGÊNCIA EMERGÊNCIA EMERGÊNCIA EMERGÊNCIA EMERGÊNCIA SEGURANÇA SEGURANÇA
ARMÁRIO GERAL ARMÁRIO GERAL ARMÁRIO ARMÁRIO BOTONEIRA ZONA BOTONEIRA ZONA DISPENSADOR DISPENSADOR
(CH1) (CH2) COMANDO (CH1) COMANDO (CH2) ENTRADA SACOS ENTRADA SACOS PALETES (CH1) PALETES (CH2)
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 41 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
-40KF4 -40KF4
/40.B3 /40.B3
CONTACTOR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR LIVRE

POTÊNCIA POTÊNCIA POTÊNCIA
PALETIZADOR (1) PALETIZADOR (2) PALETES VAZIAS
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
/40.b.B2 /40.b.B2 /40.b.D2 /40.b.D2 /40.b.D2 /40.b.D2
X1 X2 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
04201 04201
B
04202 04202 B
04201
04202
-X2 21 23 41
-84W1
/84.C3 3 5
BOTONEIRA 1
-43K3 Y1
/43.E7
C 48.D2 48.D2 49.B2 49.B3 C
04211 04212 04901 04902 .1 .1
04221
04222
04223
04224
.2 .2
-42SB1
BOTÃO
EMERGÊNCIA Y2
+P10
-84W1
/84.C3 4 6
D D
-X2 22 24 42 -X2 31
04211
04212
04901
04902
04215
04216
04217
04218
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8
-40KF4
/40.B3
A1(+) A1(+) A1
/40.b.B2 /40.b.C2 /40.b.C2 /40.b.C2 /40.b.C2 /40.b.C2 /40.b.C2 /40.b.D2
-42KM1 -42KM2 -42KM3
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8
E A2(-) A2(-) A2 E
BARREIRA BARREIRA MÓDULO MÓDULO BOTÃO BOTÃO EDM CONTACTOS LIVRE 40.E8 / 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- / 43.D6
SEGURANÇA SEGURANÇA SERIADOR SERIADOR EMERGÊNCIA EMERGÊNCIA SEGURANÇA
SAÍDA PALETES SAÍDA PALETES PORTAS (CH1) PORTAS (CH2) BOTONEIRA BOTONEIRA EXTERNOS 1/L1 2/T1 /2.C2 1/L1 2/T1 /2.C2 1 2 /2.C3
MUTTING (CH1) MUTTING (CH2) INFERIOR (CH1) INFERIOR (CH2)
3/L2 4/T2 /2.C2 3/L2 4/T2 /2.C2 3 4 /2.C3
5/L3 6/T3 /2.C2 5/L3 6/T3 /2.C2 5 6 /2.C3
.1 .2 /43.C2 .1 .2 /43.D2 13 14
.3 .4 /51.B6 .3 .4 /51.C6 21 22
.3 .4 /80.C3 .3 .4 /80.D3 .1 .2 /43.C2
.1 .2
.3 .4 /51.B6
.3 .4 /80.C3
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 42 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
-40KF5 -40KF5
/40.B3 /40.B3
EV GERAL EV GERAL VAZIOS RELÉ SEGURANÇA RELÉ SEGURANÇA

PALETIZADOR (RESERVA) EXTERNA 1 EXTERNA 2
23.F8 / 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ / 51.A1

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
/40.c.B2 /40.c.B2 /40.c.D2 /40.c.D2 /40.c.D2 /40.c.D2
-X2 34
-43W2
/43.C4 3
X1 X2 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
04301 60.E2 84.B4

B B
2L+ 2L+
04301
04302
04301
04302
04301
-XAR2 1
-X2 43 45 -X2 32 .1 x1 .1 x1 .1 x1
-43SB1 -43SB2 -43SB3
QUADRO COMANDO
.2 x2 .2 x2 .2 x2
-43W2 BLUE BLUE BLUE
/94.D3
/94.D7
/94.D6
/43.D4
BOTONEIRA 2
BOTONEIRA 1
/43.B5
/43.D5
-43W1 /94.D7
/43.D3 /94.E7
-XAR2 15
4X0,5 BK GY 8G0,5 1
.1
+AR2 +P20 +P10
C -42KM1 C
/42.E6 DERIVAÇÃO BOTONEIRA 2
.2
04331
04321
04322
04323
04324
.1 21 21 .1
-42KM3 -43K1 -43K2
/42.E7 .2 22 22 .2
-43SB1
BOTÃO
EMERGÊNCIA
.1
-42KM2
/42.E6 .2
+CLIENT +P20
-43W1 -43W2 -81W1 -43W2 -84W1
/43.C3 BN GNYE /43.C4 2 /81.C7 15 /43.C4 4 /84.C3 9
D 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ D
43.D8 / 1L+ 1L+ / 43.D6
42.E8 / 1L-
1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- / 47.F1
-X2 44 46 -X2 33 15 35 25 -X2 47 2 48 2

04311
04312
04313
04314
04315
04316
04317
04318
-43WYV1 -43WYV2
2x0,5 BN BU 2x0,5 BN BU
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8
-43K3
-40KF5
/40.B3 B1 A2 B2
x1
/40.c.B2 /40.c.C2 /40.c.C2 /40.c.C2 /40.c.C2 /40.c.C2 /40.c.C2 /40.c.D2
/42.C5
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8
E -43YV1 x2 E
13 14 23 24
EDM EDM SEGURANÇA SEGURANÇA BOTÃO REARME QUADRO REARME REARME
MÁQUINA
CONTACTORES CONTACTORES EXTERNA CLIENTE EXTERNA CLIENTE EMERGÊNCIA COMANDO DISPENSADOR BOTONEIRA
GERAIS POTÊNCIA GERAIS PALETES (CH1) (CH2) BOTONEIRA PALETES INFERIOR
VAZIAS DISPENSADOR
-X6 14 15 16 17
+EX
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 43 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
+EX
BARREIRA SEGURANÇA DISPENSADOR PALETES
-47A1
M26x11+FE FE M12x4+FE
8 1
7 2
9 M4000 Advanced A/P 4
11 3 1
6 10 3 FE 2
5 4
M40Z-0xx0x3xB0
PSD01-xx01
M8x4
3 2
A
B
B
OSSD1
OSSD2
24VCC
24VCC
BS/C1
0VCC
0VCC
EDM
ADO
OUT
OUT
4 1
B RES B
EFI
EFI
EFI
EFI
RR
FE
FE
IN
IN
XS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 FE XE 1 2 3 4 FE CONF 1-4
-47W1 BN BU GY PK RD WH GY/PK GN
C C
-X2 1 2 49 50 51 52 2
04117
04118
09607
08406
D D
04117
04118
09607
08406
41.C6 /
41.C6 /
96.C6 /
84.B6 /
E E
40.E8 /1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ / 48.E1

43.D8 / 1L-
1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- / 48.F1
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 47 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
+EX
BARREIRA SEGURANÇA SAÍDA PALETES
-48A1
M26x11+FE FE M12x4+FE
8 1
7 2
9 M4000 Advanced A/P 4
11 3 1
6 10 3 FE 2
5 4
M40Z-0xx0x3xB0
PSD01-xx01
M8x4
3 2
A
B
B
OSSD1
OSSD2
24VCC
24VCC
BS/C1
0VCC
0VCC
EDM
ADO
OUT
OUT
4 1
B RES B
EFI
EFI
EFI
EFI
RR
FE
FE
IN
IN
XS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 FE XE 1 2 3 4 FE CONF 1-4
-48W1 BN BU GY PK RD WH GY/PK GN
C C
-X2 1 2 53 54 55 56 2
-48W2 1 2 3 4 5
04211
04212
09608
08407
D D
-48A2 1 3 4 2 5 COM 1 2 3 4 5
/48.a.D2
RES 3 1
5
04211
04212
09608
08407
OVR 2 4 2 4
24VCC
OUT
0VCC
OUT
Sobreposição
erforderlich
IN Sobreposição/
24VCC
EFI A
0VCC
EFI B
FE
5
1 3
M12x5 M12x5
42.C2 /
42.C2 /
96.C7 /
84.B6 /
M8x4
OUTPUT
M12x5 3 2
0VCC
OUT
4 1
3
5
2 4
1 UE403-A0930
ML 1 3 4 2 5 KONF 1-4
MUTTING SAÍDA DE PALETES

E E
47.E8 / 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ / 49.A1

47.F8 / 1L-
1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- / 49.A1
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 48 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
B B
+EX
3 3
-48B1 -48B2
+ - + -
1 2 1 2
C C
-48WB1 -48WB2
3x0,5 BN BU WH 3x0,5 BN BU WH
D D
-48A2 1 3 4 2 5 1 3 4 2 5 1 3 4 2 5 1 3 4 2 5
/48.D4
A1 A2 B1 B2
24VCC
OUT
0VCC
OUT
INPUT
TESTE
OUT
RES
24VCC
OUT
0VCC
OUT
INPUT
TESTE
OUT
RES
24VCC
OUT
0VCC
OUT
INPUT
TESTE
OUT
RES
24VCC
OUT
0VCC
OUT
INPUT
TESTE
OUT
RES
3 3 3 3
5 5 5 5
2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4
1 1 1 1
UE403-A0930 M12x5 M12x5 M12x5 M12x5

UE403-A0930
MUTTING SAÍDA DE PALETES

E E
FOTOCÉLULAS MUTTING
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 48.a 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
48.E8 / 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ / 50.A1

48.F8 / 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- / 51.A1
A A
42.C3 42.C3
04901 04902
04901
04902
B B
-49U1
Interface PSEN ix1 A1 A2 1 2 3 4 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y8 Y9
PILZ INTERFACE
11 13 14 12 21 23 24 22 31 33 34 32 41 43 44 42
C C
-X2 17 18 19 20
-81W1
/81.C7 16 17 18 19
QUADRO COMANDO
-XAR2 16 17 18 19
-51WB1
/51.C2 04920 04921 04922 04923
+AR2 10x0,5 4 5 6 7
D D
-49WB1 04910 04911 04912 04913

6X0,5 1 2 3 4
1 3 X1 X2
-49B1 -51B1
/51.C2 Y1 Y2
2 4
+EX
E E
PORTA ACESSO INTERRUPTOR RESERVA RESERVA

PRÉ-FORMA SEGURANÇA
ACESSO INFERIOR
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 49 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
49.A8 / 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ / 51.A1
21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21
-11QM1 -12QM1 -14QM1 -16QM1 -17QM1 -18QM1 -19QM1 -21QM1 -25QM1
/11.B2 22 /12.B1 22 /14.B2 22 /16.B2 22 /17.B2 22 /18.B2 22 /19.B2 22 /21.B2 22 /25.B2 22
23.D7 / 08005 08005 08005 08005 08005 08005 08005 08005 08005 08005 08005 / 80.C5
B B
TÉRMICOS PALETIZADOR
1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+
21 21 21 21
-27QM1 -27QM2 -27QM3 -28QM1
/27.B1 22 /27.B3 22 /27.b.B2 22 /28.B1 22
C C
27.b.D8 / 08006 08006 08006 08006 08006 08006 / 80.C6

TÉRMICOS PALETES VAZIOS
D D
30.D6 / 08007 08007 08007 / 80.C6

TÉRMICOS SAÍDA PALETES
1L+ 1L+ 1L+
E E
21 21 21
-26QM1 -26QM2 -26QM3
/26.B2 22 /26.B5 22 /26.B7 22
08008 08008 08008 08008 / 80.C7

TÉRMICOS ALIMENTAÇÃO SACOS
TÉRMICOS MOTORES
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM MANOBRA Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 50 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
50.A8 / 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ / 63.A1

49.A8 / 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- / 63.A1
A A
43.B5 / 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ / 80.C1

3.A8 / 2L-
2L- 2L- 2L- / 80.C1
B B
.3 .3
-42KM1 -42KM3
/42.E6 .4 /42.E7 .4
09503 / 95.C3
09503
05101
-X2 2 1 57 .3
-51WB1 -42KM2
C /49.D3 /42.E6 .4 C
/84.B5
10x0,5 2 1 3
05102
05103
1L+ / 84.B5
-51B1
-A1 IN
51 63 X1 21 X2 41
A1
-K1 05102 05103
A2 52 64 Y1 22 Y2 42 30.F6 27.b.D5
MÁQUINA
-A2
D AZM200B SK-T-1P2PWA D
+EX
51 52 /84.A5
X1 Y1 /49.E3
X2 Y2 /49.E3
INTERRUPTOR AUTORIZAÇÃO AUTORIZAÇÃO

SEGURANÇA VARIADORES VARIADORES
ACESSO INFERIOR PALETIZADOR PALETES VAZIAS
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM MANOBRA Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 51 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
-Aop1
B B
PAINEL OPERADOR
C -60X1 -60W1 C
7 GND GN -RS485 3
RS-485
10 TX+ /RX+ YE -RS485 1
11 TX- /RX- BN -RS485 2
-PE MÁQUINA
ETH1 IP: 192.168.10.110
ETH2 / 64.C3
ARMÁRIO PRINCIPAL
PE
CLIENTE
D ETH2 DHCP D
LAN /
-PWR
ASHMI600A12160
- + +AR1
-XAR2 2 1
QUADRO COMANDO
43.B4 / 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ / 81.B7

2L- 2L- / 94.E4
E E
+AR2
PAINEL PC
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM PAINEL OPERADOR Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 60 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A 51.A8 / 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ / 64.A1 A
51.A8 / 1L-
1L- 1L- 1L- / 64.A1 + -
WEIDMULLER
PROFINET
B B
IE-SW-BL08-8TX
C C
-65A1:-X1:P3 -12GF1.2:RJ-45 -40KF2:-X1:1
66.D3 13.C4 40.F2 68.C6 70.C6
PFNET1 PFNET2 PFNET3 PFNET4 PFNET5
-63WPN1 -63WPN2 -63WPN3 -63WPN4 -63WPN5

Profinet Profinet Profinet Profinet Profinet
4x0,64 4x0,64 4x0,64 4x0,64 4x0,64
D D
-63A1
INTERRUPTOR
1 2 LAN1 LAN2 LAN3 LAN4 LAN5 LAN6 LAN7 LAN8
+ - LAN1 LAN2 LAN3 LAN4 LAN5 LAN6 LAN7 LAN8
IE-SW-BL08-8TX IE-SW-BL08-8TX
E E
PROFINET PROFINET PROFINET RELÉ PROFINET PROFINET RESERVA RESERVA RESERVA

CPU 1510SP-1 PN CONTROL SEGURANÇA ESCLAVO +C1 ESCRAVO +C3
192.168.10.120 TECHNIQUES 192.168.10.140 192.168.10.131 192.168.10.132
192.168.10.150
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM PROFINET INTERRUPTOR Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 63 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A 63.A2 / 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ / 66.A1 A
63.A2 / 1L-
1L- 1L- 1L- / 66.A1 + -
WEIDMULLER
ETHERNET
B B
IE-SW-BL05-5TX
C C
-65A1:-X1:P2 +AR2-Aop1:ETH1 -23GF1.1:RJ-45
66.D2 60.D7 24.C4
ETH1 ETH2 ETH3 ETH4 ETH5
-64Weth1 -64Weth2 -64Weth3 -64Weth4 -64Weth5

Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet
4x2x0,22 4x2x0,22 4x2x0,22 4x2x0,22 4x2x0,22
D D
-64A1
INTERRUPTOR
1 2 LAN1 LAN2 LAN3 LAN4 LAN5
+ - LAN1 LAN2 LAN3 LAN4 LAN5
IE-SW-BL05-5TX IE-SW-BL05-5TX
E E
ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET PC 1 PC 2

CPU 1510SP-1 PN PANEL VARIADOR 192.168.10.198 192.168.10.199
192.168.10.120 OPERADOR CONTROL
192.168.10.110 TECHNIQUES
192.168.10.151
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM INTERRUPTOR ETHERNET Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 64 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
-65A2 -65A5
-65A1 /66.B4 -65A3 -65A4 /83.E1 -65A6 -65A7 -65A8 -65A9 -65A10 -65A11 -65A12 -65A13
/80.E2 /81.E2 /82.E2 /83a.E1 /84.E2 /90.A2 /91.A2 /92.A2 /93.A2 /94.A2 /95.A2 /96.A2
/66.B1
+DOC&PLC +DOC&PLC +DOC&PLC +DOC&PLC +DOC&PLC +DOC&PLC +DOC&PLC +DOC&PLC +DOC&PLC +DOC&PLC +DOC&PLC +DOC&PLC
B Rack 0 /1.A1 /1.A4 /1.D1 /1.D4 /1.1.A1 /6.A1 /6.A4 /6.D1 /6.D4 /6.1.A1 /6.1.A4 /6.1.D1 B
Slot 1 Rack 0 Rack 0 Rack 0 Rack 0 Rack 0 Rack 0 Rack 0 Rack 0 Rack 0 Rack 0 Rack 0 Rack 0
SIE.6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0+BA_2xRJ45 192.168.10.120 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9 Slot 10 Slot 11 Slot 12 Slot 13
DI ST DI ST DI ST DI ST DI ST DQ ST DQ ST DQ ST DQ ST DQ ST DQ ST DQ ST
BA 2xRJ45
CPU 1510SP-1 PN 8x24VDC 8x24VDC 8x24VDC 8x24VDC 8x24VDC 8x24VDC/0,5A 8x24VDC/0,5A 8x24VDC/0,5A 8x24VDC/0,5A 8x24VDC/0,5A 8x24VDC/0,5A 8x24VDC/0,5A
DIAG DIAG DIAG DIAG DIAG DIAG DIAG DIAG DIAG DIAG DIAG DIAG
R/S ER MT
X1P3
PROFINET (LAN)
C C
.0 .1 .0 .1 .0 .1 .0 .1 .0 .1 .0 .1 .0 .1 .0 .1 .0 .1 .0 .1 .0 .1 .0 .1
LK1
P1R LK2 SIMATIC .2
.4
.3
.5
.2
.4
.3
.5
.2
.4
.3
.5
.2
.4
.3
.5
.2
.4
.3
.5
.2
.4
.3
.5
.2
.4
.3
.5
.2
.4
.3
.5
.2
.4
.3
.5
.2
.4
.3
.5
.2
.4
.3
.5
.2
.4
.3
.5
LK3 P2R
ET 200SP .6 .7 .6 .7 .6 .7 .6 .7 .6 .7 .6 .7 .6 .7 .6 .7 .6 .7 .6 .7 .6 .7 .6 .7
X1 PROFINET
PWR CC01 PWR CC01 PWR CC01 PWR CC01 PWR CC01 PWR CC02 PWR CC02 PWR CC02 PWR CC02 PWR CC02 PWR CC02 PWR CC02
(LAN) PWR
6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0 6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0 6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0 6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0 6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0
6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0 6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0
RUN
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
STOP
MAC ENDEREÇO MRES
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6
X80
7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8
D 24VCC D
X50 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10
11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12
PUSH
1L+ 1M 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14
15 16 15 16 15 16 15 16 15 16 15 16 15 16 15 16 15 16 15 16 15 16 15 16
L+ M L+ M L+ M L+ M L+ M L+ M L+ M L+ M L+ M L+ M L+ M L+ M
2L+ 2M
CPU 1510SP-1
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM CONFIGURAÇÃO PLC Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 65 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
64.A2 / 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ / 80.C1

A 64.A2 / 1L-
1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- / 80.C1 A
-65A1 -65A2
/65.B2 1L+ 1M 2L+ 2M /65.B4
6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0 + BU15-P16+A0+2B SIEMENS
Rack 0 -X80 1 -X80 2 -X80 3 -X80 4 Rack 0
Slot 1 Slot 2
B B
L+/24VCC M/0VCC
X80 6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0 + BA 2xRJ45 CPU 1510SP-1 PN SIEMENS L+ M

24VDC 0VDC
1L-
-65A1 1L+
X1 6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0 + BA 2xRJ45 CPU 1510SP-1 PN SIEMENS
Rack 0
Slot 1
C C
-X1 P1 -X1 P2 -X1 P3

PN PN PN
ETH1 PFNET1
64.C3 63.C3
D D
-64A1:X1:LAN1 -63A1:X1:LAN1
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM CONFIGURAÇÃO PLC Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 66 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3.C2 / 2L+
A 3.C2 / 2L- A
-PE28
B B
2L+
2L-
192.168.10.131 -68X1
/68.C1 1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8
24VBUS 0VBUS 24V 24V 0V 0V PE PE
WAGO 750-370 PROFINET IO PARTE 2 DE 2
C -68Weth1 C
Ethernet
ARMÁRIO PRINCIPAL
-RJ45 4x2x0,22
-63A1:X1:LAN4
63.C5
IDB / 69.D1 PFNET4
1-8 +AR1
750-375
ON
1
2
3
4
5
D D
6
TD- TD- RD+ 4nc 5nc RD- 7nc 8nc TD- TD- RD+ 4nc 5nc RD- 7nc 8nc
7
-68X1
8
/68.C1 -FB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -FB2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

753-401 753-401 753-401 753-401 753-401 753-401 753-401 753-401 753-401 753-401 753-531 750-627
TD+ TD- RD+ RD- TD+ TD- RD+ RD-
FB FB
-68X1 -68X10 -68X11 -68X12 -68X13 -68X14 -68X15 -68X16 -68X17 -68X18 -68X19 -68X40 -68X100
/68.B5
/100.E1
+DOC&PLC/2.A1
/100.E4
+DOC&PLC/2.C1
/100.E6
+DOC&PLC/2.D1
/101.E1
+DOC&PLC/2.A4
/101.E4
+DOC&PLC/2.C4
/101.E6
+DOC&PLC/2.D4
/102.E1
+DOC&PLC/3.A1
/102.E4
+DOC&PLC/3.C1
/102.E6
+DOC&PLC/3.D1
/103.E1
+DOC&PLC/3.A4
/200.B1
+DOC&PLC/7.A1
/68.D5 WAGO
750-370 PROFINET IO PARTE 1 DE 2
Otros sistemas bus

E E
PRÉ-FORMA
C. PRÉ-FORMA 1
+CX1
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM ESCRAVO CX1 - CONFIG Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 68 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3.C2 / 2L+
A 3.C3 / 2L- A
-PE28
B B
2L+
2L-
-69X1
/69.C2 1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8
24V 0V 24V 24V 0V 0V PE PE
WAGO 750-628 EXTENSÃO BUS, ACOPLAMENTO
C C
-RJ45_IN
C. PRÉ-FORMA 1
68.C5 / IDB
1-8
-RJ45_OUT
+CX1
D D
1-8
753-401 753-401 753-401 753-401 753-401 753-401 753-531 750-600

750-628
-69X1 -69X10 -69X11 -69X12 -69X13 -69X14 -69X15 -69X40 -69X80

/110.E1
+DOC&PLC/4.A1
/110.E4
+DOC&PLC/4.C1
/110.E6
+DOC&PLC/4.D1
/111.E1
+DOC&PLC/4.A4
/111.E4
+DOC&PLC/4.C4
/210.B1
+DOC&PLC/7.C1
/69.B5
E E
ENTRADA SACOS
C. PRÉ-FORMA 2
+CX2
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 69 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3.C3 / 2L+
A 3.C4 / 2L- A
-PE27
B B
2L+
2L-
192.168.10.132 -70X1
/70.C1 1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8
24VBUS 0VBUS 24V 24V 0V 0V PE PE
WAGO 750-370 PROFINET IO PARTE 2 DE 2
C C
ARMÁRIO PRINCIPAL
-63A1:X1:LAN5
63.C6
PFNET5
+AR1
750-375
ON
1
2
3
4
5
D D
6
TD- TD- RD+ 4nc 5nc RD- 7nc 8nc TD- TD- RD+ 4nc 5nc RD- 7nc 8nc
7
-70X1
8
/70.C1 -FB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -FB2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

753-401 753-401 753-401 753-401 753-401 753-401 753-401 753-401 753-531 750-600
TD+ TD- RD+ RD- TD+ TD- RD+ RD-
FB FB
-70X1 -70X10 -70X11 -70X12 -70X13 -70X14 -70X15 -70X16 -70X17 -70X40 -70X80
/70.B5
/120.E1
+DOC&PLC/5.A1
/120.E4
+DOC&PLC/5.C1
/120.E6
+DOC&PLC/5.D1
/121.E1
+DOC&PLC/5.A4
/122.E1
+DOC&PLC/5.C4
/122.E4
+DOC&PLC/5.D4
/122.E6
+DOC&PLC/5.1.A1
/123.E1
+DOC&PLC/5.1.C1
/220.B1
+DOC&PLC/7.D1
/70.D5 WAGO
750-370 PROFINET IO PARTE 1 DE 2
Otros sistemas bus

E E
DISPENSADOR
C. DISPENSADOR
+CX3
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 70 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
-80B1
+ -
1 3
-80WB1
MÁQUINA
EVC005
4x0,34 BK BN BU
B +EX B
+ -
-X4B 5 5 5
+ -
66.A8 / 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ 1L+ / 81.C1

66.A8 / 1L- 1L- / 84.C1
51.A8 / 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ / 81.C1

C 51.A8 / 2L-
2L- 2L- 2L- / 81.C1 C
50.B8 50.C8 50.D8 50.F8

08005 08006 08007 08008
.3 .3 13
-42KM1 -42KM3 -1B1

/42.E6 .4 /42.E7 .4 /1.D4
14
08010
DETETOR PORTA
ARMÁRIO ELÉTRICO
.3
-42KM2
08001
08003
08004
08005
08006
08007
08008
/42.E6 .4
D D
08002
-65A2
/65.B4
Rack 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Slot 2 E1.0 E1.1 E1.2 E1.3 E1.4 E1.5 E1.6 E1.7

+DOC&PLC/1.A2 +DOC&PLC/1.B2 +DOC&PLC/1.B2 +DOC&PLC/1.B2 +DOC&PLC/1.B2 +DOC&PLC/1.C2 +DOC&PLC/1.C2 +DOC&PLC/1.C2
+EX-80B1:4 -42KM2:.4 -42KM3:.4 -1B1:14 -25QM1:22 -28QM1:22 -30GF1:T6 -26QM3:22
E INPUT BYTE X 6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0 + BU15-P16+A0+2B DI 8x24 VCC ST SIEMENS E
PRESSÃO AR OK POTÊNCIA OK POTÊNCIA OK PORTA ARMÁRIO TÉRMICOS TÉRMICOS PALETES TÉRMICOS SAÍDA TÉRMICOS
PALETIZADOR PALETES VAZIAS ELÉTRICO FECHADA PALETIZADOR VAZIAS PALETES ALIMENTAÇÃO
SACOS
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM ESCRAVO AR1 - ENTRADAS Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 80 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OPÇÃO 2 OPÇÃO 1
2L+
A -81B2 A
2L+
4 RECEPTOR 2L+ 2L+ 2L+
2L+
2L+
ENTRADA PRODUTO
-81B1
EMISOR - + + -
13 13 13 13 13 13 .1 x1
3 1 1 3
-KA1 -81WB1 -81WB2 -KA2 -KA3 -KA4 -KA5 -KA6 -81SB8
3x0,34 BU BN 3x0,34 BK BN BU GREEN
14 14 14 14 14 14 .2 x2
/94.D2
QUADRO COMANDO
ENTRADA PALETES
+EX1 XCin:3
2L+ / 82.B2
SAÍDA PALETES
-300W1 -300W3 2L+ 2L- / 94.E2
INCLINADO
C. TAPETE
/41.C5
-300W2 /300.E4 60.E3
/41.D5 -XCin 3 2 1 4 1
/300.E1 12X0,5 2 3 1 12X0,5 2 3 1
-XAR2 7 1 2
16G1 3 2 4 1
B +CX100 +EX2 +EX3 +AR2 B
17
-81W1
-21R1-FR1
/21.B7 18
20G0,5 7 1 2
-X6 3 2 4 1 -X6 19 20 18 -X6 12 13 11 -X2 7 -X5 3 4
80.C8 / 1L+ 1L+
80.C8 / 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ / 82.C1

C 80.C8 / 2L-
2L- 2L- 2L- / 82.C1 C
08101
08102
08103
08104
08105
08106
08107
08108
D D
-65A3
/65.B4
Rack 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Slot 3 E2.0 E2.1 E2.2 E2.3 E2.4 E2.5 E2.6 E2.7

-21R1-FR1:18 +EX1-81B2:4 +EX1-KA2:14 +EX2-KA3:14 +EX2-KA4:14 +EX3-KA5:14 +EX3-KA6:14 +AR2-81SB8:.2
ESTADO TÉRMICO COM ENTRADA COM ENTRADA COM ENTRADA COM ENTRADA COM SAÍDA COM SAÍDA BOTÃO
RESISTÊNCIA FREIO PRODUTO: EM PRODUTO: RSVA PALETES: PEDIDO PALETES: ENTREGA PALETES: PALETES: PALETE FUNCIONAMENTO
FUNCIONAMENTO ENTREGA (RSVA) EM CURSO (RSVA) AUTORIZAÇÃO RECEBIDA QUADRO COMANDOS
ENTREGA
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 81 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
2 4 2 4
.1 x1 .1 x1 .1
-82SB1 -82SB2 -82SB3 -82B4 -82B5
RED WHITE IV5004 + - IV5004 + -
.2 x2 .2 x2 .2
1 3 1 3
/94.D3
/94.D4
QUADRO COMANDO
2L+ 2L+
2L+
MÁQUINA
81.B8 -82WB4 -82WB5
4x0,34 BK BN BU 4x0,34 WH BN BU
-XAR2 8 9 10
B +AR2 +EX B
-81W1
/81.C7 8 9 10
+ - + - + - + -
-X2 8 9 10 -X4B 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 9 -X4 13
+ - + - + - + -
81.C8 / 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ / 83.D1

C 81.C8 / 2L-
2L- 2L- 2L- 2L- 2L- 2L- / 83.D1 C
08201
08202
08203
08204
08205
08206
08207
08208
D D
-65A4
/65.B4
Rack 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Slot 4 E3.0 E3.1 E3.2 E3.3 E3.4 E3.5 E3.6 E3.7

+DOC&PLC/1.D2 +DOC&PLC/1.D2 +DOC&PLC/1.D2 +DOC&PLC/1.E2 +DOC&PLC/1.E2 +DOC&PLC/1.E2 +DOC&PLC/1.E2 +DOC&PLC/1.E2
+AR2-82SB1:.2 +AR2-82SB2:.2 +AR2-82SB3:.2 +EX-82B4:4 +EX-82B5:2 -X4B:8 -X4B:9 -X4:13
BOTÃO PARAGEM BOTÃO PEDIDO SELETOR DET ALTURA DET ALTURA LIVRE LIVRE LIVRE
QUADRO COMANDOS ENTRADA SUPERIOR AUTORIZAR DESACELERAR MÍNIMA ELEVADOR
QUADRO COMANDOS ENTRADA SACOS DESCIDA ELEVADOR
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 82 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
-83B1 -83B2 -83B3 -83B4 -83B5.1 -83B5.2 -83B6.1 -83B6.2

O5P501 + - MK5117 + - MK5117 + - MK5117 + - IF5933 + - IF5933 + - IF5933 + - IF5933 + -
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
MÁQUINA
-83WB1 -83WB2 -83WB3 -83WB4 -83WB5.1 -83WB5.2 -83WB6.1 -83WB6.2

3x0,34 BK BN BU 3x0,14 BK BN BU 3x0,14 BK BN BU 3x0,14 BK BN BU 3x0,34 BK BN BU 3x0,34 BK BN BU 3x0,34 BK BN BU 3x0,34 BK BN BU
B +EX B
C. PLATAFORMA ELEVAÇÃO
-X40 3 1 2 4 1 2 5 1 2 6 1 2 7 50 2 1 2 8 51 2 1 2
2L+
08350 08360
2L+ 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ 2L+
2L- 2L- 2L- 2L- 2L- / 95.C4

+CX4
-83W1
C /95.C4 C
IGUS
18G0,5 3 1 2 4 5 6 7 8
-X4 3 -X5 3 4 -X4 4 5 6 7 8
82.C8 / 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ / 83a.C1

82.C8 / 2L- 2L- 2L- 2L- / 83a.C1
08301
08302
08303
08304
08305
08306
D D
-65A5
/65.B5
Rack 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Slot 5 E4.0 E4.1 E4.2 E4.3 E4.4 E4.5

+DOC&PLC/1.D5 +DOC&PLC/1.D5 +DOC&PLC/1.D5 +DOC&PLC/1.E5 +DOC&PLC/1.E5 +DOC&PLC/1.E5
+EX-83B1:4 +EX-83B2:4 +EX-83B3:4 +EX-83B4:4 +EX-83B5.1:4 +EX-83B6.1:4
FOT PALETE DET CENTRADOR DET BATENTE DET BATENTE DETS GATILHOS DETS GATILHOS
PLATAFORMA PALETE DESATIVADO FRONTAL PALETE FRONTAL PALETE SEGURANÇA SEGURANÇA
ELEVAÇÃO ATIVADO (RESERVA) DESATIVADO PLATAFORMA PLATAFORMA
(RESERVA) (SÉRIE 1) (SÉRIE 2)
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 83 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
4 4 4
-83B7.1 -83B7.2 -83B8

OGP302 + - OGP302 + - OGP302 + -
1 3 1 3 1 3
MÁQUINA
-83WB7.1 -83WB7.2 -83WB8

4X0,34 BK BN BU 4X0,34 BK BN BU 4X0,34 BK BN BU
B +EX B
+ - + - + -
-X4B 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 12
+ - + - + -
83.D8 / 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ / 84.C1

C 83.D8 / 2L-
2L- 2L- 2L- 2L- 2L- / 84.C1 C
08307
08307
08308
08307
D D
-65A5
/65.B5
Rack 0 7 8
Slot 5 E4.6 E4.7

+DOC&PLC/1.E5 +DOC&PLC/1.E5
+EX-83B7.1:4 +EX-83B8:4
FOTS GABARITO FOT SECÇÃO 1

PLATAFORMA SAÍDA PALETES
ELEVAÇÃO
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 83a 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
2L+
2L+
.1 x1 .1 x1 51
-84SB3 -84SB4 -51B1
GREEN .2 x2 WHITE .2 x2 /51.C2 52
08403
08404
/94.D5
/94.D6
2L+ 47.D2 48.D2
BOTONEIRA 1
08406 08407
2L- / 94.E5
2L+ 1L+
43.B5 51.C3
B +P10 +EX B
-84W1
/42.C4
/42.D4
/43.D5
/94.D5 -51WB1 8
16G0,5 7 1 2 8
+ - + -
-X4B 13 13 13 14 14 14 -X2 26 -X5 3 4 -X2 27 -X2 58 -X4 14
+ - + -
80.C8 / 1L- 1L- / 90.E1
83a.C8 / 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ 2L+

C 83a.C8 / 2L-
2L- 2L- 2L- 2L- 2L- / 94.E7 C
08401
08402
08403
08404
08405
08406
08407
08408
D D
-65A6
/65.B5
Rack 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Slot 6 E5.0 E5.1 E5.2 E5.3 E5.4 E5.5 E5.6 E5.7

+DOC&PLC/1.1.A2 +DOC&PLC/1.1.B2 +DOC&PLC/1.1.B2 +DOC&PLC/1.1.B2 +DOC&PLC/1.1.B2 +DOC&PLC/1.1.C2 +DOC&PLC/1.1.C2 +DOC&PLC/1.1.C2
-X4B:13 -X4B:14 +P10-84SB3:.2 +P10-84SB4:.2 +EX-51B1:52 +EX-47A1-XS:7 +EX-48A1-XS:7 -X4:14
FOT SECÇÃO 2 FOT SECÇÃO 3 BOTÃO BOTÃO PEDIDO INTERRUPTOR BOTÃO PEDIDO ESTADO BARREIRA LIVRE
SAÍDA PALETES SAÍDA PALETES FUNCIONAMENTO ENTRADA PORTA PORTA INFERIOR. ENTRADA PORTA SAÍDA PALETES
(RESERVA) (RESERVA) BOTONEIRA PORTA INFERIOR PORTA FECHADA INFERIOR (RSVA)
INFERIOR
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 84 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
COMPACTADOR COMPACTADOR COMPACTADOR
MOTOR TAPETE COMPACTADOR DIREITA COMPACTADOR ESQUERDA COMPACTADOR DIREITA
AGRUPAMENTO DIREITA AVANÇO RETROCESSO ESQUERDA AVANÇO RETROCESSO FRONTAL AVANÇO RETROCESSO COMPORTA ABRIR
-65A7
/65.B5
OUTPUT BYTE X 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 + BU15-P16+A0+2B DQ 8x24 VCC/0.5A ST SIEMENS
Rack 0
Slot 7 -11KM1:A1 -16KM1A:A1 -16KM1B:A1 -17KM1A:A1 -17KM1B:A1 -18KM1A:A1 -18KM1B:A1 -19GF1:B5
A0.0 A0.1 A0.2 A0.3 A0.4 A0.5 A0.6 A0.7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B B
09001
09002
09003
09004
09005
09006
09007
09008
C C
09008
19.D5
D D
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
-11KM1 -16KM1A -16KM1B -17KM1A -17KM1B -18KM1A -18KM1B
24V A2 24V A2 24V A2 24V A2 24V A2 24V A2 24V A2
E 84.C8 / 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- / 91.E1 E
1 2 /11.C2 1 2 /16.C2 1 2 /16.C3 1 2 /17.C2 1 2 /17.C3 1 2 /18.C2 1 2 /18.C3

3 4 /11.C2 3 4 /16.C2 3 4 /16.C3 3 4 /17.C2 3 4 /17.C3 3 4 /18.C2 3 4 /18.C3
5 6 /11.C2 5 6 /16.C2 5 6 /16.C3 5 6 /17.C2 5 6 /17.C3 5 6 /18.C2 5 6 /18.C3
13 14 /11.C3 13 14 /16.C2 13 14 /16.C3 13 14 /17.C2 13 14 /17.C3 13 14 /18.C2 13 14 /18.C3
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM ESCRAVO AR1 - SAÍDAS Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 90 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
ROLOS ROLOS
COMPORTA PLATAFORMA PLATAFORMA PLATAFORMA PLATAFORMA PLATAFORMA
COMPORTA FECHAR VELOCIDADE RÁPIDA FUNCIONAMENTO VELOCIDADE 2 PLATAFORMA SUBIR DESCER VELOCIDADE 2 VELOCIDADE 3
-65A8
/65.B5
Rack 0
Slot 8 -19GF1:B6 -19GF1:B7 -22GF1:B5 -22GF1:B7 -21GF1:B5 -21GF1:B6 -21GF1:B7 -91K8:A1
A1.0 A1.1 A1.2 A1.3 A1.4 A1.5 A1.6 A1.7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B B
09101
09102
09103
09104
09105
09106
09107
09108
C C
09101 09102 09103 09104 09105 09106 09107

19.D5 19.D6 22.D5 22.D6 21.D5 21.D5 21.D6
D D
A1
-91K8
/21.E7 A2
E 90.E8 / 1L- 1L- / 92.E1 E
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 91 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
INVERSOR INVERSOR ROLOS BASE

A A
REGULAÇÃO REGULAÇÃO MOTORES DISPENSADOR
TAPETE ROTADOR ALTURA ALISADOR ALTURA ALISADOR ALISADOR DISPENSADOR DISPENSADOR PALETES
FUNCIONAMENTO LIVRE DESCER SUBIR FUNCIONAMENTO PALETES SUBIR PALETES DESCER FUNCIONAMENTO
-65A9
/65.B6
Rack 0
Slot 9 -25KM1:A1 -26KM3A:A1 -26KM3B:A1 -26KM1:A1 -27KM1A:A1 -27KM1B:A1 -27GF3:B5
A2.0 A2.1 A2.2 A2.3 A2.4 A2.5 A2.6 A2.7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B B
09201
09202
09203
09204
09205
09206
09207
09208
C C
09208
27.b.D5
D D
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
-25KM1 -26KM3A -26KM3B -27KM1A -27KM1B
24V A2 24V A2 24V A2 A2 A2 24V A2 24V A2
-26KM1 -26KM2
24V 24V
E 91.E8 / 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- / 93.E1 E
1 2 /25.C2 1 2 /26.C7 1 2 /26.C8 1 2 /26.C2 1 2 /26.C5 1 2 /27.C1 1 2 /27.C2

3 4 /25.C2 3 4 /26.C7 3 4 /26.C8 3 4 /26.C2 3 4 /26.C5 3 4 /27.C2 3 4 /27.C2
5 6 /25.C2 5 6 /26.C7 5 6 /26.C8 5 6 /26.C2 5 6 /26.C5 5 6 /27.C2 5 6 /27.C3
13 14 /25.C3 13 14 13 14 13 14 /26.C3 13 14 13 14 /27.C2 13 14 /27.C3
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 92 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ROLOS BASE
A A
ROLOS SECÇÃO 1 ROLOS SECÇÃO 1 FORQUILHA FORQUILHA DISPENSADOR DISPENSADOR
SAÍDA VELOCIDADE SAÍDA VELOCIDADE DISPENSADOR DISPENSADOR DISPENSADOR FOLHAS ELEVAÇÃO PÁ PALETES
1 2 AVANÇO RETROCESSO FOLHAS AVANÇO RETROCESSO IMPULSOR VELOCIDADE 2
-65A10
/65.B6
Rack 0
Slot 10 -30GF1:B5 -30GF1:B7 -27KM2A:A1 -27KM2B:A1 -28KM1A:A1 -28KM1B:A1 -14KM1:A1 -27GF3:B7
A3.0 A3.1 A3.2 A3.3 A3.4 A3.5 A3.6 A3.7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B B
09301
09302
09303
09304
09305
09306
09307
09308
C C
09301 09302
30.D4 30.D4
09308
27.b.D6
D D
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
-27KM2A -27KM2B -28KM1A -28KM1B -14KM1
24V A2 24V A2 24V A2 24V A2 24V A2
E 92.E8 / 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- / 94.E1 E
1 2 /27.C3 1 2 /27.C4 1 2 /28.C1 1 2 /28.C2 1 2 /14.C2

3 4 /27.C4 3 4 /27.C4 3 4 /28.C2 3 4 /28.C2 3 4 /14.C2
5 6 /27.C4 5 6 /27.C4 5 6 /28.C2 5 6 /28.C3 5 6 /14.C2
13 14 13 14 13 14 /28.C2 13 14 /28.C3 13 14 /14.C3
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 93 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LUZ AZUL
A A
LUZ VERDE LUZ VERMELHA LUZ BRANCA LUZ VERDE LUZ AZUL LUZ BRANCA BOTONEIRA
ARMÁRIO ARMÁRIO LUZ AZUL ARMÁRIO ARMÁRIO BOTONEIRA PORTA BOTONEIRA PORTA BOTONEIRA PORTA DISPENSADOR
COMANDOS COMANDOS COMANDOS COMANDOS INFERIOR INFERIOR INFERIOR PALETES
-65A11
/65.B6
Rack 0
Slot 11 +AR2-94HL1:x1 +AR2-94HL2:x1 +AR2-94HL3:x1 +AR2-94HL4:x1 +P10-94HL5:x1 +P10-94HL6:x1 +P10-94HL7:x1 +P20-94HL8:x1
A4.0 A4.1 A4.2 A4.3 A4.4 A4.5 A4.6 A4.7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B B
09401
09402
09403
09404
09405
09406
09407
09408
-X2 11 12 13 14 28 29 30 36
C C
-81W1 -84W1 -43W2

/81.C7 11 12 13 14 /84.C3 10 11 12 /43.C4 5
D D
-XAR2 11 12 13 14
BOTONEIRA 2
x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1
-94HL1 -94HL2 -94HL3 -94HL4 -94HL5 -94HL6 -94HL7 -94HL8
/81.A7 x2 /82.A2 x2 /43.C4 x2 /82.A3 x2 /84.A4 x2 /43.C5 x2 /84.A4 x2 /43.C5 x2
GREEN RED BLUE WHITE GREEN BLUE WHITE BLUE
QUADRO COMANDO
2L-
+P20
BOTONEIRA 1
2L- 2L- 2L- 2L- 2L- 2L- -43W2
/43.C4 6
2L- 2L- 2L-
81.B8 60.E3 84.B4
-X5 4
+AR2 +P10 2L-

84.C8 / 2L-
E 93.E8 / 1L- 1L- / 95.E1 E
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 94 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
EV ATIVAR BATENTE EV DESATIVAR

A A
BLOQUEIO PORTA PALETE BATENTE PALETE EV ATIVAR EV DESATIVAR
AVISADOR ACESSO SUPERIOR BLOQUEIO PORTA PLATAFORMA PLATAFORMA CENTRADOR PALETE CENTRADOR PALETE
ACÚSTICO (RESERVA) ACESSO INFERIOR (RESERVA) (RESERVA) PLATAFORMA PLATAFORMA LIVRE
-65A12
/65.B7
Rack 0
Slot 12 -95H1:x1 -X4:15 +EX-51B1-IN +CX4-X40:9 +CX4-X40:10 +CXEV4-95YV6:1 +CXEV4-95YV7:1 -X4:16
A5.0 A5.1 A5.2 A5.3 A5.4 A5.5 A5.6 A5.7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B B
09501
09502
09503
09504
09505
09506
09507
09508
-X4 15 -X4 9 10 11 12 16
-83W1
/83.C1 9 10 11 12
C C
09503
51.C3
C. PLATAFORMA
ELEVAÇÃO
83.C8 / 2L- 2L- 2L- 2L- 2L-
2L-
-X40 9 2 10 2 11 2 12 2
+CX4
-95WYV6 -95WYV7
EVC142 EVC142
D D
1 1
x1
C. EV P. ELEVAÇÃO
-95H1 -95YV6 -95YV7

x2
3 3
+CXEV4
E 94.E8 / 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- / 96.E1 E
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 95 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
COM ENTRADA SELEÇÃO SELEÇÃO SELEÇÃO

A A
PRODUTO: PROGRAMA PROGRAMA PROGRAMA RESET BARREIRA RESET BARREIRA
PALETIZADOR EM COM ENTRADA COM SAÍDA PALETE: ENFARDAMENTO: ENFARDAMENTO: ENFARDAMENTO: SEGURANÇA SEGURANÇA SAÍDA
FUNCIONAMENTO PRODUTO: SINAL 2 PEDIDO ENTREGA BIT0 BIT1 BIT2 DISPENSADOR PALETES
-65A13
/65.B7
Rack 0
Slot 13 -X6-96K1:A1 -X6-96K2:A1 -X6-96K3:A1 -X6-96K4:A1 -X6-96K5:A1 -X6-96K6:A1 +EX-47A1-XS:5 +EX-48A1-XS:5
+DOC&PLC/6.1.D2 +DOC&PLC/6.1.D2 +DOC&PLC/6.1.D2 +DOC&PLC/6.1.E2 +DOC&PLC/6.1.E2 +DOC&PLC/6.1.E2 +DOC&PLC/6.1.E2 +DOC&PLC/6.1.E2
A6.0 A6.1 A6.2 A6.3 A6.4 A6.5 A6.6 A6.7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B B
09601
09602
09603
09604
09605
09606
09607
09608
C C
09607 09608
47.D2 48.D2
D D
+ + + + + +
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
-X6-96K1 -X6-96K2 -X6-96K3 -X6-96K4 -X6-96K5 -X6-96K6
BORNE-RELÉ A2 BORNE-RELÉ A2 BORNE-RELÉ A2 BORNE-RELÉ A2 BORNE-RELÉ A2 BORNE-RELÉ A2
- - - - - -
E 95.E8 / 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- 1L- E
14 11 /300.C2 14 11 /300.C3 14 11 /300.C4 14 11 /300.C5 14 11 /300.C7 14 11 /300.C8

12 12 12 12 12 12
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 96 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
4 4 4 4 4 4
-100B1 -100B2 -100B3 -100B4 -100B5 -100B6

IF5933 + - IF5933 + - IF5933 + - IF5933 + - IF5933 + - IF5933 + -
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
B -100WB1 -100WB2 -100WB3 -100WB4 -100WB5 -100WB6 B

MÁQUINA
3x0,34 BK BN BU 3x0,34 BK BN BU 3x0,34 BK BN BU 3x0,34 BK BN BU 3x0,34 BK BN BU 3x0,34 BK BN BU
+EX
C C
10001
10002
10003
10004
10005
10006
D D
-68X10 -68X11 -68X12

/68.C2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 /68.C2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 /68.C2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DI1 24V 0V PE DI2 24V 0V PE DI1 24V 0V PE DI2 24V 0V PE DI1 24V 0V PE DI2 24V 0V PE
E10.0 E10.1 E11.0 E11.1 E12.0 E12.1

+DOC&PLC/2.A2 +DOC&PLC/2.B2 +DOC&PLC/2.C2 +DOC&PLC/2.C2 +DOC&PLC/2.E2 +DOC&PLC/2.E2
E E
WAGO 753-401 WAGO 753-401 WAGO 753-401
DET IMPULSOR DET IMPULSOR DET COMPACTADOR DET COMPACTADOR DET COMPACTADOR DET COMPACTADOR
ACIMA ABAIXO DIREITA MÍNIMA DIREITA MÁXIMA FRONTAL MÍNIMO FRONTAL MÁXIMO
C. PRÉ-FORMA 1
+CX1
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM ESCRAVO CX1 - ENTRADAS Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 100 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
4 4 4 4 4 4
-101B1 -101B2 -101B3 -101B4 -101B5 -101B6

IF5933 + - IF5933 + - IGM206 + - IGM206 + - IGM206 + - IGM206 + -
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
B -101WB1 -101WB2 -101WB3 -101WB4 -101WB5 -101WB6 B

MÁQUINA
+EX
C C
10101
10102
10103
10104
10105
10106
D D
-68X13 -68X14 -68X15

/68.C2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 /68.C3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 /68.C3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
E13.0 E13.1 E14.0 E14.1 E15.0 E15.1

E E
WAGO 753-401 WAGO 753-401 WAGO 753-401
DET COMPACTADOR DET COMPACTADOR DET 1 COMPRESSÃO DET 2 COMPRESSÃO DET 3 COMPRESSÃO DET 4 COMPRESSÃO
ESQUERDA MÍNIMO ESQUERDA MÁXIMO COMPORTA COMPORTA COMPORTA COMPORTA
C. PRÉ-FORMA 1
+CX1
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 101 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
-102B5.2 -102B6.2
OGE302 OGE302
4 4 4 4 4 RECEPTOR 4 RECEPTOR
-102B1 -102B2 -102B3 -102B4 -102B5.1 -102B6.1

IGM206 + - IGM206 + - IGM206 + - IGM206 + - OGS301 - + + - + - OGS301 - +
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 EMISOR 3 1 1 3 1 3 EMISOR 3 1
B -102WB1 -102WB2 -102WB3 -102WB4 -102WB5.1 -102WB5.2 -102WB6.2 -102WB6.1 B

MÁQUINA
3x0,5 BK BN BU 3x0,5 BK BN BU 3x0,5 BK BN BU 3x0,5 BK BN BU 3x0,34 BU BN 3x0,34 BK BN BU 3x0,34 BK BN BU 3x0,34 BU BN
+EX
C. COMPORTA 1
-X100 1 2 3 1 2
- / 200.C2
+CX10
C C
-101W1
/200.C1
12G0,5 3 1 2
10201
10202
10203
10204
10205
10206
D D
-68X16 -68X17 -68X18

/68.C3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 /68.C3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 /68.C4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
E16.0 E16.1 E17.0 E17.1 E18.0 E18.1

E E
WAGO 753-401 WAGO 753-401 WAGO 753-401
DET DESACELERAR DET COMPORTA DET DESACELERAR DET COMPORTA FOT NÍVEL BAIXO FOT GABARITO
ABERTURA ABERTA FECHO COMPORTA FECHADA COMPORTA IMPULSO
COMPORTA
C. PRÉ-FORMA 1
+CX1
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 102 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
2 4 2 4
-103B1 -103B2
IV5004 + - IV5004 + -
1 3 1 3
B -103WB1 -103WB2 B
MÁQUINA
4x0,34 WH BN BU 4x0,34 BK BN BU
+EX
C C
10301
10302
D D
-68X19
/68.C4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DI1 24V 0V PE DI2 24V 0V PE
E19.0 E19.1
+DOC&PLC/3.A5 +DOC&PLC/3.B5
E E
WAGO 753-401
DET ALTURA DET ALTURA

MÁXIMA ELEVADOR DESACELERAR
SUBIDA ELEVADOR
C. PRÉ-FORMA 1
+CX1
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 103 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
-110B1.2 -110B2.2 -110B3.2

OGE302 OGE302 OGE302
4 RECEPTOR 4 RECEPTOR 4 RECEPTOR 4 4
-110B1.1 -110B2.1 -110B3.1 -110B4 -110B6

OGS301 - + + - OGS301 - + + - OGS301 - + + - IGM206 + - IGM206 + -
EMISOR 3 1 1 3 EMISOR 3 1 1 3 EMISOR 3 1 1 3 1 3 1 3
-110WB1.1 -110WB2.1 -110WB3.1

3x0,34 BU BN 3x0,34 BU BN 3x0,34 BU BN
B -110WB1.2 -110WB2.2 -110WB3.2 -110WB4 -110WB6 B

MÁQUINA
3x0,34 BK BN BU 3x0,34 BK BN BU 3x0,34 BK BN BU 3x0,5 BK BN BU 3x0,5 BK BN BU
+EX
C C
11001
11002
11003
11004
11005
11006
D D
-69X10 -69X11 -69X12

/69.C2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 /69.C2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 /69.C3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
E20.0 E20.1 E21.0 E21.1 E22.0 E22.1

E E
WAGO 753-401 WAGO 753-401 WAGO 753-401
FOT ENTRADA FOT. INTERIOR FOT. ENTRADA DET PÁS ROTADOR DET PÁS ROTADOR DET MÍNIMO
TAPETE AGRUP. ROTADOR ROTADOR ABERTAS FECHADAS REGULAÇÃO
(RESERVA) ALISADOR
C. PRÉ-FORMA 2
+CX2
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 110 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
-111B2.2 -111B3.2
OGE302 OGE302
4 4 RECEPTOR 4 RECEPTOR
-111B1 -111B2.1 -111B3.1

IGM206 + - OGS301 - + + - OGS301 - + + -
1 3 EMISOR 3 1 1 3 EMISOR 3 1 1 3
-111WB2.1 -111WB3.1
3x0,34 BU BN 3x0,34 BU BN
B -111WB1 -111WB2.2 -111WB3.2 B

MÁQUINA
3x0,5 BK BN BU 3x0,34 BK BN BU 3x0,34 BK BN BU
+EX
C C
-X210 3 1 2
+CX21
-111WB3
4x0,34 BK BN BU
11101
11102
11003
11004
D D
-69X13 -69X14
/69.C3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 /69.C3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DI1 24V 0V PE DI2 24V 0V PE DI1 24V 0V PE DI2 24V 0V PE
E23.0 E23.1 E24.0 E24.1

+DOC&PLC/4.A5 +DOC&PLC/4.B5 +DOC&PLC/4.C5 +DOC&PLC/4.C5
E E
WAGO 753-401 WAGO 753-401
DET MÁXIMO FOT SAÍDA FOT ACUMULAÇÃO FOT LIMITE

REGULAÇÃO ALISADOR LIVRES INCLINADA (RESERVA)
ALISADOR
C. PRÉ-FORMA 2
+CX2
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 111 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
4 4 4 4 4 4
-120B1 -120B2 -120B3 -120B4 -120B5 -120B6

IV5004 + - IV5004 + - IV5004 + - IV5004 + - IV5004 + - OGP302 + -
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
B -120WB1 -120WB2 -120WB3 -120WB4 -120WB5 -120WB6 B

MÁQUINA
+EX
C C
12001
12002
12003
12004
12005
12006
D D
-70X10 -70X11 -70X12

/70.C2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 /70.C2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 /70.C3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
E30.0 E30.1 E31.0 E31.1 E32.0 E32.1

E E
WAGO 753-401 WAGO 753-401 WAGO 753-401
DET POS MÁXIMA DET POS DET POS MÍNIMA DET PUAS DET PUAS FOT PALETE BASE
DISPENSADOR INTERMÉDIA DISPENSADOR FORQUILHA FORQUILHA DISPENSADOR
PALETES DISPENSADOR PALETES RECOLHIDA ESTICADA
C. DISPENSADOR
PALETES
+CX3
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 120 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
-121B2
OGP302 + -
1 3
B -121WB2 B
MÁQUINA
4x0,34 BK BN BU
+EX
C C
12101
12102
D D
-70X13
/70.C3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
E33.0 E33.1
+DOC&PLC/5.A5 +DOC&PLC/5.B5
E E
WAGO 753-401
RESERVA FOT PARAGEM

ESPERA
PALETIZADOR
C. DISPENSADOR
+CX3
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 121 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
4 4 4 4 4 4
-122B1 -122B2 -122B3 -122B4 -122B5 -122B6

IV5004 + - IV5004 + - MK5117 + - MK5117 + - O5H503 + - OGP302 + -
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
B -122WB1 -122WB2 -122WB3 -122WB4 -122WB5 -122WB6 B

MÁQUINA
12203
12204
12205
+EX
-X310 3 1 2 4 1 2 5 1 2
+ / 123.C1
- / 123.C1
+CX31
-122W2
C
18G0,5 FLEX 3 1 2 4 5
C
APLICADOR
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
FOLHAS
-X300 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
+ / 123.C1
- / 123.C1
+CX30
-122W1
/123.D1
/220.C1
12G0,5 3 1 2 4 5 6 7 8
12201
12202
12203
12204
12205
12206
D D
-70X14 -70X15 -70X16

/70.C3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 /70.C3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 /70.C3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
E34.0 E34.1 E35.0 E35.1 E36.0 E36.1
+DOC&PLC/5.C5 +DOC&PLC/5.C5 +DOC&PLC/5.E5 +DOC&PLC/5.E5 +DOC&PLC/5.1.A2 +DOC&PLC/5.1.B2
E E
WAGO 753-401 WAGO 753-401 WAGO 753-401
DISPENSADOR DISPENSADOR DISPENSADOR DISPENSADOR DISPENSADOR DISPENSADOR

FOLHAS - DET FOLHAS - DET FOLHAS - DET ACIMA FOLHAS - DET FOLHAS - FOLHA OK FOLHAS - HÁ
POSIÇÃO ARMAZÉM POSIÇÃO PALETE ABAIXO FOLHAS
C. DISPENSADOR
+CX3
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 122 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
-123B1
IF5933 + -
1 3
B -123WB1 B
MÁQUINA
3x0,34 BK BN BU
12301
+EX
-X310 6 1 2
122.C7 / +
122.C7 / -
+CX31
-122W2
C
18G0,5 FLEX 6
C
+ -
-X300
APLICADOR
7 7 7
+ -
FOLHAS
122.C8 / + + / 220.C1
122.C8 / - - / 220.C1
+CX30
-122W1
/122.D1
12G0,5 9
12301
12302
D D
-70X17
/70.C4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

E37.0 E37.1
+DOC&PLC/5.1.C2 +DOC&PLC/5.1.C2
E E
WAGO 753-401
DISPENSADOR LIVRE
FOLHAS - DET PISON
C. DISPENSADOR
+CX3
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 123 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
EV SOPRADOR
CORREIAS LIVRE LIVRE LIVRE
-68X40 WAGO 753-531

/68.C4
+DOC&PLC/7.A2 +DOC&PLC/7.B2 +DOC&PLC/7.B2 +DOC&PLC/7.B2

A10.0 A10.1 A10.2 A10.3
DO1 0V DO2 0V 0V DO3 0V DO4
B B
C. PRÉ-FORMA 1
1 2 5 6 3 4 7 8
20001
+CX1
-101W1
/102.C6
12G0,5 4
C C
C. COMPORTA 1
-
102.C7
-X100 4 2
+CX10
-200WYV1
EVC145
3x0,34 BN BU
D D
1
-200YV1
3
MÁQUINA
+EX
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM ESCRAVO CX1 - SAÍDAS Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 200 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
EV FECHAR GRAMPO EV ABRIR GRAMPO

ROTADOR ROTADOR
LIVRE LIVRE
-69X40 WAGO 753-531

/69.C4
+DOC&PLC/7.C2 +DOC&PLC/7.C2 +DOC&PLC/7.D2 +DOC&PLC/7.D2

A20.0 A20.1 A20.2 A20.3
B B
C. PRÉ-FORMA 2
1 2 5 6 3 4 7 8
+CX2
21001
21002
C C
-210WYV1 -210WYV2
EVC145 EVC145
D D
1 1
-210YV1 -210YV2
3 3
MÁQUINA
+EX
E E
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 210 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
DISPENSADOR DISPENSADOR DISPENSADOR

FOLHAS - SUBIR FOLHAS - DESCER FOLHAS - VAZIO RESERVA
-70X40 WAGO 753-531

/70.C4
+DOC&PLC/7.E2 +DOC&PLC/7.E2 +DOC&PLC/7.E2 +DOC&PLC/7.F2

A40.0 A40.1 A40.2 A40.3
C. DISPENSADOR
B B
1 2 5 6 3 4 7 8
+CX3
22001
22003
22004
22002
-122W1
/122.D1
12G0,5 10 11 GNYE
APLICADOR FOLHAS
C C
123.C8 / +
123.C8 / -
+ - + - + -
-X300 8 8 8 -X300 9 9 9 -X300 10 10 10
+ - + - + -
+CX30
-220WYV1 -220WYV2 -220WYV3

EVC145 EVC145 EVC145
3x0,34 BN BU 3x0,34 BN BU 3x0,34 BN BU
D D
1 1 1
-220YV1 -220YV2 -220YV3
3 3 3
MÁQUINA
+EX
E E
F F

1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 220 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
B B
COM ENTRADA SELEÇÃO SELEÇÃO SELEÇÃO

PRODUTO: PROGRAMA PROGRAMA PROGRAMA
PALETIZADOR EM COM ENTRADA COM SAÍDA PALETE: ENFARDAMENTO ENFARDAMENTO ENFARDAMENTO
FUNCIONAMENTO PRODUTO: SINAL 2 PEDIDO ENTREGA BIT0 BIT1 BIT2
-X6 -X6 -X6 -X6 -X6 -X6

5 6 7 8 9 10
C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1
C 11 11 11 11 11 11 C
-96K1 -96K2 -96K3 -96K4 -96K5 -96K6

/96.D2 /96.D3 /96.D3 /96.D4 /96.D5 /96.D6
14 12 14 12 14 12 14 12 14 12 14 12
NO1 NC1 NO1 NC1 NO1 NC1 NO1 NC1 NO1 NC1 NO1 NC1
11 14 12 11 14 12 11 14 12 11 14 12 11 14 12 11 14 12
30001
30002
30003
30004
30011
30012
30013
30014
30015
30016
30017
30018
D D
-300W1 -300W3
/81.B2 /81.B6
12G1 5 6 7 8 12G0,5 4 8 5 9 6 10 7 11
C. TAPETE INCLINADO
SAÍDA PALETES
E -XCin 5 6 7 8 -X -X -X -X E
+CX100 +EX3
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM COMUNICAÇÃO Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste G.Farré
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 300 300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Locais de montagem DOC

+AR1-65A2 +AR1-65A3
+AR1&/65.B4 +AR1&/65.B4
Rack 0 Rack 0
A Slot 2 Slot 3 A
ET 200SP SIEMENS ET 200SP SIEMENS

DI 8x24 VCC ST DI 8x24 VCC ST
1 1
E1.0 +AR1&/80.E2 +EX-80B1:4 PRESSÃO AR OK E2.0 +AR1&/81.E2 +AR1-21R1-FR1:18 ESTADO TÉRMICO RESISTÊNCIA FREIO
2 2
E1.1 +AR1&/80.E3 +AR1-42KM2:.4 POTÊNCIA OK PALETIZADOR E2.1 +AR1&/81.E3 +EX1-81B2:4 COM ENTRADA PRODUTO: EM FUNCIONAMENTO
3 3
E1.2 +AR1&/80.E3 +AR1-42KM3:.4 POTÊNCIA OK PALETES VAZIAS E2.2 +AR1&/81.E3 +EX1-KA2:14 COM ENTRADA PRODUTO: RSVA
4 4
E1.3 +AR1&/80.E4 +AR1-1B1:14 PORTA ARMÁRIO ELÉTRICO FECHADA E2.3 +AR1&/81.E4 +EX2-KA3:14 COM ENTRADA PALETES: PEDIDO ENTREGA (RSVA)
B B
5 5
E1.4 +AR1&/80.E5 +AR1-25QM1:22 TÉRMICOS PALETIZADOR E2.4 +AR1&/81.E5 +EX2-KA4:14 COM ENTRADA PALETES: ENTREGA EM CURSO (RSVA)
6 6
E1.5 +AR1&/80.E6 +AR1-28QM1:22 TÉRMICOS PALETES VAZIAS E2.5 +AR1&/81.E6 +EX3-KA5:14 COM SAÍDA PALETES: AUTORIZAÇÃO ENTREGA
7 7
E1.6 +AR1&/80.E6 +AR1-30GF1:T6 TÉRMICOS SAÍDA PALETES E2.6 +AR1&/81.E6 +EX3-KA6:14 COM SAÍDA PALETES: PALETE RECEBIDA
8 8
E1.7 +AR1&/80.E7 +AR1-26QM3:22 TÉRMICOS ALIMENTAÇÃO SACOS E2.7 +AR1&/81.E7 +AR2-81SB8:.2 BOTÃO FUNCIONAMENTO QUADRO COMANDOS
C C
6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0 + 6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0 +
BU15-P16+A0+2B BU15-P16+A0+2B
+AR1-65A4 +AR1-65A5
+AR1&/65.B4 +AR1&/65.B5
Rack 0 Rack 0
Slot 4 Slot 5

DI 8x24 VCC ST DI 8x24 VCC ST
D 1 1 D
E3.0 +AR1&/82.E2 +AR2-82SB1:.2 BOTÃO PARAGEM QUADRO COMANDOS E4.0 +AR1&/83.E1 +EX-83B1:4 FOT PALETE PLATAFORMA ELEVAÇÃO
2 2
E3.1 +AR1&/82.E3 +AR2-82SB2:.2 BOTÃO PEDIDO ENTRADA SUPERIOR QUADRO COMANDOS E4.1 +AR1&/83.E2 +EX-83B2:4 DET CENTRADOR PALETE DESATIVADO
3 3
E3.2 +AR1&/82.E3 +AR2-82SB3:.2 SELETOR AUTORIZAR ENTRADA SACOS E4.2 +AR1&/83.E3 +EX-83B3:4 DET BATENTE FRONTAL PALETE ATIVADO (RESERVA)
4 4
E3.3 +AR1&/82.E4 +EX-82B4:4 DET ALTURA DESACELERAR DESCIDA ELEVADOR E4.3 +AR1&/83.E4 +EX-83B4:4 DET BATENTE FRONTAL PALETE DESATIVADO (RESERVA)
5 5
E3.4 +AR1&/82.E5 +EX-82B5:2 DET ALTURA MÍNIMA ELEVADOR E4.4 +AR1&/83.E5 +EX-83B5.1:4 DETS GATILHOS SEGURANÇA PLATAFORMA (SÉRIE 1)
E E
6 6
E3.5 +AR1&/82.E6 +AR1-X4B:8 LIVRE E4.5 +AR1&/83.E7 +EX-83B6.1:4 DETS GATILHOS SEGURANÇA PLATAFORMA (SÉRIE 2)
7 7
E3.6 +AR1&/82.E6 +AR1-X4B:9 LIVRE E4.6 +AR1&/83a.E2 +EX-83B7.1:4 FOTS GABARITO PLATAFORMA ELEVAÇÃO
8 8
E3.7 +AR1&/82.E7 +AR1-X4:13 LIVRE E4.7 +AR1&/83a.E4 +EX-83B8:4 FOT SECÇÃO 1 SAÍDA PALETES
6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0 + 6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0 +
BU15-P16+A0+2B BU15-P16+A0+2B
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM PLC ENTRADAS DIGITAIS Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

+AR1-65A6
+AR1&/65.B5
Rack 0
A Slot 6 A
ET 200SP SIEMENS
DI 8x24 VCC ST
1
E5.0 +AR1&/84.E2 +AR1-X4B:13 FOT SECÇÃO 2 SAÍDA PALETES (RESERVA)
2
E5.1 +AR1&/84.E3 +AR1-X4B:14 FOT SECÇÃO 3 SAÍDA PALETES (RESERVA)
3
E5.2 +AR1&/84.E3 +P10-84SB3:.2 BOTÃO FUNCIONAMENTO BOTONEIRA PORTA INFERIOR
4
E5.3 +AR1&/84.E4 +P10-84SB4:.2 BOTÃO PEDIDO ENTRADA PORTA INFERIOR
B B
5
E5.4 +AR1&/84.E5 +EX-51B1:52 INTERRUPTOR PORTA INFERIOR. PORTA FECHADA
6
E5.5 +AR1&/84.E6 +EX-47A1-XS:7 BOTÃO PEDIDO ENTRADA PORTA INFERIOR
7
E5.6 +AR1&/84.E6 +EX-48A1-XS:7 ESTADO BARREIRA SAÍDA PALETES (RSVA)
8
E5.7 +AR1&/84.E7 +AR1-X4:14 LIVRE
C C
6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0 +
BU15-P16+A0+2B
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 1.1 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A
+CX1-68X10 WAGO +CX1-68X13 WAGO A
+AR1&/68.C2 +AR1&/68.C2
753-401 753-401
1 1
E10.0 DI1 +AR1&/100.E2 +EX-100B1:4 DET IMPULSOR ACIMA E13.0 DI1 +AR1&/101.E2 +EX-101B1:4 DET COMPACTADOR ESQUERDA MÍNIMO
5 5
E10.1 DI2 +AR1&/100.E2 +EX-100B2:4 DET IMPULSOR ABAIXO E13.1 DI2 +AR1&/101.E2 +EX-101B2:4 DET COMPACTADOR ESQUERDA MÁXIMO
2 2
24V +AR1&/100.E2 24V +AR1&/101.E2
6 6
24V +AR1&/100.E3 24V +AR1&/101.E3
3 3
0V +AR1&/100.E2 0V +AR1&/101.E2
7 7
0V +AR1&/100.E3 0V +AR1&/101.E3
B 4 4 B
PE +AR1&/100.E2 PE +AR1&/101.E2
8 8
PE +AR1&/100.E3 PE +AR1&/101.E3
PE PE
+CX1-68X11 WAGO +CX1-68X14 WAGO

+AR1&/68.C2 +AR1&/68.C3
753-401 753-401
1 1
C E11.0 DI1 +AR1&/100.E4 +EX-100B3:4 DET COMPACTADOR DIREITA MÍNIMA E14.0 DI1 +AR1&/101.E4 +EX-101B3:4 DET 1 COMPRESSÃO COMPORTA C
5 5
E11.1 DI2 +AR1&/100.E5 +EX-100B4:4 DET COMPACTADOR DIREITA MÁXIMA E14.1 DI2 +AR1&/101.E5 +EX-101B4:4 DET 2 COMPRESSÃO COMPORTA
2 2
24V +AR1&/100.E4 24V +AR1&/101.E4
6 6
24V +AR1&/100.E5 24V +AR1&/101.E5
3 3
0V +AR1&/100.E4 0V +AR1&/101.E4
7 7
0V +AR1&/100.E5 0V +AR1&/101.E5
4 4
PE +AR1&/100.E4 PE +AR1&/101.E4
8 8
PE +AR1&/100.E5 PE +AR1&/101.E5
D D
PE PE

+AR1&/68.C2 +AR1&/68.C3
753-401 753-401
1 1
E12.0 DI1 +AR1&/100.E6 +EX-100B5:4 DET COMPACTADOR FRONTAL MÍNIMO E15.0 DI1 +AR1&/101.E6 +EX-101B5:4 DET 3 COMPRESSÃO COMPORTA
5 5
E12.1 DI2 +AR1&/100.E7 +EX-100B6:4 DET COMPACTADOR FRONTAL MÁXIMO E15.1 DI2 +AR1&/101.E7 +EX-101B6:4 DET 4 COMPRESSÃO COMPORTA
2 2
24V +AR1&/100.E6 24V +AR1&/101.E6
E 6 6 E
24V +AR1&/100.E7 24V +AR1&/101.E7
3 3
0V +AR1&/100.E6 0V +AR1&/101.E6
7 7
0V +AR1&/100.E7 0V +AR1&/101.E7
4 4
PE +AR1&/100.E7 PE +AR1&/101.E7
8 8
PE +AR1&/100.E7 PE +AR1&/101.E7
PE PE
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A
+AR1&/68.C3 +AR1&/68.C4
753-401 753-401
1 1
E16.0 DI1 +AR1&/102.E2 +EX-102B1:4 DET DESACELERAR ABERTURA COMPORTA E19.0 DI1 +AR1&/103.E2 +EX-103B1:2 DET ALTURA MÁXIMA ELEVADOR
5 5
E16.1 DI2 +AR1&/102.E2 +EX-102B2:4 DET COMPORTA ABERTA E19.1 DI2 +AR1&/103.E2 +EX-103B2:4 DET ALTURA DESACELERAR SUBIDA ELEVADOR
2 2
24V +AR1&/102.E2 24V +AR1&/103.E2
6 6
24V +AR1&/102.E3 24V +AR1&/103.E3
3 3
0V +AR1&/102.E2 0V +AR1&/103.E2
7 7
0V +AR1&/102.E3 0V +AR1&/103.E3
B 4 4 B
PE +AR1&/102.E2 PE +AR1&/103.E2
8 8
PE +AR1&/102.E3 PE +AR1&/103.E3
PE PE
+CX1-68X17 WAGO
+AR1&/68.C3
753-401
1
C E17.0 DI1 +AR1&/102.E4 +EX-102B3:4 DET DESACELERAR FECHO COMPORTA C
5
E17.1 DI2 +AR1&/102.E5 +EX-102B4:4 DET COMPORTA FECHADA
2
24V +AR1&/102.E4
6
24V +AR1&/102.E5
3
0V +AR1&/102.E4
7
0V +AR1&/102.E5
4
PE +AR1&/102.E4
8
PE +AR1&/102.E5
D D
PE
+CX1-68X18 WAGO
+AR1&/68.C4
753-401
1
E18.0 DI1 +AR1&/102.E6 +EX-102B5.2:4 FOT NÍVEL BAIXO COMPORTA
5
E18.1 DI2 +AR1&/102.E7 +EX-102B6.2:4 FOT GABARITO IMPULSO
2
24V +AR1&/102.E6
E 6 E
24V +AR1&/102.E7
3
0V +AR1&/102.E7
7
0V +AR1&/102.E7
4
PE +AR1&/102.E7
8
PE +AR1&/102.E8
PE
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A
+AR1&/69.C2 +AR1&/69.C3
753-401 753-401
1 1
E20.0 DI1 +AR1&/110.E2 +EX-110B1.2:4 FOT ENTRADA TAPETE AGRUP. E23.0 DI1 +AR1&/111.E2 +EX-111B1:4 DET MÁXIMO REGULAÇÃO ALISADOR
5 5
E20.1 DI2 +AR1&/110.E2 +EX-110B2.2:4 FOT. INTERIOR ROTADOR E23.1 DI2 +AR1&/111.E2 +EX-111B2.2:4 FOT SAÍDA ALISADOR
2 2
24V +AR1&/110.E2 24V +AR1&/111.E2
6 6
24V +AR1&/110.E3 24V +AR1&/111.E3
3 3
0V +AR1&/110.E2 0V +AR1&/111.E2
7 7
0V +AR1&/110.E3 0V +AR1&/111.E3
B 4 4 B
PE +AR1&/110.E2 PE +AR1&/111.E2
8 8
PE +AR1&/110.E3 PE +AR1&/111.E3
PE PE

+AR1&/69.C2 +AR1&/69.C3
753-401 753-401
1 1
C E21.0 DI1 +AR1&/110.E4 +EX-110B3.2:4 FOT. ENTRADA ROTADOR E24.0 DI1 +AR1&/111.E4 +EX-111B3.2:4 FOT ACUMULAÇÃO LIVRES C
5 5
E21.1 DI2 +AR1&/110.E5 +EX-110B4:4 DET PÁS ROTADOR ABERTAS E24.1 DI2 +AR1&/111.E5 FOT LIMITE INCLINADA (RESERVA)
2 2
24V +AR1&/110.E4 24V +AR1&/111.E4
6 6
24V +AR1&/110.E5 24V +AR1&/111.E5
3 3
0V +AR1&/110.E4 0V +AR1&/111.E5
7 7
0V +AR1&/110.E5 0V +AR1&/111.E5
4 4
PE +AR1&/110.E5 PE +AR1&/111.E5
8 8
PE +AR1&/110.E5 PE +AR1&/111.E6
D D
PE PE
+CX2-69X12 WAGO
+AR1&/69.C3
753-401
1
E22.0 DI1 +AR1&/110.E6 DET PÁS ROTADOR FECHADAS (RESERVA)
5
E22.1 DI2 +AR1&/110.E7 +EX-110B6:4 DET MÍNIMO REGULAÇÃO ALISADOR
2
24V +AR1&/110.E7
E 6 E
24V +AR1&/110.E7
3
0V +AR1&/110.E7
7
0V +AR1&/110.E8
4
PE +AR1&/110.E7
8
PE +AR1&/110.E8
PE
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A
+AR1&/70.C2 +AR1&/70.C3
753-401 753-401
1 1
E30.0 DI1 +AR1&/120.E2 +EX-120B1:4 DET POS MÁXIMA DISPENSADOR PALETES E33.0 DI1 +AR1&/121.E2 RESERVA
5 5
E30.1 DI2 +AR1&/120.E2 +EX-120B2:4 DET POS INTERMÉDIA DISPENSADOR PALETES E33.1 DI2 +AR1&/121.E2 +EX-121B2:4 FOT PARAGEM ESPERA PALETIZADOR
2 2
24V +AR1&/120.E2 24V +AR1&/121.E2
6 6
24V +AR1&/120.E3 24V +AR1&/121.E3
3 3
0V +AR1&/120.E2 0V +AR1&/121.E2
7 7
0V +AR1&/120.E3 0V +AR1&/121.E3
B 4 4 B
PE +AR1&/120.E2 PE +AR1&/121.E2
8 8
PE +AR1&/120.E3 PE +AR1&/121.E3
PE PE

+AR1&/70.C2 +AR1&/70.C3
753-401 753-401
1 1
C E31.0 DI1 +AR1&/120.E4 +EX-120B3:4 DET POS MÍNIMA DISPENSADOR PALETES E34.0 DI1 +AR1&/122.E2 +EX-122B1:4 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET POSIÇÃO ARMAZÉM C
5 5
E31.1 DI2 +AR1&/120.E5 +EX-120B4:4 DET PUAS FORQUILHA RECOLHIDA E34.1 DI2 +AR1&/122.E2 +EX-122B2:4 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET POSIÇÃO PALETE
2 2
24V +AR1&/120.E4 24V +AR1&/122.E2
6 6
24V +AR1&/120.E5 24V +AR1&/122.E3
3 3
0V +AR1&/120.E4 0V +AR1&/122.E2
7 7
0V +AR1&/120.E5 0V +AR1&/122.E3
4 4
PE +AR1&/120.E4 PE +AR1&/122.E2
8 8
PE +AR1&/120.E5 PE +AR1&/122.E3
D D
PE PE

+AR1&/70.C3 +AR1&/70.C3
753-401 753-401
1 1
E32.0 DI1 +AR1&/120.E6 +EX-120B5:4 DET PUAS FORQUILHA ESTICADA E35.0 DI1 +AR1&/122.E4 +EX-122B3:4 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET ACIMA
5 5
E32.1 DI2 +AR1&/120.E7 +EX-120B6:4 FOT PALETE BASE DISPENSADOR E35.1 DI2 +AR1&/122.E5 +EX-122B4:4 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET ABAIXO
2 2
24V +AR1&/120.E6 24V +AR1&/122.E4
E 6 6 E
24V +AR1&/120.E7 24V +AR1&/122.E5
3 3
0V +AR1&/120.E6 0V +AR1&/122.E4
7 7
0V +AR1&/120.E7 0V +AR1&/122.E5
4 4
PE +AR1&/120.E7 PE +AR1&/122.E4
8 8
PE +AR1&/120.E7 PE +AR1&/122.E5
PE PE
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A
+CX3-70X16 WAGO A
+AR1&/70.C3
753-401
1
E36.0 DI1 +AR1&/122.E6 +EX-122B5:4 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - FOLHA OK
5
E36.1 DI2 +AR1&/122.E7 +EX-122B6:4 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - HÁ FOLHAS
2
24V +AR1&/122.E6
6
24V +AR1&/122.E7
3
0V +AR1&/122.E6
7
0V +AR1&/122.E7
B 4 B
PE +AR1&/122.E7
8
PE +AR1&/122.E7
PE
+CX3-70X17 WAGO
+AR1&/70.C4
753-401
1
C E37.0 DI1 +AR1&/123.E2 +EX-123B1:4 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET PISON C
5
E37.1 DI2 +AR1&/123.E2 LIVRE
2
24V +AR1&/123.E2
6
24V +AR1&/123.E3
3
0V +AR1&/123.E2
7
0V +AR1&/123.E3
4
PE +AR1&/123.E2
8
PE +AR1&/123.E3
D D
PE
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 5.1 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

+AR1-65A7 +AR1-65A8
+AR1&/65.B5 +AR1&/65.B5
Rack 0 Rack 0
A Slot 7 Slot 8 A

DQ 8x24 VCC/0.5A ST DQ 8x24 VCC/0.5A ST
1 1
A0.0 +AR1&/90.B2 +AR1-11KM1:A1 MOTOR TAPETE AGRUPAMENTO A1.0 +AR1&/91.B2 +AR1-19GF1:B6 COMPORTA FECHAR
2 2
A0.1 +AR1&/90.B3 +AR1-16KM1A:A1 COMPACTADOR DIREITA AVANÇO A1.1 +AR1&/91.B3 +AR1-19GF1:B7 COMPORTA VELOCIDADE RÁPIDA
3 3
A0.2 +AR1&/90.B3 +AR1-16KM1B:A1 COMPACTADOR DIREITA RETROCESSO A1.2 +AR1&/91.B3 +AR1-22GF1:B5 ROLOS PLATAFORMA FUNCIONAMENTO
4 4
A0.3 +AR1&/90.B4 +AR1-17KM1A:A1 COMPACTADOR ESQUERDA AVANÇO A1.3 +AR1&/91.B4 +AR1-22GF1:B7 ROLOS PLATAFORMA VELOCIDADE 2
B B
5 5
A0.4 +AR1&/90.B5 +AR1-17KM1B:A1 COMPACTADOR ESQUERDA RETROCESSO A1.4 +AR1&/91.B5 +AR1-21GF1:B5 PLATAFORMA SUBIR
6 6
A0.5 +AR1&/90.B6 +AR1-18KM1A:A1 COMPACTADOR FRONTAL AVANÇO A1.5 +AR1&/91.B6 +AR1-21GF1:B6 PLATAFORMA DESCER
7 7
A0.6 +AR1&/90.B6 +AR1-18KM1B:A1 COMPACTADOR DIREITA RETROCESSO A1.6 +AR1&/91.B6 +AR1-21GF1:B7 PLATAFORMA VELOCIDADE 2
8 8
A0.7 +AR1&/90.B7 +AR1-19GF1:B5 COMPORTA ABRIR A1.7 +AR1&/91.B7 +AR1-91K8:A1 PLATAFORMA VELOCIDADE 3
C C
6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 + 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 +
BU15-P16+A0+2B BU15-P16+A0+2B
+AR1-65A9 +AR1-65A10
+AR1&/65.B6 +AR1&/65.B6
Rack 0 Rack 0
Slot 9 Slot 10

D 1 1 D
A2.0 +AR1&/92.B2 +AR1-25KM1:A1 TAPETE ROTADOR FUNCIONAMENTO A3.0 +AR1&/93.B2 +AR1-30GF1:B5 ROLOS SECÇÃO 1 SAÍDA VELOCIDADE 1
2 2
A2.1 +AR1&/92.B3 LIVRE A3.1 +AR1&/93.B3 +AR1-30GF1:B7 ROLOS SECÇÃO 1 SAÍDA VELOCIDADE 2
3 3
A2.2 +AR1&/92.B3 +AR1-26KM3A:A1 INVERSOR REGULAÇÃO ALTURA ALISADOR DESCER A3.2 +AR1&/93.B3 +AR1-27KM2A:A1 FORQUILHA DISPENSADOR AVANÇO
4 4
A2.3 +AR1&/92.B4 +AR1-26KM3B:A1 INVERSOR REGULAÇÃO ALTURA ALISADOR SUBIR A3.3 +AR1&/93.B4 +AR1-27KM2B:A1 FORQUILHA DISPENSADOR RETROCESSO
5 5
A2.4 +AR1&/92.B5 +AR1-26KM1:A1 MOTORES ALISADOR FUNCIONAMENTO A3.4 +AR1&/93.B5 +AR1-28KM1A:A1 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS AVANÇO
E E
6 6
A2.5 +AR1&/92.B6 +AR1-27KM1A:A1 DISPENSADOR PALETES SUBIR A3.5 +AR1&/93.B6 +AR1-28KM1B:A1 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS RETROCESSO
7 7
A2.6 +AR1&/92.B6 +AR1-27KM1B:A1 DISPENSADOR PALETES DESCER A3.6 +AR1&/93.B6 +AR1-14KM1:A1 ELEVAÇÃO PÁ IMPULSOR
8 8
A2.7 +AR1&/92.B7 +AR1-27GF3:B5 ROLOS BASE DISPENSADOR PALETES FUNCIONAMENTO A3.7 +AR1&/93.B7 +AR1-27GF3:B7 ROLOS BASE DISPENSADOR PALETES VELOCIDADE 2
6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 + 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 +
BU15-P16+A0+2B BU15-P16+A0+2B
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM PLC SAÍDAS DIGITAIS Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

+AR1-65A11 +AR1-65A12
+AR1&/65.B6 +AR1&/65.B7
Rack 0 Rack 0
A Slot 11 Slot 12 A

1 1
A4.0 +AR1&/94.B2 +AR2-94HL1:x1 LUZ VERDE ARMÁRIO COMANDOS A5.0 +AR1&/95.B2 +AR1-95H1:x1 AVISADOR ACÚSTICO
2 2
A4.1 +AR1&/94.B3 +AR2-94HL2:x1 LUZ VERMELHA ARMÁRIO COMANDOS A5.1 +AR1&/95.B3 +AR1-X4:15 BLOQUEIO PORTA ACESSO SUPERIOR (RESERVA)
3 3
A4.2 +AR1&/94.B3 +AR2-94HL3:x1 LUZ AZUL ARMÁRIO COMANDOS A5.2 +AR1&/95.B3 +EX-51B1-IN BLOQUEIO PORTA ACESSO INFERIOR
4 4
A4.3 +AR1&/94.B4 +AR2-94HL4:x1 LUZ BRANCA ARMÁRIO COMANDOS A5.3 +AR1&/95.B4 +CX4-X40:9 EV ATIVAR BATENTE PALETE PLATAFORMA (RESERVA)
B B
5 5
A4.4 +AR1&/94.B5 +P10-94HL5:x1 LUZ VERDE BOTONEIRA PORTA INFERIOR A5.4 +AR1&/95.B5 +CX4-X40:10 EV DESATIVAR BATENTE PALETE PLATAFORMA (RESERVA)
6 6
A4.5 +AR1&/94.B6 +P10-94HL6:x1 LUZ AZUL BOTONEIRA PORTA INFERIOR A5.5 +AR1&/95.B6 +CXEV4-95YV6:1 EV ATIVAR CENTRADOR PALETE PLATAFORMA
7 7
A4.6 +AR1&/94.B6 +P10-94HL7:x1 LUZ BRANCA BOTONEIRA PORTA INFERIOR A5.6 +AR1&/95.B6 +CXEV4-95YV7:1 EV DESATIVAR CENTRADOR PALETE PLATAFORMA
8 8
A4.7 +AR1&/94.B7 +P20-94HL8:x1 LUZ AZUL BOTONEIRA DISPENSADOR PALETES A5.7 +AR1&/95.B7 +AR1-X4:16 LIVRE
C C
6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 + 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 +
BU15-P16+A0+2B BU15-P16+A0+2B
+AR1-65A13
+AR1&/65.B7
Rack 0
Slot 13
ET 200SP SIEMENS
DQ 8x24 VCC/0.5A ST
D 1 D
A6.0 +AR1&/96.B2 +AR1-X6-96K1:A1 COM ENTRADA PRODUTO: PALETIZADOR EM FUNCIONAMENTO
2
A6.1 +AR1&/96.B3 +AR1-X6-96K2:A1 COM ENTRADA PRODUTO: SINAL 2
3
A6.2 +AR1&/96.B3 +AR1-X6-96K3:A1 COM SAÍDA PALETE: PEDIDO ENTREGA
4
A6.3 +AR1&/96.B4 +AR1-X6-96K4:A1 SELEÇÃO PROGRAMA ENFARDAMENTO: BIT0
5
E E
6
7
A6.6 +AR1&/96.B6 +EX-47A1-XS:5 RESET BARREIRA SEGURANÇA DISPENSADOR
8
A6.7 +AR1&/96.B7 +EX-48A1-XS:5 RESET BARREIRA SEGURANÇA SAÍDA PALETES
6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 +
BU15-P16+A0+2B
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 6.1 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A
+CX1-68X40 WAGO A
+AR1&/68.C4
753-531
1
A10.0 DO1 +AR1&/200.B2 +EX-200YV1:1 EV SOPRADOR CORREIAS
5
A10.1 DO2 +AR1&/200.B2 LIVRE
2
0V +AR1&/200.B2
6
0V +AR1&/200.B3
3
0V +AR1&/200.B3
7
0V +AR1&/200.B4
B 4 B
A10.2 DO3 +AR1&/200.B3 LIVRE
8
A10.3 DO4 +AR1&/200.B4 LIVRE
+CX2-69X40 WAGO
+AR1&/69.C4
753-531
1
C A20.0 DO1 +AR1&/210.B2 +EX-210YV1:1 EV FECHAR GRAMPO ROTADOR C
5
A20.1 DO2 +AR1&/210.B2 +EX-210YV2:1 EV ABRIR GRAMPO ROTADOR
2
0V +AR1&/210.B2
6
0V +AR1&/210.B3
3
0V +AR1&/210.B3
7
0V +AR1&/210.B4
4
A20.2 DO3 +AR1&/210.B3 LIVRE
8
A20.3 DO4 +AR1&/210.B4 LIVRE
D D
+CX3-70X40 WAGO
+AR1&/70.C4
753-531
1
A40.0 DO1 +AR1&/220.B2 +EX-220YV1:1 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - SUBIR
5
A40.1 DO2 +AR1&/220.B2 +EX-220YV2:1 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DESCER
2
0V +AR1&/220.B2
E 6 E
0V +AR1&/220.B3
3
0V +AR1&/220.B3
7
0V +AR1&/220.B4
4
A40.2 DO3 +AR1&/220.B3 +EX-220YV3:1 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - VAZIO
8
A40.3 DO4 +AR1&/220.B4 RESERVA
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Diagrama de bornes F13_003_PAYPER

A A
Régua
Alvos externos Alvos internos
=20204510005100+AR1-X1
Designação do alvo Fiação Ponte Texto de Função Ponte Fiação Designação do alvo Posicionamento
1W1 +CLIENT-X:1 1 3F~ 380V 60Hz /TT 32 kW L1 -1Q1:2 /1.B1
1W1 +CLIENT-X:2 2 = L2 -1Q1:4 /1.B1
B B
1W1 +CLIENT-X:3 3 = L3 -1Q1:6 /1.B1
C C
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Plano de bornes =20204510005100+AR1-X1 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Régua
=20204510005100+AR1-X2
51WB1 1 +EX-51B1-A1 1 INTERRUPTOR SEGURANÇA ACESSO INFERIOR 1L+ -25QM1:21 /50.B5
-42KM1:.3 /51.B6
B B
-40KF5:A1 1L+ 1 BARREIRA SEGURANÇA DISPENSADOR PALETES +EX-47A1-XS:1 /47.B1
-49U1:A1 1L+ 1 BARREIRA SEGURANÇA SAÍDA PALETES +EX-48A1-XS:1 /48.B1
-49U1:A2 1L- 2 = 04709 +EX-48A1-XS:FE /48.B3
2 = 04703 +EX-48A1-XS:2 /48.B1
2 BARREIRA SEGURANÇA DISPENSADOR PALETES 04709 +EX-47A1-XS:FE /47.B3
-43K3:A2 1L- 2 = 04703 +EX-47A1-XS:2 /47.B1
C 51WB1 2 +EX-51B1-A2 2 INTERRUPTOR SEGURANÇA ACESSO INFERIOR 1L- -49U1:A2 /49.B2 C
1L- -63A1:X1:2 /63.E2
43WYV1 BU +EX-43YV1:x2 2 EV GERAL PALETIZADOR 1L- -42KM3:A2 /42.E7
2 EV GERAL VAZIOS (RESERVA) 1L- -43K3:A2 /43.E7
81W1 3 +AR2-XAR2:3 3 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA ARMÁRIO COMANDO (CH1) 04103 -40KF3:X3 /41.B4
81W1 4 +AR2-XAR2:4 4 = 04113 -40KF3:I3 /41.E4
D
81W1 5 +AR2-XAR2:5 5 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA ARMÁRIO COMANDO (CH2) 04104 -40KF3:X4 /41.B4
D
81W1 6 +AR2-XAR2:6 6 = 04114 -40KF3:I4 /41.E4
81W1 7 +AR2-XAR2:7 7 PULSADOR MARCHA CUADRO MANDOS 08108 -65A3:8 /81.E7
81W1 8 +AR2-XAR2:8 8 PULSADOR PARADA CUADRO MANDOS 08201 -65A4:1 /82.E2
81W1 9 +AR2-XAR2:9 9 PULSADOR PETICION ENTRADA SUPERIOR CUADRO MANDOS 08202 -65A4:2 /82.E3
81W1 10 +AR2-XAR2:10 10 SELECTOR HABILITAR ENTRADA SACOS 08203 -65A4:3 /82.E3
81W1 11 +AR2-XAR2:11 11 PILOTO VERDE ARMARIO MANDOS 09401 -65A11:1 /94.B2

E E
81W1 12 +AR2-XAR2:12 12 PILOTO ROJO ARMARIO MANDOS 09402 -65A11:2 /94.B3
81W1 13 +AR2-XAR2:13 13 PILOTO AZUL ARMARIO MANDOS 09403 -65A11:3 /94.B3
81W1 14 +AR2-XAR2:14 14 PILOTO BLANCO ARMARIO MANDOS 09404 -65A11:4 /94.B4
81W1 15 +AR2-XAR2:15 15 REARME QUADRO COMANDO 04316 -40KF5:I6 /43.E4
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Régua
=20204510005100+AR1-X2
81W1 16 +AR2-XAR2:16 17 PORTA ACESSO PRÉ-FORMA -49U1:11 /49.C1
81W1 17 +AR2-XAR2:17 04703 18 = -49U1:13 /49.C2
B B
81W1 18 +AR2-XAR2:18 04704 19 = -49U1:14 /49.C2
81W1 19 +AR2-XAR2:19 04705 20 = -49U1:12 /49.C2
84W1 3 +P10-42SB1:.1 21 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA INFERIOR (CH1) 04201 -40KF4:X1 /42.B2
84W1 4 +P10-42SB1:.2 22 = 04215 -40KF4:I5 /42.E4
84W1 5 +P10-42SB1:.1 23 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA INFERIOR (CH2) 04202 -40KF4:X2 /42.B2
84W1 6 +P10-42SB1:.2 24 = 04216 -40KF4:I6 /42.E4
C 84W1 9 +P10-43SB3:.2 25 REARME BOTONEIRA INFERIOR 04318 -40KF5:I8 /43.E5 C
84W1 7 +P10-84SB3:.2 08403 26 PULSADOR MARCHA BOTONERA PUERTA INFERIOR 08403 -65A6:3 /84.E3
84W1 8 +P10-84SB4:.2 08404 27 PULSADOR PETICIÓN ENTRADA PUERTA INFERIOR 08404 -65A6:4 /84.E4
84W1 10 +P10-94HL5:x1 28 PILOTO VERDE BOTONERA PUERTA INFERIOR 09405 -65A11:5 /94.B5
84W1 11 +P10-94HL6:x1 29 PILOTO AZUL BOTONERA PUERTA INFERIOR 09406 -65A11:6 /94.B6
84W1 12 +P10-94HL7:x1 30 PILOTO BLANCO BOTONERA PUERTA INFERIOR 09407 -65A11:7 /94.B6
D
31 LIVRE 04224 -40KF4:Q4 /42.B7
D
43W2 1 +P20-43SB1:.1 32 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA DISPENSADOR PALETES
43W2 2 +P20-43SB1:.2 33 = 04315 -40KF5:I5 /43.E4
43W2 3 +P20-43SB2:.1 34 REARME DISPENSADOR PALETES 2L+ -X4B:4:+ /23.E8
2L+ -X6:1 /81.C4
43W2 4 +P20-43SB2:.2 35 REARME DISPENSADOR PALETES 04317 -40KF5:I7 /43.E5
43W2 5 +P20-94HL8:x1 36 PILOTO AZUL BOTONERA DISPENSADOR PALETS 09408 -65A11:8 /94.B7
E E
300W1 9 +CX100-XCin:9 10 37 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS (CH1) 04105 -40KF3:X5 /41.B5
300W1 11 +CX100-XCin:11 38 = 04115 -40KF3:I5 /41.E5
300W1 10 +CX100-XCin:10 11 39 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS (CH2) 04106 -40KF3:X6 /41.B5
300W1 12 +CX100-XCin:12 11 40 = 04116 -40KF3:I6 /41.E5
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Régua
=20204510005100+AR1-X2
41 LIVRE
42 = 04218 -40KF4:I8 /42.E5
B B
43W1 BK +CLIENT-43K1:21 43 SEGURANÇA EXTERNA CLIENTE (CH1) 04301 -42KM1:.1 /43.C2
43W1 BN +CLIENT-43K1:22 44 = 04313 -40KF5:I3 /43.E3
43W1 GY +CLIENT-43K2:21 45 SEGURANÇA EXTERNA CLIENTE (CH2) 04302 -42KM3:.1 /43.C2
43W1 GNYE +CLIENT-43K2:22 46 = 04314 -40KF5:I4 /43.E3
43WYV1 BN +EX-43YV1:x1 47 EV GERAL PALETIZADOR 04321 -40KF5:Q1 /43.B6
48 EV GERAL VAZIOS (RESERVA) 04322 -40KF5:Q2 /43.B6
C -40KF3:I7 04117 49 BARREIRA SEGURANÇA DISPENSADOR PALETES 04704 +EX-47A1-XS:3 /47.B2 C
-40KF3:I8 04118 50 = 04705 +EX-47A1-XS:4 /47.B2
-65A13:7 09607 51 = 04706 +EX-47A1-XS:5 /47.B2
-65A6:6 08406 52 = 04707 +EX-47A1-XS:7 /47.B2
-40KF4:I1 04211 53 BARREIRA SEGURANÇA SAÍDA PALETES 04704 +EX-48A1-XS:3 /48.B2
-40KF4:I2 04212 54 = 04705 +EX-48A1-XS:4 /48.B2
D
-65A13:8 09608 55 = 04706 +EX-48A1-XS:5 /48.B2
D
-65A6:7 08407 56 = 04707 +EX-48A1-XS:7 /48.B2
51WB1 3 +EX-51B1-IN 57 INTERRUPTOR SEGURANÇA ACESSO INFERIOR 09503 -65A12:3 /95.B3
51WB1 8 +EX-51B1:52 58 INTERRUPTOR PUERTA INFERIOR. PUERTA CERRADA 08405 -65A6:5 /84.E5
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Régua
=20204510005100+AR1-X3
1
11WM1 1 +EX-11M1:U1 11U1 1 TAPETE AGRUPAMENTO 11U1 -11KM1:2 /11.C2
2
11WM1 2 +EX-11M1:V1 11V1 1 = 11V1 -11KM1:4 /11.C2
B 3 B
11WM1 3 +EX-11M1:W1 11W1 1 = 11W1 -11KM1:6 /11.C2
4
11WM1 GNYE +EX-11M1:T1 1 = -PE /11.D2
1
11WM1 4 +EX-11RF1:4 2 = 01104 -11KM1:14 /11.C3
2
11WM1 5 +EX-11RF1:5 2 = 01105 -11KM1:13 /11.C3
3
2 =
4
2 =
1
C 14WM1 BK +EX-14M1:U1 14U1 3 ELEVAÇÃO PÁ IMPULSOR 14U1 -14KM1:2 /14.C2 C
2
14WM1 BN +EX-14M1:V1 14V1 3 = 14V1 -14KM1:4 /14.C2
3
14WM1 GY +EX-14M1:W1 14W1 3 = 14W1 -14KM1:6 /14.C2
4
14WM1 GNYE PE +EX-14M1:T1 3 = -PE /14.D2
1
14WM1 1 +EX-14RF1:4 4 = 01404 -14KM1:14 /14.C3
2
14WM1 2 +EX-14RF1:5 4 = 01405 -14KM1:13 /14.C3
3
D
4 =
D
4
4 =
1
16WM1 1 +EX-16M1:U1 16U1 5 COMPRESSOR LATERAL 1 16U1 -16KM1A:2 /16.C2
2
16WM1 2 +EX-16M1:V1 16V1 5 = 16V1 -16KM1A:4 /16.C2
3
16WM1 3 +EX-16M1:W1 16W1 5 = 16W1 -16KM1A:6 /16.C2
4
16WM1 GNYE +EX-16M1 5 = -PE /16.D2
1
16WM1 4 +EX-16RF1:4 6 = 01605 -16KM1B:14 /16.C3
E E
2
16WM1 5 +EX-16RF1:5 6 = 01604 -16KM1B:13 /16.C3
3
6 =
4
6 =
1
17WM1 1 +EX-17M1:U1 17U1 7 COMPRESSOR LATERAL 2 17U1 -17KM1A:2 /17.C2
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Régua
=20204510005100+AR1-X3
2
17WM1 2 +EX-17M1:V1 17V1 7 COMPRESSOR LATERAL 2 17V1 -17KM1A:4 /17.C2
3
17WM1 3 +EX-17M1:W1 17W1 7 = 17W1 -17KM1A:6 /17.C2
B 4 B
17WM1 GNYE +EX-17M1 7 = -PE /17.D2
1
17WM1 4 +EX-17RF1:4 8 = 01705 -17KM1B:14 /17.C3
2
17WM1 5 +EX-17RF1:5 8 = 01704 -17KM1B:13 /17.C3
3
8 =
4
8 =
1
18WM1 1 +EX-18M1:U1 18U1 9 COMPRESSOR FRONTAL 18U1 -18KM1A:2 /18.C2
2
C 18WM1 2 +EX-18M1:V1 18V1 9 = 18V1 -18KM1A:4 /18.C2 C
3
18WM1 3 +EX-18M1:W1 18W1 9 = 18W1 -18KM1A:6 /18.C2
4
18WM1 GNYE +EX-18M1 9 = -PE /18.D2
1
18WM1 4 +EX-18RF1:4 10 = 01805 -18KM1B:14 /18.C3
2
18WM1 5 +EX-18RF1:5 10 = 01804 -18KM1B:13 /18.C3
3
10 =
4
D
10 =
D
1
19W1 BN +EX-19RF1:2 11 RETIFICADOR FREIO COMPORTA 01908 -19KM1:2 /19.C2
2
19W1 GY +EX-19RF1:3 11 = 01909 -19KM1:4 /19.C2
1
19W1 BK +EX-19RF1:4 12 = 01910 -19KM1:6 /19.C2
2
19W1 GNYE +EX-19RF1:5 12 = 01907 -19KM1:5 /19.C2
1
21W2 BN +EX-21RF1:2 13 RETIFICADOR FREIO ELEVADOR PALETE 02110 -21KM1:2 /21.C2
2
21W2 GY +EX-21RF1:3 13 = 02111 -21KM1:4 /21.C2
E E
1
21W2 BK +EX-21RF1:4 14 = 02112 -21KM1:6 /21.C2
2
21W2 GNYE +EX-21RF1:5 14 = 02109 -21KM1:5 /21.C2
1
25WM1 1 +EX-25M1:U1 25U1 15 TAPETE ROTADOR 25U1 -25KM1:2 /25.C2
2
25WM1 2 +EX-25M1:V1 25V1 15 = 25V1 -25KM1:4 /25.C2
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Régua
=20204510005100+AR1-X3
3
25WM1 3 +EX-25M1:W1 25W1 15 TAPETE ROTADOR 25W1 -25KM1:6 /25.C2
4
25WM1 GNYE +EX-25M1:T1 15 = -PE /25.D2
B 1 B
25WM1 4 +EX-25RF1:4 16 = 02504 -25KM1:14 /25.C3
2
25WM1 5 +EX-25RF1:5 16 = 02505 -25KM1:13 /25.C3
3
16 =
4
16 =
1
26WM1 1 +EX-26M1:U1 26U1 17 ALISADOR TAPETE INFERIOR 26U1 -26KM1:2 /26.C2
2
26WM1 2 +EX-26M1:V1 26V1 17 = 26V1 -26KM1:4 /26.C2
3
C 26WM1 3 +EX-26M1:W1 26W1 17 = 26W1 -26KM1:6 /26.C2 C
4
26WM1 GNYE +EX-26M1 17 = -PE /26.D2
1
26WM1 4 +EX-26RF1:4 18 = 02610 -26KM1:14 /26.C3
2
26WM1 5 +EX-26RF1:5 18 = 02611 -26KM1:13 /26.C3
3
18 =
4
18 =
1
D
26WM2 BK +EX-26M2:U1 26U2 19 ALISADOR TAPETE SUPERIOR 26U2 -26KM2:2 /26.C5
D
1
26WM3 BK +EX-26M3:U1 26U3 20 REGULAÇÃO ALISADOR 26U3 -26KM3A:2 /26.C7
2
26WM2 BN +EX-26M2:V1 26V2 19 ALISADOR TAPETE SUPERIOR 26V2 -26KM2:4 /26.C5
2
26WM3 BN +EX-26M3:V1 26V3 20 REGULAÇÃO ALISADOR 26V3 -26KM3A:4 /26.C7
3
26WM2 GY +EX-26M2:W1 26W2 19 ALISADOR TAPETE SUPERIOR 26W2 -26KM2:6 /26.C5
3
26WM3 GY +EX-26M3:W1 26W3 20 REGULAÇÃO ALISADOR 26W3 -26KM3A:6 /26.C7
4
26WM2 GNYE +EX-26M2 19 ALISADOR TAPETE SUPERIOR -PE /26.D5
E E
4
26WM3 GNYE +EX-26M3 20 REGULAÇÃO ALISADOR -PE /26.D7
1
27WM1 1 +EX-27M1:U1 27U1 21 ELEVAÇÃO DISPENSADOR DE PALETES 27U1 -27KM1A:2 /27.C1
2
27WM1 2 +EX-27M1:V1 27V1 21 = 27V1 -27KM1A:4 /27.C2
3
27WM1 3 +EX-27M1:W1 27W1 21 = 27W1 -27KM1A:6 /27.C2
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Régua
=20204510005100+AR1-X3
4
27WM1 GNYE +EX-27M1 21 ELEVAÇÃO DISPENSADOR DE PALETES -PE /27.D2
1
27WM1 4 +EX-27RF1:4 22 = 02711 -27KM1B:14 /27.C3
B 2 B
27WM1 5 +EX-27RF1:5 22 = 02710 -27KM1B:13 /27.C3
3
22 =
4
22 =
1
27WM2 BK +EX-27M2:U2 27U2 23 FORQUILHAS DISPENSADOR 27U2 -27KM2A:2 /27.C3
2
27WM2 BN +EX-27M2:V2 27V2 23 = 27V2 -27KM2A:4 /27.C4
3
27WM2 GY +EX-27M2:W2 27W2 23 = 27W2 -27KM2A:6 /27.C4
4
C 27WM2 GNYE +EX-27M2 23 = -PE /27.D4 C
1
27W3 BN +EX-27RF3:2 24 RETIFICADOR FREIO ROLOS DISPENSADOR 02710 -27KM4:2 /27.b.C2
2
27W3 GY +EX-27RF3:3 24 = 02711 -27KM4:4 /27.b.C2
1
28WM1 1 +EX-28M1:U1 28U1 25 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS 28U1 -28KM1A:2 /28.C1
2
28WM1 2 +EX-28M1:V1 28V1 25 = 28V1 -28KM1A:4 /28.C2
3
28WM1 3 +EX-28M1:W1 28W1 25 = 28W1 -28KM1A:6 /28.C2
4
D
28WM1 GNYE +EX-28M1 25 = -PE /28.D2
D
1
28WM1 4 +EX-28RF1:4 26 = 02805 -28KM1B:14 /28.C3
2
28WM1 5 +EX-28RF1:5 26 = 02804 -28KM1B:13 /28.C3
3
26 =
4
26 =
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 4.c 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Régua
=20204510005100+AR1-X4
83W1 3 +CX4-X40:3 3 FOT PALET PLATAFORMA ELEVACIÓN 08301 -65A5:1 /83.E1
83W1 4 +CX4-X40:4 4 DET CENTRADOR PALET DESACTIVADO 08302 -65A5:2 /83.E2
B B
83W1 5 +CX4-X40:5 5 DET TOPE FRONTAL PALET ACTIVADO (RESERVA) 08303 -65A5:3 /83.E3
83W1 6 +CX4-X40:6 6 DET TOPE FRONTAL PALET DESACTIVADO (RESERVA) 08304 -65A5:4 /83.E4
83W1 7 +CX4-X40:7 7 DETS GATILLOS SEGURIDAD PLATAFORMA (SERIE 1) 08305 -65A5:5 /83.E5
83W1 8 +CX4-X40:8 8 DETS GATILLOS SEGURIDAD PLATAFORMA (SERIE 2) 08306 -65A5:6 /83.E7
83W1 9 +CX4-X40:9 9 EV ACTIVAR TOPE PALET PLATAFORMA (RESERVA) 09504 -65A12:4 /95.B4
83W1 10 +CX4-X40:10 10 EV DESACTIVAR TOPE PALET PLATAFORMA (RESERVA) 09505 -65A12:5 /95.B5
C 83W1 11 +CX4-X40:11 11 EV ACTIVAR CENTRADOR PALET PLATAFORMA 09506 -65A12:6 /95.B6 C
83W1 12 +CX4-X40:12 12 EV DESACTIVAR CENTRADOR PALET PLATAFORMA 09507 -65A12:7 /95.B6
13 LIBRE 08208 -65A4:8 /82.E7
14 = 08408 -65A6:8 /84.E7
15 BLOQUEO PUERTA ACCESO SUPERIOR (RESERVA) 09502 -65A12:2 /95.B3
16 LIBRE 09508 -65A12:8 /95.B7
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Régua
=20204510005100+AR1-X4B
1
12WB1 WH +EX-12B1:2 1 IMPULSOR 01216 -12GF1.3:11 /13.B8
2
12WB1 BN +EX-12B1:1 1 = 2L+ -X5:3 /3.C3
B 3 B
12WB1 BU +EX-12B1:3 1 DET IMPULSOR POS MÁXIMA
1
12WB2 WH +EX-12B2:2 2 = 01217 -12GF1.3:10 /13.B8
2
12WB2 BN +EX-12B2:1 2 =
3
12WB2 BU +EX-12B2:3 2 DET IMPULSOR POS MÍNIMA
1
23W1 3 +CX23-X230:3 3 ROTADOR 02311 -23GF1.3:10 /24.B8
2
23W1 1 +CX23-X230:1 3 =
3
C 23W1 2 +CX23-X230:2 3 DET ROTADOR POS MÁXIMA C
1
23W1 4 +CX23-X230:4 4 = 02312 -23GF1.3:11 /24.B8
2
4 = 2L+ -X2:34 /43.B5
3
4 DET ROTADOR POS MÍNIMA
1
80WB1 BK +EX-80B1:4 5 PRESION AIRE OK 08001 -65A2:1 /80.E2
2
80WB1 BN +EX-80B1:1 5 = 2L+ -X6:1 /81.C4
3
D
80WB1 BU +EX-80B1:3 5 = 2L- -X6:2 /81.C3
D
1
82WB4 BK +EX-82B4:4 6 DET ALTURA RALENTIZAR DESCENSO ELEVADOR 08204 -65A4:4 /82.E4
2
82WB4 BN +EX-82B4:1 6 = 2L+ -X5:3 /83.C1
3
82WB4 BU +EX-82B4:3 6 = 2L- -X5:4 /83.C2
1
82WB5 WH +EX-82B5:2 7 DET ALTURA MÍNIMA ELEVADOR 08205 -65A4:5 /82.E5
2
82WB5 BN +EX-82B5:1 7 = 2L+ -X5:3 /83.C1
3
82WB5 BU +EX-82B5:3 7 = 2L- -X5:4 /83.C2
E E
1
8 LIBRE 08206 -65A4:6 /82.E6
2
8 = 2L+ -X5:3 /83.C1
3
8 = 2L- -X5:4 /83.C2
1
9 = 08207 -65A4:7 /82.E6
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Plano de bornes =20204510005100+AR1-X4B Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Régua
=20204510005100+AR1-X4B
2
9 LIBRE 2L+ -X5:3 /83.C1
3
9 = 2L- -X5:4 /83.C2
B 1 B
83WB7.1 BK +EX-83B7.1:4 10 FOTS GÁLIBO PLATAFORMA ELEVACIÓN 08307 -65A5:7 /83a.E2
2
83WB7.1 BN +EX-83B7.1:1 10 = 2L+ -X5:3 /84.C4
3
83WB7.1 BU +EX-83B7.1:3 10 = 2L- -X5:4 /84.C4
1
83WB7.2 BK +EX-83B7.2:4 11 = 08307 -65A5:7 /83a.E2
2
83WB7.2 BN +EX-83B7.2:1 11 = 2L+ -X5:3 /84.C4
3
83WB7.2 BU +EX-83B7.2:3 11 = 2L- -X5:4 /84.C4
1
C 83WB8 BK +EX-83B8:4 12 FOT TRAMO 1 SALIDA PALETS 08308 -65A5:8 /83a.E4 C
2
83WB8 BN +EX-83B8:1 12 = 2L+ -X5:3 /84.C4
3
83WB8 BU +EX-83B8:3 12 = 2L- -X5:4 /84.C4
1
13 FOT TRAMO 2 SALIDA PALETS (RESERVA) 08401 -65A6:1 /84.E2
2
13 = 2L+ -X5:3 /84.C4
3
13 = 2L- -X5:4 /84.C4
1
D
14 FOT TRAMO 3 SALIDA PALETS (RESERVA) 08402 -65A6:2 /84.E3
D
2
14 = 2L+ -X5:3 /84.C4
3
14 = 2L- -X5:4 /84.C4
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Plano de bornes =20204510005100+AR1-X4B Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Régua
=20204510005100+AR1-X5
3W1 BN +CX1-68X1:1 3 DISTRIBUIÇÃO 24VCC 2L+ -1F5:2 /1.D7
3W2 BN +CX2-69X1:1 3 =
B B
3W3 BN +CX3-70X1:1 3 = 2L+ -X4B:1:+ /12.E7
81W1 1 +AR2-XAR2:1 3 PULSADOR MARCHA CUADRO MANDOS 2L+ -X6:11 /81.C7
83W1 1 +CX4-X40:1 3 FOT PALET PLATAFORMA ELEVACIÓN 2L+ -X4B:6:+ /82.C4
2L+ -X4B:7:+ /82.C5
2L+ -X4B:8:+ /82.C6
2L+ -X4B:9:+ /82.C7
C 84W1 1 +P10-84SB3:.1 2L+ 3 PULSADOR MARCHA BOTONERA PUERTA INFERIOR 2L+ -X4B:10:+ /83a.C2 C
2L+ -X4B:13:+ /84.C2
2L+ -X4B:11:+ /83a.C3
2L+ -X4B:14:+ /84.C3
2L+ -X4B:12:+ /83a.C4
81W1 2 +AR2-XAR2:2 4 PULSADOR MARCHA CUADRO MANDOS 2L- -X6:2 /81.C3
D
83W1 2 +CX4-X40:2 4 FOT PALET PLATAFORMA ELEVACIÓN 2L- -X4B:6:- /82.C4
D
2L- -X4B:7:- /82.C5
2L- -X4B:8:- /82.C6
2L- -X4B:9:- /82.C7
84W1 2 +P10-94HL5:x2 4 PULSADOR MARCHA BOTONERA PUERTA INFERIOR 2L- -X4B:10:- /83a.C2
2L- -X4B:13:- /84.C2
2L- -X4B:11:- /83a.C3

E E
2L- -X4B:14:- /84.C3
2L- -X4B:12:- /83a.C4
43W2 6 +P20-94HL8:x2 4 PILOTO AZUL BOTONERA DISPENSADOR PALETS
3W1 BU +CX1-68X1:5 4 DISTRIBUIÇÃO 24VCC 2L- -1G1 /1.C6
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Régua
=20204510005100+AR1-X5
3W2 BU +CX2-69X1:5 4 DISTRIBUIÇÃO 24VCC
3W3 BU +CX3-70X1:5 4 = 2L- -X6:2 /81.C3
B B
3W1 GNYE +CX1-PE PE = -PE /3.B2
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Régua
=20204510005100+AR1-X6
300W1 1 +CX100-XCin:1 1 COM ENTRADA PRODUCTO: RSVA 2L+ -X2:34 /43.B5
2L+ -X4B:5:+ /80.C2
B B
300W1 2 +CX100-XCin:2 2 COM ENTRADA PRODUCTO: EN MARCHA 2L- -X5:4 /3.C4
2L- -X4B:5:- /80.C2
2L- -X5:4 /81.C8
300W1 3 +CX100-XCin:3 3 COM ENTRADA PRODUCTO: EN MARCHA 08102 -65A3:2 /81.E3
300W1 4 +CX100-XCin:4 4 COM ENTRADA PRODUCTO: RSVA 08103 -65A3:3 /81.E3
C 6 COM ENTRADA PRODUTO: PALETIZADOR EM FUNCIONAMENTO C
7 COM ENTRADA PRODUTO: SINAL 2
8 COM SAÍDA PALETE: PEDIDO ENTREGA
9 SELEÇÃO PROGRAMA ENFARDAMENTO BIT0
10 SELEÇÃO PROGRAMA ENFARDAMENTO BIT1
300W3 1 +EX3-KA6:13 11 COM SALIDA PALETS: PALET RECIBIDO 2L+ -X5:3 /81.C7
D
300W3 2 +EX3-KA5:14 12 COM SALIDA PALETS: PERMISO ENTREGA 08106 -65A3:6 /81.E6
D
300W3 3 +EX3-KA6:14 13 COM SALIDA PALETS: PALET RECIBIDO 08107 -65A3:7 /81.E6
14 RELÉ SEGURANÇA EXTERNA 1 -43K3:13 /43.E7
15 = -43K3:14 /43.E7
16 = -43K3:23 /43.E7
17 RELÉ SEGURANÇA EXTERNA 2 -43K3:24 /43.E7
300W2 1 +EX2-KA4:13 18 COM ENTRADA PALETS: ENTREGA EN CURSO (RSVA)

E E
300W2 2 +EX2-KA3:14 19 COM ENTRADA PALETS: PETICIÓN ENTREGA (RSVA) 08104 -65A3:4 /81.E4
300W2 3 +EX2-KA4:14 20 COM ENTRADA PALETS: ENTREGA EN CURSO (RSVA) 08105 -65A3:5 /81.E5
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Régua
=20204510005100+AR1-X12
1
12WM1 1 +EX-12RF1:2 1 RETIFICADOR FREIO IMPULSOR 01211 -12KM1:2 /12.C1
1
12WM1 2 +EX-12RF1:3 2 = 01212 -12KM1:4 /12.C1
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Régua
=20204510005100+AR1-X23
23WM1 4 1 FREIO ROTADOR 02301 -23U1:T1 /23.D1
23WM1 5 2 = 02302 -23U1:T2 /23.D1
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 10 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Régua
=20204510005100+AR2-XAR2
-PWR:+ 1 PAINEL PC 2L+ -81SB8:.1 +AR1/81.A7
1 REARME QUADRO COMANDO -43SB1:.1 +AR1/43.C4
B B
81W1 -81SB8:.1 2L+ 1 PULSADOR MARCHA CUADRO MANDOS +AR1-X5:3 +AR1/81.C7
-PWR:- 2 PAINEL PC 2L- -94HL4:x2 +AR1/94.D4
-94HL1:x2 2 PULSADOR MARCHA CUADRO MANDOS +AR1-X5:4 +AR1/81.C8
-41SB2:.1 3 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA ARMÁRIO COMANDO (CH1) +AR1-X2:3 +AR1/41.B4
-41SB2:.2 4 = +AR1-X2:4 +AR1/41.D4
-41SB2:.1 5 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA ARMÁRIO COMANDO (CH2) +AR1-X2:5 +AR1/41.B4
C -41SB2:.2 6 = +AR1-X2:6 +AR1/41.D4 C
-81SB8:.2 7 PULSADOR MARCHA CUADRO MANDOS +AR1-X2:7 +AR1/81.C7
-82SB1:.2 8 PULSADOR PARADA CUADRO MANDOS +AR1-X2:8 +AR1/82.C2
-82SB2:.2 9 PULSADOR PETICION ENTRADA SUPERIOR CUADRO MANDOS +AR1-X2:9 +AR1/82.C3
-82SB3:.2 10 SELECTOR HABILITAR ENTRADA SACOS +AR1-X2:10 +AR1/82.C3
-94HL1:x1 11 PILOTO VERDE ARMARIO MANDOS +AR1-X2:11 +AR1/94.C2
D
-94HL2:x1 12 PILOTO ROJO ARMARIO MANDOS +AR1-X2:12 +AR1/94.C3
D
-94HL3:x1 13 PILOTO AZUL ARMARIO MANDOS +AR1-X2:13 +AR1/94.C3
-94HL4:x1 14 PILOTO BLANCO ARMARIO MANDOS +AR1-X2:14 +AR1/94.C4
-43SB1:.2 15 REARME QUADRO COMANDO +AR1-X2:15 +AR1/43.D4
81W1 16 +AR1-X2:17 16 PORTA ACESSO PRÉ-FORMA 04910 +EX-49B1:1 +AR1/49.E1
81W1 18 +AR1-X2:19 04704 18 = 04912 +EX-49B1:4 +AR1/49.E2
81W1 17 +AR1-X2:18 04703 17 = 04911 +EX-49B1:3 +AR1/49.E2

E E
81W1 19 +AR1-X2:20 04705 19 = 04913 +EX-49B1:2 +AR1/49.E1
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Plano de bornes =20204510005100+AR2-XAR2 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 11 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Régua
=20204510005100+CX4-X40
83WB1 BN +EX-83B1:1 1 FOT PALET PLATAFORMA ELEVACIÓN +AR1-X5:3 +AR1/83.C1
83WB2 BN +EX-83B2:1 1 DET CENTRADOR PALET DESACTIVADO
B B
83WB3 BN +EX-83B3:1 1 DET TOPE FRONTAL PALET ACTIVADO (RESERVA)
83WB4 BN +EX-83B4:1 1 DET TOPE FRONTAL PALET DESACTIVADO (RESERVA)
83WB5.2 BN +EX-83B5.2:1 1 DETS GATILLOS SEGURIDAD PLATAFORMA (SERIE 1)
83WB6.2 BN +EX-83B6.2:1 1 DETS GATILLOS SEGURIDAD PLATAFORMA (SERIE 2)
83WB1 BU +EX-83B1:3 2 FOT PALET PLATAFORMA ELEVACIÓN +AR1-X5:4 +AR1/83.C2
83WB2 BU +EX-83B2:3 2 DET CENTRADOR PALET DESACTIVADO
C 83WB3 BU +EX-83B3:3 2 DET TOPE FRONTAL PALET ACTIVADO (RESERVA) C
83WB4 BU +EX-83B4:3 2 DET TOPE FRONTAL PALET DESACTIVADO (RESERVA)
83WB5.1 BU +EX-83B5.1:3 2 DETS GATILLOS SEGURIDAD PLATAFORMA (SERIE 1)
83WB5.2 BU +EX-83B5.2:3 2 =
83WB6.1 BU +EX-83B6.1:3 2 DETS GATILLOS SEGURIDAD PLATAFORMA (SERIE 2)
83WB6.2 BU +EX-83B6.2:3 2 =
D
2 EV ACTIVAR TOPE PALET PLATAFORMA (RESERVA)
D
2 EV DESACTIVAR TOPE PALET PLATAFORMA (RESERVA)
2 EV ACTIVAR CENTRADOR PALET PLATAFORMA +CXEV4-95YV6:3 +AR1/95.D6
2 EV DESACTIVAR CENTRADOR PALET PLATAFORMA +CXEV4-95YV7:3 +AR1/95.D6
83WB1 BK +EX-83B1:4 3 FOT PALET PLATAFORMA ELEVACIÓN +AR1-X4:3 +AR1/83.C1
83WB2 BK +EX-83B2:4 4 DET CENTRADOR PALET DESACTIVADO +AR1-X4:4 +AR1/83.C2
83WB3 BK +EX-83B3:4 5 DET TOPE FRONTAL PALET ACTIVADO (RESERVA) +AR1-X4:5 +AR1/83.C3
E E
83WB4 BK +EX-83B4:4 6 DET TOPE FRONTAL PALET DESACTIVADO (RESERVA) +AR1-X4:6 +AR1/83.C4
83WB5.1 BK +EX-83B5.1:4 7 DETS GATILLOS SEGURIDAD PLATAFORMA (SERIE 1) +AR1-X4:7 +AR1/83.C5
83WB6.1 BK +EX-83B6.1:4 8 DETS GATILLOS SEGURIDAD PLATAFORMA (SERIE 2) +AR1-X4:8 +AR1/83.C7
83W1 9 +AR1-X4:9 9 EV ACTIVAR TOPE PALET PLATAFORMA (RESERVA)
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Plano de bornes =20204510005100+CX4-X40 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 12 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Régua
=20204510005100+CX4-X40
83W1 10 +AR1-X4:10 10 EV DESACTIVAR TOPE PALET PLATAFORMA (RESERVA)
83W1 11 +AR1-X4:11 11 EV ACTIVAR CENTRADOR PALET PLATAFORMA +CXEV4-95YV6:1 +AR1/95.D6
B B
83W1 12 +AR1-X4:12 12 EV DESACTIVAR CENTRADOR PALET PLATAFORMA +CXEV4-95YV7:1 +AR1/95.D6
83WB5.1 BN +EX-83B5.1:1 50 DETS GATILLOS SEGURIDAD PLATAFORMA (SERIE 1) 08350 +EX-83B5.2:4 +AR1/83.A6
83WB6.1 BN +EX-83B6.1:1 51 DETS GATILLOS SEGURIDAD PLATAFORMA (SERIE 2) 08360 +EX-83B6.2:4 +AR1/83.A8
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 12.a 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Régua
=20204510005100+CX10-X100
102WB5.1 BU +EX-102B5.1:3 1 DET COMPORTA FECHADA
102WB5.2 BN +EX-102B5.2:1 1 FOT NÍVEL BAIXO COMPORTA +CX1-68X18:2 +AR1/102.E6
B B
102WB5.1 BN +EX-102B5.1:1 2 DET COMPORTA FECHADA
102WB5.2 BU +EX-102B5.2:3 2 FOT NÍVEL BAIXO COMPORTA +CX1-68X18:3 +AR1/102.E7
2 EV SOPRADOR CORREIAS +EX-200YV1:3 +AR1/200.D2
102WB5.2 BK +EX-102B5.2:4 3 FOT NÍVEL BAIXO COMPORTA 10205 +CX1-68X18:1 +AR1/102.E6
200WYV1 4 +CX1-68X40:1 20001 4 EV SOPRADOR CORREIAS +EX-200YV1:1 +AR1/200.D2
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 13 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Régua
=20204510005100+CX100-XCin
81WB2 BU +EX1-81B2:3 1 COM ENTRADA PRODUCTO: EN MARCHA
81WB1 BU +EX1-81B1:3
B B
+EX1-KA2:13 2L+ 1 COM ENTRADA PRODUCTO: RSVA +AR1-X6:1 +AR1/81.C4
81WB2 BN +EX1-81B2:1 2 COM ENTRADA PRODUCTO: EN MARCHA +AR1-X6:2 +AR1/81.C3
81WB1 BN +EX1-81B1:1
81WB2 BK +EX1-81B2:4 3 COM ENTRADA PRODUCTO: EN MARCHA +AR1-X6:3 +AR1/81.C3
+EX1-KA2:14 4 COM ENTRADA PRODUCTO: RSVA +AR1-X6:4 +AR1/81.C3
5 30001 +AR1-X6 +AR1/300.D1
C 6 COM ENTRADA PRODUTO: PALETIZADOR EM FUNCIONAMENTO 30002 +AR1-X6 +AR1/300.D2 C
7 = 30003 +AR1-X6 +AR1/300.D2
8 COM ENTRADA PRODUTO: SINAL 2 30004 +AR1-X6 +AR1/300.D3
300W1 9 +AR1-X2:37 10 9 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS (CH1) +P30-41SB3:.1 +AR1/41.C5
300W1 10 +AR1-X2:39 11 10 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS (CH2) +P30-41SB3:.1 +AR1/41.C5
41W1 3 +P30-41SB3:.2 11 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS (CH1) +AR1-X2:38 +AR1/41.D5
D
41W1 4 +P30-41SB3:.2 12 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS (CH2) 11 +AR1-X2:40 +AR1/41.D5
D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Plano de bornes =20204510005100+CX100-XCin Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 16 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Régua
=20204510005100+CX23-X230
23W1 1 +AR1-X4B:3:+ 1 ROTADOR +EX-23B1 +AR1/23.C7
1 DET ROTADOR POS MÁXIMA +EX-23B2 +AR1/23.C8
B B
23W1 2 +AR1-X4B:3:- 2 =
2 DET ROTADOR POS MÍNIMA
23W1 3 +AR1-X4B:3 3 ROTADOR +EX-23B1 +AR1/23.C7
23W1 4 +AR1-X4B:4 4 DET ROTADOR POS MÁXIMA +EX-23B2 +AR1/23.C8
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 17 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Régua
=20204510005100+CX30-X300
1
122WB1 BK +EX-122B1:4 1 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET POSIÇÃO ARMAZÉM 12201 +CX3-70X14:1 +AR1/122.E2
2
122WB1 BN +EX-122B1:1 1 = +CX3-70X14:2 +AR1/122.E2
B 3 B
122WB1 BU +EX-122B1:3 1 = +CX3-70X14:3 +AR1/122.E2
1
122WB2 BK +EX-122B2:4 2 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET POSIÇÃO PALETE 12202 +CX3-70X14:5 +AR1/122.E2
2
122WB2 BN +EX-122B2:1 2 =
3
122WB2 BU +EX-122B2:3 2 =
1
122W2 3 +CX31-X310:3 3 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET ACIMA 12203 +CX3-70X15:1 +AR1/122.E4
2
122W2 1 +CX31-X310:1 3 =
3
C 122W2 2 +CX31-X310:2 3 = C
1
122W2 4 +CX31-X310:4 4 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET ABAIXO 12204 +CX3-70X15:5 +AR1/122.E5
2
4 =
3
4 =
1
122W2 5 +CX31-X310:5 5 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - FOLHA OK 12205 +CX3-70X16:1 +AR1/122.E6
2
5 =
3
D
5 =
D
1
122WB6 BK +EX-122B6:4 6 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - HÁ FOLHAS 12206 +CX3-70X16:5 +AR1/122.E7
2
122WB6 BN +EX-122B6:1 6 =
3
122WB6 BU +EX-122B6:3 6 =
1
122W2 6 +CX31-X310:6 7 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET PISON 12301 +CX3-70X17:1 +AR1/123.E2
2
7 =
3
7 =
E E
1
220WYV1 BN +EX-220YV1:1 8 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - SUBIR 22001 +CX3-70X40:1 +AR1/220.B2
2
8 =
3
220WYV1 BU +EX-220YV1:3 8 =
1
220WYV2 BN +EX-220YV2:1 9 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DESCER 22002 +CX3-70X40:5 +AR1/220.B2
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Régua
=20204510005100+CX30-X300
2
9 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DESCER
3
220WYV2 BU +EX-220YV2:3 9 =
B 1 B
220WYV3 BN +EX-220YV3:1 10 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - VAZIO 22003 +CX3-70X40:4 +AR1/220.B3
2
10 =
3
220WYV3 BU +EX-220YV3:3 10 =
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 18.a 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Régua
=20204510005100+EX3-X
300W3 4 +AR1-X6 30011 COM ENTRADA PRODUTO: SINAL 2
300W3 5 +AR1-X6 30013 COM SAÍDA PALETE: PEDIDO ENTREGA
B B
300W3 6 +AR1-X6 30015 SELEÇÃO PROGRAMA ENFARDAMENTO BIT0
300W3 8 +AR1-X6 30012 COM SAÍDA PALETE: PEDIDO ENTREGA
C C
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Plano de bornes =20204510005100+EX3-X Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 19 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Diagrama de interconexão F09_003_PAYPER

A A
Nº de condutores Tipo de cabo Secção transversal Texto de Função
3G 1 mm² ALIM. CAIXA C1
Comprimento
B
3W1 B
Texto de Função Referência cruzada Designação do alvo de Designação do alvo conformeReferência cruzada Texto de Função
DISTRIBUIÇÃO 24VCC /3.C2 -X5:3 BN BN +CX1-68X1:1 /68.C5
= /3.C2 -X5:4 BU BU +CX1-68X1:5 /68.C6
= /3.C2 -X5:PE GNYE GNYE +CX1-PE /3.C2
C C
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Plano de cables =20204510005100+AR1-3W1 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 1 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Comprimento
B
3W2 B
= /3.C3 -X5:4 BU BU +CX2-69X1:5 /69.C6
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 2 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Comprimento
B
3W3 B
= /3.C4 -X5:4 BU BU +CX3-70X1:5 /70.C6
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 3 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
8 0,25 mm² ENCODER IMPULSOR
Comprimento
B
13W1 B
/13.D3 -12GF1.4:14 BK BK +EX-13PC1:1 /13.E5
/13.D3 -12GF1.4:13 BN BN +EX-13PC1:2 /13.E5
/13.D2 -12GF1.4:4 BU BU +EX-13PC1:6 /13.E5
/13.D1 -12GF1.4:2 GN GN +EX-13PC1:5 /13.E5

C C
/13.D2 -12GF1.4:6 OG OG +EX-13PC1:8 /13.E5
/13.D2 -12GF1.4:5 RD RD +EX-13PC1:7 /13.E5
ENCODER IMPULSOR /13.D1 -13W1:SH SH SH -PE /13.D3
/13.D1 -12GF1.4:3 VIO VIO +EX-13PC1:4 /13.E5
/13.D1 -12GF1.4:1 YE YE +EX-13PC1:3 /13.E5
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 4 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4G 2,5 mm² RETIFICADOR FREIO COMPORTA
Comprimento
B
19W1 B
RETIFICADOR FREIO COMPORTA /19.E2 -X3:12 BK BK +EX-19RF1:4 /19.F2
= /19.E2 -X3:11 BN BN +EX-19RF1:2 /19.F2
= /19.E2 -X3:11 GY GY +EX-19RF1:3 /19.F2
GNYE GNYE
C C
RETIFICADOR FREIO COMPORTA /19.E2 -X3:12 GNYE GNYE +EX-19RF1:5 /19.F2
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 5 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4G 2,5 mm² RETIFICADOR FREIO ELEVADOR PALETE
Comprimento
B
21W2 B
RETIFICADOR FREIO ELEVADOR PALETE /21.E2 -X3:14 BK BK +EX-21RF1:4 /21.F2
= /21.E2 -X3:13 BN BN +EX-21RF1:2 /21.F2
= /21.E2 -X3:13 GY GY +EX-21RF1:3 /21.F2
GNYE GNYE
C C
RETIFICADOR FREIO ELEVADOR PALETE /21.E2 -X3:14 GNYE GNYE +EX-21RF1:5 /21.F2
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 6 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
6G 0,5 mm² TUBO CAIXA LIGAÇÕES ROTADOR
Comprimento
B
23W1 B
ROTADOR /23.E7 -X4B:3:+ 1 1 +CX23-X230:1 /23.D7 ROTADOR
DET ROTADOR POS MÁXIMA /23.E7 -X4B:3:- 2 2 +CX23-X230:2 /23.D7 DET ROTADOR POS MÁXIMA
ROTADOR /23.E7 -X4B:3 3 3 +CX23-X230:3 /23.D7 ROTADOR
DET ROTADOR POS MÁXIMA /23.E8 -X4B:4 4 4 +CX23-X230:4 /23.D8 DET ROTADOR POS MÁXIMA
C C
5 5
GNYE GNYE
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 7 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
8 0,25 mm² RESOLVER ROTADOR
Comprimento
B
24W1 B
/24.E4 +EX-24XPC2:1 WH WH -23GF1.4:13 /24.D3
/24.E4 +EX-24XPC1:2 BN BN -23GF1.4:14 /24.D3
GN GN
/24.E4 +EX-24XPC1:4 YE YE -23GF1.4:11 /24.D3

C C
/24.E4 +EX-24XPC1:5 GY GY -23GF1.4:10 /24.D2
/24.E4 +EX-24XPC1:6 PK PK -23GF1.4:9 /24.D2
BU BU
RD RD
SH SH
/24.E4 +EX-24XPC1:3 GR GR -23GF1.4:12 /24.D3

D D
RESOLVER ROTADOR /24.D2 -24W1:SH SH SH -23GF1.4:16 /24.D3
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 8 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4G 2,5 mm² RETIFICADOR FREIO ROLOS DISPENSADOR
Comprimento
B
27W3 B
BK BK
RETIFICADOR FREIO ROLOS DISPENSADOR /27.b.E2 -X3:24 BN BN +EX-27RF3:2 /27.b.F2
= /27.b.E2 -X3:24 GY GY +EX-27RF3:3 /27.b.F2
GNYE GNYE
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 9 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
6G 0,5 mm² TUBO BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS
Comprimento
B
41W1 B
BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS (CH1) /41.C5 +CX100-XCin:9 1 1 +P30-41SB3:.1 /41.C5 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA
BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS (CH2) /41.C5 +CX100-XCin:10 2 2 +P30-41SB3:.1 /41.C5 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS (CH2)
BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS (CH1) /41.D5 +CX100-XCin:11 3 3 +P30-41SB3:.2 /41.C5 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA
BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS (CH2) /41.D5 +CX100-XCin:12 4 4 +P30-41SB3:.2 /41.C5 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS (CH2)
C C
5 5
GNYE GNYE
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 10 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4X 0,5 mm² TUBO BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS
Comprimento
B
43W1 B
SEGURANÇA EXTERNA CLIENTE (CH1) /43.B3 -X2:43 BK BK +CLIENT-43K1:21 /43.C3 SEGURANÇA EXTERNA CLIENTE (CH1)
= /43.D3 -X2:44 BN BN +CLIENT-43K1:22 /43.C3 =
SEGURANÇA EXTERNA CLIENTE (CH2) /43.B3 -X2:45 GY GY +CLIENT-43K2:21 /43.C3 SEGURANÇA EXTERNA CLIENTE (CH2)
= /43.D3 -X2:46 GNYE GNYE +CLIENT-43K2:22 /43.C3 =

C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 11 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
8G 0,5 mm² BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA DISPENSADOR PALETES
Comprimento
B
43W2 B
BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA DISPENSADOR PALETES /43.B4 -X2:32 1 1 +P20-43SB1:.1 /43.C4 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA
= /43.D4 -X2:33 2 2 +P20-43SB1:.2 /43.C4 =
REARME DISPENSADOR PALETES /43.B5 -X2:34 3 3 +P20-43SB2:.1 /43.C5 REARME DISPENSADOR PALETES
= /43.D5 -X2:35 4 4 +P20-43SB2:.2 /43.C5 =

C C
PILOTO AZUL BOTONERA DISPENSADOR PALETS /94.C7 -X2:36 5 5 +P20-94HL8:x1 /94.D7 PILOTO AZUL BOTONERA DISPENSADOR PALETS
= /94.E7 -X5:4 6 6 +P20-94HL8:x2 /94.D7 =
7 7
GNYE GNYE
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 12 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
20G 0,5 mm² TUBO ARMÁRIO COMANDO
Comprimento
B
81W1 B
PULSADOR MARCHA CUADRO MANDOS /81.C7 -X5:3 1 1 +AR2-XAR2:1 /81.B7 PULSADOR MARCHA CUADRO MANDOS
= /81.C8 -X5:4 2 2 +AR2-XAR2:2 /81.B8 =
BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA ARMÁRIO COMANDO (CH1) /41.B4 -X2:3 3 3 +AR2-XAR2:3 /41.C4 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA ARMÁRIO COMANDO (CH1)
= /41.D4 -X2:4 4 4 +AR2-XAR2:4 /41.D4 =

C C
BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA ARMÁRIO COMANDO (CH2) /41.B4 -X2:5 5 5 +AR2-XAR2:5 /41.C4 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA ARMÁRIO COMANDO (CH2)
= /41.D4 -X2:6 6 6 +AR2-XAR2:6 /41.D4 =
PULSADOR MARCHA CUADRO MANDOS /81.C7 -X2:7 7 7 +AR2-XAR2:7 /81.B7 PULSADOR MARCHA CUADRO MANDOS
PULSADOR PARADA CUADRO MANDOS /82.C2 -X2:8 8 8 +AR2-XAR2:8 /82.B2 PULSADOR PARADA CUADRO MANDOS
PULSADOR PETICION ENTRADA SUPERIOR CUADRO MANDOS /82.C3 -X2:9 9 9 +AR2-XAR2:9 /82.B3 PULSADOR PETICION ENTRADA SUPERIOR CUADRO MANDOS
SELECTOR HABILITAR ENTRADA SACOS /82.C3 -X2:10 10 10 +AR2-XAR2:10 /82.B3 SELECTOR HABILITAR ENTRADA SACOS
D D
PILOTO VERDE ARMARIO MANDOS /94.C2 -X2:11 11 11 +AR2-XAR2:11 /94.D2 PILOTO VERDE ARMARIO MANDOS
PILOTO ROJO ARMARIO MANDOS /94.C3 -X2:12 12 12 +AR2-XAR2:12 /94.D3 PILOTO ROJO ARMARIO MANDOS
PILOTO AZUL ARMARIO MANDOS /94.C3 -X2:13 13 13 +AR2-XAR2:13 /94.D3 PILOTO AZUL ARMARIO MANDOS
PILOTO BLANCO ARMARIO MANDOS /94.C4 -X2:14 14 14 +AR2-XAR2:14 /94.D4 PILOTO BLANCO ARMARIO MANDOS
REARME QUADRO COMANDO /43.D4 -X2:15 15 15 +AR2-XAR2:15 /43.C4 REARME QUADRO COMANDO
PORTA ACESSO PRÉ-FORMA /49.C1 -X2:17 16 16 +AR2-XAR2:16 /49.D1 PORTA ACESSO PRÉ-FORMA
E E
= /49.C2 -X2:18 17 17 +AR2-XAR2:17 /49.D2 =
= /49.C2 -X2:19 18 18 +AR2-XAR2:18 /49.D2 =
= /49.C2 -X2:20 19 19 +AR2-XAR2:19 /49.D2 =
GNYE GNYE
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 13 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
18G IGUS 0,5 mm² TUBO CAIXA ELEVADOR
Comprimento
B
83W1 B
FOT PALET PLATAFORMA ELEVACIÓN /83.C1 -X5:3 1 1 +CX4-X40:1 /83.B1 FOT PALET PLATAFORMA ELEVACIÓN
= /83.C2 -X5:4 2 2 +CX4-X40:2 /83.B2 =
= /83.C1 -X4:3 3 3 +CX4-X40:3 /83.B1 =
DET CENTRADOR PALET DESACTIVADO /83.C2 -X4:4 4 4 +CX4-X40:4 /83.B2 DET CENTRADOR PALET DESACTIVADO
C C
DET TOPE FRONTAL PALET ACTIVADO (RESERVA) /83.C3 -X4:5 5 5 +CX4-X40:5 /83.B3 DET TOPE FRONTAL PALET ACTIVADO (RESERVA)
DET TOPE FRONTAL PALET DESACTIVADO (RESERVA) /83.C4 -X4:6 6 6 +CX4-X40:6 /83.B4 DET TOPE FRONTAL PALET DESACTIVADO (RESERVA)
DETS GATILLOS SEGURIDAD PLATAFORMA (SERIE 1) /83.C5 -X4:7 7 7 +CX4-X40:7 /83.B5 DETS GATILLOS SEGURIDAD PLATAFORMA (SERIE 1)
DETS GATILLOS SEGURIDAD PLATAFORMA (SERIE 2) /83.C7 -X4:8 8 8 +CX4-X40:8 /83.B7 DETS GATILLOS SEGURIDAD PLATAFORMA (SERIE 2)
EV ACTIVAR TOPE PALET PLATAFORMA (RESERVA) /95.C4 -X4:9 9 9 +CX4-X40:9 /95.D4 EV ACTIVAR TOPE PALET PLATAFORMA (RESERVA)
EV DESACTIVAR TOPE PALET PLATAFORMA (RESERVA) /95.C5 -X4:10 10 10 +CX4-X40:10 /95.D5 EV DESACTIVAR TOPE PALET PLATAFORMA (RESERVA)
D D
EV ACTIVAR CENTRADOR PALET PLATAFORMA /95.C6 -X4:11 11 11 +CX4-X40:11 /95.D6 EV ACTIVAR CENTRADOR PALET PLATAFORMA
EV DESACTIVAR CENTRADOR PALET PLATAFORMA /95.C6 -X4:12 12 12 +CX4-X40:12 /95.D6 EV DESACTIVAR CENTRADOR PALET PLATAFORMA
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 14 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
16G 0,5 mm² TUBO BOTONEIRA PORTA INFERIOR
Comprimento
B
84W1 B
PULSADOR MARCHA BOTONERA PUERTA INFERIOR /84.C4 -X5:3 1 1 +P10-84SB3:.1 /84.A3 PULSADOR MARCHA BOTONERA PUERTA INFERIOR
= /84.C4 -X5:4 2 2 +P10-94HL5:x2 /94.D5 PILOTO VERDE BOTONERA PUERTA INFERIOR
BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA INFERIOR (CH1) /42.B4 -X2:21 3 3 +P10-42SB1:.1 /42.C4 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA
= /42.D4 -X2:22 4 4 +P10-42SB1:.2 /42.C4 =

C C
BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA INFERIOR (CH2) /42.B4 -X2:23 5 5 +P10-42SB1:.1 /42.C4 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA INFERIOR (CH2)
= /42.D4 -X2:24 6 6 +P10-42SB1:.2 /42.C4 =
PULSADOR MARCHA BOTONERA PUERTA INFERIOR /84.C3 -X2:26 7 7 +P10-84SB3:.2 /84.A3 PULSADOR MARCHA BOTONERA PUERTA INFERIOR
PULSADOR PETICIÓN ENTRADA PUERTA INFERIOR /84.C4 -X2:27 8 8 +P10-84SB4:.2 /84.A4 PULSADOR PETICIÓN ENTRADA PUERTA INFERIOR
REARME BOTONEIRA INFERIOR /43.D5 -X2:25 9 9 +P10-43SB3:.2 /43.C5 REARME BOTONEIRA INFERIOR
PILOTO VERDE BOTONERA PUERTA INFERIOR /94.C5 -X2:28 10 10 +P10-94HL5:x1 /94.D5 PILOTO VERDE BOTONERA PUERTA INFERIOR
D D
PILOTO AZUL BOTONERA PUERTA INFERIOR /94.C6 -X2:29 11 11 +P10-94HL6:x1 /94.D6 PILOTO AZUL BOTONERA PUERTA INFERIOR
PILOTO BLANCO BOTONERA PUERTA INFERIOR /94.C6 -X2:30 12 12 +P10-94HL7:x1 /94.D6 PILOTO BLANCO BOTONERA PUERTA INFERIOR
13 13
14 14
15 15
GNYE GNYE
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 15 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
12G 0,5 mm² FOT NÍVEL BAIXO COMPORTA
Comprimento
B
101W1 B
FOT NÍVEL BAIXO COMPORTA /102.C6 +CX10-X100:1 1 1 +CX1-68X18:2 /102.E6
= /102.C7 +CX10-X100:2 2 2 +CX1-68X18:3 /102.E7
= /102.C6 +CX10-X100:3 3 3 +CX1-68X18:1 /102.E6 FOT NÍVEL BAIXO COMPORTA
4 4
C C
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
D D
11 11
GNYE GNYE
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 16 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
12G 0,5 mm² TUBO CAIXA ELEVADOR
Comprimento
B
122W1 B
DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET POSIÇÃO ARMAZÉM /122.C2 +CX30-X300:1:+ 1 1 +CX3-70X14:2 /122.E2
= /122.C2 +CX30-X300:1:- 2 2 +CX3-70X14:3 /122.E2
= /122.C2 +CX30-X300:1 3 3 +CX3-70X14:1 /122.E2 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET POSIÇÃO ARMAZÉM
DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET POSIÇÃO PALETE /122.C2 +CX30-X300:2 4 4 +CX3-70X14:5 /122.E2 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET POSIÇÃO PALETE
C C
DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET ACIMA /122.C4 +CX30-X300:3 5 5 +CX3-70X15:1 /122.E4 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET ACIMA
DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET ABAIXO /122.C5 +CX30-X300:4 6 6 +CX3-70X15:5 /122.E5 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET ABAIXO
DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - FOLHA OK /122.C6 +CX30-X300:5 7 7 +CX3-70X16:1 /122.E6 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - FOLHA OK
DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - HÁ FOLHAS /122.C7 +CX30-X300:6 8 8 +CX3-70X16:5 /122.E7 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - HÁ FOLHAS
DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET PISON /123.C2 +CX30-X300:7 9 9 +CX3-70X17:1 /123.E2 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET PISON
DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - SUBIR /220.C2 +CX30-X300:8 10 10 +CX3-70X40:1 /220.B2 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - SUBIR
D D
DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DESCER /220.C2 +CX30-X300:9 11 11 +CX3-70X40:5 /220.B2 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DESCER
GNYE GNYE
DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - VAZIO /220.C3 +CX30-X300:10 GNYE GNYE +CX3-70X40:4 /220.B3 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - VAZIO
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 17 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
10x 0,5 mm² INTERRUPTOR SEGURANÇA ACESSO INFERIOR
Comprimento
B
51WB1 B
INTERRUPTOR SEGURANÇA ACESSO INFERIOR /51.C2 -X2:1 1 1 +EX-51B1-A1 /51.D2
= /51.C2 -X2:2 2 2 +EX-51B1-A2 /51.D2
= /51.C3 -X2:57 3 3 +EX-51B1-IN /51.D3
= /49.C3 -49U1:21 4 4 +EX-51B1:X1 /49.E3 INTERRUPTOR SEGURANÇA ACESSO INFERIOR

C C
/49.C3 -49U1:23 5 5 +EX-51B1:X2 /49.E3
/49.C3 -49U1:24 6 6 +EX-51B1:Y2 /49.E3
/49.C3 -49U1:22 7 7 +EX-51B1:Y1 /49.E3 INTERRUPTOR SEGURANÇA ACESSO INFERIOR
INTERRUPTOR PUERTA INFERIOR. PUERTA CERRADA /84.C5 -X2:58 8 8 +EX-51B1:52 /84.A5 INTERRUPTOR PUERTA INFERIOR. PUERTA CERRADA
9 9
GNYE GNYE
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Plano de cables =20204510005100+AR1-51WB1 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 18 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
2 0,25 mm² BUS CTnet
Comprimento
B
13WCTnet1 B
WH WH
RD RD
/13.B7 -12GF1.3:7 SH SH -23GF1.3:7 /24.B7
/13.B7 -12GF1.3:8 BLUE BLUE -23GF1.3:8 /24.B7

C C
/13.B7 -12GF1.3:6 WHITE WHITE -23GF1.3:6 /24.B7
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Plano de cables =20204510005100+AR1-13WCTnet1 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 21 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
6G 2,5 mm² TAPETE AGRUPAMENTO
Comprimento
B
11WM1 B
TAPETE AGRUPAMENTO /11.D2 -X3:1 1 1 +EX-11M1:U1 /11.F2
= /11.D2 -X3:1 2 2 +EX-11M1:V1 /11.F2
= /11.D2 -X3:1 3 3 +EX-11M1:W1 /11.F2
= /11.D3 -X3:2 4 4 +EX-11RF1:4 /11.F3

C C
= /11.D3 -X3:2 5 5 +EX-11RF1:5 /11.F3
GNYE GNYE
TAPETE AGRUPAMENTO /11.D2 -X3:1 GNYE GNYE +EX-11M1:T1 /11.F2
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Plano de cables =20204510005100+AR1-11WM1 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 22 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
(4G 2,5+2x1,5)C mm² RETIFICADOR FREIO IMPULSOR
Comprimento
B
12WM1 B
RETIFICADOR FREIO IMPULSOR /12.E1 -X12:1 1 1 +EX-12RF1:2 /12.F1
= /12.E1 -X12:2 2 2 +EX-12RF1:3 /12.F1
IMPULSOR /12.D2 -12GF1:U BK BK +EX-12M1:U1 /12.F2 IMPULSOR
/12.D3 -12GF1:V BN BN +EX-12M1:V1 /12.F2 =

C C
/12.D3 -12GF1:W GY GY +EX-12M1:W1 /12.F2 =
/12.D3 -12GF1:PE GNYE PE GNYE PE +EX-12M1:T1 /12.F2 =
SH SH
RETIFICADOR FREIO IMPULSOR /12.E1 -12WM1 SH SH -PE /12.E1 RETIFICADOR FREIO IMPULSOR
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 23 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
((4G 2,5+2x1,5)C mm²
Comprimento
B
14WM1 B
ELEVAÇÃO PÁ IMPULSOR /14.D3 -X3:4 1 1 +EX-14RF1:4 /14.F3
= /14.D3 -X3:4 2 2 +EX-14RF1:5 /14.F3
= /14.D2 -X3:3 BK BK +EX-14M1:U1 /14.F2 ELEVAÇÃO PÁ IMPULSOR
= /14.D2 -X3:3 BN BN +EX-14M1:V1 /14.F2 =

C C
= /14.D2 -X3:3 GY GY +EX-14M1:W1 /14.F2 =
= /14.D2 -X3:3 GNYE PE GNYE PE +EX-14M1:T1 /14.F2 =
SH SH
/14.E2 -14WM1 SH SH -PE /14.E2
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 24 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
6G 2,5 mm² COMPRESSOR LATERAL 1
Comprimento
B
16WM1 B
COMPRESSOR LATERAL 1 /16.D2 -X3:5 1 1 +EX-16M1:U1 /16.F2 COMPRESSOR LATERAL 1
= /16.D2 -X3:5 2 2 +EX-16M1:V1 /16.F2 =
= /16.D2 -X3:5 3 3 +EX-16M1:W1 /16.F2 =
= /16.D3 -X3:6 4 4 +EX-16RF1:4 /16.F3

C C
= /16.D3 -X3:6 5 5 +EX-16RF1:5 /16.F3
GNYE GNYE
COMPRESSOR LATERAL 1 /16.D2 -X3:5 GNYE GNYE +EX-16M1 /16.F2 COMPRESSOR LATERAL 1
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 25 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
6G 2,5 mm² COMPRESSOR LATERAL 2
Comprimento
B
17WM1 B
COMPRESSOR LATERAL 2 /17.D2 -X3:7 1 1 +EX-17M1:U1 /17.F2 COMPRESSOR LATERAL 2
= /17.D2 -X3:7 2 2 +EX-17M1:V1 /17.F2 =
= /17.D2 -X3:7 3 3 +EX-17M1:W1 /17.F2 =
= /17.D3 -X3:8 4 4 +EX-17RF1:4 /17.F3

C C
= /17.D3 -X3:8 5 5 +EX-17RF1:5 /17.F3
GNYE GNYE
COMPRESSOR LATERAL 2 /17.D2 -X3:7 GNYE GNYE +EX-17M1 /17.F2 COMPRESSOR LATERAL 2
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 26 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
6G 2,5 mm² COMPRESSOR FRONTAL
Comprimento
B
18WM1 B
COMPRESSOR FRONTAL /18.D2 -X3:9 1 1 +EX-18M1:U1 /18.F2 COMPRESSOR FRONTAL
= /18.D2 -X3:9 2 2 +EX-18M1:V1 /18.F2 =
= /18.D2 -X3:9 3 3 +EX-18M1:W1 /18.F2 =
= /18.D3 -X3:10 4 4 +EX-18RF1:4 /18.F3

C C
= /18.D3 -X3:10 5 5 +EX-18RF1:5 /18.F3
GNYE GNYE
COMPRESSOR FRONTAL /18.D2 -X3:9 GNYE GNYE +EX-18M1 /18.F2 COMPRESSOR FRONTAL
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 27 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4G 2,5 mm² RETIFICADOR FREIO COMPORTA
Comprimento
B
19WM1 B
COMPORTA /19.D3 -19GF1:U BK BK +EX-19M1:U1 /19.F3 COMPORTA
/19.D3 -19GF1:V BN BN +EX-19M1:V1 /19.F3 =
/19.D4 -19GF1:W GY GY +EX-19M1:W1 /19.F3 =
/19.D4 -19GF1:PE GNYE GNYE +EX-19M1:T1 /19.F3 =

C C
RETIFICADOR FREIO COMPORTA /19.E3 -19WM1:SH SH SH -PE5 /19.E3
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 28 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4G 6 mm² RETIFICADOR FREIO ELEVADOR PALETE
Comprimento
B
21WM1 B
ELEVADOR PALETE /21.D3 -21GF1:U BK BK +EX-21M1:U1 /21.F3 ELEVADOR PALETE
/21.D3 -21GF1:V BN BN +EX-21M1:V1 /21.F3 =
/21.D4 -21GF1:W GY GY +EX-21M1:W1 /21.F3 =
/21.D4 -21GF1:PE GNYE GNYE +EX-21M1:T1 /21.F3 =

C C
RETIFICADOR FREIO ELEVADOR PALETE /21.E3 -21WM1:SH SH SH -PE /21.E3
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 29 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
(4G 2,5+2x1,5)C mm² ROLOS ELEVADOR PALETE
Comprimento
B
22WM1 B
1 1
2 2
/22.D3 -22GF1:U BK BK +EX-22M1:U1 /22.F3
/22.D3 -22GF1:V BN BN +EX-22M1:V1 /22.F3

C C
/22.D4 -22GF1:W GY GY +EX-22M1:W1 /22.F3
/22.D4 -22GF1:PE GNYE PE GNYE PE +EX-22M1:T1 /22.F3
SH SH
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 30 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
6G 2,5 mm² FREIO ROTADOR
Comprimento
B
23WM1 B
ROTADOR /23.E2 +EX-23M1 1 1 -23GF1:U /23.D2 ROTADOR
= /23.E2 +EX-23M1 2 2 -23GF1:V /23.D2
= /23.E3 +EX-23M1 3 3 -23GF1:W /23.D3
FREIO ROTADOR /23.E1 4 4 -X23:1 /23.E1 FREIO ROTADOR

C C
= /23.E1 5 5 -X23:2 /23.E1 =
ROTADOR /23.E3 +EX-23M1 GNYE GNYE -23GF1:PE /23.D3
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 31 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
6G 2,5 mm² TAPETE ROTADOR
Comprimento
B
25WM1 B
TAPETE ROTADOR /25.E2 -X3:15 1 1 +EX-25M1:U1 /25.F2 TAPETE ROTADOR
= /25.E2 -X3:15 2 2 +EX-25M1:V1 /25.F2 =
= /25.E2 -X3:15 3 3 +EX-25M1:W1 /25.F2 =
= /25.E3 -X3:16 4 4 +EX-25RF1:4 /25.F3

C C
= /25.E3 -X3:16 5 5 +EX-25RF1:5 /25.F3
GNYE GNYE
TAPETE ROTADOR /25.E2 -X3:15 GNYE GNYE +EX-25M1:T1 /25.F2 TAPETE ROTADOR
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 32 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
6G 2,5 mm² ALISADOR TAPETE INFERIOR
Comprimento
B
26WM1 B
ALISADOR TAPETE INFERIOR /26.E2 -X3:17 1 1 +EX-26M1:U1 /26.F2 ALISADOR TAPETE INFERIOR
= /26.E2 -X3:17 2 2 +EX-26M1:V1 /26.F2 =
= /26.E2 -X3:17 3 3 +EX-26M1:W1 /26.F2 =
= /26.E3 -X3:18 4 4 +EX-26RF1:4 /26.F3

C C
= /26.E3 -X3:18 5 5 +EX-26RF1:5 /26.F3
GNYE GNYE
ALISADOR TAPETE INFERIOR /26.E2 -X3:17 GNYE GNYE +EX-26M1 /26.F2 ALISADOR TAPETE INFERIOR
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 33 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4G 2,5 mm² ALISADOR TAPETE SUPERIOR
Comprimento
B
26WM2 B
ALISADOR TAPETE SUPERIOR /26.E5 -X3:19 BK BK +EX-26M2:U1 /26.F5 ALISADOR TAPETE SUPERIOR
= /26.E5 -X3:19 BN BN +EX-26M2:V1 /26.F5 =
= /26.E5 -X3:19 GY GY +EX-26M2:W1 /26.F5 =
= /26.E5 -X3:19 GNYE GNYE +EX-26M2 /26.F5 =

C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 34 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4G 2,5 mm² REGULAÇÃO ALISADOR
Comprimento
B
26WM3 B
REGULAÇÃO ALISADOR /26.E7 -X3:20 BK BK +EX-26M3:U1 /26.F7 REGULAÇÃO ALISADOR
= /26.E7 -X3:20 BN BN +EX-26M3:V1 /26.F7 =
= /26.E7 -X3:20 GY GY +EX-26M3:W1 /26.F7 =
= /26.E7 -X3:20 GNYE GNYE +EX-26M3 /26.F7 =

C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 35 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
6G 2,5 mm² ELEVAÇÃO DISPENSADOR DE PALETES
Comprimento
B
27WM1 B
ELEVAÇÃO DISPENSADOR DE PALETES /27.E1 -X3:21 1 1 +EX-27M1:U1 /27.F1 ELEVAÇÃO DISPENSADOR DE PALETES
= /27.E2 -X3:21 2 2 +EX-27M1:V1 /27.F1 =
= /27.E2 -X3:21 3 3 +EX-27M1:W1 /27.F1 =
= /27.E3 -X3:22 4 4 +EX-27RF1:4 /27.F3

C C
= /27.E3 -X3:22 5 5 +EX-27RF1:5 /27.F3
GNYE GNYE
ELEVAÇÃO DISPENSADOR DE PALETES /27.E2 -X3:21 GNYE GNYE +EX-27M1 /27.F1 ELEVAÇÃO DISPENSADOR DE PALETES
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 36 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4G 2,5 mm² FORQUILHAS DISPENSADOR
Comprimento
B
27WM2 B
FORQUILHAS DISPENSADOR /27.E3 -X3:23 BK BK +EX-27M2:U2 /27.F3 FORQUILHAS DISPENSADOR
= /27.E4 -X3:23 BN BN +EX-27M2:V2 /27.F3 =
= /27.E4 -X3:23 GY GY +EX-27M2:W2 /27.F3 =
= /27.E4 -X3:23 GNYE GNYE +EX-27M2 /27.F3 =

C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 37 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4G 2,5 mm² RETIFICADOR FREIO ROLOS DISPENSADOR
Comprimento
B
27WM3 B
/27.b.D3 -27GF3:U BK BK +EX-27M3:U3 /27.b.F3
/27.b.D3 -27GF3:V BN BN +EX-27M3:V3 /27.b.F3
/27.b.D4 -27GF3:W GY GY +EX-27M3:W3 /27.b.F3
/27.b.D4 -27GF3:PE GNYE GNYE +EX-27M3 /27.b.F3

C C
ROLOS ELEVADOR PALETE /22.E3 -22WM1 SH SH -PE /27.b.E3
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 38 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
6G 2,5 mm² DISPENSADOR FOLHAS
Comprimento
B
28WM1 B
DISPENSADOR FOLHAS /28.E1 -X3:25 1 1 +EX-28M1:U1 /28.F1
= /28.E2 -X3:25 2 2 +EX-28M1:V1 /28.F1
= /28.E2 -X3:25 3 3 +EX-28M1:W1 /28.F1
= /28.E3 -X3:26 4 4 +EX-28RF1:4 /28.F3

C C
= /28.E3 -X3:26 5 5 +EX-28RF1:5 /28.F3
GNYE GNYE
DISPENSADOR FOLHAS /28.E2 -X3:25 GNYE GNYE +EX-28M1 /28.F1
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 39 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4G 2,5 mm² SECÇÃO 1 SAÍDA
Comprimento
B
30WM1 B
/30.D2 -30GF1:U BK BK +EX-30M1:U1 /30.F2
/30.D2 -30GF1:V BN BN +EX-30M1:V1 /30.F2
/30.D2 -30GF1:W GY GY +EX-30M1:W1 /30.F2
/30.D2 -30GF1:PE GNYE GNYE +EX-30M1:T1 /30.F2

C C
SECÇÃO 1 SAÍDA /30.E2 -30WM1:SH SH SH -PE11 /30.E2
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 40 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
2 0,5 mm² EV GERAL PALETIZADOR
Comprimento
B
43WYV1 B
EV GERAL PALETIZADOR /43.D6 -X2:47 BN BN +EX-43YV1:x1 /43.E6 EV GERAL PALETIZADOR
= /43.D6 -X2:2 BU BU +EX-43YV1:x2 /43.E6 =
C C
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Plano de cables =20204510005100+AR1-43WYV1 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 53 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
2 0,5 mm² EV GERAL VAZIOS (RESERVA)
Comprimento
B
43WYV2 B
BN BN
BU BU
C C
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Plano de cables =20204510005100+AR1-43WYV2 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 54 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
16G 1 mm² COM ENTRADA PRODUCTO: EN MARCHA
Comprimento
B
300W1 B
COM ENTRADA PRODUCTO: RSVA +AR1/81.C4 +AR1-X6:1 1 1 -XCin:1 +AR1/81.B4 COM ENTRADA PRODUCTO: RSVA
COM ENTRADA PRODUCTO: EN MARCHA +AR1/81.C3 +AR1-X6:2 2 2 -XCin:2 +AR1/81.B3 COM ENTRADA PRODUCTO: EN MARCHA
= +AR1/81.C3 +AR1-X6:3 3 3 -XCin:3 +AR1/81.B3 =
COM ENTRADA PRODUCTO: RSVA +AR1/81.C3 +AR1-X6:4 4 4 -XCin:4 +AR1/81.B3 COM ENTRADA PRODUCTO: RSVA
C C
+AR1/300.D1 +AR1-X6 5 5 -XCin:5 +AR1/300.E1
COM ENTRADA PRODUTO: PALETIZADOR EM FUNCIONAMENTO +AR1/300.D2 +AR1-X6 6 6 -XCin:6 +AR1/300.E2 COM ENTRADA PRODUTO: PALETIZADOR EM FUNCIONAMENTO
+AR1/300.D2 +AR1-X6 7 7 -XCin:7 +AR1/300.E2 =
COM ENTRADA PRODUTO: SINAL 2 +AR1/300.D3 +AR1-X6 8 8 -XCin:8 +AR1/300.E3 COM ENTRADA PRODUTO: SINAL 2
BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS (CH1) +AR1/41.B5 +AR1-X2:37 9 9 -XCin:9 +AR1/41.C5 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS (CH1)
BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS (CH2) +AR1/41.B5 +AR1-X2:39 10 10 -XCin:10 +AR1/41.C5 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS (CH2)
D D
BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS (CH1) +AR1/41.D5 +AR1-X2:38 11 11 -XCin:11 +AR1/41.D5 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS (CH1)
BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS (CH2) +AR1/41.D5 +AR1-X2:40 12 12 -XCin:12 +AR1/41.D5 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS (CH2)
13 13
14 14
15 15
GNYE GNYE
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Plano de cables =20204510005100+CX100-300W1 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 60 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 EVC142 0,34 mm² EV ACTIVAR CENTRADOR PALET PLATAFORMA
Comprimento
5m
B
95WYV6 B
EV ACTIVAR CENTRADOR PALET PLATAFORMA +AR1/95.D6 +CX4-X40:11 BN BN -95YV6:1 +AR1/95.D6 EV ACTIVAR CENTRADOR PALET PLATAFORMA
= +AR1/95.D6 +CX4-X40:2 BU BU -95YV6:3 +AR1/95.D6 =
BK BK
C C
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Plano de cables =20204510005100+CXEV4-95WYV6 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 61 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 EVC142 0,34 mm² EV DESACTIVAR CENTRADOR PALET PLATAFORMA
Comprimento
5m
B
95WYV7 B
EV DESACTIVAR CENTRADOR PALET PLATAFORMA +AR1/95.D6 +CX4-X40:12 BN BN -95YV7:1 +AR1/95.D6 EV DESACTIVAR CENTRADOR PALET PLATAFORMA
= +AR1/95.D7 +CX4-X40:2 BU BU -95YV7:3 +AR1/95.D6 =
BK BK
C C
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Plano de cables =20204510005100+CXEV4-95WYV7 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 62 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,34 mm² ESTADO TÉRMICO RESISTENCIA FRENO
Comprimento
B
81WB1 B
COM ENTRADA PRODUCTO: EN MARCHA +AR1/81.B3 +CX100-XCin:2 BN BN -81B1:1 +AR1/81.A2
= +AR1/81.B3 +CX100-XCin:1 BU BU -81B1:3 +AR1/81.A2
C C
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Plano de cables =20204510005100+EX1-81WB1 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 63 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,34 mm² COM ENTRADA PRODUCTO: EN MARCHA
Comprimento
B
81WB2 B
COM ENTRADA PRODUCTO: EN MARCHA +AR1/81.B3 +CX100-XCin:3 BK BK -81B2:4 +AR1/81.A3
= +AR1/81.B3 +CX100-XCin:2 BN BN -81B2:1 +AR1/81.A3
= +AR1/81.B3 +CX100-XCin:1 BU BU -81B2:3 +AR1/81.A3
C C
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Plano de cables =20204510005100+EX1-81WB2 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 64 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
12X 0,5 mm² COM ENTRADA PALETS: PETICIÓN ENTREGA (RSVA)
Comprimento
B
300W2 B
COM ENTRADA PALETS: ENTREGA EN CURSO (RSVA) +AR1/81.C5 +AR1-X6:18 1 1 -KA4:13 +AR1/81.A5 COM ENTRADA PALETS: ENTREGA EN CURSO (RSVA)
COM ENTRADA PALETS: PETICIÓN ENTREGA (RSVA) +AR1/81.C4 +AR1-X6:19 2 2 -KA3:14 +AR1/81.A4 COM ENTRADA PALETS: PETICIÓN ENTREGA (RSVA)
COM ENTRADA PALETS: ENTREGA EN CURSO (RSVA) +AR1/81.C5 +AR1-X6:20 3 3 -KA4:14 +AR1/81.A5 COM ENTRADA PALETS: ENTREGA EN CURSO (RSVA)
4 4
C C
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
D D
11 11
GNYE GNYE
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Plano de cables =20204510005100+EX2-300W2 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 65 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
12X 0,5 mm² COM SALIDA PALETS: PERMISO ENTREGA
Comprimento
B
300W3 B
COM SALIDA PALETS: PALET RECIBIDO +AR1/81.C7 +AR1-X6:11 1 1 -KA6:13 +AR1/81.A6 COM SALIDA PALETS: PALET RECIBIDO
COM SALIDA PALETS: PERMISO ENTREGA +AR1/81.C6 +AR1-X6:12 2 2 -KA5:14 +AR1/81.A6 COM SALIDA PALETS: PERMISO ENTREGA
COM SALIDA PALETS: PALET RECIBIDO +AR1/81.C6 +AR1-X6:13 3 3 -KA6:14 +AR1/81.A6 COM SALIDA PALETS: PALET RECIBIDO
+AR1/300.D4 +AR1-X6 4 4 -X +AR1/300.E4 COM ENTRADA PRODUTO: SINAL 2

C C
+AR1/300.D5 +AR1-X6 5 5 -X +AR1/300.E5 COM SAÍDA PALETE: PEDIDO ENTREGA
+AR1/300.D6 +AR1-X6 6 6 -X +AR1/300.E6 SELEÇÃO PROGRAMA ENFARDAMENTO BIT0
+AR1/300.D7 +AR1-X6 7 7 -X +AR1/300.E7 SELEÇÃO PROGRAMA ENFARDAMENTO BIT1
COM SAÍDA PALETE: PEDIDO ENTREGA +AR1/300.D4 +AR1-X6 8 8 -X +AR1/300.E4 COM SAÍDA PALETE: PEDIDO ENTREGA
SELEÇÃO PROGRAMA ENFARDAMENTO BIT0 +AR1/300.D5 +AR1-X6 9 9 -X +AR1/300.E5 SELEÇÃO PROGRAMA ENFARDAMENTO BIT0
D D
GNYE GNYE
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Plano de cables =20204510005100+EX3-300W3 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 66 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
BARREIRA SEGURANÇA DISPENSADOR PALETES
Comprimento
B
47W1 B
BARREIRA SEGURANÇA DISPENSADOR PALETES +AR1/47.D1 +AR1-X2:1 BN BN -47A1-XS:1 +AR1/47.B1 BARREIRA SEGURANÇA DISPENSADOR PALETES
= +AR1/47.D1 +AR1-X2:2 BU BU -47A1-XS:2 +AR1/47.B1 =
= +AR1/47.D3 +AR1-X2:2 GN GN -47A1-XS:FE +AR1/47.B3 =
= +AR1/47.D2 +AR1-X2:49 GY GY -47A1-XS:3 +AR1/47.B2 =

C C
= +AR1/47.D2 +AR1-X2:50 PK PK -47A1-XS:4 +AR1/47.B2 =
= +AR1/47.D2 +AR1-X2:51 RD RD -47A1-XS:5 +AR1/47.B2 =
= +AR1/47.D2 +AR1-X2:52 WH WH -47A1-XS:7 +AR1/47.B2 =
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Plano de cables =20204510005100+EX-47W1 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 67 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Comprimento
B
48W1 B
BARREIRA SEGURANÇA SAÍDA PALETES +AR1/48.D1 +AR1-X2:1 BN BN -48A1-XS:1 +AR1/48.B1 BARREIRA SEGURANÇA SAÍDA PALETES
= +AR1/48.D1 +AR1-X2:2 BU BU -48A1-XS:2 +AR1/48.B1 =
= +AR1/48.D3 +AR1-X2:2 GN GN -48A1-XS:FE +AR1/48.B3 =
= +AR1/48.D2 +AR1-X2:53 GY GY -48A1-XS:3 +AR1/48.B2 =

C C
= +AR1/48.D2 +AR1-X2:54 PK PK -48A1-XS:4 +AR1/48.B2 =
= +AR1/48.D2 +AR1-X2:55 RD RD -48A1-XS:5 +AR1/48.B2 =
= +AR1/48.D2 +AR1-X2:56 WH WH -48A1-XS:7 +AR1/48.B2 =
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 68 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Comprimento
B
48W2 B
BARREIRA SEGURANÇA SAÍDA PALETES +AR1/48.B4 -48A1-XE:1 1 1 -48A2-COM:1 +AR1/48.D6 BARREIRA SEGURANÇA SAÍDA PALETES
= +AR1/48.B4 -48A1-XE:2 2 2 -48A2-COM:2 +AR1/48.D7 =
= +AR1/48.B4 -48A1-XE:3 3 3 -48A2-COM:3 +AR1/48.D7 =
= +AR1/48.B4 -48A1-XE:4 4 4 -48A2-COM:4 +AR1/48.D7 =

C C
= +AR1/48.B4 -48A1-XE:FE 5 5 -48A2-COM:5 +AR1/48.D7 =
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 69 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4X 0,34 mm² IMPULSOR
Comprimento
5m
B
12WB1 B
IMPULSOR +AR1/12.E7 +AR1-X4B:1:+ BN BN -12B1:1 +AR1/12.C7
BK BK
DET IMPULSOR POS MÁXIMA +AR1/12.E7 +AR1-X4B:1:- BU BU -12B1:3 +AR1/12.C7
IMPULSOR +AR1/12.E7 +AR1-X4B:1 WH WH -12B1:2 +AR1/12.C7

C C
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Plano de cables =20204510005100+EX-12WB1 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 70 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4X 0,34 mm² DET IMPULSOR POS MÁXIMA
Comprimento
5m
B
12WB2 B
DET IMPULSOR POS MÁXIMA +AR1/12.E8 +AR1-X4B:2:+ BN BN -12B2:1 +AR1/12.C8
BK BK
DET IMPULSOR POS MÍNIMA +AR1/12.E8 +AR1-X4B:2:- BU BU -12B2:3 +AR1/12.C8
DET IMPULSOR POS MÁXIMA +AR1/12.E8 +AR1-X4B:2 WH WH -12B2:2 +AR1/12.C8

C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 71 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
2 0,34 mm² ROTADOR
Comprimento
5m
B
23WB1 B
ROTADOR +AR1/23.D7 +CX23-X230:3 BK BK -23B1 +AR1/23.C7
= +AR1/23.D7 +CX23-X230:1 BK BK -23B1 +AR1/23.C7
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 72 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
2 0,34 mm² DET ROTADOR POS MÁXIMA
Comprimento
5m
B
23WB2 B
DET ROTADOR POS MÁXIMA +AR1/23.D8 +CX23-X230:4 BK BK -23B2 +AR1/23.C8
= +AR1/23.D8 +CX23-X230:1 BK BK -23B2 +AR1/23.C8
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 73 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,5 mm²
Comprimento
B
48WB1 B
+AR1/48.a.D3 -48A2-A1:1 BN BN -48B1:1 +AR1/48.a.C3
+AR1/48.a.D3 -48A2-A1:3 BU BU -48B1:2 +AR1/48.a.C3
+AR1/48.a.D3 -48A2-A1:4 WH WH -48B1:3 +AR1/48.a.C3
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 74 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,5 mm²
Comprimento
B
48WB2 B
+AR1/48.a.D4 -48A2-A2:1 BN BN -48B2:1 +AR1/48.a.C4
+AR1/48.a.D4 -48A2-A2:3 BU BU -48B2:2 +AR1/48.a.C4
+AR1/48.a.D4 -48A2-A2:4 WH WH -48B2:3 +AR1/48.a.C4
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 75 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
6X 0,5 mm² PORTA ACESSO PRÉ-FORMA
Comprimento
10 m
B
49WB1 B
PORTA ACESSO PRÉ-FORMA +AR1/49.D1 +AR2-XAR2:16 1 1 -49B1:1 +AR1/49.E1 PORTA ACESSO PRÉ-FORMA
= +AR1/49.D2 +AR2-XAR2:17 2 2 -49B1:3 +AR1/49.E2
= +AR1/49.D2 +AR2-XAR2:18 3 3 -49B1:4 +AR1/49.E2
= +AR1/49.D2 +AR2-XAR2:19 4 4 -49B1:2 +AR1/49.E1 PORTA ACESSO PRÉ-FORMA

C C
5 5
GNYE GNYE
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 76 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4 EVC005 0,34 mm² PRESION AIRE OK
Comprimento
5m
B
80WB1 B
PRESION AIRE OK +AR1/80.C2 +AR1-X4B:5:+ BN BN -80B1:1 +AR1/80.A2
WH WH
PRESION AIRE OK +AR1/80.C2 +AR1-X4B:5:- BU BU -80B1:3 +AR1/80.A2
= +AR1/80.C2 +AR1-X4B:5 BK BK -80B1:4 +AR1/80.A2

C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 77 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4 0,34 mm² DET ALTURA RALENTIZAR DESCENSO ELEVADOR
Comprimento
B
82WB4 B
DET ALTURA RALENTIZAR DESCENSO ELEVADOR +AR1/82.C4 +AR1-X4B:6 BK BK -82B4:4 +AR1/82.A4
= +AR1/82.C4 +AR1-X4B:6:+ BN BN -82B4:1 +AR1/82.A4
= +AR1/82.C4 +AR1-X4B:6:- BU BU -82B4:3 +AR1/82.A4
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 78 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4 0,34 mm² DET ALTURA MÍNIMA ELEVADOR
Comprimento
B
82WB5 B
DET ALTURA MÍNIMA ELEVADOR +AR1/82.C5 +AR1-X4B:7:+ BN BN -82B5:1 +AR1/82.A5
= +AR1/82.C5 +AR1-X4B:7:- BU BU -82B5:3 +AR1/82.A5
= +AR1/82.C5 +AR1-X4B:7 WH WH -82B5:2 +AR1/82.A5
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 79 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,34 mm² FOT PALET PLATAFORMA ELEVACIÓN
Comprimento
2m
B
83WB1 B
FOT PALET PLATAFORMA ELEVACIÓN +AR1/83.B1 +CX4-X40:3 BK BK -83B1:4 +AR1/83.A1
= +AR1/83.B1 +CX4-X40:1 BN BN -83B1:1 +AR1/83.A1
= +AR1/83.B2 +CX4-X40:2 BU BU -83B1:3 +AR1/83.A1
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 80 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,14 mm² DET CENTRADOR PALET DESACTIVADO
Comprimento
B
83WB2 B
DET CENTRADOR PALET DESACTIVADO +AR1/83.B2 +CX4-X40:4 BK BK -83B2:4 +AR1/83.A2
= +AR1/83.B2 +CX4-X40:1 BN BN -83B2:1 +AR1/83.A2
= +AR1/83.B2 +CX4-X40:2 BU BU -83B2:3 +AR1/83.A2
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 81 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,14 mm² DET TOPE FRONTAL PALET ACTIVADO (RESERVA)
Comprimento
B
83WB3 B
DET TOPE FRONTAL PALET ACTIVADO (RESERVA) +AR1/83.B3 +CX4-X40:5 BK BK -83B3:4 +AR1/83.A3
= +AR1/83.B3 +CX4-X40:1 BN BN -83B3:1 +AR1/83.A3
= +AR1/83.B3 +CX4-X40:2 BU BU -83B3:3 +AR1/83.A3
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 82 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,14 mm² DET TOPE FRONTAL PALET DESACTIVADO (RESERVA)
Comprimento
5m
B
83WB4 B
DET TOPE FRONTAL PALET DESACTIVADO (RESERVA) +AR1/83.B4 +CX4-X40:6 BK BK -83B4:4 +AR1/83.A4
= +AR1/83.B4 +CX4-X40:1 BN BN -83B4:1 +AR1/83.A4
= +AR1/83.B4 +CX4-X40:2 BU BU -83B4:3 +AR1/83.A4
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 83 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,34 mm² DETS GATILLOS SEGURIDAD PLATAFORMA (SERIE 1)
Comprimento
5m
B
83WB5.1 B
DETS GATILLOS SEGURIDAD PLATAFORMA (SERIE 1) +AR1/83.B5 +CX4-X40:7 BK BK -83B5.1:4 +AR1/83.A5
= +AR1/83.B5 +CX4-X40:50 BN BN -83B5.1:1 +AR1/83.A5
= +AR1/83.B6 +CX4-X40:2 BU BU -83B5.1:3 +AR1/83.A5
C C
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Plano de cables =20204510005100+EX-83WB5.1 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 84 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Comprimento
5m
B
83WB5.2 B
= +AR1/83.B6 +CX4-X40:1 BN BN -83B5.2:1 +AR1/83.A6
= +AR1/83.B6 +CX4-X40:2 BU BU -83B5.2:3 +AR1/83.A6
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 85 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Comprimento
5m
B
83WB6.1 B
= +AR1/83.B7 +CX4-X40:51 BN BN -83B6.1:1 +AR1/83.A7
= +AR1/83.B7 +CX4-X40:2 BU BU -83B6.1:3 +AR1/83.A7
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 86 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Comprimento
5m
B
83WB6.2 B
= +AR1/83.B8 +CX4-X40:1 BN BN -83B6.2:1 +AR1/83.A8
= +AR1/83.B8 +CX4-X40:2 BU BU -83B6.2:3 +AR1/83.A8
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 87 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4X 0,34 mm² FOTS GÁLIBO PLATAFORMA ELEVACIÓN
Comprimento
B
83WB7.1 B
FOTS GÁLIBO PLATAFORMA ELEVACIÓN +AR1/83a.C2 +AR1-X4B:10 BK BK -83B7.1:4 +AR1/83a.A2
= +AR1/83a.C2 +AR1-X4B:10:+ BN BN -83B7.1:1 +AR1/83a.A2
= +AR1/83a.C2 +AR1-X4B:10:- BU BU -83B7.1:3 +AR1/83a.A2
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 88 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4X 0,34 mm² FOTS GÁLIBO PLATAFORMA ELEVACIÓN
Comprimento
B
83WB7.2 B
FOTS GÁLIBO PLATAFORMA ELEVACIÓN +AR1/83a.C3 +AR1-X4B:11 BK BK -83B7.2:4 +AR1/83a.A3
= +AR1/83a.C3 +AR1-X4B:11:+ BN BN -83B7.2:1 +AR1/83a.A3
= +AR1/83a.C3 +AR1-X4B:11:- BU BU -83B7.2:3 +AR1/83a.A3
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 89 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4X 0,34 mm² FOT TRAMO 1 SALIDA PALETS
Comprimento
B
83WB8 B
FOT TRAMO 1 SALIDA PALETS +AR1/83a.C4 +AR1-X4B:12 BK BK -83B8:4 +AR1/83a.A4
= +AR1/83a.C4 +AR1-X4B:12:+ BN BN -83B8:1 +AR1/83a.A4
= +AR1/83a.C4 +AR1-X4B:12:- BU BU -83B8:3 +AR1/83a.A4
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 90 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,34 mm² DET IMPULSOR ACIMA
Comprimento
B
100WB1 B
DET IMPULSOR ACIMA +AR1/100.E2 +CX1-68X10:1 BK BK -100B1:4 +AR1/100.A2
+AR1/100.E2 +CX1-68X10:2 BN BN -100B1:1 +AR1/100.A2
+AR1/100.E2 +CX1-68X10:3 BU BU -100B1:3 +AR1/100.A2
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 91 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,34 mm² DET IMPULSOR ABAIXO
Comprimento
B
100WB2 B
DET IMPULSOR ABAIXO +AR1/100.E2 +CX1-68X10:5 BK BK -100B2:4 +AR1/100.A3
+AR1/100.E3 +CX1-68X10:6 BN BN -100B2:1 +AR1/100.A3
+AR1/100.E3 +CX1-68X10:7 BU BU -100B2:3 +AR1/100.A3
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 92 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,34 mm² DET COMPACTADOR DIREITA MÍNIMA
Comprimento
B
100WB3 B
DET COMPACTADOR DIREITA MÍNIMA +AR1/100.E4 +CX1-68X11:1 BK BK -100B3:4 +AR1/100.A4
+AR1/100.E4 +CX1-68X11:2 BN BN -100B3:1 +AR1/100.A4
+AR1/100.E4 +CX1-68X11:3 BU BU -100B3:3 +AR1/100.A4
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 93 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,34 mm² DET COMPACTADOR DIREITA MÁXIMA
Comprimento
B
100WB4 B
DET COMPACTADOR DIREITA MÁXIMA +AR1/100.E5 +CX1-68X11:5 BK BK -100B4:4 +AR1/100.A5
+AR1/100.E5 +CX1-68X11:6 BN BN -100B4:1 +AR1/100.A5
+AR1/100.E5 +CX1-68X11:7 BU BU -100B4:3 +AR1/100.A5
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 94 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,34 mm² DET COMPACTADOR FRONTAL MÍNIMO
Comprimento
B
100WB5 B
DET COMPACTADOR FRONTAL MÍNIMO +AR1/100.E6 +CX1-68X12:1 BK BK -100B5:4 +AR1/100.A6
+AR1/100.E6 +CX1-68X12:2 BN BN -100B5:1 +AR1/100.A6
+AR1/100.E6 +CX1-68X12:3 BU BU -100B5:3 +AR1/100.A6
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 95 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,34 mm² DET COMPACTADOR FRONTAL MÁXIMO
Comprimento
B
100WB6 B
DET COMPACTADOR FRONTAL MÁXIMO +AR1/100.E7 +CX1-68X12:5 BK BK -100B6:4 +AR1/100.A7
+AR1/100.E7 +CX1-68X12:6 BN BN -100B6:1 +AR1/100.A7
+AR1/100.E7 +CX1-68X12:7 BU BU -100B6:3 +AR1/100.A7
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 96 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,34 mm² DET COMPACTADOR ESQUERDA MÍNIMO
Comprimento
B
101WB1 B
DET COMPACTADOR ESQUERDA MÍNIMO +AR1/101.E2 +CX1-68X13:1 BK BK -101B1:4 +AR1/101.A2
+AR1/101.E2 +CX1-68X13:2 BN BN -101B1:1 +AR1/101.A2
+AR1/101.E2 +CX1-68X13:3 BU BU -101B1:3 +AR1/101.A2
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 97 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,34 mm² DET COMPACTADOR ESQUERDA MÁXIMO
Comprimento
B
101WB2 B
DET COMPACTADOR ESQUERDA MÁXIMO +AR1/101.E2 +CX1-68X13:5 BK BK -101B2:4 +AR1/101.A3
+AR1/101.E3 +CX1-68X13:6 BN BN -101B2:1 +AR1/101.A3
+AR1/101.E3 +CX1-68X13:7 BU BU -101B2:3 +AR1/101.A3
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 98 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,5 mm² DET 1 COMPRESSÃO COMPORTA
Comprimento
B
101WB3 B
DET 1 COMPRESSÃO COMPORTA +AR1/101.E4 +CX1-68X14:1 BK BK -101B3:4 +AR1/101.A4
+AR1/101.E4 +CX1-68X14:2 BN BN -101B3:1 +AR1/101.A4
+AR1/101.E4 +CX1-68X14:3 BU BU -101B3:3 +AR1/101.A4
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 99 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Comprimento
B
101WB4 B
+AR1/101.E5 +CX1-68X14:6 BN BN -101B4:1 +AR1/101.A5
+AR1/101.E5 +CX1-68X14:7 BU BU -101B4:3 +AR1/101.A5
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 100 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Comprimento
B
101WB5 B
+AR1/101.E6 +CX1-68X15:2 BN BN -101B5:1 +AR1/101.A6
+AR1/101.E6 +CX1-68X15:3 BU BU -101B5:3 +AR1/101.A6
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 101 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
Comprimento
B
101WB6 B
+AR1/101.E7 +CX1-68X15:6 BN BN -101B6:1 +AR1/101.A7
+AR1/101.E7 +CX1-68X15:7 BU BU -101B6:3 +AR1/101.A7
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 102 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,5 mm² DET DESACELERAR ABERTURA COMPORTA
Comprimento
B
102WB1 B
DET DESACELERAR ABERTURA COMPORTA +AR1/102.E2 +CX1-68X16:1 BK BK -102B1:4 +AR1/102.A2
+AR1/102.E2 +CX1-68X16:2 BN BN -102B1:1 +AR1/102.A2
+AR1/102.E2 +CX1-68X16:3 BU BU -102B1:3 +AR1/102.A2
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 103 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,5 mm² DET COMPORTA ABERTA
Comprimento
B
102WB2 B
DET COMPORTA ABERTA +AR1/102.E2 +CX1-68X16:5 BK BK -102B2:4 +AR1/102.A3
+AR1/102.E3 +CX1-68X16:6 BN BN -102B2:1 +AR1/102.A3
+AR1/102.E3 +CX1-68X16:7 BU BU -102B2:3 +AR1/102.A3
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 104 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,5 mm² DET DESACELERAR FECHO COMPORTA
Comprimento
B
102WB3 B
DET DESACELERAR FECHO COMPORTA +AR1/102.E4 +CX1-68X17:1 BK BK -102B3:4 +AR1/102.A4
+AR1/102.E4 +CX1-68X17:2 BN BN -102B3:1 +AR1/102.A4
+AR1/102.E4 +CX1-68X17:3 BU BU -102B3:3 +AR1/102.A4
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 105 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,5 mm² DET COMPORTA FECHADA
Comprimento
B
102WB4 B
DET COMPORTA FECHADA +AR1/102.E5 +CX1-68X17:5 BK BK -102B4:4 +AR1/102.A5
+AR1/102.E5 +CX1-68X17:6 BN BN -102B4:1 +AR1/102.A5
+AR1/102.E5 +CX1-68X17:7 BU BU -102B4:3 +AR1/102.A5
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 106 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,34 mm² DET COMPORTA FECHADA
Comprimento
B
102WB5.1 B
DET COMPORTA FECHADA +AR1/102.C6 +CX10-X100:2 BN BN -102B5.1:1 +AR1/102.A6
= +AR1/102.C6 +CX10-X100:1 BU BU -102B5.1:3 +AR1/102.A6
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 107 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,34 mm² FOT NÍVEL BAIXO COMPORTA
Comprimento
B
102WB5.2 B
FOT NÍVEL BAIXO COMPORTA +AR1/102.C6 +CX10-X100:3 BK BK -102B5.2:4 +AR1/102.A6
= +AR1/102.C6 +CX10-X100:1 BN BN -102B5.2:1 +AR1/102.A6
= +AR1/102.C7 +CX10-X100:2 BU BU -102B5.2:3 +AR1/102.A6
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 108 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,34 mm² FOT GABARITO IMPULSO
Comprimento
B
102WB6.1 B
+AR1/102.E7 +CX1-68X18:6 BN BN -102B6.1:1 +AR1/102.A8
+AR1/102.E7 +CX1-68X18:7 BU BU -102B6.1:3 +AR1/102.A8
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 109 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,34 mm² FOT GABARITO IMPULSO
Comprimento
B
102WB6.2 B
FOT GABARITO IMPULSO +AR1/102.E7 +CX1-68X18:5 BK BK -102B6.2:4 +AR1/102.A7
+AR1/102.E7 +CX1-68X18:6 BN BN -102B6.2:1 +AR1/102.A7
+AR1/102.E7 +CX1-68X18:7 BU BU -102B6.2:3 +AR1/102.A7
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 110 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,34 mm²
Comprimento
B
110WB1.1 B
+AR1/110.E2 +CX2-69X10:2 BN BN -110B1.1:1 +AR1/110.A1
+AR1/110.E2 +CX2-69X10:3 BU BU -110B1.1:3 +AR1/110.A1
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 113 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,34 mm² FOT ENTRADA TAPETE AGRUP.
Comprimento
B
110WB1.2 B
FOT ENTRADA TAPETE AGRUP. +AR1/110.E2 +CX2-69X10:1 BK BK -110B1.2:4 +AR1/110.A2
+AR1/110.E2 +CX2-69X10:2 BN BN -110B1.2:1 +AR1/110.A2
+AR1/110.E2 +CX2-69X10:3 BU BU -110B1.2:3 +AR1/110.A2
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 114 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,34 mm² FOT ENTRADA TAPETE AGRUP.
Comprimento
B
110WB2.1 B
+AR1/110.E3 +CX2-69X10:6 BN BN -110B2.1:1 +AR1/110.A2
+AR1/110.E3 +CX2-69X10:7 BU BU -110B2.1:3 +AR1/110.A2
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 115 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,34 mm² FOT. INTERIOR ROTADOR
Comprimento
B
110WB2.2 B
FOT. INTERIOR ROTADOR +AR1/110.E2 +CX2-69X10:5 BK BK -110B2.2:4 +AR1/110.A3
+AR1/110.E3 +CX2-69X10:6 BN BN -110B2.2:1 +AR1/110.A3
+AR1/110.E3 +CX2-69X10:7 BU BU -110B2.2:3 +AR1/110.A3
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 116 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,34 mm² FOT. INTERIOR ROTADOR
Comprimento
B
110WB3.1 B
+AR1/110.E4 +CX2-69X11:2 BN BN -110B3.1:1 +AR1/110.A4
+AR1/110.E4 +CX2-69X11:3 BU BU -110B3.1:3 +AR1/110.A4
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 117 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,34 mm² FOT. ENTRADA ROTADOR
Comprimento
B
110WB3.2 B
FOT. ENTRADA ROTADOR +AR1/110.E4 +CX2-69X11:1 BK BK -110B3.2:4 +AR1/110.A4
+AR1/110.E4 +CX2-69X11:2 BN BN -110B3.2:1 +AR1/110.A4
+AR1/110.E4 +CX2-69X11:3 BU BU -110B3.2:3 +AR1/110.A4
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 118 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,5 mm² DET PÁS ROTADOR ABERTAS
Comprimento
B
110WB4 B
DET PÁS ROTADOR ABERTAS +AR1/110.E5 +CX2-69X11:5 BK BK -110B4:4 +AR1/110.A5
+AR1/110.E5 +CX2-69X11:6 BN BN -110B4:1 +AR1/110.A5
+AR1/110.E5 +CX2-69X11:7 BU BU -110B4:3 +AR1/110.A5
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 119 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,5 mm² DET MÍNIMO REGULAÇÃO ALISADOR
Comprimento
B
110WB6 B
DET MÍNIMO REGULAÇÃO ALISADOR +AR1/110.E7 +CX2-69X12:5 BK BK -110B6:4 +AR1/110.A7
+AR1/110.E7 +CX2-69X12:6 BN BN -110B6:1 +AR1/110.A7
+AR1/110.E8 +CX2-69X12:7 BU BU -110B6:3 +AR1/110.A7
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 120 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,5 mm² DET MÁXIMO REGULAÇÃO ALISADOR
Comprimento
B
111WB1 B
DET MÁXIMO REGULAÇÃO ALISADOR +AR1/111.E2 +CX2-69X13:1 BK BK -111B1:4 +AR1/111.A2
+AR1/111.E2 +CX2-69X13:2 BN BN -111B1:1 +AR1/111.A2
+AR1/111.E2 +CX2-69X13:3 BU BU -111B1:3 +AR1/111.A2
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 121 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,34 mm² FOT SAÍDA ALISADOR
Comprimento
B
111WB2.1 B
+AR1/111.E3 +CX2-69X13:6 BN BN -111B2.1:1 +AR1/111.A2
+AR1/111.E3 +CX2-69X13:7 BU BU -111B2.1:3 +AR1/111.A2
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 124 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,34 mm² FOT SAÍDA ALISADOR
Comprimento
B
111WB2.2 B
FOT SAÍDA ALISADOR +AR1/111.E2 +CX2-69X13:5 BK BK -111B2.2:4 +AR1/111.A3
+AR1/111.E3 +CX2-69X13:6 BN BN -111B2.2:1 +AR1/111.A3
+AR1/111.E3 +CX2-69X13:7 BU BU -111B2.2:3 +AR1/111.A3
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 125 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4 0,34 mm² DET POS MÁXIMA DISPENSADOR PALETES
Comprimento
B
120WB1 B
DET POS MÁXIMA DISPENSADOR PALETES +AR1/120.E2 +CX3-70X10:1 BK BK -120B1:4 +AR1/120.A2
+AR1/120.E2 +CX3-70X10:2 BN BN -120B1:1 +AR1/120.A2
+AR1/120.E2 +CX3-70X10:3 BU BU -120B1:3 +AR1/120.A2
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 126 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4 0,34 mm² DET POS INTERMÉDIA DISPENSADOR PALETES
Comprimento
B
120WB2 B
DET POS INTERMÉDIA DISPENSADOR PALETES +AR1/120.E2 +CX3-70X10:5 BK BK -120B2:4 +AR1/120.A3
+AR1/120.E3 +CX3-70X10:6 BN BN -120B2:1 +AR1/120.A3
+AR1/120.E3 +CX3-70X10:7 BU BU -120B2:3 +AR1/120.A3
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 127 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4 0,34 mm² DET POS MÍNIMA DISPENSADOR PALETES
Comprimento
B
120WB3 B
DET POS MÍNIMA DISPENSADOR PALETES +AR1/120.E4 +CX3-70X11:1 BK BK -120B3:4 +AR1/120.A4
+AR1/120.E4 +CX3-70X11:2 BN BN -120B3:1 +AR1/120.A4
+AR1/120.E4 +CX3-70X11:3 BU BU -120B3:3 +AR1/120.A4
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 128 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4 0,34 mm² DET PUAS FORQUILHA RECOLHIDA
Comprimento
B
120WB4 B
DET PUAS FORQUILHA RECOLHIDA +AR1/120.E5 +CX3-70X11:5 BK BK -120B4:4 +AR1/120.A5
+AR1/120.E5 +CX3-70X11:6 BN BN -120B4:1 +AR1/120.A5
+AR1/120.E5 +CX3-70X11:7 BU BU -120B4:3 +AR1/120.A5
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 129 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4 0,34 mm² DET PUAS FORQUILHA ESTICADA
Comprimento
B
120WB5 B
DET PUAS FORQUILHA ESTICADA +AR1/120.E6 +CX3-70X12:1 BK BK -120B5:4 +AR1/120.A6
+AR1/120.E6 +CX3-70X12:2 BN BN -120B5:1 +AR1/120.A6
+AR1/120.E6 +CX3-70X12:3 BU BU -120B5:3 +AR1/120.A6
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 130 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4 0,34 mm² FOT PALETE BASE DISPENSADOR
Comprimento
B
120WB6 B
FOT PALETE BASE DISPENSADOR +AR1/120.E7 +CX3-70X12:5 BK BK -120B6:4 +AR1/120.A7
+AR1/120.E7 +CX3-70X12:6 BN BN -120B6:1 +AR1/120.A7
+AR1/120.E7 +CX3-70X12:7 BU BU -120B6:3 +AR1/120.A7
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 131 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4 0,34 mm² FOT PARAGEM ESPERA PALETIZADOR
Comprimento
B
121WB2 B
FOT PARAGEM ESPERA PALETIZADOR +AR1/121.E2 +CX3-70X13:5 BK BK -121B2:4 +AR1/121.A3
+AR1/121.E3 +CX3-70X13:6 BN BN -121B2:1 +AR1/121.A3
+AR1/121.E3 +CX3-70X13:7 BU BU -121B2:3 +AR1/121.A3
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 132 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4 0,34 mm² DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET POSIÇÃO ARMAZÉM
Comprimento
B
122WB1 B
DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET POSIÇÃO ARMAZÉM +AR1/122.C2 +CX30-X300:1 BK BK -122B1:4 +AR1/122.A2
= +AR1/122.C2 +CX30-X300:1:+ BN BN -122B1:1 +AR1/122.A2
= +AR1/122.C2 +CX30-X300:1:- BU BU -122B1:3 +AR1/122.A2
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 133 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4 0,34 mm² DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET POSIÇÃO PALETE
Comprimento
B
122WB2 B
DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET POSIÇÃO PALETE +AR1/122.C2 +CX30-X300:2 BK BK -122B2:4 +AR1/122.A3
= +AR1/122.C3 +CX30-X300:2:+ BN BN -122B2:1 +AR1/122.A3
= +AR1/122.C3 +CX30-X300:2:- BU BU -122B2:3 +AR1/122.A3
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 134 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,14 mm² DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET ACIMA
Comprimento
B
122WB3 B
DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET ACIMA +AR1/122.C4 +CX31-X310:3 BK BK -122B3:4 +AR1/122.A4
= +AR1/122.C4 +CX31-X310:1 BN BN -122B3:1 +AR1/122.A4
= +AR1/122.C4 +CX31-X310:2 BU BU -122B3:3 +AR1/122.A4
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 135 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,14 mm² DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET ABAIXO
Comprimento
B
122WB4 B
DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET ABAIXO +AR1/122.C5 +CX31-X310:4 BK BK -122B4:4 +AR1/122.A5
= +AR1/122.C5 +CX31-X310:1 BN BN -122B4:1 +AR1/122.A5
= +AR1/122.C5 +CX31-X310:2 BU BU -122B4:3 +AR1/122.A5
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 136 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4 0,34 mm² DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - FOLHA OK
Comprimento
B
122WB5 B
DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - FOLHA OK +AR1/122.C6 +CX31-X310:5 BK BK -122B5:4 +AR1/122.A6
= +AR1/122.C6 +CX31-X310:1 BN BN -122B5:1 +AR1/122.A6
= +AR1/122.C6 +CX31-X310:2 BU BU -122B5:3 +AR1/122.A6
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 137 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
4 0,34 mm² DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - HÁ FOLHAS
Comprimento
B
122WB6 B
DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - HÁ FOLHAS +AR1/122.C7 +CX30-X300:6 BK BK -122B6:4 +AR1/122.A7
= +AR1/122.C7 +CX30-X300:6:+ BN BN -122B6:1 +AR1/122.A7
= +AR1/122.C7 +CX30-X300:6:- BU BU -122B6:3 +AR1/122.A7
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 138 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 0,34 mm² DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET PISON
Comprimento
B
123WB1 B
DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET PISON +AR1/123.C2 +CX31-X310:6 BK BK -123B1:4 +AR1/123.A2
= +AR1/123.C2 +CX31-X310:1 BN BN -123B1:1 +AR1/123.A2
= +AR1/123.C2 +CX31-X310:2 BU BU -123B1:3 +AR1/123.A2
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 139 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 EVC145 0,34 mm² EV SOPRADOR CORREIAS
Comprimento
5m
B
200WYV1 B
BN BN
BU BU
BK BK
EV SOPRADOR CORREIAS +AR1/200.C2 +CX10-X100:4 4 4 +CX1-68X40:1 +AR1/200.B2 EV SOPRADOR CORREIAS

C C
= +AR1/200.C2 +CX10-X100:4 BN BN -200YV1:1 +AR1/200.D2 =
= +AR1/200.C2 +CX10-X100:2 BU BU -200YV1:3 +AR1/200.D2 =
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Plano de cables =20204510005100+EX-200WYV1 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 140 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 EVC145 0,34 mm² EV FECHAR GRAMPO ROTADOR
Comprimento
5m
B
210WYV1 B
BN BN
BU BU
BK BK
EV FECHAR GRAMPO ROTADOR +AR1/210.B2 +CX2-69X40:1 BN BN -210YV1:1 +AR1/210.D2 EV FECHAR GRAMPO ROTADOR
C C
+AR1/210.B2 +CX2-69X40:2 BU BU -210YV1:3 +AR1/210.D2 =
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 141 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 EVC145 0,34 mm² EV ABRIR GRAMPO ROTADOR
Comprimento
5m
B
210WYV2 B
BN BN
BU BU
BK BK
EV ABRIR GRAMPO ROTADOR +AR1/210.B2 +CX2-69X40:5 BN BN -210YV2:1 +AR1/210.D2 EV ABRIR GRAMPO ROTADOR
C C
+AR1/210.B3 +CX2-69X40:6 BU BU -210YV2:3 +AR1/210.D2 =
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 142 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 EVC145 0,34 mm² DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - SUBIR
Comprimento
5m
B
220WYV1 B
BN BN
BU BU
BK BK
DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - SUBIR +AR1/220.C2 +CX30-X300:8 BN BN -220YV1:1 +AR1/220.D2 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - SUBIR
C C
= +AR1/220.C2 +CX30-X300:8:- BU BU -220YV1:3 +AR1/220.D2 =
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 143 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 EVC145 0,34 mm² DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DESCER
Comprimento
5m
B
220WYV2 B
BN BN
BU BU
BK BK
DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DESCER +AR1/220.C2 +CX30-X300:9 BN BN -220YV2:1 +AR1/220.D2 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DESCER
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 144 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
3 EVC145 0,34 mm² DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - VAZIO
Comprimento
5m
B
220WYV3 B
BN BN
BU BU
BK BK
DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - VAZIO +AR1/220.C3 +CX30-X300:10 BN BN -220YV3:1 +AR1/220.D3 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - VAZIO
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 145 145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lista de cabos AR1 F10_payper_001_ORIGEN

A A
condutores Seção transversal Página gráfica do diagrama de
Nome do cabo Fonte (de) Alvo (até) Todos condutores Texto de Função
utilizados [mm] interconexão
-3W1 +AR1 +CX1 3G 3 1 ALIM. CAIXA C1 =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/1
-13W1 +AR1 8 8 0,25 ENCODER IMPULSOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/4
-19W1 +AR1 4G 4 2,5 RETIFICADOR FREIO COMPORTA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/5
-21W2 +AR1 4G 4 2,5 RETIFICADOR FREIO ELEVADOR PALETE =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/6
-23W1 +AR1 +P30 6G 4 0,5 TUBO CAIXA LIGAÇÕES ROTADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/7
-24W1 +AR1 8 6 0,25 RESOLVER ROTADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/8

B B
-27W3 +AR1 4G 2 2,5 RETIFICADOR FREIO ROLOS DISPENSADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/9
-43W1 +AR1 4X 4 0,5 TUBO BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/11
-43W2 +AR1 +P20 8G 6 0,5 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA DISPENSADOR PALETES =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/12
-60W1 +AR1 +AR2 0 PAINEL PC
-81W1 +AR1 +AR2 20G 19 0,5 TUBO ARMÁRIO COMANDO =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/13
-83W1 +AR1 +CX4 18G 12 0,5 TUBO CAIXA ELEVADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/14
-84W1 +AR1 +P10 16G 12 0,5 TUBO BOTONEIRA PORTA INFERIOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/15
-51WB1 +AR1 10x 8 0,5 INTERRUPTOR SEGURANÇA ACESSO INFERIOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/18
-11WM1 +AR1 6G 6 2,5 TAPETE AGRUPAMENTO =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/22
-12WM1 +AR1 (4G 6 2,5+2x1,5)C RETIFICADOR FREIO IMPULSOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/23

C C
-14WM1 +AR1 ((4G 6 2,5+2x1,5)C =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/24
-16WM1 +AR1 6G 6 2,5 COMPRESSOR LATERAL 1 =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/25
-17WM1 +AR1 6G 6 2,5 COMPRESSOR LATERAL 2 =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/26
-18WM1 +AR1 6G 6 2,5 COMPRESSOR FRONTAL =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/27
-19WM1 +AR1 4G 4 2,5 RETIFICADOR FREIO COMPORTA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/28
-21WM1 +AR1 4G 4 6 RETIFICADOR FREIO ELEVADOR PALETE =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/29
-22WM1 +AR1 (4G 4 2,5+2x1,5)C ROLOS ELEVADOR PALETE =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/30
-23WM1 +AR1 6G 6 2,5 FREIO ROTADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/31
-25WM1 +AR1 6G 6 2,5 TAPETE ROTADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/32
-26WM1 +AR1 6G 6 2,5 ALISADOR TAPETE INFERIOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/33

D D
-26WM2 +AR1 4G 4 2,5 ALISADOR TAPETE SUPERIOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/34
-26WM3 +AR1 4G 4 2,5 REGULAÇÃO ALISADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/35
-27WM1 +AR1 6G 6 2,5 ELEVAÇÃO DISPENSADOR DE PALETES =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/36
-27WM2 +AR1 4G 4 2,5 FORQUILHAS DISPENSADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/37
-27WM3 +AR1 4G 4 2,5 RETIFICADOR FREIO ROLOS DISPENSADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/38
-28WM1 +AR1 6G 6 2,5 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/39
-30WM1 +AR1 4G 4 2,5 SECÇÃO 1 SAÍDA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/40
-63WPN4 +AR1 +CX1 4 0 0,64 PROFINET
-43WYV1 +AR1 2 2 0,5 EV GERAL PALETIZADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/53
-64Weth2 +AR1 +AR2 4x2 0 0,22 Ethernet

E E
-64Weth3 +AR1 +AR1 4x2 1 0,22 =
-64Weth4 +AR1 4x2 0 0,22 =
-64Weth5 +AR1 4x2 0 0,22 =
-68Weth1 +AR1 +AR1 4x2 1 0,22 =
-300W1 +AR1 +CX100 16G 12 1 COM ENTRADA PRODUCTO: EN MARCHA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/60
-300W2 +AR1 +EX2 12X 3 0,5 COM ENTRADA PALETS: PETICIÓN ENTREGA (RSVA) =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/65
-300W3 +AR1 +EX3 12X 11 0,5 COM SALIDA PALETS: PERMISO ENTREGA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/66
-47W1 +AR1 7 BARREIRA SEGURANÇA DISPENSADOR PALETES =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/67
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM AR1 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
-48W1 +AR1 7 BARREIRA SEGURANÇA SAÍDA PALETES =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/68
-12WB1 +AR1 4X 3 0,34 IMPULSOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/70
-12WB2 +AR1 4X 3 0,34 DET IMPULSOR POS MÁXIMA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/71
-80WB1 +AR1 4 3 0,34 PRESION AIRE OK =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/77
-82WB4 +AR1 4 3 0,34 DET ALTURA RALENTIZAR DESCENSO ELEVADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/78
-82WB5 +AR1 4 3 0,34 DET ALTURA MÍNIMA ELEVADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/79
-83WB7.1 +AR1 4X 3 0,34 FOTS GÁLIBO PLATAFORMA ELEVACIÓN =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/88
-83WB7.2 +AR1 4X 3 0,34 = =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/89

B B
-83WB8 +AR1 4X 3 0,34 FOT TRAMO 1 SALIDA PALETS =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/90
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
-60W1 +AR1 +AR2 0 PAINEL PC
-81W1 +AR1 +AR2 20G 19 0,5 TUBO ARMÁRIO COMANDO =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/13
-64Weth2 +AR1 +AR2 4x2 0 0,22 Ethernet
-49WB1 +AR2 6X 4 0,5 PORTA ACESSO PRÉ-FORMA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/76
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lista de cabos CX1 F10_payper_001_ORIGEN

A A
-101W1 +CX1 +CX10 12G 3 0,5 FOT NÍVEL BAIXO COMPORTA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/16
-63WPN4 +AR1 +CX1 4 0 0,64 PROFINET
-81WB1 +CX1 +CX100 3 2 0,34 ESTADO TÉRMICO RESISTENCIA FRENO =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/63
-81WB2 +CX1 +CX100 3 3 0,34 COM ENTRADA PRODUCTO: EN MARCHA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/64
-23WB1 +CX1 2 2 0,34 ROTADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/72
-23WB2 +CX1 2 2 0,34 DET ROTADOR POS MÁXIMA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/73
-100WB3 +CX1 3 3 0,34 DET COMPACTADOR DIREITA MÍNIMA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/93

B B
-100WB4 +CX1 3 3 0,34 DET COMPACTADOR DIREITA MÁXIMA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/94
-100WB5 +CX1 3 3 0,34 DET COMPACTADOR FRONTAL MÍNIMO =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/95
-100WB6 +CX1 3 3 0,34 DET COMPACTADOR FRONTAL MÁXIMO =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/96
-101WB1 +CX1 3 3 0,34 DET COMPACTADOR ESQUERDA MÍNIMO =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/97
-101WB2 +CX1 3 3 0,34 DET COMPACTADOR ESQUERDA MÁXIMO =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/98
-101WB3 +CX1 3 3 0,5 DET 1 COMPRESSÃO COMPORTA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/99
-102WB1 +CX1 3 3 0,5 DET DESACELERAR ABERTURA COMPORTA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/103

C C
-102WB2 +CX1 3 3 0,5 DET COMPORTA ABERTA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/104
-102WB3 +CX1 3 3 0,5 DET DESACELERAR FECHO COMPORTA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/105
-102WB4 +CX1 3 3 0,5 DET COMPORTA FECHADA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/106
-102WB6.1 +CX1 3 2 0,34 FOT GABARITO IMPULSO =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/109
-102WB6.2 +CX1 3 3 0,34 = =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/110
-103WB1 +CX1 4 3 0,34 DET ALTURA MÁXIMA ELEVADOR
-103WB2 +CX1 4 3 0,34 DET ALTURA DESACELERAR SUBIDA ELEVADOR
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM CX1 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
-110WB1.1 +CX2 3 2 0,34 =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/113
-110WB1.2 +CX2 3 3 0,34 FOT ENTRADA TAPETE AGRUP. =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/114
-110WB2.1 +CX2 3 2 0,34 = =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/115
-110WB2.2 +CX2 3 3 0,34 FOT. INTERIOR ROTADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/116
-110WB3.1 +CX2 3 2 0,34 = =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/117
-110WB3.2 +CX2 3 3 0,34 FOT. ENTRADA ROTADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/118
-110WB4 +CX2 3 3 0,5 DET PÁS ROTADOR ABERTAS =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/119

B B
-110WB6 +CX2 3 3 0,5 DET MÍNIMO REGULAÇÃO ALISADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/120
-111WB1 +CX2 3 3 0,5 DET MÁXIMO REGULAÇÃO ALISADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/121
-111WB2.1 +CX2 3 2 0,34 FOT SAÍDA ALISADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/124
-111WB2.2 +CX2 3 3 0,34 = =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/125
-111WB3.1 +CX2 3 2 0,34 =
-111WB3.2 +CX2 3 3 0,34 FOT ACUMULAÇÃO LIVRES
-210WYV1 +CX2 3 2 0,34 EV FECHAR GRAMPO ROTADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/141
-210WYV2 +CX2 3 2 0,34 EV ABRIR GRAMPO ROTADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/142
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
-122W1 +CX3 +CX30 12G 12 0,5 TUBO CAIXA ELEVADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/17
-122W2 +CX3 +CX30 18G 6 0,5 FLEX =
-111WB3 +CX3 4 3 0,34 FOT ACUMULAÇÃO LIVRES
-120WB1 +CX3 4 3 0,34 DET POS MÁXIMA DISPENSADOR PALETES =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/126
-120WB2 +CX3 4 3 0,34 DET POS INTERMÉDIA DISPENSADOR PALETES =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/127
-120WB3 +CX3 4 3 0,34 DET POS MÍNIMA DISPENSADOR PALETES =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/128
-120WB4 +CX3 4 3 0,34 DET PUAS FORQUILHA RECOLHIDA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/129

B B
-120WB5 +CX3 4 3 0,34 DET PUAS FORQUILHA ESTICADA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/130
-120WB6 +CX3 4 3 0,34 FOT PALETE BASE DISPENSADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/131
-121WB2 +CX3 4 3 0,34 FOT PARAGEM ESPERA PALETIZADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/132
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
-83W1 +AR1 +CX4 18G 12 0,5 TUBO CAIXA ELEVADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/14
-95WYV6 +CX4 3 2 0,34 EV ACTIVAR CENTRADOR PALET PLATAFORMA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/61
-95WYV7 +CX4 3 2 0,34 EV DESACTIVAR CENTRADOR PALET PLATAFORMA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/62
-83WB1 +CX4 3 3 0,34 FOT PALET PLATAFORMA ELEVACIÓN =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/80
-83WB2 +CX4 3 3 0,14 DET CENTRADOR PALET DESACTIVADO =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/81
-83WB3 +CX4 3 3 0,14 DET TOPE FRONTAL PALET ACTIVADO (RESERVA) =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/82
-83WB4 +CX4 3 3 0,14 DET TOPE FRONTAL PALET DESACTIVADO (RESERVA) =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/83
-83WB5.1 +CX4 3 3 0,34 DETS GATILLOS SEGURIDAD PLATAFORMA (SERIE 1) =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/84

B B
-83WB5.2 +CX4 3 3 0,34 = =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/85
-83WB6.1 +CX4 3 3 0,34 DETS GATILLOS SEGURIDAD PLATAFORMA (SERIE 2) =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/86
-83WB6.2 +CX4 3 3 0,34 = =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/87
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
-101W1 +CX1 +CX10 12G 3 0,5 FOT NÍVEL BAIXO COMPORTA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/16
-102WB5.1 +CX10 3 2 0,34 DET COMPORTA FECHADA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/107
-102WB5.2 +CX10 3 3 0,34 FOT NÍVEL BAIXO COMPORTA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/108
-200WYV1 +CX10 3 3 0,34 EV SOPRADOR CORREIAS =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/140
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
-100WB1 +CX11 3 3 0,34 DET IMPULSOR ACIMA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/91
-100WB2 +CX11 3 3 0,34 DET IMPULSOR ABAIXO =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/92
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
-122W1 +CX3 +CX30 12G 12 0,5 TUBO CAIXA ELEVADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/17
-122W2 +CX3 +CX30 18G 6 0,5 FLEX =
-122WB1 +CX30 4 3 0,34 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET POSIÇÃO ARMAZÉM =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/133
-122WB2 +CX30 4 3 0,34 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET POSIÇÃO PALETE =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/134
-122WB3 +CX30 3 3 0,14 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET ACIMA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/135
-122WB4 +CX30 3 3 0,14 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET ABAIXO =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/136
-122WB5 +CX30 4 3 0,34 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - FOLHA OK =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/137
-122WB6 +CX30 4 3 0,34 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - HÁ FOLHAS =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/138

B B
-123WB1 +CX30 3 3 0,34 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DET PISON =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/139
-220WYV1 +CX30 3 2 0,34 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - SUBIR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/143
-220WYV2 +CX30 3 2 0,34 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - DESCER =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/144
-220WYV3 +CX30 3 2 0,34 DISPENSADOR FOLHAS - VAZIO =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/145
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
-41W1 +CX100 +P30 6G 4 0,5 TUBO BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/10
-300W1 +AR1 +CX100 16G 12 1 COM ENTRADA PRODUCTO: EN MARCHA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/60
-81WB1 +CX1 +CX100 3 2 0,34 ESTADO TÉRMICO RESISTENCIA FRENO =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/63
-81WB2 +CX1 +CX100 3 3 0,34 COM ENTRADA PRODUCTO: EN MARCHA =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/64
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 10 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lista de cabos F10_payper_001_ORIGEN

A A
-84W1 +AR1 +P10 16G 12 0,5 TUBO BOTONEIRA PORTA INFERIOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/15
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 11 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
-43W2 +AR1 +P20 8G 6 0,5 BOTÃO EMERGÊNCIA BOTONEIRA DISPENSADOR PALETES =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/12
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 12 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
-23W1 +AR1 +P30 6G 4 0,5 TUBO CAIXA LIGAÇÕES ROTADOR =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/7
-41W1 +CX100 +P30 6G 4 0,5 TUBO BOTONEIRA ZONA ENTRADA SACOS =20204510005100+DOC&CAB/10
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F

1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 13 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lista de peças F02_002_PAYPER_CAF_AGR

A A
Número de pedido Quantidade Designação Tag Fornecedor
1 -2F1
2 -68X1;-70X1
ASHMI600A12160 1 -Aop1 ASEM

WRA240-24 1 FUENTE ALIMENTACIÓN 3X400VAC/24VDC 10A -1G1 CHINFA
WRA120-24 1 FUENTE ALIMENTACIÓN 3X400VAC/24VDC 5A -1G2 CHINFA
SP1404 1 CONVERTIDOR FREC. VECTORIAL SP 2,2/3 kW TAMAÑO 1 -12GF1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES
SM-APPLICATIONS 2 -12GF1;-23GF1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES
SM-ETC 1 -12GF1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES
SM-PROFINET 1 -12GF1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES
B SM-KEYPAD 1 -12GF1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES B
SKB340150 4 -19GF1;-22GF1;-27GF3;-30GF1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES

SK3402 1 CONVERTIDOR FREC. VECTORIAL TRIF 400V 18,5/22 kW -21GF1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES
SP1406 1 CONVERTIDOR FREC. VECTORIAL SP 5,5 kW TAMAÑO 1 -23GF1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES
SM-RESOLVER 1 -23GF1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES
RE/PR40R-4000W 1 RESISTENCIA DE FRENADO 4000W 40 OHMS -21R1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES
RE/PR20R-2000W 1 RESISTENCIA DE FRENADO 2000W 20Ω -R1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES
42006118 1 FILTRO PARA VARIADORES DE FRECUENCIA SP TAMAÑO 1 -12Z1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES
42006119 1 FILTRO PARA VARIADORES DE FRECUENCIA SP TAMAÑO 1 (1405/1406) -23Z1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES
E11855 1 Conector hembra para sensores M12 8 pins apantallado 10m -24W1 IFM Electronic
OGS301 8 Fotocélula emisor. M18. 20m -81B1;-102B5.1;-102B6.1;-110B1.1;-110B2.1;-110B3.1;-111B2.1;-111B3.1 IFM Electronic
E20869 22 Conjunto fijación M18 INOX -81B1;-81B2;-83B7.1;-83B7.2;-83B8;-102B5.1;-102B5.2;-102B6.1;-102B6.2;-110B1.1;-110B1.2;-110B2.1;-110B2.2;-110B3.1;-110B3.2; IFM Electronic
-111B2.1;-111B2.2;-111B3.1;-111B3.2;-120B6;-121B2;-122B6
C -81B2;-102B5.2;-102B6.2;-110B1.2;-110B2.2;-110B3.2;-111B2.2;-111B3.2 C
OGE302 8 Fotocélula receptor. M18. 20m IFM Electronic
IV5004 13 DETECTOR INDUCTIVO 20mm, PNP, 10-36VDC, IP67 -12B1;-12B2;-82B4;-82B5;-103B1;-103B2;-120B1...-120B5;-122B1;-122B2 IFM Electronic
IG5899 2 DETECTOR INDUCTIVO 8mm, PNP/NPN, 10-36VDC, IP67 -23B1;-23B2 IFM Electronic
PN5004 1 -80B1 IFM Electronic
O5P501 1 Fotocélula Sistema réflex -83B1 IFM Electronic
E21212 1 SOPORTE NUDO ORIENTABLE FOTOC. TIPO O5 INOX -83B1 IFM Electronic
E20452 7 -83B1;-83B7.1;-83B7.2;-83B8;-120B6;-121B2;-122B6 IFM Electronic
MK5117 5 Detector para cilindros con célula GMR -83B2...-83B4;-122B3;-122B4 IFM Electronic
E11872 5 -83B2...-83B4;-122B3;-122B4 IFM Electronic
IF5933 13 -83B5.1;-83B5.2;-83B6.1;-83B6.2;-100B1...-100B6;-101B1;-101B2;-123B1 IFM Electronic
OGP302 6 Fotocélula reflex M18 -83B7.1;-83B7.2;-83B8;-120B6;-121B2;-122B6 IFM Electronic
E20923 6 SOPORTE REFLECTOR FOTOC. TIPO O5 INOX -83B7.1;-83B7.2;-83B8;-120B6;-121B2;-122B6 IFM Electronic
IGM206 11 DETECTOR INDUCTIVO 8mm, PNP, 10-36VDC, IP67/69K, Homolg. e1 -101B3...-101B6;-102B1...-102B4;-110B4;-110B6;-111B1 IFM Electronic
D D
O5H503 1 FOTOCELULA REFLEX DIRECTA 10-36VCC, PNP, AJUSTABLE -122B5 IFM Electronic
EVC005 1 -80WB1 IFM Electronic
EVC145 6 -200WYV1;-210WYV1;-210WYV2;-220WYV1...-220WYV3 IFM Electronic
04285 1 -1XP1
M22-L-W 1 -1HL2 Moeller

M22-A 9 -1HL2;-41SB1...-41SB3;-42SB1;-43SB1;-81SB8;-82SB1;-82SB2 Moeller
216563 1 -1HL2 Moeller
M22S-ST-X 9 -1HL2;-43SB1...-43SB3;-81SB8;-82SB1;-82SB2;-84SB3;-84SB4 Moeller;Weidmüller
M22-PV 5 -41SB1...-41SB3;-42SB1;-43SB1 Moeller
M22-K01 10 -41SB1...-41SB3;-42SB1;-43SB1 Moeller
M22-K10 8 -41SB1...-41SB3;-42SB1;-43SB1;-81SB8;-82SB1;-82SB2 Moeller
M22-IY1 6 -41SB1...-41SB3;-42SB1;-43SB1 Moeller
E -43SB1...-43SB3 E
M22-DL-B 3 Moeller
216562 4 -43SB1...-43SB3;-84SB3 Moeller
216380 5 -43SB1...-43SB3;-84SB3;-84SB4 Moeller
M22-DL-G 2 -81SB8;-84SB3 Moeller
M22-LED-G 1 -81SB8 Moeller
M22-DL-R 1 -82SB1 Moeller
M22-LED-R 1 -82SB1 Moeller
216922 2 -82SB2;-84SB4 Moeller
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Lista de suma de artículos : SIE.5SY4350-8 - MOE.M22-DL-W Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 1 1.b
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
M22-LED-W 1 -82SB2 Moeller

M22-I4 1 Moeller
216560 1 -84SB4 Moeller
87301010 3 Murrelektronik
MAN3X1N 3 -3W1...-3W3 PAYPER
MAN4X2,5N 6 -19W1;-21W2;-26WM2;-26WM3;-27W3;-27WM2 PAYPER
MAN6X0,5N 3 -23W1;-41W1;-49WB1 PAYPER
MAN4X0,5N 1 -43W1 PAYPER
MAN8X0,5N 1 -43W2 PAYPER
B MAN20X1N 1 -81W1 PAYPER B
MAN16X1N 2 -84W1;-300W1 PAYPER

MAN12X0,5N 4 -101W1;-122W1;-300W2;-300W3 PAYPER
MAN18X0,5N 1 MANGUERA NEGRA 18X0,5 FLEX -122W2 PAYPER
MAN10X0,5N 1 -51WB1 PAYPER
MAN6X2,5N 9 -11WM1;-16WM1;-17WM1;-18WM1;-23WM1;-25WM1;-26WM1;-27WM1;-28WM1 PAYPER
MAN4G2,5+2X1,5 3 -12WM1;-14WM1;-22WM1 PAYPER
MANBL4X2,5N 3 -19WM1;-27WM3;-30WM1 PAYPER
MANBL4X6N 1 -21WM1 PAYPER
MAN2X0,5 2 -43WYV1;-43WYV2 PAYPER
MAN4X0,34 2 -12WB1;-12WB2 PAYPER
535110 1 -49U1 PILZ
PD1000 1 -1TV1 Polilux
C C
PYP.MAN_2x0,25mm²_SH 1 -13WCTnet1
MAN_PROFINET_4x0.64mm2_SH 5 -63WPN1...-63WPN5
MAN_ETH_(4x2x0,22mm²)_SH 6 -64Weth1...-64Weth5;-68Weth1
AZM200B SK-T-1P2PWA 1 -51B1
AZ/AZM 200-B30-RTAG1P31 1 -51B1
NSYSM1816402DP 1 Schneider Electric

NSYSDP8M 1 Schneider Electric
NSYMDCM20 1 -1B1 Schneider Electric
NSYCCOTHO 1 -1B2 Schneider Electric
NSYLAM14T5 1 LAMPARA FLUORESCENTE 14W -1HL1 Schneider Electric
NSYCVF165M230PF 1 -1U1 Schneider Electric
NSYCAG223LPF 1 -1U1 Schneider Electric
D NSYCRN46250P 1 Schneider Electric D
NSYTBS292412 3 Schneider Electric

NSYAMPM2924TB 3 Schneider Electric
UE10-2FG2D0 1 Relé Seguridad con protección opto-electronica. Señales EDM. -43K3 SICK
1043783 1 -40KF1 SICK
1043700 1 -40KF1 SICK
1044074 1 -40KF2 SICK
1044124 1 -40KF3 SICK
1044125 2 -40KF4;-40KF5 SICK
1200131 2 -47A1;-48A1 SICK
1027908 2 Botão luminoso de reflexão -47A1;-48A1 SICK
7021352 2 Kit de escuadras de fijación -47A1;-48A1 SICK
2022545 2 Botão luminoso de reflexão -47A1;-48A1 SICK
E E
6025930 1 Cable M12 5P M-H 0,6m -47A1 SICK
2046171 1 Kit brazos para mutting -47A1 SICK
1026287 1 -48A2 SICK
6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0 / 6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0 1 -65A1 Siemens AG
6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0 / 6ES7193-6BP00-0BA0 5 -65A2...-65A6 Siemens AG
6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 / 6ES7193-6BP00-0BA0 7 -65A7...-65A13 Siemens AG
5SL4306-7 1 -1F2 Siemens AG
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Lista de suma de artículos : MOE.M22-LED-W - SIE.5SL4204-7 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 1.a 1.b
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
5SL4106-8 2 -1F4;-1F5 Siemens AG

5SL4316-7 3 -12F1;-23F1;-30F1 Siemens AG
5SL4310-7 3 INTERRUPTOR AUTOMATICO MAGNETOTERMICO 3P 10A -19F1;-22F1;-27F3 Siemens AG
3RU29 16-3AA01 1 Módulo de unión -23KM1 Siemens AG
SIE:39119 (Manufacturer: SIEMENS) 2 -42KM1;-42KM2 Siemens AG
3RT20251BB40 1 -42KM3 Siemens AG
B 3RH29111HA22 1 -42KM3 Siemens AG B
5SM3312-0 1 -1Q2 Siemens AG

3RV2011-1DA10 4 -11QM1;-25QM1;-26QM1;-26QM2 Siemens AG
3RV20110BA10 3 -12QM1;-19QM1;-27QM3 Siemens AG
3RV20111CA10 2 -14QM1;-27QM1 Siemens AG
3RV20110KA10 4 -16QM1;-17QM1;-18QM1;-26QM3 Siemens AG
3RV20110EA10 1 -21QM1 Siemens AG
3RV20110JA10 2 -27QM2;-28QM1 Siemens AG
3RT29 16-1PB1 1 Filtro EMC Varistor -23U1 Siemens AG
5SL4 210-7 1 Automático, unifilar, C 2 A -1F1 Siemens
3RA2913-2AA1 6 ACCESORIO CABLEADO Y MONTAJE INVERSOR -16KM1A;-17KM1A;-18KM1A;-27KM1A;-27KM2A;-28KM1A Siemens
3RV29011E 16 -11QM1;-12QM1;-14QM1;-16QM1;-17QM1;-18QM1;-19QM1;-21QM1;-25QM1;-26QM1...-26QM3;-27QM1...-27QM3;-28QM1 Siemens
3RT20151VB41 24 -11KM1;-12KM1;-14KM1;-16KM1A;-16KM1B;-17KM1A;-17KM1B;-18KM1A;-18KM1B;-19KM1;-21KM1;-23KM1;-25KM1;-26KM1;-26KM2; Siemens AG
C -26KM3A;-26KM3B;-27KM1A;-27KM1B;-27KM2A;-27KM2B;-27KM4;-28KM1A;-28KM1B C
H263-41300-033M4 1 -1Q1 SÄLZER

WDGDS10008 2 -13PC1;-24PC1 Wachendorff
WDG58H12-4096-ABN-245-SC8 2 -13PC1;-24PC1 Wachendorff
753-401 24 -68X10...-68X19;-69X10...-69X15;-70X10...-70X17 WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG
753-110 27 -68X10...-68X19;-68X40;-69X10...-69X15;-69X40;-70X10...-70X17;-70X40 WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG
753-531 3 -68X40;-69X40;-70X40 WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG
750-627 1 -68X100 WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG
750-628 1 -69X1 WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG
750-600 2 -69X80;-70X80 WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG
IE-SW-BL08-8TX 1 Network switch, 8x RJ45, IP 30, -10 °C...60 °C -63A1 Weidmüller
IE-SW-BL05-5TX 1 Network switch, unmanaged, Fast Ethernet, Number of ports: 5xRJ45, IP 30, -10 °C...60 °C -64A1 Weidmüller
1122770000 12 -12K1;-19K1;-21K1;-23K1;-27K1;-91K8;-X6-96K1...-X6-96K6 Weidmüller
D D
1600480000 18 -PE;-PE5;-PE11 Weidmüller
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Lista de suma de artículos : SIE.5SL4106-8 - WEI.1600480000 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 1.b 1.b
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lista de peças AR1

F01_PAYPER_CAF
A A
Número de pedido Página / Caminho Designação Tag Fornecedor
NSYSM1816402DP +AR1&/1.A1 Schneider Electric

NSYSDP8M +AR1&/1.A1 Schneider Electric
NSYMDCM20 +AR1&/1.D4 -1B1 Schneider Electric
NSYCCOTHO +AR1&/1.D5 -1B2 Schneider Electric
5SL4 210-7 +AR1&/1.B3 Automático, unifilar, C 2 A -1F1 Siemens
5SL4306-7 +AR1&/1.B6 -1F2 Siemens AG
5SL4204-7 +AR1&/1.C3 -1F3 Siemens AG
5SL4106-8 +AR1&/1.D6 -1F4 Siemens AG
5SL4106-8 +AR1&/1.D7 -1F5 Siemens AG
B 5SL4104-8 +AR1&/1.D8 -1F6 Siemens AG B
WRA240-24 +AR1&/1.C6 FUENTE ALIMENTACIÓN 3X400VAC/24VDC 10A -1G1 CHINFA

WRA120-24 +AR1&/1.C8 FUENTE ALIMENTACIÓN 3X400VAC/24VDC 5A -1G2 CHINFA
NSYLAM14T5 +AR1&/1.E4 LAMPARA FLUORESCENTE 14W -1HL1 Schneider Electric
M22-L-W +AR1&/1.E6 -1HL2 Moeller
M22-A +AR1&/1.E6 -1HL2 Moeller
216563 +AR1&/1.E6 -1HL2 Moeller
M22S-ST-X +AR1&/1.E6 -1HL2 Moeller
H263-41300-033M4 +AR1&/1.B1 -1Q1 SÄLZER
5SM3312-0 +AR1&/1.C3 -1Q2 Siemens AG
PD1000 +AR1&/1.B3 -1TV1 Polilux
NSYCVF165M230PF +AR1&/1.D5 -1U1 Schneider Electric
NSYCAG223LPF +AR1&/1.D5 -1U1 Schneider Electric
C C
04285 +AR1&/1.E3 -1XP1
+AR1&/2.B2 -2F1

MAN3X1N +AR1&/3.C1 -3W1 PAYPER
3RT20151VB41 +AR1&/11.C2 -11KM1 Siemens AG
3RV2011-1DA10 +AR1&/11.B2 -11QM1 Siemens AG
3RV29011E +AR1&/11.B2 -11QM1 Siemens
MAN6X2,5N +AR1&/11.E2 -11WM1 PAYPER
5SL4316-7 +AR1&/12.A2 -12F1 Siemens AG
SP1404 +AR1&/12.C2 CONVERTIDOR FREC. VECTORIAL SP 2,2/3 kW TAMAÑO 1 -12GF1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES
D SM-APPLICATIONS +AR1&/12.C2 -12GF1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES D
SM-ETC +AR1&/12.C2 -12GF1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES

SM-PROFINET +AR1&/12.C2 -12GF1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES
SM-KEYPAD +AR1&/12.C2 -12GF1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES
1122770000 +AR1&/12.E5 -12K1 Weidmüller
3RV20110BA10 +AR1&/12.B1 -12QM1 Siemens AG
MAN4G2,5+2X1,5 +AR1&/12.E1 -12WM1 PAYPER
42006118 +AR1&/12.B2 FILTRO PARA VARIADORES DE FRECUENCIA SP TAMAÑO 1 -12Z1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES
PYP.MAN_2x0,25mm²_SH +AR1&/13.C7 -13WCTnet1

3RV20111CA10 +AR1&/14.B2 -14QM1 Siemens AG
E E
3RT20151VB41 +AR1&/16.C2 -16KM1A Siemens AG
3RA2913-2AA1 +AR1&/16.C2 ACCESORIO CABLEADO Y MONTAJE INVERSOR -16KM1A Siemens
3RT20151VB41 +AR1&/16.C3 -16KM1B Siemens AG
3RV20110KA10 +AR1&/16.B2 -16QM1 Siemens AG
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Lista de artículos : SE.NSYSM1816402DP - PAY.MAN6X2,5N Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 1 1.q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lista de peças AR1

F01_PAYPER_CAF
A A

B 3RV20110KA10 +AR1&/18.B2 -18QM1 Siemens AG B

5SL4310-7 +AR1&/19.B3 INTERRUPTOR AUTOMATICO MAGNETOTERMICO 3P 10A -19F1 Siemens AG
SKB340150 +AR1&/19.C3 -19GF1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES
1122770000 +AR1&/19.E5 -19K1 Weidmüller
3RV20110BA10 +AR1&/19.B2 -19QM1 Siemens AG
MAN4X2,5N +AR1&/19.E1 -19W1 PAYPER
MANBL4X2,5N +AR1&/19.E3 -19WM1 PAYPER
SK3402 +AR1&/21.C3 CONVERTIDOR FREC. VECTORIAL TRIF 400V 18,5/22 kW -21GF1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES
C C
1122770000 +AR1&/21.E5 -21K1 Weidmüller
3RV20110EA10 +AR1&/21.B2 -21QM1 Siemens AG
RE/PR40R-4000W +AR1&/21.B7 RESISTENCIA DE FRENADO 4000W 40 OHMS -21R1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES
RE/PR20R-2000W +AR1&/21.B7 RESISTENCIA DE FRENADO 2000W 20Ω -R1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES
MANBL4X6N +AR1&/21.E3 -21WM1 PAYPER
5SL4310-7 +AR1&/22.B3 INTERRUPTOR AUTOMATICO MAGNETOTERMICO 3P 10A -22F1 Siemens AG
SKB340150 +AR1&/22.C3 -22GF1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES
D SP1406 +AR1&/23.C2 CONVERTIDOR FREC. VECTORIAL SP 5,5 kW TAMAÑO 1 -23GF1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES D
SM-APPLICATIONS +AR1&/23.C2 -23GF1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES

SM-RESOLVER +AR1&/23.C2 -23GF1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES
1122770000 +AR1&/23.E5 -23K1 Weidmüller
3RU29 16-3AA01 +AR1&/23.C1 Módulo de unión -23KM1 Siemens AG
3RT29 16-1PB1 +AR1&/23.C1 Filtro EMC Varistor -23U1 Siemens AG
42006119 +AR1&/23.B2 FILTRO PARA VARIADORES DE FRECUENCIA SP TAMAÑO 1 (1405/1406) -23Z1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES
E11855 +AR1&/24.D2 Conector hembra para sensores M12 8 pins apantallado 10m -24W1 IFM Electronic
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Lista de artículos : SIE.3RT2015-1VB41 - SIE.3RV2901-1E Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 1.a 1.q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lista de peças AR1

F01_PAYPER_CAF
A A

5SL4310-7 +AR1&/27.b.B3 INTERRUPTOR AUTOMATICO MAGNETOTERMICO 3P 10A -27F3 Siemens AG
SKB340150 +AR1&/27.b.C3 -27GF3 CONTROL TECHNIQUES
B 1122770000 +AR1&/27.b.E5 -27K1 Weidmüller B

3RT20151VB41 +AR1&/27.b.C2 -27KM4 Siemens AG
3RV20111CA10 +AR1&/27.B1 -27QM1 Siemens AG
3RV20110JA10 +AR1&/27.B3 -27QM2 Siemens AG
3RV20110BA10 +AR1&/27.b.B2 -27QM3 Siemens AG
C C
3RV29011E +AR1&/27.b.B2 -27QM3 Siemens
MAN4X2,5N +AR1&/27.b.E1 -27W3 PAYPER
MANBL4X2,5N +AR1&/27.b.E3 -27WM3 PAYPER
3RV20110JA10 +AR1&/28.B1 -28QM1 Siemens AG
D SKB340150 +AR1&/30.C2 -30GF1 CONTROL TECHNIQUES D
MANBL4X2,5N +AR1&/30.E2 -30WM1 PAYPER

1043783 +AR1&/40.B2 -40KF1 SICK
1043700 +AR1&/40.B2 -40KF1 SICK
1044074 +AR1&/40.B2 -40KF2 SICK
1044124 +AR1&/40.B3 -40KF3 SICK
1044125 +AR1&/40.B3 -40KF4 SICK
1044125 +AR1&/40.B3 -40KF5 SICK
M22-PV +AR1&/41.C3 -41SB1 Moeller
M22-A +AR1&/41.C3 -41SB1 Moeller
M22-K01 +AR1&/41.C3 -41SB1 Moeller
M22-IY1 +AR1&/41.C3 -41SB1 Moeller
E E
MAN6X0,5N +AR1&/41.C5 -41W1 PAYPER
SIE:39119 (Manufacturer: SIEMENS) +AR1&/42.E6 -42KM1 Siemens AG
SIE:39119 (Manufacturer: SIEMENS) +AR1&/42.E6 -42KM2 Siemens AG
3RT20251BB40 +AR1&/42.E7 -42KM3 Siemens AG
3RH29111HA22 +AR1&/42.E7 -42KM3 Siemens AG
UE10-2FG2D0 +AR1&/43.E7 Relé Seguridad con protección opto-electronica. Señales EDM. -43K3 SICK
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Lista de artículos : SIE.3RV2011-1DA10 - PAY.MAN8X0,5N Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 1.b 1.q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lista de peças AR1

F01_PAYPER_CAF
A A
MAN2X0,5 +AR1&/43.E6 -43WYV1 PAYPER

MAN2X0,5 +AR1&/43.E6 -43WYV2 PAYPER
535110 +AR1&/49.B1 -49U1 PILZ
MAN10X0,5N +AR1&/51.C2 -51WB1 PAYPER
IE-SW-BL08-8TX +AR1&/63.E1 Network switch, 8x RJ45, IP 30, -10 °C...60 °C -63A1 Weidmüller
MAN_PROFINET_4x0.64mm2_SH +AR1&/63.D2 -63WPN1
B MAN_PROFINET_4x0.64mm2_SH +AR1&/63.D5 -63WPN5 B
IE-SW-BL05-5TX +AR1&/64.E1 Network switch, unmanaged, Fast Ethernet, Number of ports: 5xRJ45, IP 30, -10 °C...60 °C -64A1 Weidmüller
MAN_ETH_(4x2x0,22mm²)_SH +AR1&/64.D2 -64Weth1
6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0 / 6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0 +AR1&/65.B2 -65A1 Siemens AG

6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0 / 6ES7193-6BP00-0BA0 +AR1&/65.B4 -65A2 Siemens AG
C C
1122770000 +AR1&/91.D7 -91K8 Weidmüller
MAN12X0,5N +AR1&/122.D1 -122W1 PAYPER
D MAN18X0,5N +AR1&/122.C4 MANGUERA NEGRA 18X0,5 FLEX -122W2 PAYPER D
AR1&/14.D2;+AR1&/14.E2;+AR1&/16.D2;+AR1&/17.D2;+AR1&/18.D2;+AR1&/21.E3;+AR1&/22.E4;+AR1&/23.E1;+AR1&/25.D2;+AR1&/26.D2;+AR1&/26.D5;+AR1&/26.D7;+AR1&/27.b.E3
1600480000 -PE Weidmüller
1600480000 +AR1&/19.E3 -PE5 Weidmüller
1600480000 +AR1&/30.E2 -PE11 Weidmüller
1122770000 +AR1&/96.D2 -X6-96K1 Weidmüller
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Lista de artículos : PAY.MAN2X0,5 - WEI.1122770000 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 1.c 1.q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lista de peças AR2

F01_PAYPER_CAF
A A
NSYCRN46250P +AR1&/60.E2 Schneider Electric

M22-DL-B +AR1&/43.C4 -43SB1 Moeller
216562 +AR1&/43.C4 -43SB1 Moeller
216380 +AR1&/43.C4 -43SB1 Moeller
B M22S-ST-X +AR1&/43.C4 -43SB1 Moeller B
M22-DL-G +AR1&/81.A7 -81SB8 Moeller

M22-A +AR1&/81.A7 -81SB8 Moeller
M22-K10 +AR1&/81.A7 -81SB8 Moeller
M22S-ST-X +AR1&/81.A7 -81SB8 Moeller
M22-LED-G +AR1&/81.A7 -81SB8 Moeller
M22-DL-R +AR1&/82.A2 -82SB1 Moeller
M22-LED-R +AR1&/82.A2 -82SB1 Moeller
M22S-ST-X +AR1&/82.A2 -82SB1 Weidmüller
216922 +AR1&/82.A3 -82SB2 Moeller
M22-LED-W +AR1&/82.A3 -82SB2 Moeller
C C
M22S-ST-X +AR1&/82.A3 -82SB2 Weidmüller
ASHMI600A12160 +AR1&/60.B3 -Aop1 ASEM
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Lista de artículos : SE.NSYCRN46250P - ASEM.ASHMI600A12160 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 1.d 1.q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lista de peças CX1

F01_PAYPER_CAF
A A
NSYTBS292412 +AR1&/68.F1 Schneider Electric

NSYAMPM2924TB +AR1&/68.F1 Schneider Electric
87301010 +AR1&/68.F1 Murrelektronik
+AR1&/68.C1 -68X1
753-401 +AR1&/68.C2 -68X10 WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG

B 753-110 +AR1&/68.C2 -68X12 WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG B

C C
MAN_ETH_(4x2x0,22mm²)_SH +AR1&/68.C5 -68Weth1
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Lista de artículos : SE.NSYTBS292412 - Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
Data 21/07/2015 PYP.MAN_ETH_(4x2x0,22mm²)_SH Cliente TIMAC AGRO BRASIL
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 1.e 1.q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lista de peças CX2

F01_PAYPER_CAF
A A


C C
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Lista de artículos : SE.NSYTBS292412 - WAGO.750-600 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 1.f 1.q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lista de peças CX3

F01_PAYPER_CAF
A A

+AR1&/70.C1 -70X1


C C
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Lista de artículos : SE.NSYTBS292412 - WAGO.750-600 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 1.g 1.q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lista de peças CX100

F01_PAYPER_CAF
A A
MAN16X1N +AR1&/81.B2 -300W1 PAYPER
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Lista de artículos : PAY.MAN16X1N - PAY.MAN16X1N Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 1.h 1.q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lista de peças P10

F01_PAYPER_CAF
A A
M22-I4 +AR1&/84.B3 Moeller

M22-IY1 +AR1&/84.B3 Moeller
216562 +AR1&/43.C5 -43SB3 Moeller
B 216380 +AR1&/43.C5 -43SB3 Moeller B
M22S-ST-X +AR1&/43.C5 -43SB3 Moeller

M22-DL-G +AR1&/84.A3 -84SB3 Moeller
216562 +AR1&/84.A3 -84SB3 Moeller
216380 +AR1&/84.A3 -84SB3 Moeller
216922 +AR1&/84.A4 -84SB4 Moeller
216560 +AR1&/84.A4 -84SB4 Moeller
216380 +AR1&/84.A4 -84SB4 Moeller
C C
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Lista de artículos : MOE.M22-I4 - MOE.M22S-ST-X Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 1.i 1.q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lista de peças P20

F01_PAYPER_CAF
A A

216562 +AR1&/43.C5 -43SB2 Moeller
216380 +AR1&/43.C5 -43SB2 Moeller
M22S-ST-X +AR1&/43.C5 -43SB2 Moeller
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Lista de artículos : MOE.M22-PV - MOE.M22S-ST-X Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 1.j 1.q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lista de peças P30

F01_PAYPER_CAF
A A

B B
C C
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Lista de artículos : MOE.M22-PV - MOE.M22-IY1 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 1.k 1.q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lista de peças EX1

F01_PAYPER_CAF
A A
OGS301 +AR1&/81.A2 Fotocélula emisor. M18. 20m -81B1 IFM Electronic

E20869 +AR1&/81.A2 Conjunto fijación M18 INOX -81B1 IFM Electronic
OGE302 +AR1&/81.A3 Fotocélula receptor. M18. 20m -81B2 IFM Electronic
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Lista de artículos : IFM.OGS301 - IFM.E20869 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 1.l 1.q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lista de peças EX2

F01_PAYPER_CAF
A A
MAN12X0,5N +AR1&/81.B4 -300W2 PAYPER
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Lista de artículos : PAY.MAN12X0,5N - PAY.MAN12X0,5N Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 1.m 1.q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lista de peças EX3

F01_PAYPER_CAF
A A
MAN12X0,5N +AR1&/81.B6 -300W3 PAYPER
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Lista de artículos : PAY.MAN12X0,5N - PAY.MAN12X0,5N Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 1.n 1.q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lista de peças EX
F01_PAYPER_CAF
A A
IV5004 +AR1&/12.C7 DETECTOR INDUCTIVO 20mm, PNP, 10-36VDC, IP67 -12B1 IFM Electronic
IV5004 +AR1&/12.C8 DETECTOR INDUCTIVO 20mm, PNP, 10-36VDC, IP67 -12B2 IFM Electronic
MAN4X0,34 +AR1&/12.D7 -12WB1 PAYPER
MAN4X0,34 +AR1&/12.D8 -12WB2 PAYPER
WDGDS10008 +AR1&/13.D4 -13PC1 Wachendorff
WDG58H12-4096-ABN-245-SC8 +AR1&/13.D4 -13PC1 Wachendorff
IG5899 +AR1&/23.C7 DETECTOR INDUCTIVO 8mm, PNP/NPN, 10-36VDC, IP67 -23B1 IFM Electronic
IG5899 +AR1&/23.C8 DETECTOR INDUCTIVO 8mm, PNP/NPN, 10-36VDC, IP67 -23B2 IFM Electronic
WDGDS10008 +AR1&/24.D4 -24PC1 Wachendorff
B WDG58H12-4096-ABN-245-SC8 +AR1&/24.D4 -24PC1 Wachendorff B
1200131 +AR1&/47.B1 -47A1 SICK

1027908 +AR1&/47.B1 Botão luminoso de reflexão -47A1 SICK
7021352 +AR1&/47.B1 Kit de escuadras de fijación -47A1 SICK
6025930 +AR1&/47.B1 Cable M12 5P M-H 0,6m -47A1 SICK
2046171 +AR1&/47.B1 Kit brazos para mutting -47A1 SICK
1200131 +AR1&/48.B1 -48A1 SICK
7021352 +AR1&/48.B1 Kit de escuadras de fijación -48A1 SICK
1026287 +AR1&/48.D4 -48A2 SICK
MAN6X0,5N +AR1&/49.D1 -49WB1 PAYPER
C C
AZM200B SK-T-1P2PWA +AR1&/51.C2 -51B1
AZ/AZM 200-B30-RTAG1P31 +AR1&/51.C2 -51B1
PN5004 +AR1&/80.A2 -80B1 IFM Electronic

EVC005 +AR1&/80.B2 -80WB1 IFM Electronic
IV5004 +AR1&/82.A4 DETECTOR INDUCTIVO 20mm, PNP, 10-36VDC, IP67 -82B4 IFM Electronic
O5P501 +AR1&/83.A1 Fotocélula Sistema réflex -83B1 IFM Electronic
E21212 +AR1&/83.A1 SOPORTE NUDO ORIENTABLE FOTOC. TIPO O5 INOX -83B1 IFM Electronic
E20452 +AR1&/83.A1 -83B1 IFM Electronic
MK5117 +AR1&/83.A2 Detector para cilindros con célula GMR -83B2 IFM Electronic
D E11872 +AR1&/83.A3 -83B3 IFM Electronic D
IF5933 +AR1&/83.A5 -83B5.1 IFM Electronic
OGP302 +AR1&/83a.A2 Fotocélula reflex M18 -83B7.1 IFM Electronic
E20923 +AR1&/83a.A2 SOPORTE REFLECTOR FOTOC. TIPO O5 INOX -83B7.1 IFM Electronic
E20452 +AR1&/83a.A2 -83B7.1 IFM Electronic
E20869 +AR1&/83a.A2 Conjunto fijación M18 INOX -83B7.1 IFM Electronic
OGP302 +AR1&/83a.A3 Fotocélula reflex M18 -83B7.2 IFM Electronic
E20923 +AR1&/83a.A3 SOPORTE REFLECTOR FOTOC. TIPO O5 INOX -83B7.2 IFM Electronic
E E
E20452 +AR1&/83a.A3 -83B7.2 IFM Electronic
E20869 +AR1&/83a.A3 Conjunto fijación M18 INOX -83B7.2 IFM Electronic
OGP302 +AR1&/83a.A4 Fotocélula reflex M18 -83B8 IFM Electronic
E20923 +AR1&/83a.A4 SOPORTE REFLECTOR FOTOC. TIPO O5 INOX -83B8 IFM Electronic
E20452 +AR1&/83a.A4 -83B8 IFM Electronic
E20869 +AR1&/83a.A4 Conjunto fijación M18 INOX -83B8 IFM Electronic
IF5933 +AR1&/100.A2 -100B1 IFM Electronic
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Lista de artículos : IFM.IV5004 - IFM.IF5933 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 1.o 1.q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lista de peças EX
F01_PAYPER_CAF
A A

IGM206 +AR1&/101.A4 DETECTOR INDUCTIVO 8mm, PNP, 10-36VDC, IP67/69K, Homolg. e1 -101B3 IFM Electronic
B IGM206 +AR1&/101.A7 DETECTOR INDUCTIVO 8mm, PNP, 10-36VDC, IP67/69K, Homolg. e1 -101B6 IFM Electronic B
OGS301 +AR1&/102.A6 Fotocélula emisor. M18. 20m -102B5.1 IFM Electronic
E20869 +AR1&/102.A6 Conjunto fijación M18 INOX -102B5.1 IFM Electronic
OGE302 +AR1&/102.A6 Fotocélula receptor. M18. 20m -102B5.2 IFM Electronic
C C
D OGE302 +AR1&/110.A4 Fotocélula receptor. M18. 20m -110B3.2 IFM Electronic D

E E
OGP302 +AR1&/120.A7 Fotocélula reflex M18 -120B6 IFM Electronic
E20923 +AR1&/120.A7 SOPORTE REFLECTOR FOTOC. TIPO O5 INOX -120B6 IFM Electronic
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Lista de artículos : IFM.IF5933 - IFM.E20452 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 1.p 1.q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lista de peças EX
F01_PAYPER_CAF
A A

B MK5117 +AR1&/122.A5 Detector para cilindros con célula GMR -122B4 IFM Electronic B

O5H503 +AR1&/122.A6 FOTOCELULA REFLEX DIRECTA 10-36VCC, PNP, AJUSTABLE -122B5 IFM Electronic
EVC145 +AR1&/200.D1 -200WYV1 IFM Electronic
C C
D D
E E
F F

FORNECIDO EM TERMOS EXPRESSOS QUE SERÃO TRATADAS A3 Nome LMM Lista de artículos : IFM.E20869 - IFM.EVC145 Projeto 4510.00/15 Data da impressão
1
Teste
TOP-LOAD P M 20204510005100
Folha
Data Nome Data 28/08/2015 1.q 1.q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Programa
6 Programa
Esquemas Pneumáticos
7 Esquemas Pneumáticos
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
B B
Pressão : 6 bar
C
Tensão de controlo : 24V DC C
Norma : IEC
D D
Cliente : TIMAC AGRO BRASIL

Instalação : PALETIZADOR TOP-LOAD P M
Número do desenho : 20304510005100
E E
F F
Título / Frontispício
A3 Nome
Data
LMM
15/11/2013
Projecto
Cliente
4510.00/15
TIMAC AGRO BRASIL
Data da impressão
Escala
Verificação Folha
Data Nome 1 Data 30/07/2015
PALETIZADOR TOP-LOAD P M 1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Tabela de conteúdos F06_002

A A
Localização de
Instalação Página Descrição da página Campo suplementar da página Data Editor
montagem
AA 1 Título / Frontispício 30/07/2015 Ricard
AA 2 Tabela de conteúdos : +AA/1 - =20304510005100+DOC&BOM2/1.a 30/07/2015 Ricard
20304510005100 EX 1 Distribuição 30/07/2015 Ricard
EX 2 Distribuição 30/07/2015 Ricard
B
EX 3 Distribuição 30/07/2015 Ricard B
DOC 1 Lista dos totais das peças : LEG.3126 06 00 - 30/07/2015 Ricard

SMC.SYJ712-5WOU-01F-Q
DOC 1.a Lista dos totais das peças : SMC.Y300 - SMC.ZU07S 30/07/2015 Ricard
C C
D D
E E
F F
Tabela de conteúdos : +AA/1 -

A3 Nome
Data
LMM
15/11/2013 =20304510005100+DOC&BOM2/1.a
Projecto
Cliente
4510.00/15
TIMAC AGRO BRASIL
Data da impressão
Escala
Verificação Folha
PALETIZADOR TOP-LOAD P M 2 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Locais de montagem EX
A A
RDC12->10 RDC10->8
10 ALIMENTAÇÃO ROTADOR 8
B B / 2.E1 B
RDC12->10 RDC10->8
ALIMENTAÇÃO SOPRO CORREIAS COMPORTA 8
12 A / 5.D1
T 12 Y12->10
ALIMENTAÇÃO PLATAFORMA 10
12 D / 3.E1
RDC10->8 ALIMENTAÇÃO GATILHOS SEGURANÇA 6
12 Y8->6 E.1 / 4.E1
ALIMENTAÇÃO GATILHOS SEGURANÇA 6
8 E.2 / 4.E1
12 M1/4" ALIMENTAÇÃO GATILHOS SEGURANÇA 6
IFM.PN5004 E.3 / 4.E1
ALIMENTAÇÃO GATILHOS SEGURANÇA 6
-80S1 E.4 / 4.E1
M1/4" 12 M3/8"
M3/8"
C C
R3/8"
SMC.33120017 M3/8"
5m M3/8"
3/4" 2
Vprog1
3 SMC.EAV3000-F03-5YZ
G3/4"
D D
-46YV1
Z4 VÁLVULA DE PARAGEM
SMC.Y300
SMC.Y300T-A
SMC.AW30-F03E
G3/8 1
FILTRO-REGULADOR
12 M3/8"
1
E E
P1
M3/8"
M3/8"
6-10 BAR
1 2
M-H 3/4"
10 M1/4" 10 M1/4" 10 M1/4"
APLICADOR FOLHAS 10
F / 6.E1
F F
Distribuição
A3 Nome
Data
LMM
15/11/2013
Projecto
Cliente
4510.00/15
TIMAC AGRO BRASIL
Data da impressão
Escala
Verificação Folha
PALETIZADOR TOP-LOAD P M 20304510005100 1 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
D=63
C=125
1 2
M3/8" M3/8"
M1/4" M1/4"
8 M1/4" 8 M1/4"
LEG.06760013 LEG.06760013
B
V2 V4 B
SMC.EAQ2000-F02 8 SMC.EAQ2000-F02 8
D 8 INOX
+CXEV2
8 M1/4"
2 V1
SMC.AR20K-F02BE
C C
1
8 M1/4"
8 8
SMC.SY7220-5WOU-02F-Q 8 M1/4"
V3 4 2
-210YV1 -210YV2
84 5 1 3 82
D D
8 M1/8"
8 M1/4"
8 M1/8"
D 8 INOX
SMC.A200-KM8
E E
1.B8 / B
8 8
F F
Distribuição
A3 Nome
Data
LMM
15/11/2013
Projecto
Cliente
4510.00/15
TIMAC AGRO BRASIL
Data da impressão
Escala
Verificação Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
-83B2
D=50
C=550
1 2
8 M1/4"
SMC.AS2201FG-02-08S
B B
8 8
D 8 INOX
+CXEV4
8 M1/4"
2 V16
SMC.AR20K-F02BE
C 1 C
8 M1/4"
8 8
SMC.SY7220-5WOU-02F-Q 8 M1/4"
V8 4 2
-95YV6 -95YV7
84 5 1 3 82
D D
8 M1/8"
8 M1/4"
8 M1/8"
D 8 INOX
SMC.A200-KM8
E E
Y10->8
1.B8 / D
10
F F
Distribuição
A3 Nome
Data
LMM
15/11/2013
Projecto
Cliente
4510.00/15
TIMAC AGRO BRASIL
Data da impressão
Escala
Verificação Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
B B
-83B5.1 -83B5.2 -83B6.1 -83B6.2
D=32 D=32 D=32 D=32
C=50 C=50 C=50 C=50
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
M1/8" M1/8" M1/8" M1/8"
M1/8" M1/8" M1/8" M1/8"
SMC.AN103-01 SMC.AN103-01 SMC.AN103-01 SMC.AN103-01
C C
SMC.AN103-01 SMC.AN103-01 SMC.AN103-01 SMC.AN103-01

V9 V10 V11 V12
SMC.EAQ2000-F01 SMC.EAQ2000-F01 SMC.EAQ2000-F01 SMC.EAQ2000-F01
D D
1.C8 / E.1
6
E 1.C8 / E.2
6 E
1.C8 / E.3
6
1.C8 / E.4
6
F F
Distribuição
A3 Nome
Data
LMM
15/11/2013
Projecto
Cliente
4510.00/15
TIMAC AGRO BRASIL
Data da impressão
Escala
Verificação Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
6 M1/4"
B B
Y8->6 6
2 1
L 8 M1/8"
V17 6
AS2051F-08
D 8 INOX
+CXEV10
C C
SMC.SYJ712-5WOU-01F-Q
SOPRO CORREIAS COMPORTA
6 M1/4"
V13 2
-200YV1
84 1 3
D 8 INOX
D 1.B8 / A
8 L 8 M1/8" D
SMC.AN200-KM8
E E
F F
Distribuição
A3 Nome
Data
LMM
15/11/2013
Projecto
Cliente
4510.00/15
TIMAC AGRO BRASIL
Data da impressão
Escala
Verificação Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6 6 6
A A
2 2 2
ZFC100-06B
1 1 1
-122B3 -122B4 6 6 6
D=63
C=250
ZU07S
1 2
8 M1/4" 6 6 6
LEG.3310 06 13
10 M1/4"
B B
10
6 6 6
ZU07S
6 6 6
2 2 2
8 8
ZFC100-06B
C C
1 1 1
6 6 6
D8 INOX D10 INOX

+CXEV30
8 M1/4" 10 M1/4"
1 4 2 2 2 3
84 5 1 3 82 84 1 3
-220YV1 -220YV2 -220YV3
SMC.SY7340-5WOU-Q SMC.SY7140-5WOU-Q
D V14 V15 D
10 M1/4"
D 10 INOX
Ø10 10 Ø10
SMC.AN200-KM10 SMC.AN200-KM10
E E
1.E8 / F
F F
Distribuição
A3 Nome
Data
LMM
15/11/2013
Projecto
Cliente
4510.00/15
TIMAC AGRO BRASIL
Data da impressão
Escala
Verificação Folha
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lista de peças F02_002_PAYPER_CAF_AGR_fluid

A A
Número de pedido Quantidade Designação Características técnicas Fornecedor

1
1
1
3
1
1
EVC005 2 5m IFM Electronic
EVC145 7 IFM Electronic
PN5004 2 -1...10 bar IFM Electronic
B 0121 17 17 5 UNIÓN DOBLE MACHO, ROSCAS BSPT R3/8 R3/8 B
0205 17 00 1 Tapón hexagonal interior R3/8" R3/8"
0469 10 17 1 0469 - DOUBLE FEMALE VENTED BSPP BALL VALVE
0469 23 34 1 Válvula rosca doble hembra R1"
1821 17 13 3 1821 - STRAIGHT MALE BSP EQUAL/UNEQUAL ADAPTOR, BSPT THREAD
1821 17 17 1 1821 - STRAIGHT MALE BSP EQUAL/UNEQUAL ADAPTOR, BSPT THREAD
1844 17 17 1 1844 - EQUAL MALE STUD ELBOW TAPER, FEMALE BSP PARALLEL
3310 06 13 1 REGLETA DE DISTRIBUCION CON CONEXIONES INSTANTANEA Ø6mm G1/4
3312 00 17 1 3312 - FEMALE CROSS MANIFOLD BSP PARALLEL AND METRIC
06760013 2 0676 - FLOW CONTROL SILENCER-BSPP G1/4
NSYAMPA2419TB 2 PLACA DE MONTAJE PARA CAJA THALASSA 241x194
NSYTBS1397 1 CAJA THALASSA TBS 138x93x72 TAPA OPACA
NSYTBS24198 2 CAJA THALASSA TBS 241x194x87 TAPA OPACA
C C
A200-KM8 4 SMC AN200-KM8 silencer, AN SILENCER
AN103-01 8
AN200-KM10 2 Ø10
AN300-03 1
AR20K-F02BE 2
AS2051F-08 1 AS*1FG, Regulador de caudal, En línea, Acero inoxidable 1/4 Ø8
AS2201FG-02-08S 4 AS*1FG, Regulador de caudal, Conexión instantánea, Codo/ Universal, Acero inoxidable 1/4 Ø8
AW30-F03E 1
EAQ2000-F01 4
EAQ2000-F02 2
EAV3000-F03-5YZ 1
KGE08-00 15 Pasamuro tubo-tubo D 8 INOX
D KGE10-00 4 Pasamuro tubo-tubo D 10 INOX D
KGH06-01S 12 Conector macho de acero inoxidable Ø6 ->G1/8
KGL08-01S 2
KQ2H08-02S 5 Racordaje con conexión instantánea color blanco - Recto macho Ø8 1/4 8 M1/4"
KQ2R08-10 5 RDC10->8
KQ2U06-08A 1 KQ2U, Racordaje con conexión instantánea color blanco - Y reducción tubo DA=Ø6 DB=Ø8
KQ2UD06-08 1 Racordaje con conexión instantánea color blanco - Y cuádruple de diámetro diferente A Ø6 - B Ø8
E E
KQE12-00 1 PASAMURO TUBO-TUBO D=12 MM EXTERIOR
KQH06-01 1 RECTO MACHO HEXAGONAL R 1/8" TUBO D=6 MM EXTERIOR
KQT12-00 2 T TUBO D=12 MM EXTERIOR
KQU10-12K 1 Y REDUCCION TUBO D=12 A D=10
SY7140-5WOU-Q 1 ELECTROVALVULA 5/2 MONOESTABLE 24VDC M8
SY7220-5WOU-02F-Q 2 ELECTROVALVULA 5/2 BIESTABLE R 1/4" 24VDC M8
SY7340-5WOU-Q 1 ELECTROVALVULA 5/3
SYJ712-5WOU-01F-Q 1 ELECTROVALVULA 3/2 N.C. R1/8" 24VDC M8
F F
Lista dos totais das peças : LEG.3126 06 00 -

A3 Nome
Data
LMM
15/11/2013 SMC.SYJ712-5WOU-01F-Q
Projecto
Cliente
4510.00/15
TIMAC AGRO BRASIL
Data da impressão
Escala
Verificação Folha
PALETIZADOR TOP-LOAD P M 20304510005100 1 1.a
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lista de peças F02_002_PAYPER_CAF_AGR_fluid

A A
Número de pedido Quantidade Designação Características técnicas Fornecedor

Y300 1 Y*00, Base del espaciador (Para AC25, AC30 sin Fijación)
Y300T-A 2
Y310-F02-A 1
ZFC100-06B 6 ZFC, Filtro de succión para aire con conexión instantánea. Caudal 20l/min. Tubo Ø6
ZU07S 6 ZU, Eyector de vacío, Modelo en línea 0,7mm 85Kpa 640mmHg
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F
Lista dos totais das peças : SMC.Y300 - SMC.ZU07S

A3 Nome
Data
LMM
15/11/2013
Projecto
Cliente
4510.00/15
TIMAC AGRO BRASIL
Data da impressão
Escala
Verificação Folha
PALETIZADOR TOP-LOAD P M 20304510005100 1.a 1.a
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Planos e Listas
8 Planos e Listas
8
13 14
15
2000
1
17
2
4
3790
6
830
830
1530
3
16
280
1230
7
1630
10
1230
2150 1530 12
1530
11
1530
1530
17 68021481 14 TACO ANCLAJE MTA M16 L.145 INOXIDABLE
16 68010514 2 ANCLAJE GENERICO "X-GUARD" PARA ROSCAR M8 (PACK)
1530 1130 15 68010513 3 ANCLAJE "X-GUARD" PARA POSTE (PACK 4UD)

14 68010511 9 POSTE SOPORTE "X-GUARD" 50X50 H.2000
13 68010510 6 PANEL CERRAMIENTO "X-GUARD" 1900 X1500
10 68010505 2 PANEL CERRAMIENTO "X-GUARD" 1900 X 800
8 68010458 1 LLAVE X (X-KEY) X-GUARD
3 9 7 990876-03400 5 PEGATINA BARRERA DE SEGURIDAD PALETIZADOR CORTA
6 990876-01900 1 PEGATINA INFERIOR IZQUIERDA BARRERA DE SEGURIDAD
and retrieval system, transmitted, published or distributed in any way.
It may not be modified in any way or stored in an electronic storage
5 990876-01800 1 PEGATINA INFERIOR DERECHA BARRERA DE SEGURIDAD

4 990876-01600 2 PEGATINA TOP LOAD PM
This document is the intellectual property of PAYPER, S.A.
3 210056-02900 1 PROTECCION LATERAL INV CADENA ROD. MOTOR.L=2470mm PASO 130

2 210036-04100 2 PROTECCIONES MUTING
1 210036-04000 2 PROTECCION BARRERA DE SEGURIDAD
POS NUMBER QTY. NAME
HIGHLIGHTED DIMENSIONS DIMENSIONS WITHOUT TOLERANCE REMOVE ALL BURRS AND SHARP
= CONTROLED DIMENSIONS ACCORDING ISO 8015 and ISO 2768 m K EDGES R0.25 OR CHAMFER MAX
CREATED : MAZA, I. 2015/05/18 Quantity SCALE
PAYPER S.A. www.payper.com
Pol. Ind. El Segre, 115 - 25191 Lleida MODIFIED: JORDA, D. 2015/05/21
5 Tel: +34 973 216040 STATE : Released
1:60
Material NUMBER REV. ITR.
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 259 kg 0099800-012 A1 3
NAME
ACCESORIO VALLADO PALETIZADOR STD A.L. A.C.
A3
CLIENTE: TIMAC AGRO CANDEIAS PROJETO: 4510
ND: Vida não determinada - NDR1: Criticidade NV 1
LISTA DE PEÇAS SOBRESSELENTES ESTIMADAS ND2: Criticidade NV 2 - NDR3: Criticidade NV 3 Meses estimados <=
Fator serviço: NORMAL

Prod. Mensal: 480 000 sacos PEÇAS DE PEÇAS DE VIDA MÉDIA
DESGASTE DESGASTE ESTIMADA
CÓDIGO REV. QUANT. DESCRIÇÃO RECOMENDADAS PARA 6 RECOMENDADAS PARA 2 DO COMPONENTE OU
MESES ANOS NÍVEL DE CRITICIDADE
0099800-012 A1 1 ACESSÓRIO CERCA
68010458 A1 1 CHAVE ND
1 m/s
MONTAGE
STANDARD MONTAGE
LADO OPUESTO
2500
714
650
31 68060350 1 CHAVETA PARALELA 8x7x100 INOX

30 68040369 4 ENGRASADOR RECTO 1/8 INOXIDABLE.
29 68021744 8 ARANDELA PLANA Ø10 EXT 30 INOX
9 28 68021693 2 ARANDELA PLANA Ø12 EXT 37 INOX
27 68020888 3 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M14 INOX
5 24 68020490 2 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M14 x 100 INOX
23 68020448 2 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M12 x 30 INOX
7
18 68020044 3 ARANDELA GROWER Ø14 INOX
24 17 68020042 2 ARANDELA GROWER Ø12 INOX
10 12
18 14 67011410 1 MTR SA47DRE90M4BE2HF i:9.23 1.1kW KS-OS3
13 66020443 4 SOPORTE CUADRADO RODAMIENTO D25 ACERO INOX.
16 12 65041124 1 BANDA LISA NAB-11EEDV A.650 CERRADA 5380
30
11 210070-19400 1 LARGUERO IZQ. CHASIS CINTA RODILLOS L.2500 FE
10 210070-19300 1 LARGUERO DER. CHASIS CINTA RODILLOS L.2500 FE
9 141145-02900 1 GUIA TENSOR DCHO CINTA NEWONE PAL TAMBOR Ø121 INOX
21 8 141145-02800 1 GUIA TENSOR IZDO.CINTA NEWONE PAL TAMBOR Ø121 INOX
7 141143-02200 2 CHAPA UNION TENSOR CINTA D.E. INOX
6 140986-01800 1 TAMBOR TRACCION CINTA D.E. Ø25 EJE B.600 RECAUCHUTADO
5 140986-01500 1 TAMBOR TENSOR CINTA D.E. Ø25 EJE B.600 RECAUCHUTADO-INOX

4 140706-01500 1 SOPORTE BRAZO DE REACCION CINTA RODILLOS INOX
3 140706-00400 1 PLACA BRAZO DE REACCION CINTA DISEÑO ESPECIAL INOX

2 140040-02400 17 RODILLO CINTA CHAPA ANCHO 600 METALICO Ø60 INOX
1 072156-02300 1 EJE LARGO SUJECION BRAZO REACCION ASSAC PLUS INOX
Pol. Ind. El Segre, 115 - 25191 Lleida MODIFIED: MAZA, I. 2015/05/26
Tel: +34 973 216040 STATE : Released
1:15
20 23 22 1 28 27 14 4 17 3 26 15 19 13 31 29 6 11 25 Material NUMBER REV. ITR.
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 383 kg 0014170-005 A1 1
NAME
CINTA RODILLOS 60M/MIN ZONA PLANCHADOR A.C.
A2

0014170-005 A1 1 TAPETE ROLOS
65041124 A1 1 BANDA ND
66020443 A1 4 SUPORTE ROLAMENTO >=24M
275
1859
1270
575
1000
600
600
300
70 1585
3
3170
1730
4 2
4 0046001-00304 1 CHASIS EXTERIOR APLICADOR LAMINAS A.C.

3 0046001-00303 1 CARRO TRASLACION DISPENSADOR DE LAMINAS A.C.

2 0046001-00302 1 ALMACEN DE LAMINAS A.C.
1 0046001-00301 1 BRAZO VENTOSAS SUJECION LAMINAS A.C.
1:25
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 897 kg 0046001-003 A1 1
NAME
APLICADOR DE LAMINAS ENCIMA DE PALET A.C.
A3
53 68050023 4 TOPE CILINDRICO Ø40x26xM10
52 68021851 26 TORNILLO APLASTADO DIN603 M12 X 30 INOX
1270
51 68021850 4 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M14 X 20 INOX
48 68020847 4 TORNILLO ALLEN M5 X 35 INOX
47 68020599 8 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M-24 INOX
2850 45 68020576 19 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M10 INOX
1600
37 68020146 4 TORNILLO ALLEN M5 x 20 INOX
B (1 : 11) 33 68020039 22 ARANDELA GROWER Ø10 INOX
30 68020019 4 ARANDELA PLANA Ø14 INOX
29 67011413 1 MTR WA30DRS71M4BE1HF i:32.50 0.55kW KS-OS3
48 9 10 1 28 21 43 11 28 66020453 4 RODAMIENTO A BOLAS Ø25XØ47X12 INOX
31 B 27 66020449 3 SOPORTE OVALADO RODAMIENTO D25 ACERO INOX.
5 14 26 65010239 2 CORREA HTD ABIERTA M.8 ANCHO 30 I.PA L.5360
25 460046-00100 1 PLACA BRAZO DE REACCION APLICADOR LAMINAS INOX
53 24 460045-00100 2 POLEA DENTADA HTD 30 8M 30 TL 1615 NIQUEL QUIMICO
6 23 460044-00100 2 CASQUILLO CONICO EJE Ø25 NIQUEL QUIMICO
55 22 460040-02200 2 SOPORTE PARA POLEA LIBRE INOX
46
21 460040-02100 2 POLEA DENT. HTD 30 8M 30 CON VALONAS A.C.
24 20 460040-02000 4 CHAPA INTERIOR UNION CHASIS INOX
7
19 460040-01800 1 CHAPA SOPORTE CAJA
27 18 460040-01700 1 PATA FRONTAL DE. ALIMENTADOR LAMINAS
35
17 460040-01600 1 PATA FRONTAL IZ. ALIMENTADOR LAMINAS
41 16 460040-00900 1 BANDEJA PORTACABLES
51
15 460040-00800 2 PLACA REFUERZO PATAS
45
22 14 460040-00700 2 PATA FRONTAL ALIMENTADOR LAMINAS
23 13 460040-00500 1 LARGUERO FRONTAL CHASIS
30 12 460040-00400 4 CARTELA SUPERIOR UNION CHASIS
44 11 460040-00300 1 LARGUERO DERECHO
26 10 460040-00200 1 LARGUERO IZQUIERDO
42 9 460040-00100 1 LARGUERO POSTERIOR CHASIS
34 A 8 430229-00800 1 EJE MOTRIZ Ø25 X L.1805

20 7 430220-00500 4 CHAPA LATERAL UNION CHASIS

15 6 220111-00200 2 PLACA ROSCADA FIJACION DETECTOR INOX
18 5 220096-00200 2 PLETINA FIJACION DETECTOR INOX

52 4 141116-00300 4 PIE REGULACION M-24X225 CON PLACA ANCLAJE INOX.
13 3 072156-02200 1 EJE SUJECION BRAZO REACCION INOX
16 2 020787-00500 1 CASQUILLO SUPLEMENTO Ø30XM10X29 INOX
37 1 010008-00600 2 ARANDELA FIJACION Ø34xØ10,5x3
19 POS NUMBER QTY. NAME
12 HIGHLIGHTED DIMENSIONS DIMENSIONS WITHOUT TOLERANCE REMOVE ALL BURRS AND SHARP
36 PAYPER S.A. www.payper.com CREATED : MAZA, I. 2015/05/25 Quantity SCALE

1:30
49 Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 183 kg 0046001-00304 A1 1
NAME
A (1 : 11) 39 3 25 54 29 2 33 8 40 4 50 32 38 17 CHASIS EXTERIOR APLICADOR LAMINAS A.C.
A3

0046001-00304 A1 1 CORPO APLICADOR FOLHAS
66020453 A1 4 ROLAMENTO >=24M
68050023 A1 4 BATENTE ND
67011413 A1 1 MOTORREDUTOR NDR3
B (2 : 15)
B
A
A (2 : 15)
20
12 19
29 62050650312 1 REGLETA DISTRIBUCION DOBLE 2G1/4" Y 6G1/8"
28 62030950781 6 VENTOSA VACIO ZPT50HBNJ50-B01-A18
131
27 62030380271 1 ROTULA COMPENSACION MECANICA CRFK-M16x1,5 FESTO
26 62030380267 1 CILINDRO NEUMATICO Ø50 C-600 CLEAN DESIGN
135
24 68021031 2 TUERCA AUTOBLOCANTE M10 INOX
730
22 68020959 2 TORNILLO PRISIONERO M4 X 5 INOX
1 21 68020934 1 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M16-150 BAJA INOX

14 17 68020564 2 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M-5 INOX
11 21
13
1050
8
16 5 9 68020033 2 ARANDELA GROWER Ø5 INOX

4 7 66030189 1 COJINETE LINEAL D.12 TANDEM BRIDA REDONDA
6 992658-00500 1 ANGULO SOPORTE NUDO FOTOCELULA IFM INOX

22
5 460042-00100 1 SUPLEMENTO CILINDRO BRAZO VENTOSAS
3 4 460031-00100 1 EMPUJADOR DETECCION CARTON

3 460017-00300 1 CASQUILLO REGULACION SENSOR INOX
15 2 460010-00300 1 PLACA FIJACION VENTOSAS
1 060280-00500 2 EJE HUECO WH 30 X46 CR13
6
10
18 CREATED : MAZA, I.
PAYPER S.A. www.payper.com 2015/05/21 Quantity SCALE
1:10
24 Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 16.27 kg 0046001-00301 A1 1
25 NAME
28 2 9 17 29 BRAZO VENTOSAS SUJECION LAMINAS A.C.
A3
Situar orientando la fotocelula
con el espejo de debajo de
la mesa
17
15
5
26
8
9
490
19 16 11
24
21 25 1
10
14
18
303
20
13
15
700 a 1200
22
7
12
27
6
27 68050019 2 TOPE CILINDRICO FREUDENBERG Ø20x12xM6

23 25 68021597 2 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M-3 INOXIDABLE CALIDAD A4
1040 a 1440
1200

12 68010524 10 EMPUÑADURA GRADUABLE ESPARRAGO EN NEGRO M-10 INOX
11 68010159 4 TAPON INTERIOR TUBO 50x50x3
10 142005-00200 4 TOPE LATERAL ALMACEN INOX
9 142004-00200 1 TOPE FRONTAL IZQUIERDO
8 142004-00100 1 TOPE FRONTAL DERECHO
7 142003-00200 2 VARILLA DE PROTECCION TRASERA INOX
6 142002-00200 13 NUDO UNION A 90º INOX
5 142001-00400 1 BARRA FIJACION DETECTOR INOX

800 4 142001-00300 4 BARRA FIJACION TOPES INOX
3 142000-00100 1 ALMACEN LAMINAS CARTON

1000
2 141116-00300 4 PIE REGULACION M-24X225 CON PLACA ANCLAJE INOX.
1 010008-05100 2 ARANDELA FIJACION Ø25XØ6X2 INOX
1:10
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 113 kg 0046001-00302 A1 1
NAME
ALMACEN DE LAMINAS A.C.
A2

0046001-00302 A1 1 ARMAZÉM DE FOLHAS
68010524 A1 10 PUNHO ND
1513 656
41 68040721 1 CADENA PORTACABLES 3500.050.075.0 20 ESLABONES

1456 508 40 68040392 1 TERMINAL CON PERNO SERIE 350
1568 39 68040391 1 TERMINAL CON TALADRO SERIE 350
37 68021144 6 TORNILLO CABEZA AVELLANADA ALLEN M10x20 INOX
400
5 6 13 26 3 31 19 40 12 20 36 10 11 18 24 27 38 20 68020039 4 ARANDELA GROWER Ø10 INOX
30 16 68020012 24 ARANDELA PLANA Ø8 INOX
15 66030110 2 COJINETE LINEAL D.30 TANDEM BRIDA REDONDA.
32 14 66020566 8 RUEDA MACLA GUIA KRO-7003 Ø70 A.25 INOX
17 13 460043-00100 4 LAMINA TENSORA EN ALUMINIO PARA CORREA ANODIZADO
12 460040-01500 1 SOPORTE CADENA PORTACABLESV
41 11 460040-01400 1 SOPORTE TUBO NEUMATICO
10 460040-01300 1 BANDERA DETECTOR IZQUIERDA
14 9 460040-01200 1 BANDERA DETECTOR DERECHA
8 460037-00200 2 CASQUILLO SEPARADOR D32 D21 L7 INOX
16
29 7 460036-00100 1 CUERPO CARRO TRASLACION DISPENSADOR LAMINAS

39 6 460035-00200 4 PLACA TUERCA TENSOR CORREA INOX

5 460034-00200 4 TENSOR FIJACION CORREA INOX
23
25 4 460033-00200 4 SOPORTE TENSOR CORREA DISPENSADOR LAMINAS INOX

3 430254-00600 4 EJE RUEDAS DESPLAZAMIENTO CARRO INOX
9
2 430254-00500 2 EJE EXCENTRICO RUEDAS DESPLAZAMIENTO CARRO INOX
34
35 1 160170-09500 6 ARANDELA Ø35 X Ø10,5 X E.6. AVELLANADA INOX
33
37 CREATED : MAZA, I. 2015/05/22 Quantity SCALE

1:15
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 61.93 kg 0046001-00303 A1 2
15 7 21 1 8 28 22 2 NAME
CARRO TRASLACION DISPENSADOR DE LAMINAS A.C.
A3

0046001-00303 A1 1 CARRO TRANSLAÇÃO DISPENSADOR DE FOLHAS
66030110 A1 2 MANCAL LINEAR ND
21 14
2590 1 8 16 4
18
10
2
17 22
13
7
9
15
23
1914 24
3
19
5
11
DETECTORES
COMPUERTAS
CERRADAS

DETECTOR 1 6 25 20 12 23 23 68020871 24 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M14 x 35 INOX
ELEVACION DETECTOR
COMPUERTA ELEVACION 22 68020584 4 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M12 INOX
COMPUERTA
20 68020481 8 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M14 x 40 INOX.
MONTAGE 18 68020381 2 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M8 x 25 INOX
DETECTOR
ELEVACION LADO PUESTO 17 68020362 4 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M6 x 20 INOX
COMPUERTA
0-1600

4200
DETECTOR 15 68020042 4 ARANDELA GROWER Ø12 INOX

ELEVACION
COMPUERTA 14 68020037 2 ARANDELA GROWER Ø8 INOX
DETECTORES
COMPUERTAS
ABIERTAS 11 65010231 2 CORREA HTD ABIERTA M.8 ANCHO 50 I.PA L.8064
10 430249-00200 1 CHAPA SOPORTE CAJA BORNES INOX
9 430248-00400 2 PLETINA FIJACION DETECTORES COMPUERTA INOX
8 430248-00300 2 PLACA SOPORTE DETECTORES FINAL DE RECORRIDO INOX
7 430247-00100 1 PROTECCION VALLADO COMPUERTAS
6 430246-00100 4 SOPORTE COMPUERTAS EN CHASIS PALETIZADOR
5 0043007-00505 2 CONJUNTO POLEA LIBRE COMPUERTAS A.C.

4 0043007-00504 1 COMPUERTA LADO MOTOR A.C.
3 0043007-00503 1 COMPUERTA LADO CONTRARIO MOTOR A.C.

2 0043007-00502 1 CONJUNTO EJE MOTRIZ COMPUERTAS A.C.
1 0043007-00501 1 CHASIS EXTERIOR COMPUERTAS A.C.
MONTAGE Pol. Ind. El Segre, 115 - 25191 Lleida
Tel: +34 973 216040
MODIFIED:
STATE :
MAZA, I.
Released
2015/06/04
1:20
STANDARD Material NUMBER REV. ITR.
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 664 kg 0043007-005 A1 1
NAME
CONJUNTO. FALSA PALETA A.C.
A2

0043007-005 A1 1 CONJUNTO. FALSA PÁ
65010231 A1 2 CORREIA NDR1
875
106,5
1718
1794
22 1858

1
23 68021776 12 ARANDELA SEGURIDAD M10 INOX
22 68021749 5 TORNILLO ALLEN ABOMBADO Y COLLAR INOX A2 51028 M6x10
20

15 68020197 16 TORNILLO ALLEN M8 LONGITUD 45 mm

10 8 430242-00100 1 CHAPA DESLIZAMIENTO LADO MOTOR
7 430241-00200 4 PLACA FIJACION CORREA AGUJEROS PASANTES INOX
6 430240-00100 2 COMPUERTA LADO MOTOR
5 430238-00200 2 TACO GUIADO COMPUERTAS 70 x 50 x 300

14
24 12 18 15 9 7 3 11 17 6 4 430237-00200 1 PLACA DETECCION SENSOR INOX
3 430236-00300 4 PLACA MEC. ALUMINIO FIJACION CORREA A.C.

5 1 430230-00100 1 PLACA SUPERIOR COMPUERTAS
1:10
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 190 kg 0043007-00504 A1 1
21 13 19 23 2 16 NAME
COMPUERTA LADO MOTOR A.C.
A2

0043007-00504 A1 1 COMPORTA
A
11 56 11
A-A
LAS PARTES VISTAS DEL EJE

CINCADO SE PROTEGERAN
CON PINTURA UNA VEZ MONTADO
11 8 13 1 7 1 2 8 10
15 68060468 2 CHAVETA PARALELA 10X8X70 INOX

14 68060238 2 ANILLO SEEGER EJE Ø35 INOXIDABLE
11 68020874 1 TORNILLO DIN933 HEXAGONAL M14 X 80 INOX
12
6 7 67011403 1 MTR FA47DRE80M4BE2HR i:19.70 0.75kW KS-OS3

6 66020498 3 SOPORTE OVALADO RODAMIENTO D35 ACERO INOX.
9
5 430301-00100 2 BUJE DE APRIETE CONICO TLK133 35X60 NIQUEL QUIMICO

14 4 430229-00100 1 EJE MOTRIZ Ø35 x L.1720
3 430228-00300 2 POLEA DENTADA HTD 8M-50 Z40 CON VALONAS A.C.
15 2 430227-00300 1 CASQUILLO FIJACION BRAZO REACCION Ø45 X L.74 INOX

1 430226-00100 2 CASQUILLO ELASTICO BRAZO DE REACCION

4

1:10
Material NUMBER REV.
3 ITR.
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 18.79 kg 0043007-00502 A1 1
NAME
CONJUNTO EJE MOTRIZ COMPUERTAS A.C.
A3

0043007-00502 A1 1 CONJUNTO EIXO MOTRIZ COMPORTAS
65050056 A1 2 CASQUILHO ND
A
A A-A
7 6 3 4 1 2 4 5
PROTEGER CON PINTURA UNA VEZ MONTADO

5 66020555 1 TUERCA ESTRIADA DE PRECISION ZM30

4 66020400 2 RODAMIENTO A BOLAS Ø30XØ55X13 INOX
3 430245-00200 1 EJE POLEA LIBRE Ø50 L.154 NIQUEL QUIMICO

2 430244-00100 1 CASQUILLO SEPARADOR Ø38 x Ø30 x L.61
1 430243-00200 1 POLEA DENTADA HTD 8M-85 Z40 CON VALONAS A.C.
1:3
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 1.56 kg 0043007-00505 A1 2
NAME
CONJUNTO POLEA LIBRE COMPUERTAS A.C.
A4

0043007-00505 A1 2 CONJUNTO POLIA LIVRE
66020400 A1 4 ROLAMENTO >=24M
4212 1926
B
156
B
SECCIÓN A-A SECCIÓN B-B
A
26 7 6 17 21 27 9 1 23 25 26 19 15 11 19 16 20 3
29 68070583 A1 2 BOQUILLA INSTALACION FIJA SILVENT 216 MACHO 1/4 ANTICORR

28 68021857 A1 16 TORNILLO APLASTADO DIN603 M12 X 25 INOX
27 68021856 A1 8 TORNILLO ALLEN M12 X 50 INOX
26 68021851 A1 48 TORNILLO APLASTADO DIN603 M12 X 30 INOX
25 68021714 A1 2 TORNILLO ALLEN M10 x 130 INOX A4
24 68021470 A1 4 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M6 x 30 INOX
22 68021218 A1 16 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M12 BAJA INOX
21 68020686 A1 4 TUERCA AUTOBLOCANTE M12 INOX
20 68020584 A1 64 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M12 INOX
5 19 68020576 A1 4 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M10 INOX
28 18 68020568 A1 4 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M-6 INOX
27
16 68020042 A1 80 ARANDELA GROWER Ø12 INOX
10 15 68020039 A1 2 ARANDELA GROWER Ø10 INOX
13 990876-01500 A1 2 PEGATINA 2 COLORES (LOGO PAL)570X100
12 430225-00300 A1 2 SOPORTE BOQUILLA SOPLADOR INOX
11 430224-00200 A1 1 SOPORTE FOTOCELULA CRUZADA INOX
10 430223-00200 A1 2 EJE GUIADO L.3550MM X46 CR13
9 430222-00200 A1 4 TOPE DESPLAZAMIENTO COMPUERTAS INOX
26 8 430221-00200 A1 4 CHAPA INTERIOR UNION CHASIS INOX
7 430220-00100 A1 4 CHAPA LATERAL UNION CHASIS
2 6 430219-00100 A1 4 CARTELA SUPERIOR UNION CHASIS
5 430218-00200 A1 8 SOPORTE GUIAS COMPUERTAS A.C.

4 430217-00100 A1 1 LARGUERO FRONTAL CHASIS EXT. COMPUERTAS
22
3 430216-00100 B1 1 LARGUERO IZQUIERDA CHASIS EXT. COMPUERTAS

2 430215-00100 A1 1 LARGUERO DERECHA CHASIS EXT. COMPUERTAS
16 1 430214-00100 B1 1 LARGUERO POSTERIOR CHASIS EXT. COMPUERTAS
POS NUMBER REV QTY NAME

22
16 PAYPER S.A. www.payper.com
1:15
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 205 kg 0043007-00501 A1 1
7 26 20 8 16 20 18 14 4 29 12 24 13 NAME
CHASIS EXTERIOR COMPUERTAS A.C.
A2

0043007-00501 A1 1 CORPO EXTERIOR COMPORTAS
68070583 A1 2 BOCAL ND
992,5
875 117,5
106,5
1718
1794
1858
24 25 68021776 12 ARANDELA SEGURIDAD M10 INOX

24 68021749 5 TORNILLO ALLEN ABOMBADO Y COLLAR INOX A2 51028 M6x10
10 22 68020986 12 TORNILLO CABEZA AVELLANADA ALLEN M12x35 INOX
22
1 17 68020197 8 TORNILLO ALLEN M8 LONGITUD 45 mm
6
7 15 68020165 3 TORNILLO ALLEN M6 x 15 INOX

8
10 430239-00100 1 CHAPA DESLIZAMIENTO LADO CONTRARIO MOTOR
11 4
8 430237-00200 1 PLACA DETECCION SENSOR INOX
12
7 430236-00300 4 PLACA MEC. ALUMINIO FIJACION CORREA A.C.
15
20 6 430235-00200 4 PLACA FIJACION CORREA INOX

19 17 4 430233-00200 2 PLACA TENSORA COMPUERTAS INOX
3 430232-00100 1 LATERAL IZQUIERDO COMP. LADO CONTRARIO MOTOR

13 2 430231-00100 1 LATERAL DERECHO COMP. LADO CONTRARIO MOTOR
5
1 430230-00100 1 PLACA SUPERIOR COMPUERTAS
26
14 16 HIGHLIGHTED DIMENSIONS DIMENSIONS WITHOUT TOLERANCE REMOVE ALL BURRS AND SHARP
1:10
21 9 25 18 3 Material NUMBER REV. ITR.
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 0.19 kg 0043007-00503 A1 1
NAME
COMPUERTA LADO CONTRARIO MOTOR A.C.
A2

0043007-00503 A1 1 COMPORTA
5 3 2 1 4


1 410099-00200 4 ANCLAJE TRANSPORTE
1:20
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 871 kg 0047001-002 A1 1
NAME
CONJUNTO ANCLAJE A CAMION A.C.
A4
2 5
COMPACTADOR
LATERAL
410
COMPACTADOR
FRONTAL
850
3
1700
4
1
850
410
5 430200-00900 1 DEDOS COMPACTADOR FRONTAL A.C.

4 430200-00800 1 DEDOS COMPACTADOR IZQUIERDA A.C.
3 430200-00700 1 DEDOS COMPACTADOR DERECHA A.C.

2 0043006-00502 1 COMPACTADOR FRONTAL A.C.
1 0043006-00501 2 COMPACTADOR LATERAL A.C.
COMPACTADOR
LATERAL POS NUMBER QTY. NAME
350

1:20
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 206 kg 0043006-005 A1 1
NAME
CONJUNTO 3 COMPACTADORES A.C.
A3
753,5 941

54 68021727 2 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M20 x 40 PASO FINO 1,5
393,5
440
669
PROTEJER TORNILLERIA DE ACERO 47 68020850 4 TORNILLO ALLEN M10 x 25 INOX
AL CARBONO CON PINTURA 46 68020686 2 TUERCA AUTOBLOCANTE M12 INOX
SITUACIÓN
DETECTOR 44 68020593 6 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M-16 INOX
CERRADO
21

6 31 46 17 43 16 34 20 14 15 16 27 38 38 68020448 2 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M12 x 30 INOX
5
33
33 53
40

SITUACIÓN 24 37
DETECTOR 29 68020047 4 ARANDELA GROWER Ø16 INOX
ABIERTO
55


25 4 22 68020021 2 ARANDELA PLANA Ø16 INOX

41 20 67011407 1 MTR R17DRS71S4BE1HF i:24.07 0.37kW KS-OS3
52
19 66050083 2 ROTULA HEMBRA M20x1,50 INOX
49
42 18 66020439 4 RODAMIENTO A BOLAS Ø25xØ62x17 INOX
17 66010312 4 COJINETE DE PEDESTAL KSTM-GT40
19
26 16 65010228 1 CORREA HTD ABIERTA M.8 ANCHO 30 I.PA L.1280

14 460044-00200 1 CASQUILLO CONICO EJE Ø20 NIQUEL QUIMICO
55
30 13 430294-00200 2 TOPE CABEZAL INOX
47 12 430213-00100 1 SOPORTE COMPACTADOR FRONTAL
45 11 430212-00200 2 PLACA DETECCION SENSOR INOX
2 10 430211-00200 2 MEDIA ABRAZADERA INOX

44 9 430210-00200 2 MEDIA ABRAZADERA PLACA DETECCION SENSOR INOX
51 8 430209-00200 4 CASQUILLO RODAMIENTO A BOLAS INOX
29 7 430207-00200 2 PLACA FIJACION Y TENSOR CORREA A.C.
7 6 430206-00400 2 EJE GUIADO L.930MM X46 CR13

23
PROTEJER TORNILLERIA 5 430205-00200 2 SOPORTE SENSOR M-12 COMPACTADORES INOX
35
DE ACERO AL CARBONO 4 430203-00100 1 UNION EJE GUIA
54 CON PINTURA
3 430202-00100 1 SOPORTE DEDOS COMPACTADORES
3 2 430201-00100 1 CHASIS BASE COMPACTADOR
13
1 021169-01400 2 ARANDELA ROTULA Ø20 Ø40 E.10
28
1:10
44 29 22 24 40 18 8 48 32 21 27 39 Material NUMBER REV. ITR.
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 60.92 kg 0043006-00502 A1 1
NAME
COMPACTADOR FRONTAL A.C.
A2

0043006-00502 A1 1 COMPACTADOR FRONTAL
66020439 A1 4 ROLAMENTO >=24M
66050083 A1 2 RÓTULA NDR2
66010312 A1 4 CHUMACEIRA ND
753,5 941
360
393,5
53 68021727 2 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M20 x 40 PASO FINO 1,5
671
PROTEJER TORNILLERIA DE ACERO 47 68020850 4 TORNILLO ALLEN M10 x 25 INOX
AL CARBONO CON PINTURA 46 68020686 2 TUERCA AUTOBLOCANTE M12 INOX
SITUACIÓN
DETECTOR 45 68020597 2 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M-20 INOX
CERRADO
21

33
SITUACIÓN 36 32 68020332 2 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M16 X 65 INOX
185
DETECTOR
ABIERTO 33 52 31 68020312 2 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M12 x 70 INOX
37
450
38

41
21 67011407 1 MTR R17DRS71S4BE1HF i:24.07 0.37kW KS-OS3
51
20 66050083 2 ROTULA HEMBRA M20x1,50 INOX
19 66020439 4 RODAMIENTO A BOLAS Ø25xØ62x17 INOX
42
49 18 66010312 4 COJINETE DE PEDESTAL KSTM-GT40
26 17 65010228 1 CORREA HTD ABIERTA M.8 ANCHO 30 I.PA L.1280
54 15 460044-00200 1 CASQUILLO CONICO EJE Ø20 NIQUEL QUIMICO
1 14 430294-00200 2 TOPE CABEZAL INOX
47
13 430212-00200 2 PLACA DETECCION SENSOR INOX
30 12 430211-00200 2 MEDIA ABRAZADERA INOX
2
11 430210-00200 2 MEDIA ABRAZADERA PLACA DETECCION SENSOR INOX
50 45 10 430209-00200 4 CASQUILLO RODAMIENTO A BOLAS INOX
9 430208-00200 2 PLACA FIJACION SOPORTE COMPACTADOR LATERAL INOX
8 29 8 430207-00200 2 PLACA FIJACION Y TENSOR CORREA A.C.
7 430206-00400 2 EJE GUIADO L.930MM X46 CR13
3
23 6 430205-00200 2 SOPORTE SENSOR M-12 COMPACTADORES INOX
5 430204-00100 1 SOPORTE COMPACTADOR LATERAL

35
53 4 430203-00100 1 UNION EJE GUIA
PROTEJER TORNILLERIA 3 430202-00100 1 SOPORTE DEDOS COMPACTADORES

DE ACERO AL CARBONO
44 CON PINTURA 2 430201-00100 1 CHASIS BASE COMPACTADOR
1 021169-01400 2 ARANDELA ROTULA Ø20 Ø40 E.10
5 = CONTROLED DIMENSIONS ACCORDING ISO 8015 and ISO 2768 m K EDGES R0.25 OR CHAMFER MAX
Tel: +34 973 216040 STATE : Liberado
1:10
44 29 9 22 24 40 28 48 19 10 32 27 39 Material NUMBER REV. ITR.
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 52.61 kg 0043006-00501 A1 1
NAME
COMPACTADOR LATERAL A.C.
A2

CÓDIGO REV. QUANT. DESCRIÇÃO RECOMENDADAS RECOMENDADAS PARA 2 DO COMPONENTE OU
PARA 6 MESES ANOS NÍVEL DE CRITICIDADE
0043006-00501 A1 2 COMPACTADOR LATERAL
66020439 A1 8 ROLAMENTO >=24M
66010312 A1 8 CHUMACEIRA ND
2150 2995
405
2190
2020
2150 MONTAJE LADO OPUESTO MONTAJE STANDARD
2590
SALIDA PALET IZQUIERDA SALIDA PALET DERECHA
2250 2720
4 4 28 24 34 7 29 20 24 34
32 22 18 26 13
43 992392-00600 2 VARILLA SOPORTE FOTOCELULA M-12 ROSCA INOX

41 410118-00300 2 PLACA FIJACION SENSOR INOX
39 68021823 8 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M30 x 60
38 68021597 6 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M-3 INOXIDABLE CALIDAD A4
36 68021361 6 TORNILLO ALLEN M3 x 16 INOX CALIDAD A4
31 21 17 25 35 68021211 6 ARANDELA GROWER Ø3 INOX
NOTA:
MONTAR ESTE LARGUERO SUPERIOR SOLO 34 68020584 68 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M12 INOX
PARA TRANSPORTE
UNA VEZ FIJADO AL SUELO DESMONTAR 36 35 38 33 68020576 6 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M10 INOX
14 15 25 68020167 4 TORNILLO ALLEN M6 x 20 INOX
8
15 990876-02800 1 PEGATINA ARMARIO ELECTRICO PAL
14 990876-01600 1 PEGATINA TOP LOAD PM
34 13 410139-00300 8 PLETINA REFUERZO PEINE VERTICAL INOX
24 12 410119-00600 4 SUPLEMENTO BASE PATA 2MM INOX
20 11 410119-00500 4 SUPLEMENTO BASE PATA 1MM INOX
5
30 10 410116-00100 1 GUIA CADENA PORTACABLES
10 9 410115-00300 1 PLACA REGULACION SENSORES INOX
39 8 410113-00300 2 TRAVESAÑO UNION INFERIOR 1950 x 140 x 80
33 7 410113-00200 1 TRAVESAÑO UNION SUPERIOR 1950 x 140 x 80
23
6 410113-00100 1 TRAVESAÑO UNION SUPERIOR TRANSP. 1950 x 140 x 80
19
27 5 410112-00200 4 PEINE DE SEGURIDAD L.2000 A.C.

4 410107-00100 1 PROTECCION ENTRADA PALET 1930 x 570
40 27 21 9 17 23 16 42 33 41
3 410106-00100 1 LATERAL PUERTA CHASIS INFERIOR

2 410105-00100 1 LATERAL CUADRO CHASIS INFERIOR
1 0041006-00301 1 PUERTA SEGURIDAD 1635 X 1520 A.C.
CREATED : TORRELLES, J. 2015/06/17 Quantity SCALE
Pol. Ind. El Segre, 115 - 25191 Lleida MODIFIED: TORRELLES, J. 2015/06/18
Tel: +34 973 216040 STATE : Cambio de producción
1:15
1 3 37 11 12 34 24 20 28 8
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 899 kg 0041006-003 C1 2
NAME
CHASIS INFERIOR PALETIZADOR H.2020 A.C. PARA A.L.
A1
1635
LAS BISAGRAS UNA VEZ MONTADAS
APLICAR CAPA DE PINTURA PROTECTORA
6
8
10 5
1494
1520
3
4
7
11
12 68050159 2 TOPE CONICO FREUDENBERG REF.-3018025

6
12
2

4 68010295 3 KIT 2 BISAGRAS CON TORNILLERIA
1 3 410111-00100 2 TOPE PUERTA SEGURIDAD

2 410110-00200 1 HOJA DERECHA PUERTA SEGURIDAD
1 410110-00100 1 HOJA IZQUIERDA PUERTA SEGURIDAD
1:15
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 27.74 kg 0041006-00301 A1 2
NAME
PUERTA SEGURIDAD 1635 X 1520 A.C.
A3

0041006-00301 A1 1 PORTA DE SEGURANÇA
54 68040642 30 SEPARADOR PARA CADENA PORTACABLES SERIE 1400
2190 53 68040640 1 JUEGO COMPLETO 2 TERMINALES CADENA S.1400 A.100
52 68040638 1 CADENA PORTACABLES SERIE 1400 100X28 R.100 L.1800
1325
42 68020782 4 TUERCA DIN934 HEXAGONAL M3 INOX

23
12
45
5 35 68020481 12 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M14 x 40 INOX.
24 27 33 68020416 16 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M10 x 45 INOX

38 37
2070
1934

52
26
linea referencia 25 68020039 22 ARANDELA GROWER Ø10 INOX
palet 46
15
31 19
2036 9 20 65030396 1 CADENA 5/8" 253 ESLABONES L.4016 INOX
8
10 19 65030387 4 EMPALME CADENA 1" DOBLE N26 INOX
2 18 65030142 4 RUEDA TENSORA PARA CADENA 5/8 Z=14
51 17 65030016 1 EMPALME CADENA 5/8 INOX
4
7 16 420117-00100 1 PLACA DETECCION
15 420104-00200 4 CASQUILLO FIJACION TOPE MAXIMA ELEVACION INOX
25 48
14 420103-00100 2 VARILLA CON FORMA SOPORTE DETECTOR
33 42 13 420102-00500 2 SOPORTE PROTECCION REFLECTOR IFM 05 INOX
MONTAGE 12 420101-00100 1 PROTECCION SUPERIOR CADENA CAMINO RODILLOS MESA ELEVACION
STANDARD 32 17
ENTRADA 11 420100-00100 1 TOPE FIJO CENTRADOR PALET EN MESA ELEVACION
PALET 44 10 420016-00300 4 PATINETE GUIA SISTEMA ELEVACION
6
16 9 420004-00500 2 PLACA NIVELACION CADENA ELEVADOR NIQUEL QUIMICO
9 8 420004-00400 2 PLACA NIVELACION CADENA ELEVADOR NIQUEL QUIMICO
25
7 420003-00300 4 PLACA NIVELACION CADENAS ELEVADOR NIQUEL QUIMICO
29
39 6 420001-00300 1 CHASIS PRINCIPAL MESA DE ELEVACION
5 210058-05400 1 GUIA DESLIDUR C2010 PARA CADENA DE RODILLO 5/8 LARGO 1740
43 23
4 210005-01400 14 RODILLO Ø89 MOTORIZADO SIMPLE ANCHO 1520 CORROSION PROTECT
34 37 3 080492-03500 4 CASQUILLO Ø45XØ16.25 E:8.85 INOX
35 2 0042003-00703 4 MECANISMO GATILLO SEGURIDAD A.C.

48
1 0042003-00701 1 SISTEMA CENTRADO PALET DEBAJO MESA ELEVACION A.C.
21
MONTAGE 47
LADO OPUESTO HIGHLIGHTED DIMENSIONS DIMENSIONS WITHOUT TOLERANCE REMOVE ALL BURRS AND SHARP
ENTRADA 53
PALET PAYPER S.A. www.payper.com CREATED : MAZA, I. 2015/06/01 Quantity SCALE
50 Tel: +34 973 216040 STATE : Liberado
1:20
6 Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 750 kg 0042003-007 A1 1
36 22 3 18 28 41 20 1 NAME
MESA DE ELEVACION PALET EN PALETIZADOR A.C.
A2

0042003-007 A1 1 MESA DE ELEVAÇÃO
65030142 A1 4 RODA TENSORA ND
68050017 A1 4 BATENTE CILÍNDRICO ND
65030016 A1 1 UNIÃO CORRENTE ND
355
130
292
242
140
252
51°
112
23 62030950425 1 CHARNELA HEMBRA INOX. TIPO D32 Cil.32
22 62030950424 1 CHARNELA MACHO INOX. TIPO C32 Cil.32
21 62030380156 1 CILINDRO NEUMATICO Ø32 C-50 CLEAN DESING
20 62030380104 1 HORQUILLA DELANTERA CRSG-M10X1.25
19 68130034 1 MUELLE EXTENSION/TRACCION T42460 INOX
18 68060465 1 PASADOR CILINDRICO DIN-7 Ø8 X 40 INOX
80
17 68060242 1 ANILLO SEEGER EJE Ø10 INOXIDABLE
15 68021064 2 TORNILLO PRISIONERO M8 x 10 INOX
8 2 1 8 68020035 8 ARANDELA GROWER Ø6 INOX
6 66030133 2 CASQUILLO ANTIFRICCION CON VALONA Ø20xØ23x11.5(DORSO BRONCE)
13 5 991272-00200 1 BULON FIJACION CILINDRO DE Ø32

4 420116-00200 1 GATILLO DE SEGURIDAD ELEVADOR INOX
15
3 420115-00200 1 SEPARADOR TOPE SEGURIDAD MESA ELEVACION INOX
21 2 420114-00200 1 EJE ARTICULACION CILINDRO GATILLO INOX
1
1 420113-00100 1 CUERPO MECANISMO GATILLO SEGURIDAD
20
9
11 CREATED : MAZA, I.
PAYPER S.A. www.payper.com 2015/06/01 Quantity SCALE
19 Pol. Ind. El Segre, 115 - 25191 Lleida MODIFIED: MAZA, I. 2015/06/01
1:5
3
4
16
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 13.04 kg 0042003-00703 A1 1
22 17 5 23 10 18 NAME
MECANISMO GATILLO SEGURIDAD A.C.
A3

0042003-00703 A1 4 MECANISMO GATILHO SEGURANÇA
62030950424 A1 4 DOBRADIÇA ND
68130034 A1 4 MOLA ND
66030133 A1 8 CASQUILHO NDR2
62030380156 A1 4 CILINDRO PNEUMÁTICO >=24M
1742 1374
550
1532,8
982,8 550 33 62030380270 1 CILINDRO NEUMATICO Ø50 C-550 CLEAN DESIGN

32 62030380065 1 BRIDA BASCULANTE SSNG-50
31 68040218 4 ENGRASADOR RECTO M6 INOXIDABLE.
30 68021855 4 TORNILLO DIN7991 CAB AVELLANADA ALLEN M8 X 70 INOX
28 68020934 1 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M16-150 BAJA INOX
11 67011411 1 MTR R37DRE90M4 i:22.27 1.1kW KS-OS3
25 10 66050057 1 ROTULA HEMBRA M16X1,50 INOX.
23 9 66020375 4 SOPORTE RODAMIENTO SUPER SMART Ø20
8 420119-00100 1 PIÑON 5/8 Z.22 EJE Ø25 NIQUEL QUIMICO
12
7 420102-00400 2 PASAMANO GRUESO REDUCTOR INOX
16
6 420099-00100 1 EMPUJADOR EN CENTRADOR DE PALET

13 5 420098-00200 2 EJE GUIA SISTEMA CENTRADOR PALET X46 CR13
4 420097-00100 1 CUERPO INFERIOR CENTRADOR PALETS

22
3 420096-00100 1 LARGUERO FIJACION SISTEMA CENTRADO PALET
3 5 2 210113-00900 1 ARANDELA Ø56 X Ø11 X 4 INOX
31
29 9 1 210112-02500 1 CASQUILLO Ø60 X Ø25 X 21 INOX
14

1:15
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 59.21 kg 0042003-00701 A1 1
20 2 8 1 11 19 27 NAME
SISTEMA CENTRADO PALET DEBAJO MESA ELEVACION A.C.
A3

0042003-00701 A1 1 SISTEMA CENTRAGEM PALETE
66020375 A1 4 SUPORTE ROLAMENTO ND
65030296 A1 1 PINHÃO ND
0
220
VISTA SUPERIOR
3630
3 2
26 68021693 A1 8 ARANDELA PLANA Ø12 EXT 37 INOX
25 68021148 A1 4 TORNILLO PRISIONERO M6 x 10 INOX.
24 68021031 A1 2 TUERCA AUTOBLOCANTE M10 INOX
A 5 23 68020869 A1 4 TORNILLO DIN933 HEXAGONAL M12X 80 INOX
6 19 68020412 A1 4 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M10 x 35 INOX
20 15 65060155 A1 45 RODILLO PVC Ø40 RL.665 EJE INOX
16 14 300108-00500 A1 2 ANILLO FIJACION Ø20,2 X Ø30 X 14
7 13 260135-00100 A1 2 VARILLA CON FORMA SOPORTE DETECTOR
9 12 260134-00100 A1 1 SOPORTE SALIDA SACOS EN ACUMULADOR RODILLOS
15 11 260133-00400 A1 1 PATA ACUMULADOR RODILLOS
23 10 260133-00300 A1 2 PLACA FIJACION PATAS EN ACUMULADOR
12 9 260132-00600 A1 1 BARANDILLA IZQ. ACUMULADOR RODILLOS EE 2200
10
8 260132-00500 A1 1 BARANDILLA DER. ACUMULADOR RODILLOS EE 2200

14 17 7 260131-00300 A1 1 CUERPO ACUMULADOR RODILLOS Ø40 EE 2200 MIXTO
6 230003-01210 A1 2 MECANIZADO TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M20 X 110 INOX
25 21 5 230003-01110 A1 2 NUDO BARRAS Ø20 INOX

4 141116-00300 B1 2 PIE REGULACION M-24X225 CON PLACA ANCLAJE INOX.
11 A (1 : 10) 3 140138-00310 A1 2 ARANDELA Ø40 X Ø21 X E.5 INOX
2 010971-00310 A1 2 MANETA APRIETE APLICACION ESPECIAL INOX
26 1 010008-02150 A1 2 ARANDELA FIJACION Ø65xØ20x3
CREATED : JORDA, D. 2015/05/21 Quantity SCALE
Tel: +34 973 216040 1:30
22 STATE : Released
4 Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 0 kg 0026027-004 A1 5
18 NAME
ACUMULADOR RODILLOS Ø40 EE 2200 ESP. A.C.
A3

0026027-004 A1 1 ACUMULADOR ROLOS
65060155 A1 45 ROLO PVC ND
1150
MONTAJE
LADO OPUESTO
1 m/s
MONTAJE
STANDARD
1050
15
1
32 6 14 17 23 20 16 2 2
27
PARTES CINCADAS VISTAS
DE LOS TAMBORES APLICAR 29
PINTURA PROTECTORA
3 6
19
10
29
14 7 31 68040569 8 REMACHE DIN7337A INOX A4 34186 5,0 x 8,0
27 30 68040369 4 ENGRASADOR RECTO 1/8 INOXIDABLE.
31

24 15 67011410 1 MTR SA47DRE90M4BE2HF i:9.23 1.1kW KS-OS3
13 13 65041127 1 BND NNT10ENBU A.1050 CERRADA 2680 PVS10 INT.TRAPE CENT
12 141499-00100 2 CHAPA DESLIZAMIENTO BANDA GIRADOR
11 141498-00400 2 GUIA TENSOR DERECHO CINTA PREPARACION CAPA INOX
10 141498-00300 2 GUIA TENSOR IZQUIERDO CINTA PREPARACION CAPA INOX
9 141497-00100 1 TAMBOR TENSOR CINTA CHAPA SA47 B.600 RECAUCHUTADO CON GUIA
6 141493-00200 1 SOPORTE FIJACION BRAZO REDUCTOR CINTA CHAPA INOX

5 141492-00400 4 PLACA TUERCAS FIJACION TENSOR CINTA INOX

4 141489-00200 1 CHASIS CINTA CHAPA GIRADOR

3 140977-00400 1 TAMBOR TRACCION D.120 RECAUCHUTADO B.1050 GUIA SA47
1 072156-02300 1 EJE LARGO SUJECION BRAZO REACCION ASSAC PLUS INOX
1:15
Material NUMBER REV.
4 21 28 28 25 22 17 26 18 22 17 14 26 30 11 9 ITR.
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 174 kg 0014169-003 A1 1
NAME
CINTA CHAPA GIRADOR SACOS A.C.
A2

0014169-003 A1 1 TAPETE
65041127 A1 1 BANDA ND
1 m/s
MONTAJE
STANDARD
2150
MONTAJE
LADO OPUESTO
1050
2
17
21 16
23 1
PARTES CINCADAS VISTAS
DE LOS TAMBORES APLICAR
PINTURA PROTECTORA 18 26
6 27
30 27 29
3 20
7
12 26
18 9 29 68040569 12 REMACHE DIN7337A INOX A4 34186 5,0 x 8,0
22 25 26 68020888 6 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M14 INOX
25
16 67011410 1 MTR SA47DRE90M4BE2HF i:9.23 1.1kW KS-OS3
14 65041123 1 BND NNT10ENBU A.1050 CERRADA 4680 PVS10 INT.TRAPE CENT
22 13 141498-00400 2 GUIA TENSOR DERECHO CINTA PREPARACION CAPA INOX
12 141498-00300 2 GUIA TENSOR IZQUIERDO CINTA PREPARACION CAPA INOX
11 141497-00100 1 TAMBOR TENSOR CINTA CHAPA SA47 B.600 RECAUCHUTADO CON GUIA
18 10 141496-00600 1 VARILLA CON FORMA SOPORTE DETECTOR
8 141495-00200 1 CHAPA DESLIZAMIENTO BANDA 600 ZONA PRECAPA
15 7 141494-00100 1 CHAPA DESLIZAMIENTO BANDA 600 ZONA CINTA

6 141493-00200 1 SOPORTE FIJACION BRAZO REDUCTOR CINTA CHAPA INOX

5 141492-00400 4 PLACA TUERCAS FIJACION TENSOR CINTA INOX
12 4 141489-00100 1 CHASIS CINTA CHAPA PREPARACION CAPA

3 140977-00400 1 TAMBOR TRACCION D.120 RECAUCHUTADO B.1050 GUIA SA47
11 1 072156-02300 1 EJE LARGO SUJECION BRAZO REACCION ASSAC PLUS INOX
EDGES R0.25 OR CHAMFER MAX
= CONTROLED DIMENSIONS ACCORDING ISO 8015 and ISO 2768 m K
1:15
10 24 26 20
28
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 294 kg 0014168-003 A1 1
NAME
CINTA CHAPA PREPARACION CAPA PALETIZADOR A.C.
A2

0014168-003 A1 1 TAPETE
65041123 A1 1 BANDA ND
MONTAJE MONTAJE
STANDARD LADO OPUESTO
3050
3046 1088
21
31
31
2 14 31 20 16 11 34 28 21 32 10 6 24 33 68020928 4 TORNILLO ALLEN M14 X 50 INOX
33 30 68020847 8 TORNILLO ALLEN M5 X 35 INOX
MONTAJE FRONTAL 26 68020504 6 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M16 x 40 INOX
32
TORO EN CAMINO 25 68020502 6 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M16 x 35 INOX
RODILLOS 24 68020481 2 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M14 x 40 INOX.

21

4
26 14 65010235 2 CORREA ABIERTA PLANA PU F8 A.75 L.1700
13 220110-00200 3 PLETINA FIJACION DETECTOR INDUCTIVO
12 220085-00100 2 ANGULO FIJACION BARANDILLA REGULACION LARGO PALET
18
11 220084-00100 2 CONTRAPLACA FIJACION CORREA
10 220083-00100 2 PLACA BASE TENSOR CORREA
27
9 220082-00100 1 TOPE REGULABLE LARGO PALET
8 220081-00100 2 GUIA VERTICAL PALETS
22 7 220080-00100 1 TRAVESAÑO UNION GUIA PALET
30
6 220079-00100 1 TRAVESAÑO UNION CUERPO TORO
13 5 220078-00200 1 POSTE DERECHO TORO DISTRIBUIDOR GUIA INOX

8
4 220077-00200 1 POSTE IZQUIERDO TORO DISTRIBUIDOR GUIA INOX
15
3 220076-00100 1 BASE FIJACION SUELO TORO

19 29 2 0022001-20002 1 CARRO ELEVACION TORO A.C.
1 0022001-20001 1 SISTEMA TRASLACION HORQUILLAS TORO A.C.
23
1:15
25 18 5 22 29 1 3
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 837 kg 0022001-200 B1 2
NAME
TORO DISTRIBUIDOR PALETS A.C.
A1

0022001-200 B1 1 DISTRIBUIDOR PALETES
1690 756
425-625
19
14
21
25 68021856 4 TORNILLO ALLEN M12 X 50 INOX

24
24 68021696 4 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M8 BAJA INOX
22
20 21 68021141 4 TORNILLO PRISIONERO M8 x 20 INOX.

1 20 68021093 2 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M16 X 200 INOX
13
12 9 18 68020593 2 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M-16 INOX
18 8 220107-00100 1 CARRO TRASLACION HORQUILLAS TORO

7 220101-00300 8 EJE ARTICULACION RODAMIENTOS GUIA EN TORO
6 220091-00100 2 HORQUILLA PALETS VACIOS
11
5 220090-00200 2 CONTRAPLACA FIJACION HORQUILLA TORO

4 220089-00100 2 PATIN GUIA HORIZONTAL CABEZAL TORO
3
3 220024-00300 2 TORNILLO DE TENSION PARA CADENA.

2 210113-01000 8 ARANDELA D.60 d16.5 X 8 INOX
6
1 160170-09500 8 ARANDELA Ø35 X Ø10,5 X E.6. AVELLANADA INOX

23
15 25 4 6
1:10
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 141 kg 0022001-20001 A1 2
NAME
SISTEMA TRASLACION HORQUILLAS TORO A.C.
A2

0022001-20001 A1 1 SISTEMA TRANSLAÇÃO GARFOS
66020439 A1 16 ROLAMENTO >=24M
B C
SECCIÓN B-B SECCIÓN C-C D 64 68020969 A1 4 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M16 x 65 INOX
61 68021222 A1 4 TORNILLO CABEZA GOTA DE SEBO M12X25 CON HEXAGONO I
60 68060385 A1 2 CHAVETA PARALELA 12x8x80 INOX
59 68021144 A1 8 TORNILLO CABEZA AVELLANADA ALLEN M10x20 INOX
57 68020024 A1 4 ARANDELA PLANA Ø20 INOX
B DETALLE D 50 68020021 A1 1 ARANDELA PLANA Ø16 INOX
C (1 : 6)
47 68020146 A1 4 TORNILLO ALLEN M5 x 20 INOX
46 68021335 A1 4 TUERCA CIEGA M6 INOX. CALIDAD A4
CASQUILLO 44 68021523 A1 4 ARANDELA PLANA Ø6 EXT 18 INOX
SEPARADOR
SECCIÓN A-A
36 68020593 A1 1 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M-16 INOX
A A 35 68020047 A1 9 ARANDELA GROWER Ø16 INOX
28 67011404 A1 1 MTRDMTR FA67BDRE80M4BE1HF i:109.04 0.75kW RAL1018 OS3
30 62 27 66020493 A1 2 SOPORTE OVALADO RODAMIENTO D40 ACERO INOX.
27
51 8 26 66020439 A1 16 RODAMIENTO A BOLAS Ø25xØ62x17 INOX
61 25 65030142 A1 1 RUEDA TENSORA PARA CADENA 5/8 Z=14
21 9 24 67011406 A1 1 MTR R07DR63L4BRHR i:16.73 0.25kW KS-OS3
42
41 23 65030397 A1 1 CADENA 5/8" 197 ESLABONES L.3127 INOX
65
16 37 22 65030016 A1 2 EMPALME CADENA 5/8 INOX
5 40 40 21 220087-00200 A1 1 TAPA CUBIERTA MECANISMO TORO
33 60
12 38 20 050661-08100 A1 1 CASQUILLO SEPARADOR Ø50 X Ø20 X L12 INOX
47 28 19 080492-03400 A1 1 CASQUILLO Ø45xØ16.25 e:8.85
58 32
18 210113-01000 A1 4 ARANDELA D.60 d16.5 X 8 INOX
4 17 220112-00200 A1 1 PIÑON 5/8 Z14 EJE Ø=20
49 59 16 220111-00200 A1 2 PLACA ROSCADA FIJACION DETECTOR INOX

23 15 160170-09500 A1 8 ARANDELA Ø35 X Ø10,5 X E.6. AVELLANADA INOX
14 15
14 160170-08600 A1 1 ARANDELA Ø37 X Ø6,5 X E.4
17
20 26 13 220109-00200 A1 2 GRUESO 6MM MOTORREDUCTOR R07
43 12 220106-00200 A1 1 CASQUILLO SEPARADOR Ø60 x Ø40 x 7
13 10
44 11 220102-00200 A1 4 TOPE TENSOR EJE RODAMIENTOS
45 18
10 220101-00300 A1 8 EJE ARTICULACION RODAMIENTOS GUIA EN TORO
46
24 11 9 220100-00200 A1 2 PLACA FIJACION BANDA EN TAMBOR ELEVACION TORO
35 8 220099-00200 A1 2 EJE ENROLLAMIENTO BANDA ELEVACION TORO
7 220098-00200 A1 2 PLACA TUERCA FIJACION GUIA PUAS
64
6 220097-00100 B1 2 GUIA PUAS TORO

63 5 220096-00200 A1 2 PLETINA FIJACION DETECTOR INOX

48 4 220095-00100 B1 4 CENTRADOR EN GUIADO VERTICAL TORO
3 220094-00400 A1 1 BANDERA DETECCION PARADA VERTICAL TORO

53
2 220108-00200 A1 1 SOPORTE PIÑON CADENA
1 1 220108-00300 A1 1 CUERPO PRINCIPAL TORO GUIA INOX
54 POS NUMBER REV QTY NAME
56 CREATED : TORRELLES, J. 2015/06/16
PAYPER S.A. www.payper.com Quantity SCALE
MODIFIED: TORRELLES, J. 2015/06/16
57 Pol. Ind. El Segre, 115 - 25191 Lleida
1:12
39 Material NUMBER REV. ITR.
7
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 266 kg 0022001-20002 B1 2
NAME
22 3 34 25 19 51 2 50 29 36 30 31 6 CARRO ELEVACION TORO A.C.
A2

0022001-20002 B1 1 CARRO ELEVAÇÃO ANEL
080492-03400 A1 1 CASQUILHO NDR2
66020439 A1 16 ROLAMENTO >=24M
4375
2308
2150 3020 1355
608
1248
1520 1950
3 40 ? 54 53 16 55 41 42 43 39 13 12 38 56 11 8 2 51 18 28 30 29 47 48 23 49 24 4 25 14 27 10 22 9 15 26 31

47 68021854 A1 1 TORNILLO DIN933 HEXAGONAL M24 X 120 INOX
19 40 68020146 A1 4 TORNILLO ALLEN M5 x 20 INOX
37 68020481 A1 8 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M14 x 40 INOX.
34
31 68020883 A1 1 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M20 X 50 INOX
44
2590

32
21 25 68021557 A1 4 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL DIN933 M20 x 110 INOX. CALIDAD A4
35
24 67011400 A1 1 MTR K87DRE160MC4BE20HR i:31.39 11kW RAL1013 KS-OS3
23 65030393 A1 1 CADENA 1" TRIPLE 66 ESLABONES L.1676,4 INOX
3945
1
37 22 65030388 A1 1 EMPALME CADENA 1" TRIPLE N26 INOX
45 21 990876-02100 A1 2 LOGO PAL 180X180 TRANSPARENTE
46 20 990876-01500 A1 1 PEGATINA 2 COLORES (LOGO PAL)570X100
19 990876-02700 A1 1 PEGATINA LOGO PAL 400X400
18 410134-00200 A1 1 PROTECCION CADENA MOTOR K87
20
17 410118-00200 A1 2 PLACA FIJACION SENSOR INOX
6 16 410115-00300 A1 1 PLACA REGULACION SENSORES INOX
33 15 410142-00200 A1 1 ARANDELA FIJACION MOTOR INOX
14 410140-00300 A1 1 PLETINA MOTOR K87 INOX
13 410139-00400 A1 2 PLETINA FIJACION PROTECCION INOX
12 410138-00100 A1 2 PROTECCION CADENA SUPERIOR
1355
11 410137-00100 A1 2 GUIA CADENA RODILLOS DOBLE

10 410144-00300 A1 1 CASQUILLO SEPARADOR INOX
9 410145-00300 A1 1 PIÑON 1" TRIPLEX Z:28 NIQUEL QUIMICO
8 410141-00500 A1 4 PEINE SEGURIDAD SUPERIOR INOX
7 410109-00100 A1 1 PROTECCION SEGURIDAD ENCIMA CUADRO
6 410136-00100 A1 2 TIRANTE UNION RASTRILLO Y CINTA
1900 5 410135-00100 A1 1 CHASIS SOPORTE CINTA AGRUPAMIENTO

4 410133-00200 A1 1 PLETINA TENSORA MOTOR K87
3 0041007-00702 A1 2 PIÑON LIBRE A.C.

2 0041007-00701 A1 1 CONJUNTO TRACCION ELEVADOR PALETS A.C.
1 410120-00100 C1 1 CHASIS SUPERIOR PALETIZADOR
1:20
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 985 kg 0041007-007 B1 2
NAME
CUERPO SUPERIOR CENTRA PALETIZADOR A.C.
A1

0041007-007 B1 1 CORPO SUPERIOR
65030393 A1 1 CORRENTE ND
278
DETALLE MONTAJE
120
39
108
250
57 63
ZONA EXTERIOR ZONA INTERIOR
PALETIZADOR 120 PALETIZADOR
12 68060462 2 ANILLO DIN471 SEEGER EJE D60 INOX

2
9 9 68020481 8 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M14 x 40 INOX.
3
7 66020557 2 CASQUETE PROTECTOR RODAMIENTO D60
6 6 66020556 2 SOPORTE BRIDA RODAMIENTO RME60-N
5 410132-00200 1 EJE 60X255 X46 CR13

11
4 410131-00200 1 PIÑON 1" Z20 DOBLE NIQUEL QUIMICO
10 3 410130-00100 2 SOPORTE RODAMIENTO

2 410129-00200 4 PLETINA FIJACION PLACA RODAMIENTO INOX
8
1 140967-01000 2 CHAVETA PARALELA 18X11 L.45 INOX
4 5 1 12 HIGHLIGHTED DIMENSIONS DIMENSIONS WITHOUT TOLERANCE REMOVE ALL BURRS AND SHARP
1:5
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 17.7 kg 0041007-00702 A1 1
NAME
PIÑON LIBRE A.C.
A3

0041007-00702 A1 2 PINHÃO
66020557 A1 4 CAPA PROTETORA ND
5 21 13 4 6 23 19 24 28 27 8
EJES CINCADOS, SE PROTEGERAN

LAS PARTES VISIBLES CON
PINTURA UNA VEZ MONTADOS
2 17 20 7 1 26 3 20 9 2 14 25 16 18 15 22

24 68020889 4 TUERCA DIN934 HEXAGONAL M18 INOX
23 68020841 4 ARANDELA DIN125 PLANA D18 INOX
21 68020483 1 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M14 X 45 INOX.
15 66020557 2 CASQUETE PROTECTOR RODAMIENTO D60
14 66020556 4 SOPORTE BRIDA RODAMIENTO RME60-N
13 65030392 2 CADENA 1" DOBLE 202 ESLABONES L.5130.8 INOX
12 65030391 2 CADENA 1" DOBLE 122 ESLABONES L.3098.8 INOX
11 65030387 4 EMPALME CADENA 1" DOBLE N26 INOX
10 410128-00300 4 CONTRAPESO CADENA NIQUEL QUIMICO
9 410127-00200 4 PIÑON 1" DOBLE Z:20 NIQUEL QUIMICO
8 410126-00300 1 PIÑON 1" TRIPLEX Z:34 NIQUEL QUIMICO
12 7 410125-00200 1 EJE ACCIONAMIENTO ELEVADOR
6 410124-00100 4 PROTECTOR CURVA PIÑON TRACCION
10 5 410123-00300 4 TORNILLO M18X220 INOX

4 410123-00200 1 SEPARADOR PROTECTOR INOX
3 410122-00100 2 PLACA EXTERIOR FEJACION RODAMIENTO

11
2 410121-00100 4 PLACA FIJACION RODAMIENTO TRACCION
1 140967-00900 4 CHAVETA PARALELA 18X11 L.120 INOX
1:10
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 137 kg 0041007-00701 A1 2
NAME
CONJUNTO TRACCION ELEVADOR PALETS A.C.
A2

0041007-00701 A1 1 CONJUNTO TRAÇÃO ELEVADOR PALETES
66020557 A1 2 CAPA ND
4100
1470
30 m/min
600
1400 47 68020712 10 ESPIRRO ANCLAJE Ø14 ext. L=97 INOXIDABLE.
MONTAJE
LADO OPUESTO 40 68020512 4 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M16 x 55 INOX
MONTAJE 32 68020053 2 ARANDELA GROWER Ø24 INOX

STANDARD 31 68020047 4 ARANDELA GROWER Ø16 INOX
6 34 27 18 41 27 68020035 19 ARANDELA GROWER Ø6 INOX
24 67011405 1 MTR R27DRS71M4BE1HF i:15.63 0.55kW KS-OS3
23 65030395 1 CADENA 5/8" 528 ESLABONES L.8382 INOX
22 65030142 4 RUEDA TENSORA PARA CADENA 5/8 Z=14
21 65030016 1 EMPALME CADENA 5/8 INOX
20 300084-01400 1 PIÑON 5/8 Z.22 EJE Ø25
19 210153-00300 1 TOPE L.1400 RUEDAS CARRETILLA.
18 210117-00400 1 SOPORTE PROTECCION REFLECTOR IFM 05
7 17 210113-00500 1 ARANDELA Ø56 x Ø11 x 4
44
16 210112-01100 1 CASQUILLO Ø60 x Ø25 x 21
26
15 210106-00600 1 TOPE GUIA PALET TORO CAMINO RODILLOS CHAPA
15
40 14 210064-00100 1 SEMIPROTECCION INTERIOR CADENA CAMINO RODILLOS
39 13 210059-00200 3 POSTE SOPORTE FOTOCELULA CAMINO RODILLOS

3 12 210058-06200 1 GUIA DESLIDUR C2010 PARA CADENA DE RODILLO 5/8 LARGO 4100
25 11 210056-07000 1 PROTECCION SUPERIOR CADENA CAMINO RODILLOS L: 4100 PASO 215
12
47 10 210055-00100 1 SUPLEMENTO LATERAL PROTECCION MOTOR CAMINO RODILLOS
4 9 210054-00100 1 PROTECCION MOTOR CAMINO RODILLOS

8 210052-01700 1 UNION MOTOR PATAS CAMINO RODILLOS ANCHO RODILLO 1520mm
19
7 210052-01600 1 UNION MOTOR PATAS CAMINO RODILLOS LADO PALETIZADOR
38 6 210051-06100 2 PATA CAMINO RODILLOS EN TRAVESERO PALETIZADOR
5 210051-00500 2 PATA CAMINO RODILLOS H: 550-650

5
4 210050-08700 2 LARGUERO CAMINO RODILLOS L.4100 PASO 215
32 3 210005-01400 19 RODILLO Ø89 MOTORIZADO SIMPLE ANCHO 1520 CORROSION PROTECT

33
1 080492-03400 4 CASQUILLO Ø45xØ16.25 e:8.85
11 PAYPER S.A. www.payper.com CREATED : JORDA, D. 2015/05/26 Quantity SCALE

1:18
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 415 kg 0021002-563 A1 1
NAME
31 45 30 10 13 22 29 36 20 17 1 9 46 14 28 37 16 43 42 24 23 21 35 CAMINO ROD. MOTOR L=4100mm PASO 215 ANCHO 1520 A.C.
A2

0021002-563 A1 1 CAMINHO ROLOS
65030296 A1 1 PINHÃO ND
3755 1
12
1790
9
2
1250
7
960
10
11
2660
1700
MONTAGE
STANDARD
1135
MONTAGE 12 68021509 12 TORNILLO CABEZA GOTA SEBO M10X25 HEXAGONO INTERIOR A4

OTRO LADO
762

5 321018-00100 1 CHAPA ESTRUCTURA SOPORTE CINTAS

4 321017-00100 1 CHAPA ESTRUCTURA SOPORTE CINTAS
3 321016-00100 4 PILAR ESTRUCTURA SOPORTE CINTAS

2 321015-00100 1 CUERPO ESTRUCTURA SOPORTE CINTAS
1 0032212-00701 1 BARANDILLA EN ESTRUCTURA SOP. CINTAS A.C.
1:20
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 469 kg 0032212-007 A1 1
NAME
ESTRUCTURA SOPORTE CINTAS A.C.
A2
6 4 5 2 2 4 6
6 6 5 1 5 4 6 3


3 321019-00100 1 CUERPO BARANDILLA EN ESTRUCT. SOP. CINTAS

2 270089-00100 1 ANGULO SOPORTE BARANDILLA
1:20
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 48.72 kg 0032212-00701 A1 1
NAME
BARANDILLA EN ESTRUCTURA SOP. CINTAS A.C.
A4
NOTA: EL SOPORTE DE RODAMIENTO SUPERIOR E INFERIOR
AL SER DE ACERO UNA VEZ FIJADO SE LE APLICARA UNA
CAPA DE PINTURA DE PROTECCION ANTICORROSION
235
586
10
400
7
27
NOTA: EL SOPORTE DE RODAMIENTO SUPERIOR E INFERIOR 6

AL SER DE ACERO UNA VEZ FIJADO SE LE APLICARA UNA
CAPA DE PINTURA DE PROTECCION ANTICORROSION NOTA: EL SOPORTE DE RODAMIENTO SUPERIOR E INFERIOR
4 AL SER DE ACERO UNA VEZ FIJADO SE LE APLICARA UNA
1250
630
CAPA DE PINTURA DE PROTECCION ANTICORROSION
1430 21

13
23 31 68060466 1 ANILLO SEEGER EJE Ø50 INOX
18 30 68040369 2 ENGRASADOR RECTO 1/8 INOXIDABLE.

16
28 27 68021064 1 TORNILLO PRISIONERO M8 x 10 INOX
19 24 68020879 8 TORNILLO DIN933 HEXAGONAL M18 X 50 INOX

3 25 21 68020562 2 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M-4 INOX

20
32 18 68020134 2 TORNILLO ALLEN M4 x 15 INOX
22
31 12 68010492 4 TAPON PLASTICO TUBO TIPO GPN320 GL 48 1-2

17 11 68010139 4 TAPON POLIETILENO FINAL TUBO 80x80x4.
30 10 67011402 1 MTR FA47/GCMP71M/BP/KY/RH1M/SB1 i:34.29 9.40Nm OS3
24
9 66020172 2 SOPORTE RODAMIENTO PCJ-50
11 8 990876-01500 2 PEGATINA 2 COLORES (LOGO PAL)570X100
7 440039-00100 1 CASQUILLO ENTRADA CABLES/TUBOS FLAP
5
6 440038-00200 1 PLACA DETECCION SENSOR GIRO FLAT
5 440033-00200 1 EJE GIRO FLAP Ø55 L.580 INOX

4 440032-00200 1 SOPORTE VALVULA Y RG. PRESION
3 440025-00100 1 CHASIS FLAP DE GIRO

2 430226-00200 2 CASQUILLO ELASTICO BRAZO DE REACCION Ø12
1 1 0044001-00601 1 CONJUNTO PALAS FLAP DE GIRO A.C.
1:10
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 185 kg 0044001-006 A1 1
NAME
FLAP DE GIRO A.C.
A2

0044001-006 A1 1 FLAP DE ROTAÇÃO:
Cil.
cer
467
rad
o3
Cil. 90
abie
rto
515
400
738
139°
35 62030950643 A1 1 CHARNELA MACHO 90· TIPO E63 EN INOX

34 62030950510 A1 1 BULON PARA CHARNELA HEMBRA EN INOX. CIL.Ø63
33 62030950451 A1 1 FIJACION CHARNELA HEMBRA EN INOX. TIPO D63
32 62030380235 A1 1 CILINDRO NEUMATICO Ø63 C-125 mm. EJECUCION ANTICORROSION
31 68021859 A1 1 TUERCA HEXAGONAL BAJA M16 IZQUIERDA INOX
30 68021858 A1 16 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M-20 PERFIL BAJO INOX
1072
28 68020948 A1 1 TUERCA HEXAGONAL BAJA M16 INOX
27 68020934 A1 1 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M16-150 BAJA INOX

6 29 11 27 1 22 32 23 68020571 A1 20 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M8 INOX
13
18
23
24
12 66050080 A1 1 ROTULA HEMBRA M16 IZQUIERDA INOX
14 19 11 66050057 A1 1 ROTULA HEMBRA M16X1,50 INOX.
10 66050056 A1 1 ROTULA HEMBRA M16 INOX.
21
9 66020449 A1 4 SOPORTE OVALADO RODAMIENTO D25 ACERO INOX.
35
4 8 440042-00200 A1 1 BIELA REENVIO HEX.20 L.370 2XM16X50 INOX
7 440041-00200 A1 1 BRAZO IZQUIERDO FLAP DE GIRO
17 34 6 440041-00100 A1 1 BRAZO DERECHO FLAP DE GIRO
30 5 440040-00100 A1 1 SOPORTE CENTRAL PALAS FLAP DE GIRO

7
4 440030-00200 A1 4 VARILLA ROSCADA M-20 x L.230 INOX
12
3 440029-00100 A1 4 SOPORTE REGULACION PALA FLAP DE GIRO

28 2 440028-00200 A1 2 PALA FLAP DE GIRO INOX
1 340082-00700 A1 3 ARANDELA ROTULAS M16
2
1:10
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 52.66 kg 0044001-00601 A1 1
16 1 8 31 10 25 22 15
NAME
CONJUNTO PALAS FLAP DE GIRO A.C.
A2

0044001-00601 A1 1 CONJUNTO PÁS
62030950510 A1 1 PERNO ND
62030380235 A1 1 CILINDRO PNEUMÁTICO >=24M
A
500 1897
1600 SECCIÓN A-A
2150
DA
T RA ILLO
EN STR
RA
BANDERA DETECTOR SEGURIDAD MONTAJE

PARTE ANTERIOR
STANDARD
4350
4362
A
3 AD LO
R
T I
EN STR
L MONTAJE
R A
OTRO LADO
4
7
10
7 430273-00200 A1 2 PLETINA SUJECION PALETIZADOR
6 0043008-00306 A1 4 EJE EXCENTRICO RUEDAS DESPLAZAMIENTO RASTRILLO A.C
5 0043008-00305 A1 1 CONJUNTO BARANDILLA PROTECCION SACO A.C.

4 0043008-00304 A1 4 CONJUNTO RUEDAS DESPLAZAMIENTO RASTRILLO A.C.
3 0043008-00303 A1 4 CONJUNTO RODILLO Ø90 GUIA CORREA A.C.

2 0043008-00302 B1 1 CONJUNTO CHASIS MOBIL RASTRILLO A.C.
1 0043008-00301 B1 1 MARCO EXTERIOR DESPLAZAMIENTO RASTRILLO A.C.
5 Pol. Ind. El Segre, 115 - 25191 Lleida MODIFIED: TORRELLES, J. 2015/06/16
1:20
1
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 537 kg 0043008-003 B1 2
NAME
CONJUNTO RASTRILLO A.C.
A2
A 50,1
10
A SECCIÓN A-A
ESCALA 1 : 2
1 4
2 6


3 66020566 2 RUEDA MACLA GUIA KRO-7003 Ø70 A.25 INOX

1 430254-00800 1 EJE EXCENTRICO RUEDAS DESP. RAST. NIQUEL QUIMICO
1:3
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 0.66 kg 0043008-00306 A1 1
NAME
EJE EXCENTRICO RUEDAS DESPLAZAMIENTO RASTRILLO A.C
A4
A
A SECCIÓN A-A
ESCALA 1 : 2
7
8
5
1 4
3 6
2


3 66020566 2 RUEDA MACLA GUIA KRO-7003 Ø70 A.25 INOX

1 430254-00700 1 EJE RUEDAS DESPLAZAMIENTO RASTRILLO NIQUEL QUIMICO
1:3
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 0.58 kg 0043008-00304 A1 1
NAME
CONJUNTO RUEDAS DESPLAZAMIENTO RASTRILLO A.C.
A4
A
A
SECCIÓN A-A
7
6
2
4
PROTEGER CON PINTURA UNA VEZ MONTADO

5 66020555 1 TUERCA ESTRIADA DE PRECISION ZM30

3 430253-00200 1 CASQUILLO SEPARADOR Ø40 X Ø30 X L.30 INOX

2 430252-00200 1 EJE RODILLO GUIA CORREA NIQUEL QUIMICO
1 430251-00200 1 RODILLO Ø90 L.68 A.C.
1:3
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 2.46 kg 0043008-00303 A1 1
NAME
CONJUNTO RODILLO Ø90 GUIA CORREA A.C.
A4

0043008-00303 A1 4 CONJUNTO ROLO
66020491 A1 8 ROLAMENTO >=24M
MONTAJE
STANDARD A
AD LO
R
T T I L
EN SR
R A
BANDERA DETECTOR
DEGURIDAD DELANTE
MONTAJE
OTRO LADO
1726
2150
BANDERA DETECTOR DA 36 68040742 1 CADENA PORTACABLES S2600 INT75X35 R125 P56 L.2128
DEGURIDAD TRASERO T RA ILLO
EN SRT 35 68040717 1 JUEGO COMPLETO 2 TERMINALES CON CIERRE 2607.34PZB
RA
34 68040700 45 SEPARADOR CADENA PORTACABLES S.2600 DESMONTADO
33 68021851 32 TORNILLO APLASTADO DIN603 M12 X 30 INOX
4350
4 2 27 17 27 17 21 7 1 33 29 13 18 30 20 10 16 26 5 31 35 15 25 36 34 25 15 31
160

2150
12 65010232 2 CORREA HTD ABIERTA M.8 ANCHO 50 I.PA L.4720
11 430263-00200 4 PLACA TENSOR CORREA INOX
10 430262-00200 2 SOPORTE DETECCION SENSORES INOX
9 430261-00100 8 CASQUILLO ELASTICO TOPE DESPLAZAMIENTO
8 430260-00300 2 PASAMANO CALIBRADO 100 X 12 X L.2575 INOX
7 430259-00200 4 CHAPA LATERAL UNION CHASIS
6 430258-00200 1 LARGUERO LARGO MARCO EXTERIOR
27 5 430257-00200 1 LARGUERO LARGO CAD. PORTACABLES MARCO EXTERIOR

17
32 4 430256-00200 2 LARGUERO CORTO MARCO EXTERIOR
27 3 430236-00400 4 PLACA MEC. ALUMINIO FIJACION CORREA A.C.

17
11 2 430221-00200 4 CHAPA INTERIOR UNION CHASIS INOX
27
3 1 430219-00100 4 CARTELA SUPERIOR UNION CHASIS
22
24
14 HIGHLIGHTED DIMENSIONS
= CONTROLED DIMENSIONS
DIMENSIONS WITHOUT TOLERANCE
ACCORDING ISO 8015 and ISO 2768 m K
REMOVE ALL BURRS AND SHARP
EDGES R0.25 OR CHAMFER MAX
6
9 PAYPER S.A. www.payper.com CREATED : TORRELLES, J. 2015/06/16 Quantity SCALE
14 8 Pol. Ind. El Segre, 115 - 25191 Lleida MODIFIED: TORRELLES, J. 2015/06/16
1:20
28 Material NUMBER REV.
30 ITR.
18
23
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 323 kg 0043008-00301 B1 1
NAME
MARCO EXTERIOR DESPLAZAMIENTO RASTRILLO A.C.
A2

0043008-00301 B1 1 QUADRO EXTERIOR
1910 11 40 72 38 52 50 40 72 430297-00200 A1 1 SOPORTE CADENA PORTACABLES
1 68 67
71 020753-00800 A1 1 ARANDELA Ø50 X Ø13 X 2,5 INOX
200 1710 70 021169-00400 A1 2 ARANDELA ROTULA Ø20 Ø40 E.6
69 430226-00100 A1 2 CASQUILLO ELASTICO BRAZO DE REACCION
2 32 50 68 430210-00200 A1 2 MEDIA ABRAZADERA PLACA DETECCION SENSOR INOX
16 67 430212-00200 A1 2 PLACA DETECCION SENSOR INOX
66 430211-00200 A1 2 MEDIA ABRAZADERA INOX
55 65 430205-00200 A1 2 SOPORTE SENSOR M-12 COMPACTADORES INOX
64 430228-00300 A1 2 POLEA DENTADA HTD 8M-50 Z40 CON VALONAS A.C.
505
64
63 430274-00400 A1 1 ESPARRAGO HEX.24 L.645 2XM20X55 INOX
62 430273-00500 A1 1 SOPORTE SENSOR RASTRILLO INOX
594
61 61 430273-00400 A1 1 SOPORTE SENSOR RASTRILLO INOX
73 60 430272-00200 A1 1 ARANDELA ROTULA Ø20 Ø50 E.10.5 INOX
47 59 430271-00200 A1 4 CASQUILLO SEPARADOR Ø40 X Ø18.5 X 17 INOX
42 58 430270-00400 A1 2 MEDIA ABRAZADERA-2 EJE DESPLAZAMIENTO PALA A.C.
8 54 57 430270-00300 A1 2 MEDIA ABRAZADERA-1 EJE DESPLAZAMIENTO PALA A.C.
200
56 430269-00200 A1 1 CASQUILLO FIJACION BRAZO REACCION Ø45 X L.106 INOX

59
55 430268-00200 A1 1 EJE MOTRIZ Ø35 x L.1830
51 54 430267-00200 A1 2 SOPORTE REGULACION RODAMIENTO INOX
1600
53 430301-00100 A1 2 BUJE DE APRIETE CONICO TLK133 35X60 NIQUEL QUIMICO
58 57 7 52 430265-00300 A1 1 BIELA DESPLAZAMIENTO PALA RASTRILLO A.C.
51 430264-00200 A1 1 PALA RASTRILLO INOX
65 63 60 41
50 430250-00300 A1 1 CHASIS MOBIL RASTRILLO
49 68060468 A1 2 CHAVETA PARALELA 10X8X70 INOX
48 68060240 A1 1 CHAVETA PARALELA 8x7x110 INOX
47 66020511 A1 4 SOPORTE RODAMIENTO SUPER SMART Ø40
46 66020498 A1 3 SOPORTE OVALADO RODAMIENTO D35 ACERO INOX.
46 45 68060238 A1 2 ANILLO SEEGER EJE Ø35 INOXIDABLE
510
13 44 66050083 A1 1 ROTULA HEMBRA M20x1,50 INOX
43 66050104 A1 1 ROTULA HEMBRA M20 X 150 IZQUIERDA INOX
42 66020491 A1 2 RODAMIENTO A BOLAS Ø30xØ72x19 INOX
41 67011401 A1 1 MTR FA47DRE100L4BE2HF/ES7A I:12.66 2.2KW R1018 OS3
40 66010320 A1 2 EJE HUECO PARA RODAMIENTO LINEAL WH Ø40 X 920 CROMADO
39 68040218 A1 4 ENGRASADOR RECTO M6 INOXIDABLE.
12 27 * 34 66 35 43 30 18 31 70 44 38 67011412 A1 1 MTR KA37DRE80M4BE1HF i:29.96 0.75kW RAL1018 KS-OS3
15 21 48 71 17 69 24 29 68020568 A1 4 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M-6 INOX
EJE CINCADO SE PROTEGERA LAS PARTES 27 68020167 A1 4 TORNILLO ALLEN M6 x 20 INOX
VISIBLES CON PINTURA UNA VEZ MONTADO 26 68020872 A1 1 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M14 x 50 INOX
25
19 68021723 A1 1 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M20-150 IZDA INOX CALIDAD A4
23 18 68021507 A1 1 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M20-150 INOX. CALIDAD A4
62
9 16 68020481 A1 6 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M14 x 40 INOX.
56
13 68020881 A1 2 TORNILLO DIN933 HEXAGONAL M18 X 80 INOX
12 68020889 A1 2 TUERCA DIN934 HEXAGONAL M18 INOX
20
37

6

Tel: +34 973 216040 STATE : Revisión en curso
1:15
10 33
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 172 kg 0043008-00302 B1 2
NAME
CONJUNTO CHASIS MOBIL RASTRILLO A.C.
A2

0043008-00302 B1 1 CONJUNTO CORPO
65050056 A1 2 CASQUILHO ND
66020491 A1 2 ROLAMENTO ND
232
1000 105
560
MONTAGE
OTRO LADO
1900
232
MONTAGE
STANDARD
9
8
4
11
7
8
3
4 1
2 11
5 10
6 68010492 4 TAPON PLASTICO TUBO TIPO GPN320 GL 48 1-2
5 430277-00200 1 BARANDILLA 2 LADOS INCLINADOS LONGITUD=1780MM INOX

4 430276-00200 2 POSTE VERTICAL BARANDILLA CINTA INOX
3 430275-00200 2 POSTE VERTICAL BARANDILLA CINTA INOX

2 140005-01900 2 PLETINA FIJACION BARANDILLA INOX
1 020071-00200 2 NUDO SOPORTE BARANDILLAS
1:10
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 20.56 kg 0043008-00305 A1 1
NAME
CONJUNTO BARANDILLA PROTECCION SACO A.C.
A3
2000
1
10
2490
2
14
20
25
5055
18
16
700
22
21
1684
25 9 23 5 8 7 25 18 21
18
21
2
3
24

6
25 15 270087-00100 8 ANGULO SOPORTE BARANDILLA
18 14 270084-00300 1 BARANDILLA PASARELA MANTENIMIENTO PAL.

13 270084-00200 1 BARANDILLA ESCALERA PASARELA PAL.
21 12 270084-00100 1 BARANDILLA ESCALERA PASARELA PAL.
11 270083-00100 1 ESCALERA PASARELA MANTENIMIENTO PAL.
10 270082-00500 1 RODAPIES PASARELA MANTENIMIENTO PAL.
12
26 5 270081-00300 1 PILAR SUJECION PASARELA MANTENIMIENTO PAL.

4 270081-00200 1 PILAR SUJECION PASARELA MANTENIMIENTO PAL.
3 270081-00100 4 PILAR SUJECION PASARELA MANTENIMIENTO PAL.

11 2 270080-00100 1 PISO PASARELA DE MANTENIMIENTO PALETIZADOR
4 1 0027058-01301 1 ESTRUCTURA SOPORTE CINTAS A.C.
3 25 = CONTROLED DIMENSIONS ACCORDING ISO 8015 and ISO 2768 m K EDGES R0.25 OR CHAMFER MAX
18 Pol. Ind. El Segre, 115 - 25191 Lleida MODIFIED: MAZA, I. 2015/05/20
1:50
3 Material NUMBER REV. ITR.
15 Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 930 kg 0027058-013 A1 1
21 NAME
PASARELA MANTENIMIENTO PALETIZADOR A.C.
A2
1 16 14 13 12 11 15
2000
8
3
9
2
5
10
830 630 1330 730
sentido apertura
puerta derechas
280
630
B (1 : 2)
530

15
99
10 68010511 7 POSTE SOPORTE "X-GUARD" 50X50 H.2000

B 9 68010509 1 PANEL CERRAMIENTO "X-GUARD" 1900 X1300
eliminar
460
300
del panel 8 68010505 1 PANEL CERRAMIENTO "X-GUARD" 1900 X 800

A
11
9
2000

61
detalle corte 5 68010472 1 PANEL CERRAMIENTO X-GUARD 1900 X 700

zona consola
situar 4x 4 68010463 1 SOPORTE MICRO-ACTUADOR PUERTA BATIENTE X-GUARD
RKM-10
910
3 68010457 1 CIERRE PRESION PUERTAS BATIENTES X-GUARD

11
2 68010456 1 PUERTA BATIENTE UNA HOJA CON DINTEL X-GUARD
1 270086-00200 1 SOPORTE CONSOLA CONTROL
9
16
100

VISTA FRONTAL CERRAMIENTO PAYPER S.A. www.payper.com
1:20
A (1 : 2)
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 109 kg 0027058-01301 A1 1
NAME
ESTRUCTURA SOPORTE CINTAS A.C.
A2
2210 1270
521 260
converter control
30 m/min to 15 m/min
600
45 68020712 2 ESPIRRO ANCLAJE Ø14 ext. L=97 INOXIDABLE.
160
MONTAJE 39 68020512 3 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M16 x 55 INOX
STANDARD MONTAJE 38 68020446 35 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M12 x 25 INOX
LADO OPUESTO 37 68020408 14 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M10 x 25 INOX

8 32 13 25 68020021 3 ARANDELA PLANA Ø16 INOX
40
26
23 67011411 1 MTR R37DRE90M4 i:22.27 1.1kW KS-OS3
20 38 22 65030394 1 CADENA 5/8" 305 ESLABONES L.4841 INOX
5 21 65030142 3 RUEDA TENSORA PARA CADENA 5/8 Z=14
24
45 20 65030016 1 EMPALME CADENA 5/8 INOX
19 420102-00400 2 PASAMANO GRUESO REDUCTOR INOX
29 17
18 300084-01400 1 PIÑON 5/8 Z.22 EJE Ø25
4 17 210117-00400 2 SOPORTE PROTECCION REFLECTOR IFM 05
30
16 210113-00500 1 ARANDELA Ø56 x Ø11 x 4
15 210112-01100 1 CASQUILLO Ø60 x Ø25 x 21
37
14 210064-00100 1 SEMIPROTECCION INTERIOR CADENA CAMINO RODILLOS
13 210059-00200 2 POSTE SOPORTE FOTOCELULA CAMINO RODILLOS
1 12 210058-00400 1 GUIA DESLIDUR C2010 PARA CADENA DE RODILLO 5/8 LARGO 2210
11 210056-00300 1 PROTECCION SUPERIOR CADENA CAMINO RODILLOS L:1950
42 10 210055-00100 1 SUPLEMENTO LATERAL PROTECCION MOTOR CAMINO RODILLOS
9 210054-00100 1 PROTECCION MOTOR CAMINO RODILLOS
28 8 210052-01500 1 UNION MOTOR PATAS CAMINO RODILLOS ANCHO RODILLO 1320mm
18 7 210052-01400 1 UNION MOTOR PATAS CAMINO RODILLOS LADO PALETIZADOR

6 210051-06100 2 PATA CAMINO RODILLOS EN TRAVESERO PALETIZADOR
10 5 210051-00500 2 PATA CAMINO RODILLOS H: 550-650

4 210050-08100 2 LARGUERO CAMINO RODILLOS L.2210PASO 130
3 210005-01500 17 RODILLO Ø89 MOTORIZADO SIMPLE ANCHO 1320 CORROSION PROTECT

25
1 080492-03400 3 CASQUILLO Ø45xØ16.25 e:8.85
1:10
9 14 44 31 2 16 19 35 41 23 34 13 27 39 3 1 21 43 6 22 7 11
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 291 kg 0021002-562 A1 1
NAME
CAMINO RODILLOS MOTORIZADO L=2210mm PASO 130 ANCHO 1320 A.C.
A2

0021002-562 A1 1 CAMINHO ROLOS
65030296 A1 1 PINHÃO ND
0
1 m/s
DETECTOR DE MINIMO DETECTOR DE MAXIMO
MONTAGE MONTAGE
STANDARD OTRO LADO
3
2
1
3 67011409 1 MTR SA47DRE90M4 i:9.23 1.1kW KS-OS3

2 0024011-01902 1 BANDA PLANCHADORA A.600 NEWONE Ø25 (SA47) A.C.
1 0024011-01901 1 CHASIS PLANCH. A.600 NEWONE DOS BRAZOS MOTOR A.C.
1:15
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 579 kg 0024011-019 A1 1
NAME
PLANCHADOR ROD. A.600 60M/MIN REG.MOT PAL A.C.
A3
860
A
SECCIÓN A-A
B
A
EJES CINCADOS, SE PROTEGERAN 40 68020888 4 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M14 INOX
LAS PARTES VISIBLES CON 39 68020871 6 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M14 x 35 INOX
PINTURA UNA VEZ MONTADOS
DETALLE B 1 6 25 33 12 13 39 16 10 24 8 5 32 9 34 68020510 6 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL M16 x 50 INOX
(1 : 4)
20 67011408 1 MTR WAF20DRS71S4BE05HF i:19.50 0.37kW KS-OS3
19 66030145 2 CASQUILLO ANTIFRICCION CON VALONA Ø25xØ28x21.5(DORSO BRONCE)
18 66020517 1 RODAMIENTO AXIAL DE BOLAS SIMPLE Ø35 X Ø52 X L.12.
15 240085-00200 1 BANDERA DOBLE DET. POS. EXTREMAS PLANCHADOR INOX
29 14 240084-00200 1 LATERAL DER. CHASIS SOPORTE BANDA PLANCH 2 BRAZOS
23 13 240084-00100 1 LATERAL IZQ. CHASIS SOPORTE BANDA PLANCH 2 BRAZOS
12 240077-01200 1 CUERPO ARTICULACION REDUCTOR-HUSILLO PLANCAHADOR CLEAN D.
15
11 240076-00500 1 BRIDA SUJECION MTR PLANCHADORA CLEAN DESIGN INOX
31 10 240076-00400 1 BRIDA GUIA HUSILLO PLANCHADORA CLEAN DESIGN INOX
9 240075-00300 1 BARRA EJE SOPORTE CUERPO ARTICULACION CLEAN DESIGN
30
8 240075-00100 3 BARRA EJE SOPORTE PLANCHADOR CLEAN DESIGN
35 37 7 240074-00200 2 BRAZO EXTREMOS ARTICULACION PLANCHADOR CLEAN DESIGN
21 6 240074-00100 2 BRAZO CENTRAL ARTICULACION PLANCHADOR CLEAN DESIGN

7
5 240073-00200 1 CUERPO ARTICULACION BANDA PLANCHADORA

26 4 240071-00300 1 HUSILLO TR.30XP.6 PARA WAF20 INOX
3 240070-00200 2 CASQUILLO GUIAJE HUSILLO POR RANURA

17
2 240070-00100 1 TUERCA EREGULACION BANDA ROSCA DERECHA.
40 1 010043-01100 2 ARANDELA Ø50xØ11x4
1:10
11 28 20 22 41 4 18 38 36 19 2 3 14
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 106 kg 0024011-01901 A1 1
NAME
CHASIS PLANCH. A.600 NEWONE DOS BRAZOS MOTOR A.C.
A2

0024011-01901 A1 1 CORPO
66030145 A1 2 CASQUILHO ANTIFRICÇÃO NDR2
66020517 A1 1 ROLAMENTO ND
1500
103,5
25
600
720
MONTAGE
STANDARD
MONTAGE
OTRO LADO
22 27 12 17 24

26 68021739 1 TUERCA HEXAGONAL M14-150 BAJA INOX
5

19
21 23
16 11 66020140 2 ANILLO ELASTICO WR-62 D=62

10
10 66020133 2 ANILLOS AUTOALINEABLES PE-25
1
9 65041004 1 BANDA RUGOSA ASTER 20 ANCHO 600 L.3390mm
11
26 8 240068-01400 1 CHASIS BANDA PLANCHADORA CLEAN DESIGN
4 7 141432-00250 1 EJE TAMBOR TENSOR CINTA ROD. NEWONE BANDA 600

6 141432-00100 1 TAMBOR TENSOR CINTA ROD. CLEAN DESIGN BANDA 600
2
5 140986-01100 1 TAMBOR TRACCION CINTA D.E. Ø25 EJE B.600 RECAUCHUTADO

14 EJES Y TAMBORES CINCADOS, 4 140706-00400 1 PLACA BRAZO DE REACCION CINTA DISEÑO ESPECIAL INOX
SE PROTEGERAN LAS PARTES

13 3 140040-02400 13 RODILLO CINTA CHAPA ANCHO 600 METALICO Ø60 INOX
VISIBLES CON PINTURA
UNA VEZ MONTADOS 2 072156-02400 1 EJE LARGO SUJ. BRAZO REACCION L.110 M14X60 INOX
1 050661-08000 1 CASQUILLO SEPARADOR Ø50 X Ø14,5 X L.25 INOX
1:8
20 8 3 7 6 9
Finishing
Mfr. type
FROM_COMPONENT
PAYPER 473 kg 0024011-01902 A1 1
NAME
BANDA PLANCHADORA A.600 NEWONE Ø25 (SA47) A.C.
A2

0024011-01902 A1 1 TAPETE ALISADOR
65041004 A1 1 TAPETE RUGOSO ND
66020140 A1 2 ANEL ELÁSTICO ND
66020133 A1 2 ANÉIS AUTOALINHÁVEIS ND
Manutenção
9. Manutenção
9.1. Aspetos gerais da manutenção:
Antes de proceder a qualquer manutenção, o operador deve ler a secção 3 do Manual de
Instruções relativa à Segurança na instalação.
Se for necessário, para aceder ao interior da máquina devem ser usadas as portas de segurança
específicas para este efeito. O dispositivo de proteção das portas de segurança nunca deve ser
desativado.
Se for necessário entrar em contacto direto com as barras de soldadura da máquina, o operador
deve usar as luvas de proteção e aguardar até que a temperatura das barras seja inferior a 50 ºC.
Quando for necessário entrar em contacto direto com a lâmina de corte dos sacos, usar luvas de
proteção.
Os operadores deverão usar calçado de segurança para montar ou desmontar peças da
instalação.
Os trabalhos de reparação hidráulica devem ser levados a cabo por pessoal qualificado com
conhecimentos específicos em hidráulica. O pessoal deve usar óculos de proteção contra a
eventual projeção de líquidos sob pressão.
A limpeza de componentes da instalação com ar comprimido está restringida pelas normas de
segurança. O ar comprimido nunca pode ser utilizado sem óculos de proteção.
9.1.1. MANUTENÇÃO ELÉTRICA (armário elétrico)

Os dispositivos do quadro elétrico praticamente não precisam de qualquer manutenção. No
entanto, são indicados alguns pontos importantes.
9.1.1.1. CONTACTORES
Se o circuito magnético fizer ruído, é preciso comprovar:

- A tensão da alimentação elétrica. O eletroíman vibra quando a tensão da alimentação for
inferior à prevista.
- A degradação de uma bobina pode ser provocada por:
a) o fecho incompleto do circuito magnético, devido a qualquer problema mecânico;
b) um circuito de comando mal adaptado, que provoque quedas de tensão;
c) uma tensão de alimentação superior a 110% do valor nominal ou inferior ao nominal.
9.1.1.2. RELÉS DE PROTEÇÃO TÉRMICA
Não necessitam de manutenção. A única intervenção consiste na regulação do valor da corrente

de disparo que depende da intensidade absorvida pelo recetor.
9.1.1.3. ARMÁRIOS
Verificar se é necessário lubrificar as dobradiças e os dispositivos de fecho.

Comprovar a eficácia dos diferentes componentes que asseguram a estanqueidade (bucins,
caixas de cabos e juntas).
CUIDADO
9.1.1.4. AÇÕES A EVITAR
- Limar ou lubrificar os contactos.

- Reparar uma peça ou trocá-la por outra sobresselente mal adaptada.
- Rearmar um relé de proteção sem ter localizado ou eliminado a causa do disparo.
- Substituir um fusível fundido sem solucionar o defeito.
- Deixar um armário aberto sem necessidade, mesmo pouco tempo e especialmente em
atmosferas pulverulentas.
9.1.1.5. MOTORES
É preciso limpar periodicamente os motores para garantir uma ventilação superficial com o
ventilador externo acionado pelo próprio motor.
Nos motores-freio é preciso regular o entreferro, isto é, a distância entre a bobina e o núcleo
móvel, que deve ser 0,4 mm. É recomendada uma revisão periódica já que a folga pode
aumentar devido ao desgaste do disco de freio.
O disco de freio deve ser substituído quando a pastilha de travagem tiver atingido um desgaste
máximo de 2 a 3 mm.
9.1.2. MANUTENÇÃO PNEUMÁTICA
9.1.2.1. PROBLEMAS NO FORNECIMENTO DE AR
Em geral, os elementos pneumáticos apresentam individualmente um rendimento de

funcionamento e um número de manobras elevados. São peças de construção sólida e de muito
longa duração.
Geralmente, numa instalação com um desenho novo e automatismos pneumáticos recentes, o
desgaste normal dos componentes produz-se depois de vários anos de funcionamento.
As eventuais avarias ou então um desgaste prematuro são detetados unicamente decorridos
algumas semanas ou meses. Neste caso, é necessário verificar se existe algum erro de projeto
ou problema de funcionamento na instalação pneumática.
As causas que motivam esta degradação dos componentes pneumáticos, diminuindo a sua vida
de funcionamento são:
- Caudal insuficiente de ar comprimido:
Geralmente vão sendo ligadas mais máquinas à instalação que fornece o ar comprimido,
aumentando o consumo de ar necessário. Surgem avarias que não são constantes, mas sim
esporádicas, de tal forma que a sua localização se torna muito difícil.
As repercussões mais usuais são:
a) A sequência dos ciclos nos cilindros normais não é alcançada quando ocorre uma queda de
pressão repentina provocada pelo acionamento de outros elementos de trabalho.
b) Perda de força dos cilindros durante um curto espaço de tempo durante a queda de pressão.
As mesmas sequências aparecem por reduções da secção devido a contaminação ou fugas nos
racords (uma redução de diâmetro de 20% provoca uma redução até 50% do caudal original).
- Água condensada:
O ar atmosférico aspirado pelo compressor contém sempre uma quantidade de humidade que
aumenta quanto maior for a temperatura.
Por exemplo, se um compressor fornecer 10 m3/min e aspirar a 7 bar de sobrepressão no total,
com a refrigeração do ar na saída do compressor a 40 ºC, é possível separar 5,1 L de água
condensada. No decurso da refrigeração posterior, até 20 ºC são separados mais 21,6 L. Se esta
humidade chegar à instalação pneumática, as consequências serão:
a) corrosão nas canalizações, cilindros e restantes componentes, aumentando o desgaste e

encarecendo a manutenção;
b) eliminação da camada de lubrificação básica dos cilindros, eletroválvulas, etc.
Por estes motivos é necessário eliminar sempre a água do ar comprimido, ou seja, secar o ar.
É necessário ter em conta que inicialmente uma boa instalação de secagem implica um custo
adicional, mas amortizável rapidamente.
9.1.2.2. FILTROS SEPARADORES DE ÁGUA E REGULADORES DE PRESSÃO
Diariamente é preciso purgar a água condensada, cujo nível nunca deve atingir o disco de recuo
(marca máxima).
Para a purga, pressionar ambas as pinças da válvula incorporada na parte inferior do copo.
Limpar o recipiente e o filtro uma vez por ano.
Se for detetada uma perda de pressão e se o filtro estiver sujo, é necessário limpá-lo com mais
frequência. Isto vai depender do grau de contaminação atmosférica.
Para a limpeza, lavar o cartucho em gasolina, petróleo, etc., e depois soprar de dentro para fora,
deixando secar antes de montar. Todas as partes de material sintético devem ser lavadas com
água, fria ou quente, e detergente comum.
9.1.2.3. CONTAMINAÇÃO
Nas instalações pneumáticas tem de haver filtros intercalados.

Antes da ligação das linhas de alimentação é preciso limpá-las para evitar que as partículas de
pó cheguem às válvulas (fita de selagem, partículas de soldadura, resíduos de tubos, etc.).
Nas instalações com condensação de ar comprimido e com linhas não protegidas contra a
corrosão pode ocorrer a formação de partículas de óxido.
A sujidade nas linhas produz os seguintes efeitos:
a) obstrução das eletroválvulas;
b) os resíduos nos assentos provocam fugas constantes;
c) os estrangulamentos das válvulas reguladoras de caudal e dos silenciadores são
especialmente sensíveis à sujidade;
d) os tempos regulados são alterados, tornando os escapes dos cilindros mais lentos.
9.1.3. CONTROLO DOS CILINDROS E VÁLVULAS

Antes de os cilindros pneumáticos se avariarem, surgem perturbações, apesar de continuarem a
desempenharas suas funções. As inspeções periódicas oferecem a possibilidade de reconhecer
atempadamente estas avarias.
9.1.3.1. CONTROLO VISUAL
Se as hastes dos cilindros apresentarem estrias longitudinais crescentes, é preciso prevenir uma
avaria rápida das juntas devido ao desgaste. O mesmo acontece se na haste houver lubrificante
negro e seco.
Em situações com pressões baixas de funcionamento surge uma tendência para o efeito Stick-
Slip (avanço por impulsos).
O desgaste das juntas dos êmbolos e a acumulação de uma mistura seca de lubrificante e
de partículas de borracha na camisa provocam instabilidade de funcionamento.
9.1.3.2. CONTROLO ACÚSTICO
Se as fugas de ar forem suficientemente elevadas para se conseguir detetar o zumbido do

escape, então é preciso solucionar rapidamente o problema.
a) Pode haver danos na estanqueidade dos cilindros.
b) Também pode existir uma fuga constante nas válvulas em repouso. Isto indica uma avaria
nas juntas dos êmbolos dos cilindros ou nas juntas das corrediças das válvulas.
9.1.4. LUBRIFICAÇÃO
Uma lubrificação correta em intervalos regulares é a condição mais importante para um
funcionamento correto prolongado dos rolamentos. Apesar de o consumo de lubrificante de um
rolamento ser muito reduzido, deve existir uma quantidade suficiente sobre todas as superfícies
de contacto.
Para escolher a massa lubrificante, é preciso ter em conta as fichas de características dos
fabricantes, que devem indicar o intervalo de temperatura admitido. Exceder as
temperaturas mínimas em, pelo menos, 20 ºC e estar, pelo menos, 20 ºC abaixo das
temperaturas máximas de funcionamento. A massa lubrificante de sabão de lítio é ideal
para os rolamentos. Este produto repele parcialmente a água e pode ser aplicado com
aditivos anticorrosivos em ambientes húmidos, aumentando a duração de funcionamento.
A lubrificação deve ser efetuada com os rolamentos à temperatura de trabalho e em
funcionamento para obter uma boa distribuição da massa lubrificante.
Entende-se por períodos de relubrificação o intervalo de tempo durante o qual a massa
contida no rolamento se esgotou e deve ser reposta. O período de relubrificação
económica, bem como a quantidade necessária para a relubrificação, só pode ser
determinado com segurança a partir do próprio funcionamento, visto que as influências
que intervêm em cada caso particular são muito variadas.
As quantidades necessárias de massa para a relubrificação são determinadas em função das
condições de funcionamento, podendo ir de 20% a 80% da quantidade aplicada na lubrificação
inicial. Em caso de dúvida, a lubrificação deve ser feita até aparecer nas passagens de obturação
do rolamento uma película de lubrificante novo. Deve ter-se o cuidado de a massa usada sair
facilmente.
A consistência da massa lubrificante é determinada pelo tipo e pela viscosidade do óleo de base,
pelo tipo e pela quantidade de espessante e pelo processo de fabrico. Na lubrificação de
rolamentos devem ser utilizadas de preferência massas lubrificantes com consistências NLGI 1,
2 e 3.
Os períodos de relubrificação para rolamentos dependem especialmente do nível térmico, da
velocidade da carga de rolamento, da quantidade de lubrificante e das condições ambientais.
Também dependem das características do lubrificante face à oxidação.
Seguidamente descreve-se em pormenor a manutenção específica de cada subconjunto:

Trimestral
Semestral
Semanal
Mensal
Diária
Anual
AÇÕES EM CASO
Pos. DESCRIÇÃO
DE DEFEITO
Inspecionar e lubrificar os Consultar o anexo no final da

1 X
rolamentos. secção.
Inspecionar e verificar a tensão
2 X Substituir os elementos
da corrente e dos pinhões.
danificados ou com desgaste
Inspecionar o estado e a tensão
3 X excessivo.
das correias.
Consultar o manual do
4 Inspecionar os motorredutores. X
motorredutor (secção 10).
1
4
2
9.3 Transportador de rolos:
Trimestral
Semestral
Semanal
Mensal
Diária
Anual
AÇÕES EM CASO
Pos. DESCRIÇÃO
DE DEFEITO
Limpeza exterior. X Consultar o anexo no final da

1 Lubrificar a corrente. X secção.
2 Inspecionar os rolos. X
Substituir os elementos
Inspecionar e verificar a
3 tensão da corrente e dos X
excessivo.
pinhões.
Inspecionar o Consultar o manual do
4 X
motorredutor. motorredutor (secção 10).
4
1 3
Trimestral
Semestral
Semanal
Mensal
Diária
Anual
AÇÕES EM CASO
Pos. DESCRIÇÃO
DE DEFEITO
Consultar o anexo no final da

Limpeza exterior. X
secção.
1 Inspecionar os rolos. X danificados ou com desgaste
excessivo.
1
Trimestral
Semestral
Semanal
Mensal
Diária
AÇÕES EM CASO
Anual
Pos. DESCRIÇÃO
DE DEFEITO
Limpeza exterior. X
Consultar o anexo no final
Inspecionar e lubrificar os
1 X da secção.
rolamentos.
2 Verificar o motorredutor. X
3 Comprovar o estado do tapete. X danificados ou com
desgaste excessivo.
1
2
Trimestral
Semestral
Semanal
Mensal
Diária
AÇÕES EM CASO
Anual
Pos. DESCRIÇÃO DE DEFEITO
Limpeza exterior. X
1 X
rolamentos.
2 X secção.
parafusos roscados.
Verificar a estanqueidade
3 X
do cilindro pneumático.
Comprovar o estado do Substituir os elementos
4 X
tapete. danificados ou com desgaste
5 Inspecionar os rolos. X excessivo.
Inspecionar os Consultar o manual do
6 X
motorredutores. motorredutor (secção 10).
6 3 5
1 2
Trimestral
Semestral
Semanal
Mensal
Diária
AÇÕES EM CASO
Anual
Pos. DESCRIÇÃO
DE DEFEITO

Limpeza exterior. X
secção.
Verificar o descentramento
1 X danificados ou com desgaste
e o desgaste do tapete.
excessivo.
Inspecionar e lubrificar Consultar o anexo no final da
2 X
os rolamentos. secção.
3 Inspecionar o motorredutor. X
2
Trimestral
Semestral
Semanal
Mensal
Diária
AÇÕES EM CASO
Anual
Pos. DESCRIÇÃO
DE DEFEITO
Limpeza exterior. X
Inspecionar a estanqueidade
1 X
da junta rotativa.
Verificar a estanqueidade do
2 X secção.
cilindro pneumático.
3 X
rolamentos.
Inspecionar a folga das
rótulas.
excessivo.
5 1 2
4 4
Trimestral
Semestral
Semanal
Mensal
Diária
AÇÕES EM CASO
Anual
Pos. DESCRIÇÃO
DE DEFEITO

Limpeza exterior. X
secção.
Verificar o descentramento
e o desgaste do tapete.
excessivo.
2 X
2
Trimestral
Semestral
Semanal
Mensal
Diária
AÇÕES EM CASO
Anual
Pos. DESCRIÇÃO
DE DEFEITO

Limpeza exterior. X
secção.
Inspecionar o estado e a
1 X
tensão das correias dentadas.
2 Inspecionar as polias. X
3 Inspecionar os batentes. X
4 X excessivo.
rótulas.
Inspecionar as rodas de
5 X
deslocamento do raspador.
6 X
7 X
1
7
6
5
3
Trimestral
Semestral
Semanal
Mensal
Diária
AÇÕES EM CASO
Anual
Pos. DESCRIÇÃO
DE DEFEITO

Limpeza exterior. X
secção.
1 X
tensão das correias dentadas. Substituir os elementos
2 Inspecionar as polias. X danificados ou com desgaste
Inspecionar a folga das excessivo.
3 X
rótulas.
4 X
4 1
3
Trimestral
Semestral
Semanal
Mensal
Diária
AÇÕES EM CASO
Anual
Pos. DESCRIÇÃO
DE DEFEITO

Limpeza exterior X
secção.
Inspecionar o estado e a Substituir os elementos
1 X
tensão das correntes. danificados ou com desgaste
2 Inspecionar os pinhões. X excessivo.
Inspecionar e lubrificar
3 X Consultar o anexo no final da
os rolamentos.
secção.
4 Lubrificar as correntes. X
5
2
1-4
3
Trimestral
Semestral
Semanal
Mensal
Diária
AÇÕES EM CASO
Anual
Pos. DESCRIÇÃO
DE DEFEITO

Limpeza exterior. X
secção.
1 X
tensão da correia dentada. Substituir os elementos
2 Inspecionar as polias. X danificados ou com desgaste
Inspecionar os batentes das excessivo.
3 X
comportas.
4 X
4
Trimestral
Semestral
Semanal
Mensal
Diária
AÇÕES EM CASO
Anual
Pos. DESCRIÇÃO
DE DEFEITO
Limpeza exterior. X
Verificar a estanqueidade dos
1 X
cilindros pneumáticos. Consultar o anexo no final da
3 X
rolamentos.
4 X
tensão da corrente.
Inspecionar os rolamentos e
os pinhões.
excessivo.
7 X
rótulas.
Comprovar o estado dos
8 X
batentes cilíndricos.
6 1
2-4-5
9 3
1
8
Trimestral
Semestral
Semanal
Mensal
Diária
Anual
AÇÕES EM CASO
Pos. DESCRIÇÃO
DE DEFEITO
Limpeza exterior. X Consultar o anexo no final da

Inspecionar e verificar a
3 tensão da corrente e dos X
excessivo.
pinhões.
Inspecionar o Consultar o manual do
4 X
motorredutor. motorredutor (secção 10).
1 3 4
Trimestral
Semestral
Semanal
Mensal
Diária
AÇÕES EM CASO
Anual
Pos. DESCRIÇÃO
DE DEFEITO
Limpeza exterior. X
1 X Consultar o anexo no final
rolamentos.
da secção.
Verificar a estanqueidade do
2 X
cilindro pneumático.
4 Verificar o estado das ventosas. X danificados ou com
desgaste excessivo.
3
1
4
ANEXO
9.17 MÉTODO PARA COMPROVAR A ESTANQUEIDADE NUM
CILINDRO PNEUMÁTICO
Antes de realizar qualquer acção na máquina, deve carregar na Paragem de Emergência e fechar
a válvula de alimentação pneumática, e, de seguida, verificar a ausência de pressão no circuito
da máquina para evitar qualquer acidente.
1. Deve retirar os tubos de ar comprimido dos racords.
2. Recolha a haste do cilindro manualmente.

3. Coloque uma tampa no racord que acciona "cilindro recolhido"
Puxe a haste do cilindro durante 5 segundos:

- Se a haste não chegar ao fim do curso, isto significa que o cilindro é estanque.
- Se a haste chegar ao fim do curso, então o cilindro tem fugas, não havendo
estanqueidade e deve ser substituído.
4. Retire a tampa e puxe a haste do cilindro manualmente.

5. Coloque uma tampa no racord que acciona "cilindro estendido"
Recolha a haste do cilindro durante 5 segundos:

- Se a haste não chegar ao fim do curso, isto significa que o cilindro é estanque.
- Se a haste chegar ao fim do curso, então o cilindro tem fugas, não havendo
estanqueidade e deve ser substituído.
Depois de realizar esta operação, volte a ligar o tubo de ar comprimido.

9.17. LIMPEZA OU EVACUAÇÃO DE RESTOS DE PRODUTO
O operador no final do lote ou turno deve levar a cabo o esvaziamento completo

do produto da instalação.
Sequência de limpeza:
1. Activar o selector Anulação de Nível Mínimo.
2. Prosseguir o ensacamento.
3. Quando a pesagem de um saco não ficar completa por falta de produto, o

operador deve carregar no botão Descarga de Restos e retirar o saco
incompleto depois do sistema de fecho.
4. Repetir o ponto anterior no mínimo 3 ou 4 vezes até se verificar a total

ausência de produto.
5. Parar os equipamentos e activar o botão de emergência.
6. Retirar os sacos vazios restantes.
7. Realizar uma limpeza do interior e em redor da linha de ensacamento.
NOTA:
No caso de ser necessário uma limpeza mais exaustiva das partes internas do
equipamento em contacto com o produto, deve ser estudado um procedimento
adequado às características do produto.
9.18. LUBRIFICAÇÃO
9.19. Plano de manutenção
Frecuencia
POS Denominación Nº Subpieza CANT. Diario Semanal Mensual Trimestral Semestral Anual Descripción
X Inspecionar e lubrificar os rolamentos
X Inspecionar e verificar a tensao da corrente e dos pinhoes
9.2 Câmara distribuidora 0022001-200 1
X Inspecionar o estado e a tensao das correias
X Inspecionar os motorredutores
X Limpieza exterior
X Lubrificar a corrente
9.3 Transportador de rolos 0021002-563 1 X Inspecionar os rolos
X Inspecionar o motorredutor
X Limpieza exterior
9.4 Acumulador de rolos 0026027-004 1
X Inspecionar os rolos
X Limpieza exterior
9.5 Tapete de rolos 0014170-005 1
X Verificar o motorredutor
X Comprovar estado do tapete
X Limpieza exterior
X Inspecionar e lubrificar os parafusos roscados
9.6 Alisador de rolos 0024011-019 1 X Verificar a estanqueidade do cilindro pneumático
X Comprovar o estado do tapete
X Limpieza exterior
X Verificar o descentramento e o desgaste do tapete
9.7 Tapete do rotador 0014169-003 1
X Limpieza exterior
X Inspecionar a estanqueidade da junta rotativa
X Verificar a estanqueidade do cilindro pneumatico
9.8 Flap de rotaçao 0044001-006 1
X Inspecionar elubrificar os rolamentos
X Inspecionar a folga das rótulas
X Limpieza exterior
X Verificar o descentramento e o desgaste do tapete
9.10 Tapete de chapa 0014168-003 1
X Inspecionar e l ubrificar os rolamentos
X Limpieza exterior
X Inspecionar o estado e a tensao das correias dentadas
X Inspecionar as polias
X Inspecionar os batentes
9.11 Conjunto raspador 0043008-003 1
X Inspecionar as rodas de deslocamento do raspador
X Limpieza exterior
X Inspecionar o estado e a tensao das correias dentadas
Conjunto de três
9.12 0043006-005 1 X Inspecionar as polias
compactadores
X Limpieza exterior
X Inspecionar o estado e a tensao das correntes
X Inspecionar os pinhoes
9.13 Corpo superior do paletizador 0041007-007 1
X Lubrificar as correntes
X Limpieza exterior
X Inspecionar o estado e a tensao da correia dentada
X Inspecionar as polias
9.14 Conjunto falsa pá 0043007-005 1
X Inspecionar os batentes das comportas
X Limpieza exterior
X Verificar a estanqueidade dos cilindros pneumáticos
X Inspecionar o estado e a tensao da corrente
9.15 Mesa de elevaçao 0042003-007 1
X Inspecionar os rolamentos e os pinhoes
X Comprovar o estado dos batentes cilíndricos
X Inspecionar o motorreductor
X Limpieza exterior
9.16 Caminho de rolos 0021002-562 1 X Inspecionar os rolos
X Limpieza exterior
9.17 Aplicador de folhas 0046001-003 1 X Verificar a estanqueidade do cilindro pneumático
X Verificar o estado das ventosas
Componentes Especiais
10 Componentes Especiais
10.1 Motorreductores
Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services
Assembly and Operating Instructions
Gear Units
R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series
Edition 06/2010 16970411 / EN
PDF created with pdfFactory trial version www.pdffactory.com

SEW-EURODRIVEDriving the world

Contents
Contents
1 General Information ............................................................................................ 5
1.1 How to use the operating instructions ......................................................... 5
1.2 Structure of the safety notes ....................................................................... 5
1.3 Rights to claim under limited warranty ........................................................ 6
1.4 Exclusion of liability ..................................................................................... 6
1.5 Copyright..................................................................................................... 6
2 Safety Notes ........................................................................................................ 7
2.1 Preface........................................................................................................ 7
2.2 General information .................................................................................... 7
2.3 Target group ............................................................................................... 8
2.4 Designated use ........................................................................................... 8
2.5 Other applicable documentation ................................................................. 8
2.6 Transport..................................................................................................... 9
2.7 Extended storage........................................................................................ 9
2.8 Installation/assembly................................................................................... 9
2.9 Startup/operation ........................................................................................ 9
2.10 Inspection/maintenance .............................................................................. 9
3 Gear Unit Structure ........................................................................................... 10
3.1 Basic structure of helical gear units .......................................................... 10
3.2 Basic structure of parallel shaft helical gear units ..................................... 11
3.3 Basic structure of helical-bevel gear units ................................................ 12
3.4 Basic structure of helical-worm gear units ................................................ 13
3.5 Basic structure of SPIROPLAN® W10-W30 gear units............................. 14
3.6 Basic structure of SPIROPLAN® W37 gear units ..................................... 15
3.7 Nameplate/unit designation ...................................................................... 16
4 Mechanical Installation..................................................................................... 17
4.1 Required tools/resources .......................................................................... 17
4.2 Prerequisites for assembly........................................................................ 18
4.3 Installing the gear unit............................................................................... 19
4.4 Gear units with solid shaft......................................................................... 25
4.5 Torque arms for shaft-mounted gear units................................................ 27
4.6 Shaft-mounted gear units with keyway or splined hollow shaft................. 30
4.7 Shaft-mounted gear units with shrink disk ................................................ 37
4.8 Shaft-mounted gear units with TorqLOC® ................................................ 41
4.9 Installing the protective cover ................................................................... 48
4.10 AM adapter coupling ................................................................................. 50
4.11 AQ adapter coupling ................................................................................. 54
4.12 AD input shaft assembly ........................................................................... 56
5 Startup................................................................................................................ 61
5.1 Checking the oil level ................................................................................ 61
5.2 Helical-worm and SPIROPLAN® W gear units ......................................... 61
5.3 Helical/parallel shaft helical/helical-bevel gear units ................................. 62
5.4 Gear units with backstop........................................................................... 62
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series í

Contents
6 Inspection/Maintenance ................................................................................... 63
6.1 Preliminary work regarding gear unit inspection/maintenance ................. 63
6.2 Inspection/maintenance intervals.............................................................. 64
6.3 Lubricant change intervals ........................................................................ 65
6.4 Inspection/maintenance for the AL/AM/AQ adapter ................................. 66
6.5 Inspection/maintenance for the AD input cover ........................................ 66
6.6 Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit .................................................. 67
7 Mounting Positions........................................................................................... 82
7.1 Designation of the mounting positions ...................................................... 82
7.2 Churning losses ........................................................................................ 83
7.3 Key............................................................................................................ 83
7.4 Helical gearmotors R ................................................................................ 84
7.5 Helical gearmotors RX .............................................................................. 87
7.6 Parallel-shaft helical gearmotors F ........................................................... 89
7.7 Helical-bevel gearmotors K ....................................................................... 92
7.8 Helical-worm gearmotors S....................................................................... 97
7.9 SPIROPLAN® W gearmotors.................................................................. 103
8 Technical Data................................................................................................. 109
8.1 Extended storage.................................................................................... 109
8.2 Lubricants ............................................................................................... 110
9 Malfunctions/Service ...................................................................................... 118
9.1 Gear unit ................................................................................................. 118
9.2 AM/AQ/AL adapter ................................................................................. 119
9.3 AD input shaft assembly ......................................................................... 119
9.4 Customer service .................................................................................... 120
9.5 Disposal .................................................................................................. 120
10 Address List .................................................................................................... 121
Index................................................................................................................. 131
ì Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

General Information
How to use the operating instructions
1
1 General Information
1.1 How to use the operating instructions
The operating instructions are an integral part of the product and contain important in-
formation on operation and service. The operating instructions are written for all employ-
ees who assemble, install, startup, and service this product.
The operating instructions must be accessible and legible. Make sure that persons re-
sponsible for the system and its operation, as well as persons who work independently
on the unit, have read through the operating instructions carefully and understood them.
Consult SEW-EURODRIVE if you have any questions or if you require further informa-
tion.
1.2 Structure of the safety notes

1.2.1 Meaning of the signal words
The following table shows the grading and meaning of the signal words for safety notes,
notes on potential risks of damage to property, and other notes.
Signal word Meaning Consequences if disregarded
DANGER Imminent danger Severe or fatal injuries
WARNING Possible dangerous situation Severe or fatal injuries
CAUTION Possible dangerous situation Minor injuries
NOTICE Possible damage to property Damage to the drive system or its envi-
ronment
INFORMATION Useful information or tip: Simpli-
fies the handling of the drive
system.
1.2.2 Structure of the section-specific safety notes

Section safety notes do not apply to a specific action, but to several actions pertaining
to one subject. The used symbols indicate either a general or a specific hazard.
This is the formal structure of a section safety note:
SIGNAL WORD
Type and source of danger.
Possible consequence(s) if disregarded.
Measure(s) to prevent the danger.
1.2.3 Structure of the embedded safety notes

Embedded safety notes are directly integrated in the instructions just before the descrip-
tion of the dangerous action.
This is the formal structure of an embedded safety note:
SIGNAL WORD Nature and source of hazard.
Possible consequence(s) if disregarded.
Measure(s) to prevent the danger.
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ë

General Information
1 Rights to claim under limited warranty
1.3 Rights to claim under limited warranty

Adhering to the operating instructions is a prerequisite for fault-free operation and the
fulfillment of any right to claim under warranty. Read the operating instructions before
you start working with the unit.
1.4 Exclusion of liability

You must comply with the information contained in these operating instructions to en-
sure safe operation of the R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W series gear units and
to achieve the specified product characteristics and performance requirements.
SEW-EURODRIVE does not assume liability for injury to persons or damage to equip-
ment or property resulting from non-observance of these operating instructions. In such
cases, any liability for defects is excluded.
1.5 Copyright
© 2010 - SEW-EURODRIVE. All rights reserved.
Copyright law prohibits the unauthorized duplication, modification, distribution, and use
of this document, in whole or in part.
ê Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Safety Notes
Preface
2
2 Safety Notes
The following basic safety notes are intended to prevent injury to persons and damage
to property. The operator must ensure that the basic safety notes are read and ob-
served. Make sure that persons responsible for the system and its operation, as well as
persons who work independently on the unit, have read through the operating instruc-
tions carefully and understood them. If you are unclear about any of the information in
this documentation, please contact SEW-EURODRIVE.
2.1 Preface
The following safety notes are primarily concerned with the use of gear units. If using
gearmotors, please also refer to the safety notes for motors in the corresponding oper-
ating instructions.
Also observe the supplementary safety notes in the individual sections of these operat-
ing instructions.
2.2 General information
DANGER
During operation, the motors, gearmotors and brakes can have live, bare and movable
or rotating parts as well as hot surfaces, depending on their enclosure.
Severe or fatal injuries.
All work related to transportation, storage, setup/mounting, connection, startup,
maintenance and repair may only be carried out by qualified personnel, in strict
observation of:
The relevant detailed operating instructions
The warning and safety signs on the motor/gearmotor
All other project planning documents, operating instructions and wiring
diagrams related to the drive
The specific regulations and requirements for the system
The national/regional regulations governing safety and the prevention of
accidents
Never install damaged products
Immediately report any damage to the shipping company
Removing covers without authorization, improper use as well as incorrect installation or
operation may result in severe injuries to persons or damage to property.
Refer to the documentation for additional information.
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series é

Safety Notes
2 Target group
2.3 Target group

Any mechanical work may only be performed by adequately qualified personnel. Quali-
fied personnel in this context are persons who are familiar with the setup, mechanical
installation, trouble shooting and maintenance for this product. Further, they are quali-
fied as follows:
Training in mechanical engineering, e.g. as a mechanic or mechatronics technician
(final examinations must have been passed).
They are familiar with these operating instructions.
Any electronic work may only be performed by adequately qualified electricians. Quali-
fied electricians in this context are persons who are familiar with the electronic installa-
tion, startup, trouble shooting and maintenance for this product. Further, they are qual-
ified as follows:
Training in electrical engineering, e.g. as an electrician or mechatronics technician
(final examinations must have been passed).
They are familiar with these operating instructions.
All work in further areas of transportation, storage, operation and waste disposal must
only be carried out by persons who are trained appropriately.
All qualified personnel must wear appropriate protective clothing.
2.4 Designated use

The gear units are intended for industrial systems and may only be used in accordance
with the information provided in SEW-EURODRIVE's technical documentation and the
information given on the nameplate. They fulfill the applicable standards and regula-
tions.
According to the 2006/42/EC Machinery Directive, the gear units are components for the
installation in machines and plants. In the scope of the Directive, you must not take the
machinery into operation in the proper fashion until you have established that the end
product complies with Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC.
Using these products in potentially explosive atmospheres is prohibited, unless specifi-
cally designated otherwise.
2.5 Other applicable documentation

The following publications and documents have to be observed as well:
"DR.71-225, 315 AC Motors" operating instructions for gearmotors
Operating instructions of any attached options
"Gear Units" catalog or
"Gearmotors" catalog
è Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Safety Notes
Transport
2
2.6 Transport
Inspect the shipment immediately upon receipt for any damage that may have occurred
during transportation. Inform the shipping company immediately. It may be necessary to
preclude startup.
Tighten installed eyebolts. They are only intended for the weight of the motor/gearmotor;
do not attach any additional loads.
The built-in lifting eyebolts comply with DIN 580. Always observe the loads and regula-
tions listed in this standard. If the gearmotor is equipped with two suspension eye lugs
or lifting eyebolts, then both of the suspension eye lugs should be used for transporta-
tion. In this case, the tension force vector of the slings must not exceed a 45° angle ac-
cording to DIN 580.
Use suitable, sufficiently rated handling equipment if necessary. Remove any transpor-
tation fixtures prior to startup.
2.7 Extended storage

Observe the notes in section "Extended storage" (page 109).
2.8 Installation/assembly
Observe the notes in section "Mechanical Installation" (page 17)!
2.9 Startup/operation
Check the oil level before startup as described in chapter Inspection/Maintenance
(page 63).
Check that the direction of rotation is correct in decoupled status. Listen out for unusual
grinding noises as the shaft rotates.
Secure keys for test mode without output elements. Do not deactivate monitoring and
protection equipment even in test mode.
Switch off the gearmotor if in doubt whenever changes occur in relation to normal oper-
ation (e.g. increased temperature, noise, vibration). Determine the cause and contact
SEW-EURODRIVE, if required.
2.10 Inspection/maintenance
Observe the notes in chapter "Inspection/Maintenance" (page 63)!
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ç

Gear Unit Structure
3 Basic structure of helical gear units
3 Gear Unit Structure

INFORMATION
The following figures are block diagrams. They help you to assign components to the
spare parts list. Discrepancies may occur depending on the gear unit size and version.
3.1 Basic structure of helical gear units
[59]
[20]
[24]
[515] [101]
[516]
[517] [100]
[47] [1]
[102]
[2] [45]
[59]
[43]
[181]
[42] [3]
[41]
[6] [25]
[88]
[22]
[11] [17]
[12]
[9]
[19]
[521]
[522]
[8] [7] [523]
[59]
[31] [30]
[32]
[34] [4]
[5]
[37]
[506]
[39] [507]
[131] [508]
19194251
[1] Pinion [19] Key [42] Roller bearing [507] Shim

[2] Gearwheel [20] Breather valve [43] Key [508] Shim
[3] Pinion shaft [22] Gear unit housing [45] Roller bearing [515] Shim
[4] Gearwheel [24] Lifting eyebolt [47] Circlip [516] Shim
[5] Pinion shaft [25] Roller bearing [59] Screw plug [517] Shim
[6] Gearwheel [30] Roller bearing [88] Circlip [521] Shim
[7] Output shaft [31] Key [100] Gear cover plate [522] Shim
[8] Key [32] Spacer tube [101] Hex head screw [523] Shim
[9] Oil seal [34] Roller bearing [102] Seal
[11] Roller bearing [37] Roller bearing [131] Closing cap
[12] Circlip [39] Circlip [181] Closing cap
[17] Spacer tube [41] Circlip [506] Shim
ïð Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Gear Unit Structure
Basic structure of parallel shaft helical gear units
3
3.2 Basic structure of parallel shaft helical gear units
[2] [45] [20]

[515] [59]
[516] [43] [22] [1]
[517]
[3]
[41] [42]
[181] [161]
[4] [30]
[32] [59]
[31]
[5]
[506] [37]
[507] [39] [183] [165]
[131] [508]
[160]
[19]
[102]
[88]
[94]
[25] [521] [100]
[92] [522]
[93]
[91] [523] [101]
[7]
[59]
[17]
[6]
[9]
[11]
[81]
[14]
[16]
19298059
[1] Pinion [22] Gear unit housing [91] Circlip [506] Shim
[2] Gearwheel [25] Roller bearing [92] Disc [507] Shim
[3] Pinion shaft [30] Roller bearing [93] Lock washer [508] Shim
[4] Gearwheel [31] Key [94] Hex head screw [515] Shim
[5] Pinion shaft [32] Spacer tube [100] Gear cover plate [516] Shim
[6] Gearwheel [37] Roller bearing [101] Hex head screw [517] Shim
[7] Hollow shaft [39] Circlip [102] Seal [521] Shim
[9] Oil seal [41] Circlip [131] Closing cap [522] Shim
[11] Roller bearing [42] Roller bearing [160] Closing plug [523] Shim
[14] Hex head screw [43] Key [161] Closing cap
[16] output flange [45] Roller bearing [165] Closing plug
[17] Spacer tube [59] Screw plug [181] Closing cap
[19] Key [81] Nilos ring [183] Oil seal
[20] Breather valve [88] Circlip
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ïï

Gear Unit Structure
3 Basic structure of helical-bevel gear units
3.3 Basic structure of helical-bevel gear units
[100] [102]
[3] [20]
[536]
[43] [537] [533] [59]
[538] [534] [22]
[535]
[45] [2]
[114]
[101]
[113]
[42] [119] [59]
[116]
[523] [89] [59]
[522]
[521][88]
[25]
[84] [1]
[19]
[7] [59]
[8]
[6] [59]
[83] [17]
[11]
[12]
[9] [161]
[132]
[133]
[31]
[30] [542]
[543]
[135] [544]
[4]
[5]
[131] [37]
[506]
[507]
[137] [508]
19301131
[1] Pinion [25] Roller bearing [102] Seal [522] Shim

[2] Gearwheel [30] Roller bearing [113] Slotted nut [523] Shim
[3] Pinion shaft [31] Key [114] Multi-tang washer [533] Shim
[4] Gearwheel [37] Roller bearing [116] Thread locker [534] Shim
[5] Pinion shaft [39] Circlip [119] Spacer tube [535] Shim
[6] Gearwheel [42] Roller bearing [131] Closing cap [536] Shim
[7] Output shaft [43] Key [132] Circlip [537] Shim
[8] Key [45] Roller bearing [133] Supporting ring [538] Shim
[9] Oil seal [59] Screw plug [135] Nilos ring [542] Shim
[11] Roller bearing [83] Nilos ring [161] Closing cap [543] Shim
[12] Circlip [84] Nilos ring [506] Shim [544] Shim
[17] Spacer tube [88] Circlip [507] Shim
[19] Key [89] Closing cap [508] Shim
[20] Breather valve [100] Gear cover plate [521] Shim
[22] Gear unit housing [101] Hex head screw [521] Shim
ïî Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Gear Unit Structure
Basic structure of helical-worm gear units
3
3.4 Basic structure of helical-worm gear units
ÅëçÃ
ÅïðïÃ ÅîðÃ
ÅëðêÃ ÅïððÃ
ÅïíïÃ ÅëðéÃ
ÅíçÃ ÅïíéÃ
ÅíéÃ ÅïðîÃ
ÅîîÃ
ÅëÃ
ÅìíÃ ÅíðÃ ÅîÃ ÅêïÃ ÅëçÃ
ÅïÃ
ÅïçÃ
ÅèçÃ
ÅëçÃ
ÅëîíÃ ÅèèÃ
ÅîëÃ ÅëîîÃ
ÅëîïÃ
ÅéÃ
ÅêÃ
ÅïïÃ
ÅëîðÃ
ÅïîÃ ÅëïçÃ
ÅëïèÃ
ÅçÃ
19304203
[1] Pinion [20] Breather valve [88] Circlip [518] Shim

[2] Gearwheel [22] Gear unit housing [89] Closing cap [519] Shim
[5] Worm [25] Roller bearing [100] Gear cover plate [520] Shim
[6] Worm gear [30] Roller bearing [101] Hex head screw [521] Shim
[7] Output shaft [37] Roller bearing [102] Seal [522] Shim
[9] Oil seal [39] Circlip [131] Closing cap [523] Shim
[11] Roller bearing [43] Key [137] Supporting ring
[12] Circlip [59] Screw plug [506] Shim
[19] Key [61] Circlip [507] Shim
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ïí

Gear Unit Structure
3
Basic structure of SPIROPLAN® W10-W30 gear units
3.5 Basic structure of SPIROPLAN® W10-W30 gear units
[100] [101]
[65]
[66]
[102] [68]
[71] [143]
[72]
[1]
[22]
[89]
[88]
[521]
[522]
[523]
[25]
[6]
[19] [250]
[251]
[17]
[8]
[7]
[11]
[518]
[519]
[12] [520]
[9]
19307275
[1] Pinion [19] Key [88] Circlip [251] Circlip

[6] Gearwheel [22] Gear unit housing [89] Closing cap [518] Shim
[7] Output shaft [25] Roller bearing [100] Gear cover plate [519] Shim
[8] Key [65] Oil seal [101] Hex head screw [520] Shim
[9] Oil seal [66] Roller bearing [102] Seal [521] Shim
[11] Roller bearing [71] Supporting ring [132] Circlip [522] Shim
[12] Circlip [72] Circlip [183] Oil seal [523] Shim
[17] Spacer tube [143] Supporting ring [250] Circlip
ïì Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Gear Unit Structure
3
Basic structure of SPIROPLAN® W37 gear units
3.6 Basic structure of SPIROPLAN® W37 gear units
ÅëîïÃ
ÅèçÃ
ÅëîîÃ
ÅëîíÃ ÅèèÃ
ÅêÃ ÅîëÃ
ÅîîÃ
ÅïçÃ
ÅéÃ
ÅèÃ
ÅëçÃ ÅëÃ
ÅëïèÃ ÅííÃ
ÅëïçÃ ÅïïÃ
ÅëîðÃ ÅíîÃ
ÅïîÃ
ÅçÃ ÅëçÃ
ÅììÃ ÅïííÃ ÅïÃ
ÅëðêÃ ÅíéÃ
ÅëÃ
ÅíïÃ
ÅíðÃ
ÅïíéÃ
ÅîÃ
ÅêïÃ
ÅîêÃ ÅíêÃ
605872395
[1] Pinion [22] Gear unit housing [44] O-ring [137] Shim
[2] Wheel [24] Eyebolt [59] Screw plug [150] Hex nut
[5] Pinion shaft [25] Grooved ball bearing [61] Retaining ring [183] Oil seal
[6] Wheel [26] Housing stage 1 [68] Retaining ring [506] Shim
[7] Output shaft [30] Grooved ball bearing [72] Retaining ring [518] Shim
[8] Key [31] Key [80] Key [519] Shim
[9] Oil seal [32] Spacer tube [88] Retaining ring [520] Shim
[11] Grooved ball bearing [33] Retaining ring [89] Closing cap [521] Shim
[12] Retaining ring [36] Hex head screw [106] Stud [522] Shim
[19] Key [37] Grooved ball bearing [133] Shim [523] Shim
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ïë

Gear Unit Structure
3 Nameplate/unit designation
3.7 Nameplate/unit designation

3.7.1 Nameplate
The following figure shows an example of a nameplate for a helical-bevel gear unit with
AQ adapter:
éêêìê Þ®«½¸-¿´ ñ Ù»®³¿²§

Õëé ßÏØïìðñï ×Ó ÓíÞ
ðïòïîíìëêéèçðòðððïòðè
· ïçôíì
×Ð êë
²¿ °µ ®ñ³·² îíî ²» °µ ®ñ³·² ìëðð Ó¿ °µ Ò³ êêë
µ¹ íî
Ó¿¼» ·² Ù»®³¿²§
ÝÔÐ ØÝ îîð Í§²¬¸òJ´ ñ îôìÔ ðêìï ëìí ï
624901899
i Gear unit reduction ratio

IM Mounting position
IP Degree of protection
nepk [rpm] Maximum permitted input speed
napk [rpm] Maximum permitted output speed
Mapk [Nm] Maximum permitted output torque
3.7.2 Type designation
INFORMATION
For a detailed overview of unit designations and additional information, refer to the fol-
lowing publications:
"Gear Units" catalog or
"Gearmotors" catalog
Example: Helical- A helical-bevel gear unit with adapter has, for example, the following unit designation:
bevel gear unit
K 37 /R AQA 80 /1
Variants
Flange classification
Adapter designation: e.g. for servomotors

- AQA: Adapter with keyway
- AQH: Adapter with clamping ring hub
Option: e.g. for servo gear units .../ R: Reduced cir-

cumferential backlash
Gear unit size: e.g. 37
Gear unit type: e.g. K
ïê Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Mechanical Installation
Required tools/resources
4
4 Mechanical Installation
4.1 Required tools/resources
Set of wrenches
Torque wrench for:
Shrink disks
AQH motor adapter
Input shaft assembly with centering shoulder
Mounting device
Compensation elements (shims, spacing rings)
Fasteners for input and output elements
Lubricant (e.g. NOCO® Fluid)
Bolt locking compound (for input shaft assembly with centering shoulder), e.g.
Loctite® 243
Standard parts are not included in the delivery
4.1.1 Installation tolerances
Shaft end Flanges

Diameter tolerance in accordance with DIN 748 Centering shoulder tolerance to DIN 42948
ISO k6 for solid shafts with Ø 50 mm ISO j6 for b1 230 mm
ISO m6 for solid shafts with Ø > 50 mm ISO h6 with b1 > 230 mm
ISO H7 for hollow shafts
Center bore in accordance with DIN 332, shape
DR
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ïé

4 Prerequisites for assembly
4.2 Prerequisites for assembly

Check that the following conditions have been met:
The entries on the nameplate of the gearmotor match the voltage supply system.
The drive has not been damaged during transportation or storage.
Ensure that the following requirements have been met:
For standard gear units:
Ambient temperature according to the technical documentation, nameplate and
lubricant table in section "Lubricants" (page 111).
No harmful oils, acids, gases, vapors, radiation etc. in the vicinity
For special versions:
The drive is designed in accordance with the ambient conditions. Refer to the in-
formation on the nameplate.
For helical-worm/SPIROPLAN® W gear units:
No large external mass moments of inertia which could exert a retrodriving load
on the gear unit.
[for (retrodriving) = 2 1/ < 0.5 self-locking]
You must clean the output shafts and flange surfaces thoroughly to ensure they are
free of anti-corrosion agents, contamination or similar. Use a commercially available
solvent. Do not expose the sealing lips of the oil seals to the solvent damage to the
material.
When the drive is installed in abrasive ambient conditions, protect the output end oil
seals against wear.
ïè Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Installing the gear unit
4
4.3 Installing the gear unit
NOTICE
Improper assembly may result in damages to the gear unit/gearmotor.
Possible damage to property.
Do closely observe the notes in this chapter.
Work on the gear unit only when the machine is not in use. Secure the drive unit
against unintentional power-up.
Protect the gear unit from direct cold air currents. Condensation may cause water to
accumulate in the oil.
The gear unit or gearmotor is only allowed to be installed in the specified mounting po-
sition. Refer to the information on the nameplate. SPIROPLAN® gear units of sizes
W10-W30 do not depend on a particular mounting position.
The support structure must have the following characteristics:
Level
Vibration damping
Torsionally rigid
The maximum permitted flatness error for foot and flange mounting (guide values with
reference to DIN ISO 1101):
Gear unit size 67: Max. 0.4 mm

Gear unit size 77 107: Max. 0.5 mm
Do not tighten the housing legs and mounting flanges against one another and ensure
that you comply with the permitted overhung and axial loads! Observe chapter "Project
Planning" in the Gear unit/gearmotor catalog for calculating the permitted overhung and
axial loads.
Secure gearmotors using quality 8.8 screws.
Secure the following gearmotors using quality 10.9 screws:
RF37, R37F with flange Ø = 120 mm
and RZ37, RZ47, RZ57, RZ67, RZ77, RZ87
INFORMATION
When installing the gear unit, make sure that the oil level and drain plugs as well as
the breather plugs are easily accessible!
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ïç

4 Installing the gear unit
At the same time, also check that the oil fill corresponds to the specifications for the in-
tended mounting position (see section "Lubricant fill quantities" (page 113) or refer to the
information on the nameplate). The gear units are filled with the required oil volume at
the factory. There may be slight deviations at the oil level plug as a result of the mounting
position, which are permitted within the manufacturing tolerances.
If you change the mounting position, make sure that you change the lubricant fill
quantities and the position of the breather valve accordingly. Observe section"Lu-
bricant fill quantities" (page 113) and chapter "Mounting Positions" (page 82).
Consult the SEW customer service if you intend to change the mounting position of K
gear units to or between M5 and M6.
Consult the SEW customer service if you intend to change the mounting position of S
gear units sizes S47 ... S97, to M2 and M3.
In case there is a risk of electrochemical corrosion between the gear unit and the driven
machine, use plastic inserts that are 2 to 3 mm thick. The material used must have an
electrical leakage resistance < 109 . Electrochemical corrosion can occur between var-
ious metals, for example, cast iron and high-grade steel. Also fit the bolts with plastic
washers. Ground the housing additionally use the grounding bolts on the motor.
îð Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

4
4.3.1 Tightening torques for retaining screws

Mount the gearmotors with the following tightening torques:
Tightening torque screw / nut
Screw/nut Strength class 8.8
[Nm]
M6 11
M8 25
M10 48
M12 86
M16 210
M20 410
M24 710
M30 1450
M36 2500
M42 4600
M48 6950
M56 11100
Mount the helical gearmotors in flange-mounted design with the following increased
tightening torques:
Tightening torque screw / nut
Screw/nut
Flange Gear unit Strength class 10.9
[Nm]
120 RF37 M6 14
140 RF47 M8 35
160 RF57 M8 35
60ZR RZ37 M8 35
70ZR RZ47 M8 35
80ZR RZ57 M10 69
95ZR RZ67 M10 69
110ZR RZ77 M12 120
130ZR RZ87 M12 120
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series îï

4.3.2 Mounting the gear units

Foot-mounted gear The following table shows the thread sizes of the gear units in foot-mounted design de-
unit pending on the gear unit type and size:
Gear unit type
Screw R / R..F RX F/ K / KH..B / S W
FH..B / FA..B KV..B / KA..B
M6 07 10/20
M8 17/27/37 27/37 37 30/37/47
M10 57 47 37/47 47/57
M12 47/57/67 67 57/67 57/67 67
M16 77/87 77/87 77/87 77 77
M20 97 97/107 97 87 87
M24 107 107 97 97
M30 137 127 107/167
M36 147/167 157 127/157/187
Gear unit with B14 The following table shows the thread sizes of the gear units with B14 flange and/or hol-
flange and/or hollow shaft depending on the gear unit type and size:
low shaft
Gear unit type
Screw RZ FAZ / FHZ KAZ / SA / WA
KHZ / KVZ SAZ / SHZ
M6 07/17/27 37 10/20/30
M8 37/47 27/37/47 37/47 47/57 37
M10 57/67 47
M12 77/87 57/67/77 57/67/77 67/77
M16 87/97 87/97 87/97
M20 107/127 107/127
M24 157 157
Gear unit with B5 The following table shows the thread sizes of the gear units with B5 flange depending
flange on the gear unit type,size and flange diameter:
Gear unit type
Flange Ø Screw RF / FF / KF / KAF / SF / WF / WAF
[mm] R..F / RM FAF / FHF KHF / KVF SAF /SHF
80 M6 10
110 M8 20
120 M6 07/17/27 37 10/20/30/37
140 M8 07/17/27
160 M8 07/17/27/37/47 27/37 37 37/47 30/37/47
200 M10 37/47/57/67 47 47 57/67
250 M12 57/67/77/87 57/67 57/67 77
300 M12 67/77/87 77 77
350 M16 77/87/97/107 87 87 87
450 M16 97/107/137/147 97/107 97/107 97
550 M16 107/137/147/167 127 127
660 M20 147/167 157 157
îî Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

4
4.3.3 Installation in damp locations or in the open

Drives are supplied in corrosion-resistant versions with an according surface protection
coating for use in damp areas or outdoors. Repair any damage to the paint work
(e.g. on the breather valve or the eyebolts).
When mounting the motors onto AM, AQ, AR, AT adapters and to start-up and friction
couplings, seal the flange areas with a suitable sealing compound, e.g. Loctite® 574.
Units installed outdoors must be protected from the sun. Suitable protective devices are
required, such as covers or roofs. Avoid any heat accumulation. The operator must en-
sure that foreign objects do not impair the function of the gear unit (e.g., by falling objects
or coverings).
4.3.4 Breather
The following gear units do not require a breather:
R07 in mounting positions M1, M2, M3, M5 and M6
R17, R27 and F27 in mounting positions M1, M3, M5 and M6
SPIROPLAN® W10, W20, W30 gear units
SPIROPLAN® W37 and W47 gear units in mounting positions M1, M2, M3, M5, M6
SEW-EURODRIVE supplies all other gear units with the breather valve installed and ac-
tivated according to the particular mounting position.
Exceptions:
1. SEW supplies the following gear units with a screw plug on the vent hole provided:
Pivoted mounting positions, if possible
Gear units for mounting on a slant
The breather valve is located in the motor terminal box. Before startup, you must re-
place the highest screw plug with the provided breather valve.
2. SEW supplies a breather valve in a plastic bag for gear head units requiring venting
on the input end.
3. Enclosed gear units are supplied without a breather valve.
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series îí

Activating the Check whether the breather valve is activated. If the breather valve has not been acti-
breather valve vated, you must remove the transport fixture from the breather valve before starting up
the gear unit!
1. Breather valve with transport fixture
211319051
2. Removing the transport fixture
211316875
3. Activated breather valve
211314699
îì Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Gear units with solid shaft
4
4.3.5 Painting the gear unit
NOTICE
Breather valves and oil seals may be damaged during painting or re-painting.
Potential damage to property.
Thoroughly cover the breather valves and the sealing lip of the oil seals with strips
prior to painting.
Remove the strips after painting.
4.4 Gear units with solid shaft

4.4.1 Assembling input and output elements
NOTICE
Bearing, hosing or shaft may be damaged due to improper assembly.
Possible damage to property
Only assemble the input and output components with a mounting device. Use the
center bore and the thread on the shaft end for positioning.
Never force belt pulleys, couplings, pinions, etc. onto the shaft end by hitting them
with a hammer.
In the case of belt pulleys, make sure the belt is tensioned correctly in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions.
Power transmission elements should be balanced after fitting and must not give
rise to any impermissible radial or axial forces (see the "Gearmotors" or "Explosion-
Proof Drives" catalog for permitted values).
Using a mounting The following figure shows a mounting device for installing couplings or hubs on gear
device unit or motor shaft ends. Should you be able to tighten the screw without any problems,
you may not need the thrust bearing on the mounting device.
[1] [2]
[3]
211368587
[1] Gear shaft end

[2] Thrust bearing
[3] Coupling hub
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series îë

4 Gear units with solid shaft
Avoiding excessive Avoid high overhung loads by: Installing the gear or chain sprocket according to figure
overhung loads B if possible.
[1] [1]
[A] [B]
211364235
[1] Hub
[A] unfavorable
[B] correct
INFORMATION
Mounting is easier if you first apply lubricant to the output element or heat it up briefly
(to 80 - 100 °C).
4.4.2 Mounting of couplings
CAUTION
Input and output components such as belt pulleys, couplings etc. are in fast motion
during operation.
Risk of jamming and crushing.
Cover input and output components with a touch guard.
Adjust the following misalignments according to the coupling manufacturer's specifica-
tions when mounting couplings.
a) Maximum and minimum clearance
b) Axial offset
c) Angular offset
¿÷ ¾÷ ½÷
211395595
îê Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Torque arms for shaft-mounted gear units
4
4.5 Torque arms for shaft-mounted gear units
NOTICE
Improper assembling may result in damages to the gear unit.
Do not place torque arms under strain during installation.
Use bolts of quality 8.8 to fasten torque arms.
4.5.1 Parallel shaft helical gear units

The following figure shows the toque arm for parallel shaft helical gear units.
c
[3]
a
[1]
[2]
9007199466107403
[1] Screw
[2] Washer
[3] Nut
Proceed as follows to mount the rubber buffers:

1. Use screws [1] and washers according to the following table.
2. Use two nuts to secure the screw connection [3].
3. Tighten the screw until the initial stress " L" of the buffers is reached according to
the table.
rubber buffer
Gear unit Diameter Internal Length Washer width L (taut)
diameter (loose)
d [mm] b [mm] c [mm] a [mm] [mm]
FA27 40 12.5 20 5 1
FA37 40 12.5 20 5 1
FA47 40 12.5 20 5 1.5
FA57 40 12.5 20 5 1.5
FA67 40 12.5 20 5 1.5
FA77 60 21.0 30 10 1.5
FA87 60 21.0 30 10 1.5
FA97 80 25.0 40 12 2
FA107 80 25.0 40 12 2
FA127 100 32.0 60 15 3
FA157 120 32.0 60 15 3
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series îé

4 Torque arms for shaft-mounted gear units
4.5.2 Helical-bevel gear units

The following figure shows the toque arm for helical-bevel gear units.
Bushing [1] with bearings on both ends.
Install connection end B as a mirror image of A.
[1]
211362059
Gear unit bolts Tightening torque

KA37 4 × M10 × 25 8.8 48 Nm
KA47 4 × M10 × 30 8.8 48 Nm
KA67 4 × M12 × 35 8.8 86 Nm
KA77 4 × M16 × 40 8.8 210 Nm
KA87 4 × M16 × 45 8.8 210 Nm
KA97 4 × M20 × 50 8.8 410 Nm
KA107 4 × M24 × 60 8.8 710 Nm
KA127 4 × M36 × 130 8.8 2500 Nm
KA157 4 × M36 × 130 8.8 2500 Nm
4.5.3 Helical worm gear units

The following figure shows the toque arm for helical-worm gear units.
[1]
211491723
Gear unit bolts Tightening torque

SA37 4 x M6 × 16 8.8 11 Nm
SA47 4 x M8 × 20 8.8 25 Nm
SA57 6 x M8 × 20 8.8 25 Nm
SA67 8 x M12 × 25 8.8 86 Nm
SA77 8 x M12 × 35 8.8 86 Nm
SA87 8 x M16 × 35 8.8 210 Nm
SA97 8 x M16 × 35 8.8 210 Nm
îè Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

4
4.5.4 SPIROPLAN®W gear units

The following figure shows the toque arm for SPIROPLAN® W gear units.
[1]
211489547
Gear unit bolts Tightening torque Nm

WA10 4 x M6 × 16 - 8.8 11
WA20 4 x M6 × 16 - 8.8 11
WA30 4 x M6 × 16 - 10.9 15
WA37 4 x M8 × 20 - 10.9 35
WA47 4 x M10 × 25 - 10.9 70
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series îç

4 Shaft-mounted gear units with keyway or splined hollow shaft
4.6 Shaft-mounted gear units with keyway or splined hollow shaft

INFORMATION
Concerning the configuration of the customer shaft, please also refer to the design
notes in the Gearmotors catalog.
4.6.1 Assembly notes

1. Apply and thoroughly spread NOCO® Fluid
211516171
2. Install the shaft and secure it axially

(mounting is facilitated by using a mounting device)
The three mounting types are described below:
2A: Standard scope of delivery
2B: installation and removal kit for customer shaft with contact shoulder
2C: installation and removal kit for customer shaft without contact shoulder
2A: Installation with standard scope of delivery
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
211518347
[1] Short retaining bolt (standard delivery scope)

[2] Lock washer
[3] Washer
[4] Retaining ring
[5] Customer shaft
íð Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Shaft-mounted gear units with keyway or splined hollow shaft
4
2B: Installation with SEW-EURODRIVE installation and removal kit (page 35)
customer shaft with contact shoulder
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
211520523
[1] Retaining screw

[2] Lock washer
[3] Washer
[4] Retaining ring
[5] Customer shaft with contact shoulder
2C: Installation with SEW-EURODRIVE installation and removal kit (page 35)
customer shaft without contact shoulder
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
C
[6]
211522699
[1] Retaining screw

[2] Lock washer
[3] Washer
[4] Retaining ring
[5] Spacer tube
[6] Customer shaft without contact shoulder
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series íï

3. Tighten the retaining screw to the appropriate torque (see table).
211524875
Screw Tightening torque [Nm]

M5 5
M6 8
M10/12 20
M16 40
M20 80
M24 200
INFORMATION
To avoid contact corrosion, we recommend that the customer shaft should additionally
be lathed down between the 2 contact surfaces.
íî Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

4
4.6.2 Removal notes

This description is only applicable when the gear unit was assembled using the installa-
tion and removal kit (page 35) from SEW-EURODRIVE. Observe section "Installation
notes (page 30)", 2B or 2C.
1. Loosen the retaining screw [1].
2. Remove parts [2] to [4] and, if applicable, the distance piece [5].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
211527051
[1] Retaining screw

[2] Lock washer
[3] Washer
[4] Retaining ring
[5] Spacer tube
[6] Customer shaft
3. Insert the forcing disk [8] and the fixed nut [7] from the SEW-EURODRIVE installa-
tion/removal kit between the customer shaft [6] and the retaining ring [4].
4. Re-install the retaining ring [4].
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series íí

5. Screw the retaining screw [1] back in. Now you can force the gear unit off the shaft
by tightening the bolt.
[1]
[4]
[7]
[8]
[6]
211529227
[1] Retaining screw

[4] Retaining ring
[6] Customer shaft
[7] Fixed nut
[8] Forcing disk
íì Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

4
4.6.3 SEW installation and removal kit

The SEW-EURODRIVE installation/removal kit can be ordered by quoting the specified
part number.
[1]
[7]
[8] [7]
[1]
211531403
[1] Retaining screw

Fixed nut for disassembly [7]
[8] Forcing disk
Type DH7 M1) C4 C5 C6 U-0.5 T -0.5 D3-0.5 L4 Part number of

[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] the installation/
removal kit
WA..10 16 M5 5 5 12 4.5 18 15.7 50 643 712 5
WA..20 18 M6 5 6 13.5 5.5 20.5 17.7 25 643 682 X
WA..20, WA..30, SA..37, WA..37 20 M6 5 6 15.5 5.5 22.5 19.7 25 643 683 8
FA..27, SA..47, WA..47 25 M10 5 10 20 7.5 28 24.7 35 643 684 6
FA..37, KA..37, SA..47, SA..57, WA..47 30 M10 5 10 25 7.5 33 29.7 35 643 685 4
FA..47, KA..47, SA..57 35 M12 5 12 29 9.5 38 34.7 45 643 686 2
FA..57, KA..57, FA..67, KA..67, SA..67 40 M16 5 12 34 11.5 41.9 39.7 50 643 687 0
SA..67 45 M16 5 12 38.5 13.5 48.5 44.7 50 643 688 9
FA..77, KA..77, SA..77 50 M16 5 12 43.5 13.5 53.5 49.7 50 643 689 7
FA..87, KA..87, SA..77, SA..87 60 M20 5 16 56 17.5 64 59.7 60 643 690 0
FA..97, KA..97, SA..87, SA..97 70 M20 5 16 65.5 19.5 74.5 69.7 60 643 691 9
FA..107, KA..107, SA..97 90 M24 5 20 80 24.5 95 89.7 70 643 692 7
FA..127, KA..127 100 M24 5 20 89 27.5 106 99.7 70 643 693 5
FA..157, KA..157 120 M24 5 20 107 31 127 119.7 70 643 694 3
1) Retaining screw
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series íë

INFORMATION
The SEW installation kit for attaching the customer shaft is a recommendation by
SEW-EURODRIVE. You must always check whether this design can compensate the
axial loads. In particular applications (e.g. mounting mixer shafts), a different design
may have to be used to secure the shaft axially. In these cases, customers can use
their own devices. However, you must ensure that these designs do not cause poten-
tial sources of combustion according to DIN EN 13463 (for example, impact sparks).
íê Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Shaft-mounted gear units with shrink disk
4
4.7 Shaft-mounted gear units with shrink disk

NOTICE
Tightening the screws without installed shaft may result in the hollow shaft being de-
formed.
Only tighten the locking screws with the shaft installed.
1. Loosen the locking screws by a few turns (do not unscrew them completely).
211533579
2. Carefully degrease the hollow shaft hole and the input shaft using a commercial
solvent.
211535755
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series íé

4 Shaft-mounted gear units with shrink disk
3. Hollow shaft/input shaft after degreasing.
211537931
4. Apply NOCO® fluid to the input shaft in the area of the bushing.
It is essential to make sure that the clamping area of the shrink disk is free from
grease. As a result, never apply NOCO® Fluid directly to the bush. This is because
the paste may be able to get into the clamping area of the shrink disk when the input
shaft is put on.
211540107
íè Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Shaft-mounted gear units with shrink disk
4
5. Install the input shaft.

Make sure that the locking collars of the shrink disk are installed in parallel to each
other.
For gear unit housings with shaft shoulder:
Mount the shrink disk onto the stop on the shaft shoulder.
For gear unit housings without shaft shoulder:
Install the shrink disk with a 1 to 2 mm distance from the gear unit housing.
Tighten the locking screws by working round with the torque wrench several times
from one screw to the next (not in diametrically opposite sequence). For tighten-
ing torques, refer to the following table.
ïóî³³ -âð³³
211542283
6. After the installation, make sure the remaining gap between the outer rings
is > 0 mm.
7. Grease the the area around the shrink disk outside of the hollow shaft to prevent
corrosion.
Gear unit type Screw Nm max.1)
SH37 WH37 M5 5
KH37...77 FH37...77 SH47...77 WH47 M6 12
KH87/97 FH87/97 SH87/97 M8 30
KH107 FH107 M10 59 60°
KH127/157 FH127/157 M12 100
KH167 M16 250
KH187 M20 470
1) Maximum tightening angle per rotation
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series íç

4 Shaft-mounted gear units with shrink disk
4.7.2 Removal notes
CAUTION
Risk of jamming and crushing due to improper removal of heavy components.
Risk of injury.
Observe the following removal notes.
Removing the shrink disk properly.
1. Loosen the locking screws one after the other by a quarter rotation to avoid tilting the
outer rings.
2. Unscrew the locking bolts evenly one after the other. Do not remove the locking
screws completely.
3. Remove the shaft or pull the hub off the shaft. (remove any rust that may have formed
between the hub and the end of the shaft beforehand).
4. Remove the shrink disk from the hub.
4.7.3 Cleaning and lubrication

There is no need to dismantle removed shrink disks before they are reinstalled.
Clean and lubricate the shrink disk if it is dirty.
Lubricate the tapered surfaces with one of the following solid lubricants:
Lubricant (Mo S2) Sold as
Molykote 321 (lube coat) Spray
Molykote spray (powder spray) Spray
Molykote G Rapid Spray or paste
Aemasol MO 19P Spray or paste
Aemasol DIO-sétral 57 N (lube coat) Spray
Grease the locking screws with a multipurpose grease such as Molykote BR 2 or similar.
ìð Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

4
Shaft-mounted gear units with TorqLOC®
4.8 Shaft-mounted gear units with TorqLOC®

1. Clean the customer shaft and the inside of the hollow shaft. Ensure that all traces of
grease or oil are removed.
2. Install the stop ring and the bushing on the customer shaft.
211941003
3. Apply and thoroughly spread NOCO® Fluid on the bushing.
211938827
4. Push the gear unit onto the customer shaft.
211936651
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ìï

4
5. Preassemble the torque arm (do not tighten the screws).
Õòòò
Úòòò
Íòòò
211943179
6. Push the busing onto the gear unit up to the stop.
211945355
7. Tighten all the retaining screws of the torque arm.
211947531
ìî Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

4
8. Secure the bushing with the split ring. Tighten the split ring on the bushing using the
appropriate torque as specified in the following table:
212000907
Type nickel-plated Stainless steel

[Standard]
KT/FT ST/WT Torque [Nm]
- 37 18 7.5
37 47 18 7.5
47 57 18 7.5
57, 67 67 35 18
77 77 35 18
87 87 35 18
97 97 35 18
107 38 38
127 65 65
157 150 150
9. Make sure that all screws are loosened and slide the shrink disk onto the hollow
shaft.
212003083
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ìí

4
10.Slide the counter bushing onto the customer shaft and into the hollow shaft
212005259
11.until the shrink disk is properly seated.

12.Tap lightly on the flange of the counter bushing to ensure that the socket is fitted se-
curely in the hollow shaft.
212007435
13.Make sure that the customer shaft is seated in the counter bushing.
212009611
ìì Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

4
14.Manually tighten the screws of the shrink disk and ensure that the end rings of the
shrink disk are parallel.
212011787
15.Tighten the locking screws with a torque wrench by working round several times from
one bolt to the next (not in diametrically opposite sequence) according to the follow-
ing table:
â ð³³
212013963
Type nickel-plated Stainless steel

[Standard]
KT/FT ST/WT Torque [Nm]
- 37 4.0 7
37 47 10 7
47 57 12 7
57, 67 67 12 15
77 77 30 30
87 87 30 50
97 97 30 50
107 59 65
127 100 120
157 100 120
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ìë

4
16.After the installation, make sure the remaining gap between the outer rings
is > 0 mm.
17.The remaining gap between counter bushing and hollow shaft end as well as stop
ring bushing and split ring must be > 0 mm.
â ð ³³
â ð ³³
212016139
ìê Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

4
4.8.2 Removal notes
CAUTION
Risk of jamming and crushing due to improper removal of heavy components.
Risk of injury.
Removing the shrink disk properly.
Observe the following removal notes.
1. Loosen the locking screws one after the other by a quarter rotation to
avoid tilting the outer rings.
212013963
2. Unscrew the locking bolts evenly one after the other.

Do not remove the locking screws completely.
3. Dismantle the conical steel bushing.
If required, use the outer rings as pullers as follows:
Remove all the locking screws.
Screw the respective number of screws in the tapped holes of the shrink disk.
Support the inner ring against the gear unit housing.
Pull off the conical steel bushing by tightening the screws.
4. Remove the gear unit from the shaft.
2903780235
5. Remove the shrink disk from the hub.
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ìé

4 Installing the protective cover
4.8.3 Cleaning and lubrication

There is no need to dismantle removed shrink disks before they are reinstalled.
Clean and lubricate the shrink disk if it is dirty.
Lubricate the tapered surfaces with one of the following solid lubricants:
Lubricant (Mo S2) Sold as
Molykote 321 (lube coat) Spray
Molykote spray (powder spray) Spray
Molykote G Rapid Spray or paste
Aemasol MO 19P Spray or paste
Aemasol DIO-sétral 57 N (lube coat) Spray
Grease the locking screws with a multipurpose grease such as Molykote BR 2 or similar.
4.9 Installing the protective cover

CAUTION
During operation, output components are in fast motion.
Risk of jamming and crushing.
Disconnect the motor from the power supply before starting work and safeguard
against accidental startup.
Cover input and output components with a touch guard.
4.9.1 Installing the rotating cover
ï
1. Slide the rotating cover onto the shrink disk until it snaps in.
ìè Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Installing the protective cover
4
4.9.2 Installing the fixed cover
ï î
1. To fasten the cover, remove the plastic plug on the gear unit housing (see figure 1)
2. Use the delivered screws to mount the cover to the gear unit housing (see figure 2).
4.9.3 Installation without cover

In certain individual cases (e.g. through-shaft), you cannot install the cover. In such
cases, the cover is not necessary if the system or unit manufacturer provides corre-
sponding components to guarantee for the compliance with the required degree of pro-
tection.
If this results in additional maintenance, you have to describe this in the operating in-
structions for system/component.
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ìç

4 AM adapter coupling
4.10 AM adapter coupling

4.10.1 IEC adapter AM63 - 280 / NEMA adapter AM56 - 365
212099979
[1] Motor shaft

[479] Coupling half
[481] Setscrew
[484] Key
[491] Spacer tube
1. Clean the motor shaft and the flange surfaces of the motor and the adapter.
2. Remove the key from the motor shaft and replace it with the supplied key [484] (not
AM63 and AM250).
3. Heat the coupling half [479] to approx. 80 - 100 °C and push the coupling half onto
the motor shaft. Position as follows:
IEC adapter AM63 - 225 Until stop at motor shaft shoulder.
IEC adapter AM250 - 280 to dimensionA.
NEMA adapter with spacer tube [491] to dimension A.
4. Secure the key and coupling half using the setscrew [481] and tightening torque TA
according to the table on the motor shaft.
ëð Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

AM adapter coupling
4
5. Check the dimension A.

6. Seal the contact surfaces between the adapter and motor using a suitable sealing
compound.
7. Mount the motor on the adapter. Ensure that the coupling claw of the adapter shaft
is engaged in the plastic cam ring.
IEC AM 63 / 71 80 / 90 100 / 112 132 160 / 180 200 225 250 / 280
A 24.5 31.5 41.5 54 76 78.5 93.5 139
TA 1.5 1.5 4.8 4.8 10 17 17 17
Thread M4 M4 M6 M6 M8 M10 M10 M10
NEMA AM 56 143 / 145 182 / 184 213 / 215 254 / 256 284 / 286 324 / 326 364 / 365
A 46 43 55 63.5 78.5 85.5 107 107
TA 1.5 1.5 4.8 4.8 10 17 17 17
Thread M4 M4 M6 M6 M8 M10 M10 M10
INFORMATION
To avoid contact corrosion, we recommend applying NOCO® Fluid to the motor shaft
before mounting the coupling half.
NOTICE
Dampness might enter the adapter when mounting a motor to the adapter.
Potential damage to property
Seal adapter with anaerobic fluid seal.
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ëï

4 AM adapter coupling
Permitted loads
NOTICE
Impermissibly high loads may occur when mounting a motor.
The load data specified in the following table are not to be exceeded.
Ú¯
18513419
Adapter type Fq1) [N]

1)
IEC NEMA x [mm] IEC adapter NEMA adapter
AM63/71 AM56 77 530 410
AM80/90 AM143/145 113 420 380
AM100/112 AM182/184 144 2000 1760
AM1322) AM213/2152) 1600 1250
186
AM132.. AM213/215 4700 3690
AM160/180 AM254/286 251 4600 4340
AM200/225 AM324-AM365 297 5600 5250
AM250/280 - 390 11200 -
1) The maximum permitted weight of the attached motor Fqmax must be reduced linearly as the cen-
ter of gravity distance x increases. If this distance is reduced, the maximum permitted weight
Fqmax cannot be increased.
2) Diameter of the adapter output flange: 160 mm
ëî Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

AM adapter coupling
4
AM../RS adapter Check the direction of rotation of the drive prior to assembly or startup. Inform the
AM with backstop SEW-EURODRIVE service in the case of incorrect direction of rotation.
The backstop is maintenance-free in operation, and does not require any further main-
tenance work. Backstops have a minimum lift-off speed depending on the size (see fol-
lowing table).
.
NOTICE
If the actual speed level is below the minimum lift-off speed level, the backstops are
subject to wear, and the resulting friction causes the temperature to increase.
In rated operation, the lift-off speeds must not drop below the minimum values.
During startup or braking, the lift-off speeds may drop below the minimum levels.
Maximum locking torque of the backstop Minimum lift-off speed

Type
[Nm] [rpm]
AM80/90/RS,
65 820
AM143/145/RS
AM100/112/RS,
425 620
AM182/184/RS
AM132/RS,
850 530
AM213/215/RS
AM160/180/RS,
1450 480
AM254/286/RS
AM200/225/RS,
1950 450
AM324-365/RS
AM250/280/RS, 1950 450
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ëí

4 AQ adapter coupling
4.11 AQ adapter coupling

4.11.1 AQA80 - 190 adapter / AQH80 - 190 adapter
ßÏß ßÏØ
ìéç
ìéç
ï
ï
î í
212114955
1 Motor shaft
2 Grub screw
3 screws
AQA = With keyway

AQH = Without keyway
1. Clean the motor shaft and the flange surfaces of the motor and the adapter.
2. Type AQH:Loosen the screws of the coupling half (479) and loosen the conical con-
nection.
3. Heat up the coupling half (80 °C - 100 °C) and slide it onto the motor shaft.
AQA / AQH design: up to clearance "A" (see table)
ëì Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

AQ adapter coupling
4
4. Type AQH:Tighten the screws evenly in diametrically opposite sequence, working

round several times. Make sure that all the screws are tightened with the tightening
torque TA according to the following table.
Type AQA:Secure the coupling halves using the setscrew (see table).
5. Check the position of the coupling half (clearance "A", see table).
Mount the motor onto the adapter, making sure that the claws of the two coupling
halves engage in each other. The force that must be applied when joining the two
coupling halves is dissipated after final assembly, so there is no risk of any axial load
being applied to adjacent bearings.
INFORMATION
Only for AQA, not permitted for AQH:To avoid contact corrosion, we recommend
applying NOCO®® Fluid to the motor shaft before mounting the coupling half.
NOTICE
Dampness might enter the adapter when mounting a motor to the adapter.
Seal adapter with anaerobic fluid seal
4.11.2 Setting dimensions/tightening torques
Type Coupling size Clearance "A" Bolts DIN 912 Tightening torque TA
[mm] [Nm]
AQA AQH AQA AQH
AQA /AQH 80 /1/2/3 44,5
AQA /AQH 100 /1/2 39
19/24 M5 M4 2 3
AQA /AQH 100 /3/4 53
AQA /AQH 115 /1/2 62
AQA /AQH 115 /3 62
24/28 M5 M5 2 6
AQA /AQH 140 /1/2 62
AQA /AQH 140 /3 74,5
28/38 M8 M5 10 6
AQA /AQH 190 /1/2 76,5
AQA /AQH 190 /3 38/45 100 M8 M6 10 10
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ëë

4 AD input shaft assembly
4.12 AD input shaft assembly

Observe section "Assembling the input and output components" (page 25) when install-
ing input components.
4.12.1 AD../P cover with motor mounting platform

Mounting the motor and adjusting the motor mounting platform.
212119307
[1] Motor mounting platform

[2] Stud bolt (only AD6/P / AD7/P)
[3] Support (only AD6/P / AD7/P)
[4] Nut
[5] Threaded column
1. Set the motor mounting platform to the required mounting position by evenly
tightening the adjusting nuts. Remove the lifting eyebolt from helical gear units in
order to achieve the lowest adjustment position. Touch up any damage to the paint
work.
2. Align the motor on the motor mounting platform (shaft ends must be in alignment)
and secure it.
3. Mount the input elements on the input shaft end and the motor shaft, line them up
with one another and correct the motor position again, if necessary.
4. Put on the traction elements (V-belt, chain, etc.) and apply a preload by evenly
adjusting the motor mounting platform. Do not stress the motor mounting platform
and the columns against each other when doing this.
5. Tighten all the nuts not used for adjustment in order to fix the threaded columns.
ëê Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

AD input shaft assembly
4
4.12.2 Only AD6/P and AD7/P

Unscrew the nuts on the stud bolts before adjustment to allow the stud bolts to move
axially in the support without restriction. Do not tighten the nuts until the final adjustment
position has been reached. Do not adjust the motor mounting platform using the support.
4.12.3 AD../ZR input cover with centering shoulder

Mounting applications on the input shaft assembly with centering shoulder.
1. Retaining bolts of a suitable length must be used to secure the application. The
length l of the new bolts is calculated as follows:
212121483
[l] t+a
[t] Screw-in depth (see table)
[a] Thickness of the application
[s] Retaining thread (see table)
Round down the calculated screw length to the next smaller standard length.
2. Remove the retaining screws from the centering shoulder.
3. Clean the contact surface and the centering shoulder.
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ëé

4. Clean the threads of the new bolts and apply a bolt locking compound
(e.g. Loctite® 243) to the first few threads.
5. Attach the application to the centering shoulder and tighten the retaining screws with
the specified tightening torque TA (see table).
Screw-in Tightening torque
Retaining thread
Type depth TA for connection screws of strength class
s
t [mm] 8.8 [Nm]
AD2/ZR 25,5 M8 25
AD3/ZR 31,5 M10 48
AD4/ZR 36 M12 86
AD5/ZR 44 M12 86
AD6/ZR 48,5 M16 210
AD7/ZR 49 M20 410
AD8/ZR 42 M12 86
ëè Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

AD input shaft assembly
4
Permitted loads
NOTICE
Impermissibly high loads may occur when mounting a motor.
The load data specified in the following table are not to be exceeded.
Ú¯
212123659
x1) Fq1)
Type
[mm] [N]
AD2/ZR 193 330
AD3/ZR 274 1400
AD4/ZR2) 1120
361
AD4/ZR 3300
AD5/ZR 487 3200
AD6/ZR 567 3900
AD7/ZR 663 10000
AD8/ZR 516 4300
1) Maximum load values for connection screws of strength class 8.8. The maximum permitted weight of
the attached motor Fqmax must be reduced linearly as the center of gravity distance x increases. When
this distance is reduced, Fqmax cannot be increased.
2) Diameter of the adapter output flange: 160 mm
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ëç

4.12.4 AD../RS cover with backstop

Check the direction of rotation of the drive prior to assembly or startup. Inform the SEW-
EURODRIVE service in the case of incorrect direction of rotation.
The backstop is maintenance-free in operation, and does not require any further main-
tenance work. Backstops have a minimum lift-off speed depending on the size (see fol-
lowing table).
NOTICE
If the actual speed level is below the minimum lift-off speed level, the backstops are
subject to wear, and the resulting friction causes the temperature to increase.
In rated operation, the lift-off speeds must not drop below the minimum values.
During startup or braking, the lift-off speeds may drop below the minimum levels.
Maximum locking torque of the backstop Minimum lift-off speed

Type
[Nm] [rpm]
AD2/RS 65 820
AD3/RS 425 620
AD4/RS 850 530
AD5/RS 1450 480
AD6/RS 1950 450
AD7/RS 1950 450
AD8/RS 1950 450
êð Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Startup ×
Checking the oil level
5
ð
5 Startup
5.1 Checking the oil level
Before startup, make sure that the oil level corresponds to the mounting position. Ob-
serve section "Checking the oil level and changing the oil" (page 67).
5.2 Helical-worm and SPIROPLAN® W gear units

5.2.1 Run-in period
SPIROPLAN® and helical-worm gear units require a running-in period of at least 48 h
before reaching their maximum efficiency. A separate run-in period applies for each di-
rection of rotation if the gear unit is operated in both directions of rotation. The table
shows the average power reduction during the run-in period.
Helical-worm gear
unit
Worm
i range reduction
1-start approx. 50 ... 280 approx. 12 %
4-start - -
SPIROPLAN®
gear units
W10 / W20 / W30 W37 / W47
i range reduction i range reduction
approx. 35 ... 75 approx. 15 %
approx. 20 ... 35 approx. 10 %
approx. 10 ... 20 approx. 8 % about 30...70 approx. 8 %
About 8 approx. 5 % approx. 10 ... 30 approx. 5%
About 6 approx. 3 % about 3...10 approx. 3%
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series êï

× Startup
5 Helical/parallel shaft helical/helical-bevel gear units
ð
5.3 Helical/parallel shaft helical/helical-bevel gear units

No special startup instructions are required for helical, parallel shaft helical and helical-
bevel gear units providing the gear units have been installed in accordance with section
"Mechanical Installation" (page 17).
5.4 Gear units with backstop

The purpose of a backstop is to prevent undesirable reverse rotation. During operation,
the backstop permits rotation in one specified direction of rotation only.
NOTICE
Operating the motor in the blocking direction could destroy the backstop.
Do not start up the motor in the blocking direction. Be sure that the motor power
supply is correctly connected so that the motor rotates in the required direction.
The backstop can be operated in blocking direction with half the output torque once
for control purposes.
ÝÝÉ ÝÉ
ß
ÝÉ
ÝÝÉ
659173899
The direction of rotation is determined with a view to the output shaft (LSS).
Clockwise (CW)
Counterclockwise (CCW)
The permitted direction of rotation is indicated on the housing.
êî Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Inspection/Maintenance ×
Preliminary work regarding gear unit inspection/maintenance
6
ð
6 Inspection/Maintenance
The following gear units are lubricated for life:
Helical gear units R07, R17, R27
Parallel shaft helical gear unit F27
SPIROPLAN® gear units
Depending on external factors, the surface/corrosion protection might have to be re-
paired or renewed.
6.1 Preliminary work regarding gear unit inspection/maintenance

Observe the following notes before you start with the inspection/maintenance work.
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
Disconnect the gearmotor from the power supply before starting work and protect
it against unintentional re-start.
WARNING
Danger of burns due to hot gear unit and hot gear unit oil.
Severe injuries.
Let the gear unit cool down before you begin with your work.
Only remove the oil level and oil drain plug very carefully.
NOTICE
Filling in the wrong oil may result in significantly different lubricant characteristics.
Do not mix different synthetic lubricants and do not mix synthetic with mineral lubri-
cants.
Mineral oil is used as standard lubricant.
NOTICE
Improper maintenance may result in damages to the gear unit.
Possible damage to property.
Heed the information in this chapter.
INFORMATION
The position of the oil level plug, oil drain plug and the breather valve depends on the
mounting position. Refer to the diagrams of the mounting positions. See chapter
"Mounting Positions" (page 82).
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series êí

Inspection/Maintenance
6 Inspection/maintenance intervals
Strict adherence to the inspection and maintenance intervals is absolutely necessary

to ensure safe working conditions.
Before releasing shaft connections, be sure that there are no active torsional mo-
ments present (tensions within the system).
Prevent foreign bodies from entering into the gear unit during maintenance and in-
spection work.
Do not clean the gear unit with a high-pressure cleaning system as water might enter
the gear unit and the seals might be damaged.
Perform safety and function tests following all maintenance and repair work.
6.2 Inspection/maintenance intervals
Time interval What do I do?

Every 3000 operating hours, at least every 6 Check oil and oil level
months Check running noise for possible bearing
damage
Visually check the seals for leakage
For gear units with a torque arm: Check the
rubber buffer and change it, if necessary
Depending on the operating conditions (see Change mineral oil
illustration below), at the latest every 3 years
Replace anti-friction bearing grease
according to oil temperature (recommendation)
Replace oil seal (do not install it in the same
track)
Depending on the operating conditions (see Change synthetic oil
illustration below), at the latest every 5 years
Replace anti-friction bearing grease
according to oil temperature (recommendation)
Replace oil seal (do not install it in the same
track)
Varying (depending on external factors) Touch up or renew the surfaces/anticorrosion
coating
êì Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Lubricant change intervals
6
6.3 Lubricant change intervals

The following figure shows the change intervals for standard gear units under normal
environmental conditions. Change the oil more frequently when using special versions
subject to more severe/aggressive environmental conditions!
30000
[h]
25000
[3]
20000
15000
[4]
[1]
10000
[5]
5000
0
70 80 90 100 110 115 120
[2] [°C]
[1] Operating hours [3] CLP PG

[2] Sustained oil bath temperature [4] CLP HC / HCE
Average value per oil type at 70 °C [5] CLP / HLP / E
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series êë

6 Inspection/maintenance for the AL/AM/AQ adapter
6.4 Inspection/maintenance for the AL/AM/AQ adapter

Every 3000 operating hours, at least every 6 months Check running noise for possible bearing
damage
Visually check the adapter for leakage
After 10000 operating hours Check torsional play
Visually check the elastic annular gear
after 25 000 - 30 000 hours of operation Renew the anti-friction bearing grease
Replace oil seal (do not install it in the
same track)
Change the elastic annular gear
6.5 Inspection/maintenance for the AD input cover

Every 3000 operating hours, at least every 6 months Check running noise for possible bearing
damage
Visually check the adapter for leakage
after 25 000 - 30 000 hours of operation Renew the anti-friction bearing grease
Replace the oil seal
êê Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit
6
6.6 Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit

6.6.1 Checking the oil level and changing the oil
The procedure when checking the oil level and changing the oil depends on the following
factors:
Gear unit type
Size
Mounting position
Observe the references to the respective sections as well as the following table. Refer
to chapter "Mounting Positions" (page 82) for notes on the mounting positions. You can-
not check the oil level of gear units in pivoted mounting position. The gear units are de-
livered with the correct oil level. Observe the designations and fill quantities on the
nameplate if you have to change the oil.
Code letter Section "Checking the oil level and changing the oil" Reference
A: Helical gear units... (page 68)
Parallel shaft helical gear units...
Helical-bevel gear units...
Helical-worm gear units...
With oil level plug
B: Helical gear units... (page 70)
Parallel shaft helical gear units...
SPIROPLAN® gear units...
without oil level plug, with cover plate
C: S37... helical-worm gear units (page 74)
without oil level plug and cover plate
D: SPIROPLAN® W37 / W47... (page 77)
in mounting positions: M1, M2, M3, M5, M6 with oil level plug
E: SPIROPLAN® W37 / W47... (page 79)
in M4 mounting position without oil level plug and cover plate
Code letter for section "Checking the oil level and changing the oil"
Series Gear unit
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
R07...R27 B
R37 / R67 A
R R47 / R57 A B A
R77...R167 A
RX57...R107 A
F27 B
F
F37..F157 A
K K37...K187 A
S37 C
S
S47...S97 A
W10...W30 B
W
W37...W47 D E D
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series êé

6 Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit
6.6.2 A: Helical, parallel shaft helical, helical-bevel and helical-worm gear units with oil level plug
Checking the oil Proceed as follows to check the oil level of the gear unit:
levelvia the oil
1. Observe the notes in section "Preliminary work regarding gear unit inspection/
level plug
maintenance" (page 63).
2. Determine the position of the oil level plug and the breather valve using the mounting
position sheets. See chapter "Mounting Positions" (page 82).
3. Place a container underneath the oil level plug.
4. Slowly remove the oil level plug. Small amounts of oil may leak out as the permitted
max. oil level is higher than the lower edge of the oil level bore.
5. Check the oil level according to the following figure and the corresponding table.
ÅïÃ
ÅîÃ
H
È ³¿¨ò
³·²ò È
18634635
[1] Oil level bore

[2] Reference oil level
? Oil level bore Min and max fill level = x [mm]

M10 x 1 1.5
M12 x 1.5 2
M22 x 1.5 3
M33 x 2 4
M42 x 2 5
6. If the oil level is too low, do the following:

Remove the breather valve.
Fill in additional oil of the same type via the vent hole until the oil level is at the
lower edge of the oil level bore.
Re-insert the breather valve.
7. Re-insert the oil level plug.
êè Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

6
Checking the oil Proceed as follows to check the oil of the gear unit:
via the oil drain
plug
2. Determine the position of the oil drain plug using the mounting position sheets. See
chapter "Mounting Positions" (page 82).
3. Remove a little oil from the oil drain plug.
4. Check the oil consistency.
Viscosity
If you can see that the oil is heavily contaminated, we recommend that you
change the oil even if this is outside the service intervals specified in "Inspection
and maintenance intervals" (page 64).
5. Check the oil level. See previous section.
Changing the oil

via the oil drain
plug and the
breather valve
WARNING
Severe injuries.
However, the gear unit must still be warm otherwise the high viscosity of
excessively cold oil will make it harder to drain the oil properly.
2. Determine the position of the oil drain plug, the oil level plug and the breather valve
using the mounting position sheets. See chapter "Mounting Positions" (page 82).
3. Place a container underneath the oil drain plug.
4. Remove the oil level plug, the breather valve and the oil drain plug.
5. Drain all the oil.
6. Re-insert the oil drain plug.
7. Fill in new oil of the same type via the vent hole (otherwise consult the customer ser-
vice). Do not mix different synthetic lubricants.
Observe the oil fill quantities according to the specifications on the nameplate or
according to the mounting position. See sect "Lubricant fill quantities" (page 110).
Check the oil level at the oil level plug.
8. Re-insert the oil level plug and the breather valve.
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series êç

6.6.3 B: Helical, parallel shaft helical, SPIROPLAN® gear units without oil level plug with cover plate
Checking the oil For gear units without oil level bore, the oil level is checked via the cover plate opening.
level via the cover Proceed as follows:
plate
2. For the cover plate to be on top, you have to set up the gear unit in the following
mounting position.
R07 - R57 in M1 mounting position
F27 in M3 mounting position
W10 - W30 in M1 mounting position
3. Loosen the screws [1] of the cover plate [2] and remove the cover plate [2] and the
corresponding seal [3] (see following figure).
[1]
[2]
[3]
18643211
4. Determine the vertical distance "x" between oil level and sealing surface of the gear
unit housing (see following figure).
çðp
18646283
éð Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

6
5. Compare the determined value "x" to the max. distance between oil level and sealing
surface of the gear unit housing specified in the following table. Adjust the fill level if
required.
Gear unit type Max. distance x [mm] between oil level and sealing surface of the gear
unit housing for mounting position
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
2 stages 52 ± 1 27 ± 1 27 ± 1 27 ± 1 27 ± 1 27 ± 1
R07
3 stages 49 ± 1 21 ± 1 21 ± 1 21 ± 1 21 ± 1 21 ± 1
2 stages 63 ± 1 18 ± 1 46 ± 1 18 ± 1 46 ± 1 46 ± 1
R17
3 stages 58 ± 1 11 ± 2 40 ± 2 11 ± 2 40 ± 2 40 ± 2
2 stages 74 ± 1 22 ± 1 45 ± 1 22 ± 1 45 ± 1 45 ± 1
R27
3 stages 76 ± 1 19 ± 1 42 ± 1 19 ± 1 42 ± 1 42 ± 1
2 stages 39 ± 1
R47
3 stages 32 ± 1
2 stages 32 ± 1
R57
3 stages 28 ± 1
2 stages 78 ± 1 31 ± 1 72 ± 1 56 ± 1 78 ± 1 78 ± 1
F27
3 stages 71 ± 1 24 ± 1 70 ± 1 45 ± 1 71 ± 1 71 ± 1
irrespective of the mounting position

W10 12 ± 1
W20 19 ± 1
W30 31 ± 1
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series éï

6. Close the gear unit after the oil level check:

Re-attach the seal of the cover plate. Make sure that the sealing surfaces are
clean and dry.
Screw on the cover plate. Tighten the cover screws with the rated tightening
torque according to the following table from the inside to the outside in the order
illustrated in the figure. Repeat the tightening procedure until the screws are
properly tightened. Only use impulse drivers or torque wrenches in order to
prevent the cover plate from being damaged (no impact drivers).
é è
ï î
ë ê ï î ê è
é ë
î
í ì
ï î
ï î ï
í ì í
í ì ì í ë ì
ë ê
ß Þ Ý Ü Û
18649739
Gear unit Fig- Retaining Rated tightening torque T N Minimum tightening torque TN
type ure thread [Nm] [Nm]
R/RF07 E M5 6 4
R/RF17/27 D
R/RF47/57 A M6 11 7
F27 B
W10 C M5 6 4
W20 C
M6 11 7
W30 A
éî Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

6
via the cover plate
2. Open the cover plate of the gear unit according to section "Checking the oil via the
cover plate" (page 70).
3. Take an oil sample via the cover plate opening.
Viscosity
5. Check the oil level. See section "Checking the oil level via the cover plate" (page 70).
6. Screw on the cover plate. Observe the order and the tightening torques according to
section "Checking the oil level via the cover plate" (page 70)
Checking the oil

via the cover plate
WARNING
Severe injuries.
cover plate".
3. Completely drain the oil in to a vessel via the cover plate opening.
4. Fill in new oil of the same type via the cover plate opening (otherwise consult the
customer service). Do not mix different synthetic lubricants.
Pour in the oil in accordance with the mounting position or as specified on the
nameplate. See section "Lubricant fill quantities" (page 110).
5. Check the oil level.
6. Screw on the cover plate. Observe the order and the tightening torques according to
section "Checking the oil level via the cover plate" (page 70)
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series éí

6.6.4 C: S37 helical-worm gear units without oil level plug and cover plate
Checking the oil The S37 gear unit is not equipped with an oil level plug or a cover plate. This is why the
level via the screw oil level is checked via the control bore.
plug
2. Set up the gear unit in M5 or M6 mounting position, i.e. control bore always on top.
3. Remove the screw plug [1] (see following figure).
ÅïÃ
18655371
4. Insert the dipstick vertically via the control bore all the way to the bottom of the gear
unit housing. Pull out the dipstick vertically (see following figure).
çðp
18658699
éì Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

6
5. Determine the size of the section "x" of the dipstick covered with lubricant using a cal-
iper (see following figure).
18661771
6. Compare the determined value "x" to the min. value depending on the mounting po-
sition specified in the following table. Correct the fill level if required.
Oil level = wetted section x [mm] of the dipstick
Gear unit Mounting position

type M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
S37 10 ± 1 24 ± 1 34 ± 1 37 ± 1 24 ± 1 24 ± 1
7. Re-insert and tighten the screw plug.
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series éë

Checking the oil 1. Observe the notes in section "Preliminary work regarding gear unit inspection/
via the screw plug maintenance" (page 63).
screw plug".
3. Take an oil sample via the screw plug bore.
Viscosity
Changing the oil

via the screw plug
WARNING
Severe injuries.
screw plug".
3. Completely drain the oil via the screw plug bore.
4. Fill in new oil of the same type via the control bore (otherwise consult the customer
service). Do not mix different synthetic lubricants.
according to the mounting position. Observe section "Lubricant fill quantities"
(page 111).
5. Check the oil level.
éê Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

6
6.6.5 D: SPIROPLAN® W37/W47 in mounting positions M1, M2, M3, M5, M6 with oil level plug
Checking the oil Proceed as follows to check the oil level of the gear unit:
levelvia the oil
level plug
2. Set up the gear unit in M1 mounting position.
3. Slowly remove the oil level plug (see following figure). Small amounts of oil may leak
out.
787235211
4. Check the oil level according to the following figure.
ÅïÃ
ÅîÃ
H
È ³¿¨ò
³·²ò È
634361867
[1] Oil level bore

[2] Reference oil level
Ø oil level bore Min and max fill level = x [mm]

M10 x 1 1.5
5. If the oil level is too low, fill in new oil of the same type via the oil level bore until the
oil level reaches the lower edge of the bore.
6. Re-insert the oil level plug.
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series éé

via the oil level
plug
2. Remove a little oil at the oil level plug.
Viscosity
Changing the oil

via the oil level
plug
WARNING
Severe injuries.
2. Set up the gear unit in M5 or M6 mounting position. See chapter "Mounting
Positions" (page 82).
3. Place a container underneath the oil level plug.
4. Remove the oil level plugs on the A and B side of the gear unit.
6. Re-insert the lower oil level plug.
7. Fill in new oil of the same type via the upper oil level plug bore (otherwise consult the
Check the oil level according to section "Checking the oil level via the oil level
plug"
8. Re-insert the upper oil level plug.
éè Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

6
6.6.6 E: SPIROPLAN® W37/W47 in M4 mounting position without oil level plug and cover plate
Checking the oil The W37/W47 gear units are not equipped with an oil level plug or a cover plate. This is
level via the screw why the oil level is checked via the control bore.
plug
2. Set up the gear unit in M5 or M6 mounting position.
3. Remove the screw plug.
4. Insert the dipstick vertically via the control bore all the way to the bottom of the gear
unit housing. Mark the point of the dipstick where it exits the gear unit. Pull out the
dipstick vertically (see following figure).
A B
784447371
5. Determine the section "x" between the wetted part and the marking using a caliper
(see following figure).
785020811
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series éç

6. Compare the determined value "x" to the min. value depending on the mounting po-
sition specified in the following table. Correct the fill level if required.
Oil level = wetted section x [mm] of the dipstick
Mounting position during the check
Gear unit type M5 M6
Lying on the A side Lying on the B side
W37 in M4 mounting 37 ± 1 29 ± 1
position
W47 in M4 mounting 41 ± 1 30 ± 1
position
via the screw plug
2. Remove a little oil at the oil screw plug.
Viscosity
Changing the oil

via the screw plug
WARNING
Severe injuries.
2. Set up the gear unit in M5 or M6 mounting position. See chapter "Mounting
Positions" (page 82).
3. Place a container underneath the screw plug.
4. Remove the screw plugs on the A and B side of the gear unit.
èð Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

6
6. Re-insert the lower screw plug.

7. Fill in new oil of the same type via the upper screw plug bore (otherwise consult the
Check the oil level according to section "Checking the oil level via the oil level
plug"
8. Re-insert the upper screw plug.
6.6.7 Replacing the oil seal
NOTICE
Oil seals with a temperature below 0° C may get damaged during installation.
Store oil seals at ambient temperatures over 0° C.
Warm up the oil seals prior to installation if required.
1. When changing the oil seal, ensure that there is a sufficient grease reservoir between
the dust lip and protective lip, depending on the type of gear unit.
2. If you use double oil seals, fill one-third of the gap with grease.
6.6.8 Gear unit coating
NOTICE
Breather valves and oil seals may be damaged during painting or re-painting.
Thoroughly cover the breather valves and the sealing lip of the oil seals with strips
prior to painting.
Remove the strips after painting.
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series èï

Mounting Positions
7 Designation of the mounting positions
7 Mounting Positions
7.1 Designation of the mounting positions
SEW differentiates between six mounting positions, M1 M6. The following figure
shows the spatial orientation of the gearmotor in mounting positions M1 M6.
Óê
Óê
Óï Óï
Óî
Óî
Óë Óë
Óì Óì
Óí Óí
Îòò
Óê
Óê Óî Óï
Óî
Óï
Óë
Óë Óì
Óì
Óí Óí
Úòò
Óê
Óï
Óï Óê
Óî Óî
Óë
Óë
Óì
Óì
Óí Óí
Éòò
èî Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Mounting Positions
Churning losses
7
7.2 Churning losses

Churning losses may occur in some mounting positions. Contact SEW-EURODRIVE in
case of the following combinations:
Input speed
Mounting position Gear unit type Gear unit size
[rpm]
97 107 > 2500
M2, M4 R
> 107 >1500
97 107 > 2500
F
> 107 > 1500
M2, M3, M4, M5, M6 77 107 > 2500
K
> 107 > 1500
S 77 97 > 2500
M1, M2, M3, M4, M5, M6 W 37 47 > 1500
7.3 Key
INFORMATION
The SPIROPLAN® gearmotors are not dependent on the mounting position, except for
W37 and W47 in the M4 mounting position. However, mounting positions M1 to M6
are also shown for SPIROPLAN® gearmotors to assist you in working with this docu-
mentation.
Note: SPIROPLAN® gearmotors of sizes W10 W30 cannot be equipped with breather
valves, oil level plugs or drain plugs.
7.3.1 Symbols used

The following table shows the symbols used in the mounting position sheets and what
they mean:
Symbol Meaning
Breather valve
Oil level plug
Oil drain plug
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series èí

Mounting Positions
7 Helical gearmotors R
7.4 Helical gearmotors R

7.4.1 R07 ... R167
èì Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Mounting Positions
Helical gearmotors R
7
7.4.2 RF07 ... RF167, RZ07 ... RZ87
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series èë

Mounting Positions
7 Helical gearmotors R
7.4.3 R07F ... R87F
èê Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Mounting Positions
Helical gearmotors RX
7
7.5 Helical gearmotors RX

7.5.1 RX57 ... RX107
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series èé

Mounting Positions
7 Helical gearmotors RX
7.5.2 RXF57 ... RXF107
èè Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Mounting Positions
Parallel-shaft helical gearmotors F
7
7.6 Parallel-shaft helical gearmotors F

7.6.1 F27 ... F157 / FA27B ... F157B / FH27B .. FH157B / FV27B ... FV107B
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series èç

Mounting Positions
7 Parallel-shaft helical gearmotors F
7.6.2 FF27 ... FF157 / FAF27 ... FAF157 / FHF27 ... FHF157 / FAZ27 ... FAZ157 / FHZ27 ... FHZ157 / FVF27
... FVF107 / FVZ27 ... FVZ107
çð Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Mounting Positions
Parallel-shaft helical gearmotors F
7
7.6.3 FA27 ... FA157 / FH27 ... FH157 / FV27 ... FV107 / FT37 ... FT157
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series çï

Mounting Positions
7 Helical-bevel gearmotors K
7.7 Helical-bevel gearmotors K

7.7.1 K37 ... K157 / KA37B ... KA157B / KH37B ... KH157B / KV37B ... KV107B
çî Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Mounting Positions
Helical-bevel gearmotors K
7
7.7.2 K167 ... K187 / KH167B ... KH187B
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series çí

Mounting Positions
7.7.3 KF37 ... KF157 / KAF37 ... KAF157 / KHF37 ... KHF157 / KAZ37 ... KAZ157 / KHZ37 ... KHZ157 /
KVF37 ... KVF107 / KVZ37 ... KVZ107
çì Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Mounting Positions
Helical-bevel gearmotors K
7
7.7.4 KA37 ... KA157 / KH37 ... KH157 / KV37 ... KV107 / KT37 ... KT157
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series çë

Mounting Positions
7.7.5 KH167 ... KH187
çê Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Mounting Positions
Helical-worm gearmotors S
7
7.8 Helical-worm gearmotors S

7.8.1 S37
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series çé

Mounting Positions
7 Helical-worm gearmotors S
7.8.2 S47 ... S97
çè Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Mounting Positions
7
7.8.3 SF37 / SAF37 / SHF37
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series çç

Mounting Positions
7.8.4 SF47 ... SF97 / SAF47 ... SAF97 / SHF47 ... SHF97 / SAZ47 ... SAZ97 / SHZ47 ... SHZ97
ïðð Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Mounting Positions
7
7.8.5 SA37 / SH37 / ST37
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ïðï

Mounting Positions
7.8.6 SA47 ... SA97 / SH47 ... SH97 / ST47 ... ST97
ïðî Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Mounting Positions
7
SPIROPLAN® W gearmotors
7.9 SPIROPLAN® W gearmotors

7.9.1 W10 ... W30
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ïðí

Mounting Positions
7
7.9.2 WF10 ... WF30 / WAF10 ... WAF30
ïðì Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Mounting Positions
7
7.9.3 WA10 ... WA30
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ïðë

Mounting Positions
7
7.9.4 W37 ... W47 / WA37B ... WA47B / WH37B ... WH47B
ïðê Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Mounting Positions
7
7.9.5 WF37 ... WF47 / WAF37 ... WAF47 / WHF37 ... WHF47
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ïðé

Mounting Positions
7
7.9.6 WA37 ... WA47 / WH37 ... WH47 / WT37 ... WT47
ïðè Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Technical Data
Extended storage
8
8 Technical Data
8.1 Extended storage
INFORMATION
For storage periods longer than 9 months, SEW-EURODRIVE recommends the "Ex-
tended storage" design. Gear units in this design are designated with a corresponding
label.
In this case, a VCI corrosion inhibitor (volatile corrosion inhibitor) is added to the lubri-
cant in these gear units. Please note that this VCI anti-corrosion agent is only effective
in a temperature range of -25 °C to +50 °C. The flange contact surfaces and shaft ends
are also treated with an anti-corrosion agent.
Observe the storage conditions specified in the following table for extended storage:
8.1.1 Storage conditions

The gear units must remain tightly sealed until taken into operation to prevent the VCI
corrosion protection agent from evaporating.
The gear units come with the oil fill according to the specified mounting position (M1
M6). Check the oil level before you start operating the gear unit for the first time.
Climate zone Packaging1) Storage2) Storage duration
Packed in containers, with Up to 3 years with regular
desiccant and moisture Under roof, protected against rain and snow, no checks of the packaging and
Temperate indicator sealed in the plas- shock loads. moisture indicator (rel. humid-
(Europe, USA, tic wrap. ity < 50%).
Canada, China Under roof and enclosed at constant temperature
and Russia, and atmospheric humidity (5°C < < 60°C, 2 years or more with regular
excluding tropi- < 50% relative humidity). inspections. Check for clean-
cal zones) Open liness and mechanical dam-
No sudden temperature fluctuations. Controlled age during inspection. Check
ventilation with filter (free from dust and dirt). Pro- corrosion protection.
tected against aggressive vapors and shocks.
Packed in containers, with
desiccant and moisture
indicator sealed in the plas- Up to 3 years with regular
tic wrap. checks of the packaging and
With roof, protected against rain and shocks.
Tropical (Asia, moisture indicator (rel. humid-
Protected against insect ity < 50%).
Africa, Central damage and mildew by
and South Amer- chemical treatment.
ica, Australia,
New Zealand Under roof and enclosed at constant temperature
excluding temper- and atmospheric humidity (5°C < < 50°C, 2 years or more with regular
ate zones) < 50% relative humidity). inspections. Check for clean-
Open No sudden temperature fluctuations. Controlled liness and mechanical dam-
ventilation with filter (free from dust and dirt). Pro- age during inspection. Check
tected against aggressive vapors and shocks. corrosion protection.
Protected against insect damage.
1) The packaging must be carried out by an experienced company using the packaging materials that have been explicitly specified for
the particular application.
2) SEW-EURODRIVE recommends to store the gear units according to the mounting position.
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ïðç

Technical Data
8 Lubricants
8.2 Lubricants
Unless a special arrangement is made, SEW-EURODRIVE supplies the drives with a
lubricant fill adapted for the specific gear unit and mounting position. The mounting po-
sition (M1 M6 section "Mounting positions") must be specified with the order. You must
adapt the lubricant fill in case of any subsequent changes made to the mounting posi-
tion, see section "Lubricant fill quantities (page 113)"
8.2.1 Anti-friction bearing greases

The rolling bearings in gear units and motors are given a factory-fill with the greases
listed below. SEW-EURODRIVE recommends regreasing anti-friction bearings with a
grease fill at the same time as changing the oil.
Ambient temperature Manufacturer Type
-40 °C to +80 °C Fuchs Renolit CX-TOM 15
Gear unit rolling bearings
-40 °C to +80 °C Klüber Petamo GHY 133 N
-40 °C to +40 °C Castrol Obeen FS 2
-20 °C to +40 °C Fuchs Plantogel 2S
INFORMATION
The following grease quantities are required:
For fast-running bearings (gear unit input end):
Fill the cavities between the rolling elements one-third full with grease.
For slow-running bearings (gear unit output end):
Fill the cavities between the rolling elements two-thirds full with grease.
ïïð Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Technical Data
Lubricants
8
8.2.2 Lubricant table

The lubricant table on the following page shows the permitted lubricants for
SEW-EURODRIVE gear units. Observe the following legend with regards to the lubri-
cant table.
Key to the lubricant Abbreviations, meaning of shading and notes:

table
CLP = Mineral oil
CLP PG = Polyglycol (W gear units, conforms to USDA-H1)
CLP HC = Synthetic hydrocarbons
E = Ester oil (water hazard classification 1)
HCE = Synthetic hydrocarbons + ester oil (USDA - H1 certification)
HLP = Hydraulic oil
= Synthetic lubricant (= synthetic-based roller bearing grease)
= Mineral lubricant (= mineral-based rolling bearing grease)
1) Helical-worm gear units with PG oil: consult SEW-EURODRIVE.

2) Special lubricant for Spiroplan® gear units only
3) Recommendation: Select SEW fB 1.2
4) Observe the critical starting behavior at low temperatures.
5) Low-viscosity grease
6) Ambient temperature
7) Grease
Lubricant for the food industry (food grade oil)
Biodegradable oil (lubricant for agriculture, forestry, and water management)
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ïïï

Technical Data
8 Lubricants
Lubricant table
ðï éëï ðë ðì
2845002123
ïïî Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Technical Data
Lubricants
8
8.2.3 Lubricant fill quantities

The specified fill quantities are recommended values. The precise values vary depend-
ing on the number of stages and gear ratio. When filling, it is essential to check the oil
level plug since it indicates the precise oil volume.
The following tables show guide values for lubricant fill quantities in relation to the
mounting position M1 ... M6.
Helical (R) gear R.., R..F

units
Gear unit Fill quantity in liters
M11) M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
R07 0.12 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20
R17 0.25 0.55 0.35 0.55 0.35 0.40
R27 0.25/0.40 0.70 0.50 0.70 0.50 0.50
R37 0.30/0.95 0.85 0.95 1.05 0.75 0.95
R47 0.70/1.50 1.60 1.50 1.65 1.50 1.50
R57 0.80/1.70 1.90 1.70 2.10 1.70 1.70
R67 1.10/2.30 2.40 2.80 2.90 1.80 2.00
R77 1.20/3.00 3.30 3.60 3.80 2.50 3.40
R87 2.30/6.0 6.4 7.2 7.2 6.3 6.5
R97 4.60/9.8 11.7 11.7 13.4 11.3 11.7
R107 6.0/13.7 16.3 16.9 19.2 13.2 15.9
R137 10.0/25.0 28.0 29.5 31.5 25.0 25.0
R147 15.4/40.0 46.5 48.0 52.0 39.5 41.0
R167 27.0/70.0 82.0 78.0 88.0 66.0 69.0
1) The larger gear unit of multi-stage gear units must be filled with the larger oil volume.
RF..
Gear unit Fill quantity in liters
M11) M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
RF07 0.12 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20
RF17 0.25 0.55 0.35 0.55 0.35 0.40
RF27 0.25/0.40 0.70 0.50 0.70 0.50 0.50
RF37 0.35/0.95 0.90 0.95 1.05 0.75 0.95
RF47 0.65/1.50 1.60 1.50 1.65 1.50 1.50
RF57 0.80/1.70 1.80 1.70 2.00 1.70 1.70
RF67 1.20/2.50 2.50 2.70 2.80 1.90 2.10
RF77 1.20/2.60 3.10 3.30 3.60 2.40 3.00
RF87 2.40/6.0 6.4 7.1 7.2 6.3 6.4
RF97 5.1/10.2 11.9 11.2 14.0 11.2 11.8
RF107 6.3/14.9 15.9 17.0 19.2 13.1 15.9
RF137 9.5/25.0 27.0 29.0 32.5 25.0 25.0
RF147 16.4/42.0 47.0 48.0 52.0 42.0 42.0
RF167 26.0/70.0 82.0 78.0 88.0 65.0 71.0
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ïïí

Technical Data
8 Lubricants
RX..
Fill quantity in liters
Gear unit
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
RX57 0.60 0.80 1.30 1.30 0.90 0.90
RX67 0.80 0.80 1.70 1.90 1.10 1.10
RX77 1.10 1.50 2.60 2.70 1.60 1.60
RX87 1.70 2.50 4.80 4.80 2.90 2.90
RX97 2.10 3.40 7.4 7.0 4.80 4.80
RX107 3.90 5.6 11.6 11.9 7.7 7.7
RXF..
Gear unit
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
RXF57 0.50 0.80 1.10 1.10 0.70 0.70
RXF67 0.70 0.80 1.50 1.40 1.00 1.00
RXF77 0.90 1.30 2.40 2.00 1.60 1.60
RXF87 1.60 1.95 4.90 3.95 2.90 2.90
RXF97 2.10 3.70 7.1 6.3 4.80 4.80
RXF107 3.10 5.7 11.2 9.3 7.2 7.2
ïïì Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Technical Data
Lubricants
8
Parallel shaft heli- F.., FA..B, FH..B, FV..B

cal (F) gear units
Gear unit
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
F..27 0.60 0.80 0.65 0.70 0.60 0.60
F..37 0.95 1.25 0.70 1.25 1.00 1.10
F..47 1.50 1.80 1.10 1.90 1.50 1.70
F..57 2.60 3.50 2.10 3.50 2.80 2.90
F..67 2.70 3.80 1.90 3.80 2.90 3.20
F..77 5.9 7.3 4.30 8.0 6.0 6.3
F..87 10.8 13.0 7.7 13.8 10.8 11.0
F..97 18.5 22.5 12.6 25.2 18.5 20.0
F..107 24.5 32.0 19.5 37.5 27.0 27.0
F..127 40.5 54.5 34.0 61.0 46.3 47.0
F..157 69.0 104.0 63.0 105.0 86.0 78.0
FF..
Gear unit
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
FF27 0.60 0.80 0.65 0.70 0.60 0.60
FF37 1.00 1.25 0.70 1.30 1.00 1.10
FF47 1.60 1.85 1.10 1.90 1.50 1.70
FF57 2.80 3.50 2.10 3.70 2.90 3.00
FF67 2.70 3.80 1.90 3.80 2.90 3.20
FF77 5.9 7.3 4.30 8.1 6.0 6.3
FF87 10.8 13.2 7.8 14.1 11.0 11.2
FF97 19.0 22.5 12.6 25.6 18.9 20.5
FF107 25.5 32.0 19.5 38.5 27.5 28.0
FF127 41.5 55.5 34.0 63.0 46.3 49.0
FF157 72.0 105.0 64.0 106.0 87.0 79.0
FA.., FH.., FV.., FAF.., FAZ.., FHF.., FHZ.., FVF.., FVZ.., FT..
Gear unit
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
F..27 0.60 0.80 0.65 0.70 0.60 0.60
F..37 0.95 1.25 0.70 1.25 1.00 1.10
F..47 1.50 1.80 1.10 1.90 1.50 1.70
F..57 2.70 3.50 2.10 3.40 2.90 3.00
F..67 2.70 3.80 1.90 3.80 2.90 3.20
F..77 5.9 7.3 4.30 8.0 6.0 6.3
F..87 10.8 13.0 7.7 13.8 10.8 11.0
F..97 18.5 22.5 12.6 25.2 18.5 20.0
F..107 24.5 32.0 19.5 37.5 27.0 27.0
F..127 39.0 54.5 34.0 61.0 45.0 46.5
F..157 68.0 103.0 62.0 104.0 85.0 79.5
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ïïë

Technical Data
8 Lubricants
Helical-bevel (K) K.., KA..B, KH..B, KV..B

gear units
Gear unit
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
K..37 0.50 1.00 1.00 1.25 0.95 0.95
K..47 0.80 1.30 1.50 2.00 1.60 1.60
K..57 1.10 2.20 2.20 2.80 2.30 2.10
K..67 1.10 2.40 2.60 3.45 2.60 2.60
K..77 2.20 4.10 4.40 5.8 4.20 4.40
K..87 3.70 8.0 8.7 10.9 8.0 8.0
K..97 7.0 14.0 15.7 20.0 15.7 15.5
K..107 10.0 21.0 25.5 33.5 24.0 24.0
K..127 21.0 41.5 44.0 54.0 40.0 41.0
K..157 31.0 62.0 65.0 90.0 58.0 62.0
K..167 33.0 95.0 105.0 123.0 85.0 84.0
K..187 53.0 152.0 167.0 200 143.0 143.0
KF..
Gear unit
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
KF37 0.50 1.10 1.10 1.50 1.00 1.00
KF47 0.80 1.30 1.70 2.20 1.60 1.60
KF57 1.20 2.20 2.40 3.15 2.50 2.30
KF67 1.10 2.40 2.80 3.70 2.70 2.70
KF77 2.10 4.10 4.40 5.9 4.50 4.50
KF87 3.70 8.2 9.0 11.9 8.4 8.4
KF97 7.0 14.7 17.3 21.5 15.7 16.5
KF107 10.0 21.8 25.8 35.1 25.2 25.2
KF127 21.0 41.5 46.0 55.0 41.0 41.0
KF157 31.0 66.0 69.0 92.0 62.0 62.0
KA.., KH.., KV.., KAF.., KHF.., KVF.., KAZ.., KHZ.., KVZ.., KT..
Gear unit
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
K..37 0.50 1.00 1.00 1.40 1.00 1.00
K..47 0.80 1.30 1.60 2.15 1.60 1.60
K..57 1.20 2.20 2.40 3.15 2.70 2.40
K..67 1.10 2.40 2.70 3.70 2.60 2.60
K..77 2.10 4.10 4.60 5.9 4.40 4.40
K..87 3.70 8.2 8.8 11.1 8.0 8.0
K..97 7.0 14.7 15.7 20.0 15.7 15.7
K..107 10.0 20.5 24.0 32.4 24.0 24.0
K..127 21.0 41.5 43.0 52.0 40.0 40.0
K..157 31.0 66.0 67.0 87.0 62.0 62.0
K..167 33.0 95.0 105.0 123.0 85.0 84.0
K..187 53.0 152.0 167.0 200 143.0 143.0
ïïê Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Technical Data
Lubricants
8
Helical-worm (S) S
gear units
Gear unit
M1 M2 M31) M4 M5 M6
S..37 0.25 0.40 0.50 0.55 0.40 0.40
S..47 0.35 0.80 0.70/0.90 1.00 0.80 0.80
S..57 0.50 1.20 1.00/1.20 1.45 1.30 1.30
S..67 1.00 2.00 2.20/3.10 3.10 2.60 2.60
S..77 1.90 4.20 3.70/5.4 5.9 4.40 4.40
S..87 3.30 8.1 6.9/10.4 11.3 8.4 8.4
S..97 6.8 15.0 13.4/18.0 21.8 17.0 17.0
SF..
Gear unit
M1 M2 M31) M4 M5 M6
SF37 0.25 0.40 0.50 0.55 0.40 0.40
SF47 0.40 0.90 0.90/1.05 1.05 1.00 1.00
SF57 0.50 1.20 1.00/1.50 1.55 1.40 1.40
SF67 1.00 2.20 2.30/3.00 3.20 2.70 2.70
SF77 1.90 4.10 3.90/5.8 6.5 4.90 4.90
SF87 3.80 8.0 7.1/10.1 12.0 9.1 9.1
SF97 7.4 15.0 13.8/18.8 22.6 18.0 18.0
SA.., SH.., SAF.., SHZ.., SAZ.., SHF.., ST..

Gear unit
M1 M2 M31) M4 M5 M6
S..37 0.25 0.40 0.50 0.50 0.40 0.40
S..47 0.40 0.80 0.70/0.90 1.00 0.80 0.80
S..57 0.50 1.10 1.00/1.50 1.50 1.20 1.20
S..67 1.00 2.00 1.80/2.60 2.90 2.50 2.50
S..77 1.80 3.90 3.60/5.0 5.8 4.50 4.50
S..87 3.80 7.4 6.0/8.7 10.8 8.0 8.0
S..97 7.0 14.0 11.4/16.0 20.5 15.7 15.7
SPIROPLAN® The fill quantity of SPIROPLAN® gear units W..10 to W..30 does not vary, irrespective
(W) gear units of their mounting position. Only the fill quantity of SPIROPLAN® gear units W..37 and
W..47 in mounting position M4 are different from that of other mounting positions.
Gear unit
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
W..10 0.16
W..20 0.24
W..30 0.40
W..37 0.50 0.70 0.50
W..47 0.90 1.40 0.90
WF47 0.90 1.40 0.90
WA47 0.90 1.25 0.90
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ïïé

Malfunctions/Service
9 Gear unit
9 Malfunctions/Service
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
De-energize the motor before you start working on the unit.
Secure the motor against unintended power-up.
CAUTION
Severe injuries.
Let the gear unit cool down before you start working on it.
Only remove the oil level and oil drain plug very carefully.
NOTICE
Improper handling of the gear unit and the motor may lead to damages.
Any repair work on SEW drives may be performed by qualified personnel only.
Only qualified personnel is permitted to separate drive and motor.
Consult SEW-EURODRIVE customer service.
9.1 Gear unit

Fault Possible cause Remedy
Unusual, regular running Meshing/grinding noise: Bearing damage Check the oil see "Inspection/maintenance for the
noise gear unit" (page 67), change bearings.
Knocking noise: Irregularity in the gearing Contact customer service.
Unusual, irregular running Foreign bodies in the oil Check the oil see "Inspection/maintenance for
noise the gear unit" (page 67),
Stop the drive, contact customer service
Oil leakage1) Rubber seal on the gear cover plate leaking Tighten the screws on the gear cover plate and
From inspection cover observe the gear unit. If oil still leaks: Contact customer
service.
From the motor flange
From the motor oil seal Seal defective. Contact customer service.
From the gear unit
flange
Gear unit not ventilated Vent the gear unit see "Mounting Positions
From the output end oil (page 82)".
seal.
Oil leaking from breather Too much oil Correct the oil fill quantity see "Inspection/mainte-
valve nance for the gear unit" (page 67),
Drive installed in incorrect mounting position Properly adjust the breather valve, see "Mounting
Positions (page 82)"
Correct the oil level see "Inspection/
maintenance for the gear unit" (page 67),
Frequent cold starts (oil foams) and/or high oil Use an oil expansion tank
level.
Output shaft does not turn Connection between shaft and hub in gear unit Send in the gear unit/gearmotor for repair.
although the motor is run- interrupted
ning or the input shaft is
rotated
1) Short-term oil / grease leakage at the oil seal is possible in the run-in phase (48 hours running time).
ïïè Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

AM/AQ/AL adapter
9
9.2 AM/AQ/AL adapter

Malfunction Possible cause Remedy
Unusual, regular running Meshing/grinding noise: Bearing damage. Contact SEW-EURODRIVE customer service
noise
Oil leaking Seal defective Contact SEW-EURODRIVE customer service
Output shaft does not turn Connection between shaft and hub in gear Send the gear unit to SEW-EURODRIVE for repair.
although the motor is run- unit interrupted
ning or the input shaft is
rotated
Change in running noise Annular gear wear, short-term torque transfer Change the annular gear
and / or vibrations. through metal contact
Bolts to secure hub axially are loose. Tighten the screws
Premature wear in annular Contact with aggressive fluids / oils; Contact SEW-EURODRIVE customer service
gear ozone influence; too high ambient
temperatures etc, which can cause a
change in the physical properties of the
annular gear.
Impermissibly high ambient/contact
temperature for the annular gear;
maximum permitted temperature: -20 °C
to +80 °C
Overload
9.3 AD input shaft assembly

Malfunction Possible cause Remedy
Unusual, regular running Meshing/grinding noise: Bearing damage. Contact SEW-EURODRIVE customer service
noise
Oil leaking Seal defective Contact SEW-EURODRIVE customer service
Output shaft does not turn Connection between shaft and hub in gear Send the gear unit to SEW-EURODRIVE for repair.
although the input shaft is unit or cover interrupted
rotated.
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ïïç

9 Customer service
9.4 Customer service

Please have the following information available if you require customer service
assistance:
Nameplate data (complete)
Type and extent of the problem
Time the problem occurred and any accompanying circumstances
Assumed cause
A digital photograph if possible
9.5 Disposal
Dispose gear units in accordance with the regulations in force regarding respective ma-
terials:
Steel scrap
Housing parts
Gears
Shafts
Roller bearing
Parts of the worm gears are made of non-ferrous metals. Dispose of the worm gears
as appropriate.
Collect waste oil and dispose of it according to the regulations in force.
ïîð Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Address List
10
10 Address List
Germany
Headquarters Bruchsal SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-0
Production Ernst-Blickle-Straße 42 Fax +49 7251 75-1970
Sales D-76646 Bruchsal http://www.sew-eurodrive.de
P.O. Box sew@sew-eurodrive.de
Postfach 3023 D-76642 Bruchsal
Service Compe- Central SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-1710
tence Center Ernst-Blickle-Straße 1 Fax +49 7251 75-1711
D-76676 Graben-Neudorf sc-mitte@sew-eurodrive.de
North SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 5137 8798-30
Alte Ricklinger Straße 40-42 Fax +49 5137 8798-55
D-30823 Garbsen (near Hannover) sc-nord@sew-eurodrive.de
East SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 3764 7606-0
Dänkritzer Weg 1 Fax +49 3764 7606-30
D-08393 Meerane (near Zwickau) sc-ost@sew-eurodrive.de
South SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 89 909552-10
Domagkstraße 5 Fax +49 89 909552-50
D-85551 Kirchheim (near München) sc-sued@sew-eurodrive.de
West SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 2173 8507-30
Siemensstraße 1 Fax +49 2173 8507-55
D-40764 Langenfeld (near Düsseldorf) sc-west@sew-eurodrive.de
Electronics SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-1780
Ernst-Blickle-Straße 42 Fax +49 7251 75-1769
D-76646 Bruchsal sc-elektronik@sew-eurodrive.de
Drive Service Hotline / 24 Hour Service +49 180 5 SEWHELP
+49 180 5 7394357
Additional addresses for service in Germany provided on request!
France
Production Haguenau SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 3 88 73 67 00
Sales 48-54 route de Soufflenheim Fax +33 3 88 73 66 00
Service B. P. 20185 http://www.usocome.com
F-67506 Haguenau Cedex sew@usocome.com
Production Forbach SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 3 87 29 38 00
Zone industrielle
Technopôle Forbach Sud
B. P. 30269
F-57604 Forbach Cedex
Assembly Bordeaux SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 5 57 26 39 00
Sales Parc d'activités de Magellan Fax +33 5 57 26 39 09
Service 62 avenue de Magellan - B. P. 182
F-33607 Pessac Cedex
Lyon SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 4 72 15 37 00
Parc d'affaires Roosevelt Fax +33 4 72 15 37 15
Rue Jacques Tati
F-69120 Vaulx en Velin
Nantes SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 2 40 78 42 00
Parc dactivités de la forêt Fax +33 2 40 78 42 20
4 rue des Fontenelles
F-44140 Le Bignon
Paris SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 1 64 42 40 80
Zone industrielle Fax +33 1 64 42 40 88
2 rue Denis Papin
F-77390 Verneuil I'Etang
Additional addresses for service in France provided on request!
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ïîï

Address List
10
Algeria
Sales Alger REDUCOM Sarl Tel. +213 21 8214-91
16, rue des Frères Zaghnoune Fax +213 21 8222-84
Bellevue sew-algeria@reducom-dz.com
16200 El Harrach Alger http://www.reducom-dz.com
Argentina
Assembly Buenos Aires SEW EURODRIVE ARGENTINA S.A. Tel. +54 3327 4572-84
Sales Centro Industrial Garin, Lote 35 Fax +54 3327 4572-21
Service Ruta Panamericana Km 37,5 sewar@sew-eurodrive.com.ar
1619 Garin http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.ar
Australia
Assembly Melbourne SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD. Tel. +61 3 9933-1000
Sales 27 Beverage Drive Fax +61 3 9933-1003
Service Tullamarine, Victoria 3043 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.au
enquires@sew-eurodrive.com.au
Sydney SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD. Tel. +61 2 9725-9900
9, Sleigh Place, Wetherill Park Fax +61 2 9725-9905
New South Wales, 2164 enquires@sew-eurodrive.com.au
Austria
Assembly Wien SEW-EURODRIVE Ges.m.b.H. Tel. +43 1 617 55 00-0
Sales Richard-Strauss-Strasse 24 Fax +43 1 617 55 00-30
Service A-1230 Wien http://www.sew-eurodrive.at
sew@sew-eurodrive.at
Belarus
Sales Minsk SEW-EURODRIVE BY Tel.+375 (17) 298 38 50
RybalkoStr. 26 Fax +375 (17) 29838 50
BY-220033 Minsk sales@sew.by
Belgium
Assembly Brussels SEW Caron-Vector Tel. +32 16 386-311
Sales Research park Haasrode Fax +32 16 386-336
Service Evenementenlaan 7 http://www.sew-eurodrive.be
BE-3001 Leuven info@sew-eurodrive.be
Service Compe- Industrial Gears SEW Caron-Vector Tel. +32 84 219-878
tence Center Rue de Parc Industriel, 31 Fax +32 84 219-879
BE-6900 Marche-en-Famenne http://www.sew-eurodrive.be
service-wallonie@sew-eurodrive.be
Antwerp SEW Caron-Vector Tel. +32 3 64 19 333
Glasstraat, 19 Fax +32 3 64 19 336
BE-2170 Merksem http://www.sew-eurodrive.be
service-antwerpen@sew-eurodrive.be
Brazil
Production Sao Paulo SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda. Tel. +55 11 2489-9133
Sales Avenida Amâncio Gaiolli, 152 - Rodovia Presi- Fax +55 11 2480-3328
Service dente Dutra Km 208 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.br
Guarulhos - 07251-250 - SP sew@sew.com.br
SAT - SEW ATENDE - 0800 7700496
Bulgaria
Sales Sofia BEVER-DRIVE GmbH Tel. +359 2 9151160
Bogdanovetz Str.1 Fax +359 2 9151166
BG-1606 Sofia bever@mail.bg
ïîî Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Address List
10
Cameroon
Sales Douala Electro-Services Tel. +237 33 431137
Rue Drouot Akwa Fax +237 33 431137
B.P. 2024 electrojemba@yahoo.fr
Douala
Canada
Assembly Toronto SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. +1 905 791-1553
Sales 210 Walker Drive Fax +1 905 791-2999
Service Bramalea, ON L6T 3W1 http://www.sew-eurodrive.ca
l.watson@sew-eurodrive.ca
Vancouver SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. +1 604 946-5535
Tilbury Industrial Park Fax +1 604 946-2513
7188 Honeyman Street b.wake@sew-eurodrive.ca
Delta, BC V4G 1G1
Montreal SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. +1 514 367-1124
2555 Rue Leger Fax +1 514 367-3677
Lasalle, PQ H8N 2V9 a.peluso@sew-eurodrive.ca
Additional addresses for service in Canada provided on request!
Chile
Assembly Santiago de SEW-EURODRIVE CHILE LTDA. Tel. +56 2 75770-00
Sales Chile Las Encinas 1295 Fax +56 2 75770-01
Service Parque Industrial Valle Grande http://www.sew-eurodrive.cl
LAMPA ventas@sew-eurodrive.cl
RCH-Santiago de Chile
P.O. Box
Casilla 23 Correo Quilicura - Santiago - Chile
China
Production Tianjin SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 22 25322612
Assembly No. 46, 7th Avenue, TEDA Fax +86 22 25323273
Sales Tianjin 300457 info@sew-eurodrive.cn
Service http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.cn
Assembly Suzhou SEW-EURODRIVE (Suzhou) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 512 62581781
Sales 333, Suhong Middle Road Fax +86 512 62581783
Service Suzhou Industrial Park suzhou@sew-eurodrive.cn
Jiangsu Province, 215021
Guangzhou SEW-EURODRIVE (Guangzhou) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 20 82267890
No. 9, JunDa Road Fax +86 20 82267922
East Section of GETDD guangzhou@sew-eurodrive.cn
Guangzhou 510530
Shenyang SEW-EURODRIVE (Shenyang) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 24 25382538
10A-2, 6th Road Fax +86 24 25382580
Shenyang Economic Technological Develop- shenyang@sew-eurodrive.cn
ment Area
Shenyang, 110141
Wuhan SEW-EURODRIVE (Wuhan) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 27 84478388
10A-2, 6th Road Fax +86 27 84478389
No. 59, the 4th Quanli Road, WEDA wuhan@sew-eurodrive.cn
430056 Wuhan
Xi'An SEW-EURODRIVE (Xi'An) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 29 68686262
No. 12 Jinye 2nd Road Fax +86 29 68686311
Xi'An High-Technology Industrial Development xian@sew-eurodrive.cn
Zone
Xi'An 710065
Additional addresses for service in China provided on request!
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ïîí

Address List
10
Colombia
Assembly Bogotá SEW-EURODRIVE COLOMBIA LTDA. Tel. +57 1 54750-50
Sales Calle 22 No. 132-60 Fax +57 1 54750-44
Service Bodega 6, Manzana B http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.co
Santafé de Bogotá sewcol@sew-eurodrive.com.co
Croatia
Sales Zagreb KOMPEKS d. o. o. Tel. +385 1 4613-158
Service Zeleni dol 10 Fax +385 1 4613-158
HR 10 000 Zagreb kompeks@inet.hr
Czech Republic
Sales Prague SEW-EURODRIVE CZ S.R.O. Tel. +420 255 709 601
Business Centrum Praha Fax +420 220 121 237
Luná 591 http://www.sew-eurodrive.cz
CZ-16000 Praha 6 - Vokovice sew@sew-eurodrive.cz
Denmark
Assembly Copenhagen SEW-EURODRIVEA/S Tel. +45 43 9585-00
Sales Geminivej 28-30 Fax +45 43 9585-09
Service DK-2670 Greve http://www.sew-eurodrive.dk
sew@sew-eurodrive.dk
Egypt
Sales Cairo Copam Egypt Tel. +20 2 22566-299 + 1 23143088
Service for Engineering & Agencies Fax +20 2 22594-757
33 EI Hegaz ST, Heliopolis, Cairo http://www.copam-egypt.com/
copam@datum.com.eg
Estonia
Sales Tallin ALAS-KUUL AS Tel. +372 6593230
Reti tee 4 Fax +372 6593231
EE-75301 Peetri küla, Rae vald, Harjumaa veiko.soots@alas-kuul.ee
Finland
Assembly Lahti SEW-EURODRIVE OY Tel. +358 201 589-300
Sales Vesimäentie 4 Fax +358 3 780-6211
Service FIN-15860 Hollola 2 sew@sew.fi
http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi
Production Karkkila SEW Industrial Gears Oy Tel. +358 201 589-300
Assembly Valurinkatu 6, PL 8 Fax +358 201 589-310
FI-03600 Karkkila, 03601 Karkkila sew@sew.fi
http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi
Gabon
Sales Libreville ESG Electro Services Gabun Tel. +241 741059
Feu Rouge Lalala Fax +241 741059
1889 Libreville esg_services@yahoo.fr
Gabun
Great Britain
Assembly Normanton SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd. Tel. +44 1924 893-855
Sales Beckbridge Industrial Estate Fax +44 1924 893-702
Service P.O. Box No.1 http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.uk
Normanton, West-Yorkshire info@sew-eurodrive.co.uk
WF6 1QR
ïîì Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Address List
10
Greece
Sales Athens Christ. Boznos & Son S.A. Tel. +30 2 1042 251-34
Service 12, K. Mavromichali Street Fax +30 2 1042 251-59
P.O. Box 80136 http://www.boznos.gr
GR-18545 Piraeus info@boznos.gr
Hong Kong
Assembly Hong Kong SEW-EURODRIVE LTD. Tel. +852 36902200
Sales Unit No. 801-806, 8th Floor Fax +852 36902211
Service Hong Leong Industrial Complex contact@sew-eurodrive.hk
No. 4, Wang Kwong Road
Kowloon, Hong Kong
Hungary
Sales Budapest SEW-EURODRIVE Kft. Tel. +36 1 437 06-58
Service H-1037 Budapest Fax +36 1 437 06-50
Kunigunda u. 18 office@sew-eurodrive.hu
India
Registered Office Vadodara SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited Tel. +91 265 3045200, +91 265
Assembly Plot No. 4, GIDC 2831086
Sales POR Ramangamdi Vadodara - 391 243 Fax +91 265 3045300, +91 265
2831087
Service Gujarat
http://www.seweurodriveindia.com
sales@seweurodriveindia.com
subodh.ladwa@seweurodriveindia.com
Assembly Chennai SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited Tel. +91 44 37188888
Sales Plot No. K3/1, Sipcot Industrial Park Phase II Fax +91 44 37188811
Service Mambakkam Village c.v.shivkumar@seweurodriveindia.com
Sriperumbudur - 602105
Kancheepuram Dist, Tamil Nadu
Ireland
Sales Dublin Alperton Engineering Ltd. Tel. +353 1 830-6277
Service 48 Moyle Road Fax +353 1 830-6458
Dublin Industrial Estate info@alperton.ie
Glasnevin, Dublin 11 http://www.alperton.ie
Israel
Sales Tel-Aviv Liraz Handasa Ltd. Tel. +972 3 5599511
Ahofer Str 34B / 228 Fax +972 3 5599512
58858 Holon http://www.liraz-handasa.co.il
office@liraz-handasa.co.il
Italy
Assembly Solaro SEW-EURODRIVE di R. Blickle & Co.s.a.s. Tel. +39 02 96 9801
Sales Via Bernini,14 Fax +39 02 96 799781
Service I-20020 Solaro (Milano) http://www.sew-eurodrive.it
sewit@sew-eurodrive.it
Ivory Coast
Sales Abidjan SICA Tel. +225 21 25 79 44
Société industrielle & commerciale pour Fax +225 21 25 88 28
l'Afrique sicamot@aviso.ci
165, Boulevard de Marseille
26 BP 1115 Abidjan 26
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ïîë

Address List
10
Japan
Assembly Iwata SEW-EURODRIVE JAPAN CO., LTD Tel. +81 538 373811
Sales 250-1, Shimoman-no, Fax +81 538 373855
Service Iwata http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.jp
Shizuoka 438-0818 sewjapan@sew-eurodrive.co.jp
Kazakhstan
Sales Almaty " - " . +7 (727) 334 1880
050061, +7 (727) 334 1881
. , . , 348 http://www.sew-eurodrive.kz
sew@sew-eurodrive.kz
Latvia
Sales Riga SIA Alas-Kuul Tel. +371 6 7139253
Katlakalna 11C Fax +371 6 7139386
LV-1073 Riga http://www.alas-kuul.com
info@alas-kuul.com
Lebanon
Sales Beirut Gabriel Acar & Fils sarl Tel. +961 1 510 532
B. P. 80484 Fax +961 1 494 971
Bourj Hammoud, Beirut ssacar@info.com.lb
Jordan Beirut Middle East Drives S.A.L. (offshore) Tel. +961 1 494 786
Kuwait Sin El Fil. Fax +961 1 494 971
Saudi Arabia B. P. 55-378 info@medrives.com
Syria Beirut http://www.medrives.com
Lithuania
Sales Alytus UAB Irseva Tel. +370 315 79204
Statybininku 106C Fax +370 315 56175
LT-63431 Alytus info@irseva.lt
http://www.sew-eurodrive.lt
Luxembourg
Assembly Brüssel CARON-VECTOR S.A. Tel. +32 10 231-311
Sales Avenue Eiffel 5 Fax +32 10 231-336
Service B-1300 Wavre http://www.sew-eurodrive.lu
info@caron-vector.be
Malaysia
Assembly Johore SEW-EURODRIVE SDN BHD Tel. +60 7 3549409
Sales No. 95, Jalan Seroja 39, Taman Johor Jaya Fax +60 7 3541404
Service 81000 Johor Bahru, Johor sales@sew-eurodrive.com.my
West Malaysia
Mexico
Assembly Quéretaro SEW-EURODRIVE MEXICO SA DE CV Tel. +52 442 1030-300
Sales SEM-981118-M93 Fax +52 442 1030-301
Service Tequisquiapan No. 102 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.mx
Parque Industrial Quéretaro scmexico@seweurodrive.com.mx
C.P. 76220
Quéretaro, México
Morocco
Sales Casablanca Afit Tel. +212 522633700
Route DEl Jadida Fax +212 522621588
KM 14 RP8 fatima.haquiq@premium.net
Province de Nouaceur http://www.groupe-premium.com
Commune Rurale de Bouskoura
MA 20300 Casablanca
ïîê Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Address List
10
Netherlands
Assembly Rotterdam VECTOR Aandrijftechniek B.V. Tel. +31 10 4463-700
Sales Industrieweg 175 Fax +31 10 4155-552
Service NL-3044 AS Rotterdam http://www.vector.nu
Postbus 10085 info@vector.nu
NL-3004 AB Rotterdam
New Zealand
Assembly Auckland SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. Tel. +64 9 2745627
Sales P.O. Box 58-428 Fax +64 9 2740165
Service 82 Greenmount drive http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.nz
East Tamaki Auckland sales@sew-eurodrive.co.nz
Christchurch SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. Tel. +64 3 384-6251
10 Settlers Crescent, Ferrymead Fax +64 3 384-6455
Christchurch sales@sew-eurodrive.co.nz
Norway
Assembly Moss SEW-EURODRIVE A/S Tel. +47 69 24 10 20
Sales Solgaard skog 71 Fax +47 69 24 10 40
Service N-1599 Moss http://www.sew-eurodrive.no
sew@sew-eurodrive.no
Pakistan
Sales Karachi Industrial Power Drives Tel. +92 21 452 9369
Al-Fatah Chamber A/3, 1st Floor Central Com- Fax +92-21-454 7365
mercial Area, seweurodrive@cyber.net.pk
Sultan Ahmed Shah Road, Block 7/8,
Karachi
Peru
Assembly Lima SEW DEL PERU MOTORES REDUCTORES Tel. +51 1 3495280
Sales S.A.C. Fax +51 1 3493002
Service Los Calderos, 120-124 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.pe
Urbanizacion Industrial Vulcano, ATE, Lima sewperu@sew-eurodrive.com.pe
Poland
Assembly Lodz SEW-EURODRIVE Polska Sp.z.o.o. Tel. +48 42 676 53 00
Sales ul. Techniczna 5 Fax +48 42 676 53 45
Service PL-92-518 ód http://www.sew-eurodrive.pl
sew@sew-eurodrive.pl
24 Hour Service Tel. +48 602 739 739
(+48 602 SEW SEW)
serwis@sew-eurodrive.pl
Portugal
Assembly Coimbra SEW-EURODRIVE, LDA. Tel. +351 231 20 9670
Sales Apartado 15 Fax +351 231 20 3685
Service P-3050-901 Mealhada http://www.sew-eurodrive.pt
infosew@sew-eurodrive.pt
Romania
Sales Bucharest Sialco Trading SRL Tel. +40 21 230-1328
Service str. Madrid nr.4 Fax +40 21 230-7170
011785 Bucuresti sialco@sialco.ro
Russia
Assembly St. Petersburg ZAO SEW-EURODRIVE Tel. +7 812 3332522 +7 812 5357142
Sales P.O. Box 36 Fax +7 812 3332523
Service 195220 St. Petersburg Russia http://www.sew-eurodrive.ru
sew@sew-eurodrive.ru
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ïîé

Address List
10
Senegal
Sales Dakar SENEMECA Tel. +221 338 494 770
Mécanique Générale Fax +221 338 494 771
Km 8, Route de Rufisque senemeca@sentoo.sn
B.P. 3251, Dakar http://www.senemeca.com
Serbia
Sales Beograd DIPAR d.o.o. Tel. +381 11 347 3244 / +381 11 288
Ustanicka 128a 0393
PC Koum, IV floor Fax +381 11 347 1337
SCG-11000 Beograd office@dipar.rs
Singapore
Assembly Singapore SEW-EURODRIVE PTE. LTD. Tel. +65 68621701
Sales No 9, Tuas Drive 2 Fax +65 68612827
Service Jurong Industrial Estate http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.sg
Singapore 638644 sewsingapore@sew-eurodrive.com
Slovakia
Sales Bratislava SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. Tel. +421 2 33595 202
Rybni ná 40 Fax +421 2 33595 200
SK-831 06 Bratislava sew@sew-eurodrive.sk
http://www.sew-eurodrive.sk
ilina SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. Tel. +421 41 700 2513
Industry Park - PChZ Fax +421 41 700 2514
ulica M.R.tefánika 71 sew@sew-eurodrive.sk
SK-010 01 ilina
Banská Bystrica SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. Tel. +421 48 414 6564
Rudlovská cesta 85 Fax +421 48 414 6566
SK-974 11 Banská Bystrica sew@sew-eurodrive.sk
Koice SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. Tel. +421 55 671 2245
Slovenská ulica 26 Fax +421 55 671 2254
SK-040 01 Koice sew@sew-eurodrive.sk
Slovenia
Sales Celje Pakman - Pogonska Tehnika d.o.o. Tel. +386 3 490 83-20
Service UI. XIV. divizije 14 Fax +386 3 490 83-21
SLO - 3000 Celje pakman@siol.net
South Africa
Assembly Johannesburg SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 11 248-7000
Sales Eurodrive House Fax +27 11 494-3104
Service Cnr. Adcock Ingram and Aerodrome Roads http://www.sew.co.za
Aeroton Ext. 2 info@sew.co.za
Johannesburg 2013
P.O.Box 90004
Bertsham 2013
Cape Town SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 21 552-9820
Rainbow Park Fax +27 21 552-9830
Cnr. Racecourse & Omuramba Road Telex 576 062
Montague Gardens cfoster@sew.co.za
Cape Town
P.O.Box 36556
Chempet 7442
Cape Town
ïîè Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Address List
10
South Africa
Durban SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 31 700-3451
2 Monaco Place Fax +27 31 700-3847
Pinetown cdejager@sew.co.za
Durban
P.O. Box 10433, Ashwood 3605
Nelspruit SEW-EURODRIVE (PTY) LTD. Tel. +27 13 752-8007
7 Christie Crescent Fax +27 13 752-8008
Vintonia robermeyer@sew.co.za
P.O.Box 1942
Nelspruit 1200
South Korea
Assembly Ansan-City SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD. Tel. +82 31 492-8051
Sales B 601-4, Banweol Industrial Estate Fax +82 31 492-8056
Service 1048-4, Shingil-Dong http://www.sew-korea.co.kr
Ansan 425-120 master.korea@sew-eurodrive.com
Busan SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA Co., Ltd. Tel. +82 51 832-0204
No. 1720 - 11, Songjeong - dong Fax +82 51 832-0230
Gangseo-ku master@sew-korea.co.kr
Busan 618-270
Spain
Assembly Bilbao SEW-EURODRIVE ESPAÑA, S.L. Tel. +34 94 43184-70
Sales Parque Tecnológico, Edificio, 302 Fax +34 94 43184-71
Service E-48170 Zamudio (Vizcaya) http://www.sew-eurodrive.es
sew.spain@sew-eurodrive.es
Sweden
Assembly Jönköping SEW-EURODRIVE AB Tel. +46 36 3442 00
Sales Gnejsvägen 6-8 Fax +46 36 3442 80
Service S-55303 Jönköping http://www.sew-eurodrive.se
Box 3100 S-55003 Jönköping jonkoping@sew.se
Switzerland
Assembly Basel Alfred lmhof A.G. Tel. +41 61 417 1717
Sales Jurastrasse 10 Fax +41 61 417 1700
Service CH-4142 Münchenstein bei Basel http://www.imhof-sew.ch
info@imhof-sew.ch
Thailand
Assembly Chonburi SEW-EURODRIVE (Thailand) Ltd. Tel. +66 38 454281
Sales 700/456, Moo.7, Donhuaroh Fax +66 38 454288
Service Muang sewthailand@sew-eurodrive.com
Chonburi 20000
Tunisia
Sales Tunis T. M.S. Technic Marketing Service Tel. +216 79 40 88 77
Zone Industrielle Mghira 2 Fax +216 79 40 88 66
Lot No. 39 tms@tms.com.tn
2082 Fouchana
Turkey
Assembly Istanbul SEW-EURODRIVE Tel. +90 216 4419163 / 4419164
Sales Hareket Sistemleri San. ve Tic. Ltd. Sti. Fax +90 216 3055867
Service Bagdat Cad. Koruma Cikmazi No. 3 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.tr
TR-34846 Maltepe ISTANBUL sew@sew-eurodrive.com.tr
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ïîç

Address List
10
Ukraine
Sales Dnepropetrovsk SEW-EURODRIVE Tel. +380 56 370 3211
Service Str. Rabochaja 23-B, Office 409 Fax +380 56 372 2078
49008 Dnepropetrovsk http://www.sew-eurodrive.ua
sew@sew-eurodrive.ua
United Arab Emirates

Sales Sharjah Copam Middle East (FZC) Tel. +971 6 5578-488
Service Sharjah Airport International Free Zone Fax +971 6 5578-499
P.O. Box 120709 copam_me@eim.ae
Sharjah
USA
Production Southeast SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 864 439-7537
Assembly Region 1295 Old Spartanburg Highway Fax Sales +1 864 439-7830
Sales P.O. Box 518 Fax Manufacturing +1 864 439-9948
Service Lyman, S.C. 29365 Fax Assembly +1 864 439-0566
Corporate Offices Fax Confidential/HR +1 864 949-5557
http://www.seweurodrive.com
cslyman@seweurodrive.com
Assembly Northeast SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 856 467-2277
Sales Region Pureland Ind. Complex Fax +1 856 845-3179
Service 2107 High Hill Road, P.O. Box 481 csbridgeport@seweurodrive.com
Bridgeport, New Jersey 08014
Midwest Region SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 937 335-0036
2001 West Main Street Fax +1 937 332-0038
Troy, Ohio 45373 cstroy@seweurodrive.com
Southwest SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 214 330-4824
Region 3950 Platinum Way Fax +1 214 330-4724
Dallas, Texas 75237 csdallas@seweurodrive.com
Western Region SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 510 487-3560
30599 San Antonio St. Fax +1 510 487-6433
Hayward, CA 94544 cshayward@seweurodrive.com
Additional addresses for service in the USA provided on request!
Venezuela
Assembly Valencia SEW-EURODRIVE Venezuela S.A. Tel. +58 241 832-9804
Sales Av. Norte Sur No. 3, Galpon 84-319 Fax +58 241 838-6275
Service Zona Industrial Municipal Norte http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.ve
Valencia, Estado Carabobo ventas@sew-eurodrive.com.ve
sewfinanzas@cantv.net
Vietnam
Sales Ho Chi Minh City Nam Trung Co., Ltd Tel. +84 8 8301026
91 - 93 Tran Minh Quyen Street, Fax +84 8 8392223
District 10, HCMC namtrungco@hcm.vnn.vn
ïíð Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

Index
Index
A Gear units
AD input shaft assembly ........................................56 Coating ..............................................................81
Anti-friction bearing greases ................................110 Gear units with solid shaft......................................25
B H
Backstop ................................................................62 Helical gear units ...................................................10
Breather .................................................................23 Helical-bevel gear units .........................................12
Helical-worm gear units .........................................13
C
Changing the mounting position ............................20 I
Changing the oil .....................................................67 Inspection ..............................................................63
Checking the oil .....................................................67 AD input cover ...................................................66
Checking the oil level .............................................67 AL/AM/AQ adapter.............................................66
Via oil level plug ...............................68, 77, 78, 81 Changing the oil.................................................67
Via the cover plate .............................................70 Checking the oil .................................................67
Via the screw plug........................................74, 79 Checking the oil level.........................................67
Churning losses .....................................................83 Gear unit ............................................................67
Coating Inspection intervals ................................................64
Gear unit ............................................................81 Installation
Copyright..................................................................6 Mechanical.........................................................17
Customer service .................................................120 Installation tolerances ............................................17
Installing the gear unit............................................ 19
D
Disposal ...............................................................120 L
Lubricant change intervals ..................................... 65
E Lubricant fill quantities ......................................... 113
Embedded safety notes ...........................................5 Lubricant table .....................................................112
Exclusion of liability ..................................................6 Lubricants ............................................................110
Extended storage.............................................9, 109
M
F Maintenance ..........................................................63
Flatness errors .......................................................19 AL/AM/AQ adapter.............................................66
Changing the oil.................................................67
Checking the oil .................................................67
G
Checking the oil level.........................................67
Gear unit
Gear unit ............................................................67
Installation..........................................................19
Input cover AD ...................................................66
Gear unit painting...................................................25
Maintenance intervals............................................ 64
Gear unit structre
Malfunctions
Helical-worm gear units .....................................13
AD input shaft assembly ..................................119
SPIROPLAN® W10-W30 gear units ..................14
AM/AQ/AL adapter...........................................119
Gear unit structure .................................................10
Gear unit ..........................................................118
Helical gear units ...............................................10
Mechanical installation...........................................17
Helical-bevel gear units......................................12
Parallel-shaft helical gear units ..........................11
SPIROPLAN® W37-W47 gear units ..................15
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series ïíï

Index
Mounting positions .................................................82 S

Designation ........................................................82 Safety notes
Helical gearmotors R .........................................84 Designation in the documentation .......................5
Helical gearmotors RX .......................................87 Structure of the embedded safety notes.............. 5
Helical-bevel gearmotors K................................92 Structure of the section-specific safety notes ......5
Helical-worm gearmotors S................................97 Section-specific safety notes ...................................5
Key.....................................................................83 Service.................................................................120
Parallel-shaft helical gearmotors F ....................89 Shaft-mounted gear units
SPIROPLAN® W gearmotors ..........................103 Keyway ..............................................................30
Symbols .............................................................83 Shrink disk .........................................................37
Mounting the gear units .........................................22 Splined hollow shaft...........................................30
TorqLOC® .........................................................41
N Signal words in the safety notes ..............................5
Notes Solid shaft ..............................................................25
Designation in the documentation........................5 SPIROPLAN® W10-W30 gear units......................14
SPIROPLAN® W37-W47 gear units......................15
O Startup ...................................................................61
Other applicable documentation ..............................8 Structure
Helical gear units ...............................................10
Helical-bevel gear units ..................................... 12
P
Painting the gear unit .............................................25
Parallel-shaft helical gear units..........................11
Parallel-shaft helical gear units ..............................11
SPIROPLAN® W10-W30 gear units.................. 14
SPIROPLAN® W37-W47 gear units.................. 15
R
Repair ..................................................................120
T
Rights to claim under limited warranty .....................6
Tightening torques .................................................21
Run-in period .........................................................61
Helical-bevel gear units ..................................... 28
Parallel shaft helical gear units ..........................27
SPIROPLAN® W gear units ..............................29
ïíî Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W Series

SEW-EURODRIVEDriving the world
SEW-EURODRIVE
Driving the world
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG

P.O. Box 3023
D-76642 Bruchsal/Germany
Phone +49 7251 75-0
Fax +49 7251 75-1970
sew@sew-eurodrive.com
www.sew-eurodrive.com

10.2 Variadores de frecuencia
EF www.controltechniques.com
User Guide
U
Model sizes 1 to 3
Universal Variable Speed AC
Drive for induction and servo
motors
Part Number: 0471-0000-07

Issue: 7
General Information
The manufacturer accepts no liability for any consequences resulting from inappropriate, negligent or incorrect
installation or adjustment of the optional operating parameters of the equipment or from mismatching the variable speed
drive with the motor.
The contents of this guide are believed to be correct at the time of printing. In the interests of a commitment to a policy
of continuous development and improvement, the manufacturer reserves the right to change the specification of the
product or its performance, or the contents of the guide, without notice.
All rights reserved. No parts of this guide may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electrical or
mechanical including photocopying, recording or by an information storage or retrieval system, without permission in
writing from the publisher.
Drive software version

This product is supplied with the latest version of software. If this product is to be used in a new or existing system with
other drives, there may be some differences between their software and the software in this product. These differences
may cause this product to function differently. This may also apply to drives returned from a Control Techniques Service
Centre.
The software version of the drive can be checked by looking at Pr 11.29 (or Pr 0.50) and Pr 11.34. The software version
takes the form of zz.yy.xx, where Pr 11.29 displays zz.yy and Pr 11.34 displays xx, i.e. for software version 01.01.00,
Pr 11.29 would display 1.01 and Pr 11.34 would display 0.
If there is any doubt, contact a Control Techniques Drive Centre.
Environmental statement
Control Techniques is committed to minimising the environmental impacts of its manufacturing operations and of its
products throughout their life cycle. To this end, we operate an Environmental Management System (EMS) which is
certified to the International Standard ISO 14001. Further information on the EMS, our Environmental Policy and other
relevant information is available on request, or can be found at www.greendrives.com.
The electronic variable-speed drives manufactured by Control Techniques have the potential to save energy and
(through increased machine/process efficiency) reduce raw material consumption and scrap throughout their long
working lifetime. In typical applications, these positive environmental effects far outweigh the negative impacts of product
manufacture and end-of-life disposal.
Nevertheless, when the products eventually reach the end of their useful life, they can very easily be dismantled into their
major component parts for efficient recycling. Many parts snap together and can be separated without the use of tools,
while other parts are secured with conventional screws. Virtually all parts of the product are suitable for recycling.
Product packaging is of good quality and can be re-used. Large products are packed in wooden crates, while smaller
products come in strong cardboard cartons which themselves have a high recycled fibre content. If not re-used, these
containers can be recycled. Polythene, used on the protective film and bags for wrapping product, can be recycled in the
same way. Control Techniques' packaging strategy favours easily-recyclable materials of low environmental impact, and
regular reviews identify opportunities for improvement.
When preparing to recycle or dispose of any product or packaging, please observe local legislation and best practice.
Copyright © August 2003 Control Techniques Drives Limited

Issue Number: 7
Software: 01.05.00 onwards
How to use this guide
This user guide provides complete information for installing and operating a Unidrive SP from start to finish.
The information is in logical order, taking the reader from receiving the drive through to fine tuning the performance.
NOTE
There are specific safety warnings throughout this guide, located in the relevant sections. In addition, Chapter 1 Safety
Information contains general safety information. It is essential that the warnings are observed and the information
considered when working with or designing a system using the drive.
This map of the user guide helps to find the right sections for the task you wish to complete:
1 Safety information
2 Product information
3 Mechanical installation
4 Electrical installation
5 Getting started
6 Basic parameters
7 Running the motor
8 Optimisation
9 SMARTCARD operation
10 Onboard PLC
11 Advanced parameters
12 Technical data
13 Diagnostics
14 UL listing information
Contents
Declaration of Conformity ....................6 5 Getting Started.................................... 61
5.1 Understanding the display .................................. 61
1 Safety Information .................................7 5.2 Keypad operation ............................................... 61
1.1 Warnings, Cautions and Notes .............................7 5.3 Menu structure ................................................... 62
1.2 Electrical safety - general warning ........................7 5.4 Menu 0 ............................................................... 63
1.3 System design and safety of personnel ................7 5.5 Advanced menus ............................................... 63
1.4 Environmental limits ..............................................7 5.6 Changing the operating mode ............................ 64
1.5 Compliance with regulations .................................7 5.7 Saving parameters ............................................. 64
1.6 Motor .....................................................................7 5.8 Restoring parameter defaults ............................. 64
1.7 Adjusting parameters ............................................7 5.9 Parameter access level and security ................. 65
5.10 Displaying parameters with non-default values
2 Product Information ..............................8 only ..................................................................... 66
2.1 Ratings ..................................................................8 5.11 Displaying destination parameters only ............. 66
2.2 Model number .....................................................10 5.12 Serial communications ....................................... 66
2.3 Operating modes .................................................10
2.4 Drive features ......................................................11 6 Basic parameters (Menu 0) ................ 67
2.5 Nameplate description ........................................12 6.1 Single line descriptions ...................................... 67
2.6 Options ................................................................12 6.2 Full descriptions ................................................. 72
2.7 Items supplied with the drive ...............................14
7 Running the motor .............................. 81
3 Mechanical Installation .......................16 7.1 Quick start Connections ..................................... 81
3.1 Safety information ...............................................16 7.2 Changing the operating mode ............................ 81
3.2 Planning the installation ......................................16 7.3 Quick Start commissioning ................................. 84
3.3 Terminal cover removal .......................................16 7.4 Quick start commissioning (CTSoft) ................... 87
3.4 Solutions Module fitting / removal .......................19 7.5 Setting up a feedback device ............................. 87
3.5 Mounting methods ...............................................20
3.6 Enclosure ............................................................24 8 Optimisation ........................................ 90
3.7 Cubicle design and drive ambient temperature ...26 8.1 Motor map parameters ....................................... 90
3.8 Heatsink fan operation ........................................26 8.2 Maximum motor rated current ............................ 97
3.9 IP Rating (Ingress Protection) .............................26 8.3 Current limits ...................................................... 97
3.10 External EMC filter .............................................28 8.4 Motor thermal protection .................................... 97
3.11 Heatsink mounted braking resistor ......................31 8.5 Switching frequency ........................................... 98
3.12 Electrical terminals ..............................................34 8.6 High speed operation ......................................... 98
3.13 Routine maintenance ..........................................35
9 SMARTCARD operation ................... 100
4 Electrical Installation ...........................36 9.1 Introduction ...................................................... 100
4.1 Power connections ..............................................36 9.2 Transferring data .............................................. 101
4.2 AC supply requirements ......................................38 9.3 Data block header information ......................... 102
4.3 Supplying the drive with DC / DC bus paralleling ..39 9.4 SMARTCARD parameters ............................... 102
4.4 24V back-up power supply input .........................39 9.5 SMARTCARD trips ........................................... 103
4.5 48V back-up power supply operation ..................39
4.6 Ratings ................................................................40 10 Onboard PLC ..................................... 105
4.7 Output circuit and motor protection .....................41 10.1 Onboard PLC and SYPTLite ............................ 105
4.8 Braking ................................................................43 10.2 Benefits ............................................................ 105
4.9 Ground leakage ...................................................44 10.3 Limitations ........................................................ 105
4.10 EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility) ..................45 10.4 Getting started .................................................. 106
4.11 Serial communications connections ....................52 10.5 Onboard PLC parameters ................................ 106
4.12 Control connections ............................................53 10.6 Onboard PLC trips ........................................... 107
4.13 Encoder connections ...........................................56 10.7 Onboard PLC and the SMARTCARD .............. 107
4.14 SECURE DISABLE .............................................59
4 Unidrive SP User Guide

www.controltechniques.com Issue Number: 7
11 Advanced parameters .......................108
11.1 Menu 1: Frequency / speed reference ..............112
11.2 Menu 2: Ramps .................................................116
11.3 Menu 3: Frequency slaving, speed feedback
and speed control .............................................119
11.4 Menu 4: Torque and current control ..................124
11.5 Menu 5: Motor control .......................................128
11.6 Menu 6: Sequencer and clock ..........................133
11.7 Menu 7: Analog I/O ...........................................135
11.8 Menu 8: Digital I/O ............................................138
11.9 Menu 9: Programmable logic, motorised pot
and binary sum .................................................142
11.10 Menu 10: Status and trips .................................145
11.11 Menu 11: General drive set-up .........................146
11.12 Menu 12: Threshold detectors, variable
selectors and brake control function .................147
11.13 Menu 13: Position control .................................152
11.14 Menu 14: User PID controller ............................158
11.15 Menus 15, 16 and 17: Solutions Module set-up .. 161
11.16 Menu 18: Application menu 1 ...........................175
11.19 Menu 21: Second motor parameters ................176
11.20 Menu 22: Additional Menu 0 set-up ..................177
11.21 Advanced features ............................................178
12 Technical Data ...................................186

12.1 Drive ..................................................................186
12.2 Optional external EMC filters ............................196
13 Diagnostics ........................................198
13.1 Trip indications ..................................................198
13.2 Alarm indications ...............................................211
13.3 Status indications ..............................................211
13.4 Displaying the trip history ..................................212
14 UL Listing Information ......................213

14.1 Common UL information ...................................213
14.2 Power dependant UL information .....................213
14.3 AC supply specification .....................................213
14.4 Maximum continuous output current .................213
14.5 Safety label .......................................................213
14.6 UL listed accessories ........................................213
List of figures ....................................214

List of tables ......................................216
Index ...................................................217
Unidrive SP User Guide 5

Issue Number: 7 www.controltechniques.com
Declaration of Conformity
Control Techniques Ltd

The Gro
Newtown
Powys
UK
SY16 3BE
SP1201 SP1202 SP1203 SP1204 These products comply with the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, the
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive 89/336/EEC and the CE
SP2201 SP2202 SP2203
Marking Directive 93/68/EEC.
SP3201 SP3202
SP1401 SP1402 SP1403 SP1404 SP1405 SP1406

SP2401 SP2402 SP2403
SP3401 SP3402 SP3403
SP3501 SP3502 SP3503 SP3504 SP3505 SP3506 SP3507 W. Drury

Executive Vice President, Technology
The AC variable speed drive products listed above have been designed Newtown
and manufactured in accordance with the following European
harmonised standards: Date: 20th December 2002
EN50178 Electronic equipment for use in power installations
These electronic drive products are intended to be used with
Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems.
appropriate motors, controllers, electrical protection components
EN61800-3 EMC product standard including specific test
and other equipment to form complete end products or systems.
methods
Compliance with safety and EMC regulations depends upon
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic installing and configuring drives correctly, including using the
EN61000-6-2 standards. Immunity standard for industrial specified input filters. The drives must be installed only by
environments professional assemblers who are familiar with requirements for
safety and EMC. The assembler is responsible for ensuring that the
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic end product or system complies with all the relevant laws in the
EN61000-6-4 standards. Emission standard for industrial country where it is to be used. Refer to this User Guide. An EMC
environments Data Sheet is also available giving detailed EMC information.
Electromagnetic compatibility. Generic emission

EN50081-2
standard. Industrial environment
Electromagnetic compatibility. Generic immunity

EN50082-2
standard. Industrial environment
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Limits. Limits

EN61000-3-21 for harmonic current emissions (equipment input
current up to and including 16 A per phase)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Limits.

Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker in low-
EN61000-3-3
voltage supply systems for equipment with rated
current <= 16 A
1
These products are for professional use, and power input exceeds
1kW for all models, so no limits apply.

Safety Product Mechanical Electrical Getting Basic Running the Smartcard Onboard Advanced Technical UL Listing
Optimisation Diagnostics
Information Information Installation Installation Started Parameters motor operation PLC Parameters Data Information
1 Safety Information 1.4 Environmental limits

Instructions in this User Guide regarding transport, storage, installation
1.1 Warnings, Cautions and Notes and use of the drive must be complied with, including the specified
environmental limits. Drives must not be subjected to excessive physical
force.
A Warning contains information which is essential for
avoiding a safety hazard. 1.5 Compliance with regulations
WARNING The installer is responsible for complying with all relevant regulations,
such as national wiring regulations, accident prevention regulations and
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) regulations. Particular attention
A Caution contains information which is necessary for must be given to the cross-sectional areas of conductors, the selection
avoiding a risk of damage to the product or other equipment. of fuses or other protection, and protective earth (ground) connections.
CAUTION This User Guide contains instruction for achieving compliance with
specific EMC standards.
NOTE Within the European Union, all machinery in which this product is used
A Note contains information which helps to ensure correct operation of must comply with the following directives:
the product. 98/37/EC: Safety of machinery.
89/336/EEC: Electromagnetic Compatibility.
1.2 Electrical safety - general warning
The voltages used in the drive can cause severe electrical shock and/or 1.6 Motor
burns, and could be lethal. Extreme care is necessary at all times when Ensure the motor is installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
working with or adjacent to the drive. recommendations. Ensure the motor shaft is not exposed.
Specific warnings are given at the relevant places in this User Guide. Standard squirrel cage induction motors are designed for single speed
operation. If it is intended to use the capability of the drive to run a motor
1.3 System design and safety of at speeds above its designed maximum, it is strongly recommended that
personnel the manufacturer is consulted first.
The drive is intended as a component for professional incorporation into Low speeds may cause the motor to overheat because the cooling fan
complete equipment or a system. If installed incorrectly, the drive may becomes less effective. The motor should be fitted with a protection
present a safety hazard. thermistor. If necessary, an electric forced vent fan should be used.
The drive uses high voltages and currents, carries a high level of stored The values of the motor parameters set in the drive affect the protection
electrical energy, and is used to control equipment which can cause of the motor. The default values in the drive should not be relied upon.
injury. It is essential that the correct value is entered in parameter 0.46 motor
Close attention is required to the electrical installation and the system rated current. This affects the thermal protection of the motor.
design to avoid hazards either in normal operation or in the event of
equipment malfunction. System design, installation, commissioning and 1.7 Adjusting parameters
maintenance must be carried out by personnel who have the necessary Some parameters have a profound effect on the operation of the drive.
training and experience. They must read this safety information and this They must not be altered without careful consideration of the impact on
User Guide carefully. the controlled system. Measures must be taken to prevent unwanted
The STOP and SECURE DISABLE functions of the drive do not isolate changes due to error or tampering.
dangerous voltages from the output of the drive or from any external
option unit. The supply must be disconnected by an approved electrical
isolation device before gaining access to the electrical connections.
With the sole exception of the SECURE DISABLE function, none of
the drive functions must be used to ensure safety of personnel, i.e.
they must not be used for safety-related functions.
Careful consideration must be given to the functions of the drive which
might result in a hazard, either through their intended behaviour or
through incorrect operation due to a fault. In any application where a
malfunction of the drive or its control system could lead to or allow
damage, loss or injury, a risk analysis must be carried out, and where
necessary, further measures taken to reduce the risk - for example, an
over-speed protection device in case of failure of the speed control, or a
fail-safe mechanical brake in case of loss of motor braking.
The SECURE DISABLE function has been approved1 as meeting the
requirements of EN954-1 category 3 for the prevention of unexpected
starting of the drive. It may be used in a safety-related application. The
system designer is responsible for ensuring that the complete
system is safe and designed correctly according to the relevant
safety standards.
1
Independent approval by BIA has been given for sizes 1 to 3.

2 Product Information
2.1 Ratings
The Unidrive SP is dual rated. Available output
current Overload limit -
The setting of the motor rated current determines which rating applies - Heavy Duty
Heavy Duty or Normal Duty. Maximum Overload limit -
The two ratings are compatible with motors designed to IEC60034. continuous Normal Duty
current (above
The graph aside illustrates the difference between Normal Duty and 50% base
Heavy Duty with respect to continuous current rating and short term speed) -
Normal Duty
overload limits.
Maximum
continuous
current -
on
Heavy Duty
gi
re
ad
rlo
veo
or
ot
M
Motor rated
current set
in the drive
Heavy Duty - with high Normal Duty
overload capability
Normal Duty Heavy Duty (default)

For applications which use self ventilated induction motors and require a For constant torque applications or applications which require a high
low overload capability (e.g. fans, pumps). overload capability (e.g. winders, hoists).
Self ventilated induction motors require increased protection against The thermal protection is set to protect force ventilated induction motors
overload due to the reduced cooling effect of the fan at low speed. To and permanent magnet servo motors by default.
provide the correct level of protection the I2t software operates at a level NOTE N
which is speed dependent. This is illustrated in the graph below. If the application uses a self ventilated motor and increased thermal
NOTE protection is required for speeds below 50% base speed, then this can
The speed at which the low speed protection takes effect can be be enabled by setting Pr 4.25 = 1.
changed by the setting of Pr 4.25. The protection starts when the motor
speed is below 15% of base speed when Pr 4.25 = 0 (default) and below
50% when Pr 4.25 = 1.
Operation of motor I2t protection (it.ac trip)
Motor I2t protection is fixed as shown below and is compatible with: Motor I2t protection defaults to be compatible with:
• Self ventilated induction motors • Forced ventilation induction motors
• Permanent magnet servo motors
Motor total Motor total

current (Pr 4.01) current (Pr 4.01)
as a percentage as a percentage
of motor rated 2
I t protection operates in this region of motor rated 2
I t protection operates in this region
current current
100% 100%
70% 70%
Max. permissible Max. permissible
continuous continuous
current current
Pr 4.25 = 0 Pr 4.25 = 0
Pr 4.25 = 1 Pr 4.25 = 1
15% 50% 100% Motor speed as a 50% 100% Motor speed as a

percentage of base speed percentage of base speed
Short term overload limits

The maximum percentage overload limit changes depending on the selected motor. Variations in motor rated current, motor power factor and motor
leakage inductance all result in changes in the maximum possible overload. The exact value for a specific motor can be calculated using the
equations detailed in section 8.3 Current limits on page 97.
Typical values are shown in the table below:
Operating mode Closed loop from cold Closed loop from 100% Open loop from cold Open loop from 100%
Normal Duty overload with motor rated current = drive rated current 110% for 215s 110% for 5s 110% for 215s 110% for 5s
Heavy Duty overload with motor rated current = drive rated current 175% for 40s 175% for 5s 150% for 60s 150% for 8s
Heavy Duty overload with a typical 4 pole motor 200% for 28s 200% for 3s 175% for 40s 175% for 5s
Generally the drive rated current is higher than the matching motor rated current allowing a higher level of overload than the default setting as
illustrated by the example of a typical 4 pole motor.
NOTE The maximum overload level which can be attained is independent of the speed.

Table 2-1 200V Drive ratings (200V to 240V ±10%)

Normal Duty Heavy Duty
Maximum Nominal Motor Maximum Nominal Motor
Model continuous power power continuous power power
output current at 220V at 230V output current at 220V at 230V
A kW hp A kW hp
1201 5.2 1.1 1.5 4.3 0.75 1.0
1202 6.8 1.5 2.0 5.8 1.1 1.5
1 1203 9.6 2.2 3.0 7.5 1.5 2.0
1204 11 3.0 3.0 10.6 2.2 3.0
2201 15.5 4.0 5.0 12.6 3.0 3.0
2202 22 5.5 7.5 17 4.0 5.0
2 2203 28 7.5 10 25 5.5 7.5
3201 42 11 15 31 7.5 10
3 3202 54 15 20 42 11 15

A kW hp A kW hp
1401 2.8 1.1 1.5 2.1 0.75 1.0
1402 3.8 1.5 2.0 3.0 1.1 2.0
1403 5.0 2.2 3.0 4.2 1.5 3.0
1 1404 6.9 3.0 5.0 5.8 2.2 3.0
1405 8.8 4.0 5.0 7.6 3.0 5.0
1406 11 5.5 7.5 9.5 4.0 5.0
2401 15.3 7.5 10 13 5.5 10
2402 21 11 15 16.5 7.5 10
2 2403 29 15 20 25 11 20
3401 35 18.5 25 32 15 25
3402 43 22 30 40 18.5 30
3 3403 56 30 40 46 22 30

A kW hp A kW hp
3501 5.4 3.0 3.0 4.1 2.2 2.0
3502 6.1 4.0 5.0 5.4 3.0 3.0
3503 8.4 5.5 7.5 6.1 4.0 5.0
3 3504
3505
11
16
7.5
11
10
15
9.5
12
5.5
7.5
7.5
10
3506 22 15 20 18 11 15
3507 27 18.5 25 22 15 20
The continuous current ratings given are for maximum 40°C (104°F), 1000m altitude and 3.0 kHz switching. Derating is required for higher switching
frequencies, ambient temperature >40°C (104°F) and high altitude. For further information, refer to section 12.1.1 Power and current ratings
(Derating for switching frequency and temperature) on page 186.

2.2 Model number 2.3.3 Servo

For use with permanent magnet brushless motors with a feedback
The way in which the model numbers for the Unidrive SP range are
device fitted.
formed is illustrated below.
The drive directly controls the speed of the motor using the feedback
SP 1 2 04 device to ensure the rotor speed is exactly as demanded. Flux control is
not required because the motor is self excited by the permanent
magnets which form part of the rotor.
Absolute position information is required from the feedback device to
Model: Voltage ensure the output voltage is accurately matched to the back EMF of the
Unidrive SP rating: motor. Full torque is available all the way down to zero speed.
2 - 200V
4 - 400V 2.3.4 Regen
5 - 575V For use as a regenerative front end for four quadrant operation.
6 - 690V
Frame Regen operation allows bi-directional power flow to and from the AC
size: Indicates supply. This provides far greater efficiency levels in applications which
1 - Size 1 sub-rating would otherwise dissipate large amounts of energy in the form of heat in
2 - Size 2 within frame
3 - Size 3 a braking resistor.
size
4 - Size 4 The harmonic content of the input current is negligible due to the
5 - Size 5
6 - Size 6
sinusoidal nature of the waveform when compared to a conventional
bridge rectifier or thyristor front end.
See the Unidrive SP Regen User Guide for more information about
2.3 Operating modes operation in this mode.
The Unidrive SP is designed to operate in any of the following modes:

1. Open loop mode
Open loop vector
Fixed V/F mode (V/Hz)
Quadratic V/F mode (V/Hz)
2. Closed loop vector
3. Servo
4. Regen
2.3.1 Open loop mode

For use with standard AC induction motors.
The drive applies power to the motor at frequencies varied by the user.
The motor speed is a result of the output frequency of the drive and slip
due to the mechanical load. The drive can improve the speed control of
the motor by applying slip compensation. The performance at low speed
depends on whether V/F mode or open loop vector mode is selected.
Open loop vector mode
The voltage applied to the motor is directly proportional to the frequency
except at low speed where the drive uses motor parameters to apply the
correct voltage to keep the flux constant under varying load conditions.
Typically 100% torque is available down to 1Hz for a 50Hz motor.
Fixed V/F mode
The voltage applied to the motor is directly proportional to the frequency
except at low speed where a voltage boost is provided which is set by
the user. This mode can be used for multi-motor applications.
Typically 100% torque is available down to 4Hz for a 50Hz motor.
Quadratic V/F mode
The voltage applied to the motor is directly proportional to the square of
the frequency except at low speed where a voltage boost is provided
which is set by the user. This mode can be used for running fan or pump
applications with quadratic load characteristics or for multi-motor
applications. This mode is not suitable for applications requiring a high
starting torque.
2.3.2 Closed loop vector mode

For use with induction motors with a feedback device fitted.
The drive directly controls the speed of the motor using the feedback
device to ensure the rotor speed is exactly as demanded. Motor flux is
accurately controlled at all times to provide full torque all the way down
to zero speed.

2.4 Drive features

Figure 2-1 Features of the drive
SMARTCARD
slot
Approvals label
Keypad
connection Status LED
Serial port Rating label

connector
Solutions Module
slot 1
Solutions Module
slot 2
Solutions Module
slot 3
Control terminals
Encoder
Relay terminals
connection
±DC Bus / Braking / 48V connection / 48V connection /

48V connection (for ±DC Bus (High ±DC Bus (Low ±DC Bus (High ±DC Bus (Low
low voltage operation) current) / Braking current) current) / Braking current)
Internal Internal Internal

EMC EMC EMC
filter filter filter
1 2 3
AC supply / AC supply / AC supply /

motor motor motor
connections connections connections

2.5 Nameplate description

See Figure 2-1 Features of the drive for location of rating labels.
Figure 2-2 Typical drive rating lables
Rating label
Input voltage Input No. of Typical input

rating frequency phases current for
Normal Duty
I/P 200-240V 50-60Hz 3ph 6.6A rating
Model SP1201 S.No: 3000005001 Key to approvals
O/P 0-240V SP 1,5 TL 4.3 / 5.2A Serial
number
Output voltage CE approval Europe
Heavy Duty / Normal Duty
range rating output current
C Tick approval Australia
Approvals label
USA &
Model UL / cUL approval
R
Canada
Heavy Duty /
Please read manual before connecting. Normal Duty
SP1201 0.75 / 1.1kW power rating
Electric Shock Risk: Wait 10 min between
disconnecting supply & removing covers
IND.
CONT. R Approvals
SP 1,5 TL EQ.
Ser No: 3000005001 Made In U.K

Serial
number STDL25
Customer and
date code
2.6 Options
Figure 2-3 Options available with Unidrive SP
SMARTCARD*
Keypad
Internal braking
resistor (size 1
and 2 only)
Feedback Automation Fieldbus
External
footprint / CT Comms
bookcase cable
EMC filter
* A SMARTCARD is provided with the Unidrive SP as standard.

SMARTCARDs with pre-loaded application set-ups are available from
the supplier of the drive. Only one SMARTCARD can be fitted at any one
time. For further information, refer to Chapter 9 SMARTCARD
operation on page 100.

All Unidrive SP Solutions Modules are colour-coded in order to make identification easy. The following table shows the colour-code key and gives
further details on their function.
Table 2-4 Solutions Module identification
Type Solutions Module Colour Name Further Details
Universal Feedback interface
Feedback interface for the following devices:
Inputs Outputs
SM-Universal
Light Green • Incremental encoders • Quadrature
Encoder Plus • SinCos encoders • Frequency and direction
• SSI encoders • SSI simulated outputs
• EnDat encoders
Resolver interface
Feedback Light Blue SM-Resolver Feedback interface for resolvers.
Simulated quadrature encoder outputs
Incremental encoder interface

Feedback interface for incremental encoders without
Brown SM-Encoder Plus
commutation signals.
No simulated encoder outputs available
Drive encoder input converter
15-way D-type
N/A Provides screw terminal interface for encoder wiring and spade
converter
terminal for shield
Extended I/O interface
Increases the I/O capability by adding the following to the
existing I/O in the drive:
Yellow SM-I/O Plus
• digital inputs x 3 • analog output (voltage) x 1
• digital I/O x 3 • relay x 2
• analog inputs (voltage) x 2
Applications Processor (with CTNet)

Dark Green SM-Applications 2nd processor for running pre-defined and /or customer created
Automation application software with CTNet support
Applications Processor
White SM-Applications Lite 2nd processor for running pre-defined and /or customer created
application software
Motion Controller
Dark Blue SM-EZMotion 11/2 axis motion controller with processor for running customer
created application specific software.
Profibus option
Purple SM-PROFIBUS-DP PROFIBUS DP adapter for communications with the Unidrive
SP.
DeviceNet option
Medium Grey SM-DeviceNet
Devicenet adapter for communications with the Unidrive SP
Interbus option
Fieldbus Dark Grey SM-INTERBUS
Interbus adapter for communications with the Unidrive SP
CAN option
Pink SM-CAN
CAN adapter for communications with the Unidrive SP
CANopen option
Light Grey SM-CANopen
CANopen adapter for communications with the Unidrive SP
LED keypad option

N/A SM-Keypad
Keypad with a LED display
Keypad
LCD keypad option
N/A SM-Keypad Plus
Keypad with an alpha-numeric LCD display with Help function

2.7 Items supplied with the drive

The drive is supplied with a copy of the Unidrive SP User Guide, a
SMARTCARD, the safety booklet, the certificate of quality, an accessory
kit box including the items shown in Table 2-4 and a CD ROM containing
the following user guides:
• Unidrive SP User Guide (English, French, German, Italian, Spanish)
• Unidrive SP Advanced User Guide
• Solutions Module User Guides
Figure 2-4 Accessories supplied with size 1
Relay
connector Control connectors
Through panel
mounting gasket
Supply and motor
connector
DC terminal
cover gromets
Grounding clamp
CAUTION
Risk of Electric Shock
IP54 Power down unit 10minutes
gasket before removing cover
UL warning label
Grounding
bracket
Through-panel
Surface mounting brackets
mounting bracket

Relay
connector
Supply and motor

connector Control connectors
Through panel
mounting gasket
DC terminal
Ground cable cover grommets
Grounding clamp bridge
Ferrite ring IP54 insert
CAUTION
Through-panel Power down unit 10minutes
before removing cover
mounting bracket
Grounding Surface mounting
bracket brackets UL warning label
Relay
connector Through panel
mounting gasket
Control connectors
Grounding DC terminal
clamp cover gromets
Ferrite
ring
CAUTION
Power down unit 10minutes
Grounding before removing cover
bracket Surface mounting
brackets UL warning label

3 Mechanical Installation 3.2.6 Electromagnetic compatibility

Variable speed drives are powerful electronic circuits which can cause
This chapter describes how to use all mechanical features to install the electromagnetic interference if not installed correctly with careful
drive. Key features of this chapter include: attention to the layout of the wiring.
• Through-hole mounting Some simple routine precautions can prevent disturbance to typical
• IP54 as standard industrial control equipment.
• Enclosure sizing and layout If it is necessary to meet strict emission limits, or if it is known that
• Solutions Module fitting electromagnetically sensitive equipment is located nearby, then full
• Terminal location and torque settings precautions must be observed. In-built into the drive, is an internal EMC
filter, which reduces emissions under certain conditions. If these
3.1 Safety information conditions are exceeded, then the use of an external EMC filter may be
required at the drive inputs, which must be located very close to the
Follow the instructions drives. Space must be made available for the filters and allowance made
The mechanical and electrical installation instructions must for carefully segregated wiring. Both levels of precautions are covered in
be adhered to. Any questions or doubt should be referred to section 4.10 EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility) on page 45.
the supplier of the equipment. It is the responsibility of the
WARNING owner or user to ensure that the installation of the drive and 3.2.7 Hazardous areas
any external option unit, and the way in which they are The drive must not be located in a classified hazardous area unless it is
operated and maintained, comply with the requirements of installed in an approved enclosure and the installation is certified.
the Health and Safety at Work Act in the United Kingdom or
applicable legislation and regulations and codes of practice in 3.3 Terminal cover removal
the country in which the equipment is used.
Isolation device
Competence of the installer The AC supply must be disconnected from the drive using an
The drive must be installed by professional assemblers who approved isolation device before any cover is removed from
are familiar with the requirements for safety and EMC. The the drive or before any servicing work is performed.
WARNING
assembler is responsible for ensuring that the end product or
WARNING system complies with all the relevant laws in the country
Stored charge
where it is to be used.
The drive contains capacitors that remain charged to a
potentially lethal voltage after the AC supply has been
3.2 Planning the installation disconnected. If the drive has been energised, the AC
The following considerations must be made when planning the WARNING supply must be isolated at least ten minutes before work
installation: may continue.
3.2.1 Access Normally, the capacitors are discharged by an internal
Access must be restricted to authorised personnel only. Safety resistor. Under certain, unusual fault conditions, it is possible
regulations which apply at the place of use must be complied with. that the capacitors may fail to discharge, or be prevented
from being discharged by a voltage applied to the output
The IP (Ingress Protection) rating of the drive is installation dependent.
terminals. If the drive has failed in a manner that causes the
For further information, please refer to section 3.9 IP Rating (Ingress
display to go blank immediately, it is possible the capacitors
Protection) on page 26.
will not be discharged. In this case, consult Control
3.2.2 Environmental protection Techniques or their authorised distributor.
The drive must be protected from:
• moisture, including dripping water or spraying water and
3.3.1 Removing the terminal covers
condensation. An anti-condensation heater may be required, which Unidrive SP size 1 is fitted with two terminal covers: Main and 48V / DC
must be switched off when the drive is running. terminal covers.
• contamination with electrically conductive material Unidrive SP size 2 is fitted with three terminal covers: Main, 48V / DC
• contamination with any form of dust which may restrict the fan, or and DC terminal covers.
impair airflow over various components Unidrive SP size 3 is fitted with four terminal covers: Main, 48V / DC, DC
• temperature beyond the specified operating and storage ranges and AC terminal covers.
3.2.3 Cooling When the drive is through-panel mounted the main, and AC for size 3,
The heat produced by the drive must be removed without its specified terminal cover must be removed in order to provide access to the
operating temperature being exceeded. Note that a sealed enclosure mounting holes. Once the drive has been mounted, the terminal cover
gives much reduced cooling compared with a ventilated one, and may can be replaced.
need to be larger and/or use internal air circulating fans. Figure 3-1 Location and identification of terminal covers
For further information, please refer to section 3.6.2 Enclosure sizing on 48V / DC DC 48V / DC DC 48V / DC
page 24.
3.2.4 Electrical safety
The installation must be safe under normal and fault conditions.
Electrical installation instructions are given in Chapter 4 Electrical
Installation on page 36.
3.2.5 Fire protection
The drive enclosure is not classified as a fire enclosure. A separate fire
enclosure must be provided.
Main Main AC Main

Figure 3-2 Removing the size 1 terminal covers
Pozi Pz2
Flat 5mm
Pozi Pz2
Flat 5mm
Pozi Pz2
Flat 5mm
To remove a terminal cover, undo the screw and lift the terminal cover off When replacing the terminal covers the screws should be tightened with
as shown in the diagrams above. The main terminal cover must be a maximum torque of 1 N m (0.7 lb ft).
removed first before the 48V/DC terminal cover can be removed.

3.3.2 Removing the finger-guard and 48V / DC

terminal cover break-outs
Figure 3-5 Removing the finger-guard break-outs Figure 3-6 Removing the 48V / DC terminal cover break-outs
1 2
1
2
All sizes
All sizes
1 2
1 2
Size 2
Size 3 only
only
Place finger-guard on a flat solid surface and hit relevant break-outs with Grasp the 48V / DC terminal cover break-outs with pliers as shown (1)
hammer as shown (1). Continue until all required break-outs are and twist to remove. Continue until all required break-outs are removed
removed (2). Remove any flash / sharp edges once the break-outs are (2).
removed. Remove any flash / sharp edges once the break-outs are removed. Use
the 48V / DC terminal cover grommets supplied in the accessory box
(Table 2-4 on page 14) to maintain the seal at the top of the drive.

3.4 Solutions Module fitting / removal
Power down the drive before fitting / removing the Solutions

Module. Failure to do so may result in damage to the product.
CAUTION
Figure 3-7 Fitting and removal of a Solutions Module
Fitting Solutions Module Removing Solutions Module Three Solutions Modules fitted
Solutions Module
B
in slot 1
A Solutions Module
in slot 2
Solutions Module
in slot 3
A
To fit the Solutions Module, press down in the direction shown above The drive has the facility for all three Solutions Module slots to be used
until it clicks into place. at the same time, as illustrated.
To remove the Solutions Module, press inwards at the points shown (A) NOTE N
and pull in the direction shown (B). It is recommended that the Solutions Module slots are used in the
following order: slot 3, slot 2 and slot 1.
Figure 3-8 Fitting and removal of a keypad
Fitting keypad Removing keypad
To fit, align the keypad and press gently in the direction shown until it NOTE N
clicks into position.
The keypad can be fitted / removed whilst the drive is powered up and
To remove, whilst pressing the tabs inwards (A), gently lift the keypad in running a motor, providing that the drive is not operating in keypad
the direction indicated (B). mode.

3.5 Mounting methods

Unidrive SP can be either surface or through-panel mounted using the
appropriate brackets.
The following drawings show the dimensions of the drive and mounting
holes for each method to allow a back plate to be prepared.
If the drive has been used at high load levels for a period of
time, the heatsink can reach temperatures in excess of 70°C
(158°F). Human contact with the heatsink should be
WARNING
prevented.
3.5.1 Surface mounting

Figure 3-9 Surface mounting the size 1 drive
100mm 219mm
(3.937in) (8.622in)
40.0±5.0mm
(1.575±0.197in)
∅ 6.5mm
(0.256in)
30.0mm
(1.181in)
368mm 386mm
370.0±1.0mm
(14.488in) (15.197in)
(14.567±0.039in)
∅ 6.5mm
(0.256in)

219mm
155mm (8.622in)
(6.102in)
106±1.0mm
4.173±0.039in
∅ 6.5mm
(0.256in)
24.5mm
(0.965in)
368mm
(14.488in) 337.5±1.0mm
371.6mm
(14.630in) (13.287±0.039in)
21mm (0.827in)
∅ 6.5mm
(0.256in)
250mm (9.843in) 260mm (10.236in)
106±1.0mm
(4.173±0.039in) ∅6.5mm
(0.256in)
97mm 47mm
(3.819in) (1.850in)
368mm
(14.488in) 327±1.0mm
361mm
(14.213in) (12.874±0.039in)
21mm (0.827in)
∅6.5mm
(0.256in)

3.5.2 Through-panel mounting

When the drive is through-panel mounted, the main terminal cover(s)
must be removed in order to provide access to the mounting holes. Once
the drive has been mounted, the terminal cover(s) can be replaced.
Figure 3-12 Through-panel mounting the size 1 drive
219mm (8.622in)
100mm 139mm (5.472in)

(3.973in) 70.0±0.3mm
∅ 6.5mm
(2.756±0.012in)
(0.256in)
35.0±0.15mm
(1.378±0.006in)
15.6±0.5mm
93.0±0.5mm (0.614±0.020in)
(3.661±0.020in)
391mm 342mm 343.0±0.5mm 368.0±1.0mm

368mm (15.394in) (13.465in) (13.504±0.020in) (14.488±0.039in)
(14.488in)
∅ 6.5mm 9.4±0.75mm
(0.256in) (0.370±0.030in)
80mm
(3.150in)
219mm (8.622in)
155mm (6.102in) 80mm 70±0.3mm
139mm (5.472in) (3.150in) (2.756±0.012in)
35.0±0.15mm ∅6.5mm
(1.378±0.006in) (0.256in)
64.6±0.5mm
(2.543±0.020in)
148±0.5mm
(5.827±0.020in)
391mm 368.0±1.0mm
368mm (15.394in) (14.488±0.039in)
(14.488in) 293mm 294±0.5mm
(11.535in)
(11.575±0.020in)
9.3±0.5mm
(0.366±0.020in) ∅6.5mm
(0.256in)
101.5±0.5mm
(3.996±0.020in)

260mm (10.236in)
250mm(9.843in) 140mm (5.512in) 120mm (4.724in)
∅6.5mm
(0.256in)
56±0.5mm
(2.205±0.020in)
236±0.5mm
(9.291±0.020in)
368mm
(14.488in)
283mm
(11.142in) 287±0.5mm
(11.299±0.020in)
8±0.3mm
(0.315±0.012in)
∅6.5mm
(0.256in)
NOTE N
In order to achieve IP54 rating (NEMA 12) for through-panel mounting,
an IP54 insert must be fitted (size 1 and 2). Additionally, the gasket
provided should be fitted between the drive and the backplate to ensure
a good seal for the cubicle. If the heatsink mounted braking resistor is to
be used with the drive through-panel mounted, please refer to section
3.11 Heatsink mounted braking resistor on page 31 prior to mounting the
drive. For further information refer to section 3.9 IP Rating (Ingress
Protection) on page 26.
Table 3-1 Mounting brackets
Model Hole
Surface Through-panel
size size
6.5mm
1
(0.256in)
x2 x1
6.5mm
2
(0.256in)
x2
x1
6.5mm
3
(0.256in)
x2

3.6 Enclosure
3.6.1 Enclosure Layout
Please observe the clearances in the diagram below taking into account
any appropriate notes for other devices / auxiliary equipment when
planning the installation.
Figure 3-15 Enclosure layout
Optional braking resistor and overload Locate optional braking

resistor and overload
external to cubicle
Locate
Locateasas (preferably near to or
required
required on top of the cubicle).
Enclosure
AC supply ≥100mm
contactor and (4in)
fuses or MCB
Ensure minimum clearances

are maintained for the drive A Size 1: ≥0mm (0in)
and external EMC filter. Forced Size 2: ≥30mm (1.181in)
or convection air-flow must not Size 3: ≥30mm (1.181in)
be restricted by any object or
cabling
A A
The external EMC filter can be

bookcase mounted (next to the Note
drive) or footprint mounted (with For EMC compliance:
the drive mounted onto the filter). 1) When using an external EMC
filter, one filter is required for
each drive
2) Power cabling must be at
least 100mm (4in) from the
≥100mm drive in all directions
(4in)
External
controller
Signal cables
Plan for all signal cables
to be routed at least
300mm (12in) from the
drive and any power cable
3.6.2 Enclosure sizing

1. Add the dissipation figures from section 12.1.2 Power dissipation on
page 189 for each drive that is to be installed in the enclosure.
2. If an external EMC filter is to be used with each drive, add the
dissipation figures from section 12.2.1 EMC filter ratings on
page 196 for each external EMC filter that is to be installed in the
enclosure.
3. If the braking resistor is to be mounted inside the enclosure, add the
average power figures from for each braking resistor that is to be
installed in the enclosure.
4. Calculate the total heat dissipation (in Watts) of any other equipment
to be installed in the enclosure.
5. Add the heat dissipation figures obtained above. This gives a figure
in Watts for the total heat that will be dissipated inside the enclosure.

Calculating the size of a sealed enclosure The minimum required heat conducting area is then:
The enclosure transfers internally generated heat into the surrounding
air by natural convection (or external forced air flow); the greater the 312.4
A e = ---------------------------------
surface area of the enclosure walls, the better is the dissipation 5.5 ( 40 – 30 )
capability. Only the surfaces of the enclosure that are unobstructed (not
in contact with a wall or floor) can dissipate heat. =5.68 m2 (61.9 ft2) (1 m2 = 10.9 ft2)
Calculate the minimum required unobstructed surface area Ae for the Estimate two of the enclosure dimensions - the height (H) and depth (D),
enclosure from: for instance. Calculate the width (W) from:
P A e – 2HD
A e = ----------------------------------- W = --------------------------
k ( T int – T ext ) H+D
Where: Inserting H = 2m and D = 0.6m, obtain the minimum width:
Ae 2 2 2
Unobstructed surface area in m (1 m = 10.9 ft ) 5.68 – ( 2 × 2 × 0.6 )
W = --------------------------------------------------
T
Maximum expected temperature in oC outside the 2 + 0.6
ext
enclosure =1.262 m (49.7 in)
Tint Maximum permissible temperature in oC inside the If the enclosure is too large for the space available, it can be made
enclosure smaller only by attending to one or all of the following:
P Power in Watts dissipated by all heat sources in the • Using a lower PWM switching frequency to reduce the dissipation in
enclosure the drives
k Heat transmission coefficient of the enclosure material • Reducing the ambient temperature outside the enclosure, and/or
in W/m2/oC applying forced-air cooling to the outside of the enclosure
Example • Reducing the number of drives in the enclosure
To calculate the size of an enclosure for the following: • Removing other heat-generating equipment
• Two SP 1406 models operating at the Normal Duty rating Calculating the air-flow in a ventilated enclosure
• Each drive to operate at 6kHz PWM switching frequency The dimensions of the enclosure are required only for accommodating
• Schaffner 16 A (4200-6119) external EMC filter for each drive the equipment. The equipment is cooled by the forced air flow.
• Braking resistors are to be mounted outside the enclosure
• Maximum ambient temperature inside the enclosure: 40°C Calculate the minimum required volume of ventilating air from:
• Maximum ambient temperature outside the enclosure: 30°C 3kP
V = ---------------------------
Dissipation of each drive: 147 W (see section 12.1.2 Power T int – T ext
dissipation on page 189)
Where:
Dissipation of each external EMC filter: 9.2 W (max) (see section
12.2.1 EMC filter ratings on page 196) V Air-flow in m3 per hour (1 m3/hr = 0.59 ft3/min)
Total dissipation: 2 x (147 + 9.2) =312.4 W Text Maximum expected temperature in °C outside the
enclosure
The enclosure is to be made from painted 2 mm (0.079 in) sheet steel
Tint Maximum permissible temperature in °C inside the
having a heat transmission coefficient of 5.5 W/m2/oC. Only the top,
enclosure
front, and two sides of the enclosure are free to dissipate heat.
P Power in Watts dissipated by all heat sources in the
The value of 5.5 W/m2/ºC can generally be used with a sheet steel enclosure
cubicle (exact values can be obtained by the supplier of the material). If Po
in any doubt, allow for a greater margin in the temperature rise. k Ratio of -------
Pl
Figure 3-16 Enclosure having front, sides and top panels free to Where:
dissipate heat P0 is the air pressure at sea level
PI is the air pressure at the installation
Typically use a factor of 1.2 to 1.3, to allow also for pressure-drops in
dirty air-filters.
Example
To calculate the size of an enclosure for the following:
H • Three SP1403 models operating at the Normal Duty rating
• Each drive to operate at 6kHz PWM switching frequency
• Schaffner 10A (4200-6118) external EMC filter for each drive
• Braking resistors are to be mounted outside the enclosure
• Maximum ambient temperature inside the enclosure: 40°C
• Maximum ambient temperature outside the enclosure: 30°C
Dissipation of each drive: 61 W
D
Dissipation of each external EMC filter: 6.9 W (max)
W
Total dissipation: 3 x (61 + 6.9) = 203.7 W
Insert the following values:
Insert the following values:
Tint 40°C
Tint 40°C Text 30°C
Text 30°C k 1.3
k 5.5 P 203.7 W
P 312.4 W

Then: Figure 3-17 Example of IP54 (NEMA 12) rating layout
3 × 1.3 × 203.7 IP54 (NEMA 12)

V = ---------------------------------------
40 – 30 enclosure
= 79.4 m3/hr (46.9 ft3 /min) (1 m3/ hr = 0.59 ft3/min)

IP20
3.7 Cubicle design and drive ambient (NEMA1)
temperature
Drive derating is required for operation in high ambient temperatures
Totally enclosing or through panel mounting the drive in either a sealed
cabinet (no airflow) or in a well ventilated cabinet makes a significant
difference on drive cooling. Drive with
IP54 insert
The chosen method affects the ambient temperature value (Trate) which and IP54
should be used for any necessary derating to ensure sufficient cooling fan fitted
for the whole of the drive.
The ambient temperature for the four different combinations is defined
below:
1. Totally enclosed with no air flow (<2 m/s) over the drive
Trate = Tint + 5°C
Gasket
2. Totally enclosed with air flow (>2 m/s) over the drive seal
Trate = Tint
3. Through panel mounted with no airflow (<2 m/s) over the drive
Trate = the greater of Text +5°C, or Tint
4. Through panel mounted with air flow (>2 m/s) over the drive
Trate = the greater of Text or Tint
Where: In order to achieve the high IP rating at the rear of the heatsink with
Text = Temperature outside the cabinet Unidrive SP size 1 and 2, it is necessary to seal a heatsink vent by fitting
Tint = Temperature inside the cabinet the IP54 insert as shown in Figure 3-18.
Trate = Temperature used to select current rating from tables in For increased fan lifetime in a dirty environment the heatsink fan must be
Chapter 12 Technical Data . replaced with an IP54 rated fan. Contact the supplier of the drive for
details. If the standard fan is used in a dirty/dusty environment, reduced
3.8 Heatsink fan operation fan lifetime will result. Regular cleaning of the fan and heatsink is
The Unidrive SP is ventilated by an internal heatsink mounted fan. The recommended in this environment.
fan housing forms a baffle plate, channelling the air through the heatsink The guidelines in Table 3-2 should be followed.
chamber. Thus, regardless of mounting method (surface mounting or Table 3-2 Environment considerations
through-panel mounting), the fitting of additional baffle plates is not
required. IP54
Environment Fan Comments
Insert
Ensure the minimum clearances around the drive are maintained to
allow air to flow freely. Not
Clean Standard
fitted
The heatsink fan on Unidrive SP size 1 and 2 is a dual speed fan and on
size 3 it is a variable speed fan. The drive controls the speed at which Dry, dusty Regular cleaning
the fan runs based on the temperature of the heatsink and the drive's (non- Fitted Standard recommended. Fan lifetime
thermal model system. The Unidrive SP size 3 is also fitted with single conductive) may be reduced.
speed fan to ventilate the capacitor bank. Regular cleaning
Dry, dusty Standard
Fitted recommended. Fan lifetime
3.9 IP Rating (Ingress Protection) (conductive) / IP54
may be reduced.
An explanation of IP Rating is provided in section 12.1.9 IP Rating IP54 Regular cleaning
Fitted IP54
(Ingress Protection) on page 191. compliance recommended.
The Unidrive SP is rated to IP20 pollution degree 2 (dry, non-conductive
contamination only) (NEMA 1). However, it is possible to configure the
A current derating must be applied to the drive if the IP54
drive to achieve IP54 rating (NEMA 12) at the rear of the heatsink for
insert and/or IP54 rated fan are fitted. Derating information is
through-panel mounting (some current derating is required).
provided in section 12.1.1 Power and current ratings
This allows the front of the drive, along with various switchgear, to be (Derating for switching frequency and temperature) on
housed in an IP54 (NEMA 12) enclosure with the heatsink protruding CAUTION
page 186.
through the panel to the external environment. Thus, the majority of the
Failure to do so may result in nuisance tripping.
heat generated by the drive is dissipated outside the enclosure
maintaining a reduced temperature inside the enclosure. This also relies
on a good seal being made between the heatsink and the backplate
NOTE N
using the gasket provided. When designing an IP54 (NEMA 12) cubicle, consideration should be
made to the dissipation from the front of the drive.
For the Unidrive SP size 1, this is ≤50W.

Figure 3-18 Fitting of IP54 insert for size 1 Figure 3-19 Fitting of IP54 insert for size 2
3
3
Remove metal clip (1). 2
1 2 Push tab in the direction
shown (2) and lift hinged
baffle as shown (3)
1
Push plastic tabs in the

direction shown (1).
Push tab in the direction
shown (2), and lift hinged
4 baffle as shown (3).
5
IP54 insert
Remove IP54 insert from
IP54 insert hinged baffle by releasing
gasket clip (4).
6 Rotate the IP54 insert 4
7 o
through 180 so that the
flat side faces away from
the fan (5).
Remove the backing from
the IP54 insert gasket and 5
stick it into the recess of
the IP54 insert (6). (The
gasket can be found in
the accessories box.)
Lower IP54 insert into
position as shown (7).
Take IP54 insert from

the accessories box (4).
Lower the IP54 insert into
8 9 the ventilation hole in the
Close hinged baffle (8)
heatsink (5).
and click into position.
Replace metal clip (9).
In order to remove the IP54 insert, repeat steps (1), (2) and (3), reverse
steps (7), (6), (5) and (4) and repeat steps (8) and (9).
Close hinged baffle (6)
and click into position,
ensuring tabs locate
correctly.
In order to remove the IP54 insert, repeat steps (1) (2) and (3), reverse
steps (5) and (4) and repeat step (6).

3.10 External EMC filter

In order to provide our customers with a degree of flexibility, external EMC filters have been sourced from two manufacturers: Schaffner & Epcos.
Filter details for each drive rating are provided in the tables below. Both the Schaffner and Epcos filters meet the same specifications.
Table 3-3 Drive EMC filter details
Schaffner Epcos
Drive
CT part no. Weight CT part no. Weight
SP1201
4200-6118 4200-6121
SP1202 1.4 kg 2.1 kg
SP1203 (3.1 lb) (4.6 lb)
4200-6119 4200-6120
SP1204
SP1401
SP1402
4200-6118 4200-6121
SP1403 1.4 kg 2.1 kg
SP1404 (3.1 lb) (4.6 lb)
SP1405
4200-6119 4200-6120
SP1406
SP2201
2.0 kg 3.3 kg
SP2202 4200-6210 4200-6211
(4.4 lb) (7.3 lb)
SP2203
SP2401
2.0 kg 3.3 kg
SP2402 4200-6210 4200-6211
(4.4 lb) (7.3 lb)
SP2403
SP3201 3.5 kg 5.1 kg
4200-6307 4200-6306
SP3202 (7.7 lb) (11.2 lb)
SP3401
SP3402 4200-6305 4200-6306
SP3403
SP3501
SP3502 3.5 kg 5.1 kg
SP3503 (7.7 lb) (11.2 lb)
SP3504 4200-6309 4200-6308
SP3505
SP3506
SP3507
The external EMC filters can be footprint or bookcase mounted. See

Figure 3-20 and Figure 3-21.
Mount the external EMC filter following the guidelines in section
4.10.5 Compliance with generic emission standards on page 49.
Figure 3-20 Footprint mounting the EMC filter Figure 3-21 Bookcase mounting the EMC filter

Figure 3-22 Size 1 external EMC filter

A
Y
Z
L3
X
L2
W C X
V
L1
Y Z
Cable size:
2
B 2.5mm
14AWG
H
D Y Z
V: Ground stud: M5
X: M6 threaded holes for footprint mounting of the drive
Y: Footprint mounting holes ∅6.5mm (0.256in)
Z: Bookcase mounting holes ∅6.5mm (0.256in)
All filter mounting holes are suitable for M6 fasteners.
CT Part Number Manufacturer A B C D H W

4200-6118 440 mm
Schaffner
4200-6119 390 mm 423 mm 74 mm 45 mm (17.323 in) 100 mm
4200-6121 (15.354 in) (16.654 in) (2.913 in) (1.772 in) 450 mm (3.937 in)
Epcos
4200-6120 (17.717 in)
Z
Y
L3
L1'
W C X
L2
L2'
L3'
L1
Cable size:
Y V 4mm
2
Z 10AWG
D E Y Z
V: Ground stud: M5
Z: Bookcase mounting slots 6.5mm (0.256in) wide
All filter mounting holes are suitable for M6 fasteners.
CT part no. Manufacturer A B C D E H W

428.5 mm
4200-6210 Schaffner
371.5 mm 404.5 mm 125 mm 55 mm 30 mm (16.870 in) 155 mm
(14.626 in) (15.925 in) (4.921 in) (2.165 in) (1.181 in) 431.5 mm (6.102 in)
4200-6211 Epcos
(16.988 in)

Z
Y
X X
W C
Cable size:
16mm2
Y 6AWG
Z
D E Z
V: Ground stud: M6
Z: Bookcase mounting slots 6.5mm (0.256in) wide
CT part no. Manufacturer A B C D E H W

4200-6305
361 mm 414 mm
4200-6307 Schaffner
(14.213 in) 396 mm 210 mm 60 mm 30 mm (16.299 in) 250 mm
4200-6309
(15.591 in) (8.268 in) (2.362 in) (1.181 in) (9.843 in)
4200-6306 365 mm 425 mm
Epcos
4200-6308 (14.370 in) (16.732 in)

3.11 Heatsink mounted braking resistor
If the drive has been used at high load levels for a period of time, the heatsink and heatsink mounted braking resistor can reach
temperatures in excess of 70°C (158°F). Human contact with the heatsink and heatsink mounted braking resistor should be prevented.
WARNING
To avoid the risk of fire when the drive is surface mounted with the braking resistor fitted, the back plate should be a non-flammable
material.
WARNING
The Unidrive SP size 1and 2 have been designed with an optional space-saving heatsink mounted resistor. The resistor can be fitted within the
heatsink fins of the drive. When the heatsink mounted resistor is used, an external thermal protection device is not required as the resistor is
designed such that it will fail safely under fault conditions. The in-built software overload protection is set up at default to protect the resistor. The
resistor is rated to IP40 (NEMA1).
If the drive is to be through-panel mounted with the heatsink mounted brake resistor fitted, then the aperture in the panel through which the drive is
mounted must be modified as shown in Figure 3-25 and Figure 3-26. This is in order to allow for the braking resistor cables and grommets.
Figure 3-25 Through-panel mounting cut-out details for size 1 Figure 3-26 Through-panel mounting cut-out details for size 2
60mm 115mm
(2.362in) (4.528in)
∅15.0mm
∅15.0mm (0.591in)
(0.591in)
15.6mm
66mm ∅6.5mm
(0.614in)
∅6.5mm (2.598in) (0.256in)
(0.256in)
93mm
(3.661in)
148mm
(5.827in)
The part numbers for the resistor kits are as follows: Each kit contains the following:
Size 1: 1220-2757-00 • A braking resistor assembly
Size 2: 1220-2759-01 • A through-panel grommet
• An installation sheet
• A wire clip (Size 2 only)
3.11.1 Size 1 braking resistor fitting instructions
Figure 3-27 Fitting the heatsink mounted braking resistor on size 1
• Remove both terminal covers as detailed in section 3.3.1 Removing
the terminal covers on page 16.
• Remove the two break-outs that line-up with the BR and +DC
terminal connections as detailed in section 3.3.2 Removing the
finger-guard and 48V / DC terminal cover break-outs on page 18.
• Fit the braking resistor to the heatsink as shown in Figure 3-27. The
resistor is fitted with captive screws.
• The screws should be tightened to a maximum torque of 2 N m (1.5
lb ft).
• Ensure the cables are routed between the fins of the heatsink, and
that the cables are not trapped between heatsink fins and the
resistor.
Figure 3-28 Connecting the brake resistor on a surface mounted size 1

• Fit the 48V/DC terminal cover grommets supplied in the accessory
box with the drive, to the cables. To ensure a good seal, the
grommets are a tight fit. Lubrication may be required to help fit the
grommets to the cables.
• Terminate the cables with suitable crimps and connect to the BR and
+DC terminals. Tighten the screw terminals to a maximum torque of
1.5 Nm (1.1 lb ft).
• Replace both terminal covers.

Figure 3-29 Connecting the brake resistor on a through-panel mounted size 1

• See Figure 3-25 for through-panel mounting cut-out details.
• Pass the cables through the hole in the panel and fit the through-
panel grommet.
• Fit the through-panel mounting bracket.
• Fit the 48V/DC terminal cover grommets supplied in the accessory
box with the drive, to the cables. To ensure a good seal, the
grommets are a tight fit. Lubrication may be required to help fit the
grommets to the cables.
+DC terminals. Tighten the screw terminals to a maximum torque of
1.5 Nm (1.1 lb ft).
• Replace both terminal covers.
3.11.2 Size 2 braking resistor fitting instructions

Figure 3-30 Removing the baffle plate on a size 2
3 • Remove the DC cover as detailed in section 3.3.1 Removing the
2 terminal covers on page 16.
• Remove the two break-outs that line-up with the BR and +DC
terminal connections as detailed in section 3.3.2 Removing the
1
finger-guard and 48V / DC terminal cover break-outs on page 18.
• Lift the hinged fan baffle by pushing plastic tabs in the direction
shown (1). Push tab in the direction shown (2), and lift the baffle as
1
shown (3).
• Remove the metal heatsink baffle plate by removing the two screws.
These two screws are no longer required.
Figure 3-31 Modifying the fan baffle on a size 2

• Remove 5mm (0.197in) from the length of the clip on the plastic fan
Remove 5mm
(0.197in) from baffle.
the length
of this clip
Figure 3-32 Fitting the heatsink mounted braking resistor on a size 2

• Fit clip to heatsink in the position shown in diagram opposite. Route
the long cables of the resistor assembly between the fins of the
Route the cables
between these
heatsink as shown in Figure 3-32.
two heatsink fins • Fit the heatsink baffle plate in place with the cables routed
underneath. Ensure the cables are not trapped between a heatsink
fin and the baffle plate.
• Fit the braking resistors to the heatsink. The resistors are fitted with
captive screws.
• The screws should be tightened to a maximum torque of 2.0 N m
(1.5 lb ft).
• Close the hinged fan baffle.
• Fit cables to heatsink clip.

Figure 3-33 Connecting the brake resistor on a surface mounted size 2

• Fit the DC terminal cover grommets supplied in the accessory box
with the drive, to the cables. To ensure a good seal, the grommets
are a tight fit. Lubrication may be required to help fit the grommets to
the cables.
DC2 terminals.
• Replace the terminal cover.
Figure 3-34 Connecting the brake resistor on a through-panel mounted size 2

• See Figure 3-26 for through-panel mounting cut-out details.
• Pass the cables through the hole in the panel and fit the hole
grommet.
• Fit the mounting bracket.
• Fit the DC terminal cover grommets supplied in the accessory box
with the drive, to the cables. To ensure a good seal, the grommets
are a tight fit. Lubrication may be required to help fit the grommets to
the cables.
DC2 terminals.
• Replace the terminal cover.
3.11.3 Braking resistor overload protection parameter settings

Failure to observe the following information may damage the resistor.
The Unidrive SP software contains an overload protection function for a braking resistor. On Unidrive SP size 1 and 2 this function is
enabled at default to protect the heatsink mounted resistor. This function is also enabled on Unidrive SP size 3 in case a low power
CAUTION
resistor is connected to the drive. Below are the parameter settings.
Parameter 200V drive 400V drive 575V and 690V drives
Full power braking time Pr 10.30 0.09 0.02 0.01
Full power braking period Pr 10.31 2.0
For more information on the braking resistor software overload protection, see the Unidrive SP Advanced User Guide.
If the heatsink mounted braking resistor is to be used at more than half of its average power rating then the drive's cooling fan must be
set to full speed by setting Pr 6.45 to On (1).
See section 4.8.1 Heatsink mounted braking resistor on page 43 for the
resistor specifications.

3.12 Electrical terminals

3.12.1 Location of the power and ground terminals
Figure 3-35 Locations of the power and ground terminals on
Unidrive SP
Control terminals
2.5mm Relay terminals
3mm
8mm AF 8mm AF
Pozi Pz 2 T20 Torx or Pozi Pz 2 T20 Torx or Pozi Pz 3 Pozi Pz 2 T20 Torx or
Flat 6.5mm 6.5mm flat Flat 6.5mm 6.5mm flat Flat 10mm Flat 6.5mm 6.5mm flat
1 2 3
Pozi Pz 2 Pozi Pz 2 Pozi Pz 3

Flat 6.5mm Flat 6.5mm Flat 10mm
3.12.2 Terminal sizes and torque settings Table 3-5 Drive power terminal data
High current
Model Low current Ground
To avoid a fire hazard and maintain validity of the UL listing, AC terminals DC and
size DC and 48V terminal
adhere to the specified tightening torques for the power and braking
ground terminals. Refer to the following tables. Terminal block (M4 screws)
WARNING 1
1.5 N m (1.1 lb ft)
Plug-in
Terminal Stud (M5)
terminal block
Table 3-4 Drive control and relay terminal data block 4.0 N m
1.5 N m Terminal
2 (M5 screws) (2.9 lb ft)
Model Connection type Torque setting (1.1 lb ft) block
1.5 N m
All Plug-in terminal block 0.5 N m (0.4 lb ft) (M4 screws)
(1.1 lb ft)
1.5 N m
Fork (M6)
Terminal block (M6 screws) (1.1 lb ft)
3 6.0 N m
2.5 N m (1.8 lb ft)
(4.4 lb ft)
Torque tolerance ±10%

Table 3-6 Schaffner external EMC Filter terminal data 3.13 Routine maintenance
Power Ground The drive should be installed in a cool, clean, well ventilated location.
connections connections Contact of moisture and dust with the drive should be prevented.
CT
Ground Regular checks of the following should be carried out to ensure drive /
part Max cable
number Torque stud Torque installation reliability are maximised:
size
size
Environment
4200-6118 4mm2 0.8 N m
M5
3.5 N m
Ensure the enclosure temperature remains at
12AWG (0.6 lb ft) (2.6 lb ft) Ambient temperature
or below maximum specified
4200-6119 4mm2 0.8 N m
M5
3.5 N m Ensure the drive remains dust free – check that
12AWG (0.6 lb ft) (2.6 lb ft) the heatsink and drive fan is not gathering dust.
Dust
10mm2 2Nm 3.5 N m The lifetime of the fan is reduced in dusty
4200-6210 M5 environments.
8AWG (1.5 lb ft) (2.6 lb ft)
Ensure the drive enclosure shows no signs of
4200-6305 10mm2 2.2 N m
M6
3.9 N m Moisture
(1.6 lb ft) (2.9 lb ft) condensation
8AWG
Enclosure
4200-6307 10mm2 2.2 N m
M6
3.9 N m
8AWG (1.6 lb ft) (2.9 lb ft) Enclosure door Ensure filters are not blocked and that air is free
filters to flow
4200-6309 10mm2 2.2 N m
M6
3.9 N m
8AWG (1.6 lb ft) (2.9 lb ft) Electrical
Screw connections Ensure all screw terminals remain tight
Table 3-7 Epcos external EMC Filter terminal data
Ensure all crimp terminals remains tight –
Power Ground Crimp terminals check for any discolouration which could
connections connections indicate overheating
CT
part Ground Cables Check all cables for signs of damage
Max cable
number Torque stud Torque
size
size
4200-6120 4mm2 0.6 N m

M5
3.0 N m
12AWG (0.4 lb ft) (2.2 lb ft)
4200-6121 4mm2 0.6 N m

M5
3.0 N m
12AWG (0.4 lb ft) (2.2 lb ft)
4200-6211 10mm2 1.35 N m

M5
3.0 N m
8AWG (1.0 lb ft) (2.2 lb ft)
4200-6306 16mm2 2.2 N m

M6
5.1 N m
6AWG (1.6 lb ft) (3.8 lb ft)
4200-6308 16mm2 2.2 N m

M6
5.1 N m
6AWG (1.6 lb ft) (3.8 lb ft)

4 Electrical Installation 4.1 Power connections

Many cable management features have been incorporated into the 4.1.1 AC and DC connections
product and accessories, this chapter shows how to optimise them. Key Figure 4-1 Unidrive SP size 1 power connections
features include:
• SECURE DISABLE function DC Connections
• Internal EMC filter
• EMC compliance with shielding / grounding accessories
• Product rating, fusing and cabling information
• Brake resistor details (selection / ratings)
Electric shock risk

The voltages present in the following locations can cause
severe electric shock and may be lethal:
WARNING
• AC supply cables and connections
• DC and brake cables, and connections
• Output cables and connections
48V -DC +DC BR
• Many internal parts of the drive, and external option units
Unless otherwise indicated, control terminals are single
insulated and must not be touched. Internal
EMC filter
Isolation device
The AC supply must be disconnected from the drive using
an approved isolation device before any cover is removed
WARNING
from the drive or before any servicing work is performed.
STOP function
The STOP function does not remove dangerous voltages
from the drive, the motor or any external option units.
WARNING
SECURE DISABLE function

1
The SECURE DISABLE function does not remove
dangerous voltages from the drive, the motor or any external
WARNING
option units.
Stored charge
The drive contains capacitors that remain charged to a
potentially lethal voltage after the AC supply has been
disconnected. If the drive has been energised, the AC
WARNING supply must be isolated at least ten minutes before work
may continue. AC Connections
Normally, the capacitors are discharged by an internal
resistor. Under certain, unusual fault conditions, it is possible PE L1 L2 L3 U V W
that the capacitors may fail to discharge, or be prevented
from being discharged by a voltage applied to the output
terminals. If the drive has failed in a manner that causes the
display to go blank immediately, it is possible the capacitors Optional RFI
will not be discharged. In this case, consult Control filter
Techniques or their authorised distributor.
Optional
Equipment supplied by plug and socket line reactor
Special attention must be given if the drive is installed in
equipment which is connected to the AC supply by a plug
and socket. The AC supply terminals of the drive are Fuses
WARNING connected to the internal capacitors through rectifier diodes
which are not intended to give safety isolation. If the plug
terminals can be touched when the plug is disconnected
from the socket, a means of automatically isolating the plug Motor
from the drive must be used (e.g. a latching relay).
Permanent magnet motors L1 L2 L3

Permanent magnet motors generate electrical power if they Optional ground
Supply Mains connection
are rotated, even when the supply to the drive is Ground Supply
disconnected. If that happens then the drive will become
WARNING energised through its motor terminals.
If the motor load is capable of rotating the motor when the
supply is disconnected, then the motor must be isolated from
the drive before gaining access to any live parts.

Figure 4-2 Unidrive SP size 2 power connections Figure 4-3 Unidrive SP size 3 power connections
DC Connections DC Connections DC Connections DC Connections

(High current DC and braking) (Low current DC and 48V) (High current DC and braking) (Low current DC and 48V)
Thermal Thermal
overload overload
protection protection
device device
DC1 DC2 BR 48V -DC +DC DC1 DC2 BR 48V -DC +DC
DC1 = - DC1 = -
DC2 = + Internal DC2 = + Internal
EMC filter EMC filter
2 3
AC Connections AC Connections
PE L1 L2 L3 U V W L1 L2 L3 PE U V W
Optional RFI Optional RFI

filter filter
Optional Optional
line reactor line reactor
Fuses Fuses
Motor Motor
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Optional ground Optional ground
Supply Mains connection Mains Supply connection
Ground Supply Supply Ground
If the heatsink mounted resistor is used (size 1 and 2 only), an overload On Unidrive SP size 2 and 3, the high current DC connections must
protection device is not required. The resistor is designed to fail safely always be used when using a braking resistor, supplying the drive from
under fault conditions. DC (low voltage 48V or high voltage) or using the drive in a parallel DC
See Figure 4-4 for further information on ground connections. bus system. The low current DC connection is used only to connect the
internal EMC filter.
See Figure 4-5 for further information on ground connections.

4.1.2 Ground connections Figure 4-5 Unidrive SP size 3 ground connections

On a Unidrive SP size 1, the supply and motor ground connections are
made using the studs located either side of the drive near the plug-in
power connector. Refer to Figure 4-1 on page 36.
made using the grounding bridge that locates at the bottom of the drive.
See Figure 4-4 for details.
made using a M6 nut and bolt that locates in the fork protruding from the
heatsink between the AC supply and motor output terminals. See Figure
4-5 for details.
Figure 4-4 Unidrive SP size 2 ground connections
Plain washers
Spring washer
M6 bolt
The ground loop impedance must conform to the

requirements of local safety regulations.
The drive must be grounded by a connection capable of
carrying the prospective fault current until the protective
WARNING
device (fuse, etc.) disconnects the AC supply.
The ground connections must be inspected and tested at
appropriate intervals.
4.2 AC supply requirements

Voltage:
SPX20X 200V to 240V ±10%
SPX40X 380V to 480V ±10%
SPX50X 500V to 575V ±10%
Number of phases: 3
Maximum supply imbalance: 2% negative phase sequence (equivalent
to 3% voltage imbalance between phases).
Frequency range: 48 to 65 Hz
Maximum supply fault current:
Frame size Symmetrical fault level (kA)

1, 2, 3 5

4.2.1 Supply types 4.2.3 Input inductor calculation.

Drives rated for supply voltage up to 575V are suitable for use with any To calculate the inductance required (at Y%), use the following equation:
supply type, i.e. TN-S, TN-C-S, TT, IT, with grounding at any potential, Y V 1
i.e. neutral, centre or corner ("grounded-delta"). L = ---------- × ------- × ------------
100 3 2πfI
For grounded-delta supplies exceeding 430V some special grounding
Where:
requirements apply to fast data ports. Further information is given with
I = drive rated input current (A)
the port descriptions.
L = inductance (H)
Drives are suitable for use on supplies of installation category III and f = supply frequency (Hz)
lower, according to IEC60664-1. This means they may be connected V = voltage between lines
permanently to the supply at its origin in a building, but for outdoor
installation additional over-voltage suppression (transient voltage surge 4.3 Supplying the drive with DC / DC bus
suppression) must be provided to reduce category IV to category III.
paralleling
For frame sizes 3 and above, when the Unidrive SP is used The drive may be supplied with DC instead of 3 phase AC.
with ungrounded (IT) supplies the internal EMC filter must be
removed unless either the external filter is also used or else The connecting of the DC bus between several drives is typically used
additional motor earth fault protection is fitted. to:
WARNING For instructions on removal, refer to Figure 4-13 Removal of 1. Return energy from a drive which is being overhauled by the load to
internal EMC filter on page 46. a second motoring drive.
For details of ground fault protection contact the supplier of 2. Allow the use of one braking resistor to dissipate regenerative
the drive. energy from several drives.
Note that when using a suitable EMC filter and an ungrounded supply, There are limitations to the combinations of drives which can be used in
the drive will trip if an ground fault occurs in the motor circuit. this configuration.
Unusual hazards can occur on some types of ungrounded supplies such For application data, contact the supplier of the drive.
as on ships. Contact the supplier of the drive for more information.
4.4 24V back-up power supply input
4.2.2 Supplies requiring line reactors
Input line reactors reduce the risk of damage to the drive resulting from The 24Vdc input on the Unidrive SP has three main functions.
poor phase balance or severe disturbances on the supply network. • It can be used to supplement the drive’s own internal 24V when
Where line reactors are to be used, reactance values of approximately multiple SM-Universal Encoder Plus, or SM-I/O Plus modules are
2% are recommended. Higher values may be used if necessary, but may being used and the current drawn by these modules is greater than
result in a loss of drive output (reduced torque at high speed) because of the drive can supply. (If too much current is drawn from the drive, the
the voltage drop. drive will initiate a 'PS.24V' trip)
• It can be used as a back-up power supply to keep the control circuits
For all drive ratings, 2% line reactors permit drives to be used with a of the drive powered up when the mains supply is removed. This
supply unbalance of up to 3.5% negative phase sequence (equivalent to allows any fieldbus modules, application modules, encoders or serial
5% voltage imbalance between phases). communications to continue to operate.
Severe disturbances may be caused by the following factors, for • It can be used to commission the drive when mains voltages are not
example: available, as the display operates correctly. However, the drive will be in
• Power factor correction equipment connected close to the drive. the UU trip state unless either mains or 48V is applied, therefore
• Large DC drives having no or inadequate line reactors connected to diagnostics may not be possible. (Power down save parameters are not
the supply. saved when using the 24V back-up power supply input.)
• Direct-on-line started motor(s) connected to the supply such that The working voltage range of the 24V power supply is as follows:
when any of these motors are started, the voltage dip exceeds 20% Maximum continuous operating voltage: 30.0 V
Such disturbances may cause excessive peak currents to flow in the Minimum continuous operating voltage: 19.2 V
input power circuit of the drive. This may cause nuisance tripping, or in Nominal operating voltage: 24.0 V
extreme cases, failure of the drive. Minimum start up voltage: 21.6 V
Drives of low power rating may also be susceptible to disturbance when Maximum power supply requirement at 24V: 60 W
connected to supplies with a high rated capacity. Recommended fuse: 3 A, 50 Vdc
Line reactors are particularly recommended for use with the following Minimum and maximum voltage values include ripple and noise. Ripple
drive models when one of the above factors exists, or when the supply and noise values must not exceed 5%.
capacity exceeds 175kVA:
SP1201 SP1202 SP1203 SP1204
4.5 48V back-up power supply operation
SP1401 SP1402 SP1403 SP1404 The Unidrive SP can be operated from low voltage DC supplies,
nominally 24Vdc and 48Vdc. The 48Vdc low voltage operating mode is
Model sizes 1405 and larger have an internal DC choke so they do not
designed to allow for motor operation in an emergency back-up situation
require AC line reactors except for cases of excessive phase unbalance
following failure of the AC supply, for example in elevators; or to limit the
or extreme supply conditions.
speed of a servo motor during commissioning of equipment, for example
When required, each drive must have its own reactor(s). Three individual a robot cell.
reactors or a single three-phase reactor should be used.
The working voltage range of the 48V power supply is as follows:
Reactor current ratings
Minimum continuous operating voltage: 36V
The current rating of the line reactors should be as follows: Minimum start up voltage: 40V
Continuous current rating: Nominal continuous operating voltage: 48V
Not less than the continuous input current rating of the drive Maximum continuous operating voltage: 60V
Repetitive peak current rating: Braking IGBT turn on voltage: 66V
Not less than twice the continuous input current rating of the drive Over voltage trip threshold: 72V
For application data, refer to the Unidrive SP 48V Application Note.

4.6 Ratings Table 4-2 Input current, fuse and cable size ratings (USA)
The input current is affected by the supply voltage and impedance. Typical Maximum Fuse Cable size
input continuous rating UL508C
Typical input current Model
current input current Input Output
The values of typical input current are given to aid calculations for power A A A AWG AWG
flow and power loss.
SP1201 7.1 9.5 10 14 18
The values of typical input current are stated for a balanced supply.
SP1202 9.2 11.3 15 14 16
Maximum continuous input current
SP1203 12.5 16.4 20 12 14
The values of maximum continuous input current are given to aid the
SP1204 15.4 19.1 20 12 14
selection of cables and fuses. These values are stated for the worst case
condition with the unusual combination of stiff supply with bad balance. SP2201 13.4 18.1 20 12 14
The value stated for the maximum continuous input current would only SP2202 18.2 22.6 25 10 10
be seen in one of the input phases. The current in the other two phases SP2203 24.2 28.3 30 8.0 8.0
would be significantly lower. SP3201 35.4 43.1 45 6.0 6.0
The values of maximum input current are stated for a supply with a 2% SP3202 46.8 54.3 60 4.0 4.0
negative phase-sequence imbalance and rated at the maximum supply
SP1401 4.1 4.8 6.0 18 22
fault current given in Table 4-1 and Table 4-2.
SP1402 5.1 5.8 6.0 16 20
Table 4-1 Input current, fuse and cable size ratings (European) SP1403 6.8 7.4 10 16 18
Typical Maximum Fuse Cable size SP1404 9.3 10.6 15 14 16
input continuous rating EN60204 SP1405 10 11 15 14 14
Model
current input current IEC gG Input Output SP1406 12.6 13.4 15 14 14
A A A mm 2
mm2 SP2401 15.7 17 20 12 14
SP1201 7.1 9.5 10 1.5 1.0 SP2402 20.2 21.4 25 10 10
SP1202 9.2 11.3 12 1.5 1.0 SP2403 26.6 27.6 30 8.0 8.0
SP1203 12.5 16.4 20 4.0 1.0 SP3401 34.2 36.2 40 6.0 6.0
SP1204 15.4 19.1 20 4.0 1.5 SP3402 40.2 42.7 45 6.0 6.0
SP2201 13.4 18.1 20 4.0 2.5 SP3403 51.3 53.5 60 4.0 4.0
SP2202 18.2 22.6 25 4.0 4.0 SP3501 5.0 6.7 10 16 18
SP2203 24.2 28.3 32 6.0 6.0 SP3502 6.0 8.2 10 16 16
SP3201 35.4 43.1 50 16 16 SP3503 7.8 11.1 15 14 14
SP3202 46.8 54.3 63 25 25 SP3504 9.9 14.4 15 14 14
SP1401 4.1 4.8 6 1.0 1.0 SP3505 13.8 18.1 20 12 14
SP1402 5.1 5.8 6 1.0 1.0 SP3506 18.2 22.2 25 10 10
SP1403 6.8 7.4 8 1.0 1.0 SP3507 22.2 26.0 30 8.0 8.0
SP1404 9.3 10.6 12 1.5 1.0 The recommended cable sizes above are only a guide. Refer to local
SP1405 10 11 12 1.5 1.0 wiring regulations for the correct size of cables. In some cases a larger
SP1406 12.6 13.4 16 2.5 1.5 cable is required to avoid excessive voltage drop.
SP2401 15.7 17 20 4.0 2.5 NOTE N
SP2402 20.2 21.4 25 4.0 4.0 The recommended output cable sizes assume that the motor maximum
SP2403 26.6 27.6 32 6.0 6.0 current matches that of the drive. Where a motor of reduced rating is
SP3401 34.2 36.2 40 10 10 used the cable rating may be chosen to match that of the motor. To
ensure that the motor and cable are protected against over-load, the
SP3402 40.2 42.7 50 16 16
drive must be programmed with the correct motor rated current.
SP3403 51.3 53.5 63 25 25
SP3501 5.0 6.7 8 1.0 1.0 NOTE N
SP3502 6.0 8.2 10 1.0 1.0 UL listing is dependent on the use of the correct type of UL-listed fuse,
and applies when symmetrical short-circuit current does not exceed 5kA
SP3503 7.8 11.1 12 1.5 1.0
for sizes 1 to 3.
SP3504 9.9 14.4 16 2.5 1.5
Fuses
SP3505 13.8 18.1 20 4.0 2.5
The AC supply to the drive must be fitted with suitable
SP3506 18.2 22.2 25 4.0 4.0 protection against overload and short-circuits. Table 4-1
SP3507 22.2 26.0 32 6.0 6.0 shows recommended fuse ratings. Failure to observe this
WARNING requirement will cause risk of fire.
A fuse or other protection must be included in all live connections to the
AC supply.
An MCB (miniature circuit breaker) or MCCB (moulded-case circuit-
breaker) with type C may be used in place of fuses under the following
conditions:
• The fault-clearing capacity must be sufficient for the installation
• For frame sizes 2 and above, the drive must be mounted in an
enclosure which meets the requirements for a fire enclosure
See Chapter 14 UL Listing Information for UL listing requirements.

Fuse Types Table 4-4 Maximum motor cable lengths (400V drives)
The fuse voltage rating must be suitable for the drive supply voltage.
400V Nominal AC supply voltage
• Europe: Type gG HRC industrial fuses to IEC60269 (BS88)
• USA: Class CC fuses up to 30A, Class J above 30A Maximum permissible motor cable length for each of
Model the following frequencies
Ground connections
3kHz 4kHz 6kHz 8kHz 12kHz 16kHz
The drive must be connected to the system ground of the AC supply.
The ground wiring must conform to local regulations and codes of SP1401 65m (210ft)
practice. SP1402 100m (330ft)
SP1403 130m (425ft)
4.6.1 Main AC supply contactor
SP1404
The recommended AC supply contactor type for sizes 1 to 3 is AC1.
SP1405
37m
4.7 Output circuit and motor protection SP1406 50m
(120ft)
75m
The output circuit has fast-acting electronic short-circuit protection which SP2401 100m (165ft)
200m 150m (245ft)
limits the fault current to typically no more than five times the rated SP2402 (330ft)
(660ft) (490ft)
output current, and interrupts the current in approximately 20µs. No SP2403
additional short-circuit protection devices are required. SP3401
The drive provides overload protection for the motor and its cable. For SP3402
this to be effective, Pr 0.46 Motor rated current must be set to suit the SP3403
motor.
Table 4-5 Maximum motor cable lengths (575V drives)
Pr 0.46 Motor rated current must be set correctly to avoid a 575V Nominal AC supply voltage
risk of fire in the event of motor overload. Maximum permissible motor cable length for each of
WARNING Model the following frequencies
There is also provision for the use of a motor thermistor to prevent over- 3kHz 4kHz 6kHz 8kHz 12kHz 16kHz
heating of the motor, e.g. due to loss of cooling. SP3501
4.7.1 Cable types and lengths SP3502
Since capacitance in the motor cable causes loading on the output of the SP3503
drive, ensure the cable length does not exceed the values given in Table 200m 150m 100m 75m 50m
SP3504
4-3, Table 4-4 and Table 4-5. (660ft) (490ft) (330ft) (245ft) (165ft)
SP3505
Use 105°C (221°F) (UL 60/75°C temp rise) PVC-insulated cable with SP3506
copper conductors having a suitable voltage rating, for the following
SP3507
power connections:
• AC supply to external EMC filter (when used) • Cable lengths in excess of the specified values may be used only
• AC supply (or external EMC filter) to drive when special techniques are adopted; refer to the supplier of the
• Drive to motor drive.
• Drive to braking resistor • The default switching frequency is 3kHz for open-loop and closed-
loop vector and 6kHz for servo.
Table 4-3 Maximum motor cable lengths (200V drives) High-capacitance cables
200V Nominal AC supply voltage The maximum cable length is reduced from that shown in Table 4-3,
Maximum permissible motor cable length for each of Table 4-4 and Table 4-5 if high capacitance motor cables are used.
Model the following frequencies Most cables have an insulating jacket between the cores and the armour
3kHz 4kHz 6kHz 8kHz 12kHz 16kHz or shield; these cables have a low capacitance and are recommended.
Cables that do not have an insulating jacket tend to have high
SP1201 65m (210ft) capacitance; if a cable of this type is used, the maximum cable length is
SP1202 100m (330ft) half that quoted in the tables. (Figure 4-6 shows how to identify the two
SP1203 130m (425ft) types.)
37m
SP1204 Figure 4-6 Cable construction influencing the capacitance
50m (120ft)
SP2201 75m
100m (165ft)
SP2202 200m 150m (245ft)
(330ft)
SP2203 (660ft) (490ft)
SP3201
SP3202
Normal capacitance High capacitance
Shield or armour Shield or armour close
separated from the cores to the cores
The cable used for Table 4-3, Table 4-4 and Table 4-5 is shielded and
contains four cores. Typical capacitance for this type of cable is 130pF/m
(i.e. from one core to all others and the shield connected together).

4.7.2 Motor winding voltage Figure 4-8 Alternative connection for multiple motors
The PWM output voltage can adversely affect the inter-turn insulation in
the motor. This is because of the high rate of change of voltage, in
Motor protection
conjunction with the impedance of the motor cable and the distributed relay
nature of the motor winding.
For normal operation with AC supplies up to 500Vac and a standard
motor with a good quality insulation system, there is no need for any
special precautions. In case of doubt the motor supplier should be
consulted.
Special precautions are recommended under the following conditions,
but only if the motor cable length exceeds 10m: Star connection
• AC supply voltage exceeds 500V
• DC supply voltage exceeds 670V
• Operation of 400V drive with continuous or very frequent sustained Inductor
braking
• Multiple motors connected to a single drive
For multiple motors, the precautions given in section 4.7.3 Multiple
motors should be followed.
For the other cases listed, it is recommended that an inverter-rated
motor be used. This has a reinforced insulation system intended by the
manufacturer for repetitive fast-rising pulsed voltage operation.
If it is not practical to use an inverter-rated motor, an output choke
(inductor) should be used. The recommended type is a simple iron-cored
component with a reactance of about 2%. The exact value is not critical.
This operates in conjunction with the capacitance of the motor cable to
increase the rise-time of the motor terminal voltage and prevent 4.7.4 Star / delta motor operation
excessive electrical stress. The voltage rating for star and delta connections of the motor should
4.7.3 Multiple motors always be checked before attempting to run the motor.
Open-loop only The default setting of the motor rated voltage parameter is the same as
If the drive is to control more than one motor, one of the fixed V/F modes the drive rated voltage, i.e.
should be selected (Pr 5.14 = Fd or SrE). Make the motor connections 400V drive 400V rated voltage
as shown in Figure 4-7 and Figure 4-8. The maximum cable lengths in 200V drive 200V rated voltage
Table 4-3 , Table 4-4 and Table 4-5 apply to the sum of the total cable
lengths from the drive to each motor. A typical 3 phase motor would be connected in star for 400V operation
It is recommended that each motor is connected through a protection or delta for 200V operation, however, variations on this are common e.g.
relay since the drive cannot protect each motor individually. For star star 690V delta 400V
connection, a sinusoidal filter or an output inductor must be connected Incorrect connection of the windings will cause severe under or over
as shown in Figure 4-8, even when the cable lengths are less than the fluxing of the motor, leading to a very poor output torque or motor
maximum permissible. For details of inductor sizes refer to the supplier saturation and overheating respectively.
of the drive. 4.7.5 Output contactor
Figure 4-7 Preferred chain connection for multiple motors
If the cable between the drive and the motor is to be
Motor protection interrupted by a contactor or circuit breaker, ensure that the
relay drive is disabled before the contactor or circuit breaker is
opened or closed. Severe arcing may occur if this circuit is
WARNING interrupted with the motor running at high current and low
speed.
A contactor is sometimes required to be fitted between the drive and
motor for safety purposes.
The recommended motor contactor is the AC3 type.
Chain connection (preferred) Switching of an output contactor should only occur when the output of
the drive is disabled.
Opening or closing of the contactor with the drive enabled will lead to:
1. OI.AC trips (which cannot be reset for 10 seconds)
2. High levels of radio frequency noise emission
3. Increased contactor wear and tear
The Drive Enable terminal (T31) when opened provides a SECURE
DISABLE function. This can in many cases replace output contactors.
For further information see section 4.14 SECURE DISABLE on page 59.

4.8 Braking Table 4-6 Heatsink mounted braking resistor data

Braking occurs when the drive is decelerating the motor, or is preventing Parameter Size 1 Size 2
the motor from gaining speed due to mechanical influences. During
Part number 1220-2757-00 1220-2759-01
braking, energy is returned to the drive from the motor.
DC resistance at 25°C 75Ω 37.5Ω
When the motor is being braked by the drive, the maximum regenerated
Peak instantaneous power over
power that the drive can absorb is equal to the power dissipation 8kW 16kW
1ms at nominal resistance
(losses) of the drive.
Average power over 60s * 50W 100W
When the regenerated power is likely to exceed these losses, the DC
bus voltage of the drive increases. Under default conditions, the drive Ingress Protection (IP) rating IP40
brakes the motor under PI control, which extends the deceleration time Maximum altitude 2000m
as necessary in order to prevent the DC bus voltage from rising above a * To keep the temperature of the resistor below 70°C (158°F) in a 30°C
user defined set-point. (86°F) ambient, the average power rating is 50W for size 1 and 100W for
If the drive is expected to rapidly decelerate a load, or to hold back an size 2. The above parameter settings ensure this is the case.
overhauling load, a braking resistor must be fitted. Unidrive SP size 3 does not have a heatsink mounted braking resistor,
NOTE N however the braking resistor overload protection is enabled at default in
case a low power resistor is connected to the drive.
When a braking resistor is used, Pr 0.15 should be set to FASt ramp
mode. 4.8.2 External braking resistor
High temperatures Overload protection

Braking resistors can reach high temperatures. Locate When an external braking resistor is used, it is essential that
braking resistors so that damage cannot result. Use cable an overload protection device is incorporated in the braking
WARNING
having insulation capable of withstanding high temperatures. resistor circuit; this is described in Figure 4-9 on page 44.
WARNING
When a braking resistor is to be mounted outside the enclosure, ensure

4.8.1 Heatsink mounted braking resistor that it is mounted in a ventilated metal housing that will perform the
following functions:
A resistor has been especially designed to be mounted within the
heatsink of the Unidrive SP (sizes 1 and 2). See section 3.11 Heatsink • Prevent inadvertent contact with the resistor
mounted braking resistor on page 31 for mounting details. The design of • Allow adequate ventilation for the resistor
the resistor is such that no thermal protection circuit is required, as the When compliance with EMC emission standards is required, external
device will fail safely under fault conditions. On Unidrive SP sizes 1 and connection requires the cable to be armoured or shielded, since it is not
2, the in built software overload protection is set up at default for the fully contained in a metal enclosure. See section 4.10.5 Compliance with
designated heatsink mounted resistor. Table 4.7 provides the resistor generic emission standards on page 49 for further details.
data for each drive rating.
Internal connection does not require the cable to be armoured or
NOTE N shielded.
The heatsink mounted resistor is suitable for applications with a low level In-built in the Unidrive SP software is overload protection for the brake
of regen energy only. See power rating below. resistor. In order to enable and set-up this function, it is necessary to
enter two values into the drive:
Braking resistor overload protection parameter • Resistor short-time overload time (Pr 10.30)
settings
• Resistor minimum time between repeated short-time overloads
Failure to observe the following information may (Pr 10.31)
damage the resistor.
CAUTION
The Unidrive SP software contains an overload protection This data should be obtained from the manufacturer of the braking
function for a braking resistor. On Unidrive SP size 1 and 2 resistors.
this function is enabled at default to protect the heatsink The drive's braking resistor overload protection is set up by default to
mounted resistor. This function is also enabled on Unidrive protect the designated heatsink mounted resistor or a low power resistor
SP size 3 in case a low power resistor is connected to the that maybe connected to the drive. If a higher power resistor is being
drive. Below are the parameter settings. used, then the above parameters should be set correctly or set to 0 if
575V & external thermal overload protection is being used, otherwise premature
Parameter 200V drive 400V drive It.br trips may be seen.
690V drive
Full power
Pr 10.30 0.09 0.02 0.01
braking time
Full power
Pr 10.31 2.0
braking period
For more information on the braking resistor software

overload protection, see Pr 10.30 and Pr 10.31 full
descriptions in the Unidrive SP Advanced User Guide.
If the heatsink mounted braking resistor is to be used at
more than half of its average power rating then the drive's
cooling fan must be at full speed controlled by setting
Pr 6.45 to On (1).

Minimum resistances and power ratings Thermal protection circuit for the braking resistor
Table 4-7 Minimum resistance values and peak power rating for The thermal protection circuit must disconnect the AC supply from the
the braking resistor at 40°C (104°F) drive if the resistor becomes overloaded due to a fault. Figure 4-9 shows
a typical circuit arrangement.
Minimum Instantaneous Average power
Model resistance* power rating for 60s Figure 4-9 Typical protection circuit for a braking resistor
Ω kW W
SP1201 1.5 Optional
RFI filter
SP1202 43 3.5 2.2
SP1203 3.0
SP1204 29 5.3 4.4
SP2201 6.0
Main contactor
SP2202 18 8.9 8.0 power supply
SP2203 8.9 Drive
SP3201 13.1 Stop
5.0 30.3
SP3202 19.3
SP1401 1.5 Start / Thermal
Reset protection
SP1402 2.2 device
74 8.3 +DC
SP1403 3.0
SP1404 4.4 BR
SP1405 6.0
58 10.6 Braking resistor
SP1406 8.0
SP2401 9.6 See Figure 4-1 on page 36, Figure 4-2 and Figure 4-3 on page 37 for the
SP2402 19 33.1 13.1 location of the +DC and braking resistor connections.
SP2403 19.3
SP3401 22.5
4.9 Ground leakage
SP3402 18 35.5 27.8 The ground leakage current depends upon whether the internal EMC
filter is fitted. The drive is supplied with the filter fitted. Instructions for
SP3403 33.0
removing the internal filter are given in Figure 4-13 Removal of internal
SP3501 4.4 EMC filter on page 46.
SP3502 6.0 With internal filter fitted:
SP3503 8.0 28mA AC at 400V 50Hz (proportional to supply voltage and
SP3504 18 50.7 9.6 frequency)
SP3505 13.1 30µA DC (10MΩ)
SP3506 19.3 With internal filter removed:
SP3507 22.5 <1mA
Note that in both cases there is an internal voltage surge protection
* Resistor tolerance: ±10% device connected to ground. Under normal circumstances this carries
For high-inertia loads or under continuous braking, the continuous power negligible current.
dissipated in the braking resistor may be as high as the power rating of
the drive. The total energy dissipated in the braking resistor is dependent When the internal filter is fitted the leakage current is high. In
on the amount of energy to be extracted from the load. this case a permanent fixed ground connection must be
The instantaneous power rating refers to the short-term maximum power provided, or other suitable measures taken to prevent a
dissipated during the on intervals of the pulse width modulated braking WARNING
safety hazard occurring if the connection is lost.
control cycle. The braking resistor must be able to withstand this
dissipation for short intervals (milliseconds). Higher resistance values 4.9.1 Use of residual current device (RCD)
require proportionately lower instantaneous power ratings. There are three common types of ELCB / RCD:
In most applications, braking occurs only occasionally. This allows the 1. AC - detects AC fault currents
continuous power rating of the braking resistor to be much lower than 2. A - detects AC and pulsating DC fault currents (provided the DC
the power rating of the drive. It is essential, though, that the current reaches zero at least once every half cycle)
instantaneous power rating and energy rating of the braking resistor are
3. B - detects AC, pulsating DC and smooth DC fault currents
sufficient for the most extreme braking duty that is likely to be
encountered. • Type AC should never be used with drives.
• Type A can only be used with single phase drives
Optimisation of the braking resistor requires a careful consideration of • Type B must be used with three phase drives
the braking duty.
Select a value of resistance for the braking resistor that is not less than
the specified minimum resistance. Larger resistance values may give a Only type B ELCB / RCD are suitable for use with inverter
cost saving, as well as a safety benefit in the event of a fault in the drives.
braking system. Braking capability will then be reduced, which could
WARNING
cause the drive to trip during braking if the value chosen is too large.
If an external EMC filter is used, a delay of at least 50ms should be
incorporated to ensure spurious trips are not seen. The leakage current
is likely to exceed the trip level if all of the phases are not energised
simultaneously.

4.10 EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility) See Figure 4-10 and Figure 4-11 for details on fitting the grounding
clamp.
The requirements for EMC are divided into three levels in the following
three sections: See Figure 4-12 for details on fitting the grounding bracket.
Section 4.10.3, General requirements for all applications, to ensure Figure 4-10 Fitting of grounding clamp (size 1 and 2)
reliable operation of the drive and minimise the risk of disturbing nearby
equipment. The immunity standards specified in section 11 will be met,
but no specific emission standards. Note also the special requirements
given in Surge immunity of control circuits - long cables and connections
outside a building on page 51 for increased surge immunity of control
circuits where control wiring is extended.
Section 4.10.4, Requirements for meeting the EMC standard for
power drive systems, IEC61800-3 (EN61800-3).
Section 4.10.5, Requirements for meeting the generic emission
standards for the industrial environment, IEC61000-6-4, EN61000-6-4,
EN50081-2.
The recommendations of section 4.10.3 will usually be sufficient to avoid
causing disturbance to adjacent equipment of industrial quality. If
particularly sensitive equipment is to be used nearby, or in a non-
industrial environment, then the recommendations of section 4.10.4 or
section 4.10.5 should be followed to give reduced radio-frequency
emission.
In order to ensure the installation meets the various emission standards
described in:
• The EMC data sheet available from the supplier of the drive
• The Declaration of Conformity at the front of this manual
• Chapter 12 Technical Data on page 186 Figure 4-11 Fitting of grounding clamp (size 3)
...the correct external EMC filter must be used and all of the guidelines in
section 4.10.3 General requirements for EMC and section
4.10.5 Compliance with generic emission standards must be followed.
Table 4-8 Unidrive SP and EMC filter cross reference

Schaffner Epcos
Drive
CT part no. CT part no.
SP1201 to SP1202 4200-6118 4200-6121
SP1203 to SP1204 4200-6119 4200-6120
SP2201 to SP2203 4200-6210 4200-6211
SP3201 to SP3202 4200-6307 4200-6306
SP1401 to SP1404 4200-6118 4200-6121
SP1405 to SP1406 4200-6119 4200-6120
SP2401 to SP2403 4200-6210 4200-6211
SP3401 to SP3403 4200-6305 4200-6306
SP3501 to SP3507 4200-6309 4200-6308 Figure 4-12 Fitting of grounding bracket (size 1 to 3)
When an EMC filter is used, a permanent fixed ground

connection must be provided which does not pass through a
connector or flexible power cord. This includes the internal
WARNING
EMC filter.
NOTE N
The installer of the drive is responsible for ensuring compliance with the
EMC regulations that apply where the drive is to be used.
4.10.1 Grounding hardware

The Unidrive SP is supplied with a grounding clamp and a grounding
bracket to facilitate EMC compliance. They provide a convenient method
for direct grounding of cable shields without the use of "pig-tails". Cable
shields can be bared and clamped to the grounding bracket using metal
clips or clamps1 (not supplied) or cable ties. Note that the shield must in
all cases be continued through the clamp to the intended terminal on the
drive, in accordance with the connection details for the specific signal.
1
A suitable clamp is the Phoenix DIN rail mounted SK14 cable clamp
(for cables with a maximum outer diameter of 14mm).

Loosen the earth connection nuts and slide the grounding bracket in the
direction shown. Once in place, re-tighten the earth connection nuts.
The grounding bracket is secured using the power ground
terminal of the drive. Ensure that the supply ground
connection is secure after fitting / removing the grounding
bracket. Failure to do so will result in the drive not being
WARNING grounded.
A faston tab is located on the grounding bracket for the purpose of
connecting the drive 0V to ground should the user require to do so.
4.10.2 Internal EMC filter
It is recommended that the internal EMC filter be kept in place unless
there is a specific reason for removing it.
If the drive is used on an IT supply or as part of a regen system then the
internal EMC filter must be removed.
The internal EMC filter reduces radio-frequency emission into the mains
supply. Where the motor cable is short, it permits the requirements of
EN61800-3 to be met for the second environment - see section
4.10.4 Compliance with EN61800-3 (standard for Power Drive Systems)
on page 49 and section 12.1.21 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) on
page 195. For longer motor cables the filter continues to provide a useful
reduction in emission level, and when used with any length of shielded
motor cable up to the limit for the drive, it is unlikely that nearby industrial
equipment will be disturbed. It is recommended that the filter be used in
all applications unless the earth leakage current of 28mA is
unacceptable or the above conditions are true. See Figure 4-13 for
details of removing and fitting the internal EMC filter.
Figure 4-13 Removal of internal EMC filter
1
2
3
Loosen / remove screws as shown (1) and (2).

Remove filter (3), and ensure the screws are replaced and re-tightened (4).

4.10.3 General requirements for EMC

Ground (earth) connections
The grounding arrangements should be in accordance with Figure 4-14,
which shows a single drive on a back-plate with or without an additional
enclosure.
Figure 4-14 General EMC enclosure layout showing earth / ground
If ground connections are

made using a separate
cable, they should run
parallel to the appropriate
power cable to minimise
emissions
Metal backplate
Optional EMC
filter
If the control circuit 0V

is to be grounded, this External
should be done at the controller
system controller only to 0V PE
avoid injecting noise
currents into the 0V circuit
3 phase AC supply ~
PE
Grounding bar
The incoming supply ground
should be connected to a
single power ground bus bar
or low impedance earth
terminal inside the cubicle. Use four core cable to
This should be used as a Metal backplate connect the motor to the drive.
common 'clean' ground for all safety bonded to The ground conductor in the
components inside the cubicle. power ground busbar motor cable must be connected
directly to the earth terminal of
the drive and motor.
It must not be connected directly
to the power earth busbar.
Optional
ground
connection

Cable layout helpful to connect the shield there. If this is done then it becomes
Figure 4-15 indicates the clearances which should be observed around essential to ensure the absolute minimum length of "pigtails" at both
the drive and related ‘noisy’ power cables by all sensitive control signals shield connections, and possibly to clamp the cable shield directly to
/ equipment. the resolver body and to the drive grounding bracket.
Figure 4-15 Drive cable clearances • The cable should preferably not be interrupted. If interruptions are
unavoidable, ensure the absolute minimum length of "pigtail" in the
Optional braking resistor and overload
shield connections at each interruption.
Encoder connections:
• Use a cable with the correct impedance
• Use a cable with individually shielded twisted pairs
• Connect the cable shields to 0V at both the drive and the encoder,
using the shortest possible links ("pigtails")
• The cable should preferably not be interrupted. If interruptions are
unavoidable, ensure the absolute minimum length of "pigtail" in the
shield connections at each interruption. Preferably, use a connection
method which provides substantial metallic clamps for the cable
shield terminations.
The above applies where the encoder body is isolated from the motor
and where the encoder circuit is isolated from the encoder body. Where
there is no isolation between the encoder circuits and the motor body,
and in case of doubt, the following additional requirement must be
observed. This gives the best possible noise immunity.
• The shields must be directly clamped to the encoder body (no
pigtail) and to the drive grounding bracket. This may be achieved by
clamping of the individual shields or by providing an additional
overall shield which is clamped.
Do not place sensitive
(unscreened) signal circuits NOTE N
in a zone extending
300mm (12”) all around the
The recommendations of the encoder manufacturer must also be
Drive, motor cable, input adhered to for the encoder connections.
cable from RFI filter and
unscreened braking resistor NOTE N
cable (if used)
In order to guarantee maximum noise immunity for any application
double screened cable as shown should be used.
In some cases single shielding of each pair of differential signals cables,
or a single overall shield with individual shield on the thermistor
connections is sufficient. In these cases all the shields should be
connected to ground and 0V at both ends.
300mm If the 0V is required to be left floating a cable with individual shields and
(12in)
an overall shield must be used.
Figure 4-16 and Figure 4-17 illustrate the preferred construction of cable
and the method of clamping. The outer sheath of the cable should be
stripped back enough to allow the clamp to be fitted. The shield must not
be broken or opened at this point. The clamps should be fitted close to
the drive or feedback device, with the ground connections made to a
ground plate or similar metallic ground surface.
Figure 4-16 Feedback cable, twisted pair
Cable overall shield
Feedback device cable shielding
Shielding considerations are important for PWM drive installations due to
the high voltages and currents present in the output (motor) circuit with a
very wide frequency spectrum, typically from 0 to 20 MHz. Twisted
The following guidance is divided into two parts: pair Cable
cable
1. Ensuring correct transfer of data without disturbance from electrical
noise originating either within the drive or from outside.
2. Additional measures to prevent unwanted emission of radio
frequency noise. These are optional and only required where the Twisted pair shield
installation is subject to specific requirements for radio frequency
emission control.
To ensure correct transfer of data, observe the following:
Resolver connections:
• Use a cable with an overall shield and twisted pairs for the resolver
signals
• Connect the cable shield to the drive 0V connection by the shortest
possible link ("pigtail")
• It is generally preferable not to connect the cable shield to the
resolver. However in cases where there is an exceptional level of
common-mode noise voltage present on the resolver body, it may be

Figure 4-17 Feedback cable connections Size 2 and 3

Connection
With the internal filter fitted, compliance can be achieved for cable
at drive lengths up to 10m, by fitting a ferrite ring, part no. 4200-0000, 4200-0001
or 4200-3608, to the drive output. Feed the motor cables (U,V,W)
Shield through the ring once.
connection
to 0V For longer motor cables, an external filter is required. Where a filter is
required, follow the guidelines in section 4.10.5 Compliance with generic
emission standards .
Twisted
pair Where a filter is not required, follow the guidelines given in section
Cable
shield shield 4.10.3 General requirements for EMC on page 47.
The second environment typically includes an industrial low-
voltage power supply network which does not supply
buildings used for domestic purposes. Operating the drive in
this environment without an external EMC filter may cause
CAUTION interference to nearby electronic equipment whose sensitivity
has not been appreciated. The user must take remedial
Ground clamp measures if this situation arises. If the consequences of
Cable
on shield unexpected disturbances are severe, it is recommended that
the guidelines in section 4.10.5 Compliance with generic
emission standards be adhered to.
Refer to section 12.1.21 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) on

page 195 for further information on compliance with EMC standards and
definitions of environments.
Cable Detailed instructions and EMC information are given in the Unidrive SP
Twisted
shield pair EMC Data Sheet which is available from the supplier of the drive.
shield
4.10.5 Compliance with generic emission standards
Use the recommended filter and shielded motor cable. Observe the
Shield layout rules given in Figure 4-18. Ensure the AC supply and ground
connection cables are at least 100mm from the power module and motor cable.
to 0V
Figure 4-18 Supply and ground cable clearance
Connection
at motor
To ensure suppression of radio frequency emission,

observe the following:
• Use a cable with an overall shield
• Clamp the overall shield to grounded metallic surfaces at both the
encoder and the drive, as illustrated in Figure 4-17
4.10.4 Compliance with EN61800-3 (standard for ≥100mm
Power Drive Systems) (4in)
Meeting the requirements of this standard depends on the environment
that the drive is intended to operate in, as follows:
Operation in the first environment
Observe the guidelines given in section 4.10.5 Compliance with generic
emission standards on page 49. An external EMC filter will always be
required.
This is a product of the restricted distribution class according

to IEC61800-3
In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take ≥100mm
CAUTION
adequate measures. (4in)
Operation in the second environment
Do not modify
An EMC filter is required for all Unidrive SPs with a rated input current of the filter wires
less than 100A.
Size 1
The internal filter alone is sufficient provided the motor cable length does
not exceed 4m.
For cable lengths up to 10m compliance can be maintained by fitting a
ferrite ring, part no. 4200-0000, 4200-0001 or 4200-3608, to the drive
output. Feed the motor cables (U,V,W) through the ring once.

Avoid placing sensitive signal circuits in a zone 300mm (12in) all around Connect the shield of the motor cable to the ground terminal of the motor
the power module. frame using a link that is as short as possible and not exceeding 50mm
Figure 4-19 Sensitive signal circuit clearance (2in) long. A full 360° termination of the shield to the terminal housing of
the motor is beneficial.
Figure 4-21 Grounding the motor cable shield
≥300mm
(12in)
Sensitive
signal
cable
Unshielded wiring to the optional braking resistor(s) may be used,

provided the wiring does not run external to the enclosure. Ensure a
minimum spacing of 300mm (12in) from signal wiring and the AC supply
wiring to the external EMC filter. Otherwise this wiring must be shielded.
Figure 4-22 Shielding requirements of optional external braking
resistor
Ensure good EMC grounding.
Optional external
Figure 4-20 Grounding the drive, motor cable shield and filter braking resistor
Optional external
braking resistor
Enclosure Enclosure
+DC BR +DC BR
OR
Ensure direct
metal contact
at drive and
filter mounting
points (any
paint must be
removed).
Motor cable screen

(unbroken) electrically
connected to and held
in place by grounding
clamp.

If the control wiring is to leave the enclosure, it must be shielded and the Figure 4-24 Connecting the motor cable to a terminal block in the
shield(s) clamped to the drive using the grounding bracket as shown in enclosure
Figure 4-23. Remove the outer insulating cover of the cable to ensure
the shield(s) make contact with the bracket, but keep the shield(s) intact From the Drive
until as close as possible to the terminals
Alternatively, wiring may be passed through a ferrite ring, part no. 3225-
1004.
Figure 4-23 Grounding of signal cable shields using the
grounding bracket
Back-plate
Enclosure
To the motor
Using a motor isolator-switch

The motor cable shields should be connected by a very short conductor
having a low inductance. The use of a flat metal coupling-bar is
recommended; conventional wire is not suitable.
The shields should be bonded directly to the coupling-bar using
uninsulated metal cable-clamps. Keep the length of the exposed power
conductors to a minimum and ensure that all sensitive equipment and
circuits are at least 0.3m (12 in) away.
The coupling-bar may be grounded to a known low-impedance ground
nearby, for example a large metallic structure which is connected closely
to the drive ground.
Figure 4-25 Connecting the motor cable to an isolator switch
Isolator
4.10.6 Variations in the EMC wiring

Interruptions to the motor cable
The motor cable should ideally be a single length of shielded or From the To the
armoured cable having no interruptions. In some situations it may be Drive
Coupling bar
motor
necessary to interrupt the cable, as in the following examples:
(If required)
• Connecting the motor cable to a terminal block in the drive enclosure
• Fitting a motor isolator switch for safety when work is done on the Surge immunity of control circuits - long cables and
motor connections outside a building
In these cases the following guidelines should be followed. The input/output ports for the control circuits are designed for general
use within machines and small systems without any special precautions.
Terminal block in the enclosure
The motor cable shields should be bonded to the back-plate using These circuits meet the requirements of EN61000-6-2 (1kV surge)
uninsulated metal cable-clamps which should be positioned as close as provided the 0V connection is not earthed.
possible to the terminal block. Keep the length of power conductors to a In applications where they may be exposed to high-energy voltage
minimum and ensure that all sensitive equipment and circuits are at surges, some special measures may be required to prevent malfunction
least 0.3m (12 in) away from the terminal block. or damage. Surges may be caused by lightning or severe power faults in
association with grounding arrangements which permit high transient
voltages between nominally grounded points. This is a particular risk
where the circuits extend outside the protection of a building.
As a general rule, if the circuits are to pass outside the building where
the drive is located, or if cable runs within a building exceed 30m, some
additional precautions are advisable. One of the following techniques
should be used:
1. Galvanic isolation, i.e. do not connect the control 0V terminal to
ground. Avoid loops in the control wiring, i.e. ensure every control
wire is accompanied by its return (0V) wire.
2. Shielded cable with additional power ground bonding. The cable
shield may be connected to ground at both ends, but in addition the
ground conductors at both ends of the cable must be bonded
together by a power ground cable (equipotential bonding cable) with

cross-sectional area of at least 10mm2, or 10 times the area of the 4.11 Serial communications connections
signal cable shield, or to suit the electrical safety requirements of the
The Unidrive SP has a serial communications port (serial port) as
plant. This ensures that fault or surge current passes mainly through
standard supporting 2 wire EIA485 communications. Please see Table
the ground cable and not in the signal cable shield. If the building or
4-9 for the connection details for the RJ45 connector.
plant has a well-designed common bonded network this precaution
is not necessary. Figure 4-28 Location of the RJ45 serial comms connector
3. Additional over-voltage suppression - for the analog and digital
inputs and outputs, a zener diode network or a commercially
available surge suppressor may be connected in parallel with the
input circuit as shown in Figure 4-26 and Figure 4-27.
If a digital port experiences a severe surge its protective trip may operate
1
(O.Ld1 trip code 26). For continued operation after such an event, the
trip can be reset automatically by setting Pr 10.34 to 5.
8
Figure 4-26 Surge suppression for digital and unipolar inputs and
outputs
Signal from plant Signal to drive
30V zener diode

e.g. 2xBZW50-15
0V 0V
Figure 4-27 Surge suppression for analog and bipolar inputs and
outputs
Signal from plant Signal to drive
Table 4-9 Connection details for RJ45 connector

Pin Function
2 x 15V zener diode
e.g. 2xBZW50-15 1 120Ω Termination resistor
2 RX TX
3 Isolated 0V
0V 0V 4 +24V
5 Isolated 0V
Surge suppression devices are available as rail-mounting modules, e.g.
6 TX enable
from Phoenix Contact:
7 RX\ TX\
Unipolar TT-UKK5-D/24 DC
Bipolar TT-UKK5-D/24 AC RX\ TX\ (if termination resistors are required, link to
8
pin 1)
These devices are not suitable for encoder signals or fast digital data
Shell Isolated 0V
networks because the capacitance of the diodes adversely affects the
signal. Most encoders have galvanic isolation of the signal circuit from The communications port applies a 2 unit load to the communications
the motor frame, in which case no precautions are required. For data network.
networks, follow the specific recommendations for the particular Minimum number of connections are 2, 3, 7 and shield. Shielded cable
network. must be used at all times.
4.11.1 Isolation of the serial communications port

The serial communications port of the Unidrive SP is double insulated
and meets the requirements for SELV in EN50178.
In order to meet the requirements for SELV in IEC60950 (IT

equipment) it is necessary for the control computer to be
grounded. Alternatively, when a lap-top or similar device is
used which has no provision for grounding, an isolation
WARNING device must be incorporated in the communications lead.
An isolated serial communications lead has been designed to connect

the Unidrive SP to IT equipment (such as lap-top computers), and is
available from the supplier of the drive. See below for details:
Table 4-10 Isolated serial comms lead details
Part number Description
4500-0087 CT Comms cable
The “isolated serial communications” lead has reinforced insulation as
defined in IEC60950 for altitudes up to 3,000m.
NOTE N
When using the CT Comms cable the available baud rate is limited to
19.2k baud.

4.11.2 Multi-drop network All digital terminal functions (including the relay) can be programmed in
The Unidrive SP can be used on a 2 wire EIA485 multi-drop network menu 8.
using the drive's serial communications port when the following The setting of Pr 1.14 and Pr 6.04 can cause the function of digital inputs
guidelines are adhered to. T25 to T29 to change. For more information, please refer to section
Connections 11.21.1 Reference modes on page 178 and section 11.21.7 Start / stop
The network should be a daisy chain arrangement and not a star, logic modes on page 183.
although short stubs to the drive are allowed. The control circuits are isolated from the power circuits in the
The minimum connections are pins 2 (RX TX), 3 (isolated 0V), 7 (RX\ drive by basic insulation (single insulation) only. The installer
TX\) and the screen. must ensure that the external control circuits are insulated
Pin 4 (+24V) on each drive can be connected together but there is no from human contact by at least one layer of insulation
power sharing mechanism between drives and therefore the maximum WARNING
(supplementary insulation) rated for use at the AC supply
power available is the same as a single drive. (If pin 4 is not linked to the voltage.
other drives on the network and has an individual load then the
maximum power can be taken from pin 4 of each drive.) If the control circuits are to be connected to other circuits
Termination resistors classified as Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) (e.g. to a
personal computer), an additional isolating barrier must be
If a drive is on the end of the network chain then pins 1 and 8 should be
included in order to maintain the SELV classification.
linked together. This will connect an internal 120Ω termination resistor WARNING
between RXTX and RX\TX\. (If the end unit is not a drive or the user
wishes to use their own termination resistor, a 120Ω termination resistor Ensure the logic sense is correct for the control circuit to be
should be connected between RXTX and RX\TX\ at the end unit.) used. Incorrect logic sense could cause the motor to be
If the host is connected to a single drive then termination resistors started unexpectedly.
should not be used unless the baud rate is high. CAUTION
Positive logic is the default state for Unidrive SP.
CT Comms Cable
The CT Comms Cable can be used on a multi-drop network but should NOTE N
only be used occasionally for diagnostic and set up purposes. The The Secure Disable / drive enable terminal is a positive logic input only.
network must also be made up entirely of Unidrive SPs. It is not affected by the setting of Pr 8.29 Positive logic select.
If the CT Comms Cable is to be used, then pin 6 (TX enable) should be NOTE N
connected on all drives and pin 4 (+24V) should be linked to at least 1
The common 0V from analog signals should, wherever possible, not be
drive to supply power to the converter in the cable.
connected to the same 0V terminal as the common 0V from digital
Only one CT Comms Cable can be used on a network. signals. Terminals 3 and 11 should be used for connecting the 0V
common of analog signals and terminals 21, 23 and 30 for digital
4.12 Control connections signals. This is to prevent small voltage drops in the terminal
4.12.1 General connections causing inaccuracies in the analog signals.
Table 4-11 The Unidrive SP control connections consist of:
Terminal
Function Qty Control parameters available
number
Destination, offset, offset trim,
Differential analog input 1 5,6
invert, scaling
Single ended analog Mode, offset, scaling, invert,
2 7,8
input destination
Analog output 2 Source, mode, scaling, 9,10
Digital input 3 Destination, invert, logic select 27,28,29
Input / output mode select,
Digital input / output 3 destination / source, invert, 24,25,26
logic select
Relay 1 Source, invert 41,42
Drive enable (Secure
1 31
Disable)
+10V User output 1 4
+24V User output 1 Source, invert 22
1, 3, 11, 21,
0V common 6
23, 30
+24V External input 1 2
Key:
Destination indicates the parameter which is being controlled by the
parameter: terminal / function
Source
indicates the parameter being output by the terminal
parameter:
Mode analog - indicates the mode of operation of the terminal,
parameter: i.e. voltage 0-10V, current 4-20mA etc.
digital - indicates the mode of operation of the terminal,
i.e. positive / negative logic (the Drive Enable terminal is
fixed in positive logic), open collector.
All analog terminal functions can be programmed in menu 7.

Figure 4-29 Default terminal functions 4.12.2 Control terminal specification

1 0V common
Common connection for all external
Function
devices
2 +24V external input

Polarised signal To supply the control circuit
connectors
Function without providing a supply to the
1 11 power stage
Nominal voltage +24.0Vdc
41 42
Minimum continuous operating
+19.2Vdc
voltage
21 31 Maximum continuous operating
+30.0Vdc
voltage
0V common 1 Minimum start-up voltage 21.6Vdc
External 24V supply 2 Recommended power supply 60W 24Vdc nominal
Analog frequency/speed Recommended fuse 3A, 50Vdc

reference 1
0V common
3 3 0V common
Connections for
single-ended input 5
Common connection for all external
signal 6 Function
devices
0V common
Connections for 4 +10V user output
differential input signal
Function Supply for external analog devices
Voltage tolerance ±1%
4 Nominal output current 10mA
Analog Protection Current limit and trip @ 30mA
frequency/speed 7
reference 2
Precision reference Analog input 1
5 Non-inverting input
Analog input 3 8 6 Inverting input

(Motor thermistor*)
Default function Frequency/speed reference
Bipolar differential analog
9
Type of input (For single-ended use, connect terminal 6
Speed / frequency 10 to terminal 3)
Torque (active Full scale voltage range ±9.8V ±1%
current) Absolute maximum
11 ±36V relative to 0V
voltage range
0V common
Working common mode voltage
0V common ±13V relative to 0V
21 range
22 Input resistance 100kΩ ±1%
Resolution 16-bit plus sign (as speed reference)
0V common
23 Monotonic Yes (including 0V)
At zero speed 24 Dead band None (including 0V)
Jumps None (including 0V)
Reset 25
Maximum offset 700µV
Run forward 26 Maximum linearity 0.3% of input
Run reverse 27 Maximum gain asymmetry 0.5%
Analog input 1/ Analog input 1 Input filter bandwidth single pole ~1kHz
input 2 select 28
Analog input 2 250µs with destinations as Pr 1.36, Pr 1.37
Jog forward select 29 or Pr 3.22 in closed loop vector or servo
0V common Sampling period mode. 4ms for open loop mode and all
30 other destinations in closed loop vector or
Secure Disable / servo mode.
Drive enable** 31
Status relay 41
Drive healthy 42
* Analog input 3 can be configured as a motor thermistor input, please

refer to Analog input 3 on page 55.
**The Secure Disable / Drive enable terminal is a positive logic input only.

7 Analog input 2 9 Analog output 1

Default function Frequency/speed reference 10 Analog output 2
Bipolar single-ended analog voltage or
Type of input OL> Motor FREQUENCY output signal
unipolar current Terminal 9 default function
CL> SPEED output signal
Mode controlled by... Pr 7.11
Terminal 10 default function Motor active current
Operating in Voltage mode
Bipolar single-ended analog voltage or
Full scale voltage range ±9.8V ±3% Type of output
unipolar single ended current
Maximum offset ±30mV Mode controlled by... Pr 7.21 and Pr 7.24
Absolute maximum voltage range ±36V relative to 0V Operating in Voltage mode (default)
Input resistance >100kΩ Voltage range ±9.6V ±5%
Operating in current mode Maximum offset 100mV
0 to 20mA ±5% Maximum output current ±10mA
20 to 0mA ±5%
Current ranges
4 to 20mA ±5% Load resistance 1kΩ min
20 to 4mA ±5% Protection 35mA max. Short circuit protection
Maximum offset 250µA Operating in current mode
Absolute maximum voltage 0 to 20mA ±10%
−36V max Current ranges
(reverse bias) 4 to 20mA ±10%
Absolute maximum current +70mA Maximum offset 600µA
Equivalent input resistance ≤200Ω at 20mA Maximum open circuit voltage +15V
Common to all modes Maximum load resistance 500Ω
Resolution 10 bit + sign Common to all modes
250µs when configured as voltage input Resolution 10-bit (plus sign in voltage mode)
with destinations as Pr 1.36, Pr 1.37, Pr 250µs when configured as a high speed
3.22 or Pr 4.08 in closed loop vector or output with sources as Pr 4.02, Pr 4.17 in
Sample period servo mode. 4ms for open loop mode, all all modes or Pr 3.02, Pr 5.03 in closed loop
other destinations in closed loop vector or Update period
vector or servo mode. 4ms when
servo mode, or any destination when configured as any other type of output or
configured as a current input. with all other sources.
8 Analog input 3 11 0V common

Default function Not configured Common connection for all external
Function
Bipolar single-ended analog voltage, devices
Type of input
unipolar current or motor thermistor input
Mode controlled by... Pr 7.15
Operating in Voltage mode (default) 21 0V common
Voltage range ±9.8V ±3% Common connection for all external
Function
Maximum offset ±30mV devices
Absolute maximum voltage range ±36V relative to 0V
Input resistance >100kΩ
Operating in current mode 22 +24V user output (selectable)
0 to 20mA ±5% Terminal 22 default function +24V user output
20 to 0mA ±5% Can be switched on or off to act as a fourth
Current ranges
4 to 20mA ±5% digital output (positive logic only) by setting
20 to 4mA ±5% Programmability
the source Pr 8.28 and source invert Pr
Maximum offset 250µA 8.18
Absolute maximum voltage Nominal output current 200mA (including all digital I/O)
−36V max
(reverse bias) Maximum output current 240mA (including all digital I/O)
Absolute maximum current +70mA Protection Current limit and trip
Equivalent input resistance ≤200Ω at 20mA
Operating in thermistor input mode
Internal pull-up voltage <5V 23 0V common
Trip threshold resistance 3.3kΩ ±10% Common connection for all external
Function
Reset resistance 1.8kΩ ±10% devices
Short-circuit detection resistance 50Ω ±30%
Common to all modes
Resolution 10 bit + sign
250µs when configured as voltage input
with destinations as Pr 1.36, Pr 1.37, Pr
3.22 or Pr 4.08 in closed loop vector or
Sample period servo mode. 4ms for open loop mode, all
other destinations in closed loop vector or
servo mode, or any destination when
configured as a current input.

24 Digital I/O 1 41
Relay contacts
42
25 Digital I/O 2
Default function Drive healthy indicator
26 Digital I/O 3 Contact voltage rating 240Vac, Installation over-voltage category II
Terminal 24 default function AT ZERO SPEED output 2A AC 240V
Contact maximum current rating 4A DC 30V resistive load
Terminal 25 default function DRIVE RESET input
0.5A DC 30V inductive load (L/R = 40ms)
Terminal 26 default function RUN FORWARD input
Contact minimum recommended
Positive or negative logic digital inputs, or 12V 100mA
rating
Type negative logic push-pull or open collector
Closed when power applied and drive
outputs Default contact condition
healthy
Input / output mode controlled by... Pr 8.31, Pr 8.32 and Pr 8.33
Update period 4ms
Operating as an input
Logic mode controlled by... Pr 8.29
Absolute maximum applied voltage
4.13 Encoder connections
±30V Figure 4-30 Location of encoder connector
range
Load >2mA @ 15Vdc
Input thresholds 10.0V ±0.8V
Operating as an output
Open collector outputs selected Pr 8.30
Nominal maximum output current 200mA (total including terminal 22)
Maximum output current 240mA (total including terminal 22)
Common to all modes
Voltage range 0V to +24V
250µs when configured as an input with
Sample / Update period destinations as Pr 6.35 or Pr 6.36. 4ms in
all other cases.
5 1
10 6
15 11
27 Digital Input 4 Drive encoder connector

Female 15-way D-type
28 Digital Input 5
29 Digital Input 6
Table 4-12 Encoder types
Terminal 27 default function RUN REVERSE input
Terminal 28 default function ANALOG INPUT 1 / INPUT 2 select Setting of
Description
Pr 3.38
Terminal 29 default function JOG SELECT input
Type Negative or positive logic digital inputs Ab Quadrature incremental encoder with or without marker
(0) pulse
Logic mode controlled by... Pr 8.29
Fd Incremental encoder with frequency pulses and
(1) direction, with or without marker pulse
±30V Fr Incremental encoder with forward pulses and reverse
range
Load >2mA @ 15V (2) pulses, with or without marker pulse
Input thresholds 10.0V ±0.8V Ab.SErVO Quadrature incremental encoder with commutation
(3) signals*, with or without marker pulse
250µs with destinations as Pr 6.35 or
Sample / Update period Fd.SErVO Incremental encoder with frequency pulses and direction
Pr 6.36. 4ms in all other cases.
(4) with commutation signals*, with or without marker pulse
Incremental encoder with forward pulses and reverse
Fr.SErVO
30 0V common pulses with commutation signals*, with or without marker
(5)
Common connection for all external pulse
Function SC
devices SinCos encoder without serial communications
(6)
SC.HiPEr Absolute SinCos encoder with HiperFace serial
31 Drive enable (SECURE DISABLE function) (7) communications protocol (Stegmann)
Type Positive logic only digital input EndAt Absolute EndAt serial communications encoder
(8) (Heidenhain)
Absolute maximum applied voltage ±30V
SC.EndAt Absolute SinCos encoder with EnDat serial
(9) communications protocol (Heidenhain)
Thresholds 18.5V ±0.5V
SSI
Disabling the drive (hardware): <100µs Absolute SSI only encoder
Sample period
Enabling the drive (software): 4ms
(10)
SC.SSI
The drive enable terminal (T31) provides a SECURE DISABLE Absolute SinCos encoder with SSI
(11)
function. The SECURE DISABLE function meets the requirements of
EN954-1 category 3 for the prevention of unexpected starting of the *The U, V & W commutation signals are required with an incremental
drive. It may be used in a safety-related application in preventing the type encoder when used with a servo motor. The UVW commutation
drive from generating torque in the motor to a high level of integrity. signals are used to define the motor position during the first 120°
electrical rotation after the drive is powered-up or the encoder is
Refer to section 4.14 SECURE DISABLE on page 59 for further information.
initialised.

Table 4-13 Drive encoder connector details

Setting of Pr 3.38
Terminal Ab Fd Fr Ab.SErVO Fd.SErVO Fr.SErVO SC SC.HiPEr EndAt SC.EndAt SSI SC.SSI
(0) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
1 A F F A F F Cos Cos Cos
2 A\ F\ F\ A\ F\ F\ Cosref Cosref Cosref
3 B D R B D R Sin Sin Sin
4 B\ D\ R\ B\ D\ R\ Sinref Sinref Sinref
5 Z* Encoder input - Data (input/output)
6 Z\* Encoder input - Data\ (input/output)
Simulated encoder Simulated encoder
7 U
Aout, Fout** Aout, Fout**
8 U\
Aout\, Fout\** Aout\, Fout\**
9 V
Bout, Dout** Bout, Dout**
10 V\
Bout\, Dout\** Bout\, Dout\**
11 W Encoder input - Clock (output)
12 W\ Encoder input - Clock\ (output)
13 +V***
14 0V common
15 th****
* Marker pulse is optional
** Simulated encoder output only available in open-loop
*** The encoder supply is selectable through parameter configuration to
5Vdc, 8Vdc and 15Vdc
**** Terminal 15 is a parallel connection to T8 analog input 3. If this is to
be used as a thermistor input, set Pr 7.15 to ‘th.sc’ (7), ‘th’ (8) or
‘th.diSP’ (9).
NOTE N
SSI encoders typically have maximum baud rate of 500kbaud. When a
SSI only encoder is used for speed feedback with a closed loop vector or
servo motor, a large speed feedback filter (Pr 3.42) is required due to the
time taken for the position information to be transferred from the encoder
into the drive. The addition of this filter means that SSI only encoders are
not suitable for speed feedback in dynamic or high-speed applications.

4.13.1 Specifications SC, SC.HiPEr, EndAt, SC.EndAt, SSI and SC.SSI encoders
Feedback device connections 1 Channel Cos*
Ab, Fd, Fr, Ab.SErVO, Fd.SErVO and Fr.SErVO encoders
2 Channel Cosref*
1 Channel A, Frequency or Forward inputs
3 Channel Sin*
2 Channel A\, Frequency\ or Forward\ inputs
4 Channel Sinref*
3 Channel B, Direction or Reverse inputs
Type Differential voltage
4 Channel B\, Direction\ or Reverse\ inputs
1.25V peak to peak (sin with regard to
Maximum Signal level
Type EIA 485 differential receivers sinref and cos with regard to cosref)
Maximum input frequency 410kHz Maximum input frequency 115kHz
Line loading <2 unit loads Maximum applied differential voltage

±4V
and common mode voltage range
Line termination components 120Ω (switchable)
For the SinCos encoder to be compatible with Unidrive SP, the output
Working common mode range +12V to –7V signals from the encoder must be a 1V peak to peak differential voltage
Absolute maximum applied voltage (across Sin to Sinref and Cos to Cosref).
±25V
relative to 0V
The majority of encoders have a DC offset on all signals. Stegmann
Absolute maximum applied differential
±25V encoders typically have a 2.5Vdc offset. The Sinref and Cosref are a
voltage flat DC level at 2.5Vdc and the Cos and Sin signals have a 1V peak to
peak waveform biased at 2.5Vdc.
Encoders are available which have a 1V peak to peak voltage on Sin,
5 Marker pulse channel Z Sinref, Cos and Cosref. This results in a 2V peak to peak voltage seen
at the drive's encoder terminals. It is not recommended that encoders of
6 Marker pulse channel Z\
this type are used with Unidrive SP, and that the encoder feedback
7 Phase channel U signals should meet the above parameters (1V peak to peak).
8 Phase channel U\ * Not used with EndAt and SSI encoders.
9 Phase channel V
5 Data**
10 Phase channel V\
6 Data\**
11 Phase channel W
11 Clock***
12 Phase channel W\
12 Clock\***
Type EIA 485 differential receivers
Type EIA 485 differential transceivers
Maximum input frequency 512kHz
Maximum frequency 2MHz
32 unit loads (for terminals 5 and 6)
Line loading 32 unit loads (for terminals 5 and 6)
1 unit load (for terminals 7 to 12) Line loading
1 unit load (for terminals 11 and 12)
120Ω (switchable for terminals 5 and 6,
Line termination components Working common mode range +12V to –7V
always in circuit for terminals 7 to 12)
Working common mode range +12V to –7V ±14V
relative to 0V
+14V to -9V Absolute maximum applied differential
relative to 0V ±14V
voltage
+14V to -9V
voltage ** Not used with SC encoders.
*** Not used with SC and SC.HiPEr encoders.
Frequency slaving outputs (open loop only)

Ab, Fd, Fr, SC, SC.HiPEr, EndAt, SC.EndAt, SSI and SC.SSI
encoders
7 Frequency slaving out channel A
8 Frequency slaving out channel A\
9 Frequency slaving out channel B
10 Frequency slaving out channel B\

Type EIA 485 differential transceivers
Maximum output frequency 512kHz
±14V
relative to 0V
±14V
voltage

Common to all Encoder types 4.14 SECURE DISABLE

13 Encoder supply voltage The Secure Disable (SD) function provides a means for preventing the
Supply voltage 5.15V ±2%, 8V ±5% or 15V ±5%
drive from generating torque in the motor, with a very high level of
integrity. It is suitable for incorporation into a safety system for a
Maximum output current 300mA for 5V and 8V machine. It is also suitable for use as a conventional drive enable input.
200mA for 15V
The SD function makes use of the special property of an inverter drive
The voltage on terminal 13 is controlled by Pr 3.36. The default for this with an induction motor, which is that torque cannot be generated
parameter is 5V (0) but this can be set to 8V (1) or 15V (2). Setting the without the continuous correct active behaviour of the inverter circuit. All
encoder voltage supply too high for the encoder could result in damage credible faults in the inverter power circuit cause a loss of torque
to the feedback device. generation.
The termination resistors should be disabled if the outputs from the The SD function is fail-safe, so when the SD input is disconnected the
encoder are higher than 5V. drive will not operate the motor, even if a combination of components
within the drive has failed. Most component failures are revealed by the
drive failing to operate. SD is also independent of the drive firmware.
14 0V common This meets the requirements of EN954-1 category 3 for the prevention of
operation of the motor.1
1
Independent approval by BIA has been given for sizes 1 to 3.
15 Motor thermistor input
SD can be used to eliminate electro-mechanical contactors, including
This terminal is connected internally to terminal 8 of the signal special safety contactors, which would otherwise be required for safety
connector. Connect only one of these terminals to a motor thermistor. applications.
Analog input 3 must be in thermistor mode, Pr 7.15 = th.SC (7), th (8) or Note on the use of servo motors, other permanent-magnet motors,
th.diSP (9). reluctance motors and salient-pole induction motors
When the drive is disabled through Secure Disable, a possible (although
highly unlikely) failure mode is for two power devices in the inverter
circuit to conduct incorrectly.
This fault cannot produce a steady rotating torque in any AC motor. It
produces no torque in a conventional induction motor with a cage rotor. If
the rotor has permanent magnets and/or saliency, then a transient
alignment torque may occur. The motor may briefly try to rotate by up to
180° electrical, for a permanent magnet motor, or 90° electrical, for a
salient pole induction motor or reluctance motor. This possible failure
mode must be allowed for in the machine design.
The design of safety-related control systems must only be

done by personnel with the required training and experience.
The SD function will only ensure the safety of a machine if it
is correctly incorporated into a complete safety system. The
WARNING
system must be subject to a risk assessment to confirm that
the residual risk of an unsafe event is at an acceptable level
for the application.
To maintain category 3 according to EN954-1 the drive must

be located inside an enclosure with degree of protection at
least IP54.
WARNING
SD inhibits the operation of the drive, this includes inhibiting

braking. If the drive is required to provide both braking and
secure disable in the same operation (e.g. for emergency
stop) then a safety timer relay or similar device must be used
WARNING to ensure that the drive is disabled a suitable time after
braking. The braking function in the drive is provided by an
electronic circuit which is not fail-safe. If braking is a safety
requirement, it must be supplemented by an independent
fail-safe braking mechanism.
SD does not provide electrical isolation. The supply to the

drive must be disconnected by an approved isolation device
before gaining access to power connections.
WARNING

The following diagrams illustrate how the SD input can be used to Figure 4-33 Category 3 interlock using Secure Disable with
eliminate contactors and safety contactors from control systems. Please protected wiring
note these are provided for illustration only, every specific arrangement
must be verified for suitability in the proposed application. +24V
In the first example, illustrated in Figure 4-31, the SD function is used to Reset Stop Status
replace a simple power contactor in applications where the risk of injury
from unexpected starting is small, but it is not acceptable to rely on the Drive
complex hardware and firmware/software used by the stop/start function SD
within the drive. Start
Figure 4-31 Start / stop control EN954-1 category B - replacement
of contactor
Safety Protected wiring
Using contactor relay (screened or
segregated)
+24V
Interlocks
Drive
M
Enable 3~
T31
Stop
In the conventional system, a contactor failure in the unsafe direction is
detected the next time the safety relay is reset. Since the drive is not part
K1
of the safety system it has to be assumed that AC power is always
Start
available to drive the motor, so two contactors in series are required in
order to prevent the first failure from causing an unsafe event (i.e. the
K1
(or at motor driven).
K1 drive
output) With Secure Disable there are no single faults in the drive which can
~
permit the motor to be driven. Therefore it is not necessary to have a
second channel to interrupt the power connection, nor a fault detection
circuit.
Using SECURE DISABLE
It is important to note that a single short-circuit from the Enable input
+24V (SD) to a DC supply of approximately +24V would cause the drive to be
Drive enabled. For this reason, Figure 4-33 shows the wire from the Enable
input to the safety relay as "protected wiring" so that the possibility of a
SD
T31 short circuit from this wire to the DC supply can be excluded, as
Stop specified in prEN 954-2. The wiring can be protected by placing it in a
segregated cable duct or other enclosure, or by providing it with a
grounded shield.
K1
Start If the use of protected wiring is not acceptable, so that the possibility of
this short circuit must be allowed for, then a relay must be used to
monitor the state of the Enable input, together with a single safety
K1
contactor to prevent operation of the motor after a fault. This is illustrated
M
3~ in Figure 4-34.
NOTE N
In the second example, illustrated in Figure 4-32 and Figure 4-33, a The auxiliary relay K2 must be located in the same enclosure and close
conventional high-integrity system which uses two safety contactors with to the drive, with its coil connected as closely as possible to the drive
auxiliary contacts with connected movement is replaced by a single enable (SD) input.
Secure Disable system. This arrangement meets EN954-1 category 3. Figure 4-34 Use of contactor and relay to avoid the need for
Figure 4-32 Category 3 interlock using electromechanical safety protected wiring
contactors
+24V
+24V Reset Stop
Stop
Reset SD
K1 Drive
Enable
K1 Drive Start K2
K1
Start K2
K2 K2
K1
Two-channel Safety
K1 interlocks relay
Two-channel Safety
interlocks relay K1 K2
K1 K2 K2
M
3~
M
3~
For further applications guidance, refer to the Unidrive SP Advanced

User Guide.

5 Getting Started
This chapter introduces the user interfaces, menu structure and security level of the drive.
5.1 Understanding the display

There are two keypads available for the Unidrive SP. The SM-Keypad has an LED display and the SM-Keypad Plus has an LCD display. Both
keypads can be fitted to the drive but the SM-Keypad Plus can also be remotely mounted on an enclosure door.
5.1.1 SM-Keypad 5.1.2 SM-Keypad Plus
The display consists of two horizontal rows of 7 segment LED displays. The display consists of three lines of text.
The upper display shows the drive status or the current menu and The top line shows the drive status or the current menu and parameter
parameter number being viewed. number being viewed on the left, and the parameter value or the specific
trip type on the right.
The lower display shows the parameter value or the specific trip type.
The lower two lines show the parameter name or the help text.
Figure 5-1 SM-Keypad Figure 5-2 SM-Keypad Plus
Upper display
Lower display
Mode (black) button Mode (black) button
Help button
Control buttons Control buttons
Fwd / Rev (blue) button Joypad Fwd / Rev (blue) button Joypad
Stop/reset (red) button Stop/reset (red) button
Start (green) button Start (green) button
NOTE The red stop button is also used to reset the drive.
Both the SM-Keypad and the SM-Keypad Plus can indicate when a SMARTCARD access is taking place or when the second motor map is active
(menu 21). These are indicated on the displays as follows.
SM-Keypad SM-Keypad Plus
The decimal point after the fourth digit in the The symbol ‘CC’ will appear in the lower left
SMARTCARD access taking place
upper display will flash. hand corner of the display
The decimal point after the third digit in the The symbol ‘Mot2’ will appear in the lower left
Second motor map active
upper display will flash. hand corner of the display
5.2 Keypad operation

5.2.1 Control buttons
The keypad consists of:
1. Joypad - used to navigate the parameter structure and change parameter values.
2. Mode button - used to change between the display modes – parameter view, parameter edit, status.
3. Three control buttons - used to control the drive if keypad mode is selected.
4. Help button (SM-Keypad Plus only) - displays text briefly describing the selected parameter.
The Help button toggles between other display modes and parameter help mode. The up and down functions on the joypad scroll the help text to
allow the whole string to be viewed. The right and left functions on the joypad have no function when help text is being viewed.
The display examples in this section show the SM-Keypad 7 segment LED display. The examples are the same for the SM-Keypad Plus except that
the information displayed on the lower row on the SM-Keypad is displayed on the right hand side of the top row on the SM-Keypad Plus.

Figure 5-3 Display modes
Status Mode
(Display not flashing)
Timeout** Timeout** Timeout**

To enter Parameter
Mode, press key or To return to
Status Mode,
press key
Temporary Parameter
Parameter Mode When returning Mode
(Upper display to Parameter (Upper display flashing)
flashing) Mode use the
*
keys to select
Use * keys another parameter
to select parameter for editing to change, if
required
To exit Edit Mode,

press key
To enter Edit Mode,
press key
Edit Mode
(Character to be edited in lower line of display flashing)
Change parameter values using keys.
* can only be used to move between menus if L2 access has been enabled (Pr 0.49). Refer to section 5.9 on page 65.
**Timeout defined by Pr 11.41 (default value = 240s).
Figure 5-4 Mode examples
Parameter
Status Mode
View Mode
Healthy Status Alarm Status Trip Status
Menu 5. Parameter 5 Drive status = tripped

Pr 5.05 value Trip type (UU = undervolts)
Figure 5-5 Parameter navigation
Do not change parameter values without careful

consideration; incorrect values may cause damage or a
safety hazard.
WARNING
NOTE
When changing the values of parameters, make a note of the new * *
values in case they need to be entered again.
NOTE
For new parameter-values to apply after the AC supply to the drive is
interrupted, new values must be saved. Refer to section 5.7 Saving
parameters on page 64.
5.3 Menu structure

The drive parameter structure consists of menus and parameters. * can only be used to move between menus if L2 access has
been enabled (Pr 0.49). Refer to section 5.9 Parameter access
The drive initially powers up so that only menu 0 can be viewed. The up level and security on page 65.
and down arrow buttons are used to navigate between parameters and
once level 2 access (L2) has been enabled (see Pr 0.49) the left and The menus and parameters roll over in both directions.
right buttons are used to navigate between menus. For further i.e. if the last parameter is displayed, a further press will cause the
information, refer to section 5.9 Parameter access level and security on display to rollover and show the first parameter.
page 65.
When changing between menus the drive remembers which parameter
was last viewed in a particular menu and thus displays that parameter.

Figure 5-6 Menu structure 5.5 Advanced menus

The advanced menus consist of groups or parameters appropriate to a
specific function or feature of the drive as follows:
Menu 20 enu 2 Menu

Menu 21 Menu 0 Menu 1 M Description
number
....XX.00....
Commonly used basic set up parameters for quick / easy
21.50 0.50 1.50 0
21.49 0.49 1.49 programming
21.48 0.48 1.48
21.47 0.47 1.47 1 Frequency / speed reference
21.46 0.46 1.46
2 Ramps
3 Slave frequency, speed feedback and speed control
Moves 4 Torque and current control
between
parameters
5 Motor control
6 Sequencer and clock
7 Analog I/O
8 Digital I/O
9 Programmable logic, motorised pot and binary sum
10 Status and trips
21.05 0.05 1.05
21.04 0.04 1.04 11 General drive set-up
21.03 0.03 1.03
21.02 0.02 1.02 12 Threshold detectors and variable selectors
21.01 0.01 1.01
13 Position control
14 User PID controller
Moves between Menus 15, 16, 17 Solutions Module set-up
18 Application menu 1
5.4 Menu 0 19 Application menu 2
Menu 0 is used to bring together various commonly used parameters for
21 Second motor parameters
basic easy set up of the drive.
Appropriate parameters are cloned from the advanced menus into menu
5.5.1 Display messages
0 and thus exist in both locations.
The following tables indicate the various possible mnemonics which can
For further information, refer to Chapter 6 Basic parameters (Menu 0) on be displayed by the drive and their meaning.
page 67.
Trip types are not listed here but can be found in Chapter 6 Basic
Figure 5-7 Menu 0 Cloning parameters (Menu 0) on page 67 if required.
Menu 2
Table 5-1 Alarm indications
Lower
Description
display
2.21 5
br.rS Braking resistor overload
Menu 0
Braking resistor I2t accumulator (Pr 10.37) in the drive has reached
Menu 1 75.0% of the value at which the drive will trip and the braking IGBT is
0.04 5
0.05 0 active.
0.06 150 Heatsink or control board or inverter IGBT over
1.14 0 Hot
temperature alarms are active
• The drive heatsink temperature has reached a threshold and the
Menu 4
drive will trip ‘Oh2’ if the temperature continues to rise (see the
‘Oh2’ trip).
4.07 150
or
• The ambient temperature around the control PCB is approaching
the over temperature threshold (see the ‘O.CtL’ trip).
OVLd Motor overload
2
The motor I t accumulator in the drive has reached 75% of the value at
which the drive will be tripped and the load on the drive is >100%

Table 5-2 Status indications 5.6 Changing the operating mode

Upper Drive output Changing the operating mode returns all parameters to their default
Description
display stage value, including the motor parameters. (Pr 0.49 Security status and Pr
ACt Regeneration mode active 0.34 User security code are not affected by this procedure.)
The regen unit is enabled and synchronised to the Enabled Procedure
supply. Use the following procedure only if a different operating mode is
required:
ACUU AC Supply loss
The drive has detected that the AC supply has been 1. Ensure the drive is not enabled, i.e. terminal 31 is open or Pr 6.15 is
Enabled Off (0)
lost and is attempting to maintain the DC bus voltage
by decelerating the motor. 2. Enter either of the following values in Pr 0.00, as appropriate:
1253 (Europe, 50Hz AC supply frequency)
*Auto
Autotune in progress 1254 (USA, 60Hz AC supply frequency)
tunE
Enabled 3. Change the setting of Pr 0.48 as follows:
The autotune procedure has been initialised.
*‘Auto’ and ‘tunE’ will flash alternatively on the display. 0.48 setting Operating mode
dc DC applied to the motor
Enabled 1 Open-loop
The drive is applying DC injection braking.
dEC Decelerating
Enabled
The drive is decelerating the motor. 2 Closed-loop Vector
inh Inhibit
The drive is inhibited and cannot be run. Disabled 3 Closed-loop Servo
The drive enable signal is not applied to terminal 31 or
Pr 6.15 is set to 0. Regen (See the Unidrive SP Regen
POS Positioning 4 User Guide for more information
Enabled about operating in this mode)
The drive is positioning/orientating the motor shaft.
rdY Ready The figures in the second column apply when serial communications are
Disabled used.
The drive is ready to be run.
run Running 4. Either:
Enabled • Press the red reset button
The drive is running.
• Toggle the reset digital input
SCAn Scanning
• Carry out a drive reset through serial communications by setting
OL> The drive is searching for the motor frequency Pr 10.38 to 100 (ensure that Pr. xx.00 returns to 0).
when synchronising to a spinning motor. Enabled
Regen> The drive is enabled and is synchronising to 5.7 Saving parameters
the line. When changing a parameter in Menu 0, the new value is saved when
StoP Stop or holding zero speed pressing the Mode button to return to parameter view mode from
The drive is holding zero speed. parameter edit mode.
Enabled
Regen> The drive is enabled but the AC voltage is If parameters have been changed in the advanced menus, then the
too low, or the DC bus voltage is still rising or falling. change will not be saved automatically. A save function must be carried
triP Trip condition out.
The drive has tripped and is no longer controlling the Disabled Procedure
motor. The trip code appears on the upper display. Enter 1000* in Pr. xx.00
Table 5-3 Solutions Module and SMARTCARD status indications Either:
on power-up • Press the red reset button
Lower • Carry out a drive reset through serial communications by setting
Description
display Pr 10.38 to 100 (ensure that Pr. xx.00 returns to 0).
boot *If the drive is in the under voltage trip state or is being supplied from a
A parameter set is being transferred from the SMARTCARD to the 48V back-up supply, a value of 1001 must be entered into Pr xx.00 to
drive during power-up. For further information, please refer to section perform a save function.
9.2.4 Booting up from the SMARTCARD on every power up (Pr 11.42 =
boot (4)) on page 102. 5.8 Restoring parameter defaults
Restoring parameter defaults by this method saves the default values in
cArd
the drive’s memory. (Pr 0.49 and Pr 0.34 are not affected by this
The drive is writing a parameter set to the SMARTCARD during power- procedure.)
up.
For further information, please refer to section 9.2.3 Auto saving Procedure
parameter changes (Pr 11.42 = Auto (3)) on page 101. 1. Ensure the drive is not enabled, i.e. terminal 31 is open or Pr 6.15 is
Off (0)
loAding
2. Enter 1233 (EUR 50Hz settings) or 1244 (USA 60Hz settings) in
The drive is writing information to a Solutions Module. Pr xx.00.
3. Either:
• Press the red reset button
• Carry out a drive reset through serial communications by setting
Pr 10.38 to 100 (ensure that Pr. xx.00 returns to 0).

5.9 Parameter access level and security 5.9.3 User Security

The User Security, when set, prevents write access to any of the
The parameter access level determines whether the user has access to
parameters (other than Pr. 0.49 and Pr 11.44 Access Level) in any
menu 0 only or to all the advanced menus (menus 1 to 21) in addition to
menu.
menu 0.
The User Security determines whether the access to the user is read User security open - All parameters: Read / Write access
only or read write.
Both the User Security and Parameter Access Level can operate
independently of each other as shown in the table below:
Parameter Menu 0 Advanced
User Security
Access Level status menus status
L1 Open RW Not visible
L1 Closed RO Not visible
L2 Open RW RW
L2 Closed RO RO Pr 0.00 Pr 1.00 ............ Pr 20.00 Pr 21.00
Pr 0.01 Pr 1.01 ............ Pr 20.01 Pr 21.01
RW = Read / write access RO = Read only access
Pr 0.02 Pr 1.02 ............ Pr 20.02 Pr 21.02
The default settings of the drive are Parameter Access Level L1 and
Pr 0.03 Pr 1.03 ............ Pr 20.03 Pr 21.03
user Security Open, i.e. read / write access to Menu 0 with the advanced
............
menus not visible.
............
5.9.1 Access Level Pr 0.49 Pr 1.49 ............ Pr 20.49 Pr 21.49
The access level is set in Pr 0.49 and allows or prevents access to the Pr 0.50 Pr 1.50 ............ Pr 20.50 Pr 21.50
advanced menu parameters.
L1 access selected - Menu 0 only visible User security closed - All parameters: Read Only access
(except Pr 0.49 and Pr 11.44)
Pr 0.00 Pr 1.00 ............ Pr 19.00 Pr 20.00
Pr 0.00 Pr 1.00 ............ Pr 20.00 Pr 21.00
Pr 0.01 Pr 1.01 ............ Pr 19.01 Pr 20.01
Pr 0.01 Pr 1.01 ............ Pr 20.01 Pr 21.01
Pr 0.02 Pr 1.02 ............ Pr 19.02 Pr 20.02
Pr 0.02 Pr 1.02 ............ Pr 20.02 Pr 21.02
Pr 0.03 Pr 1.03 ............ Pr 19.03 Pr 20.03
Pr 0.03 Pr 1.03 ............ Pr 20.03 Pr 21.03
............
............
............
............
Pr 0.49 Pr 1.49 ............ Pr 19.49 Pr 20.49
Pr 0.49 Pr 1.49 ............ Pr 20.49 Pr 21.49
Pr 0.50 Pr 1.50 ............ Pr 19.50 Pr 20.50
Pr 0.50 Pr 1.50 ............ Pr 20.50 Pr 21.50
Setting User Security

L2 access selected - All parameters visible Enter a value between 1 and 999 in Pr 0.34 and press the button;
the security code has now been set to this value. In order to activate the
security, the Access level must be set to Loc in Pr 0.49. When the drive
is reset, the security code will have been activated and the drive returns
to Access Level L1. The value of Pr 0.34 will return to 0 in order to hide
the security code. At this point, the only parameter that can be changed
by the user is the Access Level Pr 0.49.
Unlocking User Security

Select a read write parameter to be edited and press the button, the
upper display will now show CodE. Use the arrow buttons to set the
Pr 0.00 Pr 1.00 ............ Pr 20.00 Pr 21.00 security code and press the button.
Pr 0.01 Pr 1.01 ............ Pr 20.01 Pr 21.01
With the correct security code entered, the display will revert to the
Pr 0.02 Pr 1.02 ............ Pr 20.02 Pr 21.02 parameter selected in edit mode.
Pr 0.03 Pr 1.03 ............ Pr 20.03 Pr 21.03
If an incorrect security code is entered the display will revert to
............
parameter view mode.
............
Pr 0.49 Pr 1.49 ............ Pr 20.49 Pr 21.49 To lock the User Security again, set Pr 0.49 to Loc and press the
Pr 0.50 Pr 1.50 ............ Pr 20.50 Pr 21.50 reset button.
5.9.2 Changing the Access Level Disabling User Security.

Unlock the previously set security code as detailed above. Set Pr 0.34 to
The Access Level is determined by the setting of Pr 0.49 as follows:
0 and press the button. The User Security has now been disabled,
String Value Effect and will not have to be unlocked each time the drive is powered up to
L1 0 Access to menu 0 only allow read / write access to the parameters.
L2 1 Access to all menus (menu 0 to menu 21)
The Access Level can be changed through the keypad even if the User
Security has been set.

5.10 Displaying parameters with non- the original protocol. The master should wait at least 20ms before send a
new message using the new protocol. (Note: ANSI uses 7 data bits, 1
default values only stop bit and even parity; Modbus RTU uses 8 data bits, 2 stops bits and
By entering 12000 in Pr xx.00, the only parameters that will be visible to no parity.)
the user will be those containing a non-default value. This function does
Comms value String Communications mode
not require a drive reset to become active. In order to deactivate this
function, return to Pr xx.00 and enter a value of 0. 0 AnSI ANSI
Please note that this function can be affected by the access level 1 rtU Modbus RTU protocol
enabled, refer to section 5.9 Parameter access level and security for
ANSIx3.28 protocol
further information regarding access level.
Full details of the CT ANSI communications protocol are the Unidrive SP
Advanced User Guide.
5.11 Displaying destination parameters
Modbus RTU protocol
only Full details of the CT implementation of Modbus RTU are given in the
By entering 12001 in Pr xx.00, the only parameters that will be visible to Unidrive SP Advanced User Guide.
the user will be destination parameters. This function does not require a
drive reset to become active. In order to deactivate this function, return 0.36 {11.25} Serial communications baud rate
to Pr xx.00 and enter a value of 0. RW Txt US
Please note that this function can be affected by the access level 300 (0), 600 (1), 1200 (2),
enabled, refer to section 5.9 Parameter access level and security for 2400 (3), 4800 (4), 9600 (5),
further information regarding access level. Ú 19200 (6), 38400 (7),
Ö 19200 (6)
57600 (8)*, 115200 (9)*
5.12 Serial communications
* only applicable to Modbus RTU mode
5.12.1 Introduction
This parameter can be changed via the drive keypad, via a Solutions
The Unidrive SP has a standard 2-wire EIA485 interface (serial
communications interface) which enables all drive set-up, operation and Module or via the comms interface itself. If it is changed via the comms
interface, the response to the command uses the original baud rate. The
monitoring to be carried out with a PC or PLC if required. Therefore, it is
master should wait at least 20ms before send a new message using the
possible to control the drive entirely by serial communications without
the need for a SM-keypad or other control cabling. The drive supports new baud rate.
two protocols selected by parameter configuration: NOTE
• Modbus RTU When using the CT Comms cable the available baud rate is limited to
• CT ANSI 19.2k baud.
Modbus RTU has been set as the default protocol, as it is used with the
PC-tools commissioning software as provided on the CD ROM. 0.37 {11.23} Serial communications address
The serial communications port of the drive is a RJ45 socket, which is RW Txt US
isolated from the power stage and the other control terminals (see
section 4.11 Serial communications connections on page 52 for
Ú 0 to 247 Ö 1
connection and isolation details).
Used to define the unique address for the drive for the serial interface.
The communications port applies a 2 unit load to the communications The drive is always a slave.
network.
Modbus RTU
EIA232 to EIA485 Communications When the Modbus RTU protocol is used addresses between 0 and 247
An external EIA232 hardware interface such as a PC cannot be used are permitted. Address 0 is used to globally address all slaves, and so
directly with the 2-wire EIA485 interface of the drive. Therefore a this address should not be set in this parameter
suitable converter is required.
ANSI
A suitable EIA232 to EIA485 converter is the Control Techniques When the ANSI protocol is used the first digit is the group and the
isolated CT Comms cable (CT Part No. 4500-0087) second digit is the address within a group. The maximum permitted
When using the above converter or any other suitable converter with the group number is 9 and the maximum permitted address within a group is
Unidrive SP, it is recommended that no terminating resistors be 9. Therefore, Pr 0.37 is limited to 99 in this mode. The value 00 is used
connected on the network. It may be necessary to 'link out' the to globally address all slaves on the system, and x0 is used to address
terminating resistor within the converter depending on which type is all slaves of group x, therefore these addresses should not be set in this
used. The information on how to link out the terminating resistor will parameter.
normally be contained in the user information supplied with the
converter.
5.12.2 Serial communications set-up parameters
The following parameters need to be set according to the system
requirements.
0.35 {11.24} Serial mode

RW Txt US
AnSI (0)
Ú rtU (1)
Ö rtU (1)
This parameter defines the communications protocol used by the 485

comms port on the drive. This parameter can be changed via the drive
keypad, via a Solutions Module or via the comms interface itself. If it is
changed via the comms interface, the response to the command uses

6 Basic parameters (Menu 0)

Menu 0 is used to bring together various commonly used parameters for basic easy set up of the drive. All the parameters in menu 0 appear in other
menus in the drive (denoted by {…}).
6.1 Single line descriptions
Range(Ú) Default(Ö)
Parameter Type
OL VT SV OL VT SV
0.00 xx.00 {x.00} 0 to 32,767 0 RW Uni
±3,000.0Hz 0.0
0.01 Minimum reference clamp {1.07} ±Speed_limit_max rpm RW Bi PT US
EUR> 50.0 EUR> 1,500.0 US

0.02 Maximum reference clamp {1.06} 0 to 3,000.0Hz Speed_limit_max rpm 3,000.0 RW Uni
USA> 60.0 USA> 1800.0
{2.11} 0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000 US
0.03 Acceleration rate 5.0 2.000 0.200 RW Uni
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
0.04 Deceleration rate {2.21} 10.0 2.000 0.200 RW Uni US
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
A1.A2 (0), A1.Pr (1), A2.Pr (2), Pr (3), Pad (4),
0.05 Reference select {1.14} A1.A2 (0) RW Txt NC US
Prc (5)
0.06 Current limit {4.07} 0 to Current_limit_max % 165.0 175.0 RW Uni RA US
Ur_S (0),
Ur (1), Fd (2),
OL> Voltage mode select {5.14} Ur_Auto (3), Ur_I (4) RW Txt US
0.07 Ur_I (4),
SrE (5)
CL> Speed controller P gain {3.10} 0.0000 to 6.5535 1/rad s-1 0.0100 RW Uni US
0.0 to 25.0%
OL> Voltage boost {5.15} of motor rated 3.0 RW Uni US
0.08 voltage
CL> Speed controller I gain {3.11} 0.00 to 655.35 1/rad 1.00 RW Uni US
OFF (0) or On
OL> Dynamic V/F {5.13} 0 RW Bit US
0.09 (1)
CL> Speed controller D gain {3.12} 0.00000 to 0.65535 (s) 0.00000 RW Uni US
OL> Estimated motor speed {5.04} ±180,000 rpm RO Bi FI NC PT
0.10
CL> Motor speed {3.02} ±Speed_max rpm RO Bi FI NC PT
OL & VT> Drive output
{5.01} ±Speed_freq_max Hz RO Bi FI NC PT
frequency
0.11 0 to 65,535
SV> Drive encoder position {3.29} 1/216ths of a RO Uni FI NC PT
revolution
0.12 Total motor current {4.01} 0 to Drive_current_max A RO Uni FI NC PT
OL & VT> Motor active
{4.02} ±Drive_current_max A RO Bi FI NC PT
0.13 current
SV> Analog input 1 offset trim {7.07} ±10.000 % 0.000 RW Bi US
0.14 Torque mode selector {4.11} 0 to 1 0 to 4 Speed control mode (0) RW Uni US
FASt (0)
FASt (0)
0.15 Ramp mode select {2.04} Std (1) Std (1) RW Txt US
Std (1)
Std.hV (2)
OL> T28 and T29 auto- OFF (0) or On
{8.39} 0 RW Bit US
0.16 selection disable (1)
CL> Ramp enable {2.02} OFF (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
OL> T29 digital input Pr 0.00 to
{8.26} Pr 6.31 RW Uni DE PT US
destination Pr 21.51
0.17
CL> Current demand filter
time constant
{4.12} 0.0 to 25.0 ms 0.0 RW Uni US
0.18 Positive logic select {8.29} OFF (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit PT US
0-20 (0), 20-0 (1), 4-20tr (2), 20-4tr (3),
0.19 Analog input 2 mode {7.11} VOLt (6) RW Txt US
4-20 (4), 20-4 (5), VOLt (6)
0.20 Analog input 2 destination {7.14} Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51 Pr 1.37 RW Uni DE PT US
0-20 (0), 20-0 (1), 4-20tr (2), 20-4tr (3),
0.21 Analog input 3 mode {7.15} 4-20 (4), 20-4 (5), VOLt (6), th.SC (7), VOLt (6) RW Txt PT US
th (8), th.diSp (9)
0.22 Bipolar reference select {1.10} OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
0.23 Jog reference {1.05} 0 to 400.0 Hz 0 to 4000.0 rpm 0.0 RW Uni US
0.24 Pre-set reference 1 {1.21} ±Speed_limit_max rpm 0.0 RW Bi US
0.25 Pre-set reference 2 {1.22} ±Speed_limit_max rpm 0.0 RW Bi US
±Speed_freq_
OL> Pre-set reference 3 {1.23} 0.0 RW Bi US
0.26 max Hz/rpm
CL> Overspeed threshold {3.08} 0 to 40,000 rpm 0 RW Uni US
±Speed_freq_
OL> Pre-set reference 4 {1.24} 0.0 RW Bi US
max Hz/rpm
0.27
CL> Drive encoder lines per
revolution
{3.34} 0 to 50,000 1024 4096 RW Uni US
0.28 Keypad fwd/rev key enable {6.13} OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US

Parameter Type
OL VT SV OL VT SV
SMARTCARD parameter
0.29 {11.36} 0 to 999 0 RO Uni NC PT US
data
0.30 Parameter cloning {11.42} nonE (0), rEAd (1), Prog (2), AutO (3), boot (4) nonE (0) RW Txt NC *
0.31 Drive rated voltage {11.33} 200 (0), 400 (1), 575 (2), 690 (3) V RO Txt NC PT
0.32 Drive rated current {11.32} 0.00 to 9999.99A RO Uni NC PT
OL> Catch a spinning motor {6.09} 0 to 3 0 RW Uni US
0.33
VT> Rated rpm autotune {5.16} 0 to 2 0 RW Uni US
0.34 User security code {11.30} 0 to 999 0 RW Uni NC PT PS
AnSI (0)
0.35 Serial comms mode {11.24} rtU (1) RW Txt US
rtu (1)
300 (0), 600 (1), 1200 (2), 2400 (3), 4800 (4),
9600 (5), 19200 (6), 38400 (7),
0.36 Serial comms baud rate {11.25} 19200 (6) RW Txt US
57600 (8) Modbus RTU only,
115200 (9) Modbus RTU only
0.37 Serial comms address {11.23} 0 to 247 1 RW Uni US
200V drive: 75
All voltage 400V drive: 150
0.38 Current loop P gain {4.13} 0 to 30,000 RW Uni US
ratings: 20 575V drive: 180
690V drive: 215
200V drive: 1000
All voltage 400V drive: 2000
0.39 Current loop I gain {4.14} 0 to 30,000 RW Uni US
ratings 40 575V drive: 2400
690V drive: 3000
0.40 Autotune {5.12} 0 to 2 0 to 3 0 RW Uni
Maximum switching
0.41 {5.18} 3 (0), 4 (1), 6 (2), 8 (3), 12 (4), 16 (5) kHz 3 (0) 6 (2) RW Txt RA US
frequency
0.42 No. of motor poles {5.11} 0 to 60 (Auto to 120 pole) 0 (Auto) 6 POLE (3) RW Txt US
OL & VT> Motor rated power
{5.10} 0.000 to 1.000 0.850 RW Uni US
0.43 factor
SV> Encoder phase angle {3.25} 0.0 to 359.9° 0.0 RW Uni US
200V drive: 230
400V drive: EUR> 400, USA> 460
0.44 Motor rated voltage {5.09} 0 to AC_voltage_set_max V RW Uni RA US
575V drive: 575
690V drive: 690
EUR>
OL & VT> Motor rated full 0 to 180,000 0.00 to EUR> 1,500 1,450.00
{5.08} RW Uni US
load speed (rpm) rpm 40,000.00 rpm USA> 1,800 USA>
0.45 1,770.00
SV> Motor thermal time
{4.15} 0.0 to 400.0 20.0 RW Uni US
constant
0.46 Motor rated current {5.07} 0 to Rated_current_max A Drive rated current [11.32] RW Uni RA US
0 to 3,000.0 0 to 1,250.0 EUR> 50.0
0.47 Rated frequency {5.06} RW Uni US
Hz Hz USA> 60.0
OPEn LP (1), CL VECt (2),
0.48 Operating mode selector {11.31} OPEn LP (1) CL VECt (2) SErVO (3) RW Txt NC PT
SErVO (3), rEgEn (4)
0.49 Security status {11.44} L1 (0), L2 (1), Loc (2) RW Txt PT US
0.50 Software version {11.29} 1.00 to 99.99 RO Uni NC PT
* Modes 1 and 2 are not user saved, Modes 0, 3 and 4 are user saved
Key:
Coding Attribute Coding Attribute

OL Open loop Rating dependant: this parameter is likely to have different
CL Closed loop vector and Servo values and ranges with drives of different voltage and
RA current ratings. This parameters is not transferred by
VT Closed loop vector
SMARTCARDs when the rating of the destination drive is
SV Servo different from the source drive.
{X.XX} Cloned advanced parameter Not cloned: not transferred to or from SMARTCARDs
RW Read/write: can be written by the user NC
during cloning.
RO Read only: can only be read by the user PT Protected: cannot be used as a destination.
Bit 1 bit parameter: ‘On’ or ‘OFF’ on the display User save: saved in drive EEPROM when the user initiates
US
Bi Bipolar parameter a parameter save.
Uni Unipolar parameter Power-down save: automatically saved in drive EEPROM
PS
Txt Text: the parameter uses text strings instead of numbers. at power-down.
Filtered: some parameters which can have rapidly changing
FI values are filtered when displayed on the drive keypad for
easy viewing.
Destination: indicates that this parameter can be a
DE
destination parameter.


Figure 6-1 Menu 0 logic diagram
The function of the two digital inputs are controlled by the setting of Pr 0.05 (reference selector). See table below for details.
Analog reference
Analog input 2 Analog input 2

offset trim destination
Any
0.13 0.20 unprotected
variable
parameter
Analog input + Analog
2 mode ??.?? reference 2
+
0.19 1.37 Reference
0.05
selector
??.??
OR
Bipolar
reference
select
0.24
Preset frequency
reference
Preset
0.24
frequency 1
A1.A2
Preset
0.25 A1.Pr
frequency 2
Preset A2.Pr
0.26
frequency 3
Pr
Open Loop only
Preset PAd
0.27
frequency 4 Prc
Keypad reference
0.23
Jog reference
Enable forward /
0.28
reverse key Digital inputs T28 & T29
Pr 0.05 T28 T29

Preset reference A1.A2 Local/Remote Jog
A1.Pr Preset reference selectors
A2.Pr Preset reference selectors
Pr Preset reference selectors
PAd Local/Remote Jog
Prc Local/Remote Jog
Key
Input Read-write (RW)

terminals 0.XX
parameter
Output 0.XX Read-only (RO)

terminals parameter
The parameters are all shown in their default settings

RUN RUN OL> FREQUENCY

FORWARD REVERSE RESET CL> SPEED TORQUE AT ZERO SPEED
Analog outputs Digital output
Motor control
Maximum Current
frequency/ 0.06
limit
speed clamp
0.14 Torque mode
0.02 Ramp selector
enable
Minimum 0.16
frequency/ 0.33
speed clamp
0.01
CL>
Current demand
0.17
filter time
Closed loop only
constant
Motor parameters
0.42 ~ 0.47
Ramps
No. of poles
Power factor
Rated voltage
CL> Speed-loop PID gains Rated speed
Rated current
Rated frequency
0.07 Speed-loop SV> Motor thermal
proportional time constant
gain
0.03
Acceleration 0.08 Speed-loop
rate integral gain
OL> Motor-voltage control

0.04
Deceleration 0.07 Drive
rate Voltage mode
Speed-loop selector
0.10
0.15 0.09 derivative
gain 0.08
Ramp mode
selector Estimated
Boost voltage
motor
speed _ +
0.09
Dynamic V/f
Motor speed select
0.10
Power stage _
PWM switching +
0.41
frequency
Drive encoder 0.11 Drive output
0.27 frequency
ppr
Overspeed
0.26
threshold OL & VT> Total motor
Motor active current
current 0.13 0.12
Magnetising
15 way sub-D
current
connector
Resistor
optional

6.2 Full descriptions 0.02 {1.06} Maximum reference clamp

6.2.1 Parameter x.00 RW Uni US
0.00 {x.00} Parameter zero EUR> 50.0
OL Ú 0 to 3,000.0Hz Ö USA> 60.0
RW Uni
EUR> 1,500.0
Ú 0 to 32,767 Ö 0 VT
CL Ú Speed_limit_max rpm Ö USA> 1,800.0
SV 3,000.0
Pr x.00 is available in all menus and has the following functions.
Value Action (The drive has additional over-speed protection.)

Save parameters when under voltage is not active (Pr 10.16 Open-loop
1000
= 0) and 48V supply is not active (Pr 6.44 = 0). Set Pr 0.02 at the required maximum output frequency for both
1001 Save parameters under all conditions directions of rotation. The drive speed reference is scaled between Pr
0.01 and Pr 0.02. [0.02] is a nominal value; slip compensation may
1070 Reset all option modules
cause the actual frequency to be higher.
1233 Load standard defaults
Closed-loop
1244 Load US defaults
Set Pr 0.02 at the required maximum motor speed for both directions of
1253 Change drive mode with standard defaults
rotation. The drive speed reference is scaled between Pr 0.01 and Pr
1254 Change drive mode with US defaults
0.02.
Change drive mode with standard defaults (excluding menus
1255 For operating at high speeds see section 8.6 High speed operation on
15 to 20)
page 98.
Change drive mode with US defaults (excluding menus 15 to
1256
20) 6.2.3 Ramps, speed reference selection, current
Transfer drive EEPROM data to a SMART Card block limit
3yyy*
number yyy 0.03 {2.11} Acceleration rate
Transfer drive data as difference from defaults to SMART
4yyy* RW Uni US
Card block number yyy
Transfer drive ladder program to SMART Card block number
OL Ú 0.0 to 3,200.0 s/100Hz Ö 5.0
5yyy*
yyy VT 2.000
0.000 to 3,200.000
6yyy* Transfer SMART Card data block number yyy to the drive CL Ú s/1,000rpm
Ö
SV 0.0200
7yyy* Erase SMART Card data block number yyy
Compare drive parameters with SMART Card data block Set Pr 0.03 at the required rate of acceleration.
8yyy*
number yyy Note that larger values produce lower acceleration. The rate applies in
9999* Erase SMART Card data block 1 to 499 both directions of rotation.
9888* Set SMART Card read-only flag
9777* Clear SMART Card read-only flag 0.04 {2.21} Deceleration rate
Transfer electronic nameplate parameters to/from drive from/ RW Uni US
110zy to encoder. See the Unidrive SP Advanced User Guide for OL Ú 0.0 to 3,200.0 s/100Hz Ö 10.0
more information on this function.
12000** Display non-default values only 0.000 to 3,200.000 VT 2.000
CL Ú s/1,000rpm
Ö
12001** Display destination parameters only SV 0.0200
* See Chapter 9 SMARTCARD operation on page 100 for more
Set Pr 0.04 at the required rate of deceleration.
information of these functions.
Note that larger values produce lower deceleration. The rate applies in
** These functions do not require a drive reset to become active. All
both directions of rotation.
other functions require a drive reset to initiate the function.
6.2.2 Speed limits 0.05 {1.14} Reference selector
0.01 {1.07} Minimum reference clamp RW Txt NC US
RW Bi PT US Ú 0 to 5 Ö A1.A2 (0)
OL Ú ±3,000.0Hz Ö 0.0
Use Pr 0.05 to select the required frequency/speed reference as follows:
CL Ú ±Speed_limit_max rpm Ö 0.0
Setting
(When the drive is jogging, [0.01] has no effect.) Analog input 1 OR analog input 2 selectable by digital
A1.A2 0
Open-loop input, terminal 28
Set Pr 0.01 at the required minimum output frequency of the drive for Analog input 1 OR preset frequency/speed selectable
A1.Pr 1
both directions of rotation. The drive speed reference is scaled between by digital input, terminal 28 and 29
Pr 0.01 and Pr 0.02. [0.01] is a nominal value; slip compensation may Analog input 2 OR preset frequency/speed selectable
A2.Pr 2
cause the actual frequency to be higher. by digital input, terminal 28 and 29
Closed-loop Pr 3 Pre-set frequency/speed
Set Pr 0.01 at the required minimum motor speed for both directions of Pad 4 Keypad reference
rotation. The drive speed reference is scaled between Pr 0.01 and Pr Prc 5 Precision reference
0.02. Setting Pr 0.05 to 1, 2 or 3 will re-configure T28 and T29. Refer to

Pr 8.39 (Pr 0.16 in OL) to disable this function.

0.08 {3.11} Speed controller integral gain
0.06 {4.07} Current Limit RW Uni US
RW Uni RA US 0.00 to 655.35
CL Ú 1/rad
Ö 1.00
OL 165.0
Ú 0 to Current_limit_max % Ö Closed-loop
CL 175.0
Pr 0.08 (3.11) operates in the feed-forward path of the speed-control
Pr 0.06 limits the maximum output current of the drive (and hence loop in the drive. See Figure 11-4 on page 120 for a schematic of the
maximum motor torque) to protect the drive and motor from overload. speed controller. For information on setting up the speed controller
Set Pr 0.06 at the required maximum torque as a percentage of the rated gains, refer to Chapter 8 Optimisation on page 90.
torque of the motor, as follows:
0.09 {5.13} Dynamic V/F / flux optimise select
TR
[ 0.06 ] = -------------------- × 100 (%) RW Bit US
T RATED
OL Ú OFF (0) or On (1) Ö OFF (0)
Where:
TR Required maximum torque Open-loop
TRATED Motor rated torque Set Pr 0.09 (5.13) at 0 when the V/f characteristic applied to the motor is
to be fixed. It is then based on the rated voltage and frequency of the
motor.
Alternatively, set 0.06 at the required maximum active (torque-
producing) current as a percentage of the rated active current of the Set Pr 0.09 at 1 when reduced power dissipation is required in the motor
motor, as follows: when it is lightly loaded. The V/f characteristic is then variable resulting
in the motor voltage being proportionally reduced for lower motor
I R
[ 0.06 ] = ------------------- × 100 (%)
currents. Figure 6-2 shows the change in V/f slope when the motor
IRATED current is reduced.
Where:
Figure 6-2 Fixed and variable V/f characteristics
IR Required maximum active current
IRATED Motor rated active current
6.2.4 Voltage boost, (open-loop), Speed-loop PID Motor

voltage
gains (closed-loop)
AC supply
0.07 {5.14} Voltage mode selector voltage
IMOTOR
RW Txt US
Ur_S (0), Ur (1), Fd (2),
OL Ú Ur_Auto (3), Ur_I (4), Ö Ur_I (4)
SrE (5)
Open-loop
There are six voltage modes available, which fall into two categories, Frequency
vector control and fixed boost. For further details, refer to section Pr
0.07 {5.14} Voltage mode on page 91.
0.07 {3.10} Speed controller proportional gain 0.09 {3.12} Speed controller differential feedback gain
RW Uni US RW Uni US
0.0000 to 6.5535 CL Ú 0.00000 to 0.65535(s) Ö 0.00000
CL Ú Ö 0.0100
1/rad s-1
Closed-loop
Closed-loop Pr 0.09 (3.12) operates in the feedback path of the speed-control loop in
Pr 0.07 (3.10) operates in the feed-forward path of the speed-control the drive. See Figure 11-4 on page 120 for a schematic of the speed
loop in the drive. See Figure 11-4 on page 120 for a schematic of the controller. For information on setting up the speed controller gains, refer
speed controller. For information on setting up the speed controller to Chapter 8 Optimisation on page 90.
gains, refer to Chapter 8 Optimisation on page 90.
6.2.5 Monitoring
0.08 {5.15} Low frequency voltage boost 0.10 {5.04} Estimated motor speed
RW Uni US RO Bit FI NC PT
0.0 to 25.0% of motor OL Ú ±180,000 rpm Ö
OL Ú rated voltage
Ö 3.0
Open-loop
Open-loop
Pr 0.10 (5.04) indicates the value of motor speed that is estimated from
When 0.07 Voltage mode selector is set at Fd or SrE, set Pr 0.08 (5.15) the following:
at the required value for the motor to run reliably at low speeds.
0.12 Post-ramp frequency reference
Excessive values of Pr 0.08 can cause the motor to be overheated. 0.42 Motor - no. of poles

0.10 {3.02} Motor speed 0.13 {7.07} Analog input 1 offset trim
RO Bi FI NC PT RW Bi US
CL Ú ±Speed_max rpm Ö SV Ú ±10,000 % Ö 0.000
Closed-loop Servo
Pr 0.10 (3.02) indicates the value of motor speed that is obtained from Pr 0.13 can be used to trim out any offset in the user signal to analog
the speed feedback. input 1.
0.11 {5.01} Drive output frequency 6.2.6 Jog reference, Ramp mode selector, Stop and
torque mode selectors
RO Bi FI NC PT
0.14 {4.11} Torque mode selector
OL
Ú ±Speed_freq_max Hz Ö RW Uni US
VT
OL Ú 0 to 1 Ö
Speed control (0)
Open-loop & closed loop vector CL Ú 0 to 4 Ö
Pr 0.11 displays the frequency at the drive output.
Pr 0.14 is used to select the required control mode of the drive as
0.11 {3.29} Drive encoder position follows:
RO Uni FI NC PT Setting Open-Loop Closed-Loop
0 to 65,535 0 Frequency control Speed control
SV Ú Ö
1/216ths of a revolution 1 Torque control Torque control
Servo 2 Torque control with speed override
Pr 0.11 displays the position of the encoder in mechanical values of 0 to 3 Coiler/uncoiler mode
65,535. There are 65,536 units to one mechanical revolution. Speed control with torque feed-
4
forward
0.12 {4.01} Total motor current
RO Uni FI NC PT 0.15 {2.04} Ramp mode select
Ú 0 to Drive_current_max A Ö RW Txt US
FASt (0)
Pr 0.12 displays the rms value of the output current of the drive in each OL Ú Std (1) Ö
of the three phases. The phase currents consist of an active component Std.hV (2) Std (1)
and a reactive component, which can form a resultant current vector as
FASt (0)
shown in the following diagram. CL Ú Std (1)
Ö
Pr 0.15 sets the ramp mode of the drive as shown below:

Active Total current
0: Fast ramp
current
Fast ramp is used where the deceleration follows the programmed
deceleration rate subject to current limits. This mode must be used if a
braking resistor is connected to the drive.
1: Standard ramp
Standard ramp is used. During deceleration, if the voltage rises to the
standard ramp level (Pr 2.08) it causes a controller to operate, the output
Magnetising current of which changes the demanded load current in the motor. As the
controller regulates the link voltage, the motor deceleration increases as
The active current is the torque producing current and the reactive the speed approaches zero speed. When the motor deceleration rate
current is the magnetising or flux-producing current. reaches the programmed deceleration rate the controller ceases to
operate and the drive continues to decelerate at the programmed rate. If
0.13 {4.02} Motor active current the standard ramp voltage (Pr 2.08) is set lower than the nominal DC
RO Bi FI NC PT bus level the drive will not decelerate the motor, but it will coast to rest.
The output of the ramp controller (when active) is a current demand that
OL is fed to the frequency changing current controller (Open-loop modes) or
Ú ±Drive_current_max A Ö
VT the torque producing current controller (Closed-loop vector or Servo
modes). The gain of these controllers can be modified with Pr 4.13 and
Open-loop & closed loop vector Pr 4.14.
When the motor is being driven below its rated speed, the torque is
proportional to [0.13].

Pr 0.05. In order to manually set-up this parameter, the T28 and T29
Controller auto-selection disable (Pr 0.16) must be set.
operational
0.17 {4.12} Current demand filter time constant

DC Bus voltage
RW Uni US
CL Ú 0.0 to 25.0 ms Ö 0.0
Closed-loop
Motor Speed A first order filter, with a time constant defined by Pr 0.17, is provided on
the current demand to reduce acoustic noise and vibration produced as
Programmed
deceleration a result of position feedback quantisation noise. The filter introduces a
rate lag in the speed loop, and so the speed loop gains may need to be
reduced to maintain stability as the filter time constant is increased.
0.18 {8.29} Positive logic select

t RW Bit PT US
2: Standard ramp with motor voltage boost Ú OFF (0) or On (1) Ö On (1)
This mode is the same as normal standard ramp mode except that the
motor voltage is boosted by 20%. This increases the losses in the motor, Pr 0.18 sets the logic polarity for digital inputs and digital outputs. This
dissipating some of the mechanical energy as heat giving faster does not affect the drive enable input or the relay output.
deceleration.
0.19 {7.11} Analog input 2 mode
0.16 {8.39} T28 and T29 auto-selection disable RW Txt US
RW Bit US
Ú 0 to 6 Ö VOLt (6)
OL Ú OFF (0) or On (1) Ö OFF (0)
In modes 2 & 3 a current loop loss trip is generated if the current falls
Open-loop below 3mA.
When Pr 0.16 is set to 0, digital inputs T28 and T29 are set up In modes 2 & 4 the analog input level goes to 0.0% if the input current
automatically with destinations according to the setting of the reference falls below 4mA.
select Pr 0.05.
Pr Pr
Terminal 28 Terminal 29 Mode Comments
Reference select 0.05 value string
function function
0 0-20 0 - 20mA
Reference selection by
A1.A2 (0) Local / remote selector Jog select 1 20-0 20 - 0mA
terminal input
Analog reference 1 or 2 4-20 4 - 20mA with trip on loss Trip if I < 3mA
A1.Pr (1) presets selected by Preset select bit 0 Preset select bit 1
terminal input 3 20-4 20 - 4mA with trip on loss Trip if I < 3mA
Analog reference 2 or 4 4-20.tr 4 - 20mA with no trip on loss 0.0% if I ≤ 4mA
A2.Pr (2) presets selected by Preset select bit 0 Preset select bit 1 5 20-4.tr 20 – 4mA with no trip on loss 100% if I ≤ 4mA
terminal input
Preset reference selected 6 VOLt Voltage mode
Pr (3) Preset select bit 0 Preset select bit 1
by terminal input
Keypad reference
Pad (4) Local / remote selector Jog select 0.20 {7.14} Analog input 2 destination
selected
Precision reference RW Uni DE PT US
Prc (5) Local / remote selector Jog select
selected
Setting Pr 0.16 to 1 disables this automatic set-up, allowing the user to Ú Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51 Ö Pr 1.37
define the function of digital inputs T28 and T29.
Pr 0.20 sets the destination of analog input 2.
0.16 {2.02} Ramp enable
RW Bit US
CL Ú OFF (0) or On (1) Ö On (1)
Setting Pr 0.16 to 0 allows the user to disable the ramps. This is

generally used when the drive is required to closely follow a speed
reference which already contains acceleration and deceleration ramps.
0.17 {8.26} T29 digital input destination

RW Uni DE PT US
OL Ú Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51 Ö Pr 6.31
Open-loop
Pr 0.17 sets the destination of digital input T29. This parameter is
normally set-up automatically according to the reference selected by

0.21 {7.15} Analog input 3 destination 0.25 {1.22} Preset reference 2

RW Txt PT US RW Bi US
Ú 0 to 9 Ö VOLt (6) Ú ±Speed_limit_max rpm Ö 0.0
In modes 2 & 3 a current loop loss trip is generated if the current falls
below 3mA. 0.26 {1.23} Preset reference 3
In modes 2 & 4 the analog input level goes to 0.0% if the input current RW Bi US
falls below 4mA. OL Ú ±Speed_freq_max Hz/rpm Ö 0.0
Pr Pr Open-loop
Mode Comments
value string If the preset reference has been selected (see Pr 0.05), the speed at
0 0-20 0 - 20mA which the motor runs is determined by these parameters.
1 20-0 20 - 0mA
2 4-20 4 - 20mA with trip on loss Trip if I < 3mA 0.26 {3.08} Overspeed threshold
3 20-4 20 - 4mA with trip on loss Trip if I < 3mA RW Uni US
4 4-20.tr 4 - 20mA with no trip on loss 0.0% if I ≤ 4mA
CL Ú 0 to 40,000 rpm Ö 0
5 20-4.tr 20 - 4mA with no trip on loss 100% if I ≤ 4mA
6 VOLt Voltage mode Closed-loop
Th trip if R > 3K3 If the speed feedback (Pr 3.02) exceeds this level in either direction, an
Thermistor mode with short-
7 th.SC Th reset if R < 1K8 overspeed trip is produced. If this parameter is set to zero, the
circuit detection
ThS trip if R < 50R overspeed threshold is automatically set to 120% x
Thermistor mode with no Th trip if R > 3K3 SPEED_FREQ_MAX.
8 th
short-circuit detection Th reset if R < 1K8
Thermistor mode with 0.27 {1.24} Preset reference 4
9 th.diSp
display only and no trip RW Bi US
OL Ú ±Speed_freq_max Hz/rpm Ö 0.0
0.22 {1.10} Bipolar reference select
Open-loop
RW Bit US
Refer to Pr 0.24 to Pr 0.26.
Ú OFF (0) or On (1) Ö OFF (0)
Pr 0.22 determines whether the reference is uni-polar or bi-polar as 0.27 {3.34} Drive encoder lines per revolution
follows: RW Uni US
Pr 0.22 Function VT Ú Ö 1024
0 to 50,000
SV Ú Ö 4096
0 Unipolar speed/frequency reference
Closed-loop
Enter in Pr 0.27 the number of lines per revolution of the drive encoder.
1 Bipolar speed/frequency reference
0.28 {6.13} Keypad fwd/rev key enable
RW Bit US
0.23 {1.05} Jog reference Ú OFF (0) or On (1) Ö OFF (0)

RW Uni US
When a keypad is fitted, this parameter enables the forward/reverse key.
OL Ú 0 to 400.0 Hz Ö
0.0 0.29 {11.36} SMARTCARD parameter data
CL Ú 0 to 4,000.0 rpm Ö
RO Uni NC PT US
Enter the required value of jog frequency/speed.
Ú 0 to 999 Ö 0
The frequency/speed limits affect the drive when jogging as follows:
This parameter shows the number of the data block last transferred from
Frequency-limit parameter Limit applies
a SMARTCARD to the drive.
Pr 0.01 Minimum reference clamp No
Pr 0.02 Maximum reference clamp Yes
0.24 {1.21} Preset reference 1

RW Bi US
Ú ±Speed_limit_max rpm Ö 0.0

0.30 {11.42} Parameter cloning 0.33 {5.16} Rated rpm autotune

RW Txt NC * RW Uni US
Ú 0 to 4 Ö nonE (0) VT Ú 0 to 2 Ö 0
* Modes 1 and 2 are not user saved, Modes 0, 3 and 4 are user saved. Closed-loop vector
The motor rated full load rpm parameter (Pr 0.45) in conjunction with the
NOTE N motor rated frequency parameter (Pr 0.46) defines the full load slip of the
If Pr 0.30 is equal to 1 or 2 this value is not transferred to the EPROM or motor. The slip is used in the motor model for closed-loop vector control.
the drive. If Pr 0.30 is set to a 3 or 4 the value is transferred.
The full load slip of the motor varies with rotor resistance which can vary
significantly with motor temperature. When Pr 0.33 is set to 1 or 2, the
Pr Pr drive can automatically sense if the value of slip defined by Pr 0.45 and
Comment
String value Pr 0.46 has been set incorrectly or has varied with motor temperature. If
nonE 0 Inactive the value is incorrect parameter Pr 0.45 is automatically adjusted. The
adjusted value in Pr 0.45 is not saved at power-down. If the new value is
rEAd 1 Read parameter set from the SMARTCARD
required at the next power-up it must be saved by the user.
Prog 2 Programming a parameter set to the SMARTCARD
Automatic optimisation is only enabled when the speed is above 12.5%
Auto 3 Auto save of rated speed, and when the load on the motor load rises above 62.5%
boot 4 Boot mode rated load. Optimisation is disabled again if the load falls below 50% of
For further information, please refer to Chapter 9 SMARTCARD rated load.
operation on page 100. For best optimisation results the correct values of stator resistance (Pr
5.17), transient inductance (Pr 5.24), stator inductance (Pr 5.25) and
0.31 {11.33} Drive rated voltage saturation breakpoints (Pr 5.29, Pr 5.30) should be stored in the relevant
RO Txt NC PT parameters. These values can be obtained by the drive during an
autotune (see Pr 0.40 for further details).
200V (0)
400V (1) Rated rpm auto-tune is not available if the drive is not using external
Ú 575V (2)
Ö position/speed feedback.
690V (3) The gain of the optimiser, and hence the speed with which it converges,
can be set at a normal low level when Pr 0.33 is set to 1. If this
Pr 0.31 indicates the voltage rating of the drive. parameter is set to 2 the gain is increased by a factor of 16 to give faster
convergence.
0.32 {11.32} Drive rated current
RO Uni NC PT 0.34 {11.30} User security code
Ú 0.00 to 9,999.99 A Ö RW Uni NC PT PS
Ú 0 to 999 Ö 0
Pr 0.32 indicates the maximum continuous Heavy Duty current rating
(which will allow for an overload of 150%). If any number other than 0 is programmed into this parameter, user
security is applied so that no parameters except parameter 0.49 can be
0.33 {6.09} Catch a spinning motor adjusted with the LED keypad. When this parameter is read via an LED
RW Uni US keypad it appears as zero.
OL Ú 0 to 3 Ö 0 For further details refer to section 5.9.3 User Security on page 65.
Open-loop 0.35 {11.24} Serial comms mode

When the drive is enabled with Pr 0.33 = 0, the output frequency starts at RW Txt US
zero and ramps to the required reference. When the drive is enabled AnSI (0)
Ú rtu (1)
Ö rtU (1)
when Pr 0.33 has a non-zero value, the drive performs a start-up test to
determine the motor speed and then sets the initial output frequency to
This parameter defines the communications protocol used by the 485
the synchronous frequency of the motor. Restrictions may be placed on
comms port on the drive. This parameter can be changed via the drive
the frequencies detected by the drive as follows: keypad, via a Solutions Module or via the comms interface itself. If it is
changed via the comms interface, the response to the command uses
0.33 Function the original protocol. The master should wait at least 20ms before send a
0 Disabled new message using the new protocol. (Note: ANSI uses 7 data bits, 1
1 Detect all frequencies stop bit and even parity; Modbus RTU uses 8 data bits, 2 stops bits and
2 Detect positive frequencies only no parity.)
3 Detect negative frequencies only Comms value String Communications mode
0 AnSI ANSI
1 rtU Modbus RTU protocol
ANSIx3.28 protocol
Full details of the CT ANSI communications protocol are the Unidrive SP
Advanced User Guide.
Modbus RTU protocol
Full details of the CT implementation of Modbus RTU are given in the
Unidrive SP Advanced User Guide.

0.36 {11.25} Serial comms baud rate 0.40 {5.12} Autotune

RW Txt US RW Uni
300 (0), 600 (1), 1200 (2), OL Ú 0 to 2 Ö 0
2400 (3), 4800 (4), 9600 (5),
Ú 19200 (6), 38400 (7),
Ö 19200 (6) VT Ú 0 to 4 Ö 0
57600 (8)*, 115200 (9)*
SV Ú 0 to 6 Ö 0
* only applicable to Modbus RTU mode
Open-Loop
This parameter can be changed via the drive keypad, via a Solutions
There are two autotune tests available in open loop mode, a stationary
Module or via the comms interface itself. If it is changed via the comms
and a rotating test. A rotating autotune should be used whenever
interface, the response to the command uses the original baud rate. The
master should wait at least 20ms before send a new message using the possible, so the measured value of power factor of the motor is used by
the drive.
new baud rate.
• The stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it
0.37 {11.23} Serial address is not possible to remove the load from the motor shaft.
• A rotating autotune first performs a stationary autotune, before
RW Uni US
rotating the motor at 2/3 base speed in the forward direction for
Ú 0 to 247 Ö 1 several seconds. The motor must be free from load for the rotating
autotune.
Used to define the unique address for the drive for the serial interface. To perform an autotune, set Pr 0.40 to 1 for a stationary test or 2 for a
The drive is always a slave. rotating test, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on
Modbus RTU terminal 31) and a run signal (on terminal 26 or 27).
When the Modbus RTU protocol is used addresses between 0 and 247 Following the completion of an autotune test, either the run signal or the
are permitted. Address 0 is used to globally address all slaves, and so enable signal must be removed before the drive can then be made to run
this address should not be set in this parameter at the required reference.
ANSI For further information refer to section Pr 0.40 {5.12} Autotune on
When the ANSI protocol is used the first digit is the group and the page 90.
second digit is the address within a group. The maximum permitted Closed-Loop
group number is 9 and the maximum permitted address within a group is
9. Therefore, Pr 0.37 is limited to 99 in this mode. The value 00 is used There are three autotune tests available in closed loop vector mode, a
to globally address all slaves on the system, and x0 is used to address stationary test, a rotating test and an inertia measurement test. A
all slaves of group x, therefore these addresses should not be set in this stationary autotune will give moderate performance whereas a rotating
parameter. autotune will give improved performance as it measures the actual
values of the motor parameters required by the drive. An inertia
measurement test should be performed separately to a stationary or
0.38 {4.13} Current loop P gain
rotating autotune.
RW Uni US
• The stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it
OL Ú Ö All voltage ratings: 20 is not possible to remove the load from the motor shaft.
200V drive: 75 • A rotating autotune first performs a stationary autotune, before
0 to 30,000 400V drive: 150 rotating the motor at 2/3 base speed in the forward direction for
CL Ú Ö 575V drive: 180 approximately 30 seconds. The motor must be free from load for the
690V drive: 215 rotating autotune.
• The inertia measurement test can measure the total inertia of the
load and the motor. This is used to set the speed loop gains (see
0.39 {4.14} Current loop I gain Speed loop gains, below) and to provide torque feed forwards when
RW Uni US required during acceleration. During the inertia measurement test
the motor speed changes from 1/3 to 2/3 rated speed in the forward
OL Ú Ö All voltage ratings: 40
direction several times. The motor can be loaded with a constant
200V drive: 1,000 torque load and still give an accurate result, however, non-linear
0 to 30,000 400V drive: 2,000
CL Ú Ö loads and loads that change with speed will cause measurement
575V drive: 2,400 errors.
690V drive: 3,000 To perform an autotune, set Pr 0.40 to 1 for a stationary test, 2 for a
rotating test, or 3 for an inertia measurement test and provide the drive
These parameters control the proportional and integral gains of the
with both an enable signal (on terminal 31) and a run signal (on terminal
current controller used in the open loop drive. The current controller
26 or 27).
either provides current limits or closed loop torque control by modifying
the drive output frequency. The control loop is also used in its torque Following the completion of an autotune test, either the run signal or the
mode during mains loss, or when the controlled mode standard ramp is enable signal must be removed before the drive can then be made to run
active and the drive is decelerating, to regulate the flow of current into at the required reference.
the drive. For further information refer to section Pr 0.40 {5.12} Autotune on
page 93.
Servo
There are three autotune tests available in Servo mode, a short low
speed test, a normal low speed test and an inertia measurement test. A
normal low speed should be done where possible as the drive measures
the stator resistance and inductance of the motor, and from these

calculates the current loop gains. An inertia measurement test should be Closed-loop vector
performed separately to a short low speed or normal low speed This parameter must be set correctly for the vector control algorithms to
autotune. operate correctly. When auto is selected, the number of motor poles is
• A short low speed test will rotate the motor by 2 electrical revolutions automatically calculated from the rated frequency (Pr 0.47) and the rated
(i.e. up to 2 mechanical revolutions) in the forward direction, and full load rpm (Pr 0.45). The number of poles = 120 * rated frequency /
measure the encoder phase angle. The motor must be free from rpm rounded to the nearest even number.
load for this test. Servo
• A normal low speed test will rotate the motor by 2 electrical
This parameter must be set correctly for the vector control algorithms to
revolutions (i.e. up to 2 mechanical revolutions) in the forward
direction. This test measures the encoder phase angle and updates operate correctly. When auto is selected the number of poles is set to 6.
other parameters including the current loop gains. The motor must
be free from load for this test. 0.43 {5.10} Motor rated power factor
• The inertia measurement test can measure the total inertia of the RW Uni US
load and the motor. This is used to set the speed loop gains and to
OL Ú Ö
provide torque feed forwards when required during acceleration. 0.000 to 1.000 0.850
During the inertia measurement test the motor speed changes from VT Ú Ö
1
/3 to 2/3 rated speed in the forward direction several times. The
The power factor is the true power factor of the motor, i.e. the angle
motor can be loaded with a constant torque load and still give an
between the motor voltage and current.
accurate result, however, non-linear loads and loads that change
with speed will cause measurement errors. Open-loop vector
To perform an autotune, set Pr 0.40 to 1 for a short low speed test, 2 for The power factor is used in conjunction with the motor rated current (Pr
a normal low speed test, or 3 for an inertia measurement test and 0.46) to calculate the rated active current and magnetising current of the
provide the drive with both an enable signal (on terminal 31) and a run motor. The rated active current is used extensively to control the drive,
signal (on terminal 26 or 27). and the magnetising current is used in vector mode Rs compensation. It
Following the completion of an autotune test, either the run signal or the is important that this parameter is set up correctly.
enable signal must be removed before the drive can then be made to run This parameter is obtained by the drive during a rotational autotune. If a
at the required reference. stationary autotune is carried out, then the nameplate value should be
For further information refer to section Pr 0.40 {5.12} Autotune on entered in Pr 0.43.
page 95. Closed-loop vector
If the stator inductance (Pr 5.25) contains a non-zero value, the power
0.41 {5.18} Maximum switching frequency factor used by the drive is continuously calculated and used in the vector
RW Txt RA US control algorithms (this will not update Pr 0.43).
OL Ö 3 (0) If the stator inductance is set to zero (Pr 5.25) then the power factor
3 (0), 4 (1), 6 (2), 8 (3), written in Pr 0.43 is used in conjunction with the motor rated current and
Ú 12 (4), 16 (5) kHz
VT 3 (0) other motor parameters to calculate the rated active and magnetising
CL Ö
SV 6 (2) currents which are used in the vector control algorithm.
This parameter is obtained by the drive during a rotational autotune. If a
This parameter defines the required switching frequency. The drive may stationary autotune is carried out, then the nameplate value should be
automatically reduce the actual switching frequency (without changing entered in Pr 0.43.
this parameter) if the power stage becomes too hot. A thermal model of
the IGBT junction temperature is used based on the heatsink 0.43 {3.25} Encoder phase angle
temperature and an instantaneous temperature drop using the drive
RW Uni US
output current and switching frequency. The estimated IGBT junction
temperature is displayed in Pr 7.34. If the temperature exceeds 145°C SV Ú 0.0 to 359.9° Ö 0.0
the switching frequency is reduced if this is possible (i.e >3kHz).
Reducing the switching frequency reduces the drive losses and the The phase angle between the rotor flux in a servo motor and the
junction temperature displayed in Pr 7.34 also reduces. If the load encoder position is required for the motor to operate correctly. If the
condition persists the junction temperature may continue to rise again phase angle is known it can be set in this parameter by the user.
above 145°C and the drive cannot reduce the switching frequency Alternatively the drive can automatically measure the phase angle by
further the drive will initiate an ‘O.ht1’ trip. Every second the drive will performing a phasing test (see autotune in servo mode Pr 0.40). When
attempt to restore the switching frequency to the level set in Pr 0.41. the test is complete the new value is written to this parameter. The
encoder phase angle can be modified at any time and becomes effective
6.2.7 Motor parameters immediately. This parameter has a factory default value of 0.0, but is not
0.42 {5.11} No. of motor poles affected when defaults are loaded by the user.
RW Txt US
0.44 {5.09} Motor rated voltage
OL Ú Ö Auto (0) RW Uni RA US
0 to 60 (Auto to 120 Pole) VT Auto (0) 200V drive: 230
CL Ú Ö 400V drive: EUR> 400
SV 6 POLE (3) Ú 0 to AC_voltage_set_max V Ö USA> 460
575V drive: 575
Open-loop
690V drive: 690
This parameter is used in the calculation of motor speed, and in applying
the correct slip compensation. When auto is selected, the number of Open-loop & Closed-loop Vector
motor poles is automatically calculated from the rated frequency (Pr Enter the value from the rating plate of the motor.
0.47) and the rated full load rpm (Pr 0.45). The number of poles = 120 *
rated frequency / rpm rounded to the nearest even number.

0.45 {5.08} Motor rated full load speed (rpm) 0.47 {5.06} Rated frequency
RW Uni US RW Uni US
EUR> 1,500 OL Ú 0 to 3,000.0Hz Ö EUR> 50.0, USA> 60.0
OL Ú 0 to 180,000 rpm Ö USA> 1,800
EUR> 1,450.00
VT Ú 0 to 1,250.0Hz Ö EUR> 50.0, USA> 60.0
VT Ú 0.00 to 40,000.00 rpm Ö USA> 1,770.00
Open-loop & Closed-loop Vector
Open-loop Enter the value from the rating plate of the motor.
This is the speed at which the motor would rotate when supplied with its
base frequency at rated voltage, under rated load conditions (=
6.2.8 Operating-mode selection
synchronous speed - slip speed). Entering the correct value into this 0.48 {11.31} Operating mode selector
parameter allows the drive to increase the output frequency as a RW Txt NC PT
function of load in order to compensate for this speed drop.
OL 1
Slip compensation is disabled if Pr 0.45 is set to 0 or to synchronous
speed, or if Pr 5.27 is set to 0. Ú 1 to 4 Ö VT 2
If slip compensation is required this parameter should be set to the value SV 3
from the rating plate of the motor, which should give the correct rpm for a
hot machine. Sometimes it will be necessary to adjust this when the The settings for Pr 0.48 are as follows:
drive is commissioned because the nameplate value may be inaccurate.
Slip compensation will operate correctly both below base speed and Setting Operating mode
within the field weakening region. Slip compensation is normally used to OPEn LP 1 Open-loop
correct for the motor speed to prevent speed variation with load. The
CL VECt 2 Closed-loop Vector
rated load rpm can be set higher than synchronous speed to deliberately
SerVO 3 Servo
introduce speed droop. This can be useful to aid load sharing with
mechanically coupled motors. rEgEn 4 Regen
Closed loop vector This parameter defines the drive operating mode. Pr xx.00 must be set
to 1253 (European defaults) or 1254 (USA defaults) before this
Rated load rpm is used with motor rated frequency to determine the full parameter can be changed. When the drive is reset to implement any
load slip of the motor which is used by the vector control algorithm.
change in this parameter, the default settings of all parameters will be
Incorrect setting of this parameter can result in the following:
set according to the drive operating mode selected and saved in
• Reduced efficiency of motor operation memory.
• Reduction of maximum torque available from the motor
• Failure to reach maximum speed 6.2.9 Status information
• Over-current trips 0.49 {11.44} Security status
• Reduced transient performance
• Inaccurate control of absolute torque in torque control modes RW Txt PT US
The nameplate value is normally the value for a hot machine, however, Ú 0 to 2 Ö 0
some adjustment may be required when the drive is commissioned if the
nameplate value is inaccurate. The rated full load rpm can be optimised This parameter controls access via the drive LED keypad as follows:
by the drive (For further information, refer to section 8.1.2 Closed loop
Value String Action
vector motor control on page 92).
0 L1 Only menu 0 can be accessed
1 L2 All menus can be accessed
0.45 {4.15} Motor thermal time constant
Lock user security when drive is reset.
RW Uni US 2 Loc
(This parameter is set to L1 after reset.)
SV Ú 0 to 400.0 Ö 20.0 The LED keypad can adjust this parameter even when user security is
set.
Servo
Pr 0.45 is the motor thermal time constant of the motor, and is used 0.50 {11.29} Software version number
(along with the motor rated current Pr 0.46, and total motor current Pr
0.12) in the thermal model of the motor in applying thermal protection to RO Uni NC PT
the motor. Ú 1.00 to 99.99 Ö
Setting this parameter to 0 disables the motor thermal protection.
The parameter displays the software version of the drive.
For further details, refer to section 8.4 Motor thermal protection on
page 97.
0.46 {5.07} Motor rated current

RW Uni RA US
Ú 0 to Rated_current_max A Ö Drive rated current [11.32]
Enter the name-plate value for the motor rated current.

Safety Product Mechanical Electrical Getting Basic Running Smartcard Onboard Advanced Technical UL Listing
Information Information Installation Installation Started Parameters the motor operation PLC Parameters Data Information
7 Running the motor Speed and position feedback

Suitable devices are:
• Incremental encoder (A, B or F, D with or without Z) with
This chapter takes the new user through all the essential steps to
commutation signals (U, V, W)
running a motor for the first time, in each of the possible operating
• Incremental encoder with forward and reverse outputs (F, R with or
modes.
without Z) and commutation outputs (U, V, W)
For information on tuning the drive for the best performance, see • SINCOS encoder (with Stegmann Hiperface or EnDat
Chapter 8 Optimisation . communications protocols or SSI)
• SSI absolute encoder (Gray code or binary)
• EnDat absolute encoder
Ensure that no damage or safety hazard could arise from the
motor starting unexpectedly. For Solutions Module terminal information see section 11.15 Menus 15,
WARNING 16 and 17: Solutions Module set-up on page 161 or the appropriate
Solutions Module option user guide.
The values of the motor parameters affect the protection of
the motor. 7.2 Changing the operating mode
The default values in the drive should not be relied upon. Changing the operating mode returns all parameters to their default
CAUTION
It is essential that the correct value is entered in Pr 0.46 Motor value, including the motor parameters. (Pr 0.49 and Pr 0.34 are not
rated current. This affects the thermal protection of the motor. affected by this procedure.)
If the keypad mode has been used previously, ensure that Procedure
Use the following procedure only if a different operating mode is
the keypad reference has been set to 0 using the required:
buttons as if the drive is started using the keypad it will run to 1. Enter either of the following values in Pr xx.00, as appropriate:
CAUTION the speed defined by the keypad reference (Pr 0.35). 1253 (Europe, 50Hz AC supply frequency)
1254 (USA, 60Hz AC supply frequency)
If the intended maximum speed affects the safety of the 2. Change the setting of Pr 0.48 as follows:
machinery, additional independent over-speed protection
must be used. Pr 0.48 setting Operating mode
WARNING
1 Open-loop
7.1 Quick start Connections
7.1.1 Basic requirements
This section shows the basic connections which must be made for the 2 Closed-loop Vector
drive to run in the required mode. For minimal parameter settings to run
in each mode please see the relevant part of section 7.3 Quick Start
commissioning on page 84. 3 Closed-loop Servo
Table 7-1 Minimum control connection requirements for each
control mode Regen (See the Unidrive SP Regen
4 User Guide for more information
Drive control method Requirements
about operating in this mode)
Drive Enable
Speed reference
Terminal mode
Run forward or run reverse The figures in the second column apply when serial communications are
command used.
Keypad mode Drive Enable 3. Either:
Drive Enable • Press the red reset button
Serial communications
Serial communications link • Toggle the reset digital input
• Carry out a drive reset through serial communications by setting Pr
Table 7-2 Minimum control connection requirements for each 10.38 to 100 (ensure that Pr. xx.00 returns to 0).
mode of operation
Operating mode Requirements
Open loop mode Induction motor
Induction motor with speed
Closed loop vector mode
feedback
Permanent magnet motor with
Closed loop servo mode
speed and position feedback
Speed feedback
Suitable devices are:
• Incremental encoder (A, B or F, D with or without Z)
• Incremental encoder with forward and reverse outputs (F, R with or
without Z)
• SSI absolute encoder (Gray code or binary)
• SINCOS encoder (with, or without Stegmann Hiperface or EnDat
communications protocols)
• EnDat absolute encoder

Figure 7-1 Minimum connections to get the motor running in any

operating mode
Pin Function
1 Termination resistor
2 RX TX
3 Isolated 0V
4 +24V
5 Isolated 0V
6 TX enable
7 RX\ TX\
8 RX\ TX\
Shell Isolated 0V
C O Serial 1
l p U V W
communications
port
o e 8
s n
e Terminal
Connections applicable to the following
encoder types
d L Pr 3.38 = 0 to 5 Pr 3.38 = 6 to 11
o 1 A F Cos
o 2 A\ F\ Cos\
L p
3
4
B
B\
D
D\
Sin
Sin\
o 5
6
Z
Z\
Data
Data\
o 7 U Fout Aout Fout Aout
p 8
9
U\
V
Fout\
Dout
Aout\
Bout
Fout\
Dout
Aout\
Bout
10 V\ Dout\ Bout\ Dout\ Bout\
11 W Clk
V 12 W\ Clk\
e A A 13 +V +V
c B B E 14
15
0V
Th
T15, the motor thermistor is common to Anip 3.
0V
Th
t Z Z 1 To use this, Anip 3 must be configured. See Menu 7.

o 5 1
r 10
15
6
11
2 Encoder connector
15 way D-type
Induction motor
U V W
S
e
r
v A A
Servo motor
(permanent
o B B
magnet)
U U E
V V
W W
Z Z 1
1 Marker pulse optional
2 Encoder screening connected to

Drive 0V open at encoder end
3 Thermal overload for braking resistor
to protect against fire risk. This must be
wired to interrupt the AC supply in the
event of a fault.

Braking resistor
Braking resistor
! (optional) - Size 2
and 3 only ! (optional) - Size 1 only
3 3
DC1 = - _ +
DC2 = + DC1 DC2 BR 48V BR 1
2
3 0V
+10V
4
Speed
5 reference
input
6
7
8
9
3 2 1 10
11 T
e
r
21 m
22 24V i
23
n
PE a
24
l
25
L1 L2 L3 U V W
26 RUN FWD M
27 RUN REV o
28 d
29
e
30 K
31 DRIVE e
ENABLE y
p
a
d
M
Fuses
o
d
SM-Keypad / SM-Keypad Plus.
e
Optional item; must be fitted for keypad mode. Pr 0.05
=PAd (4)
L1 L2 L3

7.3 Quick Start commissioning

7.3.1 Open loop
Action Detail
Ensure:
• The drive enable signal is not given (terminal 31)
Before power-up
• Run signal is not given
• Motor is connected
Ensure:
Power-up the
• Drive displays ‘inh’
drive
If the drive trips, see Chapter 13 Diagnostics on page 198.
Enter:
• Motor rated frequency in Pr 0.47 (Hz) Mot X XXXXXXXXX
Enter motor No XXXXXXXXXX kg
• Motor rated current in Pr 0.46 (A) IP55 I.cl F °C 40 s S1
nameplate details Hz min-1 kW cosφ
• Motor rated speed in Pr 0.45 (rpm) V
230 50 1445 2.20 0.80
A
8.50
400 4.90
• Motor rated voltage in Pr 0.44 (V) - check if or connection CN = 14.5Nm
I.E.C 34 1(87)
240 50 1445 2.20 0.76 8.50
415 4.90
CN = 14.4Nm
CTP- VEN 1PHASE 1=0,46A P=110W R.F 32MN
Set maximum Enter: 0.02
frequency • Maximum frequency in Pr 0.02 (Hz)

t
Enter: 100Hz
Set acceleration / • Acceleration rate in Pr 0.03 (s/100Hz)

deceleration rates • Deceleration rate in Pr 0.04 (s/100Hz) (If braking resistor fitted, set Pr 0.15 = FAST. Also ensure
Pr 10.30 and Pr 10.31 are set correctly, otherwise premature ‘It.br’ trips may be seen.)
t
0.03 0.04
Unidrive SP is able to perform either a stationary or a rotating autotune. The motor must be at a
standstill before an autotune is enabled. A rotating autotune should be used whenever possible
so the measured value of power factor of the motor is used by the drive.
A rotating autotune will cause the motor to accelerate up to 2/3 base speed in the
direction selected regardless of the reference provided. Once complete the motor
will coast to a stop. The run signal must be removed before the drive can be made
to run at the required reference.
WARNING
The drive can be stopped at any time by removing the run signal or removing the
drive enable. cos ∅
• A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it is not possible to remove
the load from the motor shaft. A stationary autotune measures the stator resistance of the
motor and the voltage offset in the drive. These are required for good performance in vector
Autotune
control modes. A stationary autotune does not measure the power factor of the motor so the
value on the motor nameplate must be entered into Pr 0.43. RS
σLS
• A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is unloaded. A rotating autotune first
performs a stationary autotune before rotating the motor at 2/3 base speed in the direction
selected. The rotating autotune measures the power factor of the motor.
To perform an autotune:
• Set Pr 0.40 = 1 for a stationary autotune or set Pr 0.40 = 2 for a rotating autotune
• Close the Drive Enable signal (terminal 31). The drive will display ’rdY’.
• Close the run signal (terminal 26 or 27). The lower display will flash ’Auto’ and ’tunE’
alternatively, while the drive is performing the autotune.
• Wait for the drive to display ’rdY’ and for the motor to come to a standstill.
Remove the run signal from the drive.
Enter 1000 in Pr xx.00
Save parameters
Press the red reset button or toggle the reset digital input (ensure Pr xx.00 returns to 0)
Run Drive is now ready to run

7.3.2 Closed loop vector mode

Induction motor with incremental encoder feedback
For simplicity only an incremental quadrature encoder will be considered here. For information on setting up one of the other supported speed
feedback devices, refer to section 7.4 Quick start commissioning (CTSoft) on page 87.
Action Detail
Ensure:
• Drive Enable signal is not given (terminal 31)
Before power-up
• Run signal is not given
• Motor and feedback device is connected
Ensure:
Power-up the
• Drive displays ‘inh’
drive
Incremental encoder basic set-up
Enter:
• Drive encoder type in Pr 3.38 = Ab (0): Quadrature encoder
• Encoder power supply in Pr. 3.36 = 5V (0), 8V (1) or 15V (2)
Set motor Setting the encoder voltage supply too high for the encoder could result in damage to the feedback
feedback device.
parameters CAUTION
• Drive encoder Lines Per Revolution (LPR) in Pr 3.34 (set according to encoder)
• Drive encoder termination resistor setting in Pr. 3.39:
0 = A-A\, B-B\, Z-Z\ termination resistors disabled
1 = A-A\, B-B\, termination resistors enabled, Z-Z\ termination resistors disabled
2 = A-A\, B-B\, Z-Z\ termination resistors enabled
Enter:
Enter motor • Motor rated frequency in Pr 0.47 (Hz)
• Motor rated current in Pr 0.46 (A)
Mot X XXXXXXXXX
nameplate IP55
No XXXXXXXXXX kg
I.cl F °C 40 s S1
Hz min-1 kW cosφ
• Motor rated speed (base speed - slip speed) in Pr 0.45 (rpm)

V A
details 230 50 1445 2.20 0.80

400
CN = 14.5Nm
8.50
4.90
I.E.C 34 1(87)
240 50 1445 2.20 0.76 8.50
• Motor rated voltage in Pr 0.44 (V) - check if or connection 415

CN = 14.4Nm
4.90
CTP- VEN 1PHASE 1=0,46A P=110W R.F 32MN
Set maximum Enter: 0.02
speed • Maximum speed in Pr 0.02 (rpm)

t
Enter:
Set acceleration / 1000rpm
• Acceleration rate in Pr 0.03 (s/1000rpm)
deceleration
• Deceleration rate in Pr 0.04 (s/1000rpm) (If braking resistor fitted, set Pr 0.15 = FAST. Also ensure Pr
rates
10.30 and Pr 10.31 are set correctly, otherwise premature ‘It.br’ trips may be seen.) t
0.03 0.04
Unidrive SP is able to perform either a stationary or a rotating autotune. The motor must be at a
standstill before an autotune is enabled. A stationary autotune will give moderate performance whereas
a rotating autotune will give improved performance as it measures the actual values of the motor
parameters required by the drive.
A rotating autotune will cause the motor to accelerate up to 2/3 base speed in the direction
selected regardless of the reference provided. Once complete the motor will coast to a stop.
The run signal must be removed before the drive can be made to run at the required cos ∅
reference.
WARNING The drive can be stopped at any time by removing the run signal or removing the drive
enable.
• A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it is not possible to remove the load from RS
the motor shaft. The stationary autotune measures the stator resistance and transient inductance of the σLS
LS
Autotune motor. These are used to calculate the current loop gains, and at the end of the test the values in Pr 0.38
T
and Pr 0.39 are updated. A stationary autotune does not measure the power factor of the motor so the Nm
saturation
break-
value on the motor nameplate must be entered into Pr 0.43. points
• A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is unloaded. A rotating autotune first performs a N rpm
stationary autotune before rotating the motor at 2/3 base speed in the direction selected. The rotating
autotune measures the stator inductance of the motor and calculates the power factor.
• Set Pr 0.40 = 1 for a stationary autotune or set Pr 0.40 = 2 for a rotating autotune
• Close the Drive Enable signal (terminal 31). The drive will display ‘rdY’
• Close the run signal (terminal 26 or 27). The lower display will flash ‘Auto’ and ‘tunE’ alternatively, while
the drive is performing the autotune.
• Wait for the drive to display ‘rdY’ and for the motor to come to a standstill
Save parameters

7.3.3 Servo
Permanent magnet motor with a speed and position feedback device
For simplicity only an incremental quadrature encoder with commutation outputs will be considered here. For information on setting up one of the
other supported speed feedback devices, refer to section 7.4 Quick start commissioning (CTSoft) on page 87.
Action Detail
Ensure:
• Drive Enable signal is not given (terminal 31)
Before power-up • Run signal is not given
• Motor is connected
• Feedback device is connected
Ensure:
Power-up the drive • Drive displays ‘inh’
Incremental encoder basic set-up
Enter:
• Drive encoder type in Pr. 3.38 = Ab.SErVO (3): Quadrature encoder with commutation outputs
• Encoder power supply in Pr. 3.36 = 5V (0), 8V (1) or 15V (2)
Setting the encoder voltage supply too high for the encoder could result in damage to the feedback
Set motor feedback
device.
parameters
CAUTION
• Drive encoder Pulses Per Revolution in Pr. 3.34 (set according to encoder)
• Drive encoder termination resistor setting in Pr. 3.39:
0 = A-A\, B-B\, Z-Z\ termination resistors disabled
1 = A-A\, B-B\, termination resistors enabled, Z-Z\ termination resistors disabled
2 = A-A\, B-B\, Z-Z\ termination resistors enabled
Enter:
Enter motor
• Motor rated current in Pr 0.46 (A)
nameplate details Model No: 95UXXXXXXXXXXXX
Volts: 380/480
Brake: 12Nm
24V
• Number of poles in Pr 0.42 Cont: 7.7Nm:4.81Arms

Stall: 9.5Nm:5.91Arms
Speed: 3000rpm Poles:6
0.67A
Control Techniques
Kt: 1.6Nm/Arms Dynamics Ltd
Ins Class: H
ANDOVER, HANTS.
ENGLAND. SP10 5AB
Serial No: XXXXXXXXXXX
Enter: 0.02
Set maximum speed

• Maximum speed in Pr 0.02 (rpm)
t
Enter:
1000rpm
Set acceleration / • Acceleration rate in Pr 0.03 (s/1000rpm)
deceleration rates • Deceleration rate in Pr 0.04 (s/1000rpm) (If braking resistor fitted, set Pr 0.15 = FAST. Also ensure Pr
10.30 and Pr 10.31 are set correctly, otherwise premature ‘It.br’ trips may be seen.) 0.03 0.04
t
The normal low speed test will rotate the motor by up to 2 revolutions in the direction
selected, regardless of the reference provided. Once complete the motor will come to a
standstill. The run signal must be removed before the drive can be made to run at the
required reference.
WARNING
The drive can be stopped at any time by removing the run signal or removing the Drive
Enable.
• The normal low speed test will rotate the motor by up to 2 rotations in the direction selected and the drive 0
measures the encoder phase angle and updates the value in Pr 3.25. This test also measures the stator 0
resistance, and inductance of the motor. These are used to calculate the current loop gains, and at the
Autotune
end of the test the values in Pr 0.38 and Pr 0.39 are updated. This test takes approximately 20 seconds to
complete.
• Set Pr 0.40 = 2
• Close the run signal (terminal 26 or 27).
• Close the Drive Enable signal (terminal 31). The lower display will flash ‘Auto’ and ‘tunE’ alternatively,
while the drive is performing the test.
• Wait for the drive to display ‘StoP’ and for the motor to come to a standstill.
Save parameters

7.4 Quick start commissioning (CTSoft)

CTSoft is a Windows™ based software commissioning tool for Unidrive
SP and other Control Techniques products.
CTSoft can be used for commissioning and monitoring, drive parameters
can be uploaded, downloaded and compared, and simple or custom
menu listings can be created. Drive menus can be displayed in standard
list format or as live block diagrams. CTSoft is able to communicate with
a single drive or a network.
CTSoft can be found on the CD which is supplied with the drive and is
also available for download from www.controltechniques.com (file size
approximately 60Mb).
CTSoft system requirements:
• Windows 98/98SE/ME/NT4/2000/XP. Windows 95 is NOT
supported
• Internet Explorer V5.0 or later must be installed
• Minimum of 800x600 screen resolution with 256 colours. 1024x768
is recommended.
• 128MB RAM
• Pentium II 266MHz or better recommended.
• Adobe Acrobat 5.1 or later (for parameter help)
• Note that you must have administrator rights under Windows NT/
2000/XP to install.
To install CTSoft from the CD, insert the CD and the auto-run facility
should start up the front-end screen from which CTSoft can be selected.
Any previous copy of CTSoft should be uninstalled before proceeding
with the installation (existing projects will not be lost).
Included with CTSoft are the user guides for the supported drive models.
When help on a particular parameter is request by the user, CTSoft links
to the parameter in the relevant advanced user guide.
7.5 Setting up a feedback device

This section shows the parameter settings which must be made to use each of the compatible encoder types with Unidrive SP. For more information
on the parameters listed here please refer to the Unidrive SP Advanced User Guide.
7.5.1 Overview
Table 7-3 Parameters required for feedback device set-up
Ab, Fd, Fr,
SC.EndAt or
Ab.SErVO, SC.HiPEr EndAt
Parameter SC.SSI SSI encoder
Fd.SErVO, Fr.SErVO, encoder encoder
encoders
or SC encoders
3.33 Drive encoder turns 9x 9x 9x 9
3.34 Drive encoder lines per revolution 9 9x 9x
3.35 Drive encoder comms resolution 9x 9x 9x 9
3.36 Drive encoder supply voltage 9 9 9 9 9
3.37 Drive encoder comms baud rate 9 9 9
3.38 Drive encoder type 9 9 9 9 9
Drive encoder auto configuration enable or
3.41 9 9 9 9
SSI binary format select
9 Information required
x Parameter can be set-up automatically by the drive through auto-configuration
Table 7-3 shows a summary of the parameters required to set-up each feedback device. More detailed information is shown below.

7.5.2 Detailed feedback device commissioning information

Standard quadrature encoder with or without commutation signals (A, B, Z or A, B, Z, U, V, W), or
Sincos encoder without serial communications
Ab (0) for a quadrature encoder without commutation signals *
Encoder type Pr 3.38 Ab.SErVO (3) for a quadrature encoder with commutation signals
SC (6) for a Sincos encoder without serial communications *
Encoder power supply voltage Pr 3.36 5V (0), 8V (1) or 15V (2)
Encoder number of lines per Set to the number of lines or sine waves per revolution of the encoder.
Pr 3.34
revolution See the Note overleaf for restrictions on this parameter.
0 = A, B, Z termination resistors disabled
Encoder termination selection
Pr 3.39 1 = A, B termination resistors enabled and Z termination resistors disabled
(Ab or Ab.SErVO only)
2 = A, B, Z termination resistors enabled
0 = Error detection disable
1 = Wire break detection on A, B and Z inputs enabled
Encoder error detection level Pr 3.40 2 = Phase error detection (Ab.SErVO only)
3 = Wire break detection on A, B and Z inputs and phase error detection (Ab.SErVO only)
Termination resistors must be enabled for wire break detection to operate
* These settings should only be used in closed loop vector mode, otherwise a phase offset test must be performed after every power up.
Incremental encoder with frequency and direction (F and D), or

Forward and Reverse (CW and CCW) signals, with or without commutation signals
Fd (1) for frequency and direction signals without commutation signals *
Fr (2) for forward and reverse signals without commutation signals *
Encoder type Pr 3.38
Fd.SErVO (4) for a frequency and direction encoder with commutation signals
Fr.SErVO (5) for forward and reverse signals with commutation signals
Encoder number of lines per Set to the number of pulses per revolution of the encoder divide by 2.
Pr 3.34
revolution See the Note overleaf for restrictions on this parameter.
0 = F or CW, D or CCW, Z termination resistors disabled
Encoder termination selection Pr 3.39 1 = F or CW, D or CCW termination resistors enabled and Z termination resistors disabled
2 = For CW, D or CCW, Z termination resistors enabled
0 = Error detection disable
1 = Wire break detection on F & D or CW & CCW, and Z inputs enabled
2 = Phase error detection (Fd.SErVO and Fr.SErVO only)
Encoder error detection level Pr 3.40
3 = Wire break detection on F & D or CW & CCW, and Z inputs and Phase error detection
(Fd.SErVO and Fr.SErVO only)
Termination resistors must be enabled for wire break detection to operate
* These settings should only be used in closed loop vector mode, otherwise a phase offset test must be performed after every power up.
Absolute Sincos encoder with Hiperface or EnDat serial communications, or

Absolute EnDat communications only encoder
The Unidrive SP is compatible with the following Hiperface encoders:

SCS 60/70, SCM 60/70, SRS 50/60, SRM 50/60, SHS 170, LINCODER, SCS-KIT 101, SKS36, SKM36.
SC.HiPEr (7) for a Sincos encoder with Hiperface serial communications
Encoder type Pr 3.38 EndAt (8) for an EnDat communications only encoder
SC.EndAt (9) for a Sincos encoder with EnDat serial communications
Setting this to 1 automatically sets up the following parameters:
Pr 3.33 Encoder turn bits
Encoder auto configure enable Pr 3.41 Pr 3.34 Encoder number of lines of revolution (SC.HiPEr and SC.EndAt only) *
Pr 3.35 Encoder single turn comms resolution
Alternatively these parameters can be entered manually.
Encoder comms baud rate
Pr 3.37 100 = 100k, 200 = 200k, 300 = 300k, 500 = 500k, 1000 = 1M, 1500 = 1.5M, or 2000 = 2M
(EndAt and SC.EndAt only)
0 = Error detection disabled
Encoder error detection level 1 = Wire break detection on Sin and Cos inputs
Pr 3.40
(SC.HiPEr and SC.EndAt only) 2 = Phase error detection
3 = Wire break detection on Sin and Cos inputs and phase error detection
* See the Note below for restrictions on this parameter.

Absolute SSI communications only encoder, or

Absolute Sincos encoder with SSI
SSI (10) for a SSI communications only encoder
Encoder type Pr 3.38
SC.SSI (11) for a Sincos encoder with SSI
Encoder number of lines per Set to the number of sine waves per revolution of the encoder.
Pr 3.34
revolution. (SC.SSI only) See the Note below for restrictions on this parameter.
SSI binary format select Pr 3.41 OFF (0) for gray code, or On (1) for binary format SSI encoders
Encoder turn bits Pr 3.33 Set to the number of turn bits for the encoder (this is usually 12bits for a SSI encoder)
Encoder single turn comms resolution Pr 3.35 Set to the single turn comms resolution for the encoder (this is usually 13bits for a SSI encoder)
Encoder comms baud rate Pr 3.37 100 = 100k, 200 = 200k, 300 = 300k, 500 = 500k, 1000 = 1M, 1500 = 1.5M, or 2000 = 2M
0 = Error detection disabled
1 = Wire break detection on Sin and Cos inputs (SC.SSI only)
2 = Phase error detection (SC.SSI only)
3 = Wire break detection and phase error detection
Encoder error detection level Pr 3.40
4 = SSI power supply bit monitor
5 = SSI power supply bit monitor and wire break detection (SC.SSI only)
6 = SSI power supply bit monitor and phase error detection (SC.SSI only)
7 = SSI power supply bit monitor, wire break detection and phase error detection (SC.SSI only)
NOTE
Although Pr 3.34 can be set to any value from 0 to 50,000 there are
restrictions on the values actually used by the drive as follows:
Table 7-4 Restrictions of drive encoder lines per revolution
Position feedback device Equivalent Lines per revolution used by the drive
If Pr 3.34 <2, the drive uses the value of 2.
Ab, Fd, Fr If 2≤ Pr 3.34 .≤16,384, the drive uses the value in Pr 3.34.
If Pr 3.34 >16,384, the drive uses the value in Pr 3.34 rounded down to nearest value divisible by 4.
If Pr 3.34 ≤2, the drive uses the value of 2.
Ab.SErVO, Fd.SErVO, Fr.SErVO If 2< Pr 3.34 <16,384, the drive uses the value in Pr 3.34 rounded down to nearest value that is a power of 2.
If Pr 3.34 ≥16,384, the drive uses the value of 16,384.
If Pr 3.34 ≤2, the drive uses the value of 2.
SC, SC.HiPEr, SC.EndAt, SC.SSI If 2< Pr 3.34 <32,768, the drive uses the value in Pr 3.34 rounded down to nearest value that is a power of 2.
If Pr 3.34 ≥32,768, the drive uses the value of 32,768.
If a SC.HiPEr, SC.EndAt, EndAt, SSI or SC.SSI encoder is selected in
Pr 3.34, then the feedback device must be initialised before the drive can
be enabled. Pr 3.48 indicates whether the position feedback is initialised.
At power-up Pr 3.48 is OFF (0) but is set to On (1) when the feedback
has been initialised. The drive cannot be enabled until this parameter is
On (1).
If the encoder power-supply is lost, or the encoder type parameter is
changed when the encoder type is SC.HiPEr, SC.EndAt, EndAt, SSI or
SC.SSI the encoder will no longer be initialised. When an encoder is no
longer initialised Pr 3.48 is reset to OFF (0) and the drive cannot be
enabled. The encoder may be re-initialised, provided the drive is not
active, by setting Pr 3.47 to On (1). This parameter is automatically reset
to OFF (0) when the initialisation is complete. The encoder is also re-
initialised when trips Enc1 to Enc8 are reset.

8 Optimisation
This chapter takes the user through methods of optimising the product
set-up, maximising performance. The auto-tuning features of the drive
simplify this task.
8.1 Motor map parameters
8.1.1 Open loop motor control
Pr 0.46 {5.07} Motor rated current Defines the maximum continuous motor current
The motor rated current parameter must be set to the maximum continuous current of the motor. (See section 8.2 Maximum motor rated current on
page 97, for information about setting this parameter higher then the maximum Heavy Duty current rating.) The motor rated current is used in the
following:
• Current limits (see section 8.3 Current limits on page 97, for more information)
• Motor thermal overload protection (see section 8.4 Motor thermal protection on page 97, for more information)
• Vector mode voltage control (see Voltage mode Pr 0.07, later in this table)
• Slip compensation (see Slip compensation Pr 5.27, later in this table)
• Dynamic V/F control
Pr 0.44 {5.09} Motor rated voltage Defines the voltage applied to the motor at rated frequency
Pr 0.47 {5.06} Motor rated frequency Defines the frequency at which rated voltage is applied
Output voltage characteristic

Output
voltage
The motor rated voltage Pr 0.44 and the motor rated frequency Pr 0.47 Pr 0.44
are used to define the voltage to frequency characteristic applied to the

motor (see voltage mode Pr 0.07, later in this table). The motor rated
frequency is also used in conjunction with the motor rated speed to Pr 0.44 / 2
calculate the rated slip for slip compensation (see motor rated speed Pr
0.45, later in this table).
Pr 0.47 / 2 Pr 0.47 Output

frequency
Pr 0.45 {5.08} Motor rated speed Defines the full load rated speed of the motor
Pr 0.42 {5.11} Motor number of poles Defines the number of motor poles
The motor rated speed and the number of poles are used with the motor rated frequency to calculate the rated slip of induction machines in Hz.
0.42 0.45
Rated slip (Hz) = Motor rated frequency - (Number of pole pairs x [Motor rated speed / 60]) = 0.47 –  ----------- × -----------
 2 60 
If Pr 0.45 is set to 0 or to synchronous speed, slip compensation is disabled. If slip compensation is required this parameter should be set to the
nameplate value, which should give the correct rpm for a hot machine. Sometimes it will be necessary to adjust this when the drive is commissioned
because the nameplate value may be inaccurate. Slip compensation will operate correctly both below base speed and within the field-weakening
region. Slip compensation is normally used to correct for the motor speed to prevent speed variation with load. The rated load rpm can be set higher
than synchronous speed to deliberately introduce speed droop. This can be useful to aid load sharing with mechanically coupled motors.
Pr 0.42 is also used in the calculation of the motor speed display by the drive for a given output frequency. When Pr 0.42 is set to ‘Auto’, the number
of motor poles is automatically calculated from the rated frequency Pr 0.47, and the motor rated speed Pr 0.45.
Number of poles = 120 x (Motor rated frequency Pr 0.47 / Motor rated speed Pr 0.45) rounded to the nearest even number
Pr 0.43 {5.10} Motor rated power factor Defines the angle between the motor voltage and current
The power factor is the true power factor of the motor, i.e. the angle between the motor voltage and current. The power factor is used in conjunction
with the motor rated current Pr 0.46, to calculate the rated active current and magnetising current of the motor. The rated active current is used
extensively to control the drive, and the magnetising current is used in vector mode stator resistance compensation. It is important that this
parameter is set up correctly. The drive can measure the motor rated power factor by performing a rotating autotune (see Autotune Pr 0.40, below).
Pr 0.40 {5.12} Autotune
There are two autotune tests available in open loop mode, a stationary and a rotating test. A rotating autotune should be used whenever possible so
the measured value of power factor of the motor is used by the drive.
• A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it is not possible to remove the load from the motor shaft. The stationary test
measures the stator resistance (Pr 5.17) and voltage offset (Pr 5.23), which are required for good performance in vector control modes (see
Voltage mode Pr 0.07, later in this table). The stationary autotune does not measure the power factor of the motor so the value on the motor
nameplate must be entered into Pr 0.43. To perform a Stationary autotune, set Pr 0.40 to 1, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on
terminal 31) and a run signal (on terminal 26 or 27).
• A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is unloaded. A rotating autotune first performs a stationary autotune, as above, before
rotating the motor at 2/3 base speed in the direction selected for several seconds (regardless of the speed reference). In addition to the stator
resistance (Pr 5.17) and voltage offset (Pr 5.23), the rotating autotune measures the power factor of the motor and updates Pr 0.43 with the
correct value. To perform a Rotating autotune, set Pr 0.40 to 2, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on terminal 31) and a run signal
(on terminal 26 or 27).
Following the completion of an autotune test, either the run signal or the enable signal must be removed before the drive can then be made to run at
the required reference.

Pr 0.07 {5.14} Voltage mode

There are six voltage modes available which fall into two categories, vector control and fixed boost.
Vector control
Vector control mode provides the motor with a linear voltage characteristic from 0Hz to motor rated frequency (Pr 0.47), and then a constant voltage
above motor rated frequency. When the drive operates between motor rated frequency/50 and motor rated frequency/4, full vector based stator
resistance compensation is applied. When the drive operates between motor rated frequency/4 and motor rated frequency/2 the stator resistance
compensation is gradually reduced to zero as the frequency increases. For the vector modes to operate correctly the motor rated power factor (Pr
0.43), stator resistance (Pr 5.17) and voltage offset (Pr 5.23) are all required to be set up accurately. The drive can be made to measure these by
performing an autotune (see Pr 0.40 Autotune). The drive can also be made to measure the stator resistance and voltage offset automatically every
time the drive is enabled or the first time the drive is enabled after it is powered up, by selecting one of the vector control voltage modes.
(0) Ur_S = The stator resistance and the voltage offset are measured and the parameters for the selected motor map are over-written each
time the drive is made to run. This test can only be done with a stationary motor where the flux has decayed to zero. Therefore this mode should
only be used if the motor is guaranteed to be stationary each time the drive is made to run. To prevent the test from being done before the flux
has decayed there is a period of 1 second after the drive has been in the ready state during which the test is not done if the drive is made to run
again. In this case, previously measured values are used. Ur_s mode ensures that the drive compensates for any change in motor parameters
due to changes in temperature. The new values of stator resistance and voltage offset are not automatically saved to the drive's EEPROM.
(4) Ur_I = The stator resistance and voltage offset are measured when the drive is first made to run after each power-up. This test can only be
done with a stationary motor. Therefore this mode should only be used if the motor is guaranteed to be stationary the first time the drive is made
to run after each power-up. The new values of stator resistance and voltage offset are not automatically saved to the drive's EEPROM.
(1) Ur = The stator resistance and voltage offset are not measured. The user can enter the motor and cabling resistance into the stator
resistance parameter (Pr 5.17). However this will not include resistance effects within the drive inverter. Therefore if this mode is to be used, it is
best to use an autotune test initially to measure the stator resistance and voltage offset.
(3) Ur_Auto= The stator resistance and voltage offset are measured once, the first time the drive is made to run. After the test has been
completed successfully the voltage mode (Pr 0.07) is changed to Ur mode. The stator resistance (Pr 5.17) and voltage offset (Pr 5.23)
parameters are written to, and along with the voltage mode (Pr 0.07), are saved in the drive's EEPROM. If the test fails, the voltage mode will
stay set to Ur_Auto and the test will be repeated next time the drive is made to run.
Fixed boost
Neither the stator resistance nor the voltage offset are used in the control of the motor, instead a fixed characteristic with low frequency voltage
boost as defined by parameter Pr 0.08, is used. Fixed boost mode should be used when the drive is controlling multiple motors. There are two
settings of fixed boost available:
(2) Fd = This mode provides the motor with a linear voltage characteristic from 0Hz to rated frequency (Pr 0.47), and then a constant voltage
above rated frequency.
(5) SrE = This mode provides the motor with a square law voltage characteristic from 0Hz to rated frequency (Pr 0.47), and then a constant
voltage above rated frequency. This mode is suitable for variable torque applications like fans and pumps where the load is proportional to the
square of the speed of the motor shaft. This mode should not be used if a high starting torque is required.
For both these modes, at low frequencies (from 0Hz to ½ x Pr 0.47) a voltage boost is applied defined by Pr 0.08 as shown below:
Output voltage characteristic Output voltage characteristic
Output Output
voltage
(Fd) (SrE)
voltage
Pr 0.44 Pr 0.44
Pr 0.44 / 2
Voltage boost Voltage boost

Pr 0.08 Pr 0.08
Pr 0.47 / 2 Pr 0.47 Output Output
Pr 0.47 / 2 Pr 0.47
frequency frequency
Pr 5.27 Slip compensation

When a motor, being controlled in open loop mode, has load applied a characteristic of the motor is that the output speed droops in proportion to the
load applied as shown:
Demanded speed
Shaft speed
Load
In order to prevent the speed droop shown above slip compensation should be enabled.
To enable slip compensation Pr 5.27 must be set to a 1 (this is the default setting), and the motor rated speed must be entered in Pr 0.45 (Pr 5.08).
The motor rated speed parameter should be set to the synchronous speed of the motor minus the slip speed. This is normally displayed on the
motor nameplate, i.e. for a typical 18.5kW, 50Hz, 4 pole motor, the motor rated speed would be approximately 1465rpm. The synchronous speed for
a 50Hz, 4 pole motor is 1500rpm, so therefore the slip speed would be 35rpm.
If the synchronous speed is entered in Pr 0.45, slip compensation will be disabled. If too small a value is entered in Pr 0.45, the motor will run faster
than the demanded frequency.
The synchronous speeds for 50Hz motors with different numbers of poles are as follows:
2 pole = 3000rpm, 4 pole = 1500rpm, 6pole =1000rpm, 8 pole = 750rpm

8.1.2 Closed loop vector motor control

Pr 0.46 {5.07} Motor rated current Defines the maximum motor continuous current
The motor rated current parameter must be set to the maximum continuous current of the motor. (See section 8.2 Maximum motor rated current on
page 97, for information about setting this parameter higher than the maximum Heavy Duty current rating.) The motor rated current is used in the
following:
• Vector control algorithm
Pr 0.44 {5.09} Motor rated voltage Defines the voltage applied to the motor at rated frequency
Pr 0.47 {5.06} Motor rated frequency Defines the frequency at which rated voltage is applied
The motor rated voltage Pr 0.44 and the motor rated frequency Pr 0.47
Output voltage characteristic
are used to define the relationship between the voltage and frequency Output
voltage
applied to the motor, as shown.
The motor rated voltage is used by the field controller to limit the voltage Pr 0.44
applied to the motor. Normally this is set to the nameplate value. To allow
current control to be maintained, it is necessary for the drive to leave
some 'headroom' between the motor terminal voltage and the maximum
available drive output voltage. For good transient performance at high
Pr 0.44 / 2
speed, the motor rated voltage should be set below 95% of the minimum
supply voltage to the drive.
The motor rated voltage and motor rated frequency are also used during
the rotating autotune test (see Autotune Pr 0.40 later in this table) and in
the calculations required for automatic optimisation of the motor rated
Output
speed (see Motor rated speed optimisation Pr 5.16, later in this table). Pr 0.47 / 2 Pr 0.47
frequency
Therefore, it is important that the correct value for motor rated voltage is
used.
Pr 0.45 {5.08} Motor rated speed Defines the full load rated speed of the motor
The motor rated speed and motor rated frequency are used to determine the full load slip of the motor which is used by the vector control algorithm.
Incorrect setting of this parameter has the following effects:
• Reduced efficiency of motor operation
• Reduction of maximum torque available from the motor
• Reduced transient performance
• Inaccurate control of absolute torque in torque control modes
The nameplate value is normally the value for a hot motor; however, some adjustment may be required when the drive is commissioned if the
nameplate value is inaccurate. Either a fixed value can be entered in this parameter or an optimisation system may be used to automatically adjust
this parameter (see Motor rated speed Pr 5.16, later in this table).
When Pr 0.42 is set to ‘Auto’, the number of motor poles is automatically calculated from the motor rated frequency Pr 0.47, and the motor rated
speed Pr 0.45
Number of poles = 120 x (Motor rated frequency Pr 0.47 / Motor rated speed Pr 0.45) rounded to the nearest even number
Pr 0.43 {5.10} Motor rated power factor Defines the angle between the motor voltage and current
The power factor is the true power factor of the motor, i.e. the angle between the motor voltage and current. If the stator inductance is set to zero (Pr
5.25) then the power is used in conjunction with the motor rated current Pr 0.46 and other motor parameters to calculate the rated active and
magnetising currents of the motor, which are used in the vector control algorithm. If the stator inductance has a non-zero value this parameter is not
used by the drive, but is continuously written with a calculated value of power factor. The stator inductance can be measured by the drive by
performing a rotating autotune (see Autotune Pr 0.40, later in this table).


There are three autotune tests available in closed loop vector mode, a stationary test, a rotating test and an inertia measurement test. A stationary
autotune will give moderate performance whereas a rotating autotune will give improved performance as it measures the actual values of the motor
parameters required by the drive. An inertia measurement test should be performed separately to a stationary or rotating autotune.
• A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it is not possible to remove the load from the motor shaft. The stationary
autotune measures the stator resistance (Pr 5.17) and transient inductance (Pr 5.24) of the motor. These are used to calculate the current loop
gains, and at the end of the test the values in Pr 4.13 and Pr 4.14 are updated. A stationary autotune does not measure the power factor of the
motor so the value on the motor nameplate must be entered into Pr 0.43. To perform a Stationary autotune, set Pr 0.40 to 1, and provide the
drive with both an enable signal (on terminal 31) and a run signal (on terminal 26 or 27).
• A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is unloaded. A rotating autotune first performs a stationary autotune before rotating the
motor at 2/3 of motor rated frequency in the direction selected for approximately 30s. During the rotating autotune the stator inductance (Pr 5.25),
and the motor saturation breakpoints (Pr 5.29 and Pr 5.30) are modified by the drive. The power factor is also modified for user information only,
but is not used after this point as the stator inductance is used in the vector control algorithm instead. To perform a Rotating autotune, set Pr
0.40 to 2, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on terminal 31) and a run signal (on terminal 26 or 27).
• The inertia measurement test can measure the total inertia of the load and the motor. This is used to set the speed loop gains (see Speed loop
gains) and to provide torque feed-forwards when required during acceleration.
During the inertia measurement test the drive attempts to accelerate the motor in the direction selected up to 3/4 x rated load rpm and then back
to standstill. The drive uses rated torque/16, but if the motor cannot be accelerated to the required speed the drive then increases the torque
progressively to x1/8, x1/4, x1/2 and x1 rated torque. If the required speed is not achieved on the final attempt the test is aborted and a tuNE1 trip
is initiated. If the test is successful the acceleration and deceleration times are used to calculate the motor and load inertia which is then written
to Pr 3.18. The motor map parameters must be set up correctly including the power factor before performing an inertia measurement test.
To perform an Inertia measurement autotune, set Pr 0.40 to 3, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on terminal 31) and a run signal
(on terminal 26 or 27).
Pr 5.16 Motor rated speed autotune
The motor rated speed parameter (Pr 0.45) in conjunction with the motor rated frequency parameter (Pr 0.47) defines the full load slip of the motor.
The slip is used in the motor model for closed-loop vector control. The full load slip of the motor varies with rotor resistance which can vary
significantly with motor temperature. When Pr 5.16 is set to 1 or 2 the drive can automatically sense if the value of slip defined by Pr 0.47 and Pr
0.45 has been set incorrectly or if it has varied with motor temperature. If the value is incorrect Pr 0.45 is automatically adjusted. Pr 0.45 is not saved
at power-down, and so when the drive is powered-down and up again it will return to the last saved value. If the new value is required at the next
power-up it must be saved by the user. Automatic optimisation is only enabled when the speed is above rated speed/8, and when the load on the
motor load rises above 5/8 rated load. Optimisation is disabled again if the load falls below 1/2 rated load. For best optimisation results the correct
values of stator resistance (Pr 5.17), transient inductance (Pr 5.24), stator inductance (Pr 5.25) and saturation breakpoints (Pr 5.29, Pr 5.30) should
be stored in the relevant parameters (all these can be measured by the drive by performing a rotating autotune). Motor rated speed autotune is not
available if the drive is not using external position/speed feedback.
The gain of the optimiser, and hence the speed with which it converges, can be set at a normal low level when Pr 5.16 is set to 1. If this parameter
is set to 2, the gain is increased by a factor of 16 to give faster convergence.
Pr 0.38 {4.13} / Pr 0.39 {4.14} Current loop gains
The current loop gains proportional (Kp) and integral (Ki) gains control the response of the current loop to a change in current (torque) demand. The
default values give satisfactory operation with most motors. However, for optimal performance in dynamic applications it may be necessary to
change the gains to improve the performance. The proportional gain (Pr 4.13) is the most critical value in controlling the performance. The values
for the current loop gains can be found by one of the following:
• Calculated by the drive after performing a stationary or rotating autotune (see Autotune Pr 0.40, earlier in this table).
• Set by the user, using the following equations.
The proportional gain (Pr 0.38) = Kp = K x L x 10-3 x Rated drive current
The integral gain (Pr 0.39) = Ki = 0.0427 x K x R x Rated drive current
Where:
L is the motor inductance in mH. For an induction motor this is the per phase transient inductance (σLs), which is the value stored in Pr 5.24
after the autotune test has been carried out. The numerical value in Pr 5.24 can be input directly into the above equation. If the per phase motor
transient inductance (Pr 5.24) cannot be measured it can be calculated from the steady state per-phase equivalent circuit of the motor as
follows:
2
 Lm 
σL s = L s –  ----------
 Lr 
K depends on the Drive voltage rating as follows:
Drive voltage rating (Pr 11.33)
200V 400V 575V 690V
2902 1451 1217 1013
Rated drive current is the value in Pr 11.31 on the drive.
R is the per phase stator resistance of the motor (i.e. half the resistance measured between two phases). This is the same as the value stored
in Pr 5.17 following a successful measurement. Refer to Autotune (Pr 0.40).
This set up will give a step response with minimum overshoot after a step change of current reference. The proportional gain can be increased by a
factor of 1.5 giving a similar increase in bandwidth; however, this gives at step response with approximately 12.5% overshoot. The equation for the
integral gain gives a conservative value. In some applications where it is necessary for the reference frame used by the drive to dynamically follow
the flux very closely (i.e. high speed closed-loop induction motor applications) the integral gain may need to have a significantly higher value.

Speed loop gains (Pr 0.07 {3.10}, 0.08 {3.11}, 0.09 {3.12})
The speed loop gains control the response of the speed controller to a change in speed demand. The speed controller includes proportional (Kp)
and integral (Ki) feed forward terms, and a differential (Kd) feedback term. The drive holds two sets of these gains and either set may be selected for
use by the speed controller with Pr 3.16. If Pr 3.16 = 0, gains Kp1, Ki1 and Kd1 (Pr 0.07 to Pr 0.09) are used, and if Pr 3.16 = 1, gains Kp2, Ki2 and
Kd2 (Pr 3.13 to Pr 3.15) are used. Pr 3.16 may be changed when the drive is enabled or disabled. If the load is predominantly a constant inertia and
constant torque, the drive can calculate the required Kp and Ki gains to give a required compliance angle or bandwidth dependant on the setting of
Pr 3.17.
Proportional gain (Kp), Pr 0.07 and Pr 3.13
If the proportional gain has a value and the integral gain is set to zero the controller will only have a proportional term, and there must be a speed
error to produce a torque reference. Therefore as the motor load increases there will be a difference between the reference and actual speeds. This
effect, called regulation, depends on the level of the proportional gain, the higher the gain the smaller the speed error for a given load. If the
proportional gain is too high either the acoustic noise produced by speed feedback quantisation becomes unacceptable, or the closed-loop stability
limit is reached.
Integral gain (Ki), Pr 0.08 and Pr 3.14
The integral gain is provided to prevent speed regulation. The error is accumulated over a period of time and used to produce the necessary torque
demand without any speed error. Increasing the integral gain reduces the time taken for the speed to reach the correct level and increases the
stiffness of the system, i.e. it reduces the positional displacement produced by applying a load torque to the motor. Unfortunately increasing the
integral gain also reduces the system damping giving overshoot after a transient. For a given integral gain the damping can be improved by
increasing the proportional gain. A compromise must be reached where the system response, stiffness and damping are all adequate for the
application.
Differential gain (Kd), Pr 0.09 and Pr 3.15
The differential gain is provided in the feedback of the speed controller to give additional damping. The differential term is implemented in a way that
does not introduce excessive noise normally associated with this type of function. Increasing the differential term reduces the overshoot produced
by under-damping, however, for most applications the proportional and integral gains alone are sufficient.
There are three methods of tuning the speed loop gains dependant on the setting of Pr 3.17:
1. Pr 3.17 = 0, User set-up.
This involves the connecting of an oscilloscope to analog output 1 to
monitor the speed feedback.
Give the drive a step change in speed reference and monitor the
response of the drive on the oscilloscope.
The proportional gain (Kp) should be set up initially. The value
should be increased up to the point where the speed overshoots and Speed demand
then reduced slightly.
The integral gain (Ki) should then be increased up to the point where
the speed becomes unstable and then reduced slightly.
It may now be possible to increase the proportional gain to a higher
value and the process should be repeated until the system response Insufficient proportional
matches the ideal response as shown. gain [0.07]
The diagram shows the effect of incorrect P and I gain settings as
well as the ideal response.
2. Pr 3.17 = 1, Bandwidth set-up
If bandwidth based set-up is required, the drive can calculate Kp and
Excessive proportional
Ki if the following parameters are set up correctly: gain [0.07]
Pr 3.20 - Required bandwidth,
Pr 3.21 - Required damping factor,
Pr 3.18 - Motor and load inertia. The drive can be made to
measure the motor and load inertia by performing an inertia
Excessive integral gain
measurement autotune (see Autotune Pr 0.40, earlier in this [0.08]
table).
3. Pr 3.17 = 2, Compliance angle set-up
If compliance angle based set-up is required, the drive can calculate
Kp and Ki if the following parameters are set up correctly:
Ideal response
Pr 3.19 - Required compliance angle,
Pr 3.18 - Motor and load inertia The drive can be made to
measurement autotune (see Autotune Pr 0.40, earlier in this
table).

8.1.3 Servo motor control

Pr 0.46 {5.07} Motor rated current Defines the maximum motor continuous current
The motor rated current parameter must be set to the maximum continuous current of the motor. The motor rated current is used in the following:
The motor number of poles parameter defines the number of electrical revolutions in one whole mechanical revolution of the motor. This parameter
must be set correctly for the control algorithms to operate correctly. When Pr 0.42 is set to "Auto" the number of poles is 6.
There are three autotune tests available in servo mode, a short low speed test, a normal low speed test and an inertia measurement test. A normal
low speed should be done where possible as the drive measures the stator resistance and inductance of the motor, and from these calculates the
current loop gains. An inertia measurement test should be performed separately to a short low speed or normal low speed autotune.
• A short low speed test will rotate the motor by 2 electrical revolutions (i.e. up to 2 mechanical revolutions) in the direction selected. The drive
applies rated current to the motor during the test and measures the encoder phase angle (Pr 3.25). The phase angle measurement is taken
when the motor has stopped at the end of the test, therefore there must be no load on the motor when it is at rest for the correct angle to be
measured. This test takes approximately 2 seconds to complete and can only be used where the rotor settles to a stable position in a short time.
• A normal low speed test will rotate the motor by 2 electrical revolutions (i.e. up to 2 mechanical revolutions) in the direction selected. The drive
applies rated current to the motor during the test and measures the encoder phase angle (Pr 3.25). The phase angle measurement is taken
when the motor has stopped at the end of the test, therefore there must be no load on the motor when it is at rest for the correct angle to be
measured. The motor resistance (Pr 5.17) and inductance (Pr 5.24) are then measured, and the values are used to set up the current loop gains
(Pr 0.38 {4.13} and Pr 0.39 {4.14}). The whole test takes approximately 20 seconds and can be used with motors that take time to settle after
the rotor has moved. During the motor inductance measurement the drive applies current pulses to the motor that produces flux that opposes
the flux produced by the magnets. The maximum current applied is a quarter of rated current (Pr 0.46). This current is unlikely to affect the
motor magnets, however, if this level of current could permanently de-magnetise the magnets the rated current should be set to a lower level for
the tests to avoid this.
0
• The inertia measurement test can measure the total inertia of the load and the motor. This is used to set the speed loop gains (see Speed loop
gains) and to provide torque feed-forwards when required during acceleration.
During the inertia measurement test the drive attempts to accelerate the motor in the direction selected up to 3/4 x rated load rpm and then back to
standstill. The drive uses rated torque/16, but if the motor cannot be accelerated to the required speed the drive then increases the torque
progressively to x1/8, x1/4, x1/2 and x1 rated torque. If the required speed is not achieved on the final attempt the test is aborted and a tuNE1 trip is
initiated. If the test is successful the acceleration and deceleration times are used to calculate the motor and load inertia which is then written to Pr
3.18. The value of the value of motor torque per amp in Pr 5.32 and the motor rated speed in Pr 5.08 must be set up correctly before performing an
inertia measurement test.
To perform an Inertia measurement autotune, set Pr 0.40 to 3, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on terminal 31) and a run signal (on
terminal 26 or 27).
Current loop gains (Pr 0.38 {4.13} / 0.39 {4.14})
The current loop gains proportional (Kp) and integral (Ki) gains control the response of the current loop to a change in current (torque) demand. The
default values give satisfactory operation with most motors. However, for optimal performance in dynamic applications it may be necessary to
change the gains to improve the performance. The proportional gain (Pr 4.13) is the most critical value in controlling the performance.
The values for the current loop gains can be found by one of the following:
• Calculated by the drive after performing a stationary or rotating autotune (see Autotune Pr 0.40, above).
• Set by the user, using the following equations.
The proportional gain (Pr 0.38) = Kp = K x L x 10-3 x Rated drive current
The integral gain (Pr 0.39) = Ki = 0.0427 x K x R x Rated drive current
Where:
L is the motor inductance in mH. For a servo motor this is half the phase to phase inductance that is normally specified by the manufacturer.
This is also the value stored in Pr 5.24 after the autotune test has been carried out. The numerical value in Pr 5.24 can be input directly into the
above equation.
K depends on the Drive voltage rating as follows:
Drive voltage rating (Pr 11.33)
200V 400V 575V 690V
2902 1451 1217 1013
Rated drive current is the value in Pr 11.31 on the drive.
R is the per phase stator resistance of the motor (i.e. half the resistance measured between two phases). This is the same as the value stored
in Pr 5.17 following a successful measurement. Refer to Autotune (Pr 0.40).
This set up will give a step response with minimum overshoot after a step change of current reference. The proportional gain can be increased by a
factor of 1.5 giving a similar increase in bandwidth; however, this gives at step response with approximately 12.5% overshoot. The equation for the
integral gain gives a conservative value. In some applications where it is necessary for the reference frame used by the drive to dynamically follow
the flux very closely the integral gain may need to have a significantly higher value.

Speed loop gains (Pr 0.07 {3.10}, 0.08 {3.11}, 0.09 {3.12})
The speed loop gains control the response of the speed controller to a change in speed demand. The speed controller includes proportional (Kp)
and integral (Ki) feed forward terms, and a differential (Kd) feedback term. The drive holds two sets of these gains and either set may be selected for
use by the speed controller with Pr 3.16. If Pr 3.16 = 0, gains Kp1, Ki1 and Kd1 (Pr 0.07 to Pr 0.09) are used, and if Pr 3.16 = 1, gains Kp2, Ki2 and
Kd2 (Pr 3.13 to Pr 3.15) are used. Pr 3.16 may be changed when the drive is enabled or disabled. If the load is predominantly a constant inertia and
constant torque, the drive can calculate the required Kp and Ki gains to give a required compliance angle or bandwidth dependant on the setting of
Pr 3.17.
Proportional gain (Kp), Pr 0.07 and Pr 3.13
If the proportional gain has a value and the integral gain is set to zero the controller will only have a proportional term, and there must be a speed
error to produce a torque reference. Therefore as the motor load increases there will be a difference between the reference and actual speeds. This
effect, called regulation, depends on the level of the proportional gain, the higher the gain the smaller the speed error for a given load. If the
proportional gain is too high either the acoustic noise produced by speed feedback quantisation becomes unacceptable, or the closed-loop stability
limit is reached.
Integral gain (Ki), Pr 0.08 and Pr 3.14
The integral gain is provided to prevent speed regulation. The error is accumulated over a period of time and used to produce the necessary torque
demand without any speed error. Increasing the integral gain reduces the time taken for the speed to reach the correct level and increases the
stiffness of the system, i.e. it reduces the positional displacement produced by applying a load torque to the motor. Unfortunately increasing the
integral gain also reduces the system damping giving overshoot after a transient. For a given integral gain the damping can be improved by
increasing the proportional gain. A compromise must be reached where the system response, stiffness and damping are all adequate for the
application.
Differential gain (Kd), Pr 0.09 and Pr 3.15
The differential gain is provided in the feedback of the speed controller to give additional damping. The differential term is implemented in a way that
does not introduce excessive noise normally associated with this type of function. Increasing the differential term reduces the overshoot produced
by under-damping, however, for most applications the proportional and integral gains alone are sufficient.
There are three methods of tuning the speed loop gains dependant on the setting of Pr 3.17:
1. Pr 3.17 = 0, User set-up.
This involves the connecting of an oscilloscope to analog output 1 to
monitor the speed feedback.
Give the drive a step change in speed reference and monitor the
response of the drive on the oscilloscope.
The proportional gain (Kp) should be set up initially. The value
should be increased up to the point where the speed overshoots and
Speed demand
then reduced slightly.
The integral gain (Ki) should then be increased up to the point where
the speed becomes unstable and then reduced slightly.
It may now be possible to increase the proportional gain to a higher
value and the process should be repeated until the system response
matches the ideal response as shown. Insufficient proportional
gain [0.07]
The diagram shows the effect of incorrect P and I gain settings as
well as the ideal response.
2. Pr 3.17 = 1, Bandwidth set-up
If bandwidth based set-up is required, the drive can calculate Kp and
Ki if the following parameters are set up correctly:
Excessive proportional
Pr 3.20 - Required bandwidth, gain [0.07]
Pr 5.32 - Motor torque per amp (Kt).
Pr 3.18 - Motor and load inertia. The drive can be made to
measurement autotune (see Autotune Pr 0.40, earlier in this Excessive integral gain
table). [0.08]
3. Pr 3.17 = 2, Compliance angle set-up
If compliance angle based set-up is required, the drive can calculate
Kp and Ki if the following parameters are set up correctly:
Pr 3.19 - Required compliance angle, Ideal response
Pr 5.32 - Motor torque per amp (Kt).
Pr 3.18 - Motor and load inertia The drive can be made to
measurement autotune (see Autotune Pr 0.40, earlier in this
table).

8.2 Maximum motor rated current Servo

The maximum motor rated current allowed by the drive is greater than
the rated drive current as defined by the maximum Heavy Duty current
Maximum
current limit
= [ Maximum current
Motor rated current
] x 100%
rating in Pr 11.32. The ratio between the Normal Duty rating and the
Heavy Duty rating (Pr 11.32) varies between drive sizes. The values for Where:
the Normal and Heavy Duty rating can be found in section Maximum current is drive rated current (Pr 11.32) x 1.75
2.1 Ratings on page 8. Motor rated current is given by Pr 5.07
If the motor rated current (Pr 0.46) is set above the maximum Heavy
Duty current rating (Pr 11.32), the current limits and the motor thermal 8.4 Motor thermal protection
protection scheme are modified (see section 8.3 Current limits and Unidrive SP models the temperature of the motor using the motor rated
section 8.4 Motor thermal protection , for more information). current (Pr 5.07), the thermal time constant (Pr 4.15), whether low speed
thermal protection mode has been enabled (Pr 4.25) and the actual
8.3 Current limits current flowing at any point in time. Pr 4.19 gives the estimated motor
The default settings for the current limit parameters are 165% x motor temperature as a percentage of maximum temperature.
rated current for open loop, and 175% x motor rated current for closed The temperature of the motor (Pr 4.19) as a percentage of maximum
loop vector and servo modes. temperature, with a constant current magnitude of I, constant value of K
There are three parameters which control the current limits: and constant value of Motor rated current (Pr 5.07) after time t is given
by:
• Motoring current limit: power flowing from the drive to the motor
• Regen current limit: power flowing from the motor to the drive Percentage motor temperature (Pr 4.19) = [I2 / (K x Motor rated
• Symmetrical current limit: current limit for both motoring and regen current)2] (1 - e-t/τ) x 100%
operation
This assumes that the maximum allowed motor temperature is produced
The lowest of either the motoring and regen current limit, or the by K x Motor rated current and that τ is the thermal time constant of the
symmetrical current limit applies. point in the motor that reaches its maximum allowed temperature first. τ
The maximum setting of these parameters depends on the values of is defined by Pr 4.15. If Pr 4.15 has a value between 0.0 and 1.0 the
motor rated current, drive rated current and the power factor. thermal time constant is taken as 1.0.
Increasing the motor rated current (Pr 0.46/5.07) above the Normal Duty The value of K is defined as shown in Figure 8-1 and Figure 8-2.
rating (default value), will automatically reduce the current limits in Pr For both Heavy and Normal duty ratings, Pr 4.25 can be used to select
4.05 to Pr 4.07. If the motor rated current is then set below the Normal two alternative protection characteristics.
Duty rating, the current limits will be left at their reduced values.
Figure 8-1 Motor thermal protection (Heavy Duty)
The drive can be oversized to permit a higher current limit setting to
provide higher accelerating torque as required up to a maximum of
1.05
1000%. 1.00
The maximum current limit available for each mode of operation, are
calculated from the following equations. 0.70 Pr 4.25 = 0
Pr 4.25 = 1
Open Loop
Maximum
current limit
= √[[ Maximum current
Motor rated current
] 2
+ PF2 - 1 ] x 100%
PF 0.00
Where:
The Maximum current is either (1.5 x Heavy Duty rating) when the 50% of base Base speed/
speed/frequency frequency
rated current set in Pr 5.07 is less than or equal to the maximum
Heavy Duty current rating given by Pr 11.32, otherwise it is (1.1 x If Pr 4.25 is 0 the characteristic is for a motor which can operate at rated
Normal Duty rating). current over the whole speed range. Induction motors with this type of
Motor rated current is given by Pr 5.07 characteristic normally have forced cooling. If Pr 4.25 is 1 the
PF is motor rated power factor given by Pr 5.10 characteristic is intended for motors where the cooling effect of motor
fan reduces with reduced motor speed below 50% of base speed/
Closed Loop Vector
frequency. The maximum value for K is 1.05, so that above the knee of
Maximum
current limit
Motor rated current
] 2
+ cos(ϕ1)2 - 1 ] x 100%
the characteristics the motor can operate continuously up to 1.05%
current.
cos(ϕ1)
Where:
The Maximum current is either (1.75 x Heavy Duty rating) when the
rated current set in Pr 5.07 is less than or equal to the maximum
Heavy Duty current rating given by Pr 11.32, otherwise it is (1.1 x
Normal Duty rating).
Motor rated current is given by Pr 5.07
ϕ1 = cos-1(PF) - ϕ2. This is measured by the drive during an
autotune.
PF is motor rated power factor given by Pr 5.10

Figure 8-2 Motor thermal protection (Normal Duty) 8.5 Switching frequency
The default switching frequency is 3kHz (6kHz in Servo mode), however
1.00 1.01 this can be increased up to a maximum of 16kHz by Pr 5.18 (dependent
on drive size). The available switching frequencies are shown below.
0.70 Pr 4.25 = 0 Table 8-1 Available switching frequencies
Pr 4.25 = 1
Voltage
Drive size 3kHz 4kHz 6kHz 8kHz 12kHz 16kHz
rating
1 All 9 9 9 9 9 9
2 All 9 9 9 9 9 9
0.00 SP320X 9 9 9 9 9
SP3401 &
15% of 50% of Base speed/ 9 9 9 9 9 9
3 SP3402
base speed/ base speed/ frequency
frequency frequency SP3403 9 9 9 9 9
SP350X 9 9 9 9
Both settings of Pr 4.25 are intended for motors where the cooling effect
of the motor fan reduces with reduced motor speed, but with different If switching frequency is increased from 3kHz the following apply:
speeds below which the cooling effect is reduced. If Pr 4.25 is 0 the 1. Increased heat loss in the drive, which means that derating to the
characteristic is intended for motors where the cooling effect reduces output current must be applied.
with motor speed below 15% of base speed/frequency. If Pr 4.25 is 1 the See the derating tables for switching frequency and ambient
characteristic is intended for motors where the cooling effect reduces temperature in section 12.1.1 Power and current ratings (Derating
with motor speed below 50% of base speed/frequency. The maximum for switching frequency and temperature) on page 186.
value for K is 1.01, so that above the knee of the characteristics the 2. Reduced heating of the motor - due to improved output waveform
motor can operate continuously up to 1.01% current. quality.
When the estimated temperature in Pr 4.19 reaches 100% the drive 3. Reduced acoustic noise generated by the motor.
takes some action depending on the setting of Pr 4.16. If Pr 4.16 is 0, the 4. Increased sample rate on the speed and current controllers. A trade
drive trips when Pr 4.19 reaches 100%. If Pr 4.16 is 1, the current limit is off must be made between motor heating, drive heating and the
reduced to (K - 0.05) x 100% when Pr 4.19 reaches 100%. The current demands of the application with respect to the sample time required.
limit is set back to the user defined level when Pr 4.19 falls below 95%.
Table 8-2 Sample rates for various control tasks at each
In servo mode the current magnitude and the active current controlled by
switching frequency
the current limits should be similar, and so this system should ensure
that the motor operates just below its thermal limit. Closed loop
3, 6, 12 4, 8, 16
The thermal model temperature accumulator is reset to zero at power-up Open loop vector and
kHz kHz
and accumulates the temperature of the motor whilst the drive remains Servo
powered-up. If the rated current defined by Pr 5.07 is altered, the 3kHz = 167µs
Current
accumulator is reset to zero. Level 1 6kHz = 83µs 125µs Peak limit
controllers
The default setting of the thermal time constant (Pr 4.15) is 89s for an 12kHz = 83µs
induction motor (open loop and closed loop vector), which is equivalent Speed
Current limit
to an overload of 150% for 60s from cold. The default value for a servo Level 2 250µs controller and
and ramps
motor is 20s, which is equivalent to an overload of 175% for 9s from ramps
cold. Level 3 1ms Voltage controller
The time for the drive to trip from cold with constant motor current is Level 4 4ms Time critical user interface
given by: Background Non-time critical user interface
2
Ttrip = -(Pr 4.15) x ln(1 - (K x Pr 5.07 / Pr 4.01) )
8.6 High speed operation
Alternatively the thermal time constant can be calculated from the trip
time with a given current from: 8.6.1 Encoder feedback limits
2 The maximum encoder frequency should be prevented from exceeding
Pr 4.15 = -Ttrip / ln(1 - (K / Overload) )
410kHz. In closed loop and servo modes the maximum speed that can
For example, if the drive should trip after supplying 150% overload for be entered in to the speed reference clamps (Pr 1.06 and Pr 1.07) can
60s with K = 1.05 (Heavy Duty) then: be limited by the drive. This is defined by the following (subject to an
absolute maximum of 40,000rpm):
Pr 4.15 = -60 / ln(1 - (1.05 / 1.50)2) = 89
410kHz x 60
The maximum value for the thermal time constant can be increased up Maximum speed limit (rpm) =
to a maximum value of 400s to allow an increased overload if the motor ELPR
thermal characteristics permit. 2.46 x 107
=
For applications using CT Dynamics Unimotors the thermal time ELPR
constants can be found in the Unimotor manual.
Where:
ELPR is the equivalent encoder lines per revolution and is the
number of lines that would be produced by a quadrature encoder.
• Quadrature encoder ELPR = number of lines per revolution
• F and D encoder ELPR = number of lines per revolution / 2
• SINCOS encoder ELPR = number of sine waves per revolution
This maximum speed limit is defined by the device selected with the
speed feedback selector (Pr 3.26), and the ELPR set for the position
feedback device. In closed-loop vector mode it is possible to disable this

limit via Pr 3.24, so that the drive can be switched between operation 8.6.4 Switching frequency
with and without feedback when the speed becomes too high for the With a default switching frequency of 3 kHz the maximum output
feedback device. The maximum speed limit is defined as above when Pr frequency should be limited to 250 Hz. Ideally a minimum ratio of 12:1
3.24 = 0 or 1, and is 40,000rpm when Pr 3.24 = 2 or 3. should be maintained between the output frequency and the switching
8.6.2 Field weakening (constant power) operation frequency. This ensures the number of switchings per cycle is sufficient
(Open loop and closed loop vector mode only) to ensure the output waveform quality is maintained at a minimum level.
If this is not possible, quasi-square switching should be enabled (Pr 5.20
Unidrive SP can be used to run an induction machine above =1). The output waveform will be quasi square above base speed
synchronous speed into the constant power region. The speed
ensuring a symmetrical output waveform, which results in a better quality
continues to increase and the available shaft torque reduces. The
output than would otherwise result.
characteristics below show the torque and output voltage characteristics
as the speed is increased above the rated value. 8.6.5 Maximum speed / frequency
In open loop mode the maximum frequency is 3,000 Hz.
Figure 8-3 Torque and rated voltage against speed
In closed loop vector mode the maximum output frequency is 1250 Hz.
In servo mode the maximum output frequency is 1250Hz, however the
Torque speed is limited by the voltage constant (Ke) of the motor. Ke is a
specific constant for the servo motor being used. It can normally be
found on the motor data sheet in V/krpm (volts per 1,000rpm).
8.6.6 Quasi-Square wave (open-loop only)
The maximum output voltage level of the drive is normally limited to an
equivalent of the drive input voltage minus voltage drops within the drive
(the drive will also retain a few percent of the voltage in order to maintain
Speed
current control). If the motor rated voltage is set at the same level as the
supply voltage, some pulse deletion will occur as the drive output voltage
Rated approaches the rated voltage level. If Pr 5.20 (Quasi-square wave
voltage enable) is set to 1 the modulator will allow over modulation, so that as
the output frequency increases beyond the rated frequency the voltage
continues to increase above the rated voltage. The modulation depth will
increase beyond unity; first producing trapezoidal and then quasi-square
waveforms.
This can be used for example:
Rated speed Speed
• To obtain high output frequencies with a low switching frequency
Care must be taken to ensure the torque available above base speed is which would not be possible with space vector modulation limited to
sufficient for the application to run satisfactorily. unity modulation depth,
or
The saturation breakpoint parameters (Pr 5.29 and Pr 5.30) found during
the autotune in closed loop vector mode ensure the magnetising current • In order to maintain a higher output voltage with a low supply
is reduced in the correct proportion for the specific motor. (In open loop voltage.
mode the magnetising current is not actively controlled.) The disadvantage is that the machine current will be distorted as the
modulation depth increases above unity, and will contain a significant
8.6.3 Servo high speed operation amount of low order odd harmonics of the fundamental output frequency.
High speed servo mode is enabled by setting Pr 5.22 =1. Care must be The additional low order harmonics cause increased losses and heating
taken when using this mode with servo motors to avoid damaging the in the motor.
drive. The voltage produced by the servo motor magnets is proportional
to speed. For high speed operation the drive must apply currents to the
motor to counter-act the flux produced by the magnets. It is possible to
operate the motor at very high speeds that would give a very high motor
terminal voltage, but this voltage is prevented by the action of the drive.
If however, the drive is disabled (or tripped) when the motor voltages
would be higher than the rating of the drive without the currents to
counter-act the flux from the magnets, it is possible to damage the drive.
If high speed mode is enabled the motor speed must be limited to the
levels given in the table below unless an additional hardware protection
system is used to limit the voltages applied to the drive output terminals
to a safe level.
Maximum motor Maximum safe line to line

Drive voltage
speed voltage at the motor
rating
(rpm) terminals (V rms)
200 400 / (Ke x √2) 400 / √2
400 800 / (Ke x √2) 800 / √2
575 955 / (Ke x √2) 955 / √2
690 1145 / (Ke x √2) 1145 / √2
Ke is the ratio between r.m.s. line to line voltage produced by the motor
and the speed in V/rpm. Care must also be taken not to de-magnetise
the motor. The motor manufacturer should always be consulted before
using this mode.

9 SMARTCARD operation Figure 9-1 Installation of the SMARTCARD
Installing the SMARTCARD SMARTCARD installed

9.1 Introduction
This is a standard feature that enables simple configuration of
parameters in a variety of ways. The SMARTCARD can be used for:
• Parameter cloning between drives
• Saving whole drive parameter sets
• Saving ‘differences from default‘ parameter sets
• Storing Onboard PLC programs
• Automatically saving all user parameter changes for maintenance
purposes
• Loading complete motor map parameters
The SMARTCARD is located at the top of the module under the drive
display (if fitted) on the left-hand side. Ensure the SMARTCARD is
inserted with the contacts facing the right-hand side of the drive.
The drive only communicates with the SMARTCARD when commanded
to read or write, meaning the card may be "hot swapped".
Encoder phase angle (servo mode only)

The encoder phase angle in Pr 3.25 and Pr 21.20 is cloned
when using the SMARTCARD with drive software version
V01.05.00 onwards. This is useful when the SMARTCARD is
WARNING
used to backup the parameter set of a drive but caution
should be used if the SMARTCARD is used to transfer
parameter sets between drives.
Unless the encoder phase angle of the servo motor
connected to the destination drive is known to be the same
as the servo motor connected to the source drive, an
autotune should be performed or the encoder phase angle
should be entered manually into Pr 3.25 (or Pr 21.20).
If the encoder phase angle is incorrect the drive may lose
control of the motor resulting in an O.SPd or Enc10 trip when
the drive is enabled.
Easy saving and reading

Figure 9-2 Basic SMARTCARD operation
Drive reads all Programs all drive

parameters from parameters to the
the SMARTCARD SMARTCARD
Pr 0.30 = rEAd + Pr 0.30 = Prog +

Boot Drive boots from the
Drive automatically SMARTCARD on
writes to the power up and
SMARTCARD automatically writes
when a parameter Auto to the SMARTCARD
save is performed Save when a parameter
Auto Save save is performed
Pr 0.30 = Auto + Pr 0.30 = boot +

The SMARTCARD has 999 individual data block locations. Each Six bytes are required for each parameter difference. The data density is
individual location from 1 to 499 can be used to store data until the 4kb not as high as when using the data format described in the previous
capacity is used. section, but in most cases the number of differences from default is
The data block locations of the SMARTCARD are arranged to have the small and the data blocks are therefore smaller. This method can be
following usage: used for creating drive macros. Parameters that are not transferred
when using 3yyy are also not transferred with this method. Parameter
Table 9-1 SMARTCARD data blocks RAM is used as the source of this information.
Data Block Type Example Use Writing a parameter set to the SMARTCARD (Pr 11.42 = Prog
1 to 499 Read / Write Application set ups
(2))
Setting Pr 11.42 to Prog (2) and resetting the drive will save the
500 to 999 Read Only Macros
parameters in the drive EEPROM to the SMARTCARD, i.e. this is
equivalent to writing 3001 to Pr xx.00. All SMARTCARD trips apply
‘Differences from default‘ parameter sets will be much smaller than
except ‘C.Chg’. If the data block already exists it is automatically over-
whole parameter sets and thus take up a lot less memory as most
written. When the action is complete this parameter is automatically
applications only require a few parameters to be changed from the
reset to nonE (0).
default setting.
The whole card may be protected from writing or erasing by setting the 9.2.2 Reading from the SMARTCARD
read-only flag as detailed section 9.2.7 9888 / 9777 - Setting and 6yyy - Read default differences from a SMARTCARD
clearing the SMARTCARD read only flag on page 102. When the data is transferred back to a drive, using 6yyy in Pr xx.00, it is
transferred to the drive RAM and the drive EEPROM. A parameter save
If the card is removed during data transfer from the card for a file that
is not required to retain the data after power-down. Set up data for any
was saved with code 3yyy the drive EEPROM checksum will be set up
Solutions Modules fitted are stored on the card and are transferred to the
incorrectly and an ‘EEF’ trip will be initiated.
destination drive. If the Solutions Modules are different between the
If the card is removed during data transfer from the card for a file that source and destination drive, the menus for the slots where the
was saved with code 4yyy then no data will be saved to EEPROM and a Solutions Module categories are different are not updated from the card
‘C.Acc’ trip will be initiated. and will contain their default values after the cloning action. The drive will
It should be noted that in both cases the parameters held in drive produce a ‘C.Optn’ trip if the Solutions Modules fitted to the source and
parameter RAM are likely to be incorrect. Default parameters should be destination drive are different or are in different slots. If the data is being
loaded and saved if either of these trips occur. transferred to a drive of a different voltage or current rating a ‘C.rtg’ trip
will occur. The following parameters will not be written to the destination
drive and will contain their default values after the cloning action:
9.2 Transferring data Pr 2.08 Standard ramp voltage
Pr 4.05 to Pr 4.07 and Pr 21.27 to Pr 21.29 Current limits
Data transfer, erasing and protecting the information is performed by
Pr 5.07, Pr 21.07 Motor rated current
entering a code in Pr xx.00 and then resetting the drive as shown in
Pr 5.09, Pr 21.09 Motor rated voltage
Table 9-2.
Pr 5.17, Pr 21.12 Stator resistance
Table 9-2 SMARTCARD codes Pr 5.18 Switching frequency
Code Action Pr 5.23, Pr 21.13 Voltage offset
Pr 5.24, Pr 21.14 Transient inductance
3yyy Write drive EEPROM data to a SMARTCARD block number yyy
Pr 5.25, Pr 21.24 Stator inductance
Write drive data as difference from defaults to SMARTCARD Pr 6.06 DC injection braking current
4yyy
block number yyy
Reading a parameter set from the SMARTCARD (Pr 11.42 =
5yyy Write Onboard PLC program to SMARTCARD block number yyy rEAd (1))
6yyy Read SMARTCARD data block yyy to the drive Setting Pr 11.42 to rEAd (1) and resetting the drive will load the
7yyy Erase SMARTCARD data block yyy parameters from the card into the drive parameter set and the drive
8yyy Compare drive parameters with block yyy EEPROM i.e. this is equivalent to writing 6001 to Pr xx.00. All
9999 Erase SMARTCARD SMARTCARD trips apply. Once the parameters are successfully copied
this parameter is automatically reset to nonE (0). Parameters are saved
9888 Set SMARTCARD read-only flag
to the drive EEPROM after this action is complete.
9777 Clear SMARTCARD read-only flag
NOTE N
Where yyy indicates the block number 001 to 999. See Table 9-1 for
This operation is only performed if data block 1 on the card is a full
restrictions on block numbers.
parameter set and not a default difference file. If block 1 does not exist or
NOTE N the type is incorrect a ‘C.typ’ trip occurs.
If the read only flag is set then only codes 6yyy or 9777 are effective. 9.2.3 Auto saving parameter changes (Pr 11.42 =
9.2.1 Writing to the SMARTCARD Auto (3))
3yyy - Write data to the SMARTCARD This setting causes the drive to automatically save any changes made to
menu 0 parameters on the drive to the SMARTCARD. The latest menu 0
The data block contains the complete parameter data from the drive
parameter set in the drive is therefore always backed up on the
EEPROM, i.e. all user save (US) parameters except parameters with the
NC coding bit set. Power-down save (PS) are not saved to the SMARTCARD. Changing Pr 11.42 to Auto (3) and resetting the drive will
immediately save the complete parameter set from the EEPROM to the
SMARTCARD. A SMARTCARD can hold up to 4 data blocks of this type.
card. Once the whole parameter set is stored only the individual
A save must have been performed on the drive to transfer the modified menu 0 parameter setting is updated.
parameters from the drive RAM to the EPROM before this operation is
Advanced parameter changes are only saved to the card when Pr xx.00
carried out.
is set to a 1000 and the drive reset.
4yyy - Write default differences to a SMARTCARD
All SMARTCARD trips apply, except ‘C.Chg’. If the data block already
The parameter data stored on the SMARTCARD is the number for the
contains information it is automatically overwritten.
last set of defaults loaded (indicating European or USA settings) and the
parameter differences from the last time default settings were loaded.

If the card is removed when Pr 11.42 is set to 3 Pr 11.42 is then The header information for each data block which has been used can be
automatically set to nonE (0). viewed in Pr 11.38 to Pr 11.40 by increasing or decreasing the data
When a new SMARTCARD is fitted Pr 11.42 must be set back to Auto block number set in Pr 11.37.
(3) by the user and the drive reset so the complete parameter set is If Pr 11.37 is set to 1000 the checksum parameter (Pr 11.40) shows the
rewritten to the new SMARTCARD if auto mode is still required. number of bytes left on the card. If there is no data on the card Pr 11.37
When Pr 11.42 is set to Auto (3) and the parameters in the drive are can only have values of 0 or 1,000.
saved, the SMARTCARD is also updated, therefore the SMARTCARD The version number is intended to be used when data blocks are used
becomes a copy of the drives stored configuration. as drive macros. If a version number is to be stored with a data block, Pr
At power up, if Pr 11.42 is set to Auto (3), the drive will save the 11.39 should be set to the required version number before the data is
complete parameter set to the SMARTCARD. The drive will display transferred. Each time Pr 11.37 is changed by the user the drive puts the
‘cArd’ during this operation. This is done to ensure that if a user puts a version number of the currently viewed data block in Pr 11.39.
new SMARTCARD in during power down the new SMARTCARD will If the destination drive has a different drive mode to the parameters on
have the correct data. the card, the drive mode will be changed by the action of transferring
parameters from the card to the drive.
NOTE N
When Pr 11.42 is set to Auto (3) the setting of Pr 11.42 itself is saved to The actions of erasing a card, erasing a file, changing a menu 0
parameter, or inserting a new card will effectively set Pr 11.37 to 0 or the
the drive EEPROM but NOT to the SMARTCARD.
lowest file number in the card.
9.2.4 Booting up from the SMARTCARD on every
power up (Pr 11.42 = boot (4)) 9.4 SMARTCARD parameters
When Pr 11.42 is set to boot (4) the drive operates the same as Auto Table 9-3 Key to parameter table coding
mode except when the drive is powered-up. The parameters on the RW Read / Write RO Read only Uni Unipolar
SMARTCARD will be automatically transferred to the drive at power up if Bi Bi-polar Bit Bit parameter Txt Text string
the following are true:
FI Filtered DE Destination NC Not cloned
• A card is inserted in the drive RA Rating dependent PT Protected US User save
• Parameter data block 1 exists on the card PS Power down save
• The data in block 1 is type 1 to 5 (as defined in Pr 11.38)
• Pr 11.42 on the card set to boot (4)
11.36 {0.29} SMARTCARD parameter data previously loaded
The drive will display 'boot' during this operation. If the drive mode is
different from that on the card, the drive gives a 'C.Typ'. trip and the data RO Uni NC PT US
is not transferred. Ú 0 to 999 Ö 0
If 'boot' mode is stored on the cloning SMARTCARD this makes the
cloning SMARTCARD the master device. This provides a very fast and This parameter shows the number of the data block last transferred from
efficient way of re-programming a number of drives. a SMARTCARD to the drive.
NOTE N 11.37 SMARTCARD data number

‘Boot’ mode is saved to the card, but when the card is read, the value of RW Uni NC
Pr 11.42 is not transferred to the drive.
Ú 0 to 1,000 Ö 0
9.2.5 8yyy - Comparing the drive full parameter set
This parameter should have the data block number entered for which the
with the SMARTCARD values
user would like information displayed in Pr 11.38, Pr 11.39 and Pr 11.40.
Setting 8yyy in Pr xx.00, will compare the SMARTCARD file with the
data in the EEPROM. If the compare is successful Pr xx.00 is simply set 11.38 SMARTCARD data type/mode
to 0. If the compare fails a ‘C.cpr’ trip is initiated.
RO Txt NC PT
9.2.6 7yyy / 9999 - Erasing data from the
SMARTCARD Ú 0 to 18 Ö
Data can be erased from the SMART CARD either one block at a time or Gives the type/mode of the data block selected with Pr 11.37:
blocks 1 to 499 in one go.
• Setting 7yyy in Pr xx.00 will erase SMART CARD data block yyy. Pr 11.38 String Type/mode Data stored
• Setting 9999 in Pr xx.00 will erase SMART CARD data blocks 1 to 0 FrEE Value when Pr 11.37 = 0 or 1,000
499. 1 Reserved
2 3OpEn.LP Open-loop mode parameters
9.2.7 9888 / 9777 - Setting and clearing the
SMARTCARD read only flag 3 3CL.VECt Closed-loop vector mode parameters
Data from
The SMART CARD may be protected from writing or erasing by setting 4 3SErVO Servo mode parameters
EEPROM
the read only flag. If an attempt is made to write or erase a data block 5 3rEgEn Regen mode parameters
when the read only flag is set, a 'C.rdo' trip is initiated. When the read 6 to 8 3Un Unused
only flag is set only codes 6yyy or 9777 are effective. 9 Reserved
• Setting 9888 in Pr xx.00 will set the read only flag 10 4OpEn.LP Open-loop mode parameters
• Setting 9777 in Pr xx.00 will clear the read only flag. 11 4CL.VECt Closed-loop vector mode parameters Defaults last
12 4SErVO Servo mode parameters loaded and
9.3 Data block header information 13 4rEgEn Regen mode parameters differences
Each data block stored on a SMARTCARD has header information
14 to 16 4Un Unused
detailing the following:
17 LAddEr Onboard PLC program
• A number which identifies the block (Pr 11.37) 18 Option A Solutions Module file
• The type of data stored in the block (Pr 11.38)
• The drive mode if the data is parameter data (Pr 11.38)
• The version number (Pr 11.39)
• The checksum (Pr 11.40)

11.39 SMARTCARD data version

RW Uni NC
Ú 0 to 9,999 Ö 0
Gives the version number of the data block selected in Pr 11.37.
11.40 SMARTCARD data checksum

R0 Uni NC PT
Ú 0 to 65,335 Ö
Gives the checksum of the data block selected in Pr 11.37.
11.42 {0.30} Parameter cloning

RW Txt NC US*
Ú 0 to 4 Ö nonE (0)
NOTE N
If Pr 11.42 is equal to 1 or 2 this value is not transferred to the EPROM
or the drive. If Pr 11.42 is set to a 3 or 4 the value is transferred.
nonE (0) = Inactive
rEAd (1) = Read parameter set from the SMARTCARD
Prog (2) = Programming a parameter set to the SMARTCARD
Auto (3) = Auto save
boot (4) = Boot mode
9.5 SMARTCARD trips

After an attempt to read, write or erase data to or from a SMARTCARD a
trip may occur if there has been a problem with the command. The
following trips indicate various problems as detailed in Table 9-4.
Table 9-4 Trip conditions

Trip Diagnosis
C.Acc SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD Read / Write fail
Check SMARTCARD is fitted / located correctly
185
Replace SMARTCARD
C.Chg SMARTCARD trip: Data location already contains data
Erase data in data location
179
Write data to an alternative data location
C.Cpr SMARTCARD trip: The values stored in the drive and the values in the data block on the SMARTCARD are different
188 Press the red reset button
C.dat SMARTCARD trip: Data location specified does not contain any data
183 Ensure data block number is correct
C.Err SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD data is corrupted
Ensure the card is located correctly
182 Erase data and retry
Replace SMARTCARD
C.Full SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD full
184 Delete a data block or use a different SMARTCARD
C.Optn SMARTCARD trip: Solutions Modules fitted are different between source drive and destination drive
Ensure correct Solutions Modules are fitted
180 Ensure Solutions Modules are in the same Solutions Module slot
Press the red reset button
C.rdo SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD has the Read only bit set
Enter 9777 in Pr xx.00 to allow SMARTCARD Read / Write access
181
Ensure card is not writing to data locations 500 to 999

Table 9-4 Trip conditions

Trip Diagnosis
SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD attempting to change the destination drive ratings
C.rtg
No drive rating parameters have been transferred
Press the red reset button
Drive rating parameters are:
Parameter Function
2.08 Standard ramp voltage
4.05/6/7, 21.27/8/9 Current limits
5.07, 21.07 Motor rated current
186 5.09, 21.09 Motor rated voltage
5.17, 21.12 Stator resistance
5.18 Switching frequency
5.23, 21.13 Voltage offset
5.24, 21.14 Transient inductance
5.25, 21.24 Stator inductance
6.06 DC injection braking current
The above parameters will be set to their default values.
C.Typ SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD parameter set not compatible with drive
187 Press the red reset button

Ensure destination drive type is the same as the source parameter file drive type
Table 9-5 SMARTCARD status indications
Lower display Description Lower display Description

boot A parameter set is being transferred from the cArd The drive is writing a parameter set to the SMARTCARD
SMARTCARD to the drive during power-up. For further during power-up.
information, please refer to section 9.2.4 Booting up For further information, please refer to section
from the SMARTCARD on every power up (Pr 11.42 = 9.2.3 Auto saving parameter changes (Pr 11.42 = Auto
boot (4)) . (3)) .

10 Onboard PLC used for time-critical applications. For time-critical applications either
the SM-Applications or SM-Applications Lite solutions modules
should be used.
10.1 Onboard PLC and SYPTLite • The program runs at a low priority. The Unidrive SP provides a
The Unidrive SP has the ability to store and execute a 4kb Onboard PLC single background task in which to run a ladder diagram. The drive is
ladder logic program without the need for additional hardware in the form prioritised to perform its major functions first, e.g. motor control, and
of a Solutions Module. will use any remaining processing time to execute the ladder
diagram as a background activity. As the drive's processor becomes
The ladder logic program is written using SYPTLite, a Windows™ based
ladder diagram editor allowing the development of programs for more heavily loaded, less time is spent executing the program.
execution in Unidrive SP or SM-Applications Lite. Figure 10-1 Unidrive SP Onboard PLC program scheduling
SYPTLite is designed to be easy to use and to make program
development as simple as possible. The features provided are a sub-set Major drive
of those in the SYPT program editor. SYPTLite programs are developed functions
using ladder logic, a graphical language widely used to program PLCs
User
(IEC6113-3). SYPTLite allows the user to "draw" a ladder diagram program
representing a program.
SYPTLite provides a complete environment for the development of
0 64 128
ladder diagrams. Ladder diagrams can be created, compiled into user Time
programs and downloaded to a Unidrive SP or SM-Applications Lite for (milliseconds)
execution, via the RJ45 serial communications port on the front of the
The user program is scheduled for a short period approximately once
drive. The run-time operation of the compiled ladder diagram on the
every 64ms. The time for which the program is scheduled will vary
target can also be monitored using SYPTLite and facilities are provided
between 0.2ms and 2ms depending on the loading of the drive's
to interact with the program on the target by setting new values for target
processor.
parameters.
When scheduled, several scans of the user program may be performed.
SYPTLite is available on the CD which is supplied with the drive.
Some scans may execute in microseconds. However, when the main
10.2 Benefits drive functions are scheduled there will be a pause in the execution of
the program causing some scans to take many milliseconds. SYPTLite
The combination of the Onboard PLC and SYPTLite, means that displays the average execution time calculated over the last 10 scans of
Unidrive SP can replace nano and some micro PLCs in many the user program.
applications. The Onboard PLC programs can consist of up to a
maximum of 50 ladder logic rungs (up to 7 function blocks and 10
contacts per rung). The Onboard PLC program can also be transferred
to and from a SMARTCARD for backup or quick commissioning
In addition to the basic ladder symbols, SYPTLite contains a sub-set of
the function from the full version of SYPT. These include,
• Arithmetic blocks
• Comparison blocks
• Timers
• Counters
• Multiplexers
• Latches
• Bit manipulation
Typical applications for the Onboard PLC include,
• Ancillary pumps
• Fans and control valves
• Interlocking logic
• Sequences routines
• Custom control words.
10.3 Limitations
Compared with the SM-Applications or SM-Application Lite modules
when programmed with SYPT, the Onboard PLC program has the
following limitations:
• The maximum program size is 4032 bytes including header and
optional source code.
• The Unidrive SP is rated for 100 program downloads. This limitation
is imposed by the flash memory used to store the program within the
drive.
• The user cannot create user variables. The user is only able to
manipulate the drive parameter set.
• The program cannot be downloaded or monitored over CTNet. The
program is only accessible via the drives RJ45 serial
communications port.
• There are no real-time tasks, i.e. the scheduling rate of the program
cannot be guaranteed. SM-Applications tasks such as Clock, Event,
Pos0 or Speed are not available. The Onboard PLC should not be

The Onboard PLC and SYPTLite form the first level of functionality in a
range of programmable options for Unidrive SP.
Figure 10-2 Programming options for Unidrive SP
FUNCTIONALITY
Level 4
SM-Applications with
SYPT software
Level 3
SM-Applications Lite with
SYPT software
Level 2
SM-Applications Lite with
SYPTLite software
Level 1
Onboard PLC with SYPTLite software
CAPABILITY
SYPTLite can be used with either the Onboard PLC in the Unidrive SP 10.5 Onboard PLC parameters
or with SM-Applications Lite to create ladder logic programs.
The following parameters are associated with the Onboard PLC
SYPT can be used with either the SM-Applications Lite or SM-
program.
Applications to create fully flexible programs using ladder logic, function
blocks or DPL script.
11.47 Drive Onboard PLC program enable
10.4 Getting started RW Uni US
SYPTLite can be found on the CD which is supplied with the drive.
Ú 0 to 2 Ö 2
• SYPTLite System Requirements:
• Windows 95/98/98SE/ME/NT4/2000/XP required. This parameter is used to start and stop the drive Onboard PLC program.
• Internet Explorer V5.0 or later must be installed
• Minimum of 800x600 screen resolution with 256 colours. Value Description
• 96MB RAM
0 Halt the drive Onboard PLC program.
• Pentium II 266MHz or better recommended.
Run the drive Onboard PLC program (if fitted). Any out-of-
• Adobe Acrobat 5.10 or later (for parameter help)
• RS232 to RS485, RJ45 communications lead to connect the PC to a range parameter writes attempted will be clipped to the
1
maximum / minimum values valid for that parameter before
Unidrive SP
being written.
• Note that you must have administrator rights under Windows NT/
2000/XP to install the software. Run the drive Onboard PLC program (if fitted). Any out-of-
2
range parameter writes attempted will cause a ‘UP ovr’ trip.
To install SYPTLite, insert the CD and the auto-run facility should start
up the front-end screen, from which SYPTLite can be selected.
See the SYPTLite help file for more information regarding using 11.48 Drive Onboard PLC program status
SYPTLite, creating ladder diagrams and the available function blocks. RO Bi NC PT
Ú -128 to +127 Ö
The drive Onboard PLC program status parameter indicates to the user
the actual state of the drive Onboard PLC program.

Value Description 10.6 Onboard PLC trips

Onboard PLC program caused a drive trip due to an error The following trips are associated with the Onboard PLC program.
-n condition while running rung n. Note that the rung number is
shown on the display as a negative number. Trip Diagnosis
0 Onboard PLC program is not fitted. Onboard PLC program: Cannot access Onboard
UP ACC
1 Onboard PLC program is fitted but stopped. PLC program file on drive
2 Onboard PLC program is fitted and running. Disable drive - write access is not allowed when the
drive is enabled.
98
Another source is already accessing Onboard PLC
11.49 Drive Onboard PLC programming events program - retry once the other action is complete.
RO Uni NC PT PS UP div0 Onboard PLC program attempted divide by zero
Ú 0 to 65,535 Ö 90 Check program
The drive Onboard PLC programming events parameter holds the Onboard PLC program variables and function
number of times an Onboard PLC program download has taken place UP OFL block calls using more than the allowed RAM
and is 0 on dispatch from the factory. The Unidrive SP is rated for one space (stack overflow)
hundred ladder program downloads. This parameter is not altered when 95 Check program
defaults are loaded.
Onboard PLC program attempted out of range
UP ovr
parameter write
11.50 Drive Onboard PLC program maximum scan time
94 Check program
RO Uni NC PT
Onboard PLC program attempted access to a non-
Ú 0 to 65,535 ms Ö UP PAr
existent parameter
The Onboard PLC program maximum scan time parameter gives the 91 Check program
longest scan time within the last ten scans of the drive Onboard PLC Onboard PLC program attempted write to a read-
UP ro
program. If the scan time is greater than the maximum value which can only parameter
be represented by this parameter, the value will be clipped to the
92 Check program
maximum value.
Onboard PLC program attempted read of a write-
UP So
only parameter
11.51 Drive Onboard PLC program first run
93 Check program
RO Bit NC PT
UP udf Onboard PLC program undefined trip
Ú OFF (0) or On (1) Ö
97 Check program
The Drive Onboard PLC program first run parameter is set for the
UP uSEr Onboard PLC program requested a trip
duration of program scan from the stopped state. This enables the user
to perform any required initialisation every time the program is run. This 96 Check program
parameter is set every time the program is stopped.
10.7 Onboard PLC and the SMARTCARD

The Onboard PLC program in a drive may be transferred from the drive
to a SMARTCARD and vice versa.
• To transfer an Onboard PLC program from the drive to a
SMARTCARD, set Pr xx.00 to 5yyy and reset the drive
• To transfer an Onboard PLC program from the SMARTCARD to a
drive, set Pr xx.00 to 6yyy and reset the drive.
(Where yyy is the data block location, see Table 9-1 SMARTCARD data
blocks on page 101 for restrictions on block numbers).
If an attempt is made to transfer an Onboard PLC program from a drive
to the SMARTCARD when the drive contains no program, the block is
still created on the SMARTCARD but it will contain no data. If this data
block is then transferred to a drive, the destination drive will then have
no Onboard PLC program.
A SMARTCARD has a capacity of 4064 bytes and each block can be up
to 4064 bytes in size. The maximum size of a user program is 4032
bytes so it is guaranteed that any Onboard PLC program downloaded to
a Unidrive SP will fit on to an empty SMARTCARD. A number of small
Onboard PLC programs can be stored on one SMARTCARD.

11 Advanced parameters Table 11-2 Key to parameter table coding
Coding Attribute
This is a quick reference to all parameters in the drive showing units,
RW Read/write: can be written by the user
ranges limits etc, with block diagrams to illustrate their function. Full
descriptions of the parameters can be found in the Unidrive SP RO Read only: can only be read by the user
Advanced User Guide on the supplied CD ROM. Bit 1 bit parameter. ‘On’ or ‘OFF’ on the display
Bi Bipolar parameter
These advanced parameters are listed for reference Uni Unipolar parameter
purposes only. The lists in this chapter do not include Txt Text: the parameter uses text strings instead of numbers.
sufficient information for adjusting these parameters. Filtered: some parameters which can have rapidly changing
Incorrect adjustment can affect the safety of the system, and
WARNING FI values are filtered when displayed on the drive keypad for
damage the drive and or external equipment. Before
easy viewing.
attempting to adjust any of these parameters, refer to the
Unidrive SP Advanced User Guide. Destination: indicates that this parameter can be a
DE
destination parameter.
Table 11-1 Menu descriptions Rating dependant: this parameter is likely to have different
values and ranges with drives of different voltage and
Menu RA current ratings. This parameters is not transferred by
Description
number SMARTCARDs when the rating of the destination drive is
Commonly used basic set up parameters for quick / easy different from the source drive.
0
programming Not cloned: not transferred to or from SMARTCARDs
NC
1 Frequency / speed reference during cloning.
2 Ramps PT Protected: cannot be used as a destination.
3 Frequency slaving, speed feedback and speed control User save: saved in drive EEPROM when the user initiates
US
a parameter save.
4 Torque and current control
Power-down save: automatically saved in drive EEPROM
5 Motor control PS
at power-down.
6 Sequencer and clock
7 Analog I/O
8 Digital I/O
9 Programmable logic, motorised pot and binary sum
10 Status and trips
11 General drive set-up
12 Threshold detectors and variable selectors
13 Position control
14 User PID controller
15, 16, 17 Solutions Module slots
21 Second motor parameters
Operation mode abbreviations:

OL> Open loop
CL> Closed loop (which incorporates closed loop vector and
servo mode)
VT> Closed loop vector mode
SV> Servo
Default abbreviations:
EUR> European default value
USA> USA default value
NOTE
Parameter numbers shown in brackets {...} are the equivalent Menu 0
parameters. Some Menu 0 parameters appear twice since their function
depends on the operating mode.
The Range - CL column applies to both Closed-loop Vector and Closed-
loop Servo. For some parameters, this column applies only to one of
these modes; this is indicated accordingly in the Default columns.
In some cases, the function or range of a parameter is affected by the
setting of another parameter; the information in the lists relates to the
default condition of such parameters.

Parameter ranges and variable maximums:

The two values provided define the minimum and maximum values for
the given parameter. In some cases the parameter range is variable and
dependant on either:
• other parameters
• the drive rating
• drive mode
• or a combination of these
The values given in Table 11-3 are the variable maximums used in the
drive.
Table 11-3 Definition of parameter ranges & variable maximums
Maximum Definition
SPEED_FREQ_MAX Maximum speed (closed-loop mode) reference or frequency (open-loop mode) reference
[Open-loop 3000.0Hz, If Pr 1.08 = 0: SPEED_FREQ_MAX = Pr 1.06
Closed-loop vector and Servo If Pr 1.08 = 1: SPEED_FREQ_MAX is Pr 1.06 or – Pr 1.07 whichever is the largest
40000.0rpm] (If the second motor map is selected Pr 21.01 is used instead of Pr 1.06 and Pr 21.02 instead of Pr 1.07)
Maximum applied to speed reference limits
A maximum limit may be applied to the speed reference to prevent the nominal encoder frequency from
exceeding 410kHz. The maximum is defined by
SPEED_LIMIT_MAX (in rpm) = 410kHz x 60 / ELPR = 2.46 x 107 / ELPR subject to an absolute maximum of
40,000 rpm.
ELPR is equivalent encoder lines per revolution and is the number of lines that would be produced by a
SPEED_LIMIT_MAX quadrature encoder.
[40000.0rpm] Quadrature encoder ELPR = number of lines per revolution
F and D encoder ELPR = number of lines per revolution / 2
Resolver ELPR = resolution / 4
SINCOS encoder ELPR = number of sine waves per revolution
Serial comms encoder ELPR = resolution / 4
This maximum is defined by the device selected with the speed feedback selector (Pr 3.26) and the ELPR set
for the position feedback device.
Maximum speed
SPEED_MAX This maximum is used for some speed related parameters in menu 3. To allow headroom for overshoot etc.
[40000.0rpm] the maximum speed is twice the maximum speed reference.
SPEED_MAX = 2 x SPEED_FREQ_MAX
Maximum motor rated current
RATED_CURRENT_MAX ≤ 1.36 x Maximum Heavy Duty current rating (Pr 11.32)
RATED_CURRENT_MAX
The rated current can be increased above the rated drive current up to a level not exceeding 1.36 x Maximum
[9999.99A]
Heavy Duty current rating (Pr 11.32). The actual level varies from one drive size to another, please refer to
Table 11-4.
Maximum drive current
DRIVE_CURRENT_MAX
The maximum drive current is the current at the over current trip level and is given by:
[9999.99A]
DRIVE_CURRENT_MAX = Maximum Heavy Duty current rating (Pr 11.32) / 0.45

Maximum Definition
Maximum current limit settings for motor map 1
This maximum current limit setting is the maximum applied to the current limit parameters in motor map 1.
Open Loop
Maximum
current limit
Motor rated current
] 2
+ PF2 - 1 ] x 100%
PF
Where:
The Maximum current is either (1.5 x Heavy Duty rating) when the rated current set in Pr 5.07 is less than or
equal to the maximum Heavy Duty current rating given by Pr 11.32, otherwise it is (1.1 x Normal Duty rating).
Closed Loop Vector
MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX
Maximum
current limit
Motor rated current
] 2
+ cos(ϕ1)2 - 1 ] x 100%
[1000.0%] cos(ϕ1)
Where:
The Maximum current is either (1.75 x Heavy Duty rating) when the rated current set in Pr 5.07 is less than or
equal to the maximum Heavy Duty current rating given by Pr 11.32, otherwise it is (1.1 x Normal Duty rating).
ϕ1 = cos-1(PF) - ϕ2. This is measured by the drive during an autotune. See Menu 4 in the Unidrive SP
Advanced User Guide for more information regarding ϕ2.
Servo
Maximum
current limit
= [ Maximum current
Motor rated current ] x 100%
Where:
Maximum current is drive rated current (Pr 11.32) x 1.75
Maximum current limit settings for motor map 2
MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX This maximum current limit setting is the maximum applied to the current limit parameters in motor map 2.
[1000.0%] The formulae for MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX are the same for MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX
except that Pr 5.07 is replaced with Pr 21.07 and Pr 5.10 is replaced with Pr 21.10.
Maximum torque producing current
TORQUE_PROD_CURRENT_MAX This is used as a maximum for torque and torque producing current parameters. It is
[1000.0%] MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX or MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX depending on which motor map is
currently active.
Current parameter limit selected by the user
The user can select a maximum for Pr 4.08 (torque reference) and Pr 4.20 (percentage load) to give suitable
USER_CURRENT_MAX
scaling for analog I/O with Pr 4.24. This maximum is subject to a limit of MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX.
[1000.0%]
or MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX depending on which motor map is currently active.
USER_CURRENT_MAX = Pr 4.24
Maximum output voltage set-point
AC_VOLTAGE_SET_MAX Defines the maximum motor voltage that can be selected.
[690V] 200V drives: 240V, 400V drives: 480V
575V drives: 575V, 690V drives: 690V
Maximum AC output voltage
This maximum has been chosen to allow for maximum AC voltage that can be produced by the drive including
AC_VOLTAGE_MAX quasi-square wave operation as follows:
[930V] AC_VOLTAGE_MAX = 0.78 x DC_VOLTAGE_MAX
Maximum DC voltage set-point
DC_VOLTAGE_SET_MAX
200V rating drive: 0 to 400V, 400V rating drive: 0 to 800V
[1150V]
575V rating drive: 0 to 950V, 690V rating drive: 0 to 1150V

Maximum Definition
Maximum DC bus voltage
DC_VOLTAGE_MAX The maximum measurable DC bus voltage.
[1190V] 200V drives: 415V, 400V drives: 830V
Maximum power in kW
POWER_MAX The maximum power has been chosen to allow for the maximum power that can be output by the drive with
[9999.99kW] maximum AC output voltage, maximum controlled current and unity power factor. Therefore
POWER_MAX = √3 x AC_VOLTAGE_MAX x RATED_CURRENT_MAX x 1.75
The values given in square brackets indicate the absolute maximum value allowed for the variable maximum.
Table 11-4 Maximum motor rated current
Maximum Heavy Maximum

Model Duty current Normal Duty
rating (Pr 11.32) current rating
SP1201 4.3 5.2
SP1202 5.8 6.8
SP1203 7.5 9.6
SP1204 10.6 11
SP2201 12.6 15.5
SP2202 17 22
SP2203 25 28
SP3201 31 42
SP3202 42 54
SP1401 2.1 2.8
SP1402 3 3.8
SP1403 4.2 5.0
SP1404 5.8 6.9
SP1405 7.6 8.8
SP1406 9.5 11
SP2401 13 15.3
SP2402 16.5 21
SP2403 25 29
SP3401 32 35
SP3402 40 43
SP3403 46 56
SP3501 4.0 5.4
SP3502 5.4 6.1
SP3503 6.1 8.4
SP3504 9.5 11
SP3505 12 16
SP3506 18 22
SP3507 22 27

11.1 Menu 1: Frequency / speed reference

LOCAL/REMOTE
Analog reference
Analog input 1
Menu 8
Analog
reference 1
1.36
Analog reference 2
Menu 7 1.41 select
1.37
Analog
Analog input 2 reference 2
1.42 Preset reference

select
Preset reference
Preset reference 1.43 Keypad reference
1.15 select
selector*
Preset reference select bits 1 ~ 3
1.44 Precision reference

1.47 1.46 select
1.45
Reference
selector* 1.14
Reference selected
indicator
1.49
1.21 ~ 1.28
Preset +
references
1 to 8
+
Scan timer
1.38 1.01
1.20
Preset Reference
reference Pr 1.50 set to percentage Level of
selected 1.50
greater than 1 trim reference
1.16 indicator selected
Preset 1.04
reference
scan time Reference
offset
1.48 Pr 1.49 Pr 1.50 Reference being used
1 1 Analog reference 1 1.09
Preset reference 1 >1 Preset reference defined by Pr 1.50
Scan-timer reset 2 1 Analog reference 2 Reference
2 >1 Preset reference defined by Pr 1.50 offset mode
Keypad reference Power-up keypad 3 x Preset reference defined by Pr 1.50 select
1.51 control mode 4 x Keypad reference
reference 5 x Preceision reference
1.17
Keypad
Reference
Precision reference
Precision-reference
update disable Key
1.20
terminals 0.XX
parameter
Precision
reference
1.18 Memory terminals parameter
1.19
Precision The parameters are all shown in their default settings
reference trim
*For more information, refer to section 11.21.1 Reference modes on page 178.

JOG RUN FORWARD RUN REVERSE
Menu 8
Menu 6
Sequencer
Sequencer (Menu 6)
Jog selected 1.13 Reference in skip
indicator freq./speed band
indicator
Menu 13
Bipolar Position control Reference
reference 1.10 1.35
1.11 enabled
select indicator
Pre-ramp
reference
Feed-forward Pre-filter
selected 1.06 1.02 reference 1.03
indicator Maximum
Reverse freq./speed
selected 1.12 1.40 "clamp"
indicator
1.07
Menu 2
Minimum
Negative freq./speed
minimum "clamp"
speed (Maximum
select reverse
1.08 freq./speed)
[1.06]
[1.07]
[1.07]
[1.06]
x(-1)
1.29 1.31 1.33

1.39 [1.06]
Skip freq./ Skip freq./ Skip freq./
speed 1 speed 2 speed 3
Velocity
1.05 feed-forward
reference [1.06] 1.30 1.32 1.34
Jog
Skip freq. 1 Skip freq. 2 Skip freq. 3
reference
speed band speed band speed band
1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3
[1.06]
[1.07]

Parameter Type
OL CL OL VT SV
Frequency / speed reference
1.01 ±SPEED_FREQ_MAX Hz/rpm RO Bi NC PT
selected
1.02 Pre-skip filter reference ±SPEED_FREQ_MAX Hz/rpm RO Bi NC PT
1.03 Pre-ramp reference ±SPEED_FREQ_MAX Hz/rpm RO Bi NC PT
1.04 Reference offset ±3,000.0Hz ±40,000.0 rpm 0.0 RW Bi US
1.05 Jog reference {0.23} 0 to 400.0 Hz 0 to 4,000.0 rpm 0.0 RW Uni US
±SPEED_FREQ_MAX EUR> 50.0 EUR> 1,500.0
1.06 Maximum reference clamp {0.02} 0 to 3,000.0 Hz 3,000.0 RW Uni US
Hz/rpm USA> 60.0 USA> 1,800.0
±SPEED_FREQ_MAX
1.07 Minimum reference clamp {0.01} ±3,000.0 Hz 0.0 RW Bi PT US
Hz/rpm
Negative minimum reference
1.08 OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
clamp enable
1.09 Reference offset select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
1.10 Bipolar reference enable {0.22} OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
1.11 Reference enabled indicator OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
1.12 Reverse selected indicator OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
1.13 Jog selected indicator OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
A1.A2 (0), A1.Pr (1), A2.Pr (2), Pr (3), Pad (4),
1.14 Reference selector {0.05} A1.A2 (0) RW Txt US
Prc (5)
1.15 Preset reference selector 0 to 9 0 RW Uni US
Preset reference selector
1.16 0 to 400.0s 10.0 RW Uni US
timer
Keypad control mode
1.17 ±SPEED_FREQ_MAX Hz/rpm 0.0 RO Bi NC PT PS
reference
1.18 Precision reference coarse ±SPEED_FREQ_MAX Hz/rpm 0.0 RW Bi US
1.19 Precision reference fine 0.000 to 0.099 Hz 0.000 to 0.099 rpm 0.000 RW Uni US
Precision reference update
1.20 OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
disable
1.21 Preset reference 1 {0.24} ±SPEED_FREQ_MAX Hz/rpm 0.0 RW Bi US
1.25 Preset reference 5 ±SPEED_FREQ_MAX Hz/rpm 0.0 RW Bi US
1.29 Skip reference 1 0.0 to 3,000.0 Hz 0 to 40,000 rpm 0.0 0 RW Uni US
1.30 Skip reference band 1 0.0 to 25.0 Hz 0 to 250 rpm 0.5 5 RW Uni US
1.32 Skip reference band 2 0.0 to 25.0 Hz 0 to 250 rpm 0.5 5 RW Uni US
1.34 Skip reference band 3 0.0 to 25.0Hz 0 to 250 rpm 0.5 5 RW Uni US
1.35 Reference in rejection zone OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
1.36 Analog reference 1 ±SPEED_FREQ_MAX Hz/rpm RO Bi NC
1.37 Analog reference 2 ±SPEED_FREQ_MAX Hz/rpm RO Bi NC
1.38 Percentage trim ±100.00% 0.00 RW Bi NC
1.39 Velocity feed-forward ±3,000.0 Hz ±40,000.0 rpm RO Bi NC PT
1.40 Velocity feed-forward select OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
1.41 Analog reference 2 select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
1.42 Preset reference select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
1.43 Keypad reference select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
1.44 Precision reference select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
1.45 Preset reference 1 select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
1.48 Reference timer reset flag OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
1.49 Reference selected indicator 1 to 5 RO Uni NC PT
Preset reference selected
1.50 1 to 8 RO Uni NC PT
indicator
Power-up keyboard control
1.51 rESEt (0), LASt (1), PrS1 (2) rESEt (0) RW Txt US
mode reference
RW Read / Write RO Read only Uni Unipolar Bi Bi-polar Bit Bit parameter Txt Text string
FI Filtered DE Destination NC Not cloned RA Rating dependent PT Protected US User save PS Power down save


11.2 Menu 2: Ramps

Acceleration rate select bits

Key
2.34 2.33 2.32

2.32 Input Read-write (RW)
terminals 0.XX
parameter
0 0 0 Output 0.XX Read-only (RO)

terminals parameter
0 0 1
0 1 0
The parameters are all shown at their default settings
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
Acceleration
1 1 0 rate selector
1 1 1
2.10
Acceleration rates 1 ~ 8
2.11 Acceleration rate 1
Preset reference 1.50

selected indicator
Jog acceleration
1 2.19
rate
2
3
4 Jog selected
1.13
indicator
5
6
7 Reverse Forward
8 accel. rate accel. rate
N N
t t
Acceleration
Ramp control
2.03 Ramp hold
Pre-ramp speed Ramp mode

reference 1.03 2.04
select*
*For more information, refer to section 11.21.2 Braking Modes on page 179.
**For more information, refer to section 11.21.3 S ramps on page 179.

Deceleration rate select bits
2.37 2.36 2.35
Deceleration
rate selector
2.20
Preset reference
1.50
selected indicator
2.29 Jog deceleration

rate
1.13 Jog selected

indicator
Forward Reverse
Decel. rate Decel. rate
N N
Current control
t t Menu 4
(Open-loop only) Ramp enable
2.02 (Closed- loop only)
Deceleration
_ Ramps always enabled Post-ramp
Ramp control in Open-loop reference
+
2.06 S-Ramp enable**
2.01
S-Ramp acceleration
2.07
limit
2.08 Standard ramp voltage*
d/dt 2.38
Inertia compensation
torque
(Closed-loop only)

Parameter Type
OL CL OL VT SV
2.01 Post ramp reference ±SPEED_FREQ_MAX Hz/rpm RO Bi PT
2.02 Ramp enable {0.16} OFF (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
2.03 Ramp hold OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
FASt (0)
FASt (0)
2.04 Ramp mode select {0.15} Std (1) Std (1) RW Txt US
Std (1)
Std.hV (2)
2.06 S ramp enable OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
0.0 to 300.0 0.000 to 100.000
2.07 S ramp acceleration limit 3.1 1.500 0.030 RW Uni US
s2/100Hz s2/1000rpm
200V drive: 375
400V drive: EUR> 750
2.08 Standard ramp voltage 0 to DC_VOLTAGE_SET_MAX V USA> 775 RW Uni RA US
575V drive: 895
690V drive: 1075
2.10 Acceleration rate selector 0 to 9 0 RW Uni US
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
2.11 Acceleration rate 1 {0.03} 5.0 2.000 0.200 RW Uni US
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
2.12 Acceleration rate 2 5.0 2.000 0.200 RW Uni US
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
2.19 Jog acceleration rate 0.2 0.000 RW Uni US
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
2.20 Deceleration rate selector 0 to 9 0 RW Uni US
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
2.21 Deceleration rate 1 {0.04} 10.0 2.000 0.200 RW Uni US
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
2.22 Deceleration rate 2 10.0 2.000 0.200 RW Uni US
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
2.29 Jog deceleration rate 0.2 0.000 RW Uni US
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
2.32 Acceleration select bit 0 OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
2.35 Deceleration select bit 0 OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
2.38 Inertia compensation torque ± 1,000.0 % RO Bi NC PT

11.3 Menu 3: Frequency slaving, speed feedback and speed control

Figure 11-3 Menu 3 Open-loop logic diagram
Drive encoder
reference
destination Any
unprotected
3.46 variable
Drive encoder Drive encoder parameter
speed reference Drive encoder
reference scaling ??.??
Maximum drive
3.27 3.43 encoder 3.45 3.44
15 way sub-D reference
connector ??.??
Frequency
slaving enable
3.13
Drive encoder
A 1 3.34 lines per
Final speed
A 2 revolution Slaving ratio
3.14 demand
Encoder Drive encoder 1 numerator
B 3 3.38
type 2048
B 4 Slaving ratio 3.01
3.15
Termination denominator
3.39
resistors
Slip
compensation
Menu 5 Motor
Post ramp frequency
reference
+
5.01
+
Menu 2 2.01
15 way sub-D
Select x2048 connector
output
3.17
Enable
3.16 frequency 7 F (A)
slaving 8 F (A)
output 9 D (B)
x 2048 10 D (B)
Select
3.18 F and D
output
Zero speed At zero speed Bipolar reference

threshold indicator select
3.05 + 1.10
10.03
_
Minimum
speed
1.07 +0.5Hz + 10.04
_
At or below min.
speed indicator
+
Overspeed trip
1.06 +20% _ (O.SPd)
Max.
frequency
At speed
lower limit Below at-speed
window indicator
3.06 + Key
Pre ramp
10.05
reference _ At speed
_ indicator Input
0.XX Read-write (RW)
1.03 terminals parameter
+
NOR 10.06
terminals parameter
3.09
+
10.07
Absolute at-speed 3.07
_
Above at-speed The parameters are all shown at their default settings
detect mode window indicator
At speed
upper limit

Figure 11-4 Menu 3 Closed loop logic diagram
Hard speed
reference 3.22
Hard speed
reference
selector
3.23
Reference
enabled
indicator
1.11
Post-ramp Final speed
reference + reference
2.01
+ 3.01
15 way sub-D
connector Drive encoder
ENCODER INTERFACE speed feedback
Drive encoder
3.38 type 3.27
Speed feedback
Drive encoder lines selector
A 3.34 per revolution
1 3.26
A Drive encoder
2 3.39 termination disable
B Feedback from the option
3 Drive encoder
B modules set-up in Menus 15,
4 3.36 supply voltage 16 and 17
Z Encoder phase
5
Z 3.25 angle*
6 Speed feedback
Encoder U from option module 15.03 Speed feedback
7
U DRIVE ENCODER POSITION in slot 1
8
V 9 Position feedback 3.02
3.50 link
V 10 Speed feedback
W from option module 16.03
11 Drive encoder
W 3.28 in slot 2
12 revolution counter
Speed feedback
Drive encoder from option module 17.03
3.29 position in slot 3
Drive encoder
3.30 fine position
Maximum drive Drive encoder

3.43 encoder reference
destination 3.46
reference (rpm)
Any unprotected
variable parameter
Drive encoder
reference scaling ??.??
Drive
encoder 3.45 3.44
reference
??.??

Speed loop gains Speed

Speed controller
error (Kp1) 3.10 output
+ 3.03
+ (Ki1) 3.11 3.04 Menu 4
_ _
(Kp2) 3.13
(Ki2) 3.14
Speed controller
differential
feedback gains
(Kd1) 3.12
Speed controller
3.16
gain select
(Kd2) 3.15
Zero speed At zero speed Bipolar reference

threshold indicator select
3.05 + 1.10
10.03
_
At or below min.
Minimum speed indicator
speed
1.07 +5min-1 + 10.04
_
+
Max reference clamp Overspeed trip
1.06 +20%
_ (O.SPd)
Overspeed threshold
3.08
3.08 >0
Below at-speed
At speed window indicator
Pre ramp lower limit 3.06 +
10.05
reference _ At speed
_ indicator
1.03
+
NOR 10.06
+
3.09 10.07
3.07
_ Above at-speed
Absolute at-speed
detect mode window indicator
At speed
upper limit Key

terminals 0.XX
parameter

terminals parameter

Parameter Type
OL CL OL VT SV
OL> Frequency slaving demand ±1,000.0 Hz RO Bi FI NC PT
3.01
CL> Final speed reference ±SPEED_MAX rpm RO Bi FI NC PT
3.02 Speed feedback {0.10} ±SPEED_MAX rpm RO Bi FI NC PT
3.03 Speed error ±SPEED_MAX rpm RO Bi FI NC PT
±Torque_prod_
3.04 Speed controller output RO Bi FI NC PT
current_max %
3.05 Zero speed threshold 0.0 to 20.0 Hz 0 to 200 rpm 1.0 5 RW Uni US
3.06 At speed lower limit 0.0 to 3,000.0 Hz 0 to 40,000 rpm 1.0 5 RW Uni US
3.07 At speed upper limit 0.0 to 3,000.0 Hz 0 to 40,000 rpm 1.0 5 RW Uni US
3.08 Overspeed threshold {0.26} 0 to 40,000 rpm 0 RW Uni US
3.09 Absolute ‘at speed’ detect OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
0.0000 to 6.5535
3.10 Speed controller proportional gain (Kp1) {0.07} 0.0100 RW Uni US
1/rad s-1
3.11 Speed controller integral gain (Ki1) {0.08} 0.00 to 655.35 s/rad s-1 1.00 RW Uni US
Speed controller differential feedback gain 0.00000 to 0.65535
3.12 {0.09} 0.00000 RW Uni US
(Kd1) s-1/rad s-1
OL> Enable frequency slaving OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
3.13 CL> Speed controller proportional gain 0.0000 to 6.5535
0.0100 RW Uni US
(Kp2) 1/rad s-1
OL> Slaving ratio numerator 0.000 to 1.000 1.000 RW Uni US
3.14
CL> Speed controller integral gain (Ki2) 0.00 to 655.35 1/rad 1.00 RW Uni US
OL> Slaving ratio denominator 0.001 to 1.000 1.000 RW Uni US
3.15 CL> Speed controller differential feedback
0.00000 to 0.65535 s 0.00000 RW Uni US
gain (Kd2)
OL> Enable frequency slaving output OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
3.16
CL> Speed controller gain select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
OL> Select x2048 output OFF (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
3.17
CL> Speed controller set-up method 0 to 3 0 RW Uni US
OL> Select F and D frequency slaving
OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
output
3.18
0.00010 to 90.00000
CL> Motor and load inertia 0.0000 RW Uni US
kg m2
3.19 Compliance angle 0.0 to 359.9 ° 4.0 RW Uni US
3.20 Bandwidth 0 to 255 Hz 10 RW Uni US
3.21 Damping factor 0.0 to 10.0 1.0 RW Uni US
±SPEED_FREQ_
3.22 Hard speed reference 0.0 RW Bi US
MAX rpm
3.23 Hard speed reference selector OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
3.24 Closed-loop vector mode 0 to 3 0 RW Uni US
3.25 Encoder phase angle {0.43} SV> 0.0 to 359.9 ° 0.0 RW Uni US
drv (0), SLot1 (1),
3.26 Speed feedback selector drv (0) RW Txt US
SLot2 (2), SLot3 (3)
3.27 Drive encoder speed feedback ±40,000.0 rpm RO Bi FI NC PT
3.28 Drive encoder revolution counter 0 to 65,535 revolutions RO Uni FI NC PT
3.29 Drive encoder position {0.11} 0 to 65,535 1/216ths of a revolution RO Uni FI NC PT
3.30 Drive encoder fine position 0 to 65,535 1/232nds of a revolution RO Uni FI NC PT
Drive encoder marker position reset
disable
3.32 Drive encoder marker flag OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
3.33 Drive encoder turn bits 0 to 16 bits 16 RW Uni US
3.34 Drive encoder lines per revolution {0.27} 0 to 50,000 1024 4096 RW Uni US
Drive encoder single turn comms
3.35 0 to 32 bits 0 RW Uni US
resolution
3.36 Drive encoder supply voltage 5V (0), 8V (1), 15V (2) 5V (0) RW Txt US
100 (0), 200 (1), 300 (2), 400 (3), 500 (4),
3.37 Drive encoder comms baud rate 300 (2) RW Txt US
1000 (5), 1500 (6), 2000 (7) kbaud
Ab (0), Fd (1), Fr (2), Ab.SErvo (3),
Fd.SErvo (4), Fr.SErvo (5), SC (6), Ab.SErvo
3.38 Drive encoder type Ab (0) RW Txt US
SC.Hiper (7), EndAt (8), SC.EndAt (9), (3)
SSi (10), SC.SSI (11)
3.39 Drive encoder termination selection 0 to 2 1 RW Uni US
Bit 0 (LSB) = Wire break detect
Bit 1 = Phase error detect
3.40 Drive encoder error detection level 0 1 RW Uni US
Bit 2 (MSB) = SSI power supply bit monitor
Value is binary sum
Drive encoder auto-configuration / SSI
binary format select

Parameter Type
OL CL OL VT SV
3.42 Drive encoder filter 0 (0), 1 (1), 2 (2), 4 (3), 8 (4), 16 (5) ms 0 RW Txt US
3.43 Maximum drive encoder reference 0 to 40,000 rpm 1500 3000 RW Uni US
3.44 Drive encoder reference scaling 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Uni US
3.45 Drive encoder reference ±100.0% RO Bi FI PT
3.46 Drive encoder reference destination Pr 0.00 to 21.50 Pr 0.00 RW Uni DE PT US
3.47 Re-initialise position feedback OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
3.48 Position feedback initialised OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
Full motor object electronic nameplate
transfer
3.50 Position feedback lock OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit
*Encoder phase angle (servo mode only)

The encoder phase angle in Pr 3.25 and Pr 21.20 is cloned
when using the SMARTCARD with drive software version
V01.05.00 onwards. This is useful when the SMARTCARD is
WARNING
used to backup the parameter set of a drive but caution
should be used if the SMARTCARD is used to transfer
parameter sets between drives.
Unless the encoder phase angle of the servo motor
connected to the destination drive is known to be the same
as the servo motor connected to the source drive, an
autotune should be performed or the encoder phase angle
should be entered manually into Pr 3.25 (or Pr 21.20).
If the encoder phase angle is incorrect the drive may lose
control of the motor resulting in an O.SPd or Enc10 trip when
the drive is enabled.

11.4 Menu 4: Torque and current control

Figure 11-5 Menu 4 Open loop logic diagram
Menu 2 ramp Torque mode

Pre ramp controller selector*
reference
4.11 Post ramp Motor
+
1.03
2.01 reference frequency
+ 2.01 Motor map 5.01
10.09
Current
limit
active Current loop
4.13 P gain
4.14 I gain
Active
current Current
magnitude
_
4.02
4.01
4.20
+
4.02 - Active
Motor Motor current
frequency rated (Amp)
frequency
4.20 - Percentage 4.17 Magnetising
5.01 5.06
torque current
Percentage
Torque current current
demand demand
Torque + Torque to +
4.08 4.03 current 4.04
reference*
conversion _
+
Torque
reference
4.10
offset
enable
4.09
Torque reference
offset
Current limits Over-riding

Drive rated current limit Motor thermal Motor protection Low speed
4.05 Motoring
continuous 11.32 time constant mode protection mode
current 4.18
Regenerating 4.15 4.16 4.25
Motor rated
5.07
current Symmetrical
Overload detection
10.08 10.09 10.39 4.19 10.17
At 100% Current limit Braking energy Motor Motor current

load active overload overload overload alarm
indicator indicator indicator accumulator indicator
Key

terminals 0.XX
parameter

terminals parameter
For more information, refer to section 11.21.4 Torque modes on page 180.

Figure 11-6 Menu 4 Closed-loop vector logic diagram
Speed Motor
Current Current
feedback Motor rated
demand demand
3.02 rated power Speed
filter 1 filter 2
current factor controller
5.07 5.10 gain 4.12 4.23
Torque mode select
Speed loop 4.11
_ output selector* 3.16
Final +
speed 3.01 3.04 Torque Current controller
demand demand
Current loop
+ 4.13 P gain
4.03 4.04
Current loop
_ 4.14 I gain
+ Current Filter
demand
Speed +
over-ride
level
Coiler/uncoiler
speed
Zero over-ride Active
speed 3.05 level current Current
threshold (Amp) magnitude
Torque +
reference 4.08
4.02 4.01
+
Torque
reference
4.10
offset
enable
4.09 Magnetising
4.17
Torque reference current
offset User current max scaling 4.24
Current limits Over-riding Motor thermal Motor protection Low speed

Drive rated current limit time constant mode protection mode
4.05 Motoring
continuous 11.32
current 4.18 4.15 4.16 4.25
Regenerating
Motor rated
5.07
current Symmetrical
Overload detection
Key
Input Read-write (RW) 10.08 10.09 10.39 4.19 10.17

terminals 0.XX
parameter
Output 0.XX Read-only (RO) load active overload overload overload alarm
terminals parameter indicator indicator indicator accumulator indicator
*For more information, refer to section 11.21.4 Torque modes on page 180.

Figure 11-7 Menu 4 Servo logic diagram
Current Current
demand demand
filter 1 filter 2
Speed
feedback 4.12 4.23
3.02
Speed controller
Torque mode gain select
Speed loop 4.11 3.16
_ output selector
Final + Torque Current
speed 3.01 3.04 Current controller
demand demand
demand Current loop
+ 4.13 P gain
4.03 4.04
Current loop
_ 4.14 I gain
+ Filter
Speed +
over-ride
level
Coiler/uncoiler
speed
Zero over-ride
speed 3.05 level
threshold User current
Percentage max scaling Motor active
torque current
Torque + current 4.20 4.24 4.02
reference* 4.08
+
Torque
reference
4.10
offset
enable
4.09
Torque reference
offset
Current limits Over-riding Motor thermal Motor protection Low speed

Drive rated current limit time constant mode protection mode
4.05 Motoring
continuous 11.32
current 4.18 4.15 4.16 4.25
Regenerating
Motor rated
5.07
current Symmetrical
Overload detection
Key
Input Read-write (RW) 10.08 10.09 10.39 4.19 10.17

terminals 0.XX
parameter
Output 0.XX Read-only (RO) load active overload overload overload alarm
terminals parameter indicator indicator indicator accumulator indicator
*For more information, refer to section 11.21.4 Torque modes on page 180.

Parameter Type
OL CL OL VT SV
4.01 Current magnitude {0.12} 0 to DRIVE_CURRENT_MAX A RO Uni FI NC PT
4.02 Active current {0.13} ±DRIVE_CURRENT_MAX A RO Bi FI NC PT
4.03 Torque demand ±TORQUE_PROD_CURRENT_MAX % RO Bi FI NC PT
4.04 Current demand ±TORQUE_PROD_CURRENT_MAX % RO Bi FI NC PT
4.05 Motoring current limit 0 to MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX % 165.0 175.0 RW Uni RA US
4.06 Regen current limit 0 to MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX % 165.0 175.0 RW Uni RA US
4.07 Symmetrical current limit {0.06} 0 to MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX % 165.0 175.0 RW Uni RA US
4.08 Torque reference ±USER_CURRENT_MAX % 0.00 RW Bi US
4.09 Torque offset ±USER_CURRENT_MAX % 0.0 RW Bi US
4.10 Torque offset select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
4.11 Torque mode selector {0.14} 0 to 1 0 to 4 0 RW Uni US
4.12 Current demand filter 1 {0.17} 0.0 to 25.0 ms 0.0 RW Uni US
200V drive: 75
400V drive: 150
4.13 Current controller Kp gain {0.38} 0 to 30,000 20 RW Uni US
575V drive: 180
690V drive: 215
200V drive: 1000
400V drive: 2000
4.14 Current controller Ki gain {0.39} 0 to 30,000 40 RW Uni US
575V drive: 2400
690V drive: 3000
4.15 Thermal time constant {0.45} 0.0 to 400.0 89.0 89.0 20.0 RW Uni US
4.16 Thermal protection mode 0 to 1 0 RW Bit US
4.17 Reactive current ±DRIVE_CURRENT_MAX A RO Bi FI NC PT
4.18 Overriding current limit ±TORQUE_PROD_CURRENT_MAX % RO Uni NC
4.19 Overload accumulator 0 to 100.0 % RO Uni NC PT
4.20 Percentage load ±USER_CURRENT_MAX % RO Bi FI NC PT
4.22 Inertia compensation enable OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
4.23 Current demand filter 2 0.0 to 25.0 ms 0.0 RW Uni US
User current maximum
4.24 0.0 to TORQUE_PROD_CURRENT_MAX % 165.0 175.0 RW Uni US
scaling
Low speed thermal protection
mode
±USER_CURRENT_
4.26 Percentage torque RO Bi FI NC PT
MAX %

11.5 Menu 5: Motor control

Figure 11-8 Menu 5 Open-loop logic diagram
L1 L2 L3
Voltage
5.14 mode
Autotune
5.12 DC Bus
voltage
Dynamic V/f
5.13 select
Frequency 5.05
slaving Motormap 5.15 Voltage boost
Slave frequency enable
Motor rated
demand 5.06 Stator
3.13 frequency 5.17
resistance
Motor rated Motor
3.01 5.07 current 5.23 Voltage offset voltage
Motor rated Transient
5.08 full load RPM 5.24
inductance 5.02 Volt
Motor rated
5.09 voltage
Post ramp Motor rated
reference 5.10 power factor
+ Motor number 5.01 Hertz
2.01 5.11 of poles Motor
frequency
PWM
+ 5.18 switching
Slip frequency
compensation 5.04 High stability
enable Estimated 5.19 space vector
Total motor motor speed modulation
5.27 5.03 √3xVxI
power (kW)
Quasi square
5.20
wave enable
Disable auto
switching
5.35 frequency
Slip change
compensation Voltage
5.31 controller
Motor gain
Motor active current
current magnitude
4.02
4.01
4.20
Percentage

Documentação Completa - Payper

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Documentação Completa - Payper

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

TIMAC AGRO

INST. TOP LOAD PM

Queira receber as nossas mais sinceras felicitações pela aquisição de um dos

A eficácia comprovada desta máquina resulta de mais de trinta anos dedicados ao

Todos os dispositivos de segurança estão integrados na máquina, fazendo parte da

Preste a máxima atenção às instruções disponibilizadas para uma correta instalação

A PAYPER, S.A., na sua qualidade de fabricante, reserva-se o direito de modificar

Subscrevemo-nos reiterando o nosso agradecimento.

INST. Nº: 4510.00/15

SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.

Também é possível contactar os nossos departamentos através de:

(*) +34 973 216 040 Telefone central.

Tipo: Modelo: Nº Serie: Año de fabricación:

PALETIZADOR TOP LOAD PM 608045100001 2015

LLEIDA, a 20 de Agosto de 2015.

Angel Rossell Roig

Tipo: Nº de pedido: Según plano de implantación Nº: Año de fabricación:

Angel Rossell Roig

TIMAC AGRO CANDEIAS 4510.00/15

• Não aplicação no uso previsto da instalação.

Qualquer incumprimento das indicações descritas neste manual, da legislação de segurança e

Unicamente o pessoal autorizado e qualificado deve trabalhar na instalação.

1.2. Limitações das prestações gerais

As prestações da máquina, o campo de aplicação, a descrição técnica, etc., apresentados neste

Em qualquer caso prevalecerão os dados, os valores e as indicações que existam no plano da

Transportador das paletes vazias com um motorredutor.

A sua função é absorver a acumulação de sacos produzida durante o funcionamento normal do

Elemento de transporte durante o processo de alisamento de sacos.

Elemento de transporte durante o processo de rotação dos sacos.

Grupo principal do sistema de rotação do saco.

Elemento transportador de sacos de chapa e acionado com motorredutor, para a preparação da

Estrutura de suporte para os tapetes superiores.

Plataforma para facilitar o acesso do operador para tarefas de manutenção.

Impulsor para o posicionamento e formação de cada camada de sacos.

Comportas para a entrega de camada de sacos sobre a palete.

Corpo de motorização do sistema de elevação da palete.

Transportador das paletes cheias com um motorredutor.

Mecanismo que coloca folhas de cartão sobre a palete vazia.

2.1. Considerações gerais

2.2. Descarga e armazenagem

As operações de descarga e armazenagem deverão ser realizadas por pessoal altamente

Manusear a máquina com cuidado durante as operações. Não provocar impactos.

Normalmente a máquina é acondicionada numa embalagem de plástico não resistente a

A elevação e o transporte da máquina serão realizados seguindo o indicado na Ilustración 1.

2.4. Localização e montagem

Na localização e montagem da máquina serão tidas em conta as indicações do ponto 2.2.

Certificar-se de que o piso está nivelado antes de pousar completamente a máquina. A

Os dados do plano de implementação em cada projecto específico são os que prevalecerão no

2.5.1. Ligação eléctrica

Ligação à terra e protecções:

Recomenda-se a instalação de um filtro de linha para eliminar as impurezas, o óleo e a água

2.6. Plano de Instalação

3.2. Indicações nas instruções de funcionamento a respeitar

• A base para umas condições de segurança e funcionamento da máquina correctas é um

As indicações de segurança do manual de instruções estão identificadas com os seguintes

O não cumprimento deste aviso provoca feridas graves, incluindo a

O não cumprimento deste aviso pode provocar feridas graves, incluindo a

O sinal ATENÇÃO alerta sobre medidas especiais de precaução que têm

3.4. Símbolos de segurança utilizados na máquina

As indicações de segurança na máquina estão identificadas com os seguintes símbolos:

Este sinal indica perigo de queimaduras pela existência de superfícies a

Este sinal indica perigo de prendimento ou de corte com

Este sinal indica perigo por passagem de corrente